2020–2021
Catalog
II FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
STATEMENT ON NONDISCRIMINATION
Franklin & Marshall College is committed to having an inclusive campus community where all
members are treated with dignity and respect. As an Equal Opportunity Employer, the College
does not discriminate in its hiring or employment practices on the basis of gender/gender-
identity, sex, race or ethnicity, color, national origin, religion, age, disability, veteran’s status,
genetic information, family or marital status, sexual orientation, or any other protected class. The
College does not discriminate on the basis of gender, sex, race or ethnicity, color, national origin,
religion, age, disability, veteran’s status, family or marital status, sexual orientation, or other
protected class in administration of its educational policies, admissions policies, scholarship and
loan programs, and athletic and other College-administered programs.
Franklin & Marshall College reserves the right to amend any administrative, academic or
disciplinary policy or regulation described in this Catalog, without prior notice to persons who
might thereby be affected. Information about expenses, fees and other charges applies to the
academic year 2020 – 2021. All fees and other charges are subject to change. The provisions of
the Catalog are not to be regarded as an irrevocable contract between the College and the student
or between the College and the parents of the student. Insofar as possible, the information in this
book is complete and accurate as of the date of publication.
Inquiries for additional information should be forwarded to
the following offices:
OfceofAdmission (717)358-3951
OfceofAlumniRelations&Development (717)358-3955
OfceofCommunications (717)358-3981
OfceofStudentAffairs (717)358-4000
OfceofFinancialAid (717)358-3991
OfceofthePresident (717)358-3971
OfceoftheProvost&DeanoftheFaculty (717)358-3986
OfceoftheRegistrar (717)358-4168
OfceofStudentAccessibilityServices (717)358-3989
General information:
Franklin & Marshall College
P.O.Box3003
Lancaster,PA17604-3003
(717)358-3911
College website: www.fandm.edu
For questions about the admission process
call: (717) 358-3951 email: admission@fandm.edu
Franklin & Marshall College is accredited by the Commission on Higher Education
of the Middle States Association of Colleges and Schools.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG III
EducationalSupportServices
Academic Advising .......................................................127
Additional Educational Opportunities
andResources...................................................127–128
CooperativeProgramsofStudy ...........................128–129
AcademicPoliciesandProcedures
Academic Honesty ............................................... 129–130
DisruptionsoftheAcademicProcess ............................130
CommunicationwithStudents ......................................131
TheCourseCreditSystem ............................................131
GraduationRequirements..............................................131
HonorsListandDean’sList ..........................................133
AcademicStandards .............................................134–135
CourseRegistrationandCredit ............................ 135–138
Majors and Minors ...............................................138–139
AdditionalSpecialEducationalOpportunities .....139–141
Evaluation and Grades ......................................... 141–143
ExaminationProcedures....................................... 143–144
TransferofCreditPolicies ...................................144–147
Withdrawal,Leave,andReadmissionPolicies .... 147–148
AssessmentofInstructionbyStudents .........................148
Information Technology ................................................ 149
Admission to the College
SelectionProcess ...........................................................150
Campus Visit and Interview .......................................... 150
Types of Application ............................................150–151
Financial Aid ........................................................ 151–152
Tuition and Fees ................................................... 152–153
InstitutionalProceduresRelatingtoTitleIX .....................153
FamilyEducationRightsandPrivacyAct ................ 153–156
AccommodationforDisabilities ............................... 156–157
Trustees of the College .............................................158–159
SeniorStaffoftheCollege .................................................160
Faculty and Faculty Emeriti ......................................161–176
Index ........................................................................177–179
Table of Contents
Mission of the College ..........................................................iv
History of the College ........................................................... iv
IntegrationofAcademicandResidentialLearning .........iv – v
AcademicCalendar2019–2020/2020–2021 ................... vi– ix
SummerSessionCalendarfor2020 .......................................x
The Curriculum
(seeGraduationRequirements131) ..................................1–6
Introduction:ConnectionsSeminars ............................ 1 – 2
Exploration: Liberal Learning ......................................2– 3
Concentration: the Major and the Minor ...........................3
Electives ........................................................................... 4
InternationalandOff-CampusStudy ...........................4 – 6
Course Offerings ............................................................. 7–14
DepartmentandProgramOfferings ............................ 15–126
AfricanaStudies .............................................................. 15
AmericanStudies ............................................................18
Anthropology ..................................................................21
Arabic Language .............................................................24
Art and Art History..........................................................25
Astronomy(SeePhysicsandAstronomy).......................92
Biochemistry(SeeBiologyandChemistry) .............35,41
Bioinformatics(SeeBiologyand
ComputerScience) ................................................ 35,47
BiologicalFoundationsofBehavior ...............................32
Biology ............................................................................ 35
Business,Organizations,andSociety .............................39
Chemistry ........................................................................41
Chinese Language ...........................................................43
Classics ............................................................................44
ComparativeLiteraryStudies .........................................46
ComputerScience ...........................................................47
Dance(SeeTheatreandDance) .................................... 119
Earth and Environment ...................................................49
Economics ....................................................................... 54
English.............................................................................57
EnvironmentalScience(SeeEarthandEnvironment) ....49
EnvironmentalStudies(SeeEarthandEnvironment) ....49
FilmandMedia(SeeArt,ArtHistoryandFilm) ............25
FrenchandFrancophoneStudies ....................................62
Geosciences(SeeEarthandEnvironment) ..................... 49
GermanandGermanStudies ..........................................65
Government .....................................................................67
Hebrew(SeeItalianStudiesandHebrew) ......................76
History .............................................................................70
InternationalStudies........................................................75
ItalianStudiesandHebrew .............................................76
Japanese Language ..........................................................79
JudaicStudies ..................................................................80
LatinAmericanStudies ................................................... 81
Linguistics ....................................................................... 83
Mathematics ....................................................................84
Music ...............................................................................86
Philosophy .......................................................................90
PhysicsandAstronomy ................................................... 92
Psychology ......................................................................94
PublicHealth ................................................................... 98
PublicPolicy .................................................................100
ReligiousStudies ...........................................................102
Russian ..........................................................................104
Science,TechnologyandSociety ..................................106
ScienticandPhilosophicalStudiesofMind ...............108
Sociology....................................................................... 114
Spanish .......................................................................... 116
Theatre,DanceandFilm ............................................... 119
Women’s,GenderandSexualityStudies ......................122
IV FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
THE MISSION
OF FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE
Franklin & Marshall College is a residential college dedicated
to excellence in undergraduate liberal education. Its aims
are to inspire in young people of high promise and diverse
backgrounds a genuine and enduring love for learning, to teach
them to read, write and think critically, to instill in them the
capacity for both independent and collaborative action, and to
educate them to explore and understand the natural, social and
cultural worlds in which they live. In so doing, the College
seekstofosterinitsstudentsqualitiesofintellect,creativity
andcharacter,thattheymaylivefulllinglivesandcontribute
meaningfully to their occupations, their communities, and their
world.
THE HISTORY
OF FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE
Franklin & Marshall College is one of the oldest institutions
ofhigher learning in theUnited States.Its rootsgo backto
FranklinCollege,foundedin1787withagenerousnancial
contribution from Benjamin Franklin. The product of a
pioneering collaboration between English- and German-
speaking communities in the most ethnically diverse region of
the new nation, the College was launched by leaders of the
LutheranandReformedChurcheswithsupportfromtrustees
thatincludedfoursignersoftheDeclarationofIndependence,
three future governors of Pennsylvania, two members of
the Constitutional Convention and seven ofcers of the
RevolutionaryArmy.Theirgoalwas“topreserveourpresent
republican system of government,” and “to promote those
improvements in the arts and sciences which alone render
nations respectable, great and happy.”
Marshall College, named after the great Supreme
Court ChiefJustice JohnMarshall, was founded in 1836in
Mercersburg, Pennsylvania under the sponsorship of the
GermanReformedChurch.Itattractedadistinguishedfaculty
that became nationally known as leaders of an intellectual
movement known as the Mercersburg Theology. In 1853
Marshall College moved to Lancaster and merged with
Franklin College to form Franklin & Marshall College. James
Buchanan, fteenth President of the United States, was the
rstPresidentoftheBoardofTrustees.Fromthetimeofits
centennial, the College complemented its strengths in the
classics and philosophy with a widely respected program in
science.Then,inthe1920s,itaddedaprograminbusiness.The
College’s transformation continued after World War II with
gradualexpansioninsizeandacademicscope.Increasingly,
students and faculty were drawn from all regions of the nation
and the world. Campus facilities expanded and the College
became primarily residential. It became coeducational in
1969.TheconnectiontotheReformedChurch,laterpartofthe
United Church of Christ, was severed and the College became
a secular institution. Throughout all of these changes, however,
theCollegeremainedcommittedto“liberallearning.”Frederick
Rauch,therstpresidentofMarshallCollege,hadproclaimed
in1837,“Thefortuneofourlivesandourgovernmentdepends
not exclusively on useful knowledge but on our character as
citizens,andtoformthischaracterbycultivatingthewhole
[person] is the aim of education in the proper sense.”
Today, with approximately 2,400 students, Franklin
& Marshall College proudly continues its dedication to
intellectual freedom and critical learning as fundamental to
a democratic society. As its mission statement afrms, this
means that it expects students to see connections, to discover
community and to understand the centrality of service to the
human endeavor.
THE INTEGRATION
OF ACADEMIC
& RESIDENTIAL LEARNING
Franklin & Marshall College offers an integrated learning
environment where students engage the values of the liberal
arts both through the curriculum and in their lives outside the
formalclassroom.Consistentwith the Mission Statement of
theCollege, faculty andadministrative ofces placestudent
learningatthecenteroftheirwork.Programsandactivities
guide and support students as they explore a love of learning,
theskillsofcriticalthinking,theroleofcitizenshipintheirlives
and the values of civility. The College challenges students to
make the most of the academic program and other educational
opportunities offered by this residential campus, to practice
mental and physical wellness and to develop their talents
and interests as part of an educated and socially responsible
community.
The faculty-led College House system is the keystone
ofFranklin&Marshall’svisionforintegratingacademicand
residential life. While a College House is in a literal sense
a student residence, it is more than this. College Houses
areled byseniormembersoftheFaculty,theDons,andby
their colleagues, the College House Deans, experienced
academic and student life professionals. The Houses foster
an environment that infuses student life with thoughtful
deliberation and intellectual exploration, habits of thought and
analysis that will serve students throughout their personal and
professional lives. The Houses are the meeting ground where
students can interact and network among the extended College
family. Together, Faculty Dons, College House Deans and
studentscreateeventsthatbringfaculty,students,alumni/ae,
distinguished visitors and professional staff together in formal
and informal settings to engage in lively discussions and social
interactions that break the barrier between classroom and
student residence.
Franklin & Marshall College
2020–2021 CATALOG
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG V
Upon matriculation, all students are assigned to
membership in a College House. Although students are not
requiredtoliveintheHouseforallfouryears,thisafliation
continues through the entire Franklin & Marshall experience
and extends beyond graduation. Most students enter the House
System as a member of a residential Connections seminar.
These courses introduce students to skills of critical reading,
critical thinking, oral communication and information literacy.
At the same time, the students live together in the same area
of the College House making it possible for discussions of
substance about ideas to move easily between the classroom
and the residential environment.
Within Houses, students elect leaders, craft and enforce
standards of behavior, manage their own social programs
and resolve the problems of living that arise among House
residents. The governing structure of each House is based
on the explicit acknowledgement that students are adults and
should control many aspects of their social and residential life.
College Houses are therefore also places where the arts of
democracy are learned and leadership is incubated.
College Houses express the ethos of the College. College
Housesareconnectedcommunitieswhereallstudentscannd
a place. Creating an environment that is neither exclusively
academic nor residential, the House environment is sometimes
called a “thirdspace,” acomfortable andinviting hybrid of
classroom and residence hall that exceeds its individual parts.
The College Houses model a way of living that makes for a
rewarding life: they support a social landscape that integrates
work, play, a critical approach to new ideas and the belief
that every moment holds the opportunity for discovery and
personal satisfaction.
This emphasis on integrating ideas and residential life
informs many other areas of the student experience. Both
academic and career advising ask students to think about the
value of a liberal arts education and the connections among
theliberalartsandtheworldofwork.Socialandco-curricular
programming emphasizes student initiative in planning and
organizingevents.Studentsareencouragedtoseethemselves
ascitizensinformedbyanentrepreneurialspirit.TheCollege
also provides opportunities for students to explore the meaning
offaith,religionandspirituality.Becauseofitscommitment
to educating the whole person, the College has a number of
programs that emphasize health and wellness, including
personal counseling, programs in the residence halls, varsity
and intramural sports and workshops on health issues.
InMarch2009,thefacultyvotedtoimplementaCommon
Hour, a weekly time during which no classes are scheduled,
to enable the entire College community to gather for special
events. This common gathering time, used for lectures, topical
discussions, projects and other community gatherings since
Spring2010,wasdesignedtopromotetheinvolvementofall
members of the College in meaningful intellectual exchange
and to broaden the reach of the liberal arts experience.
VI FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
Academic Calendar
Fall Semester 2020-2021
August 20 Thursday FirstYearstudentsinBonchek,WeisandNewCollegeHouses
move in by appointment
August 21 Friday FirstYearstudentsinBrooksandWareCollegeHousesandall
new Transfer students move in by appointment
August 23 Sunday (Virtual)Convocation,11a.m.
August 26 Wednesday Module 1 classes begin
August 31 Monday Module 1 deadline for course changes or withdrawing without
record,11:59p.m.
September 7 Monday LaborDay(classesinsession;administrativeofcesclosedfor
thefederalholiday)
September 11 Friday  Module1gradingoption(P/NP)deadline
September 30 Wednesday Module 1 deadline to withdraw with record
October 6 Tuesday Module 1 classes end
October 7 Wednesday Module 1 reading day
October 8 – 9 Thursday-Friday Module1nalexaminations
October 12 Monday Module 2 classes begin
October 15 Thursday Module 2 deadline for course changes or withdrawing without
record,11:59p.m.
October 28 Wednesday Module2gradingoption(P/NP)deadline
November 16 Monday Module 2 deadline to withdraw with record
November 20 Friday Module 2 classes end
November 23–27 Monday-Friday Module2readingdays(Thanksgiving,November26)
November 30–December 2 Monday-Wednesday Module2nalexaminations(online)
December 3 Thursday Winter recess begins
The College notes that a number of religious holidays occur during the semester.
Please consult the College web-based calendar for these dates: http://www.fandm.edu/calendar.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG VII
Academic Calendar
January Term and Spring Semester 2020-2021
January 4 Monday JanuaryTerm(J-term)classesbegin
January 5 Tuesday J-termdeadlineforcoursechangesorwithdrawingwithout
record,11:59p.m.
January 13 Wednesday J-termgradingoption(P/NP)deadline
January 26 Tuesday J-termdeadlinetowithdrawwithrecord
January 28 Thursday J-termclassesend
January 29 Thursday J-termnalexaminations
February 1 Monday Module3classesbegin
February 4 Thursday Module3deadlineforcoursechangesorwithdrawingwithout
record,11:59p.m.
February 6 Saturday Degreeconferraldateforfallandwintergraduates
February 17 Wednesday Module3gradingoption(P/NP)deadline
March 8 Monday Module3deadlinetowithdrawwithrecord
March 12 Friday Module3classesend
March 15–16 Monday-Tuesday Module3readingdays
March 17–19 Wednesday-Friday Module3nalexaminations
March 22 Monday Module4classesbegin
March 25 Thursday Module4deadlineforcoursechangesorwithdrawingwithout
record,11:59p.m.
April 7 Wednesday Module4gradingoption(P/NP)deadline
April 26 Monday Module4deadlinetowithdrawwithrecord
April 30 Friday Module4classesend
May 3–6 Monday-Thursday Module4readingdays
May 7–10 Friday-Monday Module4nalexaminations
May 15 Saturday Commencement
The College notes that a number of religious holidays occur during the semester.
Please consult the College web-based calendar for these dates: http://www.fandm.edu/calendar.
VIII FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
Academic Calendar
Fall Semester 2021-2022
August 24 – 27 Wednesday–Friday InternationalStudentOrientation
August 28 Saturday CollegeHousesopenforFirstYearStudents,8:30a.m.
August 28 –31 Saturday–Tuesday NewStudentOrientation
August 29 – 31 Sunday–Tuesday CollegeHouses&ThemeHousesopenforUpperClassStudents,
9a.m.–4p.m.
August 31 Tuesday Degreeconferraldateforsummergraduates
August 31 Tuesday Convocation, 10 a.m.
September 1 Wednesday Fallsemesterclassesbegin,8a.m.
September 6 Monday LaborDay(classesinsession;administrativeofcesclosedfor
federalholiday)
October 8 Friday Fallbreakbegins,4:30p.m.
October 13 Wednesday Fallbreakends,8a.m.
October 15 – 17 Friday–Sunday TrueBlueWeekend
November 23 Tuesday Thanksgivingrecessbegins,6:05p.m.
November 19 Monday Thanksgivingrecessends,8a.m.
December 10 Friday Fallsemesterclassesend,4:30p.m.
December 11 – 14 Saturday–Tuesday Readingdays
December 15 Wednesday Final examinations begin
December 19 Sunday Finalexaminationsend;Winterrecessbegins
December 20 Monday CollegeHouses&ThemeHousesclose;11a.m.
The College notes that a number of religious holidays occur during the semester.
Please consult the College web-based calendar for these dates: http://www.fandm.edu/calendar.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG IX
Academic Calendar
Spring Semester 2021-2022
January 16 Sunday CollegeHouses&ThemeHousesopen,8:30a.m.
January 17 Monday MartinLutherKingDay(ofcesopen)
January 18 Tuesday Springsemesterclassesbegin,8a.m.
January 31 Monday Degreeconferraldateforfallandwintergraduates
March 11 Friday Springrecessbegins,4:30p.m.
March 21 Monday Springrecessends,8a.m.
April 28 Thursday Springsemesterclassesend,6:05p.m.
April-May 29 – 2 Friday–Monday Readingdays
May 3 Tuesday Final examinations begin
May 7 Saturday Finalexaminationsend
May 8 Sunday CollegeHouses&ThemeHousesclose,11a.m.
May 14 Saturday Commencement
The College notes that a number of religious holidays occur during the semester.
Please consult the College web-based calendar for these dates: http://www.fandm.edu/calendar.
X FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
2021 Summer Session I
(5 WEEKS, JUNE 7–JULY 6, 2021)
Friday,May21,2021 RegistrationDeadline
Sunday,June6,2021 HousingopensforSessionI,noon
Monday,June7,2021 SessionIclassesbegin
Tuesday,June8,2021 SessionIdeadlineforcoursechangesorwithdrawingwithoutrecordby4:30p.m.
Wednesday,June16,2021 SessionIgradingoption(P/NP)deadline
Friday,July2,2021 SessionIdeadlinetowithdrawwithrecord
Tuesday,July6,2021 SessionIclassesend
Wednesday,July7,2021 Studentsinresidencemustvacatetheirroomsby4:00p.m.
2021 Summer Session II
(5 WEEKS, JULY 12–AUGUST 10, 2021)
Friday,June25,2021 RegistrationDeadline
Sunday,July11,2021 HousingopensforSessionII,noon
Monday,July12,2021 SessionIIclassesbegin
Tuesday,July13,2021 SessionIIdeadlineforcoursechangesorwithdrawingwithoutrecordby4:30p.m.
Wednesday,July21,2021 SessionIIgradingoption(P/NP)deadline
Friday,August6,2021 SessionIIdeadlinetowithdrawwithrecord
Tuesday,August10,2021 SessionIIclassesend
Wednesday,August11,2021 Studentsinresidencemustvacatetheirroomsby4:00p.m.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 1
The Franklin & Marshall Curriculum
SEE GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS PAGE 131.
The Franklin & Marshall Curriculum combines a spirit of
innovation with a strong sense of tradition, and provides a
framework for our students’ intellectual development over
their four years at Franklin & Marshall College. Called
“Connections,”ourcurriculumencouragesstudentstobecome
responsible, creative, ambitious participants in learned
discourse and discovery by making connections: connections
across disciplines, connections between theory and practice,
and connections between their liberal arts education and the
world.Aliberallyeducatedperson is onewho is inquisitive
about all realms of thought, who is able to take into the wider
world a comfort with ambiguity and respectful debate, who
understands the limits of knowledge and the value of evidence,
whohasrenedhisorherjudgmentaboutthegoodandthe
beautiful,andwhohaslearnedtoanalyzecritically,tospeak
persuasively, and to listen attentively. The Connections
curriculum guides students to become such educated people.
The curriculum has three phases: Introduction, Exploration
and Concentration. Together with electives, these phases offer
appropriate balance between structure and choice to allow the
constructionofanindividualizededucationalexperience.
In the Introduction phase, students take small, intensive
seminars, Connections 1 and Connections 2, which are
uniedbyaconcernfortheaimsandstandardsofintellectual
discourse and the communities that sustain it. These courses
also sequence instruction in writing, research, and oral
presentation. In Connections courses students become
members of our intellectual community and learn the practices
of critical analysis, research, writing, and civil debate that will
help them attain their academic goals.
In the Exploration phase, students take courses that promote
understanding modes of study in different intellectual arenas,
from creating art to gaining competency in a foreign language
toapplyingthescienticmethod.Astheyprogress,students
make connections among the ways different disciplines seek
truthandstructureinquiry.
TheConcentrationphaseistheculminationofourstudents’
four years of work and study. This phase is represented by their
study in a major discipline and may include synthetic projects,
capstone seminars, and one-on-one research. Given their
growing intellectual maturity, students will be in a position to
reectontheconnectionstheyhavedrawnandthepathsthey
have charted through the curriculum, both inside and outside
theirmajorelds.
All courses undertaken to fulll the introduction,
exploration, and concentration phases of the curriculum must
be taken for a regular letter grade.
INTRODUCTION:
CONNECTIONS SEMINARS
IntheirConnectionsSeminars,studentswill:
1. Developcuriosityinordertolearnhowtoread,write,
listen, and converse in an intellectual community
2. Develop judgment in order to create and evaluate
effective arguments, ideas, and solutions
TheConnectionsseminarsaresmallclasseslimitedto16
students and share three important characteristics: they invite
rst-yearstudentsintoanintellectualcommunityandalifeof
themind;theysequencethebuildingofskillsinclosereading,
writing,research,andoralpresentation;and(inConnections1)
they integrate classroom work with residential life.
CONNECTIONS 1 SEMINAR
Connections 1 courses spark curiosity and teach students to
value and practice our shared commitments to reasoned and
respectful discourse. In them, students develop a comfort
with debate and ambiguity and become active participants
in a culture of evidence. Connections 1 courses enfranchise
studentsrstasmembersoftheintellectualcommunityoftheir
classroom, and then as members of wider and interconnected
intellectual communities on campus and beyond. In
Connections 1 courses, students learn to observe closely the
world around them, the details of the arguments they read, and
the way those arguments marshal evidence. They also listen
carefullytotheirpeers’ideas,andimprovetheirexpressionof
truth, conciseness, and accuracy in their discourse.
StudentswhoenrollinaparticularConnections1seminar
live together in one of the College Houses. This promotes
an integration of the residence hall and the classroom that
enhances both the academic success and the personal growth
of students.
Students are expected to complete a Connections 1
Seminarintheirrstsemester.AlistofcurrentConnections1
Seminarsappearsonpages7–8.
CONNECTIONS 2 SEMINAR
Connections 2 courses build on the practices of intellectual
discourse established in Connections 1, improving students’
ability to read closely, understand, reason, and debate. While
in Connections 1 courses, students concern themselves
primarily with making and comprehending arguments and
ideas,inConnections2coursesstudentsprogresstorening
their judgment regarding effective and ineffective arguments.
In addition, students apply these skills to the scholarly analysis
of a complex problem examined from multiple perspectives.
Thus, these seminars teach students to compare, contrast, and
connect insights gained from different sources and perspectives,
and guide them in connecting an argument or idea to its larger
consequences,betheysocial,political,moral,ornatural.
2 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
Normally, students will complete their Connections 2
seminar during their second semester at the College, but it
must be completed no later than the third semester. A list of
currentConnections2Seminarsappearsonpages9–12.
EXPLORATION: LIBERAL
LEARNING
In their Exploration courses, students will:
1. Acquirefamiliaritywithbroaddivisionsofknowledge,
modesofinquiry,andcreativepracticescharacteristic
of different intellectual and expressive arenas
2. Developintellectualbreadthandversatility, fostering
the ability to make connections across a broad range of
disciplines, practices, and experiences
To this end, students will complete courses (each for a
regulargrade)amongthetraditionaldivisionsofintellectual
inquiryintheliberalarts,includingtheArts,Humanities,
Social Sciences, and Natural Sciences, in addition to
languagestudyandexplorationofthenon-westernworld,
as described below.
ARTS
Goal: Create, perform, or study art
Courses that meet this goal are designated A in the catalog,
and include the study of the creative and performing arts,
as well as courses in the history, analysis, and criticism
of the arts, including creative writing, but excluding the
studyofliterature.Studentsmustearnonecoursecreditin
this area.
HUMANITIES
Goal: Analyze the systems of belief, knowledge, and ideas of
the humanities
Courses that meet this goal are designated H in the catalog,
and focus on the study of ancient and modern literature,
classical and modern languages, religion, or philosophy.
Studentsmustearnonecoursecreditinthisarea.
SOCIAL SCIENCES
Goal: Learn about one or more societies or cultures in terms
of their social, political, or economic organization and/or their
history
CoursesthatmeetthisgoalaredesignatedSinthecatalog.
They focus on history, ethnographic study, or the political
andeconomicorganizationofthesocialworld.Students
must earn one course credit in this area.
NATURAL SCIENCES
Goals: Practice the scientic method and better understand
the larger social implications of science
Studentsmaysatisfythesegoalsineitheroftwoways:
1. Theymaytaketwosciencecourseswithlabs(N);or
2. They may take one lab science course plus one course
designated“NaturalScienceinPerspective”(NSP)
Natural Science in Perspective (NSP) courses help
students understand:
1. The role played by theory in the natural sciences
2. Theroleofevidenceindevelopingandtestingscientic
theories and what constitutes acceptable evidence in
the natural sciences
3. How science deals with uncertainty, thus increasing
students’abilitytoreasonquantitatively
4. The role science plays in today’s society, including
thosequestionsscienceattemptstoanswerandthose
questionsthatlieoutsideitsdomain
5. Real-worldsituationsinwhichpolicydecisionsneedto
be made without complete understanding or certainty
AlistofNSPcoursesappearsonpages12–14.
LANGUAGE STUDY
Goal: Acquire linguistic and cross-cultural competency
through foreign language study
Competency in a foreign language helps students
develop an informed and thoughtful awareness of language
as a system and facilitates their exploration of other cultural
worlds. Students are strongly encouraged to begin language
studyintheirrstyearandtocompletethesequenceofclasses
promptly; lengthy gaps between levels may disadvantage
studentsinthenextlevelcourse.Studentsareencouragedto
complete their intermediate language competency by the end
oftheirjunioryear(Pleasenotethatmostdepartmentsofferthe
101introductorylevelcourseonlyinthefallsemester.)
On-campus placement tests are available throughout
the year and will determine the student’s appropriate level.
Placement results are valid for two semesters; after that a
student must retake the placementtest. Studentsenrolled in
a language class may not take the placement test in the same
languageafterthersttwoweeksofclass.
To fulll the goal to “acquire linguistic and cultural
competency through foreign language study,” students must
pass, with a regular grade, the third course in a foreign
language sequence or demonstrate equivalent prociency
throughtesting.Therequirementmaybesatisedinanyofthe
following ways:
1. Passingatleastonecourseatthe200levelorabove
taughtinthestudent’snon-nativelanguage
2. Studying in a non-English speaking country and
completing a course at the 200 level or above in a
foreign language
3. Scoring4or5intheAdvancedPlacementExamina
foreign or classical language
4. Scoring5orhigherinaForeignLanguageCoursevia
theInternationalBaccalaureate
5. Placingintothefourthsemestercourseorhigherinthe
language sequence as taught at Franklin & Marshall
through a placement exam administered by the
appropriate Franklin & Marshall academic department
Notethatastudentwhotestsoutofthisrequirementfora
particular language and who then decides to enroll in the 101,
102,or201level(therstthreesemesters)ofthatlanguage
forfeits the waiver and must complete a foreign language
throughthe201level(thirdsemester).
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 3
BycompletingandsubmittingapetitiontotheCommittee
onAcademicStatus,internationalstudentsfromnon-English
speakingcountriesmayreceiveawaiverofthisrequirement.
International students should contact the Ofce of tStudent
Affairs to begin this process.
CoursesthatsatisfytheLanguageStudyrequirementare
designated(LS).
NON-WESTERN CULTURES
Goal: Gain an understanding of the widely disparate ways in
which human social and cultural life can be experienced and
organized through an investigation of non-Western cultures
and societies, including indigenous, colonial, and postcolonial
contexts and/or gain a critical understanding of the West/non-
West distinction, the limitations of this dichotomy, and the
hybridity present in most cultures and societies.
Courses that meet either or both of these goals are
designated(NW)inthecatalogandareofferedbyavarietyof
programs and departments.
The NW requirement can also be met by achieving
linguisticandculturalcompetenceinanon-Westernlanguage
as demonstrated by the completion of a course in such
languages at the 200 level or beyond. (Arabic, Chinese,
Hebrew,Japanese)
A non-F&M course (including one taken abroad) may
count toward the NW requirementif thatcourse satises at
leastoneofthegoalsdescribedabovebutrequiresapproval
as satisfying these criteria by the appropriate department
orprogramchair.(In caseswhere acourse inquestion falls
outside the domain of a department or program, the decision to
approvewillbemadebythedirectorofInternationalStudies.)
Thisrequirement cannot bemet viaa prociencyexam,
but only by earning a course credit for having completed
an academic experience after matriculation at a college or
university.
CONCENTRATION
In the Concentration phase, students will:
1. Gain depth and breadth within a specic eld of
inquiry.
2. Extend and deepen writing and analytical skills within
thecontextofaspecicdiscipline
3. Reectontheirintellectualdevelopmentandprepare
for the future
AtFranklin&MarshallCollege,focusonamajoreldof
inquiryallowsstudentstopursueadvancedwork,whichmay
include independent study and original research. Over four
years, students hone their interests to develop a greater mastery
over an area of specialty, and many do exceptional work in
advanced research, upper level seminars and independent
investigations.Studentswillhaveopportunitiestoparticipate
in assessment and reection exercises, whether formal or
informal,curricularornon-curricular,andwillbeabletomeet
with advisers and professional staff to help prepare them for
post-graduatelife.
ToqualifyfortheBachelorofArtsdegree,astudentmust
complete a prescribed concentration of courses, referred to
as the major. A major program must consist of at least eight
requiredcoursecreditsandmaynotexceed16requiredcourse
credits. All courses meeting major requirements must be
takenforaregulargrade;astudentmustearnaminimumof
a 2.0 grade point average in those courses used by the major
department to compute the major grade point average.
Descriptions of course requirements for each major offered
by the College can be found in the Catalog sections on
Departmentalofferings.
A student may declare more than one major. A student
who wishes to declare more than two majors must have the
approvaloftheAssociateDeanoftheFaculty.
Students may also satisfy the major requirement by
designingaSpecialStudiesmajororaJointmajor.
SPECIAL STUDIES MAJOR
StudentsdesignaSpecialStudiesmajorinconsultationwith
the Special Studies adviser and a primary and secondary
adviser. The design must be intellectually coherent and include
courses from three different departments. The major must be a
genuine liberal arts major that could legitimately be offered at
theCollegeandmustprogressthroughhigherlevelsofcourses;
an assemblage of introductory courses from three departments
is not acceptable.
JOINT MAJOR
A Joint Major is a concentration of courses from two
departments/programs(atleastoneofwhichoffersamajor)
andrequiresarationaleandtheapprovalofbothdepartments
andtheAssociateDeanoftheFaculty.Eachofthecomponent
majors must be represented by eight distinct course credits.
The regulations for admission to, and the maintenance of, an
academic major at Franklin & Marshall College can be found
in the “Majors and Minors” section of the Catalog, pages
138–139.
THE MINOR
Students may choose to complete a minor. Minors, either
disciplinaryorcross-disciplinary,consistofsixcoursecredits.
A student may ofcially declare one minor. Departments
and programs that offer minors are: Africana Studies;
Anthropology; Art; Chemistry; Classics; Comparative
Literary Studies; Computer Science; Dance; Economics;
English; Environmental Studies; Film and Media Studies;
French;Italian; Geosciences;German;History;International
Studies (includes Area Studies); Judaic Studies; Latin
AmericanStudies;Mathematics;Music;Philosophy;Physics;
Psychology;ReligiousStudies;Russian;Science,Technology
and Society; Sociology; Spanish; Theatre; and Women’s,
Gender and Sexuality Studies. Specic requirements for a
minorarelistedwitheachdepartment’sofferings.Allcourses
meeting the requirements for a minor must be taken for a
regular grade.
The regulations for admission to, and maintenance of, a
minorcanbefoundinthe“MajorsandMinors”sectionofthe
Catalog,pages138–139.
4 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
ELECTIVES: EXTENDED EXPLORATION
Within each phase of study, the curriculum is designed to
incorporate additional curricular explorations. These are
electives—courses that do not satisfy a requirement in the
introduction, exploration, or concentration phases. Electives
allow students to gain additional depth of knowledge outside
theirmajororminoreldofstudy,andtoexploreunfamiliar
areas of knowledge. In addition to regular courses in the
curriculum, electives may include internships, off-campus
study, guided group study, or independent studies undertaken
outside the major. Through the strategic use of electives,
studentsindividualizetheiracademicexperience.Thus,there
isnocurricularstructureimposedonelectives;studentsmay
take as many or as few as their other curricular commitments
permit. However, students are encouraged to consult with their
advisers so as to make best use of these opportunities in the
context of their course of study.
INTERNATIONAL
AND OFF-CAMPUS STUDY
STATEMENT OF PHILOSOPHY
(Adopted by the Off-Campus Study Committee of the Faculty in April 2004)
Recognizing the global nature of contemporary society as
well as the need for intercultural understanding, Franklin
& Marshall College views international study as a valuable
component of a liberal arts education. Study abroad promotes
an increased understanding of the complexity of language and
culture. It also constitutes a critical element of the College’s
commitment to build an increasingly international campus.
Franklin & Marshall College therefore encourages its students
to give serious consideration to study in another country.
The College approaches international education as an
integral part of the entire undergraduate experience. We view it
not as a term away from campus, but as an encounter seamlessly
connectedwithastudent’sentireeducation—before,during,
andafterthetimespentoffcampus.Studentsplanningforeign
ordomesticoff-campusstudywillworkcloselywiththeOfce
of International Programs and with their academic advisers
to select programs and courses of study that further their
educational goals.
OPTIONS FOR INTERNATIONAL STUDY
AND OFF CAMPUS STUDY
Franklin & Marshall College currently pre-approves more
than200differentoff-campusstudyprogramsin60different
countries, including programs led by F&M faculty members.
Each of these programs has been approved by a faculty
committeeandtheOfceofInternationalProgramstoensure
strongacademicqualityandopportunitiesforculturallearning
andengagementwiththelocalcommunity.Off-campusstudy
programs approved by F&M offer coursework, internship, and
eldresearchopportunitiesthatprovidedepthofknowledge
and intercultural perspectives on courses and topics studied
on-campus. Students interested in off-campus study should
speak with their faculty adviser early in their academic career
at F&M, and visit the Ofce of International Programs at
least two semesters in advance of the planned time away to
begin shaping their off-campus study experience. For more
information on off-campus study opportunities, please visit
www.fandm.edu/off-campus.
Franklin & Marshall also offers the innovative
InternationalStudies program, aninterdisciplinary academic
program that combines off-campus study in a non-English-
speaking-location with coursework on and off-campus.
The mission of the program is to unite a cohort of students
who, both individually and in collaboration, will broaden the
experience of their various major programs as they develop
an international perspective and immerse themselves in the
languageandcultureofanon-English-speakingcountry.
In addition to off-campus study programs, Franklin &
Marshall also provides funding opportunities for international
studyandresearch.PleaseseethesectiononSummerTravel,
Project,andInternshipAwardsforalistoftheseawards.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL PROGRAMS
AND PARTNERSHIPS
Franklin & Marshall offers more than 200 approved off-
campus study experiences, including faculty-led programs
as well as partnerships with a number of U.S. program
providers and overseas institutions. Many of these programs
offer coursework in English or a local language, as well as
internshipand researchopportunities.Advisers in theOfce
of International Programs, in partnership with the student’s
academic adviser, offer guidance on program selection.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL FACULTY-LED
PROGRAMS
Each summer, F&M faculty lead a number of Summer
Travel Courses. These courses offer unique opportunities to
travel with and learn closely from an F&M faculty member.
Newprograms are regularly developedandinthepasthave
taken place in Argentina, China, Cuba, Denmark, England,
Israel, Italy, Russia, Spain, and South Africa, among other
locations.All students acceptedto a SummerTravelCourse
are automatically considered for funding from F&M, based
onthestudent’sdemonstratednancialneed.Studentsshould
contact the Ofce of International Programs to learn more
aboutcurrentSummerTravelCourses.
ADVANCED STUDIES IN ENGLAND
Owned by Franklin & Marshall, the Advanced Studies in
England program is administered in association with the
University College, Oxford University, and is located in
Bath, England. The program offers courses in literature,
classics, government, history, creative writing, theatre, and
lmduringthefallandspringsemesteraswellasasummer
session.Duringthesummersession,anF&Mfacultymember
typicallyleadsoneofthecourseofferingsinBath.Students
studyingwithASEalsohavetheopportunitytoparticipatein
an academic internship. In addition to students from Franklin
& Marshall College, the program enrolls students from other
afliateinstitutions,suchasOberlin,Bucknell,Denisonand
Gettysburg.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 5
GUIDELINES FOR INTERNATIONAL
AND OFF-CAMPUS STUDY
Whilemoststudentsparticipateinoff-campusstudyduringtheir
junior year of study, opportunities exist for earlier or later study.
Off-CampusstudyadvisersintheOfceofInternationalPrograms
workwithstudentsandtheirfacultyadviserstondprogramsthat
matchstudentacademicandculturalinterests;off-campusstudy
advisers also support students throughout the program application
process and provide pre-departure orientation and advising.
Studentsinterestedinexploringoff-campusstudyopportunities
areencouragedtobeginworkingwiththeOfceofInternational
Programsstaffatleasttwosemestersinadvanceoftheintended
semesterorsummeroff-campus.
Inordertostudyoff-campus,Franklin&Marshallrequires
that all students:
• haveaminimum2.5cumulativeGPA(thoughmany
programsrequireahigherGPAforparticipationso
aGPAof2.75oraboveisstronglyrecommended),
• have a plan to declare a major area of study before
attendingasemester-longprogram,
• be making satisfactory academic progress,
• demonstrate evidence of social maturity, and
• not be on any academic or disciplinary probation.
Studentswhodonotmeetthesecriteriashoulddiscusstheir
interestswithanoff-campusstudyadviserinadvanceofthetypical
one-yeartimeline.Dependingontheparticularcircumstance,the
studentmayberequiredtoleapetitiontostudyoffcampusif
oneoftheabovecriteriaisnotsatised.
For the majority of students who participate in an off-
campus study program during the semester, Franklin &
MarshallwillbillthestudenttheCollege’stuitionfee;Franklin
& Marshall College will then pay the program tuition on the
student’s behalf. Neither conrmation deposits, nor room &
boardarebilledbyF&M;thesechargeswillbesentdirectlyto
thestudentbytheoff-campusstudyprogramprovider.Students
participatinginanoff-campusstudyprogramduringthesummer
should expect to pay all program costs directly to the program
provider,exceptinthecaseofFranklin&Marshallfaculty-led
programs(SummerTravelCourses).Studentsparticipatingin
faculty-led programs are automatically considered for need-
based aid. For more information about this policy or exceptions,
pleasevisitwww.fandm.edu/off-campus.
During the academic year, students will continue to be
eligible for nancial aid during a term of off-campus study,
including federal and state loans as well as Franklin & Marshall
meritscholarshipsandneed-basedgrants.Studentswhoreceive
Grant-in-Aid benets will continue to access these benets
forthesemesteroff-campus.Thisbenetisonlyavailableto
studentsofeligiblefull-timeF&Mfacultyandstaff.Students
receiving Tuition Exchange benets will continue to access
thesebenetsforthesemesteroff-campus.
A number of additional scholarships and nancial aid
opportunitiesmaybeavailableforoff-campusstudy,depending
onthestudent’sdemonstratednancialneedandotherfactors.
Students are encouraged to apply for national scholarships,
suchastheGilmanorBoren,aswellasprogramscholarships,
scholarshipsforrst-generationcollegestudents,orlocation-
specicscholarships.Off-CampusStudyadviserscanprovide
more information about additional funding opportunities. For
moreinformationaboutnancial aid policies and
scholarship
opportunities,pleasevisitwww.fandm.edu/off-campus.
SUMMER TRAVEL, PROJECT AND
INTERNSHIP AWARDS
The Margery Brittain Travel Award
This award enables students to improve their foreign language
ability through travel or study in a country whose language
they have studied previously.
The Bagdasarian Award
This award supports students studying or engaging in volunteer
activities outside theU.S. with preferencegiven tostudents
travelingtodevelopingandthird-worldcountries.
Departmental Summer Foreign Study and Travel Awards
These awards enable foreign study and travel by outstanding
sophomores planning a major or in some cases a minor in each
of six departments: Art, Classics, French, Italian, German and
RussianandSpanish.
John Kryder Evans Summer Study Award
ThisawardhonorsthememoryofMr.Evans’11,whoserved
with distinction as a Trustee of the College from 1940 to
1980andspentmanyyearswithGeneralFoodsCorporation.
Candidates must demonstrate quality of character, personal
and intellectual promise and an enthusiasm for international
experience.Preferenceisgiventoprojectsthatreectethical
or social concerns.
Charles J. G. Mayaud Awards
Theseawards,giveninhonorofthe lateProfessorMayaud,
ProfessorofFrenchandlong-timechairoftheDepartmentof
French and Italian, enable students to carry out educational
projects abroad. Candidates should demonstrate quality of
character, personal and intellectual promise and an enthusiasm
for international experience.
Paul A. Mueller, Jr., Summer Awards
Current sophomores are eligible to apply for the Paul A.
Mueller,Jr.,SummerAward inorderto pursue projects that
foster personal growth, independence, creativity, leadership
andpersonalinterests,intheUnitedStatesorabroad.
Sidney Wise Public Service Internship Program
The Sidney Wise Public ServiceInternship Programhonors
the memory of Professor SidneyWise,who was committed
toprovidingforstudentsrst-handexperiencesingovernment
and guidanceto alumni in the eld.This ten-weeksummer
programpaysstudentsastipendtotakefull-timeinternshipsin
national,state,orlocalgovernmentoringovernment-related
non-prot agencies. Interested students should contact the
Government department for further information.
Alice Drum Award for Summer Research in Women’s,
Gender and Sexuality Studies
This award is given annually to support student summer
projects related to research, creative arts, or community and
public service. Proposed projects must further knowledge
of the roles of women and/or gender in society. Recipients
mustalsoshowqualityofcharacter,personalandintellectual
promise, and an enthusiasm for learning from the proposed
experience.
6 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
Maury Bank Summer Study Award
Inmemoryofhislateparents,PearlandMauryBank,Lawrence
H.Bank,Esq.’65establishedtheBankSummerStudyAward
to support Franklin & Marshall students in studying abroad
duringthesummerintheeldofJudaicStudies.Theamount
of the award is $2,500, to be distributed to one or several
participants.
Other Departmental Summer Awards
The Art Study Award assists a studio art major, in the summer
after junior year, to pursue a formal internship experience.
The Harry L. Butler Award, honoring the late Professor
Butler,formanyyearschairoftheDepartmentofFrenchand
Italian,assistseducationaltravelbyahigh-achievingstudent
of French. The Alice and Ray Drum British Isles Summer
Travel AwardsupportssummerresearchintheBritishIsles,
with preference to an English major. The Harry W. and Mary
B. Huffnagle Endowment supports coursework or research
experience by biology majors at biological summer eld
stationsintheU.S.orabroad.The Michelle Kayal Memorial
Scholarship Award enables a student majoring in biology
to conduct research in the biological sciences. The Keck
Summer Internships bring together students and faculty from
12ofthecountry’smostoutstandingundergraduateliberalarts
institutions to pursue geoscience research with the support of the
W. M. Keck Foundation. The Geoff Pywell Memorial Prize,
createdinmemoryofGeoffPywell,memberofthefacultyin
Theatre,andofJoan Mowbray, secretaryof the Department
ofTheatre,DanceandFilm,supportsarisingsophomoreor
junior for summer study in acting or directing. The Russell
Summer Russian Study Award, given in honor of Thomas
W.andDorothyM.Russell,enablesoutstandingstudentsof
RussiantostudyRussianlanguageandcultureinRussia.The
Franklin J. Schaffner ’42 Theater Award, in memory of the
lateAcademyAward-winning director of numerous movies,
television programs and plays, enables students to study
Britishtheateronlocation.The Peter S. and Irene P. Seadle
German Travel Award supports a special project or internship
inaGerman-speakingcountrybyarisingseniorwhoisanon-
native speaker of German. More information on these awards
is available from the relevant departments.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 7
Course Oerings
FALL 2020
CONNECTIONS 1 SEMINARS
CNX 109. From the Iliad to El Deafo: The Radical Evolution of the
Graphic Novel.
Thegraphicnovelhasbecomeanimportantmeanstocommunicate(and
re-create)timelessclassics,inventstoriesthatreectbothuniversaland
specichumanexperiences,andrecountsignicanthistoricalevents.This
courseemphasizescollege-levelapproachestoreading,interpreting,and
writing about graphic novels with great care, in order to understand them
asa unique narrativeform that combinessequential artand text while
straddling time, place, and perspective. Fowler
CNX 110. Digital City.
The city is a material text that contains the imprints of human action
written in stone. The earliest cultural interactions between China and the
UnitedStateswereshapedintheportcitiesofShanghaiandPhiladelphia.
Using digital tools, we will reconstruct the physical fabric of the two cities
highlightingspacesthatfacilitatedaninternationalsynthesis.Studentswill
learn how to read primary sources such as memoirs, maps, photographs,
and buildings. They will also learn how to tell stories and digitally
reconstruct the past through 3D-modeling, Geographic Information
Systems,databases,andaudio-visualmapping.TopicsincludeShanghai’s
American Concession, Philadelphia’s Chinatown, the Chinese pavilion
inthe1876CentennialExposition,thePhiladelphiatrainingofChina’s
nationalarchitectsinthe1920s,traditionalrowhousesinPhiladelphiaand
shikumeninShanghai,cosmopolitanismintheBund,andtheskyscrapers
ofPudongandCenterCity.Theclasswillofferadigitalintroductionto
Franklin&Marshall’smetropolitanregion. Kourelis
CNX 115. Mortality and Meaning.
In this course, we trace attempts to give meaning to human mortality.
We explore how poets, artists, theologians, scientists, philosophers, and
political theorists have sought meaning in immortal remembrance, eternal
life, earthly perfection, or nothingness. We will be working on developing
your own voice in your writing as we take an intellectual journey with
suchauthorsandartistsasHomer,Augustine,Nietzsche,Camus,Munch,
and Arendt. Hammer
CNX 121. Storytelling.
The practice of sharing stories takes many forms across cultures and
societies. Storytelling has a variety of uses, from entertainment and
education to applications in the professions. In this course, students will
share their own stories in order to connect with one another, their college
house, and the greater F&M community, while at the same time
developing their public speaking and active listening skills. Additionally,
students will be trained in a creative storytelling practice directed at
interactingwithindividualswithmemoryloss(TimeSlips™)inorderto
participateinacommunity-basedlearningproject.Throughananalysisof
stories and scholarship about distinct forms of storytelling, students will
develop close reading and critical thinking skills. Stachura
CNX 132. Material Culture.
This course explores material culture from a variety of perspectives, and
focusesspecicallyontherelationshipbetweenmaterialcultureandthe
development of our species. We will discuss the importance of creativity
to the evolution of humans, the relationship between material culture
andidentity,objectbiographies,non-westernwaysofunderstandingthe
material world, and the manifold ways that materials shape what it means
to be human. Along the way we will practice the close reading, writing,
and speaking skills needed to thrive in an intellectual community. Smith
CNX 134. Why Shakespeare?.
People around the world read and perform the works of William
Shakespeare. How have these words held so much attention for over
400 years? Do they truly animate and illuminate the universal human
condition,orisitjustacaseofsuperbbrand-namemarketingcombined
withcolonialism?Examiningtext,context,criticism,performance,and
adaptation,wewilltrytounderstandShakespeare’spowerfulpositionin
past and present global culture. Hopkins
CNX 136. Self in Life and Literature.
Whatisa ‘self’?Whydowe talk aboutidentity?Verydifferent,often
contradictory, yet intriguing answers to questions like these have been
formulated by psychologists, sociologists, philosophers, lmmakers,
novelists, poets, dramatists, and choreographers, among others. In this
course, we engage these varying perspectives on identity and the self.
Throughdiscussions,writingassignments,andin-classexercises,wewill
discoverthatthenotionsofthe‘self’inaestheticworksandinacademic
disciplines are often interrelated in interesting and surprising ways.
Bentzel
CNX 163. Dis/ability.
Disability is omnipresent in human life. Most individuals experience
disabling conditions at one time or another. A disability can be temporary
or permanent, congenital or acquired, visible or invisible. While
disability is an embodied experience, it is largely generated by cultural
and societal expectations about what constitutes a normative body. This
coursewillexplorehowshiftingnotionsofable-bodiednessencouraged
varying understandings of disability across time and cultures. Through
reading personal narratives in artistic, new media, ethnographic, and
poeticforms,wewillrevisitandchallengelong-heldassumptionsabout
suffering, embodiment, and a meaningful life. In appreciating disability
as a component of human diversity, this course will help you learn how
to critically evaluate arguments about health and body and use evidence
to defend your positions, whether in writing or speaking. Offered online
during Fall 2020 Di Giulio
CNX 173. Politics and Culture of Food.
We are what we eat. Our identities are tied up with our food ways. Food
is more than just calories consumed to sustain life: this course explores
how food is central to our sociocultural being and the politics of food
production and consumption. Throughout, we will read lots of great food
writers and do a lot of our own writing about food. Offered online during
Fall 2020 Schrader
CNX 177. Language and the 21st Century.
In this course, we will examine how developments of the 21st century are
affecting human language, in particular in terms of political correctness,
freedom of speech, technology, and the internet. We will read from the
perspectives of linguists, psychologists, and civil rights activists, among
others. Through close reading of these diverse perspectives, we will
develop an understanding of how academic arguments are crafted and
practice creating our own arguments in writing and in speech. Offered
online during Fall 2020. Cox
8 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
CONNECTIONS 1 TOPICS COURSES
CNX 102. Thinking About Seeing. Kaufer
CNX 101. Greek Tragedy and the Tragic. Biles
CNX 102. Thinking about Seeing. Kaüfer
CNX 118. Construct Caribbean Identities. Hebouche
CNX 122. Captivating Spaces. Hartman
CNX 129. Race and Religion. Feldman
CNX 133. Ethics and Experimentation. Batres
CNX 135. Music and Comedy. Adams
CNX 137. Home Is... Brooks
CNX 140. Who Owns Culture?. Aleci
CNX 144. World Cup Connections: Mitchell
The Global Game in Context.
CNX 146. Great Mysteries of the Past. Levine
CNX 147. How to Write Home. Anderson
CNX 149. Race, Gender, and Community. Helm
CNX 152. Gender, Race and Sexuality in Media. Misra
CNX 153. War and Peace. Kasparek
CNX 154. Engineering Boardgames. Gagnon
CNX 158. Social Activism: Effective Dialogue. Roncolato
CNX 162. Business, Crisis, and COVID-19. Kurland
CNX 175. Medieval Cities. McRee
CNX 181. Mountains, Natural Resources and Water. Ismat
CNX 188. The Good Life. McMahan
CNX 194. Welcome to the Future. Schneper
CNX 199. The Time of Your Life: Memory and the Self. Shuck
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 9
CONNECTIONS 2 SEMINARS
CNX 200. Israel in Context.
The trauma of the Shoah, the Zionist appropriation of the biblically-
rootednotionofJewish“chosenness,”the1948conict,andthesweeping
victoryofthesix-daywarin1967havecontributedtotheperceptionof
Israel as a country with an exceptional character and destiny. This course
aims to revisit this perception by placing Israel in a historical, cultural,
and social comparative context. In addition to exploring the complexities
surrounding Israel, this course offers several opportunities to reect
more broadly on the link between language, ethnicity, and nationhood,
andprovidesgroundsforareectiononthenatureofmigrantcultures
and divided loyalties. While engaging in a sustained research process, we
will become conversant with key concepts and methodologies current in
the scholarly discourse on Israel, and will hone critical thinking skills for
evaluating primary and secondary sources from a broad multidisciplinary
perspective. Di Giulio
CNX 201. Progress and Its Critics.
Thiscoursebeginswithaquestion:whyshouldweexpectlifetobebetter
tomorrowthanitistoday?TheideaofprogressisembeddedinWestern
lifeandthought;itinformsourpolitics,economicdecisions,educational
pursuits, religious beliefs, and personal relationships. We take progress
for granted. Even if we are cynical about the future, we still believe our
children’slivesshouldbemoreprosperous,easier,andfulllingthanours.
Whyisthis?Onwhatgroundsdoweholdtheseexpectations?Isprogress
anaturalthing?Doesifmakeusfreer?Wewillbeginourexplorationof
progress by considering its historical roots in the Renaissance,Age of
Exploration,ScienticRevolution,andtheEnlightenment.Muchofour
time will be taken up with the words and actions of contemporary critics.
Who are these people, and why do they oppose what most of us believe is
progress in diverse areas such as medicine, technology, consumer culture,
education,andhumanrights? Deslippe
CNX 203. Propaganda and Genocide.
This course attempts to nd the root cause that creates killers out of
otherwiseordinarycitizens.Thiscoursewillbegintheexplorationofmind
manipulation through the mass media—rst in apparently “harmless”
exploits, then in slightly more sinister delivery methods with stronger
intentions – resulting in the ultimate crime—genocide. This course will
lookatrsthandexamplesofpropagandathroughoutthe20thand21st
centuriesindifferentpartsoftheworld,includingNaziGermany,Africa
andCambodia.Additionally,thecourseexplorestheaffectivetechniques
used in the creation of propaganda. Podoshen
CNX 205. Bringing Up Bodies.
Death is inevitable but burial is not. Rulers construct pyramids and
familiesbuyplotstolietogetherforeternity;theashesofamanmaybe
scattered in an exotic location he once visited, while a homeless woman is
placed in a paper box and interred in a communal grave. This course will
center on the treatment of the corpse in historical and cultural contexts
using several archaeological and anthropological case studies. Far from
beingadepressingtopic,thesegravemattersallowustoreectonthereal
lives of people we have never met. Castor
CNX 206. Understanding Terrorism.
Whatgoesthroughsomeone’sheadwhenhedecidesthatyingaplane
into a skyscraper is the right thing to do?Why does someone choose
to detonate herself to kill random people in a marketplace?Are they
crazy?Religiousfanatics?Tragicallymisledbycharismaticleaders?Are
theydrivenbygreed?Ordesperation?Cantheircausesbenobleorare
theysimplyevil?Insum,whatdowereallyknowaboutwhyterrorists
choosesuchtactics?Inconsideringthecausesofterrorism,wewilltake
a critical look at how the subject is framed and explained by a variety
of disciplinary perspectives, including history, anthropology, political
science, sociology, psychology, economics, philosophy, and women’s
studies. We will examine many of the ongoing debates regarding terrorism
and compare the different approaches and types of evidence various types
of researchers bring to the issue. Kibbe
CNX 207. Politics, Poverty and Gender.
This course explores how poverty and development processes affect
women and men around the world. Using countries in Asia, Africa, and
LatinAmericaasourclassroom,wewillaskourselvesseveralquestions
duringthesemester,suchas:Whatispovertyandwhydoesitexist?What
isdevelopment?Howdodevelopmentandpovertyaffectwomenandgirls,
differentlyifatall?Thesequestionsmatter.Internationalorganizations
liketheWorldBankandtheFoodandAgricultureOrganizationestimate
thatapproximately1.3billionpeopleliveonlessthan$1.25adayand
are malnourished. Many argue that women are disproportionately affected
by poverty. For example, fewer girls than boys receive basic education
andmillionsofgirlsaretrafckedeveryyeartogenerateincome.Our
understanding of these issues can help us better formulate public policy,
bothintheUnitedStatesandabroad,andhelptoimprovethelivesof
millions of people around the world. McNulty
CNX 208. Innity.
Inthiscoursewewilltakealookatsomeofthemany(maybeinnitely
many?) aspects of innity. We start by investigating some differences
betweenthevery,verybigandtheinnite.Wethenconsidersomeofthe
classicinnity paradoxes, pay a visit to Borges’slibrary,and consider
themultiversetheory.Wealsoshowthattherearemanydifferentsizes
ofinnity.SincethisisaConnections2course,youwillfurtherdevelop
the reading, writing, and research skills you learned in Connections 1,
including writing a research paper from multiple sources that explore an
aspectofinnityofinteresttoyou. I. Praton
CNX 209. Nature of Hope.
It may be argued that of all emotions, none is more important than hope to
humansurvivalanddevelopment.InthisConnectionsIISeminarwedraw
upon a range of psychological, philosophical, spiritual and literary works
in order to examine the multifaceted nature of hope. We are interested in
exploring, in conversation, lecture, and in your own carefully constructed
writing, the many ways in which hope expresses itself. We will also
examine the ethical, social and aesthetic conditions under which hope
seems most able to thrive. Of particular note will be our effort to integrate
scienticandempiricaltraditionsofwesternresearchwithphilosophical
andmysticaltraditionsthathavecharacterizedeasternapproachestothe
study and practice of hope. Penn
CNX 210. False Realities: from Plato to The Matrix.
Whatisreal?Istheworldthewayitappearstobe?Howcanrealitybe
distinguishedfrom mere appearance? Given thedifculty of making a
clear distinction, what can we truly know? These questions have been
troubling the human mind for centuries and are especially relevant
today, in the world of virtual realities. This course will explore how this
universal concern with the nature of reality connects different times and
disciplines. Ryjik
CNX 211. The Future of Public Education in America.
This class will take a careful, critical look at the current state of public
education in America, including contemporary critiques of public
schools and key reform proposals in four key areas: teachers, curriculum,
accountability, and choice. Drawing from research in psychology and
sociology on the factors that affect student learning, and in public policy
on the factors that shape effective reforms, we will examine the claims of
bothcriticsandsupportersofpubliceducation.ThisisaCBLclass;an
integralcomponentofourworkwillbethe2hours/weekstudentswill
spend tutoring in the local public schools. McClelland
CNX 214. Collage.
Thection writer Donald Barthelme famously declared, “the principle
of collage is the central principle of all art in the 20th century.” In this
course,wewillusecollagetoexploresuchquestionsas:Howdoesthe
transformationofrawmaterialsitselfconstitutemeaning?Howdoideas
becomeform,andhowdoesformcommunicatesymboliccontent?What
istherelationshipbetweenabstractionandrepresentation?Studentswill
gainhands-on collage experience, and will research, write andpresent
on collage artists. These projects will be supplemented with readings in
art history, art criticism, and philosophy; discussion and short writing
assignments. The collage work will emphasize visual problem-solving
and invention, and the development of thematic materials through
multiplerevisions,usingbothpaperanddigitalmedia.Studentswillwork
withAdobePhotoshop;nopriorexperienceisrequired. Brady
10 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
CNX 215. Geographic Boundaries and Cultural Isolation.
Whatistheroleofgeographicboundariesonculturaldevelopment?We
will examine how mountain ranges, in particular, have limited cultural
exchange between communities. We will examine how mountains form,
geologically. We will explore mountain ranges and cultures around the
world, but focus on the varied topography and peoples of the Appalachians
and western Himalayas. Ismat
CNX 216. Reasons in Action.
This is a class about acting rationally: what it means, why we sometimes
fail at it, and how we can do better. We will look at issues in practical
rationality via literature from decision and game theory, economics,
psychology, and philosophy. Topics include collective action problems,
theconnectionbetweenreasons,desires,andself-interest,heuristicsand
biasesindecision-making,willpower,andresponsibility. Merli
CNX 217. Language and World.
We will look at the ways in which language presupposes certain things
about the world and whether these presuppositions are correct. We will
pay close attention to issues involving existence, identity, time, possibility,
and truth. We will also discuss to what extent different languages make
different presuppositions about the world and whether these differences
should make us skeptical of drawing connections between language and
the world. Kroll
CNX 219. Food.
Food.Weneedit,longforit,ghtoverit,evenkillforit.Throughour
manipulations of food, we express our love, our anger, and our tenderness.
Yet,theordinarinessandavailabilityoffoodalsodullsustoitssignicance.
Foodisnotonlyaboutnutritionandtheneedforsustenance;itispacked
withsocialandculturalmeaning.Althoughallhumanbeingseat,wedon’t
alleatthesamethingsorinthesameway.Let’spayattentiontofoodand
what we eat by examining what can food tell us about our identities, about
who we are culturally and socially. This course will enhance your skills as
a critical reader and writer even as we engage with issues surrounding the
production and consumption of food Mongia
CNX 220. Childbirth and Midwifery Across Time and Disciplines.
We typically think of childbirth as a most fundamental and universal
human experience. In fact, childbirth and the identities of the people
who deliver babies have varied tremendously over time and from culture
to culture. In this course we will explore childbirth and the delivery of
infants from the perspectives of history, anthropology, medicine, biology,
feminist thought, religion, law, and literature. Students will have an
opportunity to carry out a research project on childbirth and delivery
within a particular disciplinary perspective and gain exposure to a wide
array of cross-disciplinary approaches as they collaborate with other
students. Shelton
CNX 221. Rebels, Revolutionaries and Empire
in the Eighteenth Century Atlantic.
This course traces the connections between the Atlantic revolutions of
theeighteenthcenturyandthestruggleforhumanrightsandcitizenship.
Drawing on primary as well as secondary materials from an array of
disciplines, including history, literary studies, and political theory,
students will explore how ordinary people, both free and enslaved, in
North America, France, and Saint Domingue (now Haiti) connected
the experiences of their own lives to larger questions about liberty,
enslavement, and political rights. We then turn to the campaign in
England to abolish the international slave trade as an example of a popular
movement dedicated to human rights. The course concludes with two case
studiesaboutthestrugglesforcitizenshipandrights;rst,theyearsofthe
CivilWarandReconstruction(1861–1877)and,second,thestrugglefor
gayrights,bylookingattheStonewallriotsthattriggeredthemoderngay
rightsmovementofthe1970’s. Pearson
CNX 222. Better Worlds.
Hunger,poverty,disease,climate change,violent conict—the world’s
problemsdemandattention.Whatarethedangersinacceptingthisstatus-
quo?Aretherealsodangersinseekingtorealizethebetterworld?What
roledoutopianvisionsplayinsociety?Inthiscourseweconsiderarange
ofeffortstoenvisionorrealizethe“better”or“utopian”worldfromthe
standpoint of the natural sciences, lm studies, philosophy, literature,
religious studies and economics. Reitan
CNX 225. Banned Books and Jailed Writers.
The history of language and communication is also the history of
censorship and the prohibition of expressing ideas. In considering the
nature of preventing certain works and thoughts from circulating and
punishingtheirauthors,thiscoursewilltouchuponquestionsofliterary
taste, political and ideological writing, blasphemy and heresy, morality,
and pornography. Through primary and secondary readings and regular
writing and research assignments, students will juxtapose the right of free
speech with the needs of society. The goal of this course is to explore
the complex social and cultural forces revealed by censorship and to
understandtheimportanceoftheghtsanddebatesprovokedwhenbooks
arebanned.Wewillutilizethisnuancedandmulti-facetedtopictohone
critical thinking skills and discuss ideas from a variety of perspectives.
Stone
CNX 227. Chocolate: The Dark Side.
Chocolate: food of the gods, emergency energy ration for American
soldiers, coveted treat for costumed children on Halloween. The dark
sideofchocolate:questionablehealth“benets”,destructivecultivation
practices, exploitative marketing campaigns, and child labor abuses in
West Africa. This course will examine the history and culture of chocolate
usingsourcesfromanthropology,sociology,psychology,economics,lm,
and literature to inform our discussions. We will attempt to understand
why chocolate is so popular and how the constant yet changing demand
forchocolatehashadanimpactoncivilizationthroughouttime.Students
will continue to develop their writing, reading, critical thinking and
research skills by examining the true history of this seemingly harmless
sweet and exploring the broader issues surrounding this most decadent of
luxury foodstuffs. Yetter-Vassot
CNX 230. Mars and Venus on The Pill.
ThisConnections 2Seminar willexplore the ethical, political, religious,
marketing, and societal implications of the science and technology
associated with human sexual reproduction and aging. How the birth
control pill and Viagra work will be discussed as well as larger issues
associated with contraception, erectile dysfunction, hormone replacement,
invitrofertilization(IVF),clinicaltrials,healthinsurance,andgovernment
regulations.TheobjectiveofthisConnections2Seminaristhecontinuing
development of your reading, writing, speaking, critical thinking, and
research skills. The Seminar will draw Connections between science
anditssocialimpact;e.g.,biologyandchemistrywillbeconnectedwith
economics and ethics. A theme of the course will be that science does not
existinavacuumandmarketing,politics,andreligioncanallinuencehow
science and technology affect the everyday life of individuals. Fenlon
CNX 232. The Modernist Revolution in European Literature.
Foragenerationof“Modernist”writersattheturnofthetwentiethcentury
and in the decades surrounding World War I, the old faiths were dead.
DeadwasfaithinGodandadivinelyorderedcosmos;deadwasfaithin
humanReasonanditspowertounderstandtheuniverse;deadwasfaith
inProgress,ledbyScienceonapathtowardthebettermentofthehuman
condition.Anddeadwasthemodeofwriting—“Realism”—mostinsync
with these certainties. This seminar will be devoted to the disorienting,
marvelouslyinnovativectionofthreeextraordinaryModernistwriters:
MarcelProust,LuigiPirandelloandFranzKafka,translatedfromFrench,
Italian and German, respectively. S. Lerner
CNX 233. In and Out of Africa.
What does it mean to beAfrican? Writers both native-born (Insiders)
andadoptive(Outsiders)haveportrayedthecontinent in myriad ways.
Examining those portrayals from the perspectives of literature, history, and
gender studies, among others, we will concentrate on issues of ownership
and belonging, contrasting the voices of the Insider and the Outsider.
Essay assignments, class discussion, and individual presentations will
focus on how the differences between Insiders and Outsiders manifest in
the dynamic power structures at work in African society and identity, and
thestoriesthatreectandaffectthem.Additionally,inasemester-long,
multi-disciplinaryresearchproject,studentswillusetheirownexpertise
andinterestinanyacademiceldtoansweraquestionorsolveaproblem
related to the course theme. Hopkins
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 11
CNX 234. Zeno’s Paradoxes.
About 2,500 years ago, Zeno developed four paradoxes that purport
to show under any conceivable understanding of space and time that
motion is impossible. These arguments seem utterly convincing, and
philosophers, mathematicians, and physicists have been struggling ever
since to overcome them. We’ll join that struggle, re-examining our
ordinary assumptions about space, time, and numbers in a fascinating mix
ofphilosophy,math(includingsettheory,numbertheory,andtransnite
arithmetic),andjustabitofcontemporaryphysics. Helm
CNX 237. What Work Is.
For most people, work is necessary for survival. However, many societies
work well beyond what is needed to provide for material existence, and
individuals suffer from hurried and stressed working environments.
The decoupling of work from the provisioning of necessities suggests
that work is about culture. This course explores the cultural dimensions
of the activity deemed work. It explores the role of technology, social
organization,religion,class,andconsumerismonworkeffort,formsof
work,andconsequencesofworking.Thecoursealsoexploresreactions
against dominant cultural norms concerning work. In addition students
willresearchandpresentndingsonspecicoccupations. Brennan
CNX 239. Modernity.
This course has two related aims: at the surface level, to gain a
chronological understanding of the history of Western ideas from the
Renaissancetothe20th-century.Throughreadingessays,plays,novels,
and poems, listening to music, and viewing art—all selected to illustrate
thedevelopmentof“modern”ideas—wewillcometoappreciatetheroots
ofhowandwhywethinkandbelieveas we do today.But our deeper
aim is to evaluate critically the ideas, conceptions, and philosophical
attitudes of the past and present. Of course, through this material, we aim
to achieve greater depth and skill at critical thinking and argument, both
orally and in writing. Billig
CNX 240. The Whale.
This course focuses on The Whale as a focal point for understanding human
connections to the natural world, using multiple disciplinary approaches.
Wewill learn aboutwhales’ uniquephysical/biologicaladaptation tothe
environment they live in, as well as how humans have relied on them both
directlyasaresource,andindirectly/culturallyforinspiration.Wewilltake
a 360-degree view of the whale, engaging with biology, anthropology,
economics, literature, art, and music. In order to examine these different
perspectives, students will engage with a range of readings and media
sources, and hone critical reading and writing skills, as well as active
listening and speaking. De Santo
CNX 244. Exploring WWI Thru Literature.
A century ago, World War I transformed the world in dramatic ways. In this
course, students will learn about the origins and chronology of the war and the
technologicalinnovationsthatemergedfromit.Theywillexplorethewar’s
psychological and embodied effects, as well as artistic and cultural attempts
toacknowledge,representandmemorializeitsdevastation.Studentswill
readhistory,ctionandmemoir,examinenewspapercoverage,cartoons,
propagandaposters,photographsandlms,andanalyzematerialevidence
of World War I’s destruction and commemoration. Through this work,
students will improve their critical reading and discussion skills, practice
writing in various genres, and develop their information literacy through a
research project focused on a material object related to the war. Redmann
CNX 245. Decision Making: The Rational and the Emotional.
Revised:Drawingfromavarietyofdisciplinaryperspectives,thiscourse
will examine various factors that inuence individuals as they make
decisions that affect their everyday lives. Close examinations of rational
choice theory, emotion, social identity, and memory will frame debates
aboutthedecision-makingprocessandhonestudents’abilitytoresearch,
self-reect, think critically, and communicate clearly in speech and in
writing. Ciuk, Merli
CNX 247. Cross-Examining the Witness.
According to Annette Wieviorka, we live in “the era of the witness.”
Individual testimonies are cultivated and often applauded, whether they be
fromtraumasurvivors,bystandersofpolicebrutality,orNike-sponsored
athletes.Wewillcriticallyapproachthisculturaltraditionbyanalyzing
historical, legal, and literary testimonies and studying disciplinary
differences about how works of witness ought to be approached. Writing
assignments will guide you to closely read archival and contemporary
texts, evaluate contrasting works of scholarship, and pursue an informed,
nuanced argument. Goldberg
CNX 250. The Story of You: An Autoethnographic Exploration.
Autoethnography is a form of interdisciplinary self-study, combining
personal reection (memoir) and academic research (scholarship)
to understand events and elements of one’s life in a broader cultural
context. In this course, students will develop critical thinking, reading,
writing, listening, and speaking skills. They will learn the meaning of
autoethnography, analyzeexamples from a variety of disciplines (e.g.,
sociology, anthropology, race and gender studies) in essays and class
discussions, and write and present their own autoethnographies on topics
they choose. Hopkins
CNX 251. 9/11 in Public Memory.
“NeverForget9/11.”Atleastonceayear,wehearthiscommand.Butwhat
exactlyarewebeingaskedtoremember?Usingavarietyofsources,such
asjournalisticaccountsandgovernmentreports,aswellasnovels,lm,and
TV,thiscoursewilllookattheshapinginpublicmemoryoftheSeptember
11, 2001 attacks and the subsequent war on terror. With this multi-
media approach, we will come to understand that the ways in which we
remember—andweforget—certainaspectsof9/11playaroleinshaping
ourunderstandingofthe United Statesandits place ontheworldstage.
Writing assignments will include a researched essay, pursued in stages
throughout the semester. Frick
CNX 253. Invention of Childhood.
This seminar-style class explores how different societies view or have
viewedchildren.Wewilladdressthequestionsofwhetherchildhoodisa
sociallyconstructedentity;howchildrenbecomefunctioningadultsintheir
culture;andhowadults’beliefsaboutchildrenaffectthewayschildrenare—
orarenot—taught,disciplined,spokento,andgivenfreedom.Frequently
ourfocuswillbeonAmericanchildhoods.Studentswillgainsignicant
practiceinpublicspeaking(formalandinformal),academicwriting,critical
thinking, and research methods. Casler
CNX 255. Why We Hate.
Why have groups of people targeted other groups of people for hatred,
discrimination,andpersecutionthroughouthumanhistory?Inthiscourse
we will use multiple disciplinary perspectives to begin to answer this
fundamentalquestion.Wewilllookatanumberofhistoricalexamplesof
grouphatred;examinesomeoftherootcausesofthesehatreds;explore
modern examples of Genocide and Ethnic Cleansing, and research and
analyzeHategroupsincontemporaryAmerica. Hoffman
CNX 257. Europe-America:(Mis)perception.
Drawing from a variety of disciplinary perspectives, this course will
examineEuropean-Americanrelationsand(mis)perceptionswithspecial
attention to how historic patterns and experiences shape contemporary
transatlantic discourses.Analysis of tropes of racism, civilization, and
democracy will frame investigations of revolution, war, and cultural
exchange designed to hone liberal arts skills of critical thinking, engaged
reading, effective writing, research, information literacy, and thoughtful
self-expression. Mitchell
CNX 258. Object Lessons.
Whatcanwelearnfromthings?Fromfamilyheirloomstocommodities
to stolen goods—the objects lling this world importantly shape our
individual and collective identities. We explore this proposition by
developing the fundamental skills of close reading and careful looking, and
through individual research projects on the exhibitions and collections of
F&M’sPhillipsMuseumofArt.Focusingonconnectionsbetweenobjects,
collectors, anthropologists, immigrants, thieves, historians and others,
studentslearnto“read”thetangible,exploringthemanystoriesthatobjects
yield. Aleci
CNX 259. Elusive Justice.
Justiceissuesdominateournews.Dictatorsarrestdissidentsontrumpedup
charges,policekillunarmedcitizens,victimsofcivilwararetreatedlike
outcasts.Isjusticereallysohardtoachieve?Ifitis,why?Doesn’tthefact
thatweseekjusticeforeshadowabettersociety?Thiscourseexaminesfour
thinkerswhograppledwiththesequestionsfromphilosophical,religious,
and political perspectives. Exploring their ideas helps students develop skills
in argumentation, concise writing, and doing scholarly research.
Whiteside
CNX 263. Materials and Humanity.
Diamond, gold, copper, glass, iron, and clay: Materials like these have
playedakeyroleinthesuccessofthehumanenterprisefromthePaleolithic
tothepresent.ThisCNXseminarwillexplorethepropertiesandutilization
of different materials that have inuenced human history and underpin
modern society. Through reading, writing, and experimentation, we’ll
explore materials from multiple perspectives to understand how humans
have exploited materials to innovate and advance technology and society.
Aspartofthisprocess,studentswillconductaresearchprojectonaspecic
materialthatwillculminateinanalreport. C. Williams
CNX 265. U.S. in the World, 1914-19.
“Studyoftheyears1914-1919willshowhowtheGreatWaraffectedthe
lives of people and nations on every continent. The war involved soldiers
and nurses as well as people on the home front. After the war debates
raged about the shape of the peace. How would the aggressors pay for
the war, and would the age of imperialism end?The course draws on
wartimection,lm,poems,diaries,paintings,andpostwarmonuments.
Assignmentswillteachstudentstheprocessofresearch,includingnding
authorities and primary sources and preparation of a coherent, purposeful
narrative. Stevenson
CNX 269. Psychology and Religion.
Whatcan psychologyteach usabout religion?Thecourse begins with
important 19th century philosophers and psychologists, turns to Freud
and other psychoanalytic thinkers on religion, and concludes with a
contemporary attempt to fuse psychodynamic theory with evolutionary
psychologytodevelopamodernscienticpsychologyofreligion.The
course work is geared toward learning skills for doing academic research
andcombiningtheminanalresearchpaperonareligiousphenomenon
ofchoiceanalyzedinlightofpsychologicaltheories. Cooper
CNX 271. Islam in North America.
This course will introduce students to the history of Islam and Muslims in
NorthAmerica,andtothecontributionofMuslimstothereligious,cultural,
andpoliticallifeoftheUnitedStatesandCanada.Particularattentionwill
be paid to the experience and contribution of African American Muslims,
a fascinating narrative and topic that often gets left out of discussions on
the interaction of race and religion in the region. A key goal of this course
will be to highlight the diversity of the Muslim American Community
and the challenges it has faced overtime. This course will focus on the
development of student skills in close reading, writing, class discussion,
and library research. The course will be scaffolded by a semester long
research project on the themes of the course. Tareen
CNX 279. Utopia/Dystopia.
Attempts to imagine or create a good community raise some of the
mostbasicquestionsaboutourspecies:Whatkindofcreatureishomo
sapiens?How do assumptions about human nature informconceptions
ofagood--andfeasible--community?Bywhatmeanscan/shouldhumans
achieve social order? What responsibilities do individuals have to the
largercommunityandthecommunitytoitsindividualmembers?What
relationship and responsibility do human communities have to the rest of
earthlylife?Inwhatwaysdocommunitiesgowrong—becomedystopias?
What have the relationships been between utopian texts, theories, and
variousexperimentsinutopianliving?Readingsincludeworksofction,
religion, history and philosophy. You will continue developing the
reading,writingandcriticalthinkingskillsyoucultivatedinyourCNX1.
You’llalsodevelopresearchskillsinaprojectonareal-worldexperiment
in utopian living. Mueller
CNX 281. Unequal America.
SincetheDeclarationofIndependence,theUnitedStateshascelebrated
‘equality’asafoundingprinciple.Buttherearestrikinginconsistencies
betweenthevalueofequalityandtheactualconditionsofsocial,economic,
anddemocraticlife.Thecentralquestionposedbythiscourseis:What
aretheimplicationsofinequalityforAmericandemocracytoday?Aswe
examinethenation’sunevenlandscapeofclassandcivicstatus,students
willsharpentheiracademicskillsofsynthesizinginformationandwriting
a critical research paper. Wilson
CNX 291. The Shape of Space.
Althoughtheearthhasnitearea,onecouldwalkforeverandneverreach
anedge.The same maybe truefor ouruniverse (nite volume with no
edges).Wewilllearnaboutthemathematicalpossibilitiesfortheshapeof
space and about the early cosmos. We will then connect the two through
a program that may uncover the exact shape of our universe. The course
will culminate in individual research projects that build on skills developed
in CNX1. In these projects, students will further explore the math, the
cosmology,andtheconnectionsbetweenthem,sharingtheirndingsboth
orally and in writing. Nimershiem
CNX 299. Tooth and Claw: Story of the Wolf.
In this course, we will examine historic and modern literature, art, policy,
and science to learn about the perception of the wolf across time and
cultures and the role of the wolf in maintaining "healthy"
ecosystems. You will develop critical thinking skills which allow you
to evaluate positions on controversial topics such as wolf extirpation
and reintroduction, the portrayal of wolves in the media, and managing
human/wildlife conict. You will acquire the skills which allow you
to effectively research a topic pertaining to wolves and to cultivate a
persuasiveargument.Thecoursewillculminateinanalprojectinwhich
you write a research paper and make an oral presentation defending your
viewpointaboutwolvestoavarietyofpotentialstakeholders.Aeldtrip
totheWolfSanctuaryofPAwillbeincludedinthiscourse.
Dawson
CONNECTIONS 2 TOPICS COURSES
CNX 218. Southern Stories. Stevenson
CNX 213. Virtual Reality. Guarasci
CNX 223. Honest Work. Jaros
CNX 229. Everyday Design. Laurie
CNX 236. Inequality in Modern Society. Leimgruber
CNX 238. Follow the Money. Nersisyan
CNX 254. Entertaining Violence. Eitzen
CNX 268. Researching Lancaster. Hodos
CNX 275. Music as a Political Weapon. Katz-Rosene
CNX 277. Unreason. Kaüfer
CNX 280. Exile. Tisnado
CNX 284. Disruptive Technologies. Krebs
CNX 297. Landscapes People Water. Merritts
NATURAL SCIENCE
IN PERSPECTIVE COURSES
NSP 109. How and Why We Run.
Runningisbothafundamentalformoflocomotionandapopularphysical
activity. This course will examine the act of running from ascientic
perspective, focusing on the physiology and biomechanics of running,
as well as the emotional and cognitive effects of sustained aerobic
activity. We will also explore reasons why different studies can provide
contradictory results, and how research on running is represented in the
popularmedia.Notethatthiscoursewillnotrequireanyactualrunning.
Olson
NSP 111. Energy Issues in Science and Society.
This course explores the basic science of energy, world energy use
patterns and some of the environmental and social consequences of
energy use. Statistics on energy use and energy resources around the
world are examined. The laws of physics which govern energy production
andconversionareintroducedandusedtoquantitativelydiscussenergy
sources.Thescienticprinciplesofelectricitygenerationandalternative
energies are discussed in some detail. The course touches upon the
interplay between science, public policy and economics in dealing with
energy issues. Crawford
12 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 13
NSP 112. The Nature of Oceans.
The Nature of Oceans will investigate the questions: what constitutes
acceptable evidence in science and how do we make rational decisions
about issues that affect shared natural resources? You will confront
thesequestionsthroughaseriesofcasestudiesofcurrentusesofocean
resources. Throughout the course you will explore the physiology of
marine animals as well as the biology of diverse ocean communities and
ecosystems. Thompson
NSP 117. Women/Science.
This course will introduce students to the role of women in science
bothas participantsin thecreation of scientic knowledge, and as the
subjects of biological study of the female body. Topics will include sexual
development, pregnancy, childbirth, and menopause, as well as education
andprofessionalachievementinthesciences.Studentswillexaminethe
contributions of women scientists through the lens of feminism, with an
emphasis on the barriers women have faced historically and those that
remain today. Same as WGS 117. Blair
NSP 118. Water, Life and Society.
This course examines the history, development, management, and policy
issues associated with one of the most remarkable substances on Earth,
water.Thestorageandowofwaterinthenaturalworldareexploredto
provide a basis for considering how people have rerouted water since the
developmentofagriculture.Theassociationbetweencivilizationandthe
construction of dams and irrigation projects is explored using case studies
that include water conicts and shortages from around the world. As
population and consumption grow and water becomes increasingly scarce
and/orpolluted,watermanagementandpolicybecomemorecomplex. 
Merritts
NSP 119. Biology and Social Constructs.
This course will introduce students to the fundamental biological processes
of inheritance and sex determination in living organisms and examine
the interplay of these concepts in our (mis)understanding of two social
constructs commonly attributed to a biological basis: gender and race.
Topics will include diversity of sexual mating systems, mechanisms of
sex determination, concepts of genetic transmission and ancestry, pedigree
analysisandhumanpopulationgenetics.Studentswillcriticallyevaluate
studies that apply and extend these concepts and their intersection with
social constructs. Same as WGS 119. Mena-Ali
NSP 136. Science Revolutions
This course surveys the question of what constitutes a scientic
revolution. Beginning with Thomas Kuhn’s famous theory in The
StructureofScienticRevolutions(1970),wesurveynumerousepisodes
in the development of the sciences, from the seventeenth century to the
present. Using case studies from chemistry, physics, life sciences, and the
interdisciplinaryeldoforiginoflifestudies,wetrytodeterminewhatit
wouldmeanforascienticrevolutiontooccur,wouldhappen,andhow
to assess whether such a thing might be underway currently. The course
in many ways serves as a broad introduction to history and sociology of
science. Strick
NSP 137. History of Space and Time.
This course traces the development of views on space and time, from
classicalGreecetothemoderntheoryofpaceandtime,relativity.Students
will gain a conceptual understanding of relativity as well as use algebra
to work out detailed problems. We will discuss some of the revolutionary
aspects of relativity such as black holes, the warping of space, time travel
and the big bang. We will explore the philosophical implications of
relativity, how our modern view of space and time has changed our view
oftheworldandhowithasinuencedsociety,literatureandart.Stubbins
NSP 138. Lakes as Sentinels.
Lakes are considered to be sentinels of environmental change because
they respond rapidly to meteorological conditions and are closely linked
to the surrounding catchment. The course will focus on basic physics,
chemistry, and biology of lakes, as well as the importance of freshwater
tohumankind.Hands-onexperiencesintheeldandlaboratorywillbe
emphasized. Fischer
NSP 145. Illuminated: Light and Society.
This course will illuminate the nature of light and how it impacts society.
The course will start with a quantitative introduction to light as an
electromagnetic wave. We will build on this fundamental understanding
of light to explain the origins of vision, our perception of color, and its
manifestations in art and nature. Lastly, we will connect light to the
development of technologies essential for an environmentally sustainable
society,light-emittingdiodesandphotovoltaics. Plass
NSP 149. Life on Mars.
Is,orwas,therelifeonMars?WhataboutinourSolarSystemorgalaxy?
These intriguing questions will be addressed by examining the origins
and evolution of Mars, and by comparing Mars to the geological and
biological evolution of the Earth. From Lowell’s observations in the
1890’s to exciting new discoveries by NASA’s Mars Reconnaissance
Orbiter and Phoenix Lander and the European Space Agency’s Mars
Express missions, our understanding of the red planet is increasing,
but many questions remain. Perhaps human exploration of Mars will
provide the answers and at the same time increase our appreciation of the
uniquenessofplanetEarth. A. de Wet
NSP 157. History of Natural History.
Inthiscourse,we’llcoverbrieythehistoryofman’sfascinationwith
Nature, from cave paintings to Ancient Philosophers to New World
Explorersandbeyond.ThehistoryofNaturalHistoryreectsveryclosely
theevolutionofthescienticmethod:withadvancesinphilosophicaland
empirical approaches to interpret their observations, naturalists developed
intoscientists.Therigorofthescienticmethodcanbeunderstoodwhen
current forms of natural history are examined. From the development of
ecologyasascienticdisciplinetothepopularizationofnatureshows,a
rigorousexaminationofnaturalhistorywillallowstudentstovisualizethe
differentlevels of datacollection,analysis,condenceanduncertainty.
Aswelearnfromthepast,studentswillstarttheirownNaturalistjournals
as a way to appreciate nature and to develop a keen appetite and respect
forthecomplexstructureofourenvironment.We’llincludeavisittothe
museumofnaturalhistoryinPhiladelphia,aswellasNaturalist-oriented
trips to the Millport Conservancy and other locations for exploration and
inspiration. Mena-Ali
NSP 163. Environment: Science and Policy.
The objective of this Science in Perspective course is to explore
fundamental questions such as: What is scientic inquiry? What role
shouldscienceplayindeterminingenvironmentalpolicy?Thiscourseis
designedtofosteranappreciationofthescienticmethodthatisrooted
inexperimentalmeasurementandquantitativeuncertainty.Givenrelevant
historical precedents such as the USAcid Rain Program and the UN
MontrealProtocol, theissue ofclimate change will be examined from
scientic,economic,political,andethicalperspectives. Leber
NSP 168. Food, Plants and Nutrition.
Astheworldpopulationcontinuestoincrease,howdowefeedtheworld’s
people?Whoaretheworld’shungryandwhy?Canfoodbegrownina
sustainable way? Is organic, local food production really better?What
istheimpactoflivestockontheenvironment?Aregenetically-modied
crops the answer to world hunger, or do they threaten the ecosystem?
Isthere reallya globalepidemic ofobesity?This coursewill examine
concernsaboutfoodandnutritionthatinuenceourlivesasindividuals
and as members of local, national, and global communities. Rice
NSP 185. Impact of Reproductive Technology.
This course will examine how reproductive technology has altered the way
humans create and view family. Advances in medicine and manufacturing
in the past century have produced unprecedented levels of control in
preventing or producing offspring. What are the modern ways to make a
baby?Howhavetheseoptionsalteredourviewsoffamilyplanningand
parenting?Whatistheeffectonthelegal,social,andspiritualstandingof
thechild(orpotentialchild)?Howdoestheimpactofmodernreproductive
practicesvarywithdifferentreligionsandcultures? Moore
14 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
NSP 210. Genetically Modied Organisms.
This course is designed for students not intending to major in the natural
sciences,andisdividedintoclassroomandlaboratorycomponents(there
is no additional lab time). Topics discussed will include the origins
and history of GMOs, their present uses in agriculture, industry and
biomedicine, current controversies surrounding GMOs, and potential
future applications of GM technology. A key focus of the course will be
the use, misuse and selective disregard of evidence in the application of
scienticresearchtopolicyconsiderations.Concurrentlyinthelaboratory
studentswilllearnthetechniquesnecessarytoidentifyGMOsinfood,
andcreatetheirown(harmless)GMOs. Fields
NSP 295. Coral Reefs in Time and Space.
This course addresses the history of reefs back through geologic time,
andlooks to the future in light of ocean acidication,coral bleaching,
and coastal development. High rates of anthropomorphic change, from
overshingtoglobalwarming,threatencoralreefsinwaysunprecedented
inEarth’s history and this course offersa view of how interconnected
global systems affect this important marine community. We examine
interactions and connections between geological, biological, physical
and chemical systems as they determine reef composition and stability.
We discuss the role of reefs in popular culture, from the discovery of
these“citiesbelowthesea”,tomodernresortsandeco-tourism,andhow
reefs are expressed in the visual arts for the public good and private goals.
C. de Wet
NSP 365. Occult Science and Pseudoscience.
The class will gain a basic familiarity with the history of the occult sciences
and pseudoscience. Students will learn about the boundaries between
what they dene as “bunk” and what they dub “legitimate” science,
whatisauthenticknowledgeaboutnature,andwhogetstodenewhat
counts as proper science. Likewise, the class will gain skills to understand
the nature of science itself and how it operates. Same as STS 365.
K. A. Miller
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 15
Department and Program Oerings
KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS
(A) Arts(Distributionrequirement)
(H) Humanities(Distributionrequirement)
(S) SocialSciences(Distributionrequirement)
(N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory (Distribution
requirement)
(LS) LanguageStudiesrequirement
(NSP) NaturalScienceinPerspective
(NW) Non-WesternCulturesrequirement
Note:Courseswith“7”inthemiddle(forexampleENG
179,AFS370)arespecialtopicscourses;titlesandcourse
numbers may vary from semester to semester.
AFRICANA STUDIES
Professor Van Gosse, Chair
MEMBERS OF THE AFRICANA STUDIES
PROGRAM COMMITTEE
Van Gosse Professor of History
Eiman Zein-Elabdin Professor of Economics
Nadra Hebouche Associate Professor of Francophone
Studies and French
Harriet Okatch Assistant Professor of Biology and
Public Health
Additional faculty not on the program committee
also contribute to this program.
Africana Studies is an interdisciplinary program combining
the study of Africa and the African Diaspora, including
the African American experience. Numerous disciplines
contributetoAfricanaStudiesatFranklin&Marshall,among
themAmerican Studies,Anthropology, Economics, English,
French, Government, History, Music, Religious Studies and
Sociology.
A major in Africana Studiesconsistsofninecourses:AFS/
AMS 150 orAFS/HIS 149;AFS/HIS 141or 142;AFS/HIS
233;AFS490;andveelectives,atleastoneofwhichmustbe
numbered300orhigher.Atleastoneelectivemustcomefrom
American Studies,Art, English, French,Music or Religious
Studies;atleastoneelectivemustcomefromAnthropology,
Economics, Government or Sociology. Prospective majors
should take note that some of the electives may have
prerequisites(e.g.,introductorylevelcoursesinAnthropology,
Economics or Sociology), such that the number of courses
necessarytocompletetheAFSmajormayexceednine.
A minor in Africana Studies consists of six of the following
courses: AFS/AMS 150 or AFS/HIS 149; AFS/HIS 141 or
142;AFS/HIS233;andthreeelectives,oneofwhichmustbe
numbered300orhigher.
For further information, students should consult the Africana
StudiesProgramChair.
Africana Studies students have studied abroad with the
followingprogramsinrecentyears:ArcadiaUniversity;IES
andSITinSouthAfrica;SITinKenya;andVCUinBarbados.
See the International Programs section of the Catalog for
further information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows. Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
CORE COURSES
141. History of North and West Africa. (NW) (S)
Thiscourse introduces major themes in the historyof North and West
AfricafromancientEgyptthroughthepresentcrisisinSudan.Emphasis
fallsonWestAfricanpoliticalandsocialformations,domesticandtrans-
Atlantic slave systems, notions of identity, the role of Islam and the rise
andfallofcolonialism.Studentsuseprimarysourcestoexplorehistorical
problems.FinalunitexploresrecenteventsinSudan.Same as HIS 141.
Anthony
142. History of East and Southern Africa. (NW) (S)
IntroductiontomajorthemesinthehistoryofEast,CentralandSouthern
Africa from the Bantu migration through the Rwandan genocide.
Emphasizessocial,politicalandreligiouschangeinpre-colonialAfrica
andresistancetoslaveryandcolonialism.Studentsuseprimarysourcesto
explore historical problems. Final unit explores the legacy of colonialism
inthe1994Rwandangenocide.Same as HIS 142. Anthony
149. Africa and the Black World: Concepts and Context. (NW) (S)
Explorestheemergenceofcontinental(“African”)andracial(“Black”)
identitieswithparticularemphasisontherolesofthetrans-Atlanticslave
trade, the rise of racial thought in Europe and the Americas and the impact
of European imperialism. Same as HIS 249. Anthony
150. Introduction to African American Studies. (S)
ThedevelopmentoftheUnitedStatesasaglobalandmultiracialsociety.
Topics can include the transatlantic slave trade in the 18th and 19th
centuries; Pan Africanism, mass media in the African Diaspora; the
HarlemRenaissanceandCivilRightsmovement.Same as AMS 150.
Willard
218. Narrative Journeys in Arabic Literature. (H) (NW)
This course introduces students to a variety of narratives in different
literarygenresfromtheArabworld.Theorganizingthemeofthiscourse
is that of the journey, whether it be a physical trek through the desert or
ametaphoricalonesuchasaninwardpsychologicalquest.Studentswill
encounter narratives by both male and female writers from various parts
of the Arab world and from different periods of Arabic literary history. All
texts are translated from the Arabic into English. Same as ARB/LIT 218.
Kalleeny
233. African American History. (S)
An advanced course tracing the progress of African Americans from
slavery to freedom, beginning in the largerAtlantic worldof the 17th
and18thcenturies,andcontinuingthroughtheAmericanRevolution,the
battle against slavery culminating in the Civil War, and the struggle for
blackcitizenshipbetweentheReconstructionof1865–1877andthe“long
civil rights movement” of the 20th century. Same as HIS 233. Gosse
490. Independent Study.
IndependentresearchdirectedbytheAfricanaStudiesstaff.Requiredof
allmajors;ordinarilytobeundertakenintheFallsemesterofthesenior
year. Staff
16 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
ELECTIVE COURSES
105. Jazz. (A)
Thehistoryofjazz,fromitsrootstothepresentday,withemphasison
stylistic distinctions. Considers African and European contributions,
bluestypes,NewOrleansjazz,HarlemStride,Swing,bebop,cooljazz,
hardbop,freejazz,fusion,neo-classical,andacidjazz,touchingonmost
majorguresandtheircontributions.Eachstylisticperiodisstudiedfrom
an economic and sociological viewpoint with emphasis on form, texture,
improvisation, harmony, rhythm, and timbre.
Same as AMS 105 and MUS 105. Buttereld
106. History of the Blues. (A)
BlueshistoryfromitsoriginstotheBluesRevivalofthe1960s.Emphasis
ontheDeltabluestraditionofCharleyPatton,RobertJohnsonandMuddy
Waters.Additionaltopicsinclude:oralformulaiccomposition;politicsof
race and sex in the blues; the blues as a “secular religion”; the music
business; appropriations of blues style in jazz and rock; the ongoing
function of the blues as a core signier of “blackness” in American
culture. Same as AMS 106 and MUS 106. Buttereld
169. Caribbean Literature. (H) (NW)
What is Caribbean literature? Some writers and scholars question the
identity of a region of so many diverse languages, races, ethnicities,
religions, and nations. At the same time, others argue for the coherence of
aregionmarkedbyahistoryofEuropeancolonizationandslavery.This
coursewillfocusonanglophone(English-language)Caribbeanliterature
of the twentieth century, a rich and varied body of work that has recently
producedtwoNobelPrizewinners,DerekWalcottandV.S.Naipaul.In
this course, we will explore how this literature grapples with issues of
race, gender, nationalism, independence, decolonization, the ethics of
violence, the importance of vernacular expression, and the formation of a
literary tradition. Same as ENG 169. Abravanel
213. Black American Film. (A)
AnintroductiontolmstudiesusingblacklmasagenreofHollywood
and independent lm. Covers the work of Oscar Michaux through the
“blaxploitation”lmsofthe1970sandbeyond.Exploreslmsassocial
commentaryintheirparticularhistoricalcontexts.Particularattentionis
given to screen analysis of segregation, sexuality, class differences and
more. Same as AMS/TDF/WGS 213. Willard
250. Witchcraft and Sorcery in a Global Context. (S)
Inthiscoursewewillconsider how thecategoriesof“witchcraft”and
“sorcery”havebeenusedinAnthropology,bothtodescribemysticalacts
(particularlymysticalattacks)andasanethnographicmetaphortodiscuss
the pressures of communal life for individuals. Course content consists of,
butisnotbelimitedto,witchcraftandsorceryasa“socialstraingauge,”
witchcraft and sorcery as expressions of symbolic power, the gendered
name of witchcraft and sorcery, as well as witchcraft and sorcery under
conditionsofWestern-stylemodernity.Same as ANT/RST/WGS 250.
Bastian
256. African American Literature I:
Declarations of Independence and the Narratives of Slavery (H)
This course covers African American narratives of slavery from the
colonial period through the early 19th Century. The Declaration of
Independence, the founding narrative of American selfhood and agency,
providesthe discursivebackground of the course.The Declarationdid
notmentionSlavery,therebyerasingSlaves’experiencesintheAmerican
narrative about peoplehood. We will engage the logic, rhetoric and
contradictionsofthedocumentbypluralizing “declaration” to broaden
andthen examinehow Slaves’ oral narratives (the Spirituals, etc.) and
texts(byPhyllisWheatley, Oladuah Equaino,etc.)weregurative and
literal declarations of independence that simultaneously question the
Declaration’sprinciplesandideologyandafrmitstranscendentmeanings
inthewriters’discoursesonSlavery,Blackhumanityandselfhood,race,
theAmericanDream,etc.Same as AMS/ENG/WGS 256. Bernard
257. African American Literature II:
Meaning of the Veil and African American Identity. (H)
InTheSoulsofBlackFolk(1903),theAfricanAmericanwriterW.E.B.Du
Boisintroducestwoconcepts—the“veil”and“double-consciousness”—
to explain the black experience in America. This course, which covers
African American literature from Reconstruction to the Harlem
Renaissance, the BlackAesthetic/BlackPower movement and beyond,
will examine the recurrence of the veil metaphor (and its synonyms)
generallyandengageDuBois’sformulationoftheconceptspecicallyin
theculturalandhistoricalcontextsthatframethisperiod’sliterature.We
willexplorehowwriters(PaulLaurenceDunbar,LangstonHughes,Zora
NealeHurston,RalphEllison,ToniMorrison,etc.)engagetopics(race,
gender,music,identity,etc.)thatreinforce,expandand/orcomplicateDu
Bois’smetaphor.Same as AMS/ENG/WGS 257. Bernard
267. Peoples and Cultures of Africa. (NW) (S)
SocialandhistoricalpracticesofvariousAfricancultures,withaspecial
emphasis on sub-Saharan groups. Topics considered will include the
intersections between political economy, performances, religion, art, and
popularmediaonthecontinent.Prerequisite:ANT100.
Same as ANT 267. Bastian
281. Political Economy of Africa. (NW) (S)
A broad introduction to economic and social conditions in Africa and
the factors that inuence economic development in the region, power
structures and processes of change. Historical analysis of pre-colonial
systemsofproductionandexchangeandmodicationsintroducedduring
the European colonial period. Examination of major current issues such
as food production, external debt and the role of the state. Reection
onthe question of‘development.’Prerequisites: ECO 100 and 103, or
permission of instructor. Same as ECO 281. Zein-Elabdin
283 B. African Drumming.
Private lessons and masterclass in Africa Drumming. Admission by
auditionwiththeinstructor.Mayberepeated.(Onehalfcredit.)Same as
MUS 283 B. Hessen
301. Pops & Jelly Roll:
New Orleans and Its Music in the Early Twentieth Century. (A)
AnexaminationofLouisArmstrongandJellyRollMorton’sNewOrleans.
ThecourseevaluatestheirmusicandthemoregeneralstyleofearlyNew
Orleansjazzinrelationtothegeographical,social,political,andeconomic
dynamicsofthatgreatAmericancityintheearly20thcentury.Particular
attentionwillbegiventothesocialandmusicalinteractionsamongNew
Orleans’disparateethnicgroupsthatledtotheformationofauniquestyle
ofjazz derived from ragtime, blues and the ubiquitous marching band
music from that era. Same as AMS 301 and MUS 301. Buttereld
302. Bebop. (A)
Ahistoryofthebebopmovementinjazzofthe1940sand‘50s.Special
attention given to the social, economic, and political conditions that led
asmallhandfulofmusicianstoabandonSwingErabigbandsinfavorof
thesmallcombosthatformedoutofHarlemjamsessionsbetween1941
and1943.Coversdistinguishingfeaturesofthebebopstylethroughan
examinationofthemusicofCharlieParker,DizzyGillespie,Thelonious
Monk, and others. Concludes with an evaluation of the social and political
meanings of bebop and its historical legacy. Same as AMS 302 and MUS
302. Buttereld
313. African American Religion. (H)
Surveys a variety of religious traditions and expressions of African
Americans throughout the history of the United States. Of particular
interest to our study will be the problems of slavery, colonization and
racialism as they have been embodied in the history of African American
religion. Same as RST 313. Modern
315. Cross-Cultural Psychology.
Cross-CulturalPsychologyservesasanintroductiontotherelationships
among cultural processes, human consciousness, human health and
humandevelopment.Prerequisite:PSY100orSPM100. Penn
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 17
323. Cuba and the United States: The Closest of Strangers. (S)
This course examines the long history of relations between North
Americans and Cubans, two peoples separated by only 90 miles. Our
topics will range from baseball to guerrilla warfare, from the Mambo to the
Missile Crisis. This history includes a shared commitment to anticolonial
liberation;annexationistschemesamongSouthernslaveholders;repeated
militaryinterventionsbytheUnitedStates;solidarityfromtheU.S.with
variousCubanRevolutions,includingbutnotlimitedtoFidelCastro’s;
and two hundred years of cultural contact between African Americans
andAfro-CubansthathasprofoundlyinuencedU.S.culture,music,and
sports. Same as AMS/HIS 323. Gosse
326. African Politics. (NW) (S)
Anexplorationofthesocio-economicandpoliticalchallengesfacingSub-
SaharanAfricasinceindependence.Thiscoursewillfocusspecicallyon
the prospects for socio-economic development and democracy in Sub-
SaharanAfrica. StudentswillengageinaReactingtothePast(RTTP)
simulationoftheSouthAfricanmovetomajorityrule.Prerequisite:GOV
120 or permission of the instructor. Same as GOV 326. Dicklitch-Nelson
334. The American South: Slavery, Secession and War, 1800–1865. (S)
Traces the antebellum south and the emergence of a distinct southern
identity and consciousness by examining the following topics: slavery
(fromtheperspectiveofbothmastersandslaves),thedispossessionof
theNativeAmericans, westwardexpansion andterritorial ambitionsin
Central America and the Caribbean, politics at the national and state level,
andthegrowthoftheregion’sintellectuallife.Same as HIS 334. Pearson
349. Modern South Africa. (NW) (S)
With an emphasis on the 20th century, this course explores the emergence
of South Africa’s multi-racial society. Major themes include African
statesystems,Europeanimmigrationandconquest,Africans’individual
and collective responses to white supremacy and changing gender
roles. Students use historical documents, lm, and ction in addition
tosecondaryreadings.Discussionisanimportantcomponentofcourse
grade. Same as HIS 349. Anthony
354. Gender and Race in Ethnic Studies Film.
“GenderandRaceinEthnicStudiesFilm”examinestheconceptofEthnic
Studiesasaneducationalcurriculumemergingfromsocialmovements.
In an effort to understand Ethnic Studies, we will explore the media
productionsbyandaboutpeopleofcolorinrelationtoU.S.socialunrests
ofthelate-1960s,1970s,andtheaftermathofthesedecades.Wewillfocus
onthreegroups:U.S.Latinos,AfricanAmericans,andAsianAmericans.
SameasAMS/TND/WGS354. Villegas
360. Race and Ethnic Relations. (S)
Studyofintergrouprelations,withanemphasisonprocessesofracial/
ethnic stratication, assimilation and cultural pluralism. Focus is on
American society, past and present. Topics include the development and
change of race/ethnic identities, intergroup attitudes, racial ideologies,
immigration, education and the intersection of race with social class and
gender.Prerequisite:SOC100. Same as SOC 360. Rondini
363. Marginal Sexualities in the Maghreb. (H) (NW)
This course will explore the cultural constructions of gender and sexuality
in the Maghreb, and their relationship to the concept of nation. We will
also focus on new spaces of negotiation offered on the threshold of the
21stcenturybyFrancophoneNorthAfricanauthorssuchasTaharBen
Jelloun, Rachid O, Abdellah Taïa, and Assia Djebar. The course will
examineconceptssuchasdesire,uidity,heteronormativity,homosocial
vs.homosexualrelationships,hypermasculinisation,discursive/rhetorical/
subjectivecommunities,andmisogynyinthecontextof20th/21stcentury
NorthAmerica.Prerequisite:FRN261orplacement.
Same as FRN/WGS 363. Hebouche
366. Race, Ethnicity, and Health. (S)
Thecoursewillutilizeasociologicallenstoexaminetheroleofraceand
ethnicity in health outcomes, healthcare experiences, medical research,
and clinical practice. Topics will include: socio-historical perspectives
on notions of race in relation to biological difference; socio-historical
understandings of the health consequences of racialized public health
policiesandpoliticallysanctionedmedicalpractices;contemporaryracial
andethnicdisparitiesindiseasemorbidityandmortalityindicators;the
operationalizationofracialcategoriesinepidemiological,publichealth,
and biomedical research and practice; contemporary debates regarding
race and genomics; and understandings of racial and ethnic dynamics
in relation to health and medicine at the intersections of socioeconomic
class, immigration status, gender, sexuality, and other markers of social
identity. Same as SOC/PBH 366. Rondini
430. Selected Studies in African History. (NW) (S)
Readingsandresearchinselectedtopicsofthepolitical,socialandcultural
historyofAfrica.Seerelevantdepartmentalofferingsfor prerequisites.
Recenttopicsinclude“SlaveryinAfrica.” Same as HIS 430. Anthony
460. Race, Gender, and Class on Campus. (S)
On college and university campuses across the country, intersecting social
identity politics have come to the fore over the course of recent decades.
This course will examine the socio-historical forces and contemporary
dynamics that inform, challenge, support, and disrupt the establishment
and cultivation of inclusive campus communities. Drawing from
sociological literature on higher education, social mobility, race, gender,
socioeconomicclass,andsocialpolicy,studentswillcriticallyanalyzethe
complex issues germane to how American institutions of higher education
operationalizeideas of “diversity” and “inclusion” in the 21st century.
Same as SOC/WGS 460. Rondini
462. Toni Morrison. (H)
This seminar will focus on Toni Morrison as a major African American
andAmericanwriter.WewillexamineMorrison’soeuvreinbothction
and criticism, and explore how her aesthetics and vision, and her analyses
of them, are informed by historical contexts and their racial, sexual,
gendered,class,etc.impulses.Permissionoftheinstructorrequired.Same
as ENG/WGS 462. Bernard
491. Directed Reading.
AcontinuationofindependentresearchdirectedbytheAfricanaStudies
staff.Prerequisite:AFS490.
INTERDISCIPLINARY TOPICS COURSES
(ALSO ELECTIVES)
StudentsmayalsoselectelectivesfortheAFSmajorandminor
from topics courses offered by the following departments:
American Studies, Anthropology, Economics, English,
Government, History, Judaic Studies, Music, Psychology,
ReligiousStudiesandSociology.Topicscoursestakeninthese
departments will count toward the AFS major only if they
primarily address issues surrounding Africa and the African
Diasporaandarealternativelydesignated“AFS.”
18 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
AMERICAN STUDIES
Professor M. Alison Kibler, Chair
Dennis Deslippe Professor of American Studies
(on leave Fall 2020)
and Women’s, Gender and Sexuality Studies
M. Alison Kibler Professor of American Studies and
Women’s, Gender and Sexuality Studies
Louise L. Stevenson Professor of History and American Studies
Carla Willard Associate Professor of American Studies
(on leave 2020-21)
Mark Villegas Assistant Professor of American Studies
(on leave Fall 2020)
Cristina Perez Assistant Professor of American Studies
Daniel Frick Director of the Writing Center and Senior
Teaching Professor of American Studies,
and Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of English
Gregory Kaliss Visiting Assistant Professor of American
Studies
Eric Usner Adjunct Assistant Professor of American
Studies and Music
AmericanStudiesisamajorforstudentswhowanttocarveout
their own path in the eclectic terrain of American culture. Unlike
traditionalmajors,AmericanStudiesasksstudentstocombine
and cross disciplines in their study of American culture, past
andpresent.AmericanStudiesexploresthecorenarrativesof
theUnitedStatesaswellasthediversityofAmericansocial
and cultural life.TheAmerican Studies Department teaches
students to read critically, to articulate ideas clearly, to conduct
research and to write effectively. It expects students to develop
these abilities within an interdisciplinary curricular framework
that requires them to encounter diverse peoples, types of
culturalexpressionandpatternsofsocialinteraction.Students
are involved in research and internship opportunities in the
local community as well as in more traditional scholarship.
The American Studies Department is committed to the
advancement of these goals through effective teaching and
active scholarship by its faculty.American Studies prepares
students for a wide range of careers, including education,
museums,nonprotmanagement,law,communityorganizing,
media and public relations, marketing and branding.
A major in American Studiesconsistsof11courses:AMS
100,AMS 350 andAMS 489; one class in global AMS—
AMS136,AMS323oranapprovedtopicscourse;athematic
concentrationofthreecourses,tobeapprovedbythestudent’s
AMS adviser by the fall of the junior year; and fourAMS
electives or other courses from the list of approved courses. Of
these four electives, one course must be in American arts and
literatureandvecoursesinthemajormustbeatorabovethe
300level.
ThewritingrequirementintheAmericanStudiesmajorismet
by completion of the normal courses required to complete
the major. Majors intending to enter graduate or professional
studies should see the chairperson for particular courses
necessary or desirable to prepare for advanced study. Other
courses,suchasforeignlanguagesand/orquantitativeskills,
mayberequiredforstudentswishingtopursuegraduatework.
MajorsinAmericanStudieshavestudiedabroadinthefollowing
programsinrecentyears:AdvancedStudiesinEngland,Bath;
IFSA-Butler University ofEdinburgh; DIS-StudyAbroad in
Copenhagen; Macquarie University, Sydney, Australia; SIT
HumanRights:Foundations,Challenges,andAdvocacy;and
SITStudyAbroad/IHP:Citiesinthe 21st Century.American
StudiesmajorsarealsoencouragedtoconsidertheUniversity
ofSussexinEnglandandFlindersUniversityinAustralia.See
theInternationalProgramssectionoftheCatalogforfurther
information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
100. Introduction to American Studies. (S)
An interdisciplinary introduction to American identity. Examines
expressionsofnationalidentityinartsandpopularculture.Paysparticular
attention to race, ethnicity and gender from the 19th through the 21st
centuries. Kibler, Stevenson, Willard
105. Jazz. (A)
The history of jazz, from its roots to the present day,with emphasis on
stylistic distinctions. Considers African and European contributions, blues
types,NewOrleansjazz,HarlemStride,Swing,bebop,cooljazz,hardbop,
freejazz,fusion,neo-classical,andacidjazz,touchingonmostmajorgures
and their contributions. Each stylistic period is studied from an economic
and sociological viewpoint with emphasis on form, texture, improvisation,
harmony, rhythm, and timbre. Same as AFS 105/MUS 105. Buttereld
106. History of the Blues. (A)
BlueshistoryfromitsoriginstotheBluesRevivalofthe1960s.Emphasis
on the Delta blues tradition of Charley Patton, Robert Johnson, and
Muddy Waters.Additional topics include: oral formulaic composition;
politicsofraceandsexintheblues;thebluesasa“secularreligion”;the
musicbusiness;appropriationsofbluesstyleinjazzandrock;theongoing
function of the blues as a core signier of “blackness” in American
culture. Same as AFS/MUS 106. Buttereld
115. Introduction to Asian American Studies:
War, Empire, and Migration. (H)
This course will provide a multidisciplinary approach to Asian American
Studies.Byexaminingliterature,historical/sociologicalscholarship,lms,
andmusic,wewillexplorebothdominantandlesser-knownnarratives
representing Asian American refugees, mixed-race communities, and
colonialdiasporas.Theinterlinkingthemesofempire,colonialconquest,
militarization,transnationallabor,state-sanctionedviolence,urbanization,
and race and gender relations will emerge from studying Filipino and
Japanese pidgin-speakers from the plantations of Hawai`i, Vietnamese
Americanrefugees,andAsianAmericananti-warradicalsinthestreetsof
SanFrancisco.Studentsarealsoinvitedtoexploreanddocumentstories
of local Asian American communities. Villegas
136. U.S. Empire. (S)
From the Mexican War through World War II (1845–1945) the U.S.
developed the intellectual and diplomatic arguments of empire while
acquiringtheterritorynecessaryforachievingglobalpredominance.This
course examines this rise to world power, including territorial expansion,
Europeandiplomacy,worldwarsandtheexertionofinuenceintoMexico
from a historical perspective that includes both critics and supporters of
U.S.worldinvolvement.Same as HIS 136. Stevenson
150. Introduction to African American Studies. (S)
ThedevelopmentoftheUnitedStatesasaglobalandmultiracialsociety.
Topics can include the transatlantic slave trade in the 18th and 19th
centuries; Pan Africanism, mass media in the African Diaspora; the
HarlemRenaissance andCivil Rightsmovement intothe 21st century.
Same as AFS 150. Willard
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 19
167. American Spiritualities. (H)
Surveys the dominant tradition of American religious practice:
spirituality. The goals of this course encompass the study of different
formsofspiritualityintheUnitedStatespastandpresent.Thecoursewill
familiarizeyouwithmainstreamaswellasalternativespiritualpractices,
from Puritan Devotions and the Lakota Sundance to evangelicalism,
political radicalism and various modes of artistic production. The course
seeks to trace major outlines of development from past to present and
to illuminate the meaning of spirituality for our time and in relation to
American history. Same as RST 167. Modern
203. Cultural History of American Religion. (H)
Examines the relationship between religion and culture in the United
Statesfromapproximately1492tothepresent.Inadditiontolookingat
liturgical forms of religion and surveying various religious movements
andgroups,wewillexplore1)howculturalformsserveasvehiclesof
religiousmeaning;2)howreligiousvaluesareexpressedand/orcriticized
in everyday social life; and 3) the interaction between religion and
developments within the political, social, economic and philosophical
spheres. Same as RST 203. Modern
213. Black American Film. (A)
AnintroductiontolmstudiesusingblacklmasagenreofHollywood
and independent lm. Covers the work of Oscar Michaux through the
“blaxploitation”lmsof the1970s and intothe 21st century. Explores
lms as social commentary in particular historical contexts. Particular
attention is given to screen analysis of segregation, sexuality, class
differences and more. Same as AFS/FLM/WGS 213. Willard
234. American Enemies (H)
DoestheUnitedStateshavea“paranoidstyle,”assomehistoriansclaim?
This class explores the tendency to identify, and the desire to eradicate,
national enemies—both imaginary and real. Course units include the
McCarthyEra,theKennedyassassination,theVietnamwar,9/11andthe
war on terror. We will try to understand the varied sources of American
paranoia and explore the truth of the old adage “Just because you’re
paranoid,doesn’tmeanthattheyaren’touttogetyou.” Frick
235. U.S.-Mexico Borderlands. (NW) (S)
This course introduces students to the history of the present-day U.S.-
Mexicoborderregion.Althoughmuchofthecoursefocusesonthepast150
years, we will also explore how early indigenous peoples lived in the region
and interacted with the environment, and examine the legacy of colonialism
intheregionpriortotheU.S.-MexicoWar.Same as HIS 235. Shelton
239. Hip Hop: The Global Politics of Culture. (H) (NW)
This course will engage in hip hop’s “politics of authenticity” while also
offering a primer on the participation and contributions of a variety of
transnational, sexual, gender, and racial/ethnic constituents. Rightfully
centeringandhonoringthegenre’sAfro-diasporicinuences,wewillexamine
debates involving transnationalism, gender, sexual, and racial boundaries in
hiphop.Wewillalsoexplorehiphop’sglobalrelevance,suchasitssonicand
cultural presence in reggaetón and its spread as a global dance form. Overall,
thisclasswillpromptstudentstountanglehiphop’sseeminglycontradictory
ethosof“keepingitreal”whilesimultaneouslypromotingbroaderidealsof
cosmopolitanismandglobalcommodication.Same as MUS 239.
Villegas
243. American Art. (A)
Historical and aesthetic consideration of architecture, painting, decorative
artsandsculptureproducedintheUnitedStatesfromcolonialsettlement
throughthe1913ArmoryShow.Coursethemesincludethesocialfunctions
ofworksofart,therelationshipofU.S.andEuropeancultures,theroleof
art in building a national identity, the development of an infrastructure of
art institutions and the contrast and connection between popular and elite
art. Same as ART 243.
Clapper
251. Issues in Modern and Contemporary American Drama. (A)
AliteraryandtheatricalexaminationofrepresentativeAmericanDrama
fromtheearlytwentiethcenturytothepresent,emphasizingdevelopments
since1950.ThefocusofthisstudyisonhowandwhyAmericansand
American life have been depicted onstage as they have and the powerful
effect this range of depictions has had on American identity and the
American imagination. Same as ENG/TDF 251. C. Davis
256. African American Literature I:
Declarations of Independence and the Narratives of Slavery (H)
This course covers African American narratives of slavery from the
colonial period through the early 19th Century. The Declaration of
Independence, the founding narrative of American selfhood and agency,
providesthe discursivebackground of the course.The Declarationdid
notmentionSlavery,therebyerasingSlaves’experiencesintheAmerican
narrative about peoplehood. We will engage the logic, rhetoric and
contradictionsofthedocumentbypluralizing “declaration” to broaden
andthen examinehow Slaves’ oral narratives (the Spirituals, etc.) and
texts(byPhyllisWheatley, Oladuah Equaino,etc.)weregurative and
literal declarations of independence that simultaneously question the
Declaration’sprinciplesandideologyandafrmitstranscendentmeanings
inthewriters’discoursesonSlavery,Blackhumanityandselfhood,race,
theAmericanDream,etc. Same as AFS/ENG/WGS 256. Bernard
257. African American Literature II:
Meaning of the Veil and African American Identity. (H)
InTheSoulsofBlackFolk(1903),theAfricanAmericanwriterW.E.B.Du
Boisintroducestwoconcepts—the“veil”and“double-consciousness”—to
explain the black experience in America. This course, which covers African
Americanliteraturefrom Reconstructionto the HarlemRenaissance, the
Black Aesthetic/Black Power movement and beyond, will examine the
recurrenceoftheveilmetaphor(anditssynonyms)generallyandengage
Du Bois’s formulation of the concept specically in the cultural and
historicalcontextsthatframethisperiod’sliterature.Wewillexplorehow
writers (Paul Laurence Dunbar, Langston Hughes, Zora Neale Hurston,
Ralph Ellison, Toni Morrison, etc.) engage topics (race, gender, music,
identity,etc.)thatreinforce,expandand/orcomplicateDuBois’smetaphor.
Same as AFS/ENG/WGS 257. Bernard
261. North American Indians of the Eastern Woodlands. (NW) (S)
A survey of the past and present diversity of indigenous peoples in the
Eastern Woodlands of the United States and Canada. The focus is on
theprehistoricarchaeologyoftheregion,theconsequencesofEuropean
colonization on native groups and the struggles and achievements of
indigenous peoples today. An examination of issues ranging from the
controversy that surrounds the initial settlement of the Eastern Woodlands
byNativeAmericanstocontemporarydebatesonfederalrecognitionand
sovereignty.Prerequisite:ANT100or102.Same as ANT 261.
M. A. Levine
280. American Landscape. (S)
An interdisciplinary approach to the study of the American landscape as it
has evolved over centuries of human habitation, this course pays particular
attention to three themes: the domesticated and designed landscape of the
mid-19thcentury;thecrusadetopreservenatureandtheestablishmentof
nationalandstateparksinthelate19thandearly20thcenturies;andthe
sprawling, seemingly formless automobile-dominated landscape of the
late 20th century. Same as ENE 280. Schuyler
282. Vietnam and the Cold War. (S)
This course examines the longest armed conict in our history, the
Vietnamese-AmericanWarthatbeganin 1946, when the UnitedStates
began aiding the French effort to take back control of their colony in
Indochina,andendedwithU.S.defeatin1975.Itplacesthatconictin
thelargercontextofnationalliberationintheThirdWorld(theformerly
colonialregionsofAfrica,Asia,andLatinAmerica).Same as HIS 282.
Gosse
300. Urban America. (S)
An interdisciplinary approach to the evolution of American metropolitan
areasasphysicalspacesandsocial-culturalenvironments.Topicsinclude
theeconomyofcities,urbanpoliticsandculturalconict,immigration,
cityplanning,suburbanizationandthemodernmetropolis. Schuyler
301. Pops & Jelly Roll:
New Orleans and Its Music in the Early Twentieth Century. (A)
AnexaminationofLouisArmstrongandJellyRollMorton’sNewOrleans.
ThecourseevaluatestheirmusicandthemoregeneralstyleofearlyNew
Orleansjazzinrelationtothegeographical,social,political,andeconomic
dynamicsofthatgreatAmericancityintheearly20thcentury.Particular
attentionwillbegiventothesocialandmusicalinteractionsamongNew
Orleans’disparateethnicgroupsthatledtotheformationofauniquestyle
20 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
ofjazz derived from ragtime, blues and the ubiquitous marching band
music from that era. Same as AFS 301 and MUS 301. Buttereld
302. Bebop. (A)
Ahistoryofthebebopmovementinjazzofthe1940sand’50s.Special
attention given to the social, economic, and political conditions that led a
smallhandfulofmusicianstoabandonSwingErabigbandsinfavorofthe
smallcombosthatformedoutofHarlemjamsessionsbetween1941-1943.
Covers distinguishing features of the bebop style through an examination of
themusicofCharlieParker,DizzyGillespie,TheloniousMonk,andothers.
Concludes with an evaluation of the social and political meanings of bebop
and its historical legacy. Same as AFS 302 and MUS 302. Buttereld
303. As Seen on TV: History as Media Event. (H)
“Where were you when…?” Whether the Kennedy assassination,
RichardNixon’sresignation,theshootingofRonaldReaganorthefall
oftheBerlinwall,mostBabyBoomerAmericanswouldanswer:“Iwas
watchingitonTV.”Thiscoursewillexploretherepresentationofhistory-
making moments in the mass media, with a focus on the second half of
the 20th century. We will explore how television covered the event at
thetime,howthatcoverageshapedtherstdraftofhistory,andhowit
has participated in shaping the cultural memory of the event in the years
since.CourseunitsincludeEdwardR.Murrow’sduelwithSenatorJoe
McCarthy,theJFKassassination,Vietnam,Watergate,theO.J.Simpson
case,and9/11.Same as FLM 303. Frick
310. American Masculinities. (S)
This course explores the importance of masculinity and its various
constructions in American history and the contemporary period. We begin
by examining the theoretical and historical foundations of American
masculinities.We will focus on key ways in which men (and women)
sustain and recreate masculinities. Topics include manhood and the
workplace, politics, sports, courtship, fatherhood, military, immigration
and ethnicity, crime and prisons and religion. Same as HIS/WGS 310.
Deslippe
320. American Women and Social Movements Since 1900. (S)
An interdisciplinary study of the various ways women have participated
in American society and politics. Topics include the suffrage movement,
modernmodesofpoliticalparticipationandtheNewDealandWorldWar
II. Critical analysis of the meaning of feminism and special attention to
thepost-1945period.Same as HIS/WGS 320. Deslippe
321. Museum Mysteries. (S)
In this hands-on class, students will learn how to identify American
artifacts by their materials, construction, design, and age. Investigations
will include cataloguing and interpretive strategies that locate objects
in historical and cultural contexts. In other words, students will learn to
makeamuteobjecttellits“story.”Studentswilldeveloptheseskillsin
thePhillipsMuseumofArt oncampusandincollaborationwithother
collecting institutions in Lancaster and will present their discoveries as an
exhibition plan or research paper. Same as HIS 321.Permissionrequired.
Zimmerman
322. Buddhism in North America. (H)
FocusesonsomeofthedistinctiveformsthatBuddhismhastakeninNorth
America. Discusses a number of traditions, including Theravada, Zen
andTibetanBuddhism,comparingtheirAmericanversionswiththosein
AsiaandaddressingthetransformationsofvariousBuddhisttraditionsto
accommodate American lifestyles and views. Also addresses a number of
issuespertinenttoBuddhisminAmericaandtheWest,suchasBuddhist
identity, ethnicity, gender issues, authority and social activism. Same as
RST 322. McMahan
323. Cuba and the United States: The Closest of Strangers. (S)
This course examines the long history of relations between North
Americans and Cubans, two peoples separated by only 90 miles. Our
topics will range from baseball to guerrilla warfare, from the Mambo to the
Missile Crisis. This history includes a shared commitment to anticolonial
liberation;annexationistschemesamongSouthernslaveholders;repeated
militaryinterventionsbytheUnitedStates;solidarityfromtheU.S.with
variousCubanRevolutions,includingbutnotlimitedtoFidelCastro’s;
and two hundred years of cultural contact between African Americans
andAfro-CubansthathasprofoundlyinuencedU.S.culture,music,and
sports. Same as AFS/HIS 323. Gosse
330. Ethnic America. (S)
ThiscourseexploresthemeaningandsignicanceofethnicityinAmerica.
It does so by examining the historical and contemporary experiences of
immigrants and their children. The heart of the course is class discussion
of the readings, lms and primary documents.We will augmentthese
withgroupwork,lecturesandshortdocumentaryandfeaturelmclips.
In addition to completing weekly short reading response papers and
submittingatake-homenalexamination,studentswillsubmita“lm
fest” essay on three feature lms that address ethnicityand a “lecture
proposal” project in which they will propose a new topic to be included in
afutureofferingof“EthnicAmerica.”Same as HIS 330. Deslippe
339. Civil War and Reconstruction. (S)
Interdisciplinary course asks students to investigate the causes, events and
results of the American Civil War and its enduring impact on American
life.Theclassusuallytakesoneall-daytriptobattleelds.Noprerequisite,
althoughsome background in 19th-century history is helpful. Same as
HIS 339. Stevenson
350. Studying the American Experience. (S)
An examination of the principal methods and paradigms used in
conceptualizing, researching and writing inAmerican Studies. Usually
completed in the junior year. Topics vary. Deslippe
353. American Photography. (A)
Soon after the invention of photography, photographic images quickly
constitutedmuchofvisualculture—eithernationalorglobal.Sometimes
photographs were made with high artistic intention, but, far more often,
not.Thisseminarwillexaminediversetopicsin19thand20th-century
American photographic history, from vernacular images produced for the
masses(daguerreotypes,tintypes,snapshots)towhathavenowbecome
nearly iconic photographs produced either for documentary purposes or
tomakeartistic,self-expressivestatements.Wewillconsidertheworkof
unknown makers as well as that produced by celebrated photographers
suchasAlfredStieglitz,EdwardWeston,Walker Evans,AnselAdams,
DorotheaLange,RobertFrank,andRobertAdams.Same as ART 353.
Kent
354. Gender and Race in Ethnic Studies Film.
“GenderandRaceinEthnicStudiesFilm”examinestheconceptofEthnic
Studiesasaneducationalcurriculumemergingfromsocialmovements.
In an effort to understand Ethnic Studies, we will explore the media
productionsbyandaboutpeopleofcolorinrelationtoU.S.socialunrests
ofthelate-1960s,1970s,andtheaftermathofthesedecades.Wewillfocus
onthreegroups:U.S.Latinos,AfricanAmericans,andAsianAmericans.
Same as AFS/FLM/WGS 354. Villegas
381. 9/11 and the War on Terror. (H)
Thiscoursewilllookatrepresentationsinpopularcultureof9/11andthe
subsequentwar on terror.Starting with television news coverage from
September11,2001,wewillalsoanalyzenonctionaccounts(narrative
andgraphic),aswellasdocumentaries,commerciallms,andtelevision
programsthatdealwiththesetraumaticanddeningmoments.Fromthese
texts, we will come to understand that the ways in which we remember
9/11andthewaronterrorplayaroleinshapingourunderstandingofthe
UnitedStatesanditsplaceontheworldstage. Frick
385. Gender at Work. (S)
Whatiswomen’swork?HowhasitchangedoverthecourseofAmerican
history? How is it valued? This course explores the world of women’s
workbycomparingitto“men’s”work.Wewillfocusonwageearning,
caregiving,sexwork,housework,“doubledays”and“glassceilings.”We
willespeciallyconsiderwomen’sstrategiesofsurvivalandresistancefrom
various demographic, racial and ethnic groups. Same as BOS/WGS 385.
Deslippe
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 21
390. Independent Study.
391. Directed Reading.
Tutorial. Topics adapted to the knowledge and interests of the individual
student. Admission by consent of the instructor.
420. Selected Topics in the Cultural and Intellectual History of the
United States. (S)
Recenttopicsinclude:“Lincoln”and“NationalDiscourse.”
Same as HIS 420. Stevenson
467. Multi-Media Memoir. (A) (H)
This course is an exploration of memoir through several media and
genres—prose,poetry,performanceart,photographs,lmandtheater.We
alsoengagewiththemostrecent“mnemonictheory,”andourtheoretical
study takes form in essays that probe the curious genre of memoir–a genre
thatslipsbetweenliteraryandfact-basedwriting,betweenimaginaryand
nonction prose.The seminar provides a longer workshop or “studio”
componentinwhichyou’llprobeconnectionsbetweenassignedworkand
thewritingofyourownmemoriesandexperiences.Permissionrequired.
Willard
489. Senior Seminar. (S)
A capstone or integrative seminar. Topics vary. Willard
490. Independent Study.
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
AmericanLandscapes/AmericanCultures.
AmericanNature:Identity,CultureandSustainability.
AmericanPopularMusic.
TheAmericanRadicalTradition.
Ethnic American Literature.
Gender in American Music.
Hamilton and Jefferson.
Lincoln.
RaceandGenderinAmericanSport.
APPROVED COURSES
FOR AMERICAN STUDIES ELECTIVES
The courses listed below have been approved as American
Studies electives. They have been selected on the basis of
beingself-consciousabouttheirAmericansubjectmatterasa
problemorissueorbecauseofthequestionstheyraiseabout
American identity. Other courses that meet these criteria, such
as topics courses or courses taught by visiting professors, may
beapprovedbythechairpersonofAmericanStudies.Students
shouldbeawarethatsomeofthesecourseshaveprerequisites.
ARTS AND HUMANITIES
AMS—OtherelectiveAmericanStudiescourses,ifappropriate.
ART227.LancasterArchitecture.
ART251.ModernArtSince1900.
ENG206.AmericanLiteratureI.
ENG207.AmericanLiteratureII.
ENG208.AmericanLiteratureIII.
ENG250.ContemporaryAmericanShortStory.
ENG265.ContemporaryGraphicNovel.
ENG461–469.Authorseminars,whereappropriate.
SOCIAL SCIENCES
AMS—OtherelectiveAmericanStudiescourses,ifappropriate.
BOS332.Law,EthicsandSociety.
ENE216.EnvironmentalPolicy.
ENE245.AmericanNatureEssays.
ENE313.NuclearPower,WeaponsandWasteDisposal.
ENE320.InternationalEnvironmentalLaw.
GOV208.AmericanPresidency.
GOV219.CityandStateGov.
GOV305.PublicPolicyImplementation.
GOV309.TheCongress.
GOV310CampaignsandElections.
GOV314.AmericanConstitution.
GOV315.CivilRightsandCivilLiberties.
GOV318.MediaandPolitics.
GOV330ForeignPolicyAnalysis
GOV370,470.TopicsinAmericanPolitics.
GOV411.PresidentialCharacter.
HIS233.AfricanAmericanHistory.
HIS334.AmericanSouth.
HIS339.CivilWarandReconstruction
HIS409,410,411.SelectedStudies/SocialandPoliticalHistoryof
NorthAmerica.
HIS408,420.SelectedStudies/IntellectualandCulturalHistoryofthe
UnitedStates.
PBH303.Problem-SolvingCourts/DrugCourt.
PBH415.PublicHealthResearch:YouAreWhatYouEat?
PBH420.PublicHealthResearch:PregnancyOutcomesinAmerican
Women.
RST313.AfricanAmericanReligion
SOC330.SociologyofMedicine.
SOC350.SociologyofGender.
SOC360.RaceandEthnicRelations.
SOC364.SociologyoftheFamily.
SOC384.UrbanEducation.
ANTHROPOLOGY
Professor Scott Smith, Chair
Misty L. Bastian Lewis Audenreid Professor of History
and Archaeology and
and Professor of Anthropology
Michael S. Billig Professor of Anthropology
Mary Ann Levine Professor of Anthropology
Scott C. Smith Associate Professor of Anthropology
Bridget Guarasci Assistant Professor of Anthropology
Tate A. Lefevre Assistant Professor of Anthropology
Thomas C. Hart Visiting Assistant Professor
of Anthropology
Monica Cable Director of Fellowships & East Asia
Recruitment and Adjunct Assistant
Teaching Professor of Anthropology
Thestudyofanthropologyleadstoaknowledgeoftheworld’s
cultural, social and biological diversity in the past and present.
Although the focus of such knowledge is the entirety of the
human experience, students of anthropology apply their
comparativeperspectivetoreectupontheirownlives,beliefs
andtaken-for-grantedassumptions.Inthissense,anthropology
providesastrongfoundationfor“theexaminedlife,”aSocratic
ideal that is one of the founding inspirations of the liberal arts.
Anthropology, the study of humanity, is unique among
academic disciplines in being simultaneously a social science,
a natural science and one of the humanities. As one noted
anthropologist has remarked: “Anthropology is the most
scientic of the humanities and the most humanistic of the
sciences.”
Although it is true that many anthropologists spend much of
theirtimestudyingandwritingaboutthe“smallpicture”—a
remote village, a single archaeological site, a particular myth—
it is also true that the discipline is concerned with the biggest,
mostgeneral, picture. Generalquestions aboutthe “natural”
22 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
roles of parents, the meaning of work, the function of ritual
andtheoriginsofinequalityaretypicallyanthropological.All
anthropologists, no matter what their theoretical persuasions
ortopicalspecializations,afrmthevalueofholism,viewing
all aspects of human thought and action as interrelated. This
holistic outlook is perfectly consistent with the nature and
goalsofliberaleducationinthemodernworld.Notonlydoes
the anthropology major provide a strong background in critical
thinking, analysis and writing, but the anthropology graduate
also generally comes away with a broad appreciation for global
diversity and a deep sympathy for our fellow humans.
The Franklin & Marshall Anthropology major seeks to
balance the learning of factual content, theoretical analysis
and actual empirical research in either cultural anthropology
or archaeology. Our majors learn about anthropology, but they
also experience what it means to do anthropology.
A major in Anthropology consists of 10 courses: 100, 102,
200;oneculture-areacourse;two300-levelcourses;410(for
those mainly interested in social anthropology) or 411 (for
thosemainlyinterestedin archaeology); and threeelectives.
We also encourage our majors to expand the projects begun in
theirMethodscourse(410or411)intofull-scaleIndependent
Studiesprojects baseduponoriginaleldresearch.Students
should discuss research opportunities with their departmental
advisers prior to the spring semester of their junior year. The
writing requirement in the Anthropology major is met by
completion of the normal courses required to complete the
major.
A minor in Anthropology consists of six courses in the
department: 100; 102; 200; one culture-area course; one
300-levelcourse;andoneelective.
Majors in the Department of Anthropology have studied
abroad in the following programs in recent years: School
forInternationalTraining(SIT);ButlerUniversity’sInstitute
for Study Abroad; Institute for the International Education
of Students (IES); Council on International Educational
Exchange;InstituteforFieldResearch.SeetheInternational
ProgramssectionoftheCatalogforfurtherinformation.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
100. Social Anthropology. (S)
An examination of fundamental categories and practices in social
anthropology, giving special attention to anthropological methodologies,
basicformsofsocialorganization,andthewayshumanbeingsgenerate
particular social meanings through their aesthetic, economic, religious,
and political activities. Bastian, Billig, LeFevre, Guarasci
102. Introduction to Archaeology. (S)
An introductory survey of historic and prehistoric archaeology that
examines how knowledge about the past is created, debated and sometimes
abused. A survey of world prehistory from the earliest hominids through
the rise of the rst “civilizations” to expose the range of variation in
past human social and political organization. Provides a global and
comparative approach to better understand and appreciate this diversity.
As we learn about the messages and lessons that archaeology has to offer,
weshouldbegintothinkcriticallyaboutourownsocietyandreecton
the possibilities for its improvement. Smith, Levine, Hart
170 – 179. Topics in Anthropology. (S)
Lecture courses or seminars on theoretical or ethnographic subjects of
current interest.
200. Anthropological Theory. (S)
The history of anthropological thought up to the present. The meaning and
purposeofthinkingtheoretically.Thiscourseservesastheprerequisite
to most 300-level courses inAnthropology. Prerequisite: ANT 100 or
permission of the instructor. Billig
215. Women in Society. (S)
How gender roles affect women’s participation in political, ritual,
economic and other social relations. The course materials will include
detailed ethnographic work on specic societies and will maintain
a theoretical perspective informed by contemporary gender studies.
Prerequisite:ANT100.Same as WGS 215. Bastian
250. Witchcraft and Sorcery in a Global Context. (S)
Inthiscoursewewillconsider how thecategoriesof“witchcraft”and
“sorcery” have been used in Anthropology, both to describe mystical
acts(particularlymysticalattacks)andasanethnographicmetaphorto
discuss the pressures of communal life for individuals. Course content
willconsistof,butnotbelimitedto,witchcraftandsorceryasa“social
strain gauge,” witchcraft and sorcery as expressions of symbolic power,
the gendered name of witchcraft and sorcery, as well as witchcraft and
sorceryunderconditionsofWestern-stylemodernity.Same as AFS/RST/
WGS 250. Bastian
253. Andean Archaeology. (NW) (S) (Culture Area)
This course explores the cultural diversity of the central Andes of
SouthAmericafromtheoriginalarrival of migrants over12,000years
ago to contact with Spanish conquistadors in the early 16th century.
Geographically, the course will focus on prehistoric cultures that occupied
the modern countries of Peru, Bolivia, and Ecuador. Themes include:
debates about the initial migration to the region, early food production,
the origins of social complexity, ceremonialism, state formation and
disintegration,andconquestbySpain.Prerequisites:ANT100,orANT102
or permission of instructor. Smith
257. People and Cultures of the Andes. (NW) (S) (Culture Area)
ThiscoursefocusesonthemountainousAndeanregionofSouthAmerica
andprovidesanoverviewofAndeansocietyfromAD1500topresent.
We will examine the colonial matrix in which Iberian and Andean social,
political, and cultural forms came together. This course uses ethnographies,
contact period chronicles, indigenous narratives, novels, testimonials, and
lmaboutcontemporaryAndeansocietytoaddressissuesofcolonialism,
race, class, ethnicity, gender, and human-environment relationships.
Geographically, this course focuses on the region encompassed by the
modernnations of Ecuador,Peru,and Bolivia. Prerequisite:ANT100,
ANT102,orpermissionoftheinstructor. Smith
258. People and Cultures of East Asia. (NW) (S) (Culture Area)
This course introduces students to the cultures of China, Korea, and
Japan.Throughprimarysources(intranslation),lms,andethnographies,
this course will examine the shared cultural backgrounds of the region as
wellashoweachcountryhasmademodicationstottheirownsociety.
Topics include the mainstream philosophical traditions of Confucianism,
Daoism,andBuddhism,aswellassuchcomplexissuesastheindividual
and society, ethnicity and nationalism, and gender. Cable
259. Anthropology of the Middle East. (NW) (S) (Culture Area)
How do we understand the Middle East beyond the politics of oil
and war? This class is designed to introduce students to the cultural
productionoftheregionbetweenNorthAfricaandWestAsia,between
the Atlantic and Central Asia, commonly known as the Middle East. The
course begins with the study of colonial approaches to the region and
ends with a consideration of recent work that denes the Middle East
anewbyemphasizingthereligious,commercial,andpoliticalnetworks
that have historically connected urban and rural locations in regionally
denitive way. By moving between primary source documents and
scholarly analysis in class discussions and written course assignments,
students will learn to be ethnographers and thereby sharpen their own
critical interpretive abilities. At the end of the course, students will have
foundational knowledge of the Middle East as both a geographic and
ideologicallocation.Prerequisite:ANT100. Guarasci
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 23
260. Archaeology of North America. (NW) (S) (Culture Area)
ThiscoursesurveystheprehistoryofNativeAmericanpeoplesinCanada
andtheUnitedStatesfromtheirarrivalonthiscontinentmorethan12,000
years ago to their encounters with Europeans. Through the use of a regional
approach to the study of indigenous peoples, this course will survey a
widevarietyofprehistoricNativeAmericanpeoplesincludingthosein
theArctic,Northwestcoast,SouthwestandNortheast.Byuncoveringthe
diversityofNativeAmericanlifewaysinthepast,thiscourseprovidesthe
foundationfor understanding the rich heritageof contemporary Native
Americanpeoples.Prerequisites:ANT100,ANT102orpermissionofthe
instructor. Levine
261. North American Indians of the Eastern Woodlands. (NW) (S)
(Culture Area)
A survey of the past and present diversity of indigenous peoples in the
Eastern Woodlands of the United States and Canada. The focus is on
theprehistoricarchaeologyoftheregion,theconsequencesofEuropean
colonization on native groups and the struggles and achievements of
indigenous peoples today. An examination of issues ranging from the
controversy that surrounds the initial settlement of the Eastern Woodlands
byNativeAmericanstocontemporarydebatesonfederalrecognitionand
sovereignty.Prerequisite:ANT100or102.Same as AMS 261. Levine
263. The Amish. (S) (Culture Area)
A survey of Amish history, social organization, and culture through
the lens of cultural anthropology. Relations with the “English” world
throughtourism, commerce, and media. Willinclude at leastone eld
trip.Prerequisite:ANT100.Satisestheculturearearequirementforthe
Anthropologymajorandminor,butdoesnotsatisfytheCollege’snon-
Westernculturerequirement. Billig
267. Peoples and Cultures of Africa. (NW) (S) (Culture Area)
SocialandhistoricalpracticesofvariousAfricancultures,withaspecial
emphasis on sub-Saharan groups. Topics considered will include the
intersections between political economy, performances, religion, art, and
popularmediaonthecontinent.Prerequisite:ANT100.
Same as AFS 267. Bastian
269. Prehistory of the Near East. (NW) (S) (Culture Area)
ThiscourseexplorestheculturalandsocialdiversityoftheancientNear
East,tracingculturaldevelopmentsfromearlypost-glacialtimesthrough
the end of the Iron Age. Topics discussed will include the development of
agricultureandNeolithiclifeways,theriseoftheworld’searliestcities,
the development of social complexity, state formation and expansion,
the development of writing systems, and the politics of cultural heritage,
among others. Prerequisite: ANT102, or ANT100, or permission of
instructor. Hart
270 – 279. Topics in Anthropology. (S)
Lecture courses or seminars on theoretical or ethnographic subjects of
current interest.
290. Independent Study.
301. Archaeology of Inequality. (S)
To what extent are inequality and domination inherent or “natural”
characteristicsofsociallife?Ifthesephenomenaarenotintrinsicthenhow,
andinwhichcontexts,dotheyarise?Whataretheimplicationsofthese
phenomenaand howdo peopleresist hierarchies?Thiscourse examines
the development of economic, gender, and racial hierarchies from an
archaeological perspective. Archaeology is well suited to address these
questionsbecauseitexamineschangeanddevelopmentinsociallifeover
longperiodsoftime.Prerequisite:ANT200orpermissionofinstructor.
Smith
330. Anthropological Studies of Religion. (S)
This course takes account of various aspects of religious and ritual practice,
using material from both contemporary and classic ethnographies. Topics
of special interest for the course will include, but not be limited to:
cosmologicalconstructions;initiation;possession;commensality;magic;
witchcraftandsorcery;ritualaesthetics;andperformance.Prerequisite:
ANT200.Same as RST 330. Bastian
333. Anthropology of Personhood. (S)
Whatdoesitmeantobeaperson?Thisseminarexploresthecategory
oftheperson,oneofanthropology’smostenduringinterests.Fromthe
earlywritingsofMausstorecentworksonthe“sociallifeofmicrobiome”
orthe“theethnographyofrobots,”anthropologistshavesoughttobetter
understandwho(orwhat)countsasaperson,andwhy.Insomecultural
settings,forinstance,non-humananimals,“inanimate”objectsandspirits
mayqualifyforclaimsofpersonhoodtowhichsomehumanbeingsmay
notbeentitled.ReadingswillfeatureethnographiesfromtheMelanesian
South Pacic, Amazonia and the United States, as well as selections
from philosophical texts and science ction. Prerequisite:ANT 200or
permission of the instructor. Lefevre
335. Power. (NW) (S)
This seminar investigates the formation of power as an act of creativity.
It does so by using the concept of “frontier” to think about power in
formation. We will examine three principle frontiers of power: capital,
science, and art. Frontiers of power are inchoate spaces, spaces in
formation.Becauseofitsliminalnature,wildabusesofpowercanhappen
inthefrontier,asduringtheU.S.periodofmanifestdestinywhensettler
colonistsexpandedintoNativelands.Atthesametime,thefrontiercan
be a space of unbridled creativity. In frontier spaces, creativity and power
work in relation. It is this relationship that we will explore in this class. As
students explore the relationships of creativity and power, they will also
interrogate how anthropological works engaging the topic are themselves
innovative texts, thereby developing a dialogic investigation that engages
textsbothasformandcontent.Thenalcourseassignmentchallenges
studentstoputtheirliteraryinvestigationintopracticebyanalyzingpower
within a creative medium of their choice: students will prepare an original
pieceofart,amusicalcomposition,aworkofction,anentrepreneurial
endeavor, or an ethnography that elaborates upon the themes explored in
seminar.Prerequisites:ANT100andANT200. Guarasci
337. Anthropology of Environment. (NW) (S)
The environment is a denitive problem of the twenty-rst century.
Struggles to counteract climate change, international initiatives to
conserve biodiversity, legislation to curb industrial pollution, and
protocol for natural resource appropriation all express a commitment
to care for the environment. This class troubles the waters: What do
wemeanbyenvironment?Whathistoriesofnature,power,andcapital
deneenvironment?Whatarethecontemporaryeconomicandpolitical
implications of this environmental ethos? In this course, students will
grapplewithsuchquestionstoachievecompetencyintheanthropology
ofenvironment.Prerequisite:ANT100.Same as ENE337. Guarasci
340. Anthropology of Wealth and Poverty. (S)
Anthropological approaches to the relationship between economy and
society, including intensive readings of theoretical and empirical literature.
Topicsinclude:thenatureofrationality;Marxistandnon-Marxistpolitical
economy;thenatureandroleofproductionandexchange;class-conict;
colonialism;andthemakingoftheThirdWorld.Prerequisite:ANT200.
Billig
343. Cultural Relativism. (S)
Anthropologists have been scorned by conservatives and philosophers
for having foisted the doctrine of “cultural relativism” on the world.
This doctrine purportedly claims that all cultures are equal, that we
cannotandmustnotjudge values (ormorals,orstandards, or waysof
living,ortruths)ofanyoneculture—evenourown—asbeingsuperior.
Is this a fair description of cultural relativism in anthropology? Do
anthropologistsreallyavoidjudgingpracticessuchashumansacriceand
cannibalism?Wheredoesthisdoctrinecomefrom?Whatareitsstrengths
andlimitations? Is it as pernicious and incoherent asits critics assert?
Prerequisite:ANT200. Billig
345. Transitions to Capitalism. (S)
Theoretical debates, historical analyses, and ethnographic studies about
the rise of market exchange, private property, and the capitalist mode
of production. Anthropological perspectives on the nature, origins, and
cultureofcapitalism.Prerequisite:ANT200. Billig
24 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
355. The Body. (S)
Examines contemporary theoretical and ethnographic discussions relating
to the human body. Topics covered will include social constructions of
gender, reproduction and reproductive technologies, cultural ideologies of
sexuality,socialinscriptionsonthebody,“thebodyinextremis,”cultural
depositions of the corpse and what some might call hybrid, cyborg or
evenvirtualbodies.Prerequisite:ANT200orpermissionoftheinstructor.
Same as WGS 355. Bastian
360. Spatial Archaeology. (S)
The analysis of ancient spatial orders has been central to the
archaeological study of past social organization and dynamics. This
course explores the ways in which archaeologists have studied spatial
organizationatvariousscales,fromregionstobuildings.Topicscovered
include landscape archaeology, social meanings of space, urbanism, the
archaeology of community, archaeological approaches to the analysis
of public architecture, and household archaeology. Case studies may
includeClassicperiodMaya,ancientPeru,Sub-SaharanAfrica,Neolithic
Britain,Egypt,theLevant,andNorthAmerica.Prerequisite:ANT200or
permission of the instructor. Smith
365. Queens, Goddesses and Archaeology. (S)
This course will consider how archaeologists examine gender and
interpret the roles of women in ancient subsistence economies, politics
and religions. To achieve this goal we will discuss the roles of women in
egalitarianandstratiedsocietiesandexploretheactionsandstatusofboth
high-ranking and everyday women in the ancient world. Prerequisites:
ANT100,ANT102,ANT200orpermissionoftheinstructor.Same as
WGS 365. Levine
370 – 379. Topics in Anthropology. (S)
Lecture courses or seminars on theoretical or ethnographic subjects of
current interest.
380. Archaeology of Colonialism in Native North America. (S) (NW)
Archaeology is well poised to shed light on the social and historical
processes associated with colonialism and the impact that European
colonization had on Native Americans. By considering ve centuries
of interaction between Native Americans and Europeans we will
examine the diversity of experiences pertaining to culture change and
continuity, depopulation, accommodation, hybridization, resistance,
andrevolt.Byexploringawiderangeofarchaeologicalcasestudiesof
colonial-indigenousinteractionswewillalsoexaminehowcolonialism
was experienced at multiple levels ranging from the individual to large
populations.Prerequisites:ANT100,ANT102andANT200. Levine
390. Independent Study.
410. Anthropological Methods. (S)
A practicum in anthropological eldwork, including exercises in
participant observation, interviewing, framing a research question,
analysisandinterpretationofdata.Prerequisite:ANT200. Bastian
411. Archaeological Methods. (S)
Thiscoursewillprovidestudentswithhands-ontraininginarchaeological
eldandlaboratorymethods.Inthersthalfofthesemester,participants
willtraveltoalocaleldsiteandlearntechniquesofarchaeologicaldata
recovery, including survey, mapping and excavation. In the second half
of the course, the focus will be on lab analysis, including the processing
andinterpretationofartifactsrecoveredduringtheeldcomponentofthe
course.Specialattentionwillbegiventocomputertechniquesapplicable
toarchaeologicalanalysis.Studentsshouldexpecttospendtimeoutdoors
andtodedicateatleastoneortwoweekenddaystoeldtrips. Smith
490. Independent Study.
Senior level independent study directed by the Anthropology staff.
Permissionofchairperson.
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
Anthropology of Melanesia.
Paleoethnobotany.
Culture and Collapse.
GhostsandSpirits.
Ancient Mesoamerica.
ARABIC LANGUAGE
Professor Carrie Landfried, Chair
Christine N. Kalleeny Director and Teaching
Professor of the Arabic Program
Carrie Landfried Associate Professor of French and
Francophone Studies
Arabicisarichandvariedlanguagespokeninovertwodozen
countries in the Middle East and North Africa. The Arabic
ProgramatArabicFranklin&Marshallfocusesondeveloping
students’ communication skills in both spoken dialects
(Egyptian)andModernStandardArabic(MSA)usedinmore
formalcontexts.StudentsbeginreadingandwritinginArabic
during their rst semester of study and continue to improve
these skills along with their speaking and listening abilities
throughout the Intermediate and Advanced level courses.
Courses at all levels regularly integrate authentic materials and
technology in order to introduce students to the history, politics,
andcultureoftheArab world. Studentsarestrongly advised
to take Arabic 101, 102, 201 and 202 prior to a semester of
studyabroadinanArabic-speakingcountry.Moststudentswho
study abroad attend the CET program in Amman, Jordan or the
ArabicProgramatMiddleburyLanguageSchools.
An Area Studies minor in Middle Eastern Studies may be
arranged in consultation with Professor Christine Kalleeny,
Director, Arabic Language Program, or Professor Carrie
Lanfried,Chair of French,FrancophoneandArabicStudies,
andwiththepermissionoftheDirectorofInternationalStudies,
ProfessorDougAnthony.Studentsinterestedinajointmajor
withanotherprogramshouldcontactProfessorKalleeny.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
101. Beginning Arabic I.
In this introductory course, students develop their oral communication
skillsinbothcolloquialandModernStandardArabicwhilelearninghow
to read and writeArabic. By theend of the semester studentswill be
able to use appropriate greetings and traditional expressions, introduce
themselves and talk about their family and studies. For students with no
prior knowledge of Arabic. Offered every Fall. Kalleeny
102. Beginning Arabic II.
This course is a continued introduction to the Arabic language in a
cultural context, with an emphasis on expanding students’ vocabulary
andgrammaticalknowledge.Studentslearnhowtospeakinthepastand
future tenses in addition to developing an understanding of the root and
patternsystem.Prerequisite:ARB101orplacementbydirectorofArabic
Programinstructor.OfferedeverySpring. Kalleeny
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 25
201. Intermediate Arabic I. (NW) (LS)
The second year Arabic course continues to build on the skills and
materialspresentedinBeginningArabicII.Ittakesafour-skillsapproach
with emphasis on listening, speaking, reading and writing. During the
semester, students continue to expand their knowledge of grammatical
concepts and vocabulary in order to be able to speak, write and read about
more complex political, historical, and cultural subjects. Prerequisite:
ARB102(formerlyARB172)orplacementbydirectorofArabicProgram
or instructor. Offered every Fall. Kalleeny
202. Intermediate Arabic II. (NW) (LS)
The fourth semester Arabic course continues and builds on the skills
and materials presented in IntermediateArabic I. It takes a four-skills
approach with emphasis on listening, speaking, reading and writing.
Prerequisite:ARB201(formerlyARB271)orplacementbydirectorof
ArabicProgramorinstructor.OfferedeverySpring. Kalleeny
218. Narrative Journeys in Arabic Literature. (H) (NW)
This course introduces students to a variety of narratives in different
literarygenresfromtheArabworld.Theorganizingthemeofthiscourse
is that of the journey, whether it be a physical trek through the desert or
ametaphoricalonesuchasaninwardpsychologicalquest.Studentswill
encounter narratives by both male and female writers from various parts
of the Arab world and from different periods of Arabic literary history. All
texts are translated from the Arabic into English. Same as AFS/LIT 218.
Kalleeny
301. Advanced Arabic I. (NW) (LS)
The third year of Arabic builds on the material covered in Arabic 202
or Intermediate Arabic II. The goal of this course is to focus in more
detail on particular grammar concepts, building students’ vocabulary
and ability to utilize the root and verb pattern system to understand
andformnewvocabulary.Thiscoursealsodevelopsstudents’listening
skills, understanding certain nuances of texts, exposure to Middle Eastern
culture and history, and ability to speak in depth on a variety of topics
with condence. Prerequisite: ARB 202 or placement by director or
instructor. Kalleeny
302. Advanced Arabic II. (NW) (LS)
The second semester of third year Arabic builds on the material covered
inArabic301 orAdvancedArabic I. This course alsogoes into more
depthregardingcertaingrammaticalconcepts,buildingstudents’ability
to discuss a variety of topics through the use of new vocabulary and
expressionsorconjunctions.Studentscontinuetobeexposedtocultural
and historical aspects of the Arab world through written texts and listening
exercises. In addition to this, the course underlines the importance
of communication through, for example, class discussion and group
exercises.Prerequisite:ARB301orplacementbydirectororinstructor.
Kalleeny
ART, ART HISTORY AND FILM
Professor John Holmgren, Chair
Dirk Eitzen Professor of Film and Media
Richard K. Kent Professor of Art History
Jun-Cheng Liu Professor of Art
Amelia Rauser Professor of Art History,
Associate Dean of the Faculty
Linda S. Aleci Associate Professor of Art History
Michael Clapper Associate Professor of Art History
John Holmgren Associate Professor of Art
Kostis Kourelis Associate Professor of Art History
Jeremy Moss Associate Professor of Film and Media
Magnolia Laurie Assistant Professor of Art
Sandra E. Lee Assistant Professor of Art
Sonia Misra Visiting Instructor of Film and Media
Kevin Brady Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor of Art
Carol Hickey Senior Adjunct Instructor
of Architecture
Caitlyn Bishop Adjunct Assistant Professor of Art
Gloria Mast Adjunct Instructor of Art History
William Hutson Jennie Brown Cook and Betsy Hess
Cook Distinguished Artist-in-
Residence
The making of art, and the study of its visual traditions,
takes place at the intersection of culture, material and digital
practices,andhistory.TheDepartmentofArtandArtHistory
afrmsthecentralityofthevisualandmaterialtoaliberalarts
education. Thus we engage students in the processes of art
making and in the historical analysis of art and architecture
as the gateway to larger endeavors of knowledge: considering
such issues as personal and public life, religious and secular
practices, political activism and cultural power, the local and
global, and transformations of visual experience over time.
TheDepartmentofArtandArtHistoryprovidestheexibility
for students to design a concentration in Studio Art, Art
History, or a focused combination of the two. Our coursework
encourages students to make creative, innovative connections
across disciplines. Classes are taught in a diverse range of
spaces, from the classroom and the studio to museums and
eldsites.ArtandArtHistorystudentsbenetfromanarray
of campus resources, including interdisciplinary programs,
international programs, and digital initiatives. Through our
partnershipwiththePhillipsMuseumofArt,seniormajorsin
StudioArthavethechancetolearnhowtodesignandexhibit
theirwork,whileArtHistorystudentshavehands-oncuratorial
opportunitiesandexposuretoawide-rangingcollection.The
city of Lancaster offers a rich urban environment for our
architectural courses, as well as abundant resources for archival
study and local history. Franklin & Marshall’s proximity to
Philadelphia, Baltimore, Washington D.C., and New York
allows students to have access to some of the most important
collections of art in the country; the department schedules
regulareldtripstothesecollections.
We anchor our department mission in the ideals of a liberal arts
education, and our program establishes a sound foundation for
a range of professional paths. Our majors have successfully
undertaken advanced study at excellent graduate programs in
art history, studio art, and architecture. Our majors develop
habits of mind and innovative approaches to considering
intellectual and visual problems that enable them to embark on
diversecareers.Departmentalumnihavedevelopedsuccessful
careers as museum professionals, conservators, preservation
26 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
professionals, and appraisers. They work as web and graphic
designers, restaurateurs, and as cutting-edge fashion and
video-game designers. They practice as architects, lawyers,
anddoctors.Becauseweprideourselvesintrainingstudents
inwaysthatemphasizetheinterdisciplinary,thelocalandthe
global, as well as a commitment to community, we anticipate
that our future alumni will forge careers in areas that we have
yet to imagine.
Studentswhomajororminorinartelecteitheranarthistory
or a studio concentration. The major consists of 11 courses in
either of two possible combinations, as follows:
STUDIO ART
Elevencoursesarerequiredforthestudioartmajor:
Sevencorecoursesarerequired:
Oneintroductorycourseindrawing,ART114;
Oneintroductorycourseinsculpture,ART116;
One course in photography,ART 142 (can be satised
withART242);
Oneintroductorycoursein2-Ddesign,ART112;
Onearthistorysurvey,ART103;
Onepaintingcourse,ART222;
Theadvancedseminarinstudioartpractices,ART462,
one full credit.
In addition, students will work closely with their major
advisers to choose four electives with which they can
deepen their study in art history, create an area of special
focus within studio art, or investigate courses of interest.
Ofthesefourelectives,twoare200-levelcoursesinstudio,
lm, or art history; the other two are 300-level studio
courses. Faculty advisers will help students construct a
coherentclusterofcoursesfortheareaofspecialfocus;
this thematic cluster should be approved by advisers in the
fallofstudents’junioryear.Advisersmayapprovecourses
inotherdepartmentsaspartofthiscluster.Somepossible
areas of focus include: advanced painting; advanced
sculpture; design and the environment; architecture/
urbanism;andtechnologyandimage-making.
Allstudioartmajorsarerequiredtopresenttheirworkinthe
SeniorExhibitionatthePhillipsMuseum.Preparationforthe
exhibition, guided and evaluated by Art major advisers and
theprofessorteachingtheART462StudioCapstonecourse,
includesanon-creditportfolioreviewinthefallsemesterand
therequiredcapstonecourseinthespring.
Thewritingrequirementformajorsconcentratinginstudioart
ismetbyearningaminimumof“C”inART103,orinone
seminar offered by the department.
ART HISTORY
Elevencoursesarerequiredforthearthistorymajor:
Eightcorecoursesarerequired:
ART103.IntroductiontoWesternArt;
ART114.IntroductoryDrawing;
CLS115.GreekArtandArchaeologyorCLS117Roman
ArtandArchaeology;
OnecourseinAsianarthistory,ART105,281or283;
Onecourseinarchitecturalhistory,ART121,123,211,
219,227;
ART231.ArtandArchitectureoftheItalianRenaissance;
Onecourseinmodernarthistory(ART241,243,or251);
ART461,theadvancedseminarinarthistory.
In addition, students will choose three electives with
which they can deepen their study of studio art, create
an area of special focus within art history, or investigate
courses of interest. At least one of these three electives
mustbeatorabovethe300-level.Facultyadviserswill
help students construct a coherent cluster of courses for
theareaofspecialfocus;coursesinotherdepartmentsmay
alsobeappropriateaspartofthiscluster.Somepossible
areasoffocusinclude:Asianart;earlymodernart;19th-
centuryart;Americanart;architecture/urbanism;artand
archaeology;andtechnologyandimage-making.
Thewritingrequirementformajorsconcentratinginarthistory
is metby earning a minimum grade of “C” in one seminar
offered by the department.
The minor consists of six courses, as follows:
THE STUDIO MINOR
Two courses:
ART103.IntroductiontoWesternArt;
ART114.IntroductoryDrawing;
Plusfourothercoursesinstudioart,choseninconsultation
withanadviser,withatleastoneatorabovethe300-level.
THE ART HISTORY MINOR
Three introductory courses:
ART103.IntroductiontoWesternArt;
ART105.IntroductiontoAsianArt;
ART114.IntroductoryDrawing.
Plus three other courses in art history, chosen in
consultation with an adviser, with at least one at or above
the300-level.
FILM & MEDIA
A major in Film & Media provides students with a core
foundation in moving image history, theory, and practice. Our
courses help students develop the ability to think visually,
as well as to discuss and write about cinema and the media
artswithnuanceandsophistication.Studentsintheprogram
develop skills in media analysis, historical research, and
theoretical application. Our students also make creative work
in a range of modes and media, from storytelling with digital
video to experimental forms on lm. The program propels
students to actively engage and explore social, cultural, and
systemicquestionsandproblems,tousecamerasandscreens
to reconsider and deconstruct existing structures and norms.
A Film & Media major consists of ten courses.
Four foundational courses:
FLM 110 Intro to Film and Media
FLM215MotionPictureHistory
FLM226MotionPictureProduction
FLM311VisualThinking
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 27
Oneoftwo300-levelcreativeproductionworkshops:
FLM320NarrativeandCollaboration
FLM324AlternativeFormsandPractices
Oneoftwo300-levelhybridhistory/productioncourses:
FLM330ExperimentalFilmandVideo
FLM332DocumentaryFilmandVideo
One300-levelcourseinlm/mediahistoryortheory:
FLM341SpecialTopicinFilmandMedia
One 400-level course in theoretical or practical
methodologies:
FLM440AdvancedTopicinFilmandMedia
Two electives from the following options:
ART 142 Digital Photography I; FLM 261 Writing for the
Screen; FLM 320 Narrative and Collaboration or FLM 324
AlternativeFormsandPractices;FLM330ExperimentalFilm
andVideoorFLM332DocumentaryFilmandVideo;FLM
341SpecialTopicinFilmandMedia(asecondsection);FLM
440AdvancedTopic in Filmand Media (asecondsection);
GOV318MediaandPolitics;AMS213BlackAmericanFilm;
TND345MovementandMedia;AMS354RaceandGender
inEthnicStudiesFilm.
OneDEI-designatedcourse:
Film & Media majors must include among these 10 courses,
orinadditiontothem,atleastonemedia-relatedcoursethat
focusesondiversity,equityandinclusion.TheDEIcoursemay
overlapwithanotherrequiredcourseforthemajor:anelective
oranappropriatetopicinFLM341orFLM440.Eachstudent
willworkwiththeiradvisortodesignateacoursethatfullls
thisrequirement.
A minor in Film and Media consists of six courses.
FLM 110 Intro to Film and Media
FLM215MotionPictureHistory
FLM226MotionPictureProduction
FLM311VisualThinking
Two electives
A joint major in Film and Media consists of eight courses.
FLM 110 Intro to Film and Media
FLM215MotionPictureHistory
FLM226MotionPictureProduction
FLM311VisualThinking
FLM 320 Narrative and Collaboration or FLM 324
AlternativeFormsandPractices
FLM 330 Experimental Film and Video or FLM 332
DocumentaryFilmandVideo
FLM440AdvancedTopicinFilmandMedia
One elective
To be considered for departmental honors in Art and Art History,
graduating seniors, besides meeting the College’s general
requirementsforhonors,mustcompleteasubstantialproject,
usually evolving from a fall semester course or independent
study and continuing in an independent study in the spring.
Students interested in pursuing departmental honors should
consult with their academic adviser and obtain a copy of the
department’sdetailedguidelines.
MajorsintheDepartmentofArtandArtHistoryhavestudied
abroad in the following programs in recent years: Butler
UniversityEnglandandScotland;IAUFrance;IESAustriaand
Spain;SyracuseUniversityItalyandSpain;TempleUniversity
in Rome; SACI Academic Semester Abroad Program. See
theInternationalProgramssectionoftheCatalogforfurther
information.
Majors in Film & Media regularly study abroad at the Film
andTVSchooloftheAcademyofPerformingArts(FAMU)
in Prague, Czech Republic (CET Czech Republic Film
ProductionorCIEEPragueFilmStudies).Additionally,Film
&Mediastudentshaverecentlystudiedatthefollowingoff-
campusprograms:DIS-StudyAbroadinCopenhagen;NYU
SpringatTisch;DIS-StudyAbroadinStockholm.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
A. STUDIO ART COURSES
112. Color and Design. (A)
Colormightwellbethemostdifcultelementofthevisualartstoget
a handle on. Its unpredictability makes it challenging for beginners and
experienced artists alike. This course involves a close study of color:
mixing, matching, varieties of contrast, and color composition. This
courseis also intended to helpsharpen compositionalproblem-solving
skills, visual acumen, and inventive abilities. We will work in multiple
variations and revisions of drawn, painted, and collaged studies. Elements
suchas line,force, weight,movement, interval, gure-ground, texture,
and emphasis-subordination will be emphasized. Course projects are
divided between closely structured works and independent notebook
studies. Brady
114. Introductory Drawing. (A)
Thefundamentalsofdrawing—stilllife,landscape,portraitandgure—
using traditional and experimental techniques. The relationship of the
methodandtechniquestoartisticexpression. Laurie
116. Introductory Sculpture. (A)
An introduction to how ideas and meaning can be transmitted through
three-dimensional forms and materials and to the basic processes
involved in the creation of the sculptures that convey those concepts.
Materialsincludeclay,wood,metalandmixedmedia;techniquesinclude
modeling, carving and fabrication (basic carpentry and welding). The
work of sculptors, both historical and contemporary, will be examined
anddiscussed.Studentswillbechargedafeeformaterialsinthiscourse.
Lee
142. Digital Photography I. (A)
Emphasizesmakingwellthought-outartisticstatementswiththecamera.
Digitalphotographyoffersmanyofthesamepracticesfoundintraditional
photography,fromcamerasettingswithdepthofeld,ISOspeedsand
optimalexposure,toreadingnaturalandarticiallight.Concentrationon
potential for aesthetic enhancement, manipulation and storage in the digital
darkroom as well as consideration of slides of master photographs and the
differentgenresandapproachesavailabletotheartistphotographer.Does
not supply complete information on all aspects of digital photography or
newcommercialphotographicmedia.Studentswillbechargedafeefor
materialsinthiscourse.FormerlyART242. Holmgren
28 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
214. Figure and Narrative. (A)
This intermediate drawing class is dedicated to the examination of the
gureasbothaformandcharacter.Exploringawiderangeofmaterials,
such as graphite, charcoal, ink and collage, the class will start with the
study of structure and form with the use of skeletons and models. The
second part of the semester will incorporate props, settings, observations
ofeverydaylife,andtheuseofreferencephotographs/imagesinorderto
explore the ideas of character and narrative. Laurie
218. Introduction to Architectural Design. (A)
Studiocoursetofocusonelementsofdesignandideapresentation.Design
ofnewbuildings,adaptive reuse ofexistingbuildings,solar inuences
on design, site planning, interior design and historical reference will be
consideredasbackgroundforassignedprojects.Presentationwillinclude
drawings and models. No prior knowledge of drafting is necessary.
Studentswillbechargedafeeformaterialsinthiscourse. Hickey
220. Sustainable Design. (A)
Thiscourseisacombinationofexaminingtheprinciplesofsustainable/
green architectural design and executing design solutions for projects,
incorporating the sustainable design principles. The course includes an
introductiontoarchitecturaldrawing/draftingandmodelmakingaswell
as basic principles of architectural design, in order to effectively execute
the design solutions. Same as ENE 220. Hickey
222. Painting. (A)
An introduction to oil painting theory and practice with a strong emphasis
on color, delineation of form and space, light and shadow, surface and
texture, composition and personal expression. Liu
224. Chinese Brush and Ink Painting. (A) (NW)
An introduction to traditional Chinese painting and art of Chinese
calligraphy with emphasis on a variety of traditional and modern Chinese
paintingtechniques through differentsubjectmatters suchas bird-and-
owerpaintingandlandscapepainting.Thecoursewillalsoexplorethe
practical aspects of the art of Chinese calligraphy and seal carving and
their relationship to Chinese painting. Liu
226. Motion Picture Production. (A)
Thiscourseteacheslmmakingfundamentalsthroughaseriesofprojects
that focus on motivated camera work, lighting for moving image, video
editing, and the creative use of sound with video. Students will also
explore a range of conceptual and methodological approaches in creative
lm practice. Prerequisite for subsequent lmmaking courses, such as
NarrativeandCollaboration.FormerlyTDF262.Same as FLM 226.
Moss
228. Scene Design. (A)
Emphasizesthedesignprocessandthevisualideaandanalyzesdesigns
and designers. Students prepare models and renderings of assigned
productions. Same as FLM 228. Zura
254. Digital Art. (A)
Studentsinthiscoursewillworkintensivelywithdigitalimages:collecting,
repurposing,combining, and analyzing images inorder to explore and
develop thematic content. Critique, revision, and working through
variantswillbeemphasized.Studentswillread,lookatawidearrayof
pictures,andexplorecasestudiesinartasajumping-offpointforthematic
assignments,including photomontage andcollage; wordless narratives;
thebody;surrealistdislocation;metaphor,metonym,andsynecdoche;and
theminiatureandthegigantic.ParticipantswilluseAdobePhotoShopasa
tool for exploring composition, design principles, and the communication
of ideas. This course will help sharpen compositional problem-solving
skills, visual acumen, and inventive abilities. It is recommended for Art
majors and minors, especially those inclining to painting, drawing, or
photography. Brady
320. Narrative and Collaboration. (A)
Anintensiveworkshopinvisualstorytelling.Studentsworkinteamsto
develop,shootandeditshortnarratives.Thiscourserequiresanunusual
amount of outside-of-class work. Prerequisite: FLM 226 or TDF/ART
262,“FundamentalsofMotionPictureProduction.”FormerlyTDF362.
Same as FLM 320. Moss
322. Advanced Painting. (A)
An exploration of technical and expressive skills with complex painting
and mixed-media techniques. This course will also develop critical
thinking, aesthetic values and an awareness of contemporary issues in
painting and their relationship to individual student work.
Prerequisite:ART222. Liu
332. Documentary Film and Video. (A)
Documentary lms aim to represent reality on screen. Dealing with
actualityoncameraposesarangeofquestionsandchallenges,fromthe
aesthetic(e.g.,howtoshowwhatcan’tbelmed),totheethical(e.g.,how
tobefairtosubjects),tothepractical(e.g.,howtoengageaudiences).This
coursewilladdressthesequestionsthroughweeklylmscreeningsand
discussions, theoretical and historical readings, and practical exercises.
Studentswillcompletethecoursethrougheitheradocumentaryprojector
aresearchpaper.FormerlyTDF364.Same as FLM 332. Moss
336. Sculpture and the Environment. (A)
This course brings the study of sculpture into the wider context of
environmental considerations—whether they be issues of location or
ecology. Once sculpture moves off the pedestal and into a larger physical
scale, questions regarding its relationship to the surrounding space
(whetherinteriororexterior)aremagniedandoftenbecomeintegrated
into the structure of the artwork. Once sculpture expands into a larger
conceptual framework, questions about the nature of materials, their
manufacture, recyclability and relationship to the natural world also arise.
Prerequisite:ART116,ART132orpermissionoftheinstructor.Students
will be charged a fee for materials in this course Lee
338. Experimental Media. (A)
This course introduces contemporary concepts and approaches towards
makingvisualartinanexperimentalmanner.Performance,conceptualart,
time-basedanddigitalmediaaswellasarangeofnontraditionalmaterial
approacheswillbeexplored.Notopentorst-yearstudents. Lee
342. The Constructed Image. (A)
Concentrates on ideas surrounding narrative tableaux, still life, cinema,
andstagedphotography;introducescreativepossibilitiesofspace,props,
place, and lighting. Addresses historical and contemporary concerns.
Theemphasisisonphotographyasacreativemedium,withinanearts
context.Prerequisite:ART142orART242. Holmgren
462. Studio Capstone Course. (A)
Designed to guide advanced major and minor students concentrating in
studio art through a critical examination of what they have accomplished in
recent semesters and what their direction and goals are for the foreseeable
future. Emphasis on production of substantial and challenging new work
within a coherent direction and choice of media as well as research into the
wider context of promoting and exhibiting work as a future professional.
Taughtastwohalf-creditcourses,FallandSpring.Prerequisite:permission
of instructor. Holmgren
270 – 278, 370 – 378, 470 – 478. Studio Topics.
Specialstudioofferings,varyinginsubject.Maybetakenmorethanonce
fordifferentsubjects.Permissionofinstructor.
490. Independent Study in Studio Art. (A)
Independent study directed by the Studio Art staff. Prerequisite:
Permissionofthechairperson.
STUDIO TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE
OFFERED IN 2020–2021
SculptureinTimesofCrisis.
IntroductoryPrintmaking.
AdvancedDrawing.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 29
B. COURSES IN ART HISTORY
ART103isnormallyopenonlytorst-yearsandsophomores.
103. Learning to See: Histories of Art & Architecture in the Western
Tradition. (A)
Howdoweseethepast?Whatdotheobjectsproducedinthepasttellus
aboutthetransformationofvisualexperienceovertime?Andhowdowe,
inthemodernage,tellthestoriesofthoseobjects?Thiscourseintroduces
studentstothequestionsarthistoriansask,themethodstheyuse,andthe
workstheystudy,focusingontheWesterntraditionfromAntiquitytothe
present day. While the course spans more than 2000 years, it complements
breadth with case studies focusing on conditions of making art, as well as
thesocial,politicalandculturalcontextsofculturalproduction.Students
learn skills in looking, the analysis of visual form, and writing about what
they see, skills that lay a foundation for future study in art, art history as
well as many other disciplines. Aleci, Clapper
105. Introduction to Asian Art. (A) (NW)
An introduction to the visual culture of EastAsia (China and Japan),
including a unit on Indian Buddhist art. The course examines a small
number of topics with an aim to introduce basic art historical method
through the close study of key monuments. Kent
115. Greek Art and Archaeology. (A)
This course provides an overview of the archaeological monuments of
ancient Greece. Coursework will focus on methodological approaches to
analyzingbuildingtechniques,trends,stylesandthesocial,politicaland
religious functions of art and monumental architecture in ancient Greek
society. Topics covered in lecture and classroom discussion will include
archaeological and art historical interpretations of sacred and public
architecture, urbanism, three-dimensional sculpture, relief sculpture,
painting,decorativearts.Thereisarequiredeldtrip.Same as CLS 115.
Castor
117. Roman Art and Archaeology. (A)
This course provides an overview of the archaeological monuments of
ancientRome.Courseworkwillfocusonmethodologicalapproachesto
analyzingbuildingtechniques,trends,stylesandthesocial,politicaland
religiousfunctionsofartandmonumentalarchitectureinancientRoman
society. Topics covered in lecture and classroom discussion will include
archaeological and art historical interpretations of sacred and public
architecture, urbanism, three-dimensional sculpture, relief sculpture,
paintinganddecorativearts.Thereisarequiredeldtrip.
Same as CLS 117. Meyers
121. Introduction to Architecture I. (A)
AsurveyofarchitecturefromthersthumansettlementintheNeolithic
period to the dramatic spaces of Gothic cathedrals. We study the
monuments of the Western tradition (Egypt, the Ancient Near East,
Greece, Rome, Byzantium, Islam, the Middle Ages) and the great
civilizationsofAsia,AfricaandAmerica.Inadditiontoachronological
narrative, we focus on individual case studies through which we build the
foundations in understanding architectural form. We learn about materials,
structure, geometry, aesthetics, ritual, theology, ideology, ecology, crafts,
labor, abstraction and poetics. Ultimately, we learn how piles of stones
havearticulatedhumanity’shighestideals,whilewediscoverremnants
of those ideals even in our own built environment. The story continues
with Introduction to Architecture II, which focuses on the architecture of
modernitybetweentheRenaissanceandthepresent.Noprerequisites.
Kourelis
123. Introduction to Architecture II. (A)
Asurveyof architecture from the fteenthcentury to the present.The
course aims to give a thorough understanding of architectural discourse
fromtheRenaissancetocurrentmovements.Specialfocuswillbegiven
to the effects of industrialization, urbanization and the dialectics of
modernity. In addition to learning the parade of styles and architectural
innovations, we will consider the art of building as the highest form
of human inquiry within the public realm. Moreover, we will learn
how to read the language of architecture, its parts, inherent qualities,
contradictions and formal principles. Kourelis
211. Islamic Art and Architecture. (A) (NW)
Islamic civilization is both global and regional. Spanning across three
continents and fourteen centuries, it offers many interpretive challenges
towesternviewers,whohavetraditionallyconnedIslamtoanoutsider
status. Growing out of the same cultural roots as medieval Europe, the
art and architecture of Islam developed its own vocabulary, aesthetics and
religious concerns. This chronological survey pays particular attention to
the cross-cultural dimensions of Islam. We study the creative products
of various caliphates but also contemplate the role that Islamic art and
architecturehasplayedintheconstructionoftheWest’sself-identity.No
previousfamiliaritywithIslamiccivilizationisrequired.Materialculture
will guide us through a historical and theoretical discovery beginning with
Muhammad’sighttoMedinaandendingwiththeGuggenheim’sightto
AbuDhabi. Kourelis
215. Motion Picture History. (A)
Anintroductiontothehistoryofmotionpicturesfromthe1890sthrough
the present day. Surveys both the evolution of popular movies and
inuential artistic and rhetorical counter-currents, including “national”
lmmovements,experimentalcinema,anddocumentary.FormerlyTDF
267.Same as FLM 215. Moss
219. Medieval Art and Architecture. (A)
SurveyoftheartsandarchitectureoftheMiddleAgesfromthebeginnings
ofChristianityintherstcenturytotheoriginsoftheRenaissanceinthe
fteenth-centuryCE.Emphasisisgiveninthetranscendentpossibilities
of aesthetic experience and the material construction of immaterial ideals.
The class also traces the vestiges of medieval art in the architectural and
museological expressions of modern America. Kourelis
227. Lancaster Architecture. (A)
Lancaster is a virtual laboratory of architectural history representing every
periodofAmericanarchitecture.TheseminarfocusesonLancaster’smost
prominent buildings and investigates how architects translate abstractions
(beauty,truth,morality)onthecity’sphysicalfabric. Kourelis
231. The Material Renaissance: Art and the Economies of Culture. (A)
HistorytellsustheRenaissanceinItalywastheGoldenAgeofart.This
courseproposesotherwise,thattheRenaissanceinauguratedanexplosive
new culture of consumption, fueled byurbanization, the unprecedented
production of material goods, and the economic and social capital of
cities. The result was a dramatically transformed society whose traces
remaintoday.WhatwastheRenaissance(andwhyshouldwecare)?This
course explores the cultural artifacts produced in this period—including
citysquares,buildings,paintings,furnishings,foodandfashion—through
the dynamic interplay of urban and rural economies, social and political
institutions, and the intellectual movement of humanism. Focusing on the
material production of this period, we ask what it tells us about the myths
and realities of this new age. Aleci
233. Art of the Renaissance in Northern Europe. (A)
Painting,sculptureandthegraphicartsintheNetherlandsandGermany
duringthe15thand16thcenturies.Emphasisisplacedontheemergenceof
startling new forms of naturalism during the period and their relationship to
religious beliefs, commerce and changing systems of patronage. Aleci
241. 18th- and 19th-Century Art. (A)
AsurveyofEuropeanartfrom1750to1900,includingsuchmovements
as Neoclassicism, Romanticism and Impressionism and such artists as
Constable, Delacroix and Van Gogh. We will consider art, architecture
and decorative arts in their historical and cultural contexts, examining
suchthemesasthesignicanceoflandscapeinanindustrializingworld,
theculturalcompetitionofWorld’sFairsandthefashionforOrientalism.
Prerequisite:Noprerequisite,butART103isstronglyrecommended.
Rauser
243. American Art. (A)
Historical and aesthetic consideration of architecture, painting, decorative
artsandsculptureproducedintheUnitedStatesfromcolonialsettlement
throughthe1913ArmoryShow.Coursethemesincludethesocialfunctions
ofworksofart,therelationshipofU.S.andEuropeancultures,theroleof
art in building a national identity, the development of an infrastructure of
art institutions and the contrast and connection between popular and elite
art. Prerequisite: prior coursework in art history orAmerican studies is
recommended. Same as AMS 243. Clapper
30 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
245. The History of Photography: The First 100 Years. (A)
Anexaminationoftherst100yearsofthemediumfromitsinventiontothe
documentaryphotographyproducedundertheFarmSecurityAdministration
inthelate1930s.Emphasiswillbeplacedontherelationshipofphotography
totheartsofpaintingandliterature,aswellasoncontextualizingphotographs
asdocumentsofscienticinvestigation,ethnographicresearch,socialhistory
andpersonalexpression.Prerequisite:Stronglyrecommendedthatstudents
have had at least one art history course. Same as TDF 245. Kent
247. History of Fashionable Dress. (A)
A survey of the history of fashionable dress in Europe and America from
theRenaissancetothepresent,examiningmen’sandwomen’sclothing
in the context of artistic, historical, and cultural change in the modern
period.Thiscoursewillbedividedintothreeunits:Chronology;Object/
Theory;andInterpretation.Studentswillselectaninterpretativecontext
inwhichtosituatetheirnalproject:culturalhistory,arthistory,orgender
studies.Prerequisite:ART103,ART241,WGS210,orpermissionofthe
instructor. Same as WGS 247. Rauser
249. History of Printmaking. (A)
Comprehensive historical consideration of the development and use of
printmakingintheWestfromthe15thcenturytothepresent,emphasizing
the social and aesthetic ramications of the medium. The course
introduces various processes, including woodcut, engraving, etching,
aquatint, lithography and screen printing and considers such artists as
Dürer,Rembrandt,Goya,DaumierandWarhol.Includesstudyofactual
printsandstudiodemonstrations of techniques.Prerequisite:ART103,
105,114orpermissionoftheinstructor. Clapper
251. Modern Art Since 1900. (A)
A chronological survey of painting, sculpture, and architecture in Europe and
theUnitedStatesfrom1900tothepresentwithanemphasisonmodernism.
The course concentrates on major artistic movements, studying their visual
features, conceptual basis, relation to artistic tradition, and cultural context.
Prerequisite:ART103orpermissionoftheinstructor. Clapper
265. Contemporary Graphic Novel. (H)
In this course, we will develop an historical, aesthetic and formal
understandingofcontemporarygraphicction.Wewillstudythegenre’s
precedents in early comics, the interplay of the comics and their historical
andculturalcontexts,graphicction’sengagementwithhighart,andthe
formalelementsofgraphictexts.Readingswillincludecomicstripsand
comicbooksfrom1900tothepresent,MausIandII,Watchmen,Fun
Home,JimmyCorrigan,It’saBird,BlackHole,andothercomics.
Same as ENG 265. Sherin Wright
281. Sages and Mountains:
History of Classical Chinese Painting. (A) (NW)
An introduction to the most important genres and themes in Chinese
painting from roughly the mid-fourth to the end of the 14th century.
Specialattentionwill be givento the illustrationofnarrative andlyric
poetry, the rise of monumental landscape painting, the ideal of reclusion,
thepaintingtheoryofscholars,imperialpatronage,Ch’an(Zen)Buddhist
painting and the dynamic interaction between painting and calligraphy.
Kent
283. Survey of Japanese Art. (A) (NW)
This course examines traditions and themes in the visual culture of Japan.
Its primary objective is to investigate the development of that culture with
an emphasis on the manner in which it evolved in response to Chinese and
Korean cultural traditions. It provides a basic introduction to art historical
approaches.Wewillreectonsuchquestionsas:Whatculturalfactors
shapeiconographicandstylistictraditions?Inwhatwaysdoartifactsand
artreectreligiousandphilosophicalbeliefandideas? Kent
311. Visual Thinking. (A)
Advancedseminardevotedtoapplyingclassicalandcontemporarylm
theory to particular problems and movies. Topic varies from term to term.
FormerlyTDF363.Same as FLM 311. Eitzen
335. Destroying Images: Art and Reformation. (A)
This course examines the doctrinal and political conicts between the
RomanCatholicChurchandthe“reformed”religionsofnorthernEurope
in the 16th and 17th centuries, focusing on the impact on the visual
cultureoftheperiod.Thecourseexamines“high”artandarchitecture,
but pays particular attention to the attitudes towards images more broadly,
the ideologies that drive them, and their operations across all sectors of
society. Same as GST 335 and RST 335. Aleci
343. London & Paris, 1850–1890. (A)
A study of the artistic cultures of the two capitals of imperial power in
the19thcentury,LondonandParis,includingthearchitectureandurban
designofthetwocitiesaswellasthedecorativearts,fashion,andneart
oftheperiod.Prerequisite:ART103,ART241,ART243,orpermission
of the instructor. Same as WGS 343. Rauser
353. American Photography. (A)
Soon after the invention of photography, photographic images quickly
constitutedmuchofvisualculture—eithernationalorglobal.Sometimes
photographs were made with high artistic intention, but, far more often,
not.Thisseminarwillexaminediversetopicsin19thand20th-century
American photographic history, from vernacular images produced for the
masses(daguerreotypes,tintypes,snapshots)towhathavenowbecome
nearly iconic photographs produced either for documentary purposes or
tomakeartistic,self-expressivestatements.Wewillconsidertheworkof
unknown makers as well as that produced by celebrated photographers
suchasAlfredStieglitz,EdwardWeston,Walker Evans,AnselAdams,
DorotheaLange,RobertFrank,andRobertAdams.Same as ART 353.
Kent
383. Landscape in Chinese Poetry, Painting and Gardens. (A) (NW)
An examination of the most enduring theme in both the literary and visual
arts of China from the Han dynasty to the modern period. An introductory
unit explores the philosophical foundations for later cultural development.
The course then investigates the theme of landscape as it is expressed
inliterature(especiallypoetry)andpainting,aswellashowthesetwo
artsinformedthemakingofgardens.Prerequisite:ART105,ART281or
permission of the instructor. Kent
461. Methods in Art: Art, History and the Museum. (A)
Tensions between the diverse ways we study art—as an historical discipline,
and in the context of the museum—is the subject of this seminar. Although
they are integrally related, each constructs our understanding of the object,
and history, differently. Working with and through the collections of the
PhillipsMuseumofArt,studentswillengagethemethodsofthehistorian
and the museum professional, and their complex relationships to the
material object itself. Offered every Fall. Aleci
271–279, 371– 379, 471– 479. Art History Topics.
Specialarthistoryofferings,varyinginsubject.Maybetakenmorethan
oncefordifferentsubjects.Permissionofinstructorrequired.
490. Independent Study in Art History. (A)
Independent study directed by the Art History staff. Prerequisite:
Permissionofthechairperson.
ART HISTORY TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO
BE OFFERED IN 2020–2021
DestroyingImages.
C. COURSES IN FILM AND MEDIA
110. Introduction to Film and Media. (A)
An introduction to the way movies are put together, to basic critical terms
and concepts used in the study of movies, videos and television and to the
complex roles that cinema and television play in society—as art, business,
entertainmentandamediumofinformationandideology.FormerlyTDF
165. Staff
213. Black American Film. (A)
AnintroductiontolmstudiesusingblacklmasagenreofHollywood
and independent lm. Covers the work of Oscar Michaux through the
“blaxploitation”lmsofthe1970sandbeyond.Exploreslmsassocial
commentaryintheirparticularhistoricalcontexts.Particularattentionis
given to screen analysis of segregation, sexuality, class differences and
more.FormerlyTDF213.Same as AFS/AMS/WGS 213. Willard
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 31
215. Motion Picture History. (A)
Anintroductiontothehistoryofmotionpicturesfromthe1890sthrough
the present day. Surveys both the evolution of popular movies and
inuential artistic and rhetorical counter-currents, including “national”
lmmovements,experimentalcinema,anddocumentary.FormerlyTDF
267.Same as ART 215. Staff
226. Motion Picture Production. (A)
This course teaches lmmaking fundamentals through a series of
projects that focus on motivated camera work, lighting for moving
image,videoediting,andthecreativeuseofsoundwithvideo.Students
will also explore a range of conceptual and methodological approaches
in creative lm practice. Prerequisite for subsequent lmmaking
courses, such as Narrative and Collaboration. Formerly TDF 262.
Same as ART 226. Moss
245. The History of Photography: The First 100 Years. (A)
Anexaminationoftherst100yearsofthemediumfromitsinvention
to the documentary photography produced under the Farm Security
Administration in the late 1930s. Emphasis will be placed on the
relationship of photography to the arts of painting and literature, as well as
oncontextualizingphotographsasdocumentsofscienticinvestigation,
ethnographic research, social history and personal expression.
Prerequisite:Stronglyrecommendedthatstudentshavehadatleastone
arthistorycourse.FormerlyTDF245.Same as ART 245. Kent
261. Writing for the Screen. (A)
Combining workshop, lecture, class discussion, and screenings, this
course explores the fundamentals of the art and craft of writing for
the screen. Over the course of the semester we will investigate the
nature and content of three types of lm scripting (documentary,
experimental,andnarrative),workingoutparticularandcommontraits,
strategies, and approaches to scriptmaking both in theory and practice.
FormerlyTDF261. Staff
303. As Seen on TV: History as Media Event. (H)
“Where were you when…?” Whether the Kennedy assassination,
RichardNixon’sresignation,theshootingofRonaldReaganorthefall
oftheBerlinwall,mostBabyBoomerAmericanswouldanswer:“Iwas
watchingitonTV.”Thiscoursewillexploretherepresentationofhistory-
making moments in the mass media, with a focus on the second half of
the 20th century. We will explore how television covered the event at
thetime,howthatcoverageshapedtherstdraftofhistory,andhowit
has participated in shaping the cultural memory of the event in the years
since.CourseunitsincludeEdwardR.Murrow’sduelwithSenatorJoe
McCarthy,theJFKassassination,Vietnam,Watergate,theO.J.Simpson
case,and9/11.FormerlyTDF303. Same as AMS 303. Frick
311. Visual Thinking. (A)
Advancedseminardevotedtoapplyingclassicalandcontemporarylm
theory to particular problems and movies. Topic varies from term to term.
FormerlyTDF363. Staff
318. Media and Politics. (S)
Examines the role of the mass media (including print, broadcast, and
newmedia)inAmericanpolitics,givingparticularattentiontotheways
inwhichthemediabothinuenceandareinuencedbypoliticalactors
and the political process. Prerequisite: GOV 100. Formerly TDF 318.
Same as GOV 318. Medvic
320. Narrative and Collaboration. (A)
Anintensiveworkshopinvisualstorytelling.Studentsworkinteamsto
develop,shootandeditshortnarratives.Thiscourserequiresanunusual
amount of outside-of-class work. Prerequisite: FLM 226 or TDF/ART
262,“FundamentalsofMotionPictureProduction.”FormerlyTDF362.
Moss
324. Alternative Forms and Practices. (A)
A rotating topics course that explores alternative moving image media,
technologies,andexhibitionmodels.Studentsinthisworkshopwillbe
exposedtoarangeofskills and techniquesthatlmmakersandartists
continue to practice beyond the mainstream. The course may cover one
ormoreofthefollowingpractices:lmingwith16mmcameras,hand-
processinglm,editinglmbyhand,directanimation,digitalvideoart,
and/orfoundfootagelmmaking. Staff
330. Experimental Film and Video. (A)
An intensive workshop in experimental lmmaking politics and
poetics, this course focuseson avant-gardemovements from the early
20th century to present-day. Experimental lm generally strays from
conventional forms and narratives, alternatively emphasizing painterly,
expressive,political, and lyrical tendencies in moving images. Student
projects will engage specic aesthetics and approaches studied in
class through the creation of a series of original works. Prerequisite:
FLM/ART 226 or TDF/ART 262 or permission of the instructor.
FormerlyTDF367. Moss
332. Documentary Film and Video. (A)
Documentary lms aim to represent reality on screen. Dealing with
actualityoncameraposesarangeofquestionsandchallenges,fromthe
aesthetic(e.g.,howtoshowwhatcan’tbelmed),totheethical(e.g.,how
tobefairtosubjects),tothepractical(e.g.,howtoengageaudiences).This
coursewilladdressthesequestionsthroughweeklylmscreeningsand
discussions, theoretical and historical readings, and practical exercises.
Studentswillcompletethecoursethrougheitheradocumentaryprojector
aresearchpaper.FormerlyTDF364.Same as ART 332. Moss
341. Special Topic in Film and Media. (A)
Almandmediaseminarthatappliesmethodsofhistorical,theoretical,
and/or cultural analysis to a specic genre, period, movement, group,
or place. The topic and focus of the seminar will change for each new
iterationandmayberepeatedforcredit.FormerlyTDF343. Staff
354. Gender and Race in Ethnic Studies Film.
“GenderandRaceinEthnicStudiesFilm”examinestheconceptofEthnic
Studies as an educational curriculum emerging from social movements.
In an effort to understand Ethnic Studies, we will explore the media
productionsbyandaboutpeopleofcolorinrelationtoU.S.socialunrests
ofthelate-1960s,1970s,andtheaftermathofthesedecades.Wewillfocus
onthreegroups:U.S.Latinos,AfricanAmericans,andAsianAmericans.
Same as AFS/AMS/WGS 354. Villegas
356. Italian Film History. (A)
IntroductiontoItalianlmhistory,withanemphasisontherelationship
between cinema and society and culture. May include inuential
auteurs(Visconti,DeSica,Antonioni,Pasolini,Fellini)andmovements
(Neorealism, cinema politico), as well as popular forms (commedia
all’italiana), genre lms, experimental lmmaking, and documentary.
TaughtinItalian.Prerequisite:ITA310orpermissionoftheinstructor.
FormerlyTDF356.Same as ITA 356. G. Lerner
366. Italian Cinema and the Arts. (H)
Cinema has presented itself, since its very origins, as a synthetic form
of art that could incorporate panting, architecture, sculpture, as well as
music, literature, and dance. This course aims to explore the different
waysinwhichinter-artisticdialoguehasinuencedthedevelopmentof
Italian cinema, determining the style of its major auteurs and contributing
tothecomplexityoftheirlms.Aseriesofcriticalandtheoreticalreadings
will help us develop a solid interpretive approach to the lms, which
willincludeworksbyFellini,Antonioni,Pasolini,Visconti,Rossellini,
andotherlmmakers.NormallytaughtinItalian.Prerequisite:ITA310
or permission of the instructor. Formerly TDF 366. Same as ITA 366.
G. Lerner
440. Advanced Topic in Film and Media. (A)
Anadvancedlmandmediaseminarorworkshopthatappliestheoretical
and/orpracticalmethodologiestoaspecicmode,technology,orsequence
ofideas.Thecoursemayfunctionasaseminarinlm/mediatheoryoras
apractical lmmakingworkshop. Itprimarily servesas a capstone for
Film&Mediamajors,yetitisopentostudentswithsufcienttrainingand
experience. The topic and focus of the seminar will change for each new
32 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
iteration and may be repeated for credit. Staff
490. Independent Study.
IndependentstudydirectedbytheFilmandMediastaff.Permissionof
chairperson. Staff
FILM AND MEDIA TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED
TO BE OFFERED IN 2020–2021
AlternativeFormsandPractices.
ASTRONOMY
(See Physics and Astronomy)
BIOCHEMISTRY
(See Biology and Chemistry)
BIOINFORMATICS
(See Biology and Computer Science)
BIOLOGICAL FOUNDATIONS
OF BEHAVIOR
Professor Meredith J. Bashaw, Chair
MEMBERS OF THE BIOLOGICAL FOUNDATIONS
OF BEHAVIOR COMMITTEE
Elizabeth V. Lonsdorf Dana Professor in the Liberal Arts and
Associate Professor of Psychology
Daniel R. Ardia Professor of Biology
Meredith J. Bashaw Professor of Psychology
Robert N. Jinks Professor of Biology
Joseph T. Thompson Professor of Biology
Michael L. Penn Professor of Psychology
(on leave Spring 2021)
Timothy C. Roth II Associate Professor of Psychology
Lauren Howard Assistant Professor of Psychology
Ryan T. Lacy Assistant Professor of Psychology
Aaron F. Howard Visiting Assistant Professor of Biology
Joseph F. Lynch
Visiting Assistant Professor of Psycholog
y
Additional faculty not on the program committee
also contribute to this program.
Behavior is manifest in the function of neurons, the cells
that comprise the nervous system. The networks of a few to
many million neurons that underlie the simple and complex
behaviors exhibited by humans and animals are shaped by
biological, environmental, ecological, evolutionary, social and
psychologicalinuences.Todevelopanunderstandingofthe
complex interactions among these factors that generate normal
and abnormal behavioral states, critical thinking, reading and
writingskillsacrossdisciplinaryboundariesarerequired.The
BiologicalFoundationsofBehaviorProgramisofferedjointly
by the departments of Biology and Psychology. It presents
students the opportunity to complete an interdisciplinary major
with a focus on either animal behavior or neuroscience.
Neuroscienceisanintegrativedisciplinethatutilizesknowledge
and tools from biology, chemistry, physics, mathematics and
psychology to study the nervous system across several levels
of analysis from molecules to the behavior of individual
organisms.Despitetheamazingadvancesthathavebeenmade
inneurosciencetodate,thehumanbrainisafrontierthatwe’ve
only begun to chart. Understanding how it works, how to protect
itfromdiseaseandhowtoxitwhenitbecomesdamagedor
diseasedisoneofhumankind’sgreatestchallenges.
AnimalBehavior—Behaviorisafundamentalpropertyofall
living things. Indeed, whether animals survive and reproduce
often depends on how they behave. Studying individual
variation in behavior can reveal the role of natural selection
in shaping behavior. Comparative research with many species
provides animal models for studying development, sensation,
perception, life history evolution, reproductive behavior,
learning and cognition as well as providing a broader context for
betterunderstandingtheinuencesaffectinghumanbehavior
and the mind. In addition, studying how individuals behave
in response to varying environmental conditions can help
predict effects of climate change and the fate of populations.
Conservation efforts and resource management depend upon
ecological and evolutionary studies of the relationship between
animal behavior and the environment.
TheNeuroscienceandtheAnimalBehaviormajorsbeginwith
corecoursesinbiology,chemistry,physicsand/ormathematics,
thatcreateasolidfoundationuponwhichtobegintheresearch-
intensive coursework that follows. Following cornerstone
courses at the introductory level in neuroscience and
biopsychology,Neurosciencestudentschooseelectivecourses
inneuroscienceandrelatedareas.Afterfoundational,research-
intensive training in animal behavior, Animal Behavior
students select from a series of core and elective courses in
animalbehavior.TheNeuroscienceandtheAnimalBehavior
majors each culminate with capstone research experiences,
typically through independent study, that may be defended for
honors in the major during the senior year.
A major in Neuroscience requires the completion of 15
courses:
Biology Core(twocourses)
BIO110.PrinciplesofEvolution,EcologyandHeredity;
BIO220.PrinciplesofPhysiologyandDevelopment.
Physical Sciences and Mathematics Core(sixcourses)
CHM111,112,211,212;PHY111;MAT109.
Fundamentals of Neuroscience(twocourses)
BIO240.Neuroscience;PSY302.Biopsychology.
Research Methods and Statistics(onecourse)
PSY230.ExperimentalDesignandStatistics.
or
BIO210.Biostatistics.
Area Studies Electives(Threecoursesdistributedacross
atleasttwoareasarerequired;onemustincludealab.)
Area 1: Neural and Physiological Mechanisms
PSY313.CognitiveNeuroscience.
BIO327.VertebrateAnatomy.
BIO328.PhysicalBiology.
BIO330.AdvancedNeurobiology.(BWR)
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 33
BIO341.Neurochemistry.(BWR)
BIO343.FunctionalHumanNeuroanatomy.(BWR)
PSY487.CollaborativeResearchinBiological
Psychology.
Topicscoursesinneuroscience,physiologyorpercep-
tion may serve as Area 1 courses upon approval of the
BFBChair.
Area 2: Behavioral and Cognitive Processes
PSY250.AnimalBehavior.
PSY303.HormonesandBehavior.
PSY305.CognitivePsychology.
PSY306.EvolutionofMindandIntelligence.
PSY310.ConditioningandLearning.
BIO337.BehavioralEcology.
BIO371.EvolutionaryDiseaseBiology.
PSY371.EvolutionaryPsychology.
PSY372.HormonesandBehavior.
PSY480.CollaborativeResearchinComparative
CognitionandBehavior.
PSY481.CollaborativeResearchinDevelopmental
Psychology.
PSY483.CollaborativeResearchinHumanCognition.
PSY485.CollaborativeResearchinHumanPerception
and Action.
Topics courses in behavior or psychology may serve as
Area2coursesuponapprovaloftheBFBChair.
Area 3: Cellular and Molecular Approaches
BIO230.CellBiology.
BIO305.Genetics.
BIO306.DevelopmentalBiology.(BWR)
BIO334.MetabolicBiochemistry.
BIO335.AdvancedMolecularBiologySeminar.
BIO341.Neurochemistry.(BWR)
Topics courses in cell and molecular biology or
biochemistrymayserveasArea3coursesuponapproval
oftheBFBChair.
Advanced Research(Requiredofallstudents.Takeone
ofthefollowing.)
BFB390.DirectedResearchinAnimalBehavioror
Neuroscience.
BFB490.IndependentResearchinNeuroscienceor
AnimalBehavior,
orapprovedBiology“BWR”laboratorycourse,
orapprovedPsychology“EmpiricalResearch”
course(includingPSY460).
Anareastudiescoursemaynotbedouble-countedas
an advanced research course and vice versa.
A major in Animal Behaviorrequiresthecompletionof15
courses:
Biology Core(twocourses)
BIO110.PrinciplesofEvolution,EcologyandHeredity.
BIO220.PrinciplesofPhysiologyandDevelopment.
Physical Sciences and Mathematics Core(threecourses
fromamongthefollowing)
CHM 111, 112, 211, 212.
PHY111,112.
MAT109,110,116,216,323.
CPS111,112,222.
ECO410.
PSY460.
Research Methods and Statistics(onecourse)
PSY230.ExperimentalDesignandStatistics.
or
BIO210.Biostatistics.
Fundamentals of Behavior(fourcourses)
PSY250.AnimalBehavior.(required)
Oneof:PSY306.EvolutionofMindandIntelligence
BIO337.BehavioralEcology.
Oneof:BIO240.Neuroscience.
PSY302.Biopsychology.
Oneof:PSY301.SensationandPerception.
PSY303:HormonesandBehavior.
PSY310.ConditioningandLearning.
Area Studies Electives (Required of all students. Four
courses, with no more than two courses chosen from any one
area. Students with permission of the BFB Program Chair
may substitute no more than one area elective course with one
semesterofBFB390or490.)
Area 1: Mechanisms of Behavior. Courses that
emphasizetheneural,endocrineandphysiologicalbasis
of behavior and cognition.
BIO240.Neuroscience.
PSY302.Biopsychology.
PSY303.HormonesandBehavior.
BIO330.AdvancedNeurobiology.(BWR)
BIO334.Biochemistry.
BIO341.Neurochemistry.(BWR)
PSY372.HormonesandBehavior.
PSY487.CollaborativeResearchinBiological
Psychology.
Topics courses in neuroscience or biochemistry may
serveasArea1coursesuponapprovaloftheBFBChair.
Area 2: Organismal and Comparative Approaches.
Courseswithanemphasisonfunctionalorganizationand
integration within individual organisms.
PSY306.EvolutionofMindandIntelligence.
PSY310.ConditioningandLearning.
PSY312:EmbodiedCognition.
BIO326.ComparativePhysiology.
BIO327.VertebrateAnatomy.
BIO328.PhysicalBiology.
BIO337.BehavioralEcology.
BIO343.FunctionalHumanNeuroanatomy.
BIO371.EvolutionaryDiseaseBiology.
PSY371.EvolutionaryPsychology.
PSY480.CollaborativeResearchinComparative
CognitionandBehavior.
PSY485.CollaborativeResearchinHumanPerception
and Action.
Topics courses in biology or psychology may serve as
Area2coursesuponapprovaloftheBFBChair.
Area 3: Ecological and Population Perspectives.
Courses with an emphasis on ecological factors primarily
at the population level.
BIO323.EcologicalConceptsandApplications.(BWR)
BIO325.MarineBiology.
BIO336.Evolution.
34 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
Topics courses in ecology, environmental studies or
ecological psychology may serve as Area 3 courses
uponapprovaloftheBFBChair.
Area 4: Cognate Studies. These courses complement
courses from Areas 1–3 and often serve as a pre- or
corequisiteforotheradvancedcourses.
BIO230.CellBiology.
PSY304.DevelopmentalPsychology.
BIO305.Genetics.
PSY305.CognitivePsychology.
BIO306.DevelopmentalBiology.
PSY307.PersonalityPsychology.
PSY308.Psychopathology.
PSY309.SocialPsychology.
PSY311:OriginsofMoralThought.
BIO322.Microbiology.
BIO332.MolecularBiology.
InArea4,studentsmay,withpermissionoftheBFBChair,
elect to take a course above the introductory level in a
cognatearea(e.g.,Anthropology,EnvironmentalStudies,
PhilosophyorComputerScience).
Advanced Research(Requiredofallstudents.Takeone
ofthefollowing.)
BFB 390. Directed Research in Animal Behavior or
Neuroscience.
BFB490.IndependentResearchinBFB.
or, approved Biology course with investigative/
collaborativeresearchrequired(BIO323–342).
or, approved Psychology “Empirical Research”
course(includingPSY460).
Anareastudiescoursemaynotbedouble-countedasan
advanced research course and vice versa.
To be considered for honors in BFB, graduating seniors,
in addition to meeting the College’s general requirements
for honors, mustpossess a cumulativeGPAin themajor of
3.33 or greater andcomplete no less than two semesters of
independent research in neuroscience or animal behavior.
Normally, prospective honors students will enroll in two
semestersofBFB490.
The writing requirement in the Biological Foundations of
Behaviormajor is metbycompletionofthenormalcourses
requiredtocompletethemajor.
The indication as to when a course will be offered is based
on the best projection of the BFB Program Committee and
thedepartmentsofBiologyandPsychologyandissubjectto
change.
Majors in the Biological Foundations of Behavior Program
have studied abroad in the following programs in recent years:
SchoolforFieldStudies(Australia,CostaRica,Panama,Kenya,
Tanzania); Danish International Study (DIS), Copenhagen;
InstituteforStudyAbroadatButlerUniversityprograms(New
Zealand,UnitedKingdom);BudapestSemester inCognitive
Science;UniversityofQueensland & Macquarie University,
Australia. See the International Programs section of the
Catalog for further information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows. Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
BIO 240. Neuroscience. (N)
Principles of nervous system function from the molecular through the
organ system level as illustrated by the vertebrates and invertebrates.
Approximately one half of the course will cover basic cellular principles
of nervous system organization, development and physiology. The
remaininglectureswillconsidertheroleoffunctionallyidentiedneural
networksin behaviorcontrol. Prerequisite:BIO 220or BFB/PSY302.
OfferedeverySpring.Same as PSY/SPM 240. Jinks
PSY 250. Animal Behavior. (N)
An integrative approach to animal behavior from the perspectives
of ethology, behavioral ecology and comparative psychology. The
structure, function, development and evolution of behavioral adaptations
includingforagingandpredation,communication,socialorganization
and reproductive strategies. Observational and experimental research
required. Prerequisites: BIO 110 and permission of the instructor.
Corequisite: either BIO 210 or PSY 230. Offered every Fall.
Same as BIO 250. Lonsdorf
PSY 302. Biopsychology. (N)
Behavioralandmentalprocessesasviewedfromabiologicalperspective
with particular emphasis upon the role of neurochemical and endocrine
factors in central nervous system function. Topics covered will include
reproduction and gender, chemical senses and ingestion, emotion,
learning, sleep and psychopathology. A neuropharmacological approach
tothestudyofthenervoussystemwillbeemphasized.Prerequisite:PSY
100orBIO110orpermission.Corequisite:PSY230orBIO210.Offered
everyFall&Spring. Lacy, Lynch, Roth
PSY 303. Hormones and Behavior. (N)
Like many other animals, humans must successfully navigate stressful
situations, sex, and other social interactions to survive and reproduce.
Howdohormonesenable,regulate,ormodifybehaviorinthesesituations?
Howdobehaviorandtheenvironmentinturnaffecthormonefunction?
Dotheseeffectsdifferacrossspecies?We’lldevelopanunderstandingof
theendocrinesystem’sorganizationandactivationeffectsbyexamining,
evaluating, and conducting research on humans and other animals.
Prerequisites:PSY100orBIO110;andPSY230orBIO210orSOC302.
Same as WGS 303. Bashaw
PSY 306. Evolution of Mind and Intelligence.
Whatis intelligentbehavior,whatisit forand howdid it evolve?We
will attempt to answer these questions and understand the nature and
development of Mind from a comparative perspective. We will do so
by investigating learning, perception, memory, thinking and language
inanimalsandhumans.Researchactivitiesandanalysesintegratedinto
coursework.Prerequisites:BIO210orPSY230ANDoneof:BIO240,
PSY250,PSY301,PSY302,PSY303,PSY304,PSY305,PSY307,
PSY308,PSY309,PSY310,PSY312,PSY315,PSY337,PSY370-379,
PSY390,orpermission. Roth
PSY 310. Conditioning and Learning.
An introduction to the process by which human and animal behavior
changes as a function of experience. Examines basic mechanisms for
learning (including habituation, sensitization and classical and operant
conditioning) and explores the scientic and practical application of
thesemechanismstoexplainandpredictbehavior.Discussestheextent
to which learning mechanisms are consistent across species and how the
physiology, natural environment and social systems of individual species
interact with basic learning processes to produce different behavioral
outcomes.Prerequisite:PSY100orBIO110orSPM100.Offeredevery
Fall. Lacy, Lynch
PSY 312. Embodied Cognition. (NSP)
In this course we will study intelligence by focusing on perception and
action in the environment. To this end, we will focus on ecological
psychology,robotics,articialneuralnetworksandsimulatedevolution.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 35
Although students will be expected to build simple robots and work
with computer models, no background knowledge of engineering or
computingwillbeassumed.(Knowledgeofprogrammingisnotrequired.)
Prerequisite:PSY100orSPM100,orapriorphilosophycourse. Cuffari
BIO 328. Physical Biology. (N)
Participantsinthecoursewillusethebasicprinciplesofuidandsolid
mechanics, optics, vibration, and electromagnetic elds to analyze the
morphology and function of organisms or parts of organisms. Topics will
include vision, transparency, navigating and communicating with sound,
circulatorysystems,swimmingandying,andthemechanicalproperties
ofbiomaterials, structures, and movement. Prerequisites: BIO 220 and
permissionofinstructor.Corequisite:PHY111. J. Thompson
BIO 330. Advanced Neurobiology. (N)
Advanced issues in neuroscience will be explored from a comparative
perspectiveinthislecture/seminarhybrid.Themajorsensorymodalities
will be studied—from stimulus transduction to perception—as models of
neuralprocessing.Currentresearchincellular,systems-level,integrative/
behavioral and cognitive neuroscience will be emphasized. Laboratory
includesanindependentresearchprojectinsensoryneurobiologydened,
proposed,pursuedanddisseminatedbysmallresearchteams.Prerequisite:
BIO/BFB240orBIO230andpermissionoftheinstructor. Jinks
BIO 337. Behavioral Ecology. (N)
Behavioralecologyisanintegrativedisciplinethatsynthesizesecology,
evolution and physiology into the study of the origin and persistence
of behaviors. We will study the tness consequences of behavior,
with particular attention to the study of adaptation, sexual selection,
evolutionary tradeoffs and constraints and life histories. We will examine
the interplay between proximate control and ultimate consequences
ofbehavior.Thecoursewillfocus heavilyonpeer-reviewedliterature.
Prerequisites:BIO110andpermissionofinstructor. Ardia
BIO 341. Neurochemistry. (N)
An introduction to neurochemistry focusing on cellular and membrane
neurochemistry, intercellular and intracellular signaling and neuronal
and whole-brain metabolism, with student-driven special topics in
development,diseaseand/orbehavior.Currentresearchintheseareaswill
beemphasizedthroughstudentseminars.Laboratoryincludesaresearch
project in neurochemistry designed, proposed, pursued and disseminated
bysmallresearchteams.Prerequisites:BIO/BFB240orBIO230orBFB
302andpermissionoftheinstructor. Jinks
BIO 343. Functional Human Neuroanatomy.
This seminar utilizes a problem-solving approach to learning
neuroanatomy by relating structure to function and functional disorders
usingdatafromcarefullydocumentedclinicalcases.Seminarmeetings
will include student-led clinical case presentations, analysis of clinical
localization, analysis of associated neuroimaging and discussion of
clinicalcourseandprognosis.Thecoursewillculminatewithaclass-wide
debateonthebiologicalbasisofthemind.Non-traditionalwritingwillbe
emphasized.Prerequisite:BIO240orBFB/PSY302andpermissionof
the instructor. Jinks
BFB 390. Directed Research in Animal Behavior or Neuroscience.
Gain hands-on experience designing, conducting, and/or presenting a
scholarlyresearchprojectunderthedirectionofaBFBfacultymember.
Interested students should contact possible faculty supervisors the
semesterbeforetheyplantoenroll.Prerequisite: Permission of faculty
supervisorandBFBprogramchairperson.
PSY 480. Collaborative Research in Comparative Cognition and
Behavior. (N)
Comparative perspectives and approaches to the study of selected topics
drawn from cognitive and developmental psychology, cognitive ethology,
cognitive and behavioral neuroscience, cognitive science and behavioral
primatology.Researchrequired.Prerequisites:PSY230orBIO210;PSY
302orBIO240orpermission.OfferedeverySpring. Lonsdorf
PSY 487. Collaborative Research in Biological Psychology. (N)
The neurophysiological and structural basis of behavior with emphasis
on motivation and learning, including the use of psychopharmacological
methods. The role of endocrine and metabolic processes in the regulation
of behavior is integrated with considerations of structure. Laboratory
researchrequired.Prerequisites:PSY230orBIO210;PSY302orBIO/
BFB240orpermission.OfferedeverySpring. Lacy, Roth
BFB 490. Senior Independent Research.
Independent research under the direction of either biology or psychology
faculty. Prerequisite: Permission of the BFB program chairperson and
supervisory faculty member.
BIOLOGY
Professor Joseph T. Thompson, Chair
Professor Peter A. Fields, Associate Chair
Kirk Miller B.F. Fackenthal Jr. Professor
of Biology
Peter A. Fields The Dr. F. Paul & Frances H. Reiff
Professor of Biology
Daniel R. Ardia Professor of Biology
Janet M. Fischer Professor of Biology
Robert N. Jinks Professor of Biology
Clara S. Moore Professor of Biology
(on leave 2020–21)
Mark H. Olson Professor of Biology
Joseph T. Thompson Professor of Biology
Jaime E. Blair Associate Professor of Biology
(on leave 2020–21)
Beckley K. Davis Associate Professor of Biology
Sybil G. Gotsch Associate Professor of Biology
Pablo D. Jenik Associate Professor of Biology
David M. Roberts Associate Professor of Biology
Timothy W. Sipe Associate Professor of Biology
Harriet Okatch Assistant Professor of Biology and
Public Health
Aaron Howard Visiting Assistant Professor of Biology
Jorge Mena-Ali Visiting Assistant Professor of Biology
Andrew Miller Adjunct Assistant Professor of Biology
Stephanie Stoehr Biosafety Ofcer and Teaching
Professor of Biology
The study of biology furnishes insights into our species, our
selves and the world of which we are a part. We humans have
a fascination for other organisms and the very phenomenon
of life. Biology provides us the tools to address questions
ranging from how these organisms function at the molecular
leveltohowtheyinteractattheecologicallevel.Biologyisan
exciting, expanding discipline offering a broad and advancing
frontier between the known and the undiscovered, with a
varietyofsub-disciplinesthatspanthemoleculartoorganismal
to ecological levels of understanding. It is a gateway to diverse
and satisfying careers and it provides insights and ways of
thinking critical to each individual in society.
Franklin & Marshall’s biology program, with required and
elective courses in biology as well as courses in mathematics,
chemistryandphysics,providesstudentswitharmscientic
foundationandenoughexibilitytoaccommodateindividual
interests.Therangeoftheseinterestsisreectedinthemany
paths biology majors follow after graduation, with or without
further education.
The Biology Department at Franklin & Marshall is made
up of diverse and broadly trained faculty members whose
36 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
research informs their teaching.As bets biology’s placein
the contemporary world, courses and research provide links
to many other disciplines, including chemistry, psychology,
physics, mathematics, environmental science, computer
science, and public policy. The department participates
in several interdisciplinary programs: Biochemistry and
MolecularBiology,Bioinformatics,BiologicalFoundationsof
Behavior(NeuroscienceandAnimalBehavior),Environmental
Science,EnvironmentalStudiesandPublicHealth.
The central goal of the Biology curriculum is to provide
students with the essential research and analytical thinking
skills needed by practicing biologists and, indeed, by all
citizens in a democratic society. Critical reading of journal
articles is an important feature of courses. Beginning in
introductory courses, laboratory activities often involve
student-designed investigative projects. In more advanced
courses, students have access to sophisticated instruments and
may spend the entire semester conducting a research project. In
additiontolearningtodesign,conduct,andanalyzescientic
research, students learn essential communication skills as they
convey their results in written, spoken, and poster form. These
activities lead many students to intensive research experiences
during the summer or academic year, under the mentorship of
faculty members.
A major in Biology consists of 15 courses. Nine are core
andelectivecoursesinBiology:BIO110,220,230,305;and
veelectives.Atleastthreeoftheelectivesmustbetakenat
Franklin & Marshall. At least four of the electives must have
alaboratorycomponent.Thefthelectivemaybeanon-lab
seminar.IndependentStudy(BIO390or490)islab-basedand
maycountforuptotwooftheveelectives.DirectedReadings
(BIO391)maycountforuptoonenon-labelective.Theve
additionalrequiredcoursesareCHM111and112;PHY111;
MAT109;andoneadditionalcoursefromthefollowing:CHM
211,PHY112,MAT110,ENE110,ENE114,orCPS111.
AlsorequiredisBIO210(withpermission,PSY230orboth
MAT216and316maybesubstitutedforBIO210).
A major in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology includes
vebiology courses(BIO 110,220, 230, 305and 334),six
chemistry courses (CHM 111, 112, 211, 212, 321 and 451)
and two electives from Biology and/or Chemistry. The
electives must be chosen from the following list of courses,
unless permission is received from the BMB advisor: BFB
490;BIO240,306,322,326,332,341,346,352,353some
topicscoursesfrom370–379,390and490;orCHM221,222,
322,384,390and490.Onlyonesemesterofanindependent
study course (390 or 490) may count as an elective and
none of the electives may be a course without a laboratory.
RequiredrelatedcoursesarePHY111andMAT109and110.
BiochemistryandMolecularBiologymajorsmaynotdeclare
a minor in Chemistry.
The Biological Foundations of Behavior major offers
concentrationsinNeuroscienceandAnimalBehavior.
The Environmental Science major combines courses in
biology, chemistry and geology to understand the impacts of
the human enterprise on natural systems and processes. The
EnvironmentalStudiesmajorcombinescoursesinscienceand
social science to examine environmental issues from cultural,
economic, and political perspectives.
The Public Health major is composed of three tracks: one
ingovernment/policy;one in sociology; and one in biology.
The Biology track provides students with a comprehensive
background inbiology as wellas specic coursesin public
health and epidemiology.
Opportunities exist for students to design a joint or special
studies major in Bioinformatics in consultation with the
AssociateChairofBiologyand/ortheComputerScienceChair.
BIO 110, 220 and sometimes 230 are prerequisites to most
higher-numberedcourses.
The writing requirement in the Biology major is met by
completionofoneelectivewithawritingcomponent.Regular
coursessatisfyingthewritingrequirementintheBiologymajor
areBIO245,250,306,310,323,325,326,328,330,337,340,
341,342,343,352,390and490.Sometopicscoursesfrom
370–379 also fulll the writingrequirement inthe Biology
major.(BWRdesignatescoursesfulllingtheBiologywriting
requirement.)
TobeconsideredforhonorsinBiology,astudentmusthave
a GPA of at least 3.30 in the major. In addition, a student
must conduct an Independent Study project lasting more
than one semester, submit a thesis, and present his or her
research publicly as part of the honors defense. A faculty
committee will award honors to students whose research
demonstrates independence, intellectual engagement, and a
deep understanding of the project.
Majors in the Department of Biology have studied abroad
in varied programs in recent years, including: Australian
National University, Canberra, Australia; University of
Melbourne, Australia; University College, London, United
Kingdom; School for Field Studies (in various countries);
Danish International Study (DIS), Copenhagen, Denmark;
Schoolfor International Training(in variouscountries).See
theInternationalandOff-CampusStudysectionoftheCatalog
orthe “Off-CampusStudyOpportunities” page oftheF&M
Biologywebsiteforfurtherinformation.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS) Language Studies requirement; (NSP) Natural Science
in Perspective; (NW) Non-Western Cultures requirement.
Most Biology courses require one, or some combination of
attendanceataresearchseminar;apostersessionpresenting
researchndings;aeldtripandadditionallabtimetowork
on projects.
110. Principles of Evolution, Ecology and Heredity. (N)
AnintroductiontoMendelian genetics, micro- andmacro-evolutionary
processes,theoriginanddiversication of lifeonearthand ecological
patterns and processes at organismal, population, community and
ecosystemlevels.OfferedeverySpring.
Ardia, Fischer, Howard, Mena-Ali, Olson, Sipe
210. Biostatistics.
An introduction to descriptive and inferential statistics from the
perspective of the life sciences. The emphasis will be on research design
and on the use of graphical and computational methods in interpreting and
communicatingresults.Thiscoursesatisesthestatisticsrequirementin
theBiologymajorcurriculum.Prerequisite:BIO110.
A. Miller, K. Miller, Okatch
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 37
220. Principles of Physiology and Development. (N)
An integrated study of cells, whole organisms and the interactions between
organisms and their environments. The physiological and anatomical
solutions to the physical and chemical challenges faced by plants and
animals. Mechanisms by which a single cell develops into a complex,
multicellularorganisminwhichgroupsofcellsperformspecializedtasks.
Lecturetopicsintegratedwithalaboratorythatemphasizesindependent
researchprojects.Prerequisite:BIO110.OfferedeveryFall.
Gotsch, Howard, Thompson
230. Cell Biology. (N)
A study of life at the cellular level through investigation of the
ultrastructure, molecular interactions and function of cell components,
focusing primarily on eukaryotic cells. Topics will include: the physical
and chemical principles governing biomolecules and their assembly,
organelle function and maintenance, cellular communication, and the
roleofthecytoskeleton.Prerequisite:BIO220.Co-requisite:CHM112.
OfferedeverySpring. Davis, Roberts
240. Neuroscience. (N)
Principles of nervous system function from the molecular through the
organ system level as illustrated by the vertebrates and invertebrates.
Approximately one half of the course will cover basic cellular principles
of nervous system organization, development and physiology. The
remaininglectureswillconsidertheroleoffunctionallyidentiedneural
networksin behaviorcontrol. Prerequisite:BIO 220or BFB/PSY302.
OfferedeverySpring.Same as BFB/PSY/SPM 240. Jinks
245. American Nature Essays. (BWR)
An exploration of the themes, structures, styles and signicance of
American nature essays. The purposes of the course are to become familiar
with nature essays as a distinctive form of interdisciplinary literature, to
see the natural world and our place in it through the voices and visions of
thebestnatureessayists,andtodeveloptheartsofperception,reection
and compelling writing. The course includes weekly eld trips and
workshops in addition to class discussions of essays by more than 20
writers.Prerequisites:BIO110,ENE114,ENE117,orENE118.Same
as ENE 245. Sipe
250. Animal Behavior. (N) (BWR)
An integrative approach to animal behavior from the perspectives
of ethology, behavioral ecology and comparative psychology. The
structure, function, development and evolution of behavioral adaptations
including foraging and predation, communication, social organization
and reproductive strategies. Observational and experimental research
required. Prerequisites: BIO 110 and permission of the instructor.
Corequisite:eitherBIO210orPSY230andpermissionoftheinstructor.
Offered every Fall. Same as BFB/PSY 250. Lonsdorf
257. Conservation Paleobiology. (N)
Datafromfossil,archaeological,andcontemporaryrecordscaninformour
understanding of how species responded to past environmental changes
and their potential responses in the future. Topics include extinction
risk, shifting baselines, the (in)completeness of geohistorical records,
environmentalproxies, and theAnthropocene. Prerequisite:ENE 114,
ENE110,orBIO110.Same as ENE 257. Staff
INT 261. Experiential Elementary Science Teaching.
This course will provide academic context and support as students teach
science in a local elementary school classroom. Students will work in
partnershipwiththeclassroomteachertodesignengaging,age-appropriate,
inquiry-basedlessonplansthatwillbecompatiblewiththeSchoolDistrict
of Lancaster’s designated science content. The course will focus on
teachingtechnique,pedagogy,effectivelessonplanning,aswellaslarger
issuesassociatedwithinclusiveclassrooms,urbaneducationandinquiry-
basedapproachestoscience.Permissionoftheinstructorrequired.Bechtel
305. Genetics. (N)
The study of the transmission, dynamics, and regulation of the genetic
information. Topics will range from “classical” genetics (Mendel’s laws,
gene interactions, population genetics), to molecular genetics (DNA
mutationandrepair,regulationofgeneexpression,epigenetics),togenomics,
bioinformatics and applications (e.g. biotechnology, genetic testing). The
laboratorycomponentemphasizestheuseofmolecularmethodsingenetics.
Prerequisite:BIO230.OfferedeveryFall. Jenik, Mena-Ali
306. Developmental Biology. (N) (BWR)
An exploration of the developmental mechanisms that allow single cells
to divide and differentiate into complex, multicellular organisms. The
common processes that underlie development in animals will be examined
through historical perspectives, model experimental organisms and current
research and technologies. Laboratories will focus on experimental design
using invertebrate and vertebrate developmental systems. Prerequisite:
BIO305. Moore
310. Experimental Design in Biology. (BWR)
An exploration of the challenges and rewards of experimentation in
biology. In this seminar, we will use case studies to illustrate the basic
principles of experimental design, including hypothesis generation,
assigningtreatments,replication/pseudoreplication,confoundedvariables
and statistical power. Case studies will be chosen to represent a wide
rangeofsub-disciplinesofbiology,includingbiomedicalresearch.
Prerequisite:BIO220. Fischer
313. Introduction to Genome Analysis. (N) (BWR)
An introduction to bioinformatics theory and methods used to generate,
annotate,andanalyzegenomicsequences.Thelaboratoryportionofthis
course will involve extensive hands-on training to navigate databases
andusevarioussoftwarepackagesforsequenceanalysis.Studentswill
beexpectedtodiscussandcritiqueprimaryliterature,andwilldesignan
independent project to be presented at the end of the semester.
Prerequisite:BIO305. Blair
322. Microbiology. (N)
This course explores the principles of microbiology including microbial
nutrition, metabolism, genetics, ecology, and pathogenicity. Although
the emphasis is on Bacteria andArchaea, the course willalso include
discussion of the protozoa, fungi and viruses. Basic microbiological
skills,includingmicroscopy,staining,andtechniquesusedintheisolation
andidenticationofbacteriawillbedevelopedinthelaboratory.
Prerequisite:BIO230. Stoehr
323. Ecological Concepts and Applications. (N) (BWR)
Interactions of organisms with their environment and how these
interactionsareinuencedbyhumanactivities.Specialemphasisisplaced
on principles of population, community and ecosystem ecology. Class
exercises and discussions involve critical evaluation of current research
and applications of ecological concepts to conservation and management.
Mostlabsareeld-oriented,includinganovernighttriptothePoconos.
Prerequisite:BIO220. Fischer
325. Marine Biology. (N) (BWR)
Applicationofecologicalprinciplestomarineenvironments.Structural
and functional adaptations of marine organisms; and emphasis on the
interactions of individuals, populations and communities with physical,
chemical and geological processes in the ocean. Includes analysis of
primaryscientic literature, eld and laboratory studies and individual
researchprojects.Prerequisite:BIO220. Fields
326. Comparative Physiology. (N) (BWR)
Physiological adaptation of animals to the environment, focusing on
respiratory, circulatory, digestive and musculoskeletal systems and on the
effects of variation in oxygen, temperature and the availability of food and
water.Prerequisites:BIO220. Thompson
38 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
328. Physical Biology. (N) (BWR)
Participantsinthecoursewillusethebasicprinciplesofuidandsolid
mechanics, optics, vibration, and electromagnetic elds to analyze the
morphology and function of organisms or parts of organisms. Topics
will include vision, transparency, navigating and communicating with
sound, circulatory systems, swimming and ying, and the mechanical
propertiesofbiomaterials,structures,andmovement.Prerequisite:BIO
220.Corequisite:PHY111.Same as BFB 328. Thompson
330. Advanced Neurobiology. (N) (BWR)
Advanced issues in neuroscience will be explored from a comparative
perspectiveinthislecture/seminarhybrid.Themajorsensorymodalities
will be studied—from stimulus transduction to perception—as models of
neuralprocessing.Currentresearchincellular,systems-level,integrative/
behavioral and cognitive neuroscience will be emphasized. Laboratory
includes an independent research project in neuroscience dened,
proposed,pursuedanddisseminatedbysmallresearchteams.Prerequisite:
BIO/BFB240orBIO230.Same as BFB 330. Jinks
334. Metabolic Biochemistry. (N)
The course focuses on major metabolic pathways and their regulation,
with emphasis on ux of metabolites and energy throughout the cell.
Topicsalsoincludeintegrationofmetabolicprocesses;proteinsynthesis,
modicationanddegradation;anddiseasesofmetabolism.Presentation
and discussion of current primary literature is a key component of the
course. The laboratory includes the use of proteomics techniques to
examineeffectsofabioticstressesonmetabolicprocesses.Prerequisites:
BIO230,CHM211.OfferedeverySpring. Fields
336. Evolution. (N)
As the unifying principle of biology, evolution integrates levels of
biologicalorganization,withafocusonbiologicalchangesovertimeand
the evidence of the shared evolutionary history of all living things. Topics
include speciation; extinction; population processes of selection and
adaptation,genomicsandthemolecularbasisofevolution;evolutionary
developmentalbiology;sexualselection;lifehistoryevolution;andthe
applicationofevolutiontomedicine.Prerequisite:BIO110. Ardia
337. Behavioral Ecology. (BWR)
Behavioralecologyisanintegrativedisciplinethatsynthesizesecology,
evolution and physiology into the study of the origin and persistence
of behaviors. We will study the tness consequences of behavior,
with particular attention to the study of adaptation, sexual selection,
evolutionary tradeoffs and constraints and life histories. We will examine
the interplay between proximate control and ultimate consequences
ofbehavior.Thecoursewillfocus heavilyonpeer-reviewedliterature.
Prerequisite:BIO110.Same as BFB 337. Ardia
340. Plant Ecology. (N) (BWR)
An exploration of plant ecology, organized by four applied themes:
globalatmosphericchange,airpollutionandaciddeposition,deer-forest
interactions, and invasive species. Classes will involve lectures, primary
literature discussions, eld trip discussions, and seminars by invited
speakers. The laboratory will include research projects and eld trips.
Prerequisites:BIO220.Same as ENE 340. Sipe
341. Neurochemistry. (N) (BWR)
An introduction to neurochemistry focusing on cellular and membrane
neurochemistry, intercellular and intracellular signaling and neuronal
and whole-brain metabolism, with student-driven special topics in
development,diseaseand/orbehavior.Currentresearchintheseareaswill
beemphasizedthroughstudentseminars.Laboratoryincludesaresearch
project in neurochemistry designed, proposed, pursued and disseminated
bysmallresearchteams.Prerequisite:BIO/BFB240orBIO230orBFB
302.Same as BFB 341. Jinks
342. Forest Ecosystems. (N) (BWR)
An exploration of basic and applied forest ecology, with particular emphasis
on the organization and dynamics of forest communities, ecosystems,
and landscapes.Topicswill include forest environments (climate, soils),
tree physiology and growth, ecosystem productivity, biogeochemistry,
disturbance regimes, biodiversity, and the roles of forests in global ecology.
Thelaboratorywillinvolveoneormoreeldtripsandprojectslastingone
toseveralweeks.Prerequisites:BIO110,BIO220.Same as ENE 342. Sipe
343. Functional Human Neuroanatomy. (BWR)
An exploration of basic and applied forest ecology, with particular
emphasis on the organization and dynamics of forest communities,
ecosystems, and landscapes. Topics will include forest environments
(climate, soils), tree physiology and growth, ecosystem productivity,
biogeochemistry, disturbance regimes, biodiversity, and the roles of
forestsinglobalecology.Thelaboratorywillinvolveoneormoreeld
tripsandprojectslastingonetoseveralweeks.Twolecture/discussions
andonelabweekly.Prerequisites:BIO110,BIO220.Same as ENE 342.
Jinks
346. Cancer Biology. (N)
This course focuses on the molecular and cellular events that contribute
to human cancers. Topics include oncogenes and tumor suppressors,
DNArepairmechanisms, protection from apoptosis, cancer stem cells,
andangiogenesis/metastasis. In addition to lecturematerial, thecourse
will also incorporate primary literature that explores recent advances in
our understanding of the molecular nature of cancer, as well as current
cancer therapies. The laboratory utilizes an investigative approach
thatintroducesstudentsto molecular techniqueswidelyusedin cancer
research.Prerequisite:BIO230. Roberts
352. Advanced Genetics and Epigenetics. (N) (BWR)
ThiscourseisintendedasacontinuationofthethemescoveredinBIO
305 Genetics. In it we will study more advanced genetic techniques
(theAwesome Power of Genetics!) and their use to study a variety of
biological problems. We will also focus on the current understanding of
the regulation of gene expression by genetic and, particularly, epigenetic
factors. The course will have a strong emphasis on reading primary
literature.Prerequisite:BIO305. Jenik
353. Immunobiology. (N)
This course consists of an integrated series of lectures designed to
familiarizestudentswiththecellular,molecularandbiochemicalaspects
ofimmunobiologyinthecontextofimmunity,infectionandinammation.
Lectures will be supplemented with the analysis of primary literature and
studentpresentations,projectsorpapers.Thersthalfofthecoursefocuses
on the immune system and the function of its major components. The
second half focuses on how the various components function during the
response to infections agents and how the system is naturally dysregulated
duringnon-infectiousdiseases.Topicswillinclude,butarenotlimitedto
ontogeny, immune responses to pathogens, vaccine development, tumor
immunity and autoimmunity. The laboratory will complement the lectures
byintroducingstudentstomolecular,cellularandclinicaltechniquesused
inmoderninvestigativeresearch.Prerequisite:BIO230.
Corequisite:BIO305. Davis
354. Epidemiology.
Epidemiology is the study of health and disease of populations. In this
course, students will learn methods Epidemiologists use to elucidate
relationships between various types of exposures and positive or negative
healthoutcomes;theywillalsoexploremethodstotraceandpredictdisease
patterns, including epidemics and pandemics. In this course, students will
learnhowtodevelopresearchquestions,designethicalstudies,conduct
sampling for research, perform basic analyses, and minimize bias and
other types of error.Prerequisite: PBH251 or permission of instructor.
Same as PBH 354. Miller, Okatch
355. Genetic Susceptibility.
An exploration of inherited predisposition to human disease. This seminar
course will introduce examples of disorders with differing frequency,
penetrance, expressivity, and age of onset (Down syndrome, cancer).
The progress in identication of genes, potential testing, and policy
implications in the framework of medical advances and the healthcare
systemwillbeexplored.Studentswilltheninvestigatethecurrentstatus
ofdisorderslinkedtogeneticsusceptibilitythatarelessdenedormore
complex than the selected examples. Prerequisite: BIO220. Same as
PBH355. Moore
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 39
360. Wildlife Conservation.
Study and management of the impact of anthropogenic activity on
wildlife diversity. Topics include current threats to biodiversity, including
habitat fragmentation and destruction, invasive species, pollution, and
overharvesting. Effects of these threats on ecological processes that
drive wildlife dynamics: genetic, population, and community processes
operating in altered populations. Study of direct (management) and
indirect(sustainability)methodsthatarebeingusedtopromotewildlife
conservation. Current legislative policies affecting wildlife will also be
examined. Lectures, assigned readings, and classroom discussions will
range from case studies to consideration of general phenomena with global
applications.MostBiologycoursesrequireone,orsomecombinationof
attendance at a research seminar; a poster session presenting research
ndings;aeldtripandadditionallabtimetoworkonprojects.Tripto
Yellowstoneoverspringbreakduringevenyearsonly;extrafeeapplies.
Prerequisite:BIO110orENE114orENE117orENE118andpermission
of the instructor. Same as ENE 360. Dawson
391. Directed Reading.
Exploration of a chosen topic in biology with reading directed by a
memberoftheBiologyDepartmentstaff.Maycountasaseminarelective
towardtheBiologymajor.Permissionofassociatechairrequired.
390 and 490. Independent Study. (BWR)
Independent research directed by the Biology staff at either the junior
(390)orsenior(490)level.Maycountasalaboratoryelectivetowardthe
Biologymajor.Permissionofassociatechairrequired.
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
PlantsandTheEnvironment.
Advanced Genetics.
BUSINESS, ORGANIZATIONS
AND SOCIETY
Professor Seth Kopchak, Chair
Professor William Schneper, Associate Chair
Alan S. Glazer Henry P. and Mary B. Stager Professor
of Business
Jeffrey Nesteruk Professor of Legal Studies
(on leave Fall 2020)
Jeffrey S. Podoshen Professor of Marketing
Seth Kopchak Associate Professor of Finance
(on leave Fall 2020)
Cynthia L. Krom Associate Professor of Accounting
and Organizations
Nancy Kurland Associate Professor
of Organization Studies
Jorida Papakroni Associate Professor of Finance
William Schneper Associate Professor of Organization
Studies and Management
Bryan Stincheld Associate Professor of Organization
(on leave 2020–21) Studies
Jessica Keech Assistant Professor of Marketing
(on leave 2020–21)
Eunbi Kim Assistant Professor
of International Business
Nicole Young Assistant Professor
of Organizational Behavior
Aleksandra Rebeka Visiting Assistant Professor of Business,
Organizations & Society
Conrad Kasperson Senior Adjunct Emeritus Professor
of Management
Ryan Davidson Adjunct Assistant Professor of Business,
Organizations & Society
G. Al Forsyth Adjunct Assistant Professor of Business,
Organizations & Society
Amaximumofeighty-ve(85)studentsfromanyclassmay
declareamajorinBusiness,Organizations,andSociety.
AmajorinBusiness,Organizations,andSocietyisappropriate
for students who are interested in studying business and
organizational phenomena whether or not they intend to
have careers in business. The program emphasizes critical
thinking and analysis rather than memorizing techniques.
It helps students learn “how to think” about alternative
approaches to resolving issues, not simply “how to do”
problems, although there are skill components within the
program. Multidisciplinary approaches to problem solving are
stressedbyexaminingorganizationalissuesfromavarietyof
perspectives.
The courses are designed to help students develop a broad
understanding of organizations and their roles in society.
Students are exposed to many management philosophies,
processes and styles, as well as the dynamic interface between
theory and practice. They are required to complete four
curricularcomponents:anentrycourse;abreadthrequirement
composed of eight courses; a three-course, individually
designed interdisciplinary cluster that provides the opportunity
todevelopdepthofunderstandinginoneareaoforganizational
activity, such as management, nance, marketing, human
resources,organizationalethicsorinternationalbusiness;and
a senior seminar.
40 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
A major in the Department of Business, Organizations
and Societyconsistsofthefollowingcourses:BOS200,224,
250ortheequivalent,315,324,332,341,360and480;ECO
100; and MAT 109 or the equivalent. In addition, students,
in consultation with their advisers, select three courses that
providedepthofanalysisinanarea oforganizationalstudy.
At least one of the three courses must be from outside the
Departmentandallmustbeatorabovethe200level.
A joint major in Business, Organizations and Society and
EnvironmentalStudiesmustincludeBOS200,224,250,335
and360;ECO100;MAT109ortheequivalent;andonecourse
fromBOS315,324,332,341and350.
A joint major inBusiness, Organizations andSociety and a
foreignlanguage or International Studiesmust includeBOS
200, 224, 250, 350 and 360; ECO 100; MAT 109 or the
equivalent;andonecoursefromBOS315,324,332,335and
341.
A joint major in Business, Organizations and Society and
PublicPolicymustincludeBOS200,224and360;MAT109
ortheequivalent;andfourcoursesfromBOS315,324,332,
335,341and350.
AjointmajorinBusiness,OrganizationsandSocietyandother
subjectsnotlistedabovemustincludeBOS200,224,250and
360;ECO100;MAT109ortheequivalent;andtwocourses
fromBOS315,324,332,335,341and350.
Students interested in business are encouraged to consider
a study abroad or off-campus study experience to enhance
their knowledge of the eld. Majors in the Department of
Business, Organizations and Society have recently attended
universities such as the London School of Economics and
PoliticalScienceorMacquarieUniversitythroughtheInstitute
forStudyAbroad,ButlerUniversity;theDanishInstitutefor
StudyAbroadandIESAbroadprogramsinlocationsaround
theworld;andinternshipprogramsthroughBostonUniversity.
ThewritingrequirementintheBusiness,Organizations,and
Society major is met by completion of the normal courses
requiredtocompletethemajor.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS) Language Studies requirement; (NW) Non-Western
Culturesrequirement.
200. Strategies for Organizing. (S)
Introduces students to the changing roles and relationships of business,
organizations and society. Coupling theories of business strategy with
a variety of critical perspectives, this course aims to provide students
with a rich multidisciplinary framework for understanding deeply,
thinking creatively, and acting effectively in our dynamic, competitive
environment. Emphasizing the interplay between theory and practice,
eachsectionofBOS200mayofferstudentsadistinctiveeldexperience
or special project. Kasperson, Kim, Rebekah, Schneper
224. Accounting for Decision Making. (S)
Accounting concepts, standards and procedures involved in income
determinationand asset, liability and owners’equity measurement and
reporting. Emphasis on the role of accounting information in investment
decisions.Pre-orcorequisite:BOS200. Glazer, Krom
250. Quantitative Methods. (S)
Gives students the tools necessary to engage in research as well as the
ability to read and understand the research done by others. Includes an
exploration of the scientic method, theory construction, hypothesis
development and statistical tests used to evaluate them. Focus is on issues
in the social sciences, particularly business organizations.Not open to
students who have taken ECO 210. Forsyth, Kopchak
286. Social Entrepreneurship. (S)
Socialimpactinvestingandbusinessgrowthwilldrivehumansurvival
inthenext100years.Resourcescarcityisreachingcriticallevels.The
businessperson of the future will have to think in new and different
ways, balance multiple interests and lead an increasingly diverse and
multinational team. Understanding cultural motivations, legal and
regulatorychallengesandorganizationaltheoryarecriticalcomponents
forsuccessinstart-upsandmaturecompanies.Throughoutthesemester,
students will (1) analyze theories underlying today’s business culture
(includingthecyclesofentrepreneurshipthroughtime),(2)explorehow
law,anthropologyandnanceintersecttocreatenewthoughtleadership
and(3)deconstructasocialimpactinvestmentandbusinessplantolearn
how modern entrepreneurship functions. The course will culminate with
aresearchpaperinwhichstudentswillanalyzeacurrentstart-upusing
theories discussed throughout the semester and predict future success and
challenges for it and its industry. Staff
315. Organizational Behavior. (S)
Multidisciplinary study of the formal organization. Topics include
concepts and theories related to how individuals, groups and structural
attributesinuencetheperformanceoforganizations.
Prerequisite:BOS200. Young
316. Human Resources Management. (S)
Traditional areas and responsibilities of personnel/human resources
management. Compliance with federal regulation of the workplace;
planning,selectionandstafng;traininganddevelopment;performance
appraisal;compensation;laborhistory;andlaborrelations.
Prerequisite:BOS315. Young
324. Analysis and Control Systems. (S)
Exploration of current costing systems and the role of costs in performance
measurement,budgetingandmanagerialdecision-making.Examination
of cost behavior and the use of cost analysis tools. Extensive use of cases
in discussion of cost management topics including target costing and
pricingdecisionsindecentralizedoperations,outsourcing,activity-based
costing and budgeting, exible manufacturing and environmental and
qualitycosts.Prerequisite:BOS224. Krom
325. Financial Reporting and Analysis. (S)
This course explores the use of generally accepted accounting principles
(GAAP) in nancial reports and how well those principles reect the
underlyingeconomicrealityofanorganization.Studentswillalsogain
experienceanalyzingactualnancialreportsandotherpubliclyavailable
information in order to assess an organization’s earnings, nancial
positionandcashows.Prerequisites:BOS224and360. Glazer
332. Law, Ethics and Society. (S)
Explores the nature of individual obligation and professional accountability
in our complex, commercial society. We will begin by examining the
minimal social expectations embodied in legal doctrines and principles.
We will then turn to explore our broader social responsibilities by drawing
upon the norms and values necessary for a vibrant civil society. The aim
is to gain a richer understanding of how to lead morally satisfying and
civically engaged professional lives. Nesteruk, Staff
335. Business and the Natural Environment. (S)
Widespread concern for a cleaner environment and sustainable practices
has put new demands on business. Exploration of philosophical,
theoretical,strategicandpolicyissuesfacingorganizationsinrelationto
the natural environment. Same as ENE 335. Kurland
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 41
341. Marketing. (S)
Integrated, analytical approach to macro- and micro-marketing and
marketingmanagement.Problemsandcasestudiesareusedto analyze
marketing opportunities, strategic planning of prot and not-for-prot
organizationsinaccordancewithasocietalmarketingconcept.Opento
juniorsandseniorsonly.Prerequisite:BOS200andBOS250.
Kasperson, Podoshen
345. Consumer Psychology. (S)
Thiscourselookstoexploreanswerstothequestionof“WhyWeBuy?”.
Studentswillattempttoidentifywhatmakesconsumers,emotionallyand
cognitively, act in the way that they do. This course integrates material,
theory and perspectives from the elds of Marketing, Psychology,
Sociology,AnthropologyandStatisticsinanefforttogivethestudenta
holistic examination of consumer behavior in the 21st century. Podoshen
350. International Business. (S)
Students in this course will learn about the history of international
business, investigate the political and economic institutions that structure
the global economy, and explore the impact of international environments
onrm-leveldecisions. Same as IST 350. Kim
360. Finance. (S)
Theoretical concepts and analytical techniques of corporate nance.
Topics include management of working capital, capital budgeting and
cost of capital and capital structure planning. Open to juniors and seniors
only.Prerequisites:BOS224,BOS250andECO100. Papakroni
361. Securities Analysis. (S)
Formulationofinvestmentpoliciesforindividuals,rmsandinstitutions;
analysisofsecurities;operationofthesecuritiesmarkets.
Prerequisite:BOS360. Kopchak
363. Portfolio Management. (S)
Students responsible for the Student-Managed Investment Fund, a
portfolioofnancialassetsthatispartoftheCollege’sendowmentfunds.
Studentsusenanceandinvestmenttheoriesandpracticesintroducedin
thebusinessnanceandinvestmentcoursesandexaminehowotherelds
of business contribute to more informed investment decision-making.
Prerequisites:BOS361andpermissionoftheinstructor.
Kopchak, Papakroni
385. Gender at Work. (S)
Whatiswomen’swork?HowhasitchangedoverthecourseofAmerican
history?Howisitvalued?Thiscourseexplorestheworldofwomen’s
workbycomparingitto“men’s”work.Wewillfocusonwageearning,
caregiving, sex work, housework, “double days” and “glass ceilings.”
Wewillespeciallyconsiderwomen’sstrategiesofsurvivalandresistance
from various demographic, racial and ethnic groups. Same as AMS/WGS
385 Deslippe
391. Directed Readings.
Explorationofaspecictopicinorganizationstudiesthroughreadings
chosen and directed by a member of the Department of Business,
Organizations, and Society faculty. Permission of the chairperson is
required. Staff
370 – 379, 470 – 479. Topics in Business, Organizations, and Society. (S)
Study of specic aspects of business and other types of organizations.
Topics change from year to year. Permission of instructor usually
required. Staff
480. Issues Facing Organizations in the 21st Century. (S)
This course is a senior seminar for majors. Various course sections use
adifferentmulti-disciplinary“theme.”Allsectionsrequirethatstudents
undertake a semester long project as the culmination of their academic
program. Projects may be individual or group based. Contemporary
issuesareusedtocreatediscussionand debate.Permissiontoenrollis
determinedbythestudent’sadviserandtheinstructor. Kim, Kurland,
Nesteruk, Podoshen, Schneper, Young
490. Independent Study. (S)
IndependentstudydirectedbytheBusiness,Organizations,andSociety
staff.Permissionofchairperson
CHEMISTRY
Professor Scott H. Brewer, Chair
Phyllis A. Leber Dr. E. Paul and Frances H. Reiff
(Spring 2021 only) Professor of Chemistry
Scott H. Brewer Professor of Chemistry
Edward E. Fenlon Professor of Chemistry
Kenneth R. Hess Professor of Chemistry
Richard S. Moog Professor of Chemistry
(Fall 2020 only)
Jennifer L. Morford Professor of Chemistry
(on leave Spring 2021)
Katherine E. Plass Professor of Chemistry
(on leave Spring 2021)
Marcus W. Thomsen Professor of Chemistry, Senior
Associate Dean of the Faculty
Scott A. Van Arman Professor of Chemistry
Gabriel S. Brandt Associate Professor of Chemistry
Christine P. Phillips-Piro Associate Professor of Chemistry
(on leave 2020-21)
Davide Lionetti Assistant Professor of Chemistry
Sarah Z. Tasker Assistant Professor of Chemistry
Seth Burkert Visiting Assistant Professor of
Chemistry
Dustin J. Covell Visiting Assistant Professor
of Chemistry
Chemistry is the study of matter and the changes it undergoes
and, as such, is essential to the study and understanding of
physical, geological and biological phenomena. Because
of its place among the sciences, chemistry is inherently
interdisciplinary and attracts students to its study from a broad
range of related interests.
The chemistry major at Franklin & Marshall College is led
by faculty who are committed to helping the student “learn
howtolearn.”Inadditiontoacquiringanunderstandingofthe
basic concepts of chemistry, majors hone the skills necessary
for critical and analytical thinking and develop their ability to
communicate observations and discoveries through the printed
and spoken word.
Through coursework, chemistry majors gain an understanding
of transformations and reactions at the atomic, molecular
and macromolecular scales, the energetics associated with
those changes and the analytical techniques used to study
them.By involvementin theongoing research ofchemistry
faculty members, students have extraordinary opportunities
to study new reactions and properties of matter and to make
original contributions to the literature. As a consequence,
knowledge gained from coursework is deepened and enriched
by the research experience, which immerses the student in the
methodologyofscienticdiscoveryandthecreativeprocess.
Thecondenceandindependenceengenderedbythechemistry
major allow students to pursue a wide variety of opportunities
beyond graduation.
A major in Chemistryconsistsof15coursecredits,including
atleast10coursecreditsinchemistry.Requiredcoursesare:
CHM111,112,211,212,221,222,321.
PHY111,112;MAT109,110.
42 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
The chemistry major may be completed with the required
courses and the following additional courses:
AtleastonecourseselectedfromCHM322orCHM351.
OnecreditinChemistrynumbered410–479.
Two additional course credits in chemistry, or one
additional credit in chemistry and one course credit
outside chemistry approved by the department. Approved
coursesoutsideofchemistryincludeBIO305;ENE/GEO
321;PHY222,223.
CHM390or 490 is encouragedbut no more thanone such
coursecreditmaybeappliedtowardtherequirementsforthe
major.
A Biochemistry track in the chemistry major includes
Introductory Biochemistry (CHM 351) and Advanced
Biochemistry (CHM 451). A student wishing to pursue
biochemistry at the graduate level should also take several
biology courses and consult with chemistry faculty about their
plans.
If a student is interested in completing the American
Chemical Society (ACS) certied major in Chemistry, the
student must complete the major as described above and
typically the following stipulations: completion of both CHM
322andCHM351andaresearchexperience(CHM390,490,
orsummerresearch).Fulldetailsoftherequirementsshouldbe
discussed with the Chair.
A minor in ChemistryrequiresCHM111and112plusfour
additionalchemistrycredits(includingnomorethanonecredit
ofCHM390or490).
To be considered for Honors in chemistry the student must be
nominated by the research mentor on the basis of work done in
theCHM490andmayincluderesearchcompletedduringthe
summer preceding the senior year. Criteria to be met include
an unusual commitment of time and effort, results that are
publishableandarelikelytohavebeenpresentedatascientic
meeting, independent contributions to the project from the
student, a well-written thesis that conforms to departmental
guidelines and a successful defense of the project before a
faculty committee.
Chemistry Majors regularly engage in study abroad as part of
their college experience. Over the past decade, students have
studiedatthefollowinginstitutions:UniversityofOtago,New
Zealand;UniversityofStrathclyde,Scotland;TrinityCollege,
Ireland;UniversityofShefeld,England;UniversityofNew
South Wales, Australia; University of Grenoble, France;
Lancaster University, England; Oxford University, England;
UniversityofBristol,England.SeetheInternationalPrograms
section of the Catalog for further information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
111. General Chemistry I: The Structure
and Composition of Matter. (N)
Designedbothasabackgroundforfurthercoursesinchemistryandas
aterminalcourseforinterestednon-sciencestudents.Atomicstructure,
chemical bonding, molecular structure, intermolecular forces and the
structureofmatterinbulk.Relationshipbetweenpropertiesandstructure
stressed throughout. Laboratory work deals with the separation and
identicationofsubstances.OfferedeveryFall.
Brewer, Covell, Hess, Morford, Phillips-Piro, Plass
112. General Chemistry II: Chemical Reactions. (N)
Theprinciplesunderlyingchemicaltransformations:stoichiometry;rates
ofreaction;equilibrium,metathetical,acid-baseandoxidation-reduction
reactions.Laboratoryworkdealingwiththeseparationandidentication
ofsubstances.Prerequisite:CHM111.OfferedeverySpring.
Brandt, Brewer, Burkert, Covell, Lionetti,
Hess, Morford, Phillips-Piro, Plass
211. Organic Chemistry I: Structure, Rates and Mechanisms. (N)
Structure and bonding principles associated with carbon compounds,
fundamentalreactiontypeswithemphasis upon mechanisms.Structure
determination based on theory and application of infrared spectroscopy,
protonandcarbon-13nuclearmagneticresonancespectroscopyandmass
spectrometry. Laboratory work includes separation, identication and
synthesisofcompounds,andspectroscopicanalyses.Prerequisite:CHM
112. Offered every Fall. Covell, Fenlon, Tasker, Van Arman
212. Organic Chemistry II: Reactions of Carbon Compounds. (N)
Reactionsofcarboncompoundsasafunctionoftheirmolecularstructures
with emphasis on mechanisms and the use of these reactions in synthesis
of carbon compounds. Laboratory work includes analysis and synthesis of
variouscompounds,andspectroscopicanalyses,Prerequisite:CHM211.
OfferedeverySpring. Covell, Fenlon, Tasker, Van Armar
221. Chemical Analysis. (N)
Fundamentalprinciplesofchemicalanalysisincludingsolutionequilibria,
acid-basetheory,complexationreactionsandelectrochemistry.Sampling
and experimental design; interpretation and analysis of experimental
results. Laboratory work includes introduction to common instrumental
methods with applications drawn from elds such as biochemistry,
environmental chemistry, forensic chemistry and pharmaceutical analysis.
Prerequisite:CHM112.OfferedeverySpring. Hess
222. Inorganic Chemistry: Structure and Stability. (N)
Periodic relationships and acid-base concepts. Structure, bonding,
reactions, and stability of main group and transition metal compounds,
including use of group theory. Laboratory work involving the synthesis
andcharacterizationofinorganiccompounds.PrerequisiteCHM211or
permission of instructor. Offered every Fall. Lionetti
321. Thermodynamics and Kinetics. (N)
Kinetic molecular theory of gases. Properties of real and ideal gases.
Kineticsandmechanismsofreactions;theoriesofreactionrate.Thelaws
of thermodynamics, spontaneity and equilibrium, systems of variable
composition, phase equilibria, phase diagrams. Ideal solutions and
colligativeproperties.Laboratoryworkrequired.Prerequisites:CHM112,
MAT110,PHY111(orPHY111maybeacorequisitewithpermissionof
instructor).OfferedeveryFall. Burkert
322. Structure and Bonding. (N)
An introduction to quantum chemistry and spectroscopy of atoms
and molecules, including bonding theories. Applications of molecular
modeling and group theory to atomic and molecular structure and
spectroscopy.Laboratoryworkrequired.PrerequisitesCHM222,MAT
110, PHY 112 (or PHY112 may be a corequisite with permission of
instructor).OfferedeverySpring. Brewer
323. Medicinal Chemistry. (half-course)
The mechanism of action of several classes of drugs. The discovery
(e.g., natural products, rational design, combinatorial chemistry),
structure-activityrelationships,and synthesisof drugs willbe covered.
TheroleoftheFDA,ethicalissues,andeconomicpressuresinrelation
to drug pricing, approval, and manufacture will be discussed (no lab).
Prerequisite:CHM212. Fenlon
351. Introductory Biochemistry. (N)
Chemical principles apply to life-sustaining processes in a variety
of biological systems. Protein and nucleic acid structure, how these
moleculesaresynthesizedbythecell,andthereactionstheyperformor
undergo. The chemical transformations afforded by organic and inorganic
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 43
small molecule cofactors utilized by biological molecules in the cell.
Requiredlaboratoryworkwillcoveravarietyofbiomechanicaltechniques
includingproteinexpression,purication,kinetics,andstructureanalysis.
Prerequisite:CHM212.OfferedeveryFall. Brandt
370–379. Topics in Chemistry.
Studyofspecializedareasofchemistry. Staff
390. Directed Studies of Chemical Problems.
Directed study of a one-semester project. Permission of instructor and
chairpersonrequired.Astudentmaynotusethiscoursetosatisfyamajor
requirementinadditiontoCHM490. Staff
412. Materials Chemistry.
Relationshipsbetweenthepropertiesoftechnologicaldevicesandtheir
componentmaterialsinachemicalcontext.Experimentalcharacterization
ofdeviceand material properties.Coursework will requirereading the
primaryliterature.Openonlytoseniorchemistrymajors.Prerequisites:
CHM212,CHM222,CHM321,CHM322(orCHM322maybeaco-
requisitewithpermissionofinstructor). Plass
451. Advanced Biochemistry.
Howdointeractionsamongatomsresultinalivingorganism?Howdoes
molecularorganizationleadtobiologicalorganization?Thiscoursewill
focusonthemolecular-leveldetailofbiologicalinteractions.Useofthe
primaryscienticliterature,culminatinginaresearchproposaladdressing
a contemporary research question. The folding and three-dimensional
structure of biological macromolecules, molecular recognition, afnity
andselectivityofbinding,catalysisbyenzymesandbiomimeticdesign.
The capabilities and limitations of modern experimental tools will be a
themethroughout.Prerequisites:CHM321,CHM212andeitherCHM
351orBIO334.OpentoseniorchemistrymajorsandseniorBMBmajors.
OfferedeverySpring. Brandt
490. Independent Study.
Independent study extending over two semesters. Course credit earned
each semester. Permission of instructor and chairperson required. A
studentmaynotusethiscoursetosatisfyamajorrequirementinaddition
toCHM390. Staff
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
Medicinal Chemistry.
CHINESE LANGUAGE
Hongchang Yao, Director
Professor Jonathan Stone, Chair, Department of German,
Russian & East Asian Languages
Hongchang Yao Director and Senior Teaching Professor of
Chemistry
Shuai Shao Teaching Professor of Chinese
Ying Liu Chinese Language Teaching Assistant
With nearly a billion speakers, Chinese is the language spoken
by the most people on earth. The ability to speak this language
has never been more valuable, as growing interest in China is
matchedonlybyitsgrowinginuence.
The Chinese Program offers Franklin & Marshall students
excellent opportunities to learn the Chinese language, study its
history,andexperienceChina’sbeautifulanduniqueculture.
In this program, students will receive intensive language
training in the classroom and the learning experience will be
greatly enhanced by after-class activities such as individual
sessionswithnative speakers, culture-related activities,eld
trips and opportunities for study abroad.
Studentsenjoyoptimumopportunitiestodevelopandpractice
their speaking, writing and listening skills. Faculty recommend
twoconsecutiveyearsofstudytodevelopuencyandtoobtain
a solid understanding of the history and culture of China.
Off-campus study programs most frequently attended by
studentsduringthepasttwoyearsinclude:InstituteforStudy
Abroad (IFSA), Shanghai, China; The Alliance for Global
Education, Shanghai, China; CET Kunming, China; School
for International Training (SIT) China; Middlebury Beijing,
China.
An Area Studies minor in Asian Studies (China) may be
arranged by contacting Hongchang Yao, Director, Chinese
LanguageProgram.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
101. Elementary Chinese I.
Introduction to contemporary Mandarin within its cultural context.
Developinglistening,speaking,readingandwritingskills.Forstudents
with no previous training in the language. Offered every Fall. Yao
102. Elementary Chinese II.
Continued development of listening, speaking, reading and writing skills
inMandarininaculturalcontext.Prerequisite:CHN101orpermissionof
theinstructor.OfferedeverySpring. Yao
201. Intermediate Chinese I. (NW) (LS)
Continued development of contemporary Mandarin listening, speaking,
reading and writing skills in a cultural context, including continued
practice in reading and writing characters. Prerequisite: CHN 102 or
permission of instructor. Offered every Fall. Shao
202. Intermediate Chinese II. (H) (NW) (LS)
Continued development of contemporary Mandarin listening, speaking,
reading and writing skills in a cultural context, including continued
practice in reading and writing characters. Prerequisite: CHN 201 or
permissionofinstructor.OfferedeverySpring. Shao
235. Mystery of Chinese Characters. (NW)
This course is designed for students who have had some Chinese language
learning experience understanding the basic knowledge of pronunciation,
structure and formation of Chinese characters, and wish to learn more
about Chinese Characters from a historical and systematic perspective and
therichculturetheyrepresent.Prerequisite:CHN101 Yao
301. Upper Intermediate Chinese I. (H) (NW) (LS)
This course is for students with at least two years of prior classroom
experienceinChinese.Itisdesignedtofurtherdevelopstudents’overall
Chinese prociency and expand their knowledge of Chinese culture
through reading and discussing culturally relevant newspaper and
magazinearticlesaboutcurrentaffairsinChina.Developmentofspoken
and writing skills will be further reinforced through oral presentations and
essaywriting.Prerequisite:CHN202. Yao
302. Upper Intermediate Chinese II. (H) (NW) (LS)
ThiscourseisacontinuationofCHN301whichisdesignedtofurther
develop students’ overall Chinese prociency through reading and
discussing culturally relevant newspaper and magazine articles about
currentaffairs.Developmentofreadingandwritingskillswillbefurther
reinforced through oral presentations and essay writing. Prerequisite:
CHN301orpermissionofinstructor. Shao
44 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
CLASSICS
Professor Alexis Castor, Chair
Ann Steiner Shirley Watkins Steinman Professor
(Spring 2021 only) of Classics
Zachary P. Biles Professor of Classics
Alexis Q. Castor Professor of Classics
Shawn O’Bryhim Professor of Classics
Gretchen E. Meyers Associate Professor of Classics
Ryan Fowler Visiting Assistant Professor
of Classics
The Department of Classics provides instruction in Greek,
Latin, ancient history and classical art and archaeology.
Classics is an interdisciplinary area studies program, applying
the approaches of humanists and social scientists to the history,
art, language, literature, philosophy, religion, social structures,
economy, everyday life and government of the ancient
Mediterranean. Classics students learn how to weigh and
assimilate information from a variety of media and disciplines
in order to become productive and thoughtful citizens of a
rapidly changing world.
Studentsmajoringin“Classics”selectoneoftwotracks,either
“ClassicalSociety”or“ClassicalLanguagesandLiteratures,”
depending on whether their interests in Greece and Rome
inclinemoretowardssocialscienticapproachesorlinguistic
andliterarystudies.Studentsinbothtracksshareacommon
core of coursework that ensures familiarity with major
disciplinary approaches contained in Classics. All students
complete the major with a senior capstone seminar that draws
on the range of interests and learning among our student
majors toward the investigation of a topic that spans Greek
andRomanculturesandthevarietyofdisciplinaryapproaches
applied to their study.
COURSEWORK REQUIRED FOR A MAJOR IN
CLASSICS
Classical Languages and Literatures: 11 courses distributed
as follows:
8coursesinGreekandLatin(atleast2coursesmustbe
taken in each language, i.e. to 102 or above depending on
pointofplacement,and2coursesmustbeatthe300level)
2 courses from two of the three subject areas of History
(CLS113,114),Archaeology(CLS115,117),Literature
inEnglishtranslation(CLS230andotherCLSliterature
courses);
1seniorcapstoneseminar(CLS480)
Classical Society: 11 courses distributed as follows:
1introductoryhistorycourse(CLS113or114)
1introductoryarchaeologycourse(CLS115or117)
2 courses in Greek or Latin, i.e. either language to the 102
level or from point of placement
1200-levelCLSliteraturecourse
3electivesinany200-level(orabove)GRK,LAT,CLS
courses or other approved courses (e.g. in philosophy,
politicalscience,arthistory,religiousstudies)
2300-levelCLScourses
1400-levelseniorcapstoneseminar(CLS480)
A minor in Classics is earned by taking 6 courses, 4 of
which must be in one of the three subject areas of Classics
coursework,i.e.Greek(GRK),Latin(LAT),Archaeologyand
History(CLS).Onlythree100-levelcoursesmaybecounted
towardtheminor,andonecoursemustbeatthe300-level.
Majors in the Department of Classics have studied abroad
inthe followingprogramsinrecentyears:AmericanSchool
of Classical Studies at Athens (Summer Program); College
YearinAthens;IntercollegiateCenterforClassicalStudiesin
Rome;AdvancedStudiesinEngland,Bath;ArcadiaUniversity
inGreece;departmentalsummerprogramsinItalyandGreece.
See the International Programs section of the Catalog for
further information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
COURSES IN ENGLISH
Designated as “Classics,” the following courses require no
knowledge of Greek or Latin, unless otherwise indicated.
113. The History of Ancient Greece. (S)
AncientGreecefromtheBronzeAgetothedeathofAlexandertheGreatin
theMediterraneanandNearEasterncontext.Studentsarealsointroducedto
theproblemsandmethodsofhistoricalinquiry. Same as HIS 113. Castor
114. The History of Ancient Rome. (S)
ThetransformationfromRepublictoPrincipateandthecollapseofthe
empireare explored.Students arealso introducedto the problems and
methodsofhistoricalinquiry.Same as HIS 114. Castor
115. Greek Art and Archaeology. (A)
This course provides an overview of the archaeological monuments of
ancient Greece. Coursework will focus on methodological approaches to
analyzingbuildingtechniques,trends,stylesandthesocial,politicaland
religious functions of art and monumental architecture in ancient Greek
society. Topics covered in lecture and classroom discussion will include
archaeological and art historical interpretations of sacred and public
architecture, urbanism, three-dimensional sculpture, relief sculpture,
paintinganddecorativearts.Thereisarequiredeldtrip.
Same as ART 115. Meyers, Steiner
117. Roman Art and Archaeology. (A)
This course provides an overview of the archaeological monuments of
ancientRome.Courseworkwillfocusonmethodologicalapproachesto
analyzingbuildingtechniques,trends,stylesandthesocial,politicaland
religiousfunctionsofartandmonumentalarchitectureinancientRoman
society. Topics covered in lecture and classroom discussion will include
archaeological and art historical interpretations of sacred and public
architecture, urbanism, three-dimensional sculpture, relief sculpture,
paintinganddecorativearts.Thereisarequiredeldtrip.
Same as ART 117. Meyers
210. History of Ancient Philosophy. (H)
How should one live? What is happiness for a human being? These
questions are the focus of the philosophy of Socrates, Plato, and
Aristotle. In the work of these thinkers, such questions lead to wide
rangingphilosophicalinquiryinethics,moralpsychology,epistemology,
metaphysics, political theory, aesthetics, and beyond. This course surveys
their main arguments and theories, which became the cornerstone of the
western European philosophical tradition. Same as PHI 210. Franklin
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 45
230. Classical Myth. (H)
Introduction to the myths of ancient Greece and Rome and their
relationship to the art, history, philosophy and religions of their respective
cultures.StudentswillexploretheClassicalconceptionoftheinteractions
between mortals, heroes and divinities through a wide range of media
andtextualgenres.ConnectionsbetweenGreekandRomanmythsaswell
astheadaptationofmythicaltraditionsfromNearEastcultureswillbe
discussed. Fowler, O’Bryhim
231. Ancient Laughter. (H)
ThiscourseisanintroductiontothecomictraditionsofGreeceandRome.
Studentswillbecomefamiliarwiththecharacteristics,development,and
socialinterests of comic literature;additionally,considerable emphasis
willbeontheanalysisoforganizingthemesandtheliteraryqualityof
these works through close readings and discussion. Same as LIT 231.
Biles, O’Bryhim
241. Ancient Medicine. (H) (NSP)
This course is an introduction to the origins and development of Western
medicineinAncientGreeceandRome.Studentswillreadfromthesources
of the ancient theories and practices of medicine, including epic literature,
pre-Hippocratictexts,theHippocraticcorpus,andanumberofworksby
Galen, widely considered the most accomplished medical researcher in
antiquity.Thesetextswillbecomplementedbyselectionsoftextsbythe
PreSocratics,Plato, andAristotlethatreecta reciprocalborrowing of
vocabulary, argumentation, and diagnostic methodologies between the
developing“artofhealing”andvariousclassicalphilosophicaltexts.All
readings will be in English. Same as STS 241. Fowler
242. Gender and Sexuality in Antiquity. (H)
The aim of this course is to explore the cultural constructions of gender and
sexualityintheancientsocietiesofGreeceandRome.Wewillapproach
questionssuchasthestatusofwomenandthecontextofmisogyny,the
societalroleofsame-sexrelations,thepresentationandvisualizationof
sexuality, desire and the body. We will examine archaeological, visual
and literary evidence through assigned reading and class discussion.
This interdisciplinary approach will allow us to gain an understanding of
genderandsexualityinantiquityandwillofferinsightsintotheshaping
of our own cultural and personal attitudes. Same as WGS 242. Meyers
321. Selected Studies in Greek History. (S)
A close examination of a particular period, place or individual in ancient
Greekhistory.Seminartopicsinclude“AlexandertheGreat”and“5th-
centuryAthens.”Prerequisite:CLS/HIS113.Same as HIS 321. Castor
322. Selected Studies in Roman History. (S)
A close examination of a particular period, place or individual in ancient
Romanhistory.Seminartopicsinclude“ImperialWomen:PowerBehind
theThrone.”Prerequisite:CLS/HIS114.Same as HIS 322. Castor
37x. Topics in Greek Art and Archaeology. (A)
A close examination of a particular aspect of ancient Greek sculpture,
architecture, or vase painting, or a close study of the archaeological
remains from a particular chronological period of ancient Greece.
Seminartopicsinclude“GreeksinSouthItaly.”Prerequisite:ART/CLS
115orpermission.Same as ART 37x. Steiner
37x. Topics in Roman Art and Archaeology. (A)
AcloseexaminationofaparticularaspectofancientRomansculpture,
architecture or painting, or a close study of the archaeological remains
fromaparticularchronologicalperiodofancientRome.Seminartopics
include “Art of the Augustan Age.” Prerequisite: ART/CLS 117 or
permission. Same as ART 37x. Meyers
381. Plato. (H)
An intensive treatment of some of the major philosophical themes in
selecteddialoguesofPlato.Prerequisite:CLS/PHI210. Same as PHI 381.
480. Senior Capstone Research Seminar in Classics
This course prepares students for advanced level research in Classics.
The seminar focuses on the multidisciplinary aspects of Classics research
including literature and philological studies, historical and archaeological
analysis.Eachstudentwillprepareasignicantresearchprojectbasedon
theseminar’sthematictopic,whichwillvarywitheachoffering.Openonly
toseniors.Prerequisite:permissionoftheinstructor. Steiner
GREEK
101. Elementary Ancient Greek I.
Introduction to the grammar and syntax of Classical Greek. Offered every
Fall. O’Bryhim
102. Elementary Ancient Greek II.
Continues the study of the basic grammar and syntax of Classical Greek.
Prerequisite:GRK101orplacement.OfferedEverySpring. O’Bryhim
201. Introduction to Greek Prose. (LS)
Review of principles of grammar and syntax through composition
exercisesandintroductoryreadingsofauthenticGreekprose.Prerequisite:
GRK102orplacement.OfferedeveryFall. Castor, Fowler
202. Introduction to Greek Poetry. (H)
Introduction to Greek poetry with emphasis on diction, meter and literary
interpretation. Prerequisite: GRK 201 or permission of the instructor.
OfferedeverySpring. Biles, Steiner
311. Greek Historians.* (H)
An examination of the historical writings of Herodotus and Thucydides
with emphasis on translation, interpretation, evaluating scholarship and
research. Biles
312. Greek Oratory.* (H)
An examination of theAthenianorators Lysias and Demosthenes with
emphasis on translation, interpretation, evaluating scholarship and
research. Staff
314. Greek Lyric Poetry.* (H)
AnexaminationofselectedArchaiclyricpoets(e.g.Archilochus,Sappho,
Alcaeus,Alcman),withemphasisontranslation,interpretation,evaluating
scholarship and research. Staff
315. Greek Comedy.* (H)
An examination of a comedy of Aristophanes with emphasis on translation,
interpretation, evaluating scholarship and research. Biles, O’Bryhim
316. Greek Tragedy.* (H)
An examination of a tragedy with emphasis on translation, interpretation,
evaluating scholarship and research. Biles
320. Greek Philosophy.* (H)
An examination of a Platonic dialogue with emphasis on translation,
interpretation, evaluating scholarship and research. Staff
321. Greek Epic.* (H)
An examination of Homer’s Iliad with emphasis on translation,
interpretation, evaluating scholarship and research. Biles, Steiner
*Repeatablebypermissionofdepartment.
LATIN
101. Elementary Latin I.
IntroductiontothebasicgrammarandsyntaxofClassicalLatin.Normally
open only to students who have had no prior experience in the formal
study of Latin. Offered every Fall. Fowler, O’Bryhim
102. Elementary Latin II.
Continues and completes the study of the basic grammar and syntax
of Classical Latin. Prerequisite: LAT 101 or placement. Offered every
Spring. Fowler, O’Bryhim
103. Accelerated Latin.
Intensive study of Latin grammar. This course compresses the material
from LAT 101 and 102 into one semester, thus enabling the student to
enter LAT 201 after one semester of instruction. Intended for motivated
students and for those who have placed into this course after taking Latin
in high school. Staff
201. Introduction to Latin Prose. (LS)
Introduction to Latin prose incorporating a review of forms and structures.
Successfulcompletionofthecoursesigniesthatthestudenthasmastered
theelementsofLatinandispreparedtobeginthestudyofRomantexts.
Prerequisite:LAT102orplacement.OfferedeveryFall.
Biles, Meyers, O’Bryhim
46 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
202. Introduction to Latin Poetry. (H)
Introduction to Latin poetry with the goal of developing speed and facility
inmeterandinterpretation.Prerequisite:LAT201orplacement.Offered
everySpring. O’Bryhim
311. Latin Historians.* (H)
An examination of the histories of Tacitus with an emphasis on translation,
interpretation, evaluating scholarship and research.
Biles, Meyers, O’Bryhim
312. Latin Oratory.* (H)
An examination of the speeches of Cicero with an emphasis on translation,
interpretation, evaluating scholarship and research. Staff
313. Latin Epic.* (H)
An examination of selected Latin epics with an emphasis on translation,
interpretation, evaluating scholarship and research. Staff
315. Latin Comedy.* (H)
An examination of the comedies of Plautus with an emphasis on
translation, interpretation, evaluating scholarship and research. Staff
316. Latin Tragedy.* (H)
AnexaminationofthetragediesofSenecawithanemphasisontranslation,
interpretation, evaluating scholarship and research. Staff
318. Latin Satire.* (H)
An examination of the satires ofHorace, Persius andJuvenal with an
emphasis on translation, interpretation, evaluating scholarship and
research. Biles, O’Bryhim
319. Latin Letters.* (H)
AnexaminationofthelettersofCicero,PlinyandFrontowithanemphasis
on translation, interpretation, evaluating scholarship and research. Staff
320. Latin Philosophy.* (H)
An examination of the philosophical works of Cicero with an emphasis on
translation, interpretation, evaluating scholarship and research. Fowler
*Repeatablebypermissionofdepartment.
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
Race&EthnicityintheClassicalWorld. Castor
AncientGreece/ModernFilm. Steiner
COMPARATIVE LITERARY
STUDIES
Professor Carrie Landfried, Chair
MEMBERS OF THE COMPARATIVE LITERARY STUDIES
PROGRAM COMMITTEE
Scott Lerner Arthur and Katherine Shadek Professor
(on leave 2020-21) of Humanities and French and Italian
Zachary Biles Professor of Classics
Giovanna Faleschini Lerner
Professor of Italian
Lisa Gasbarrone Professor of French
Richard Kent Professor of Art History
Linda Aleci Associate Professor of Art History
Rachel Anderson-Rabern Associate Professor of Theatre
Curt Bentzel Associate Professor of German
Peter Jaros Associate Professor of English
Carrie Landfried Associate Professor of French
Jon Stone Associate Professor of Russian
and Russian Studies
Meagan Tripp Assistant Professor of German
Additional faculty not on the program committee
also contribute to this program.
The minor in Comparative Literary Studies investigates the
development of literature in an international and historical
context. In this program, students study foundational works
of literature from a variety of historical periods and national
traditions in order to understand the diverse ways in which
literary processes unfold in different social milieus and the
interrelationships among different literary traditions. The
study of genres, periods and themes across diverse cultures
promotes“liberaleducation” in its truestsense, by enabling
students to see beyond the parochial constraints of any single
literary tradition.
Since antiquity, humanity has produced literary documents
that serve as a repository of knowledge and wisdom, offering
us the opportunity to reect on the human experience. In
addition to inspiring, literature enables us to see the ways in
which other cultures are like our own, since we can discern in
their literatures basic commonalities of form and theme that
ground and sustain all peoples from otherwise diverse cultural,
aesthetic and linguistic backgrounds.
The study of literary works offers a rich eld of study for
scholarsfromabroadrangeofacademicdisciplines.Because
literature has always served as both outlet and inspiration for
artists,historians(andmakersofhistory),socialthinkersand
musicians, understanding literature prepares students in the
humanities, social sciences and natural sciences to participate
actively in the global exchange of ideas.
A minor in Comparative Literary Studies consists of six
courses. One of these is the required core course, LIT 101
IntroductiontoComparativeLiteraryStudies.Theotherve
areelectives;atleasttwoofthesemustbeatthe200levelor
higher.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 47
101. Literatures of the World:
Introduction to Comparative Literary Studies. (H)
Studyofliteratureasacommonhumanenterprisefromancienttimesto
thepresentday,acrosslinguisticandnationalboundaries.Development
of vocabulary and concepts for the analysis of literary genres, themes and
historical periods of literary development. Focus on literary texts from
variouseras,culturesandlanguages.ReadingswillbeinEnglish. Staff
220. The World of the Novel. (H)
Since the time of its rise as a cultural force in the eighteenth century,
the novel has changed our sense of reality and ourselves. It became a
formthathasreshapedtheliteraryuniverse.Readingsinthiscoursewill
include works by Jane Austen, Gustave Flaubert, Fedor Dostoevsky,
FranzKafka,WillaCather,andVladimirNabokov. Staff
315. Introduction to Literary Theory. (H)
AsJonathanCullerstates,“Theoryoffersnotasetofsolutionsbutthe
prospect of further thought. It calls for commitment to the work of reading,
ofchallengingpresuppositions,ofquestioningtheassumptionsonwhich
youproceed.” Students in this course will be introduced to theoretical
schools and concepts that shape the study of literature and the practice
ofliteraryanalysis.Studentsenrollinginthiscourseshouldhavetaken
at least one college-level literature course. Recommendedfor students
considering graduate studies in English. Same as ENG 315. Staff
APPROVED COURSES FOR ELECTIVES
The courses listed below have been approved as Comparative
Literary Studies electives. Other courses, such as topics
courses, may be approved by Carrie Landfried, chairperson of
ComparativeLiteraryStudies.Studentsshouldbeawarethat
someofthesecourseshaveprerequisites
LIT 182. Tolkien’s Mythology.
LIT 110. Foundations of World Theatre. Same as TND 110.
LIT 182. Tolkien’s Mythology. Same as ENG 182.
LIT 214. Russian Novel from Pushkin to Tolstoy (19th Century).
Same as RUS 214.
LIT 215. Magic and Mayhem in French Fairy Tales. Same as FRN
215.
LIT 218. Narrative Journeys in Arabic Literature. Same as ARB/AFS
218.
LIT 230. Classical Myth. Same as CLS 230.
LIT 231. Ancient Laughter. Same as CLS 231.
LIT 233. Religion in 20th Century Jewish Literature. Same as JST/
RST 233.
LIT 253. Epic and Romance. Same as ENG 253.
LIT 315. Latin Comedy. Same as CLS 315.
LIT 352. Madonnas, Mothers, and Virgins: Medieval Religious
Women. Same as ENG 352.
LIT 359. La France Occupée. Same as FRN 359.
LIT 363. Reading Characters in the Atlantic World. Same as ENG
363.
RST 112. Judaism. Same as JST 112.
RUS 217. Russia: The 20th Century in Print and Film.
FALL 2020 APPROVED ELECTIVES
LIT 110. Foundations of World Theatre.
LIT182.Tolkien’sMythology.
LIT219.TolstoyandDostoevsky
LIT275.TheBibleasLiterature.
LIT363.ReadingCharactersintheAtlanticWorld.
COMPUTER SCIENCE
Professor Jing Hu, Chair
Jing Hu Associate Professor of Computer Science
Justin Brody Assistant Professor of Computer Science
Bradley McDanel Assistant Professor of Computer Science
Edmund Novak Assistant Professor of Computer Science
Jason Wilson Assistant Professor of Computer Science
Anthony Weaver Research Computing Programmer &
Systems Administrator and Senior
Adjunct Instructor of Computer Science
The study of computer science includes, but is not limited
to, computer programming. We learn how to solve problems
by creating, implementing, and analyzing algorithms, and
studyhowcomputersareorganized,howtheycarryouttheir
operations, how they store and transmit information, and how
we control and interact with them.
Computer science has rich overlaps with a wide variety
of elds, in terms of both shared skills and paradigms and
interdisciplinary synergies, with particularly clear connections
to mathematics, natural and physical sciences, philosophy,
psychology, and the language arts. The computer is now deeply
embedded in our culture and society, which means that its use
and abuse are cultural and social concerns.
A major in Computer Science consists of eleven computer
sciencecoursestogetherwithamathematicsrequirement.The
majorincludessevenrequiredcomputersciencecourses:CPS
111,112,222,237,242,261and337,aswellasfourelectives.
ThreeoftheelectivesmustbeComputerSciencecoursesat
the 300-level or above that are not cross-listed, other than
CPS390and490.OneoftheelectivesmaybeanyComputer
Science course at the 200-level or above or may be chosen
fromPHI244,PSY/SPM305,PSY/SPM312oranotherwise
related course outside of computer science, approved by the
chairperson.Requiredmathematicscoursesare:MAT109,110
andeither216or229.
A minor in Computer Scienceconsistsofsixcourses:CPS
111and112,andfourotherCPScourses,includingatleastone
atthe300-levelthatisnotcross-listedwithanotherdepartment
or discipline.
A maximum of four courses taken at other institutions may
counttowardtheComputerSciencerequirementsofthemajor,
and of these, at most one may count toward the 300-level
elective requirement. At most two courses taken at other
institutions may count toward the minor.
Opportunities exist for students to design a joint or special
studies major in Bioinformatics in consultation with the
BiologyandComputerSciencechairs.
Computer Science students have studied abroad in the
followingprogramsinrecentyears:InstituteforStudyAbroad
atButlerUniversityProgramsinEngland,Ireland,Scotland,
48 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
Australia andNew Zealand. Seethe International Programs
section of the Catalog for further information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
111. Computer Science I.
Introduces basic concepts in computer science and computational
problem solving through the design of algorithms and computational
processes,modularization,andabstraction.Alsointroducestheprocesses
of programming and software development as a means to put solutions
intopractice.Hasarequiredlab,butdoesnotsatisfythe“NaturalScience
withLaboratory”requirement. Hu, McDanel, Staff
112. Computer Science II.
A second course in computer science and computational thinking,
focusing on data structures and advanced programming. Topics include
implementationandapplicationsofdatastructuressuchasstacks,queues,
linked lists, trees and graphs. Also introduces performance analysis of
algorithms.Hasarequiredlab,butdoesnotsatisfythe“NaturalScience
withLaboratory”requirement.Prerequisite:CPS111orpermissionofthe
instructor. McDanel, Wilson
222. Computer Science III.
This course will prepare students for advanced computer science courses.
Usingaproduction-levelprogramminglanguageasatool,studentswill
implementadvanced data structures and algorithms. Students will also
study advanced programming concepts and strategies for algorithm
development and analysis. Through programming projects, students will
explore complex tree structures, graph algorithms, greedy algorithms,
dynamicprogramming,divide-and-conqueralgorithms,andparallelism/
concurrency.Prerequisite:CPS112andMAT109.OfferedeveryFall.
Novak
237. Discrete Mathematics.
Basic set theory, basic proof techniques, combinatorics (the theory of
counting),andgraphtheorywithrelatedalgorithms.Prerequisite:MAT
109.SameasMAT237.OfferedeveryFall. Brody
242. Computer Organization.
Thiscoursecoversthebasicinstructionset,architecture,andorganization
ofamoderncomputer.Fundamentalsoftranslatinghigher-levellanguages
into assembly language, and interpretation of machine languages by
hardware are studied. A model of computer hardware organization is
developed from the gate level upward. Topics include logic circuits,
micro-architecturesandmicroprogramming,machinearchitectures, and
software-hardwareinterfaceissues.Prerequisite:CPS112. Novak
261. Algorithms.
Trees, graphs and networks; further analysis of algorithms and their
efciency.Prerequisite:CPS112andCPS/MAT237. Brody
270 – 279. Topics in Computer Science.
Intermediate level courses.
291. Directed Reading.
Reading directed by the Computer Science staff. Permission of
chairperson.
337. Theoretical Foundations of Computer Science.
An introduction to the theoretical models used to understand the
capabilities and fundamental limitations of computational devices. Topics
include formal languages, automata, grammars, computability, reductions,
andcomplexity.Prerequisites:CPS112andCPS/MAT237.Offeredevery
Spring. Wilson
338. Computational Mathematics.
Numerical analysis as implemented on computers. Polynomial and
rational approximations, numerical differentiation and integration,
systems of linear equations, matrix inversion, eigenvalues, rst and
secondorderdifferentialequations.Prerequisites:CPS111andMAT229.
Same as MAT 338. Staff
360. Introduction to Machine Learning.
This course will introduce some foundational machine learning
algorithms from both a theoretical and practical perspective, with the
focus on developing a deep understanding of a few important algorithms.
This deep exploration will expose some of the principles and challenges
thatlieatthecoreofnearlyallmachinelearningtechniques.Thestudy
ofmachinelearningrequirestheuseofmathematical,computational,and
empirical tools and students will gain experience bringing all of these
tools to bear to understand, apply, and perhaps even improve upon the
methodsdiscussed.Prerequisites:CPS222andMAT216. Hu
363. Introduction to Bioinformatics.
An introduction to the eldof bioinformatics, addressing some ofthe
important biology and computer science concepts related to it, with a
focus on the computational aspects. Topics include a molecular biology
primer, biological sequence alignments and analysis, gene mutation
patterns, phylogenetic tree and construction algorithms, protein structures
and functions, proteomics, application of basic machine learning
algorithms, and other commonly used bioinformatics tools and resources.
Prerequisites:CPS222orCPS261. Hu
367. Articial Intelligence.
Anintroductiontosomeofthecoreproblemsandkeyideasintheeldof
articialintelligencefromacomputationalperspective.Thecoursewill
focus on exploring various representational and algorithmic approaches to
theproblemofcreatingarticialagentsthatknowthings,canreasonabout
the world, and that make good decisions. Key topics: heuristic search,
adversarial search, reinforcement learning, constraint satisfaction, logical
inference,probabilisticinference.Prerequisites:CPS222andCPS/MAT
237.Corequisite:MAT216. Wilson
370 – 379. Topics in Computer Science.
StudyofspecializedareasofComputerScience.
390. Independent Study.
Independent study directed by Computer Science staff. Permission of
chairperson.
391. Directed Reading.
Reading directed by the Computer Science staff. Permission of
chairperson.
490. Independent Study.
Independent study directed by Computer Science staff. Permission of
chairperson.
491. Directed Reading.
Reading directed by the Computer Science staff. Permission of
chairperson.
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
CPS373.IntroductiontoComputerNetworking.
CPS377.IntroductiontoDatabaseSystems.
CPS379.MobileApplicationDevelopment.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 49
EARTH AND ENVIRONMENT
Christopher J. Williams, Chair
Carol B. de Wet Dr. E. Paul & Frances H. Reiff
Professor of Geosciences
Dorothy J. Merritts Harry W. & Mary B. Huffnagle
Professor of Geosciences
Stanley A. Mertzman Earl D. Stage and Mary E. Stage
Professor of Geosciences
Andrew P. de Wet Professor of Geosciences
James E. Strick Professor of Science, Technology
and Society
Robert C. Walter Professor of Geosciences
Christopher J. Williams Professor of Environmental Science
Zeshan Ismat Associate Professor of Geosciences
Elizabeth M. De Santo Associate Professor of Environmental
(on leave 2020-21) Studies
Eve Z. Bratman Assistant Professor of Environmental
Studies
Eric Hirsch Assistant Professor of Environmental
(on leave 2020-21) Studies
Heather Cann Visiting Assistant Professor of
Environmental Studies
Sarah Dawson Director, The Center for
the Sustainable Environment
Timothy D. Bechtel Director of F&M Science Outreach
and Teaching Professor of
Geosciences
Our home the Earth is a complex, dynamic system. It changes
from day to day and from year to year, from one ice age to
thenextandfromeontoeon,inmanydifferentways.Some
changesarecyclical,othersarequiteunpredictable.Weneedto
understand these processes, especially as they are increasingly
affected by human action. They inuence our habitat, to
which we must continually adapt. They control the treasury of
resources,richbutnite,onwhichwerely.
Study of the Earth draws on all traditional disciplines.
Geoscientists interpret eld observations and lab data using
principles of chemistry, physics and concepts unique to
geology. They link processes that operate within and at the
surface of the Earth. Environmental scientists focus on the
impact of human action, on ways in which Earth systems
respond when they are disrupted. These scientists evaluate and
solve a wide range of technological problems. Environmental
managersandpolicy-makersaddressthesameissuesintheir
cultural, economic and political contexts. As we learn how the
Earth works, we must develop the means and the political will
to manage it appropriately.
At Franklin & Marshall, three majors are available to
students who wish to explore these concerns: Geosciences,
Environmental Sciences and Environmental Studies. Each
major has its own core of introductory courses, but there is
sufcient overlap among them so that students can embark
on this eld without immediately choosing one major or
another. Later, students take more specialized courses in
geosciences,mid-levelcoursesinseveralsciences,orcourses
in environmental policy and its cultural, historical context.
Each major program includes advanced courses, opportunities
to engage in research with members of the faculty and an
integrativecapstonecourse.Manyopportunitiesandsignicant
nancialsupportareavailableforstudentstostudyintheeld,
intheircourses,onextracurriculareldtrips,throughavariety
of research programs and while studying abroad.
The scope of opportunities open to graduates of this program is
very broad. Many own or are employed by businesses engaged
in environmental consulting, management of water resources,
environmentallawandtheenergyindustry (renewables,oil,
gas and coal).Others are teachingin highschools, colleges
and universities, or working in various branches of the federal
government.But,thisisaliberalartsprogram.Ithasservedas
agoodlaunchingpadforsystemsanalystsandnanciers,for
veterinarians, writers and realtors and for at least one composer
of classical music.
A major in Geosciencesconsistsof12courses:ENE110or
114or118,followedbyENE221,226,231,321,324,353,
and480.ENE353canbetakenduringthesummerafterthe
sophomoreorjunioryear.Studentsselectoneadditionalcourse
abovethe100-levelfromtheGeosciencesofferings.Students
arealsorequiredtotakethefollowingcognatecourses:CHM
111, MAT 109, and PHY 111. Students planning to pursue
graduate studies or professional employment in geosciences
should take as many courses as possible from the following:
MAT110,111and229;PHY112;andCHM112.Thewriting
requirementintheGeosciencesmajorismetbythecompletion
ofENE480.
A minor in Geosciences consists of six courses, including one
courseselectedfromENE110or114or118,followedbyENE
221andfourGeosciencescoursesatthe200,300or400level
selected in consultation with the department chair. A minor
should focus upon a particular area of the geosciences such
as surcial processes, paleobiology, geophysics, tectonics,
petrology/geochemistry.Nomorethanthreecoursesfromthe
student’smajorcanalsocounttowardstheGeosciencesminor.
A major in Environmental Scienceconsistsof15courses:
ten core science courses from the Departments of Biology,
ChemistryandENE,including2coursesfromonedepartment,
3 courses from the second department, and 5 courses from
thethirddepartment,plustwoquantitativeand/oreldskills
courses,twoenvironmentandsocietycoursesandoneupper-
level integrative seminar. The writing requirement in the
EnvironmentalScience major ismet bycompletion ofENE
454.
The specic requirements for the Environmental Science
major are: In ENE, the rst two courses are ENE 110 or
ENE114or ENE 118plusENE221orENE226,thethird
courseselectedfromENE257orENE344,additionalcourses
selected from upper level ENE science laboratory courses.
InBiology:thersttwocoursesareBIO110andBIO220,
thethird course selectedfrom BIO323,BIO 309, BIO340
and BIO 342; additional courses selected from upper level
biologycourses.InChemistry,thersttwocoursesareCHM
111 and CHM 112, the third chemistry course selected from
CHM211,221or222;additionalcoursesselectedfromupper
level chemistry courses. No more than one 390/490 course
cancounttowardsthecoresciencerequirement.ENE117and
ENE454.Thesecondcourseintheenvironmentandsociety
categoryselected from ENE216,AMS280 and 401,ENG/
ENE260,BOS/ENE335,ECO/ENE240oranotherapproved
course.Two quantitative oreld skills coursesare required.
Therstquantitative/eldskillcourseselectedfromENE250,
BIO210,orENE353 oranotherapprovedquantitativeor
50 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
eld course. The second quantitative/eld skills course can
be selected fromENE 250,BIO 210,ENE 353, CHM 211,
CHM221,ENE321,PHY111,CPS111oranotherapproved
quantitativeoreldcourse.
There is no minor in Environmental Science.
FacultyafliatedwiththeEnvironmentalSciencecurriculum
include: Professors Hess, Plass, and Morford (Chemistry);
Professors Ardia, Sipe, Fischer, Fields, Olson, and Gotsch
(Biology).
A major in Environmental Studiesconsistsof 15 courses,
11 courses in the core program, a research methods class and
three electives. The required core courses fall within three
categories, Environment, Natural Environment, and Human
Environment. The required Environment core courses are:
ENE 117, 216 and 454. The required Natural Environment
corecoursesare:BIO110andENE114orENE118,plusone
coursefrom the followinggroup: ENE226, 344,350; ENE
221;ENE/BIO257;BIO323,340,342.TherequiredHuman
EnvironmentcorecoursesareECO100orECO103,plusone
course from the following group:ANT 100,GOV100, and
SOC100;three courses selected fromAMS280,ANT234,
ANT272,ENG258,ENG260,ENG376/362,ANT272,BOS
335,ART366,ECO240,ENE312or318,ENE314andENE
320.Theresearch/quantitativemethodscoursemaybeselected
fromBIO210,BOS250,ECO210,ENE250,MAT116or
MAT216,andPSY230.Threeelectivesmaybeselectedfrom
AMS300,420;ANT257;BIO245,360;BOS480;ENE250,
313,315,352,361,405;GOV305;NSP295;andENE490
(independentstudy).Corecoursesinadditiontothosetaken
tomeetcorerequirementsmaybetakenaselectives,butthe
majormustincludeatleastthreecoursesatorabovethe300
level.ThewritingrequirementintheEnvironmentalStudies
majorismetbycompletionofENE454
A minor in Environmental Studies consists of six courses,
including ENE/STS 117; two courses in environmental
policy/ human environment (ENE 216 plus one additional
courseselectedfromECO/ENE240,AMS/ENE280or401,
STS/ENE312,ENE314andtopicscoursesapprovedbythe
Environmental Studies Committee); two laboratory courses
(BIO110orENE114orENE118andoneofthefollowing:
BIO 323, 325, 340; ENE 221; ENE/BIO 257; ENE 226,
250, 350; and approved topics courses); and one additional
environmentalstudieselectiveatthe300or400level,orENE
490. Some of these courses have prerequisites(see relevant
departmentallistings).No more than threecourses from the
student’s major can also count towards the Environmental
Studiesminor.
FacultyafliatedwiththeEnvironmentalStudiescurriculum
include: Professor Mueller (English); Professor Stincheld
(Business, Organizations, and Society ); Professor Kurland
(Business, Organizations, and Society); Professors Merritts,
Strick,DeSanto,Hirsch,andBratman(EarthandEnvironment);
ProfessorSipe(Biology).
Tobeconsideredforhonorsinanyofthedepartment’sthree
majors,studentsmustmeettheCollege’sgeneralrequirements
for honors. These include a signicant body of excellent
coursework in the department’s curriculum; no minimum
gradepointaverageisspecied.
Off Campus Study: Earth and Environment majors have
studied abroad in several programs in recent years, including:
SchoolforFieldStudies(SFS):CostaRica,Australia,Kenya;
UniversityofCopenhagen,Denmark;SchoolforInternational
Training(SIT):Tanzania;SemesterinEnvironmentalScience,
WoodsHole,Mass.;SeaEducationAssociation,SeaSemester,
Woods Hole; Butler University Programs in Edinburgh and
Glasgow,Scotland.SeetheInternationalProgramssectionof
the Catalog for further information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
GEOSCIENCES
110. The Dynamic Earth. (N)
Compositionanddistributionofearthmaterials;examinationofinternal
earth processes and their relationship to mountain-building and plate
tectonics;surcialprocessesandenvironmentalproblems.Fieldtrips.
Staff
114. Earth, Environment and Humanity. (N) (NSP)
Investigation of the Earth with emphasis on opportunities and constraints
onhumanactivitiesarisingfromitsproperties.Structureandprocesses
ofthe Earth; natural hazards; the role of humans in changing theface
oftheEarth;surfaceandgroundwateruseandmanagement;formation
anddegradationofsoils;energyresources;humanwastes.Laboratories
focus on principles involved in local, national and global environmental
problems and their resolution. Field trips. Staff
118. Introduction to Oceanography. (N)
World’soceansandourinteractionswiththem.Originofoceanbasinsand
seawater. Origin of submarine topographic features and sediments. Ocean
oorspreadingandplatetectonics.Origin,distributionandinuenceof
ocean currents. Coastal processes and coastlines. Marine ecosystems.
Biological,energyandmineralresourcesoftheoceans. Staff
221. History of the Earth. (N)
Geologic time, principles of historical geology. Physical evolution of
theEarth.Patternsofchangeincontinentsandoceans;reconstructionof
ancientenvironments.Originandevolutionoflife;itsinuenceonthe
oceans, the atmosphere and the Earth’s crust. Field trips. Prerequisite:
ENE110or114or118.(notofferedinFall2020orSpring2021) Staff
226. Surface of the Earth. (N)
Studyoflandformdevelopment.Rolesofsurcialprocessescontrolled
byclimateandtectonics,rockcharacteristicsandtime.Specialemphasis
on mass wastage, surface and ground water, glaciation, wind and coastal
processes in landscape development. Terrain analysis using topographic
mapsandaerialphotographs;eldtrips.Relationshiptoenvironmental
problems.Prerequisite:ENE110or114or118. Merritts
231. Structural Geology. (N)
Folding,owageandfaultingoftherocksoftheEarth’scrust.Related
causes and mechanics of mountain building. Mapping and interpretation
ofthesefeaturesintheeld.Prerequisite:ENE110or114or118. Ismat
250. Environmental Resources and
Geographic Information Systems. (N)
Introduction to methods of analysis of contemporary environmental
issues that rely on use of Geographic Information Systems (GIS) for
assessment, understanding and solutions. GIS uses a variety of types
of digital data, including remote sensing imagery, to generate computer
maps of topography, land use, vegetation cover, soil type and resources
forareasassmallasBakerCampusandaslargeastheAmazonBasin.
A. de Wet
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 51
257. Conservation Paleobiology. (N)
Datafromfossil,archaeological,andcontemporaryrecordscaninform
our understanding of how species responded to past environmental
changes and their potential responses in the future. Topics include
extinctionrisk,shiftingbaselines,the(in)completenessofgeohistorical
records, environmental proxies, and the Anthropocene. Prerequisite:
ENE 114, ENE 110, or ENE 118, or BIO 110. Same as BIO 257.
(notofferedinFall2020orSpring2021) Staff
321. Mineralogy. (N)
Crystallographyandcrystalchemistry;physicalandchemicalproperties,
stability and occurrence of common minerals, with emphasis on the
common rock-forming silicates. Laboratory studies include crystal
symmetry, mineral examination in hand-specimen; introduction to the
polarizingmicroscope.Prerequisite:CHM111. Mertzman
322. Igneous and Metamorphic Petrology. (N)
Origin,occurrenceandinterpretationofigneousandmetamorphicrocks;
interpretation and application of experimental phase equilibria and
elementary thermodynamics. Laboratory: examination and interpretation
of igneous and metamorphic rocks, textures and mineral assemblages in
hand-specimenandthin-section.Prerequisite:ENE321. Mertzman
324. Sedimentology and Stratigraphy. (N)
Geologic framework, environment of deposition and dynamics of
sediments and sedimentary features; petrology and petrography
of sedimentary rocks; interpretations derived from examination of
sedimentaryfeaturesandrocksequencesintheeld.Prerequisite:ENE
221. C. de Wet
344. Global Change/Natural Resources. (N)
Exploration of variables involved in global change, ranging from natural
drivers of change to humanity’s direct effects on geochemical cycles
and biological communities. A portion of the course deals with climate
change.TheglobalimpactofhumansontheEarth’snaturalresourcesis
surveyedinascienticframework.Possiblewaysinwhichhumansmight
mitigatetheseimpactsareaddressed.Prerequisites:ENE114orENE118
orBIO110orpermissionoftheinstructor.OfferedeverySpring.
Williams
350. Landscape Geochemistry. (N)
Introduction to the theory, practice, and application of geochemistry to
Earth’ssurface:Emphaseswillbeplacedonunderstandingtheinterplay
among Earth systems that inuence climate and weathering, and the
impacts these processes have on soil formation (the Critical Zone).
Studentswilllearnto:(a)conducteldresearch,(b)collect,process,and
analyzesamplesbyavarietyofanalyticalmethods,and(c)interpretdata.
Studentswillthinkcriticallybyconductingmeaningfulresearchthatis
relevanttorealscienticquestions. Walter
353. Summer Field Course.
Lithologic, stratigraphic and structural geologic examination of classical
areas; preparation of reports and geologic maps on topographic and
aerial photographic base maps in areas of sedimentary, metamorphic and
igneousrocks;examinationofminerallocalities.Approvedcoursesare
offered by other institutions and accepted for credit with grade. The grade
earnedinthiscoursewillcountinFranklin&MarshallGPAcalculations,
regardlessofwhetheritisbeingtakenasarequiredcourseforamajoror
minorornot.Maybetakenforoneortwocoursecredits.Prerequisite:
permission of department chair. Staff
384. Changing Views of the Earth, 1650 – 1850. (S)
A Very Wreck of a World: speculative cosmologies, descriptive natural
history and the origins of a science of the Earth. The age of the Earth and
our“PlaceinNature”:afallfromgrace,limitlesshorizonsandtheVictorian
commitment to progress. Nationaland socialorigins ofthe scienceand
scientists.RelationofnewgeologicalconceptstotheIndustrialRevolution
and contemporary cultural themes, including their expression in the arts.
Prerequisite:permissionofinstructor.Same as STS 384. Staff
433. Paleontology. (N)
The nature of fossils. Analysis of growth and variation in fossil
assemblages.Systematicmethods.Reconstructionofthemodesoflifeof
extinctorganisms.Paleoecology,paleobiogeographyandbiostratigraphy.
Fossil record of evolutionary patterns and inferred processes in the history
oflife. Laboratory,eld trips. Prerequisite: ENE 221 orpermission of
instructor. Staff
438. Tectonics.
Global tectonics: seismological, geothermal, geomagnetic and
geochronologicalevidenceofcrustalandmantlehistoryandprocesses;
mantle bulk properties and convection; plate tectonics; sea oor
spreading;applicationofplatetectonicstocontinentalmasses;tectonic
models.Prerequisite:ENE231. Ismat
480. Geosciences Senior Seminar.
The purpose of this capstone course for the geosciences major is for
students to demonstrate a comprehensive knowledge of key geological
concepts and processes, to explore the classic literature in the discipline,
andtosynthesizethisknowledgeusinganEarthsystemsapproach.This
willbedone via presentations,discussion, and eldtrips.Prerequisite:
senior standing in Geosciences. Walter
490. Independent Study.
Independent study directed by the Geosciences staff. Permission of
chairperson.
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES/SCIENCE
114. Earth, Environment and Humanity. (N) (NSP)
Investigation of the Earth with emphasis on opportunities and constraints
onhumanactivitiesarisingfromitsproperties.Structureandprocesses
ofthe Earth; natural hazards; the role of humans in changing theface
oftheEarth;surfaceandgroundwateruseandmanagement;formation
anddegradationofsoils;energyresources;humanwastes.Laboratories
focus on principles involved in local, national and global environmental
problems and their resolution. Field trips. Staff
117. The Environment and Human Values. (S)
Study of historical and modern attitudes toward nature; human use of
nature’sresources; effects of the growth ofscience and technology on
humanusesofandattitudestowardtheenvironment;andtheabilityof
modernhumanstosubstantiallyaltertheenvironment(e.g.,byaltering
globaltemperature).Keyconcepts:humanpopulationgrowth;thenotion
of“limitstogrowth”;andthedifcultyofmanagingtheuseofcommon
pool resources. Same as STS 117. Cann, Hirsch, Strick
216. Environmental Policy. (S)
Surveyshowfederal,stateandlocalregulationsseektoprotecthuman
health and the environment. Introduces frameworks for managing wastes
andprotectingairquality,waterqualityandhabitats.Reviewspolicytools,
includingeconomicincentives,penaltiesandlegalobligations.Reviews
policy evaluation, focusing on federal statutes, the legislative process that
creates them, the role of the judiciary and the success of environmental
law in changing practices. Offered every semester. De Santo
220. Sustainable Design. (A)
Thiscourseisacombinationofexaminingtheprinciplesofsustainable/
green architectural design and executing design solutions for projects,
incorporating the sustainable design principles. The course includes an
introductiontoarchitecturaldrawing/draftingandmodelmakingaswell
as basic principles of architectural design, in order to effectively execute
the design solutions. Same as ART 220. Hickey
226. Surface of the Earth. (N)
Studyoflandformdevelopment.Rolesofsurcialprocessescontrolled
byclimateandtectonics,rockcharacteristicsandtime.Specialemphasis
on mass wastage, surface and ground water, glaciation, wind and coastal
processes in landscape development. Terrain analysis using topographic
mapsandaerialphotographs;eldtrips.Relationshiptoenvironmental
problems.Prerequisite:ENE110or114or118.OfferedSpring2021.
Merritts
240. Environmental and Natural Resource Economics. (S)
A survey of environmental and natural resource issues in economic theory
and policy. History of the environmental movement and environmental
debates; theory of natural resource allocation, natural resource issues;
theory of environmental management—for example, externalities, public
52 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
goods and common property. Topics covered will include pollution,
resourcedepletionandglobalclimatechange.Prerequisites:ECO100and
103,orpermissionoftheinstructor.Same as ECO 240. Fleming
244. Indigenous Environmental Justice. (NW)
Examination of the way indigenous identity, human rights, and development
intersect with the struggle for environmental justice around the world.
Analysisofhoweachterminthiscourse’stitleisopentolegalxing,activist
redenition,and diverse projectsthat renderthe environmentsomething
political. Considers distinct case studies drawn from several continents
to show that some see being indigenous today as politically potent, while
otherstake this category to be excessively vague or,even, invented; by
focusing on ordinary lives and extraordinary struggles, we explore the
widevariety of relationshipsto territory that “indigenous” encapsulates.
Same as STS244.
(notofferedinFall2020orSpring2021)
Hirsch
245. American Nature Essays.
An exploration of the themes, structures, styles and signicance of
American nature essays. The purposes of the course are to become familiar
with nature essays as a distinctive form of interdisciplinary literature, to
see the natural world and our place in it through the voices and visions of
thebestnatureessayists,andtodeveloptheartsofperception,reection
and compelling writing. The course includes weekly eld trips and
workshops in addition to class discussions of essays by more than 20
writers.Prerequisites:BIO110,ENE114orENE117orENE118and
permission of the instructor. Same as BIO 245. Sipe
250. Environmental Resources and
Geographic Information Systems. (N)
Introduction to methods of analysis of contemporary environmental
issues that rely on use of Geographic Information Systems (GIS) for
assessment, understanding and solutions. GIS uses a variety of types
of digital data, including remote sensing imagery, to generate computer
maps of topography, land use, vegetation cover, soil type and resources
forareasassmallasBakerCampusandaslargeastheAmazonBasin.
A. de Wet
257. Conservation Paleobiology. (N)
Datafromfossil,archaeological,andcontemporaryrecordscaninform
our understanding of how species responded to past environmental
changes and their potential responses in the future. Topics include
extinctionrisk,shiftingbaselines,the(in)completenessofgeohistorical
records,environmentalproxies,andtheAnthropocene.Prerequisite:ENE
114,ENE110,ENE118,orBIO110.Same as BIO 257. (notofferedin
Fall2020orSpring2021) Staff
258. Contemporary Science Writing. (H)
In this course, we will examine texts ranging from popular science to
sciencection,byscientistsandnonscientistsalike.Asreaders,wewill
be interested in the ways people write about science, and, as writers,
we will try to put some of these principles into practice. We will be
equallyinterestedintheethical,social,andphilosophicalquestionsthat
contemporary science raises, and in how to probe these questions in
writing. Same as ENG/STS 258. Anderson
260. Nature and Literature. (H)
Readings from a variety of traditions, periods, disciplines and genres
to discover diverse assumptions about nature and humanity’s relation
to it. Readings from both Western and non-Western cultures, though
withemphasisontheBritishandEuro-Americantraditions.Suchbroad
exploration across vast divides of time and culture should not only
teachusaboutvariedunderstandingsofnaturebutalsoencourageself-
consciousness as we form our own conceptions of what nature is and how
we ought best to interact with and in it. Same as ENG 260. Mueller
280. American Landscape. (S)
An interdisciplinary study of the American landscape as it has evolved
over centuries of human habitation. Examines three main themes: the
domesticatedanddesignedlandscapeofthemid-19thcentury;thecrusade
to preserve nature and the establishment of national and state parks in the
late19thandearly20thcenturies;andthesprawling,seeminglyformless
automobile-dominatedlandscapeofthelate20thcentury.Same as AMS
280. Schuyler
312. Environmental History. (S)
Examination of various approaches to environmental and ecological
history. Focuses on ways in which the physical and biological world have
affected human history and on ways in which human social and political
organization,economicactivities,culturalvaluesandscientictheories
have shaped our alteration and conservation of nature. Selected case
studies from environmental and ecological history, with emphasis on the
17ththroughthe20thcenturies.Same as STS 312. Strick
313. Nuclear Power, Weapons and Waste Disposal. (NSP) (S)
Development of nuclear technology, beginning with the atomic bomb
effortsofWWII.Thecoursedealsrstwiththetechnologyitself,aswell
as with the ways in which it was embedded in and drove American and
international politics, including the arms race and the Cold War. Includes
postwar development of civilian nuclear power reactors, creation of the
Atomic Energy Commission and the national debate over nuclear power
and waste disposal methods. Same as STS 313. Strick
314. Global Environmental Politics. (S)
Analysis of environmental problem denition and policy solutions
in different countries, with particular focus on the developing world.
Effects of political drivers of air and water pollution, land cover change,
and biodiversity conservation. Inuence of political structures, power
relations, cultural values, ecological dynamics, and social interactions
onenvironmentalpolitics.Rolesofnationalandmultilateralinstitutions,
NGOs,andcivilsocietyinpolicydebates.Outcomesofmulti-stakeholder
negotiations over environmental governance of global commons,
including North-South disputes. Counts as Human Environment core
courseforEnvironmentalStudies.Prerequisite:ENE216orpermission
of instructor. Same as GOV 374. Bratman, Cann, De Santo
315. Health Risks in the Environment.
Known and emerging environmental hazards represent signicant
public health risks to vulnerable populations. Case studies include lead,
tobacco,asthma,nutrition,andendocrine-disruptingcompoundsaswell
as common airborne and waterborne chemical and biological pollutants.
The course develops an understanding of acute, chronic and cumulative
health risks that result from short-term and long-term environmental
exposures. Important epidemiological, demographic and environmental
justiceparametersareincorporatedintostudents’projectsthatfocuson
at-riskgroups, such aschildren, the elderlyand immuno-compromised
individuals. Same as STS 315. Everett
317. Global Resources. (NW) (S)
This course follows natural resources of food, water, land, air, and
others across borders and around the world in order to understand how
concepts of environmental and economic justice overlap in a diverse
arrayofcommunities.Studentswilllearnwhat,exactly,makesaresource
“global”,andhowtheysimultaneouslytakeonparticularlocalmeanings.
Prerequisites: ENE 117 or ANT 200 or GOV 200 or permission of
instructor. (not offered in Fall 2020 or Spring 2021) Hirsch
318. Environmental History of Latin America. (NW) (S)
This course will examine the intersections of human history and culture
with environmental change in Latin America from the early colonial
periodto the present.Themajor themes includethe consequencesand
signicanceoftheColombianExchange,therolesofreligionandculture
inshapinghumanrelationshipswithnature,thedevelopmentofexport-
ledagriculture,urbanization,andtheemergenceofdiverseenvironmental
movements within Latin America. We will explore the origins of major
environmental problems and the ways people have responded to these
challenges. The course will address how historians have approached the
study of the environment. Same as HIS 318. Shelton
320. International Environmental Law.
This course examines principles and instruments of International
Environmental Law (IEL), beginning with the nature and sources
of IEL and an introduction to the key actors and agencies involved in
global environmental governance. Focusing on the development of
regimes addressing a range of environmental issues, the course also
addresses implementation and state responsibility for environmental
harm and dispute resolution. Topics explored include climate change and
atmosphericpollution; the law of the sea andprotection ofthe marine
environment;internationalregulationoftoxicsubstances;conservationof
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 53
nature,ecosystemsandbiodiversity;andtheintersectionofinternational
trade and environmental protection. Students will examine treaties
and case law rst-hand, and represent vested interests in a simulated
negotiationofamultilateralenvironmentalagreement.Prerequisite:ENE
216orGOV200.Same as GOV 320. (not offered in Fall 2020 or Spring
2021) De Santo
335. Business and the Natural Environment. (S)
Widespread concern for a cleaner environment and sustainable practices
has put new demands on business. Exploration of philosophical,
theoretical,strategicandpolicyissuesfacingorganizationsinrelationto
the natural environment. Same as BOS 335. Kurland
337. Anthropology of Environment. (NW) (S)
The environment is a denitive problem of the twenty-rst century.
Struggles to counteract climate change, international initiatives to
conserve biodiversity, legislation to curb industrial pollution, and
protocol for natural resource appropriation all express a commitment
to care for the environment. This class troubles the waters: What do
wemeanbyenvironment?Whathistoriesofnature,power,andcapital
deneenvironment?Whatarethecontemporaryeconomicandpolitical
implications of this environmental ethos? In this course, students will
grapplewithsuchquestionstoachievecompetencyintheanthropology
ofenvironment.Prerequisite:ANT100.Same as ENE337. Guarasci
340. Plant Ecology. (N)
An exploration of plant ecology, organized by four applied themes:
globalatmosphericchange,airpollutionandaciddeposition,deer-forest
interactions, and invasive species. Classes will involve lectures, primary
literature discussions, eld trip discussions, and seminars by invited
speakers. The laboratory will include local and overnight eld trips.
Prerequisites:BIO110,BIO220,andpermissionoftheinstructor.Same
as BIO 340. Sipe
341. Environmental Chemistry.
Focuses on the chemistry of the atmosphere, hydrosphere and terrestrial
environments. The objectives of this course are: 1) to understand the
chemical basis underlying environmental processes, which includes
understanding chemical composition, thermodynamic and kinetic controls,
photochemical,oxidationand reduction reactions,aquo complexes and
acid-basebehavior;and2)tousescienticliteraturetoinvestigatecurrent
topicspertainingtoenvironmentalchemistry.Prerequisite:CHM112and
oneofthefollowing:CHM221,CHM212,ENE226,BIO220,BIO323.
Same as CHM 341. Morford
342. Forest Ecosystems. (N)
An exploration of basic and applied forest ecology, with particular
emphasis on the organization and dynamics of forest communities,
ecosystems, and landscapes. Topics will include forest environments
(climate, soils), tree physiology and growth, ecosystem productivity,
biogeochemistry, disturbance regimes, biodiversity, and the roles of
forestsinglobalecology.Thelaboratorywillinvolveoneormoreeld
tripsandprojectslastingonetoseveralweeks.Twolecture/discussions
andonelabweekly.Prerequisites:BIO110,BIO220.Same as BIO 342.
Sipe
344. Global Change/Natural Resources. (N)
Exploration of variables involved in global change, ranging from natural
drivers of change to humanity’s direct effects on geochemical cycles
and biological communities. A portion of the course deals with climate
change.TheglobalimpactofhumansontheEarth’snaturalresourcesis
surveyedinascienticframework.Possiblewaysinwhichhumansmight
mitigatetheseimpactsareaddressed.Prerequisites:ENE114orENE118
orBIO110orpermissionoftheinstructor.OfferedeveryFall. Williams
350. Landscape Geochemistry. (N)
Introduction to the theory, practice, and application of geochemistry to
Earth’ssurface:Emphaseswillbeplacedonunderstandingtheinterplay
among Earth systems that inuence climate and weathering, and the
impacts these processes have on soil formation (the Critical Zone).
Studentswilllearnto:(a)conducteldresearch,(b)collect,process,and
analyzesamplesbyavarietyofanalyticalmethods,and(c)interpretdata.
Studentswillthinkcriticallybyconductingmeaningfulresearchthatis
relevanttorealscienticquestions.Prerequisites:CHM111andENE110
orENE114orENE118. Walter
351. China and the Global Environmental Crisis. (NW) (S)
This course links the local to the global, moving from ecological issues
within China to related social issues, to global ecological-economic
conditions.The course examines specic cases of environmental harm
within China; provides a basic environmental-scientic knowledge
ofthese problems; studiesthe relationshipbetween these casesstudies
andpoverty,governmentcorruption,migration,ethnicconict,etc.;and
analyzeshowtheaboveconditionsinChinaareintertwinedwithglobal
capitalism, global poverty, and other conditions on the global level.
Same as HIS/STS 351. Reitan
352. Lead Poisoning and Asthma in Urban Lancaster. (S)
Students learn about the epidemiology of asthma and lead poisoning,
the pathways of exposure, and methods for community outreach and
education.AsitisaCommunity-BasedLearning(CBL)course,students
will work in service to the local community by collaborating with local
school teachers and students in lessons that apply environmental research
relating to lead poisoning and asthma in their homes and neighborhoods.
They also take soil samples from locations in Lancaster and test their lead
levels. Same as PBH/STS 352. Staff
360. Wildlife Conservation.
Study and management of the impact of anthropogenic activity on
wildlife diversity. Topics include current threats to biodiversity, including
habitat fragmentation and destruction, invasive species, pollution, and
over harvesting. Effects of these threats on ecological processes that
drive wildlife dynamics: genetic, population, and community processes
operating in altered populations. Study of direct (management) and
indirect(sustainability)methodsthatarebeingusedtopromotewildlife
conservation. Current legislative policies affecting wildlife will also be
examined. Lectures, assigned readings, and classroom discussions will
range from case studies to consideration of general phenomena with global
applications.MostBiologycoursesrequireone,orsomecombinationof
attendance at a research seminar; a poster session presenting research
ndings;aeldtripandadditionallabtimetoworkonprojects.Tripto
Yellowstoneoverspringbreakduringevenyearsonly;extrafeeapplies.
Prerequisite: BIO 110 or ENE 114 or ENE 118 or ENE/STS 117 and
permission of the instructor. Same as BIO 360. Dawson
361. This is Garbage.
Explores the history and fate of refuse around the world. Examines the
globalenvironmentalandsocialconsequencesofalinearproductioncycle
of consumer goods, from extraction through production, distribution,
consumption,anddisposal.Studentswilldesignalternativemethodsof
use and reuse and will measure local consumption and disposal patterns.
Lectureswillbeaugmentedbydiscussionsandeldtrips. Dawson
362. End of Nature?: Contemporary Anthropocene Literature. (H)
Massextinction,vastgyresofoatinggarbage,meltingpolaricecaps,
ocean dead zones, rising atmospheric carbon levels, super storms:
have we entered the anthropocene—the geologic “age of man”? The
experienceofanEarthnowhereuntouchedbyhumansndsexpressionin
all genres of literature and generates unfamiliar and compelling new ways
ofconceivingourspeciesandourworld.Readingsincludesciencection,
realist ction, poetry, non-ction and theory. It is recommended that
studentscompleteatleastonecollege-level literature orenvironmental
studies course before enrolling. Same as ENG 362. Mueller
405. Marine Protected Areas.
ThisseminarexaminestheroleofMarineProtectedAreas(MPAs),akey
tool for mitigating anthropogenic impacts on the marine environment.
Marine parks pose unique challenges compared with their terrestrial
counterparts, and lag behind in terms of global coverage. We take
54 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
an interdisciplinary approach to understanding the compromises and
balances struck in biodiversity conservation, examining the science of
marine reserves, social and economic factors, legal frameworks, and
politicalimplications of MPAs. Prerequisites: ENE 216 and ENE 314/
GOV374.(not offered in Fall 2020 or Spring 2021) De Santo
454. Environmental Problems. (N)
Readings,lectures,discussionsandstudentpresentationsaddresscritical
issuesunderpinningmodernenvironmentalproblems.Primaryliterature
specic to some of these problems is employed. Working within this
framework, students apply their accumulated knowledge of environmental
studies and science to propose, conduct and write up a semester long
research project exploring a local, regional or global environmental
problem.OfferedeverySpring. Staff
490. Independent Study.
Independent study directed by the Earth and Environment staff.
(Permissionofchairperson).
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
ENE278PoliticalEcologyofFoodandAgriculture.
ECONOMICS
Professor David Brennan, Chair
Antonio G. Callari Sigmund M. and Mary B. Hyman
Professor of Economics
David M. Brennan Professor of Economics
Alan S. Caniglia Professor of Economics
Eiman Zein-Elabdin Professor of Economics
Yeva Nersisyan Associate Professor of Economics
(on leave 2020-21)
Patrick Fleming Assistant Professor of Economics and
Public Policy
Leanne M. Roncolato Assistant Professor of Economics
Alex W. Roomets Assistant Professor of Economics
Mark Silverman Assistant Professor of Economics
(on leave 2020-21)
Han Cheng Assistant Professor of Economics
Danish Khan Instructor of Economics
Dustin Hamalainen Visiting Assistant Professor of Economics
Tony R. Maynard Visiting Assistant Professor
of Economics
Rafed Al-Huq Visiting Instructor of Economics
Economics has variously been said to be concerned with:
theallocationofscarceresourcesamongcompetinguses;
asociety’ssocialrelationsofproduction,distributionand
consumption;
the institutions through which humans have organized
their material provisioning.
Inlinewiththesevarieddenitions,thestudyofeconomics
can be pursued using a mathematical approach, a historical
approach, or an institutional and sociological approach.
Independently of the particular denition to which they
are attracted, well-educated economics students will have
familiarity with, and be able to draw on, all three approaches.
Accordingly, the economics curriculum at Franklin & Marshall
College provides students with opportunities to study the
discipline across the varietyof approachesand/or topursue
depthinanyapproach.Thesequenceofintroductorycourses
exposes students to both orthodox and heterodox themes and
approaches,whilethesequenceofintermediatelevelcourses
emphasizes the core analytical techniques used in different
approaches to theoretical and empirical analysis. Electives
offer students the opportunity to undertake further exploration
of theoretical issues and/or applications of fundamental
economic theories to topics of special interest.
The study of economics encompasses a wide variety of models
and topics that attempt to explain various social phenomena,
including the operation of markets, the distribution of income
and wealth, macroeconomic uctuations, economic growth,
international economic relations, the roles of class, culture,
gender and race, and the ecological impacts of economic activity.
Moreover, a good liberal arts economics education will involve
students in interdisciplinary explorations. Economics majors are
therefore encouraged to enroll in courses in other departments
and interdisciplinary programs such as history, anthropology,
government, women, gender and sexuality studies, earth and
environment, Africana studies, and public health. Economics
majors and minors are also encouraged to pursue opportunities to
study abroad, where they are likely to deepen their understanding
of the cultural context and nature of economic life. Economics
majors have studied abroad in many countries, including:
Argentina,Australia,Austria,Bolivia,Chile,China,CostaRica,
Cuba, Czech Republic, Denmark, Ecuador, France, Germany,
Greece, Iceland, India, Ireland, Israel, Italy, Japan, Morocco,
NewZealand,Russia,SouthAfrica,Spain,Sweden,Switzerland,
United Kingdom, Vietnam. See the International Programs
section of the Catalog for further information. In order to count
toward a major or minor in Economics, courses taken outside
of Franklin& Marshall College must be pre-approved by the
department chair.
A major in Economics consists of a minimum of 11 courses:
ECO100and103;
MAT109or110;
ECO200,201,203;
ECO210orBOS250orMAT216(studentscannotget
collegecreditforbothECO210andBOS250);
and four electives carrying an ECO designation, at least
twoofwhichmustbeatthe300levelorabove.
Students who are majoring in economics are strongly
encouragedtocompletealltherequired200levelcourses
(ECO200,201,203,andECO210orBOS250orMAT
216)bytheendofthejunioryear.ECO100,ECO103,
andMAT109orMAT110areprerequisitesforECO200,
whichisaprerequisiteforbothECO201andECO203.
Normally,atleasteightofthetenECOcoursecredits(including
BOS250orMAT216assubstitutes forECO210)takento
fulllthemajor’srequirementsmustbeearnedatFranklin&
Marshall College.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 55
Thewritingrequirementismetbycompletionofthenormal
coursesrequiredtocompletetheeconomicsmajor.
Studentswhoarecontemplatinggraduateworkineconomics
are strongly advised to undertake adequate preparation in
mathematics—normallyMAT109,110and111(Calculus I,
II,III),MAT216and316(ProbabilityandStatisticsI,II)and
MAT229(LinearAlgebraandDifferentialEquations).
To be considered for honors in economics, graduating seniors
must meet the following conditions:
complete independent research during the senior year that
results in a high caliber thesis deemed to be deserving
of “honors” by an appropriately composed Honors
Committee;
haveaneconomicsGPAofatleast3.5andanoverallGPA
ofatleast3.0atthebeginningofthehonorsprojectandat
thetimeofgraduation;
completeECO200, 201, 203, and210 or MAT216 by
theendofthejunioryear;thedepartmentmaywaivethis
requirementinspecialcases.
A joint major in Economics consists of eight courses: MAT
109; ECO 100, 103, 200, 201, and 203; and two electives
carrying an ECO designation, at least one of which must be at
the300levelorabove.
A minor in Economics consists of six courses: ECO 100 and
103, plus four other courses carrying an ECO designation,
at least, three of which must be at the 200 level or above.
StudentswhoreceivecreditforeitherMAT216orBOS250
may not include ECO 210 as one of the six courses comprising
the minor in Economics. At least four of the credits for the
minor must be earned at Franklin & Marshall College.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
100. Introduction to Economic Principles. (S)
Introduction to micro- and macroeconomics. Neoclassical models
of economic behavior, market structures and aggregate economic
performance.Topicsinclude:supplyanddemandanalysis;consumerand
businessbehavior;marketstructures(competition,monopoly,oligopoly)
andfailures:inationandunemployment;governmentscalandmonetary
policies. Fleming, Hamalainen, Khan, Maynard, Roomets, Roncolato
103. Introduction to Economic Perspectives. (S)
Introduction to economic institutions, history and competing paradigms
and ideologies in economics. Conservative, liberal and radical
perspectives;orthodoxandheterodoxeconomictheories.Topicsinclude:
theroleofcultural,legal,economicandpoliticalinstitutions;class,gender
andrace;inequality,wealthandpoverty;andtheenvironment.
Al-Huq, Brennan, Cheng, Maynard, Zein-Elabdin
135. Socialism. (S)
A course on the history (promises and challenges) of socialism. The
historical and contemporary relation between the idea of socialism and
concerns with equality, quality of life issues, freedoms, and economic
policies. The evolution of ideas of socialism in history. The relation
between planning and markets in the history of capitalism and socialism.
Diversehistoricalexperiencesofsocialismatlocal,regional,andnational
levels. Callari
200. Microeconomics. (S)
The analytical foundations of neoclassical price theory: theory of the
consumer; theory of the rm; market structure and efciency; factor
marketsandincomedistribution;generalequilibrium.Prerequisites:ECO
100and103;MAT109or110or111. Callari, Roncolato, Roomets
201. Macroeconomics. (S)
Aggregateeconomicactivity:anexaminationofthefactorsthatinuence
its level, stability and rate of growth. Consumption, savings, investment,
scalandmonetarypolicyandinternationaltradeandnanceasinuences
on the level of prices, output, employment and income.
Prerequisite:ECO200. Cheng, Hamalainen
203. Value and Distribution. (S)
The analytical foundations of orthodox and heterodox economic theories.
The course explains how conceptions of value are intrinsically linked to
theoriesofincome-distributionandhowtheoriesofvalueanddistribution
areassociatedwith“visions”oftheeconomy.Thecoursedifferentiates
among theories according to the ways they conceive the essential role of
marketsinacapitalisteconomyandtotheweighttheyassignto“market”
andnon-marketprocessesintheanalysisoftheeconomy(structureand
outcomes).Prerequisite:ECO200. Callari, Zein-Elabdin
210. Economic Statistics. (S)
An introduction to statistical concepts and techniques as used in
economics. Topics include descriptive statistics, sampling, probability,
estimation,condenceintervals,hypothesistestsandregressionanalysis.
Prerequisites:ECO100and103.NotforstudentswhohavetakenBOS
250orMAT216. Fleming
230. Marxian Economics. (S)
Marx’sviewsoncapitalismasahistoricalsocialformandanalysisofthe
logic of capitalism and the class relations typical to it. Topics include:
thetheoryofvalue/pricesandtheideologyofbourgeoisindividualism;
capitalist relations of exploitation; forms and structures of alienation;
capitalistaccumulationsandcrises;theintersectionofclassandnon-class
processes,sitesandidentities;socialismandcommunismintheoryand
practice.Prerequisites:ECO100andECO103orinstructorpermission.
Callari
231. Money and Banking. (S)
CommercialandcentralbankingintheUnitedStates,including:Federal
Reserveresponsibilityforinuencingeconomicactivity;theroleofmoney
indetermining the level of national income and prices;and the nature
oftheinternationalmonetarysystem.Prerequisites:ECO100and103.
Hamalainen
238. The Economy of Cities. (S)
An overview of the economic forces that have shaped the formation and
transformation of cities in history, with particular focus on urban patterns
sincethe18thcentury.Topicscoveredincludetheeffectsoftechnological
change(inproduction,transportationandmarketing),urbansprawl,the
roleof“place”inthepowerdynamicsandconictsofcapitalistsocieties
andthehistoryofurban-economic-developmentpublicpolicyinitiatives
intheU.S.Requiredworkincludesatermpaper.Prerequisites:ECO100
andECO103. Callari
240. Environmental and Natural Resource Economics. (S)
A survey of environmental and natural resource issues in economic theory
and policy. History of the environmental movement and environmental
debates; theory of natural resource allocation, natural resource issues;
theory of environmental management—for example, externalities, public
goods and common property. Topics covered will include pollution,
resource depletion, global climate change, and issues affecting the local
environment. Prerequisites: ECO 100 and 103, or permission of the
instructor.SameasENE240. Fleming
244. Gender in the Economy. (S)
An analysis of the role gender has historically played and continues to
play in the economy, both within and outside of the labor market. Topics
include the historical conditions under which dominant gender ideals
emerged, the value of unpaid work and national accounting, occupational
segregation, labor market discrimination and feminist economic theory.
56 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
Gender is considered as it interacts with other identities such as race and
sexual orientation. Economic and interdisciplinary approaches are used.
Prerequisite:ECO100and103,orpermissionoftheinstructor. Same as
WGS 244. Roncolato
248. History of Economic Thought. (S)
Asurveyofwaysofthinkingabout“economic”issuesthroughhistory,
with each one placed in the context of the intellectual and social climate
ofitstimes.Specialattentionwillbeplacedon(1)theoriesof“value,”
from classical political economy to Marx to neoclassical thought; (2)
the relationship of economic ideas to historical transitions in economic
systems; (3) conceptions of the relationship between “economics” and
“science.” Key gures studied include: François Quesnay, Thomas
Munn, Adam Smith, Thomas Malthus, David Ricardo, Karl Marx,
WilliamStanleyJevons,LéonWalras,JohnBatesClark,AlfredMarshall,
Thorstein Veblen, John M. Keynes, Milton Friedman, Joan Robinson,
NancyFolbre,TithiBhattacharya.Prerequisites:ECO100andECO103.
Callari, Cheng
255. Political Economy of Health Care. (S)
A seminar format approach to issues in health and health care reform from
an economics-based perspective but also including multi-disciplinary
considerations.Topicsincludethefollowing:theuniquequalitiesofthe
marketfor health care; controlling costs/improving outcomes inhealth
caredelivery;theeconomicstatusofhealthcareproviders;economicand
ethicalissuesofpharmaceuticaldevelopmentanddistribution;health—
andhealthcare—disparitiesbyincome,race,ethnicity,andgender;the
loomingscal crisis of Medicare andMedicaid; the political economy
of systemic health care reform; comparative health care systems.
Prerequisites:ECO100orECO103. Staff
264. Introduction to International Economics. (S)
Introduction of key concepts to describe and analyze international
economic linkages. Analysis of international transactions in various
markets including goods and services, capital, labor and foreign
exchange.Coretopicsinclude:reasonsforandbenetsfrominternational
trade; exchange rate developments; benets and risks of international
capital ows; globalization; liberalization; regional integration; and
development. Empirical approach with introduction of core theoretical
conceptsandpolicyperspectives.Prerequisites:ECO100andECO103.
Maynard, Roncolato
281. Political Economy of Africa. (S) (NW)
A broad introduction to economic and social conditions in Africa
and the factors that inuence economic change and well-being in the
region. Historical background on pre-colonial systems of production
and exchange and economic restructuring introduced by European
colonial administrations. Examination of major current economic and
political issues, including agricultural production, technological change,
dependence on natural resource exports, and the role of the state.
Reectiononthequestionofeconomicdevelopment.Prerequisites:ECO
100and103,orpermissionofinstructor.Same as AFS 281. Zein-Elabdin
282. Women, Culture and Development. (NW) (S)
Roleofgenderindifferentculturesacrossthenon-industrializedworld
and the impact of economic development on the positions of women and
genderrelationsinthesesocieties.Women’scontributiontoeconomicand
social change and the extent to which conventional methods of analysis
in economics can be applied to their situations. Examination of the
constructionofthe‘ThirdWorldwoman’inthedevelopmentdiscourse.
Prerequisites:ECO100and103,orpermissionoftheinstructor.
Same as WGS 282. Zein-Elabdin
291. Directed Readings.
Tutorial for students who have not yet completed ECO 200, 201, 203
and210.Studentswhohaveaspecialinterestmayarrangeatutorialwith
afacultymember.Enrollmentisconditionaloninstructor’spermission.
303. Marxian Theories of Crisis. (S)
This seminar will entail a detailed reading and discussion of the primary
literature on Marxian perspectives on capitalist crises with particular
attentionto the GreatRecession. Specically, theperspectives covered
inthiscourseincludetheprotsqueeze,risingorganiccompositionof
capital, underconsumption, and stagnation explanations. Also included in
thiscourse areMarxian critiques of neoliberalism and nancialization.
The course will look both at theories and data to support or refute various
perspectives.Prerequisite:ECO203. Brennan
310. Econometrics. (S)
An introduction to statistical analysis of economic data, with a balance
of theory, applications and original research. The Classical Linear
RegressionModeliscoveredindetail,alongwithtypicaldeparturesfrom
itsassumptionsincludingheteroscedasticity,serialcorrelationandnon-
stationarity. Further subjects can include instrumental variables, limited
dependentvariablesandadvancedtime-seriestopics,dependingontime
andstudentinterest.Prerequisites:ECO100,103andECO210orBOS
250orMAT216. Cheng, Hamalainen, Roomets
315. Macroeconomic Stability. (S)
John Maynard Keynes and Hyman Minsky on nancial crises and
economic recessions. Keynes’s critique of the neoclassical approach
andhisrevolutionaryinvestmenttheoryofthebusinesscycle.Minsky’s
nancialtheoryofinvestmentasanevolutionaryunderstandingofmodern
nancialinstitutionsandtheirroleinpreservingorunderminingeconomic
stability. Contemporary research to assess the relative effectiveness of
monetaryandscalpoliciesinstabilizinganunstableeconomy,aswellas
their impact on employment, prices, and income distribution.
Prerequisite:ECO203. Staff
320. International Trade. (S)
Intermediate and advanced topics in international trade. Introduces
theoretical structures and evaluates associated empirical literature. Core
topics include examination of the determinants of international trade
patterns, the gains from trade, trade policy, the relationship between
trade and growth and the institutional evolution of the international
trading system. Emphasis on different theoretical approaches, including
models based on assumptions of perfect competition and of imperfect
competition.Prerequisite:ECO200. Maynard, Roncolato
325. International Finance. (S)
Intermediate and advanced topics in international nance. Introduces
theoretical structures and evaluates associated empirical literature. Core
topics include determination of exchange rates, the functioning of the
macroeconomy under different exchange rate regimes, foreign exchange
intervention, currency crises, debt crises, coordinated macroeconomic
policy, the evolution and future of the international monetary system as a
whole.Emphasisonopen-economymacroeconomics.
Prerequisite:ECO201. Cheng, Maynard
335. Economic Development. (S) (NW)
Economic theories of growth and development. Historical and political
context of the development discourse and the project of international
development. Institutional features and performance of low and middle
income economies. Main topics covered include: the role of agriculture,
industrialization strategies, income inequality, migration and rapid
urbanization,internationaltradeandnancialows.
Prerequisite:ECO201. Khan, Zein-Elabdin
350. Game Theory. (S)
This course examines the economics of strategy using the tools of
modern game theory. The aim of the course is to apply strategic thinking
to situations that arise in our lives and make better decisions about how
besttocooperateand/orcompetewithothers.Inthisregardgametheory
provides important insights in understanding strategic interactions in our
lives. Examples of such interactions can range from the pricing decisions,
R&Dinvestments,andmarketingplansofbusinessrivals,tothetactics
used in salary negotiations, to the formation of regional trade alliances,
to legislative voting behavior. We will develop a general framework for
analyzing how to make optimal strategic decisions, and for predicting
what will happen in any given strategic economic environment. As we
develop the mathematical framework in class, we will apply it to various
economic decision problems, as well as to examples in other areas. We
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 57
willrstanalyzethesimplestofstrategicsituations,thoseinwhichactors
make their decisions simultaneously and have complete information
about each other’s payoffs. We will then analyze situations in which
actors make their decisions sequentially and must think ahead about
howotherswillrespondtotheirdecisions.Nextwewillexaminemore
complex situations in which actors possess incomplete information about
others, payoffs. For each type of situation, our goal will be to predict
how rational actors should behave. We will discuss the strengths and
limitations of these methods as well. We will also evaluate the relative
success of the predictions from theory in predicting how people actually
behaveinstrategicsettings.Prerequisite:ECO200. Roomets
354. Behavioral Economics. (S)
Theobjectiveofthecourseistoexposestudentstothepositive(descriptive)
side of microeconomic theory, and behavioral economics in particular.
Muchmicroeconomic theoryis fundamentally normative (prescriptive)
inthatitanswersthequestion:WhatSHOULDadecisionmakerdoin
a particular situation? Positive economics generally seeks instead to
answer the question: What WILL a decision maker do in a particular
situation?Thecourseteachesstudentshowthesetwoapproachesrelate
tooneanotherusingexamplesfrommicroeconomictheory.Prerequisite:
ECO200. Roomets
357. Experimental Economics (S)
StudentsinExperimentalEconomicswilllearnhowtoapplythescientic
methodtoeconomictheories.Suchapplicationhasledtoadvancements
ineconomists’understandingofreal-worldeconomicbehavior.Theclass
will mainly focus on experimental design and methodology but will also
touch on topics such as market theory, game theory, and behavioral theory.
Class time will be split between lecture and lab sessions where students
will participate in economic experiments. Prerequisites: ECO 200 and
ECO 210. Roomets
360. Law and Economics. (S)
A study of the relationship between economic analysis and legal rules and
institutions.Topics include:the neoclassical concept of “efciency” as
appliedtolegalrules;therelationshipbetweenefciency,preferences,and
distribution; the Coase theorem; cost-benet analysis in environmental
law; and positive and negative conceptions of “liberty” as manifest in
varying elds of law, including US Constitutional jurisprudence and
government“regulation”ofthemarket.Throughoutthecourse,wewill
be asking what sort of norms and values provide the ground for differing
theoriesof“lawandeconomics.”Prerequisites:ECO200andECO203.
Staff
381. Postcolonial Perspectives on Development. (S)
A seminar on the question of economic development from the
perspectivesofformerlycolonizedsocieties,whicharetodaydescribed
as‘lessdeveloped’or‘thirdworld’countries.Theideaofdevelopmentin
Europeanthought,postcolonialcritiquesofdevelopment,andthecontours
of postcoloniality and postcolonial thought, including cultural hegemony,
orientalism, hybridity. Readings are multidisciplinary. Permission of
instructorrequired. Zein-Elabdin
391. Directed Reading. (S)
TutorialforstudentswhohavecompletedECO200,201and203.Students
who have a special interest may arrange a tutorial with a faculty member.
Enrollmentisconditionaloninstructor’spermission.
490. Independent Study.
IndependentresearchdirectedbytheEconomicsstaff.Permissionofthe
instructor.
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED IN
2020–2021
PoliticalEconomyofUrbanDevelopment.
PoliticalEconomyofInequality.
ENGLISH
Professor Emily Huber, Chair
Nicholas Montemarano
Alumni Professor of Creative Writing
and Belles Lettres, Professor of English
Tamara A. Goeglein Professor of English
Padmini Mongia Professor of English
Judith C. Mueller Professor of English
(Fall 2020 only)
Genevieve Abravanel Associate Professor of English
Patrick S. Bernard Associate Professor of English
Emily Huber Associate Professor of English
Peter Jaros Associate Professor of English
Erik Anderson Assistant Professor of English
Meg Day Assistant Professor of English
Shari Goldberg Assistant Professor of English
Daniel Frick Director of the Writing Center
Senior Teaching Professor of
American Studies,
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor of
English
Kabi Hartman Director of the Program in Support of
Academic Excellence and Senior
Teaching Professor of English
Kerry Sherin Wright Director of Writers House and Teaching
Professor of English
Justin B. Hopkins Assistant Director of the Writing Center
and Teaching Professor
The English major at Franklin & Marshall offers students a
choicebetweentwocomplementarytracks,oneemphasizing
literarystudy,theothercreativewriting.Werequiremajorsin
eithertracktohavesomeexperienceinbothareas.Studying
literature and practicing creative writing develop in us obvious
skills—skills of reading, writing, analysis, creativity and
critical thinking—but they also enable us to engage with the
rich diversity of human experience.
Since we cannot separate language or literature from their
cultural and intellectual contexts, the literature component of
the English major at Franklin & Marshall offers a substantial
historical base, with core courses on topics in the traditional
periods of British and American literature. Additionally,
students take thematic courses in subjects like “Caribbean
Literature,” “Nature and Literature,” “Graphic Novel,”
“African Literature,” and “Baseball in American Literature
and Culture,” as well as upper-level seminars in authors or
topics that build on the historical core.
The track in creative writing joins the passion for language
and imaginative writing with the study of literature. It is built
upon the premise that reading widely and deeply in literature,
including contemporary literature, is essential to becoming a
skilled creative writer: in other words, that the best writers are
alsoavid,engagedreaders.Studentswhochooseaconcentration
increativewritingpracticethecraftofwritingpoetry,ction
andnonction inworkshopsettingswherewriting isvalued
as a serious art form. The major culminates in an advanced
creative writing workshop in which students complete creative
theses in the genre of their choice. The creative writing major
is a gateway to a lifelong love and appreciation of words.
Literature majors also take at least one course in creative
writing. All students, through their own attempts to write
creatively, can develop an appreciation for how the great
works they study in their literature courses might have been
58 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
created. English majors in both tracks come to appreciate the
rigor that both disciplines—literary criticism and creative
writing—entail.
English majors have rich research opportunities beyond
the requirements of the major through independent study
and Hackman summer research scholarships, which engage
students with the scholarly activities of their professors.
They also have opportunities for involvement in a range of
extra-curricularactivities:attendingreadingsbyandmeeting
numerous visiting writers, participating in events at the Writers
House, helping to plan the Emerging Writers Festival, or
writingfororstafngoneoftheCollege’sliterarypublications.
English majors are highly valued for their abilities to think and
write. The study of English is not just good preparation for a
career,however.Itfostersanengagementwiththebigquestions
of living—questions about language, meaning and value. It
fostersself-reectionandgreaterawarenessofthenaturaland
social worlds in which we live. Moreover, studying English
literature gives us a purchase on how narratives and metaphors
work so that we can interpret and deploy them wisely and even
re-makethemforourowntime,withitsenormouschallenges
and demands.
A major in English with a concentration in Literature
consists of the following eleven courses, at least two of which
mustbeliteraturecoursesatthe300-level:ENG226;twoPre-
1800literaturecourses(ENG201,202, 203, 206, 212, 256,
and200-and300-levelcoursesdesignatedasPre-1800);two
Post-1800literature courses (ENG204, 207, 208,210, 257,
and 200- and 300-level courses designated as Post-1800);
onecoursedesignatedeitherPre-orPost-1800;onecreative
writingcourse(ENG225,381,382,383,384);twoelectives;
andtwo400-levelseminars.
A major in English with a concentration in Creative
Writing consistsofthefollowingelevencourses:ENG226;
threecreativewritingcourses(ENG225,381,382,383,384);
one Pre-1800 literature course(English 201,202, 203,206,
212,256,and200-and300-levelcoursesdesignatedasPre-
1800);onePost-1800literaturecourse(ENG204,207,208,
210,257,and200-and300-levelcoursesdesignatedasPost-
1800); one course designated either Pre- or Post-1800; one
designatedContemporaryliteraturecourse;oneelective;one
400-levelliteratureseminar;ENG480.
The English minor consists of any six English courses, at least
three of which must be literature courses, and at least three of
whichmustbeatthe200-levelorabove.
The writing requirement in the English major is met by
completion of the normal courses required to complete the
major.
Studentsareurgedtoconsultwithdepartmentaladvisersabout
appropriatecourseswithinthedepartmentandinrelatedelds.
MajorsintheDepartmentofEnglishhavestudiedabroadin
the following programs in recent years: Advanced Studies
in England, Bath; various programs in London, Scotland
andAustralia.See theInternational Programs sectionof the
Catalog for further information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
REQUIRED MAJOR COURSES
226. Engaging Literary Texts: Introduction to Literary Study. (H)
What are some of the ways that works of literature engage us, and in turn
how can we learn to engage in various ways with literary texts: their words
onthepage,theirimaginedcommunities,theirinventedcharacters?How
can learning about and practicing different interpretive approaches incite
our readerly pleasures as well as our understanding and excitement about
aworkofliterature’scomplexityoflanguageandform,itsaesthetics,and
its power both to represent and transform lives and times and places.
Goldberg, Huber, Mongia
Pre-1800 Literature. (H)
These regularly offered courses examine selected issues and ideas in the
traditionsofBritishandAmericanliteratureinthehistoricalperiodsbefore
1800.ENG201coversBritishLiteraturefromtheMedievalPeriod;ENG
202examinesBritishLiteraturefromtheRenaissance;ENG203treats
BritishLiteraturefromtheRestorationandthe18thcentury;ENG206
treatsAmericanLiteraturefromitsbeginningsthroughthe1830s;ENG
212coversShakespeare;ENG256examinesAfrican-AmericanLiterature
fromthecolonialperiodthroughthe19thcentury.Thedepartmentalso
offers300-levelcoursesdesignated“Pre-1800.”
201. Medieval British Literature. (H)
This course surveys selected major works and other representative
examples of Old and Middle English literature, and some Latin and
French texts written in England, from approximately the eighth through
thefteenthcenturies.Thecourseexploresthedevelopmentofmedieval
attitudes and themes in a variety of forms and genres, including poetry,
prose,anddrama.ReadingsmayincludeBeowulfandotherAnglo-Saxon
poetryintranslation;St.Bede’sEcclesiastical History;Arthurianmaterial
such as Geoffrey of Monmouth’s History of the Kings of Britain and
ThomasMalory’sMorte D’Arthur;PiersPlowman; Sir Gawain and the
Green KnightaswellasotherMiddleEnglishromances;andaselection
ofplaysfromtheN-TowncycleforCorpusChristi.Studentswillgain
extensive experience and practice reading and analyzing the English
language at various stages of its historical development, including Old
andMiddleEnglish.(Pre-1800) Huber
202. The Renaissance Humanist:
Early Modern British Literature. (H)
TheRenaissancehumanisthasbecomesymbolicofthemanymonumental
achievements of the early modern European period: the discovery of
theNewWorld, the rediscoveryof classicaltexts, the invention of the
printing press, the reformation of the Western Church, and the formulation
of a recognizable English language. We will take as our subject the
Renaissancehumanistandtrytogureoutjustwhothischaracterwas
…andhows/hewasguredintheliteraryanddramatictextsofWilliam
Shakespeare,EdmundSpenser,andJohnDonneaswellasThomasMore,
JohnMilton,andQueenElizabethIherself.(Pre-1800) Goeglein
203. Eighteenth Century British Literature. (H)
Aperiodofenormoussocial,intellectualandpoliticalrevolution,theso-
calledlongeighteenthcenturyinBritain(1660-1800)callsintoquestion
age-oldassumptionsaboutthenatureofhumanity.Fromthesexcomedies
oftheRestorationtothesatiresofJonathanSwift,thetreatisesofMary
Astell,thenovelsofDanielDefoeandFrancesBurney,theneoclassical
poetryofAlexanderPopeandthelyricpoetryofThomasGray,literature
of the eighteenth century engages in debates about gender, slavery, social
class,humannatureandourplaceinthecosmos.Social,intellectualand
literary developments of the age still shape our modern world and our
understandingofwhatitmeanstobeahumanbeing.(Pre-1800)Mueller
206. American Literature I:
Insiders and Outsiders in Early American Literature. (H)
ThiscoursedrawsonthediversebodyofwritingthatstretchesfromEuro-
AmericancontacttotheearlyyearsoftheUnitedStates.Thetextswe’ll
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 59
read are loosely gathered around the problem of belonging: distinguishing
insiders and outsiders, considering what is at stake in making this
distinction, and exploring what happens when the distinction breaks
down.(Pre-1800) Jaros
212. Sex, Lies and Shakespeare. (H)
Disguise&lies&sex,swearing&pairing,sins&twins,fear&abear.
ShakespearebroughtallthistotheLondonstage,andthiscoursebringsitto
U. The basic course goals: to understand and appreciate the achievements
of Shakespeare’s written poetry and drama and to comprehend the
interpretiveroleyouplay,andtheinterpretiverolemixed-mediaplay,in
thethematicsofsexandlying.(Pre-1800) Same as WGS212. Goeglein
256. African American Literature I:
Declarations of Independence and the Narratives of Slavery (H)
This course covers African American narratives of slavery from the
colonial period through the early 19th Century. The Declaration of
Independence, the founding narrative of American selfhood and agency,
providesthe discursivebackground of the course.The Declarationdid
notmentionSlavery,therebyerasingSlaves’experiencesintheAmerican
narrative about peoplehood. We will engage the logic, rhetoric and
contradictionsofthedocumentbypluralizing “declaration” to broaden
andthen examinehow Slaves’ oral narratives (the Spirituals, etc.) and
texts(byPhyllisWheatley, Oladuah Equaino,etc.)weregurative and
literal declarations of independence that simultaneously question the
Declaration›sprinciplesandideologyandafrmitstranscendentmeanings
inthewriters’discoursesonSlavery,Blackhumanityandselfhood,race,
theAmericanDream,etc.(Pre-1800).Same as AFS/AMS/WGS 256.
Bernard
352. Madonnas, Mothers, & Virgins: Medieval Religious Women. (H)
This course will examine a range of texts written about, for, and—
especially—by women, and will attempt to unravel how gender and
religion reect and shape one another from the twelfth through the
fteenthcenturies.Wewilllookatearlysaints’livesandspiritualguides
written for female audiences, letters written by women theologians,
hagiographic romances, miracle plays, and narratives of female spiritual
revelation.Meetspre-1800requirementintheEnglishmajor.(Pre-1800).
(Pre-1800).Same as LIT/WGS 352. Huber
363. Reading Characters in the Atlantic World. (H)
Texts from the eighteenth-century Atlantic world raise a number of
related questions: What constitutes individual character: reputation?
personalparticularity?the body orface? Can one“read” a personlike
abook? How can printed texts both depict character and contribute to
its formation?And why did readers and writers in earlyAmerica and
thebroaderAtlanticworld nd these questions so important?Through
genresincludingdrama,didacticsentimentalction,gothicromance,and
memoir,we’llexpandandunsettlethewayweunderstandboth“reading”
and“character.” Meets Pre-1800 requirement for Creative Writingand
Literaturemajorsandthe300-levelliteraturerequirementformajorsin
the literature track. Same as LIT 363. Jaros
Post-1800 Literature. (H)
These regularly offered courses examine selected issues and ideas in the
traditionsofBritishandAmericanliteratureinthehistoricalperiodsafter
1800.ENG204coversBritishliteratureinthe19thcentury;ENG207
coversAmericanLiteraturefromthefoundingoftheRepublictotheCivil
War;ENG208extendsfromtheCivilWarthroughWorldWarII.ENG
210treats20th-centuryliteraturewritteninEnglish;ENG257examines
African-American Literature of the 20th century.The department also
offers300-levelcoursesdesignated“Post-1800.”
204. Nineteenth Century British Literature. (H)
The nineteenth century was rocked by social, scientic, technological
and political transformations, yielding responses from high exuberance
to deep anxiety about the new and the old. At the heart of the cacophony
ofvoiceslayasetofessentialquestions:Whatforcesofthepastshape
thepresentoftheindividual,thecommunity,thenation?Whatbeliefsand
practicesmustbechanged,togivewaytothenew,themodern?Whatare
thecostsandbenetofprogress?Thiscoursetakesitskeynotesfrompoet
Wordsworth,naturalhistorianDarwinandnovelistssuchasMaryAnne
Evans[pseud.GeorgeEliot],CharlesDickens,andThomasHardy.Other
textsmayincludeVictorianchildren’sliterature,essaysonTheWoman
Question by J.S. Mill and Florence Nightingale, Tennyson’s poetic
reinventionsofmyth,andConrad’smodernistnovel,Heart of Darkness.
(Post-1800) Mongia
207. American Literature II: American Nobodies. (H)
Ralph Waldo Emerson, Henry David Thoreau, and Frederick Douglass
aren’t usually considered “nobodies.” Yet along with other American
writers of the early nineteenth century, they experimented with, as Emily
Dickinsonputsit,beingnobody.Beingnobodycouldmeanslippingout
ofone’slifetowatchitfromtheoutside,orndingoneselfmysteriously
doubled, or conceiving of the self as a deeply passive structure, created
by external events. We will study how a variety of literary texts propose
unusual models for selves in general and American selves in particular.
MeetsPost-1800requirementintheEnglishmajor.(Post-1800) Goldberg
208. American Literature III: Individuals vs. Systems. (H)
Whatisthepowerofoneindividualtoresistoppression?Canaperson’s
loveconquerall?Orareweatthemercyofforceslikebiology,economics,
andtechnology?ForAmericanwritersattheturnofthetwentiethcentury,
these questions were paramount. Fascinated by new theories of nature
andsociety,MarkTwain,FrankNorris,EdithWharton,CharlottePerkins
Gilman and others experimented with narratives in which characters were
pitted against powerful systems. We will study these narratives as well
asthephilosophicalandculturalcontextsinwhichtheyemerged.(Post-
1800) Goldberg
210. Modernism and Modernity. (H)
In this course, we’ll explore how modernist writers—such as James
Joyce,VirginiaWoolf,EzraPound,W.B.Yeats,AndréBreton,andT.S.
Eliot—rebelled against the literary conventions of their day. In stunning,
iconoclastic verse and prose, these writers turned to surrealist mind games,
stream of consciousness narration, Freudian psychology, experimental
cinema,andjazz-inectedmetapoemstoquestionthemeaningofliterature
itself.Someissueswemayconsider:literaryconstructionsofmindand
self,earlytwentieth-centurygenderroles,WWI,Irishindependence,mass
entertainment,Futurism,Imagism,andbodies/machines.(Post-1800)
Abravanel
257. African American Literature II:
Meaning of the Veil and African American Identity. (H)
In The Souls of Black Folk (1903), the African American writer W.
E. B. Du Bois introduces two concepts—the “veil” and “double-
consciousness”—to explain the black experience in America. This
course, which coversAfricanAmerican literature from Reconstruction
totheHarlemRenaissance,theBlackAesthetic/BlackPowermovement
andbeyond, willexamine the recurrence of the veil metaphor(and its
synonyms)generallyandengageDuBois’sformulationoftheconcept
specicallyintheculturalandhistoricalcontextsthatframethisperiod’s
literature.Wewillexplorehowwriters(PaulLaurenceDunbar,Langston
Hughes,ZoraNealeHurston,RalphEllison,ToniMorrison,etc.)engage
topics(race,gender,music,identity,etc.)thatreinforce,expandand/or
complicateDuBois’smetaphor.(Post-1800.)
Same as AFS/AMS/WGS 257. Bernard
ELECTIVES
161. Science Fiction. (H)
Comprisingabroadsurveyoftwentieth-andearlytwenty-rst-century
sciencection,ourreadingswillinclude4novelsandnumerousworksof
shortction.Althoughsciencectionhasitsrootsmuchearlierinliterary
history, we’ll begin in the so-called “Golden Age” of science ction
(beginninginthe‘30’s),thenmovethroughthe“NewWave”thatbegins
inthe‘60’s,Cyberpunkandmore. Mueller
164. Fictions of Adolescence. (H)
Thiscourse explores the idea of adolescence through narrative ction.
How does narrative dene and construct the adolescent experience
throughtime?Attentionwillbepaidtoissuesofgenderaswell.Texts
include: Mark Twain’s The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn; Louisa
MayAlcott’sLittle Women;SylviaPlath’sThe Bell Jar;JohnKnowles’
A Separate Peace; Suzanne Collins’ The Hunger Games and Peter
Cameron’sSomeday This Pain Will Be Useful to You. Hartman
60 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
165. Violence, Truth, and Story. (H)
This course examines the literature of human rights and trauma: stories
respondingtotheU.S.CivilWar,theHaitianrevolution,andtheRwandan
genocide,aswellasmurder,suicide,andPTSD.Despitetheircontent,
the texts we study aren’t dominated by horric images. Instead, they
approach their subjects through unconventional narrative forms. We’ll
work to understand how and why they do so—to come to terms with the
complexities of stories about violent experiences. Goldberg
169. Caribbean Literature. (H) (NW)
What is Caribbean literature? Some writers and scholars question the
identity of a region of so many diverse languages, races, ethnicities,
religions, and nations. At the same time, others argue for the coherence of
aregionmarkedbyahistoryofEuropeancolonizationandslavery.This
coursewillfocusonanglophone(English-language)Caribbeanliterature
of the twentieth century, a rich and varied body of work that has recently
producedtwoNobelPrizewinners,DerekWalcottandV.S.Naipaul.In
this course, we will explore how this literature grapples with issues of
race, gender, nationalism, independence, decolonization, the ethics of
violence, the importance of vernacular expression, and the formation of a
literary tradition. Abravanel
182. Tolkien’s Mythology. (H)
J.R.R.Tolkien’sThe Lord of the Rings is often described as one of the
mostimportantandinuentialnovelsofthetwentiethcentury,yetitis
commonly banished from the literary canon.Why is this?This course
examines Tolkien’s role as an author of popular ction as well as of
“great”literature,andwilladdressthefollowingquestions:whatisthe
relationshipbetweenTolkien’sscholarship and hisction, betweenthe
medievaltextthatinformedhisintellectuallifeandhisnovels?Towhat
extentdoTolkien’sexperiencesduringtheGreatWaraffectthemythology
ofMiddleEarth?IsThe Lord of the Rings good literature, and what kinds
ofcriteriadoreadersandcriticsuseinansweringthisquestion?Readings
include The Lord of the Rings, Beowulf, Sir Gawain and the Green Knight,
and selections from the Silmarillion. Same as LIT 182. Huber
229. Writing and Community. (H)
This Community-Based Learning course will give students the
opportunitytobothexperienceandreectupontheroleofthecreative
writer-as-educator-and-or-arts-activist. In class we will engage in
exercises designed to increase our understanding of writing as both craft
andpractice.Studentswillproducesignicantwrittenworkforthecourse,
includingpoems,ction,andessays,journalentries,lessonplans,anda
nalessayandportfolio.Theywillalsoworkinteamstoleadcreative
writing workshops in the Lancaster community. Sherin Wright
231. Women Writers I. (H)
AstudyoftheexperiencesofwomenaspresentedinselectedBritishand
AmericanliteraturefromtheMiddleAgesthroughthe19thcentury,as
presented from a variety of cultural perspectives. We will consider various
readings of the texts, including those that emphasize feminist theory
and historical context. Among others, we will be reading Jane Austen,
Aphra Behn, Anne Bradstreet, the Brontës, George Eliot and Mary
Wollstonecraft. Same as WGS 231. Hartman
233. Women Writers II. (H)
Astudyof the changing world ofAmerican andBritish womenin the
20th century as portrayed by women writers. The critical emphasis will
be on feminist theory and the political, social and cultural background of
the times. Among others, we will read works by Margaret Atwood, Toni
Morrison,SylviaPlath,AdrienneRich,AnneSexton,EdithWhartonand
Virginia Woolf. Same as WGS 233. Hartman
250. Contemporary American Short Story. (H)
AnexaminationofthecurrentstateofAmericanshortction.Wewillread,
discuss, and write about arguably important short stories, most published
withinthepast25years,inanattempttoexploresomeofthepredominant
concernsandformalinnovationsoftoday’sshortstorywriters.Wewill
not consider these writers in a vacuum but rather in the context of those
writerswhohaveprecededthem.WritersincludeRaymondCarver,Denis
Johnson, Junot Diaz, George Saunders,Alice Munro, and others. This
course counts as a “contemporary literature” requirement for English
majors with a concentration in creative writing. Montemarano
253. Epic and Romance. (H)
This course focuses on epic and romance: two genres of ancient literature
which mutually inform and inuence each other, and both of which
formulatethefoundationsandinspirationsofpopular21st-centurygenres
ofction(fantasy,sciencection,romance,amongothers).Readingswill
be selected from texts including Homer’s Iliad and Odyssey, the Irish
Táin Bó Cúailnge(The Cattle Raid of Cooley), Beowulf, the Arthurian
romancesofChrétiendeTroyes,Sir Gawain and the Green Knight, and
Geoffrey Chaucer’s Troilus and Criseyde. Our discussions will focus
on the formation of the notion of heroism, and examine various stages
in the development of concepts of heroism in western culture, and the
cultural fantasies that accompany it. Above all, epic and romance concern
themselveswiththeprocessandproblematicsofself-denition,thatof
the individual and of the community as a whole. The course addresses
thefollowingquestions:Howwasreadingusedasamethodofunifying
cultureinsecularcommunities?Inwhatwaysdidthesenarrativesafrm
and/orchallengesocietalrules?Howdoesthisliteraturetreatguresof
thenationandtheking?Theconventionsofgender?Same as LIT 253.
Huber
258. Contemporary Science Writing. (H)
In this course, we will examine texts ranging from popular science to
sciencection,byscientistsandnonscientistsalike.Asreaders,wewill
be interested in the ways people write about science, and, as writers,
we will try to put some of these principles into practice. We will be
equallyinterestedintheethical,social,andphilosophicalquestionsthat
contemporary science raises, and in how to probe these questions in
writing. Same as ENE/STS 258. Anderson
260. Nature and Literature. (H)
Readings from a variety of traditions, periods, disciplines and genres
to discover diverse assumptions about nature and humanity’s relation
to it. Readings from both Western and non-Western cultures, though
withemphasisontheBritishandEuro-Americantraditions.Suchbroad
exploration across vast divides of time and culture should not only
teachusaboutvariedunderstandingsofnaturebutalsoencourageself-
consciousness as we form our own conceptions of what nature is and how
we ought best to interact with and in it. Same as ENE 260. Mueller
265. Contemporary Graphic Novel. (H)
In this course, we will develop an historical, aesthetic and formal
understandingofcontemporarygraphicction.Wewillstudythegenre’s
precedents in early comics, the interplay of the comics and their historical
andculturalcontexts,graphicction’sengagementwithhighart,andthe
formalelementsofgraphictexts.Readingswillincludecomicstripsand
comicbooksfrom1900 to thepresent, Maus I and II, Watchmen, Fun
Home, Jimmy Corrigan, It’s a Bird, Black Hole, and other comics. Same
as ART 265. Sherin Wright
315. Literary Theory. (H)
AsJonathanCullerstates,“Theoryoffersnotasetofsolutionsbutthe
prospect of further thought. It calls for commitment to the work of reading,
ofchallengingpresuppositions,ofquestioningtheassumptionsonwhich
youproceed.” Students in this course will be introduced to theoretical
schools and concepts that shape the study of literature and the practice
ofliteraryanalysis.Studentsenrollinginthiscourseshouldhavetaken
at least one college-level literature course. Recommendedfor students
considering graduate studies in English. Mueller, Goldberg
362. End of Nature?: Contemporary Anthropocene Literature. (H)
Massextinction,vastgyresofoatinggarbage,meltingpolaricecaps,
oceandeadzones,risingatmosphericcarbonlevels,superstorms:havewe
enteredtheanthropocene--thegeologic“ageofman”?Theexperienceof
anEarthnowhereuntouchedbyhumansndsexpressioninallgenresof
literature and generates unfamiliar and compelling new ways of conceiving
ourspeciesandourworld.Readingsincludesciencection,realistction,
poetry,non-ctionandtheory.Itisrecommendedthatstudentscomplete
atleastonecollege-levelliteratureorenvironmentalstudiescoursebefore
enrolling.MeetsPost-1800orContemporaryEnglishmajorrequirement,
not both. Same as ENE 362. Mueller
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 61
366. Contemporary Queer Poetry & Poetics. (H)
What does Whitman mean by “manly love”? Does it matter if Nikky
Finneyidentiesasqueerifhersyntaxdoessoonherbehalf?Isqueer
theoryapoeticsofsexuality?Orispoeticsaqueertheoryofliterature?
Thiscoursewillexaminethecurrentstateofqueerpoetryandavariety
of critical theories as they pertain to the contemporary literary landscape.
We will read, discuss, research, interview, experiment alongside, and
write about poems & poets published within the last century in an attempt
tobetterunderstandhowbothqueerandtrans poetics haveirreparably
affected the direction of American poetry. Day
390 and 490. Independent Study.
Independent study directed by the English staff. See chairperson for
guidelines and permission.
WRITING COURSES
Writing courses, to which admission is only by permission of
theinstructor,arelimitedtoenrollmentsofnomorethan15
students.
CREATIVE WRITING COURSES
225. Introduction to Creative Writing. (A)
Ageneralintroductiontothemodesandmeansofwritingpoetry,ction,
and creative non-ction with an emphasis on writing exercises and
revision.Studentswillbeintroducedtotheworkshopmethodofcritiquing
studentwriting,whichmeansyou’llhavethechancetohaveyourwork
discussedbyyourpeers,andvice-versa.MeetscreativewritingEnglish
majorrequirement. Anderson, Day, Hartman, Montemarano
381. Writing Fiction. (A)
A workshop for students who have found ction writing a satisfying
meansofself-expressionandwhonowarereadytoraisetheirworktoa
higherlevel.Studentswillwriteandsignicantlyrevisetwoormoreshort
stories. What we read in this class—student work as well as contemporary
published ction—we will read as writers, meaning: with extreme
attention to craft. We shall concern ourselves with the many choices
writers make and the effects of these choices. We will practice writing
dazzlingsentences.Permissionoftheinstructorrequired.
Montemarano
382. Writing Poetry. (A)
English382isanintermediatepoetryworkshopfocusedongenerating
and analyzing student work with the intention of fostering creative
experimentation and bettering craft. Assignments will investigate the
powerfultraditionoflyricism,inheritedform,andpoeticgenre(theelegy,
the manifesto, the performance persona, etc.) while exploring the way
rhyme,metre,andotherpoetictechniquescanturnconventiononitshead.
ParticipantswillreadwidelywhileengagingAmericanandinternational
poets with whom we are in conversation on the page and the stage. The
semester will culminate in a portfolio of revised student work distributed
asa chapbook. Students of all majors are encouraged to enroll. Meets
creativewritingEnglishmajorrequirement.Permissionoftheinstructor
required. Day
384. Writing Nonction. (A)
Aworkshopforstudentsreadytondtheirvoicesinagenrethatclaims
totellthetruthwithoutmakingitup.Asaterm,“nonction”sayswhatit
isbysayingwhatitisn’t,butifnonctionisanythingthatisnotction,
whereareitsboundaries?Wheredoesitscreativedimensiontakeshape?
We will read works of contemporary memoir, essay, and experimental
nonction,andstudentswillwriteandsignicantlyrevisetwoormore
nonctiontextsthatreport,interrogate,andplaywiththetruth.Permission
ofinstructorrequired.MeetscreativewritingEnglishmajorrequirement.
Anderson
480. Advanced Creative Writing Workshop. (A)
Thisis an advanced workshop for writers of ction, poetry, nonction
ordrama.Eachstudentwillusethesemestertonishwriting,revising
and organizing a creative writing thesis—a body of the student’s best
work. Participants will read and discuss their own and each other’s
theses-in- progress. Students will be expected to revise and tighten
individual poems or stories, to shape their theses and to understand the
aestheticchoicestheyaremaking.Permissionoftheinstructorrequired.
Montemarano, Anderson
SEMINARS
Seminars,towhichstudentsareadmittedonlybypermission
oftheinstructor,arelimitedtoenrollmentsofnomorethan15
students.Seminarsexaminevarioustopics,issuesandauthors.
417. A Feeling for Fiction. (H)
When we read a novel, we expect to feel something. Yet when a work
blatantly makes a play for our feelings, we dismiss it as sentimental
or manipulative. This course explores the literary and cultural history
underlyingtheseintuitions.Bytracingtheinterwovenhistoriesofthenovel,
emotion,aesthetics,gender,andtheselfineighteenth-andearlynineteenth-
century transatlantic literary culture, it examines the changing relationship
betweenfeelingandction.Textsincludeworks(likeGoethe’sTheSorrows
ofYoungWerther)renownedintheirowntimefortheiremotionalimpact
andworks(likeTenney’s Female Quixotism) thattrumpetedthedangers
of ction and thereby acknowledged its emotional and political power.
Prerequisite:permission of the instructor.Completion of ENG226 anda
300-levelENGliteraturecourseisrecommended. Jaros
460. Victorian Nightmares. (H)
The year 2000 marks the hundredth anniversary of Sigmund Freud’s
Interpretation of Dreams and a good moment to explore the bad dreams
that scared the Victorians even as they enjoyed vastly improved daytime
lives made possible by unprecedented developments in technology and
industry. What gave rise to those political, economic, domestic, and
sexualanxietiesthathauntVictorianliterature?Readingsfor“Victorian
Nightmares” are drawn from nineteenth-century British literature,
science, anthropology, and economics. O’Hara
461. Swift, Blake, and Satire. (H)
A seminar on the work of Jonathan Swift (1667–1745) and William
Blake(1757–1827),satiristswhostandatoppositeendsoftheeighteenth
century. Blake—radical revolutionary and visionary—addresses some
ofthesamequestionsthatsoconcernthefarmoreconservativeSwift.
Thougheachmanwouldlikelyhavefoundtheotherintolerable(given
vast political, social, religious, artistic and personal differences), both
effectively translate into art a profound rage about what Edward Said
calls “schemes for projecting power on nature, on human beings, and
on history.”Among our chiefobjectives in our study of Swift will be
tounderstandandenjoytheradicalplayofironythatcharacterizeshis
satire.WewillexaminebothBlake’svisualartandhispoetry,thoughwith
emphasis on the latter. Mueller
462. Toni Morrison. (H)
This seminar will focus on Toni Morrison as a major African American
andAmericanwriter.WewillexamineMorrison’soeuvreinbothction
and criticism, and explore how her aesthetics and vision, and her analyses
of them, are informed by historical contexts and their racial, sexual,
gendered,class,etc.impulses.Permissionoftheinstructorrequired.Same
as AFS/WGS 462. Bernard
463. Arthurian Legends. (H)
This seminar intensively examines the cultural history of the Arthur myth
through the Middle Ages and contemporary literature and popular culture.
ReadingswillbeginwithsomeoftheCelticbackgroundtothelegendsof
King Arthur, and will then address the history of the romance narrative
traditioninthewritingsofGeoffreyofMonmouth,ChrétiendeTroyes,
and Thomas Malory. We will also consider ways that the Arthurian
tradition has been revised and revisited in more recent contexts, from the
poetryofAlfredLordTennyson,tonovelssuchasT.H.White’sThe Once
and Future King,tolmslikeBoorman’sExcalibur and Monty Python
and the Holy Grail. Huber
62 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
467. Virginia Woolf. (H)
Inheressay“ModernFiction,”VirginiaWoolfwrote,“letusrecordthe
atoms as they fall upon the mind in the order in which they fall, let us trace
the pattern, however disconnected and incoherent in appearance, which
each sight or incident scores upon the consciousness.” This proposition
reects Woolf’s turn from realism to a modernist style devoted to
interiority,impressionism,wordplay,andwhatshecalled“breakingthe
sentenceandthesequence.”Atthesametime,Woolf,anardentfeminist,
wrote compellingly about the politics and culture of the early twentieth
century. This course will consider Woolf’s major works alongside
excerpts from the letters and diaries, charting her formal innovations as
wellashersocialcritiques.Throughanexaminationofliterarycriticism,
wewillexplorethemaintendenciesinWoolfstudiesfromthe1970sto
the present day. Same as WGS 467. Abravanel
470. Henry James: Story of the Mind. (H)
In 1881, Henry James created literary history with The Portrait of a
Lady:itwastherstnoveltocontainanentirechapterinwhichnothing
happens—except that the lady thinks. This course will look backward
and forward from this moment in James’s career to examine how his
representationsofmindandbodydevelopandevolve.We’llbeguided
byJames’scastofadventuringladies—fromtheAmericanirtinVenice,
DaisyMiller,totherighteousghost-seeinggovernessofTheTurnofthe
Screw,tothetwowomensharingoneloverinTheGoldenBowl—aswe
studypsychologyandnarrativefromthe1870stothe1910s.Permission
oftheinstructorrequired.
489. Shakespeare Out of Time. (H)
Inthisseminar,wewilldeliberatelystudyShakespeare,hispoems,and
hisplaysoutoftheirhistoricalcontextandputtheminother“outoforder”
time-frames.Inotherwords,wewillreadanachronistically.Thishappens
ofteninperformancesandlmadaptationsofShakespeare’splays:think
Henry 5onWWIbattleeldsorAs You Like Itin19th-centuryJapan.Other
performances try to reconstruct the conditions of “the Shakespearean
stage,” with hose, doublets, and saucy wenches. A problem with this
kindofperformance/readingpracticeisthatwespectators/readersaren’t
reallylivingintheEnglishRenaissance:thinknoelectronicdevices,no
democracy,andno(respected)diversity. Goeglein
494. Contemporary Indian Literature: India in English,
English in India. (H)
AlthoughctionbyIndianswritinginEnglishsincethe1980sisprobably
best known on the world stage, Indians have been prolic producers
of literature in English in a variety of genres for the last two centuries.
Throughexposuretoction,poetry,andnon-ction,thiscoursewilloffer
atasteofthetremendousenergyandvitalitywhichcharacterizesliterary
production in India today. Students will also develop a picture of the
fraughtplaceEnglishhasoccupiedinIndiafromthepre-Independence
periodtotherstdecadeofthiscentury. Mongia
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED IN
2020-2021
TheBibleasLiterature.
Contemporary Anglophone Identities.
Young Adult Literature.
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
(See Earth and Environment)
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
(See Earth and Environment)
FRENCH AND FRANCOPHONE
STUDIES
Professor Carrie Landfried, Chair
L. Scott Lerner Arthur and Katherine Shadek Professor
(on leave 2020-21) of Humanities and French and Italian
Lisa Gasbarrone Professor of French
Nadra Hebouche Associate Professor of Francophone
Studies and French
Carrie Landfried Associate Professor of French
Cindy Yetter-Vassot Associate Professor of French
Julie Saragosa French Language Teaching Fellow
Sandrine Rajaonarivony French Language Teaching Assistant
(Spring 2021 only)
The study of French opens the door to diverse cultures
aroundtheglobe,fromFranceitselftootherFrench-speaking
countries and regions in Europe, North and West Africa,
Quebec, the Caribbean, Asia and the Pacic and Indian
Oceans. French provides useful links to many parts of the
worldandtomanyareasoftheliberalartscurriculum.Students
interested in the arts, in government and business, in public
health, environmental studies and international studies across
the disciplines, benet fromthe practicalskills, thecultural
knowledge and awareness and the intellectual connections that
studying French can provide.
The Department of French and Francophone Studies offers
language courses for beginners and for those who want to build
ontheirknowledgeofFrench.Theintroductory-levelcourses
stress communicative competency and the acquisition of
listening, speaking, reading and writing skills. The intermediate
courses reinforce and extend those skills through an interactive
exploration of contemporary French and Francophone culture
using a variety of authentic print and electronic sources.
The French major provides a cohesive, integrated experience
which gives students a solid background in language, literature
andculture.Introductions,thethreecorecoursesrequiredfor
the major, serve as a gateway to the major and a bridge from
the intermediate to advanced levels of our program. These
courses provide students with the tools to describe, debate,
analyzeandcritiqueFrenchliteraryandculturaltexts,lms,
documents and other cultural phenomena, both orally and
inwriting.IntheDéveloppementstageoftheFrenchmajor,
students choose from advanced courses in the following
categories: Racines (historical, literary, or cultural ideas,
movementsandiconsacrosstime);Hors Hexagone(literature,
ideas, and concepts from several regions of the French speaking
world); Monde Contemporain (literature, ideas, or gures
associatedwithFranceduringthelastonehundredyears);and
Perfectionnement et Pratique(developmentofwrittenand/or
oralskillsatanadvancedlevel).Inthenalyearofthemajor,
students will take one Approfondissement course, an advanced
levelseminarwhichisanin-depthstudyofanauthor,genre,
era, or phenomenon.
A major in French consists of a minimum of 10 courses. Majors
normallycompletethethreeIntroductionscourses:FRN241,
FRN242,FRN261;6Développementcourses(300-level)in
three of four categories, Racines, Monde Contemporain, Hors
Hexagone, Perfectionnement; and one Approfondissement
course (400-level). All majors, in consultation with their
adviser, will also create and present a portfolio of their work in
French.Thispresentationwilltakeplaceduringthestudent’s
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 63
nal semester, before a group of department members and
other French majors.
All French majors work closely with a departmental adviser to
ensure the coherence and integrity of their major course of study.
In consultation with their advisers, French majors may take
one cognate course outside of the department for credit in the
major. These courses are subject to departmental approval.
The following courses have been approved as cognates, others
aresubject to departmentalreview: LIN101, Introductionto
Linguistics;LIN120IntroductiontoSociolinguistics;INT200
Introduction to International Studies; GOV130 International
Politics;BOS350InternationalBusiness;andHIS241History
ofNorthandWestAfrica.
A joint major in Frenchconsistsofeightcourses:FRN202,
241,242,261and481(seniorseminarorindependentstudy);
and three 300-level courses in two of the four distribution
categories (Racines, Monde Contemporain, Hors Hexagone,
Perfectionnement). Two of these courses may be taken abroad.
All joint majors, in consultation with their adviser, will also
create and present a portfolio of their work in French. This
presentationwilltakeplaceduringthestudent’snalsemester,
before a group of department members and other French majors.
Most of our majors and minors spend a semester or year abroad.
We strongly recommend this immersion experience to all of
our students, believing that travel alone is not enough to learn
about other cultures. Only by living, working, relaxing and
even dreaming in Frenchwill studentsacquire an advanced
command of the language and a fuller appreciation of French
and Francophone culture.
Majors and minors in the Department of French and
Francophone Studies have studied abroad in the following
programsinrecentyears:InstituteforFieldEducation(IFE);
InstituteforAmericanUniversitiesinAix-en-Provence(IAU);
IESAbroadParis;IESCenterandUniversityofNantes.See
theInternationalProgramssectionoftheCatalogforfurther
information.
Students majoring in French who enroll in French courses
abroadmaynormallytransferuptotwocoursesforcredit(per
semester).
The writing requirement in the French major is met by
completionofFRN242.
A minor in French consists of six courses numbered 201 or
above. French minors must complete at least one 300-level
Développementcourseortheequivalent.
StudentsminoringinFrenchmaynormallytransferatotalof
two French courses taken abroad for credit towards the French
minor.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
COURSES IN FRENCH
101. Elementary French I.
For students with no previous experience with the language. An
introduction to grammar, pronunciation and culture, with emphasis on
developingcommunicativeskills.Noprerequisite.OfferedeveryFall.
Staff
102. Elementary French II.
ContinuationofFrench101.Prerequisite:FRN101orplacement. Staff
201. Intermediate French I. (LS)
Review and expansion of French language skills. Emphasis on basic
language structures, with practice in the active application of these
skills to the oral and written production of French. Traditional review
of grammar is supplemented by use of current audio, video and digital
authenticmaterials.Prerequisite:FRN102orplacement. Staff
202. Intermediate French II. (H)
ContinuationofFRN201.Perfectionoforal,auralandwrittenlanguage
skills. Coursework may include discussion of current events in the
Francophone world, based on a variety of texts from both literary and
contemporary digital and print sources. Emphasis is on developing
linguisticandculturalcompetence.Prerequisite:FRN201orplacement.
Staff
241. Parler, entendre, comprendre. (H)
This course is designed to improve skills in oral expression and aural
comprehension. Emphasis is on informed conversation and vocabulary
acquisition.Courseworkincludesindividualandgroupworkleadingto
the production of audio and/or video documents in French, as well as
intensive pronunciation practice, impromptu speech, and informal writing
skills. Extensive use of authentic French documents found on the internet.
Prerequisite:FRN202orplacementorpermissionoftheinstructor.
Staff
242. Ecrire, décrire, s’exprimer. (H)
This course will focus on both the process and the product of writing in
French. Analysis of model texts, targeted grammar review, and advanced
stylistic practice will help students develop the skills necessary to
accomplishavarietyofwritingtasks(description,letter,portrait,narration,
summary,essay).Peerandself-editingtechniqueswillhelpstudentslearn
torevisetheirownwork.Inaddition,acommontheme(differenteach
semester)willprovidematerialfordiscussionandinspirationforwritten
assignments.Prerequisite: FRN202 orplacement orpermission ofthe
instructor. Staff
261. Lire, Analyser, Critiquer. (H)
This course introduces students to different types of French and
Francophone texts. We begin by learning reading strategies and the
techniquesusedinliteraryandtextualanalysis,thenwelearntoproduce
written and oral analyses of these texts using the forms common to French
literaryanalysis.Bytheendofthecourse,studentswillbeabletoidentify
principal characteristics of major genres, write analytical commentaries
on prose and poetry, and will be prepared to read unfamiliar French texts
critically.Prerequisite:FRN241,FRN242orplacementorpermissionof
the instructor. Staff
353. Environment in/and Literature. (H)
This course will investigate the intricate ways in which cultural
expression reect the relationships between human beings and their
environment. We will concentrate on the principal ways in which French
and Francophone literatures have dealt with the natural world (the
vegetalandanimal)movingfromapastoraltoanallegorical,andfrom
a colonial to a postcolonial use of the physical environment. The course
will focus on the following authors: Guy de Maupassant, Jean de La
Fontaine(France),BiragoDiop(Senegal),AiméCésaire,MaryseCondé
(FrenchCaribbean),andLiseTremblay,YingChen(Canada).Secondary
sourcesfromphilosopherssuchasDescartes,Kant,Rousseau,Heidegger,
Bergson,Derrida,Agamben,Bailly,GlissantandSerres,willconstitute
the backdrop of our discussion. Prerequisite: FRN 261 or placement.
Same as ENE 353. Hebouche
64 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
359. La France Occupée: 1940-1944. (H)
Thiscourseconcentratesonthefour-yearGermanoccupationofFrance
during World War II with an emphasis on the role of the arts. We begin
by exploring the ways in which artistic expression and consumption
operatedasactsofresistanceorcollaborationbetween1940and1944.
In the second half of the semester, we consider some of the literary
and cinematic creations this period inspired. Prerequisite: FRN 261 or
permission. Same as LIT 359. Landfried
360. Littérature Expérimentale. (H)
This course considers two literary movements that appeared in France in
thewakeofWorldWarII:theNouveauRoman(NewNovel)andOuLiPo.
The New Novelists reject the perpetuation of 19th-century novelistic
forms, proposing new literary techniques to better reect the modern
age.ExperimentationreachesapeakwithOulLiPoandwriterssuchas
GeorgesPerecandRaymondQueneauwhoimposefancifulconstraints
ontheiruseoflanguageandform.Prerequisite:FRN261orpermission.
Landfried
362. L’éducation en France: enjeux historiques et actuels. (H)
This course examines public education in France (and some of its
colonies) since the Third Republic with a focus on its portrayal in
contemporary literature and cinema. After a brief consideration of the
historical foundations of the current French public school system, we
willexamineitskeyroleinthecivilizingmissionofFrenchcolonization,
beforeturningourattentiontocurrentchallengespresentedbyFrance’s
increasinglydiversepopulation.Prerequisite:FRN261orpermission.
Landfried
363. Marginal Sexualities in the Maghreb. (H) (NW)
This course will explore the cultural constructions of gender and sexuality
in the Maghreb, and their relationship to the concept of nation. We will
also focus on new spaces of negotiation offered on the threshold of the
21stcenturybyFrancophoneNorthAfricanauthorssuchasTaharBen
Jelloun, Rachid O, Abdellah Taïa, and Assia Djebar. The course will
examineconceptssuchasdesire,uidity,heteronormativity,homosocial
vs.homosexualrelationships,hypermasculinisation,discursive/rhetorical/
subjectivecommunities,andmisogynyinthecontextof20th/21stcentury
NorthAmerica.Prerequisite:FRN261orplacement.
Same as AFS/WGS 363. Hebouche
364. Francophone Literatures and Cultures (NW)
This course provides an introduction to the history and culture of at least
twoareasofFrancophonie,suchasQuebec,theCaribbean,theMaghreb,
and West Africa. Through literary works, lms, and other materials,
the course will explore the cultural, linguistic, and political interactions
betweenFranceandotherFrancophonecountries.Prerequisite:FRN261
or placement Hebouche
366. Folk and Fairy Tales in French. (H)
DrawingonfolktalesfromAfrica,Quebec,andtheCaribbean,aswell
as classic fairy tales from France, we will raise questions about the
nature of storytelling and the foundation of popular tales in a culture.
We will examine the tales from a variety of perspectives, borrowing
from psychology, anthropology, and literary criticism to form our
interpretations. This popular literature will also serve as an introduction
tothehistoryandcultureofvariouspartsoftheFrench-speakingworld.
Prerequisite:FRN261orplacement Gasbarrone
368. French Fashion as a Reection of French Culture. (H)
French fashion is a cultural, historical, and literary phenomenon which can
be interpreted in many ways. In this course, we will study the evolution
of French fashion and the French system of haute couture. We will also
explore fashion such as it is represented in literature across the centuries,
readingZola’sAuBonheurdeDames,Colette’sGigi,andLeschiffonsdu
rêve, a collection of short stories written by the granddaughter of a famous
French designer. We will also look at several theories on the interpretation
andmeaningoffashion;fashionmarketinginthe21stcentury;andthe
special relationship between France, the French and the importance of
being“àlamode.”Prerequisite:FRN261orplacement. Yetter-Vassot
369. Francophone Theatre. (H) (NW)
Francophone plays often take a head-on look at issues that originate
from the socio-political contexts in which they are produced, directly
andopenlycallingintoquestionestablishedstructuraland/orideological
systems. This course will explore the various strategies of resistance,
whether aesthetic or philosophical, used by francophone dramatists
from diverse backgrounds. Authors and playwrights such as Antonin
Artaud,SamuelBeckett,AiméCésaire,JeanGenet,EugèneIonesco,and
SimoneSchwarz-Bart,willconstitutethebackdropofourinvestigation.
Prerequisite:FRN261orplacement. Hebouche
381. Seminar: Advanced French/Francophone Studies. (H)
A seminar on a single aspect of French or Francophone culture: a writer,
genre, theme or movement, seen in historical and cultural context.
Prerequisite: at least one course beyond FRN 261. Recent courses
include La Littérature de Guerre;Victor Hugo; L’Etranger; Monstrous
Bodies; Luxe et Elégance. Topic for Fall 2020: Albert Camus: Creating
Dangerously. Open to juniors who petition the department to enroll. Staff
391. Directed Readings in French. (H)
TutorialforstudentswhohavecompletedFRN241,242and261.Students
who have a special interest may arrange a tutorial with a faculty member.
Enrollmentisconditionaloninstructor’spermission. Staff
481. Seminar: Advanced French/Francophone Studies. (H)
A seminar on a single aspect of French or Francophone culture: a writer,
genre, theme or movement, seen in historical and cultural context.
Prerequisite: at least two courses beyond FRN 261. Recent courses
include La Littérature de Guerre;VictorHugo;L’Etranger; Monstrous
Bodies;Luxe et Elégance. Topic for Fall 2020: Albert Camus: Creating
Dangerously. For seniors only. Staff
490. Independent Study.
Thestudentpursuesanin-depthinvestigationofatopicofspecialinterest,
underthedirectionofanadviser.AvailableinthesenioryearasaSenior
ResearchProject.Prerequisite:Permissionofchairperson. Staff
COURSES TAUGHT IN ENGLISH
251. Magic and Mayhem in French Fairy Tales. (H)
Onceuponatime,beforeDisneyandtheBrothersGrimm,Cinderella,
Sleeping Beauty, Belle, and the Beast, were regular guests in the
literary salons of Paris and Versailles. From Charles Perrault to Mme
deBeaumont,Frenchwriterstookfolktalesandspunthemintoelegant,
edgy, andenduringnarratives thatbothreected andchallenged social
norms. Through close reading and analysis, we will examine these stories
and their modern retellings, raising questions about narrative, gender,
class, psychology, ideology, and other issues from a variety of critical
perspectives. Same as LIT 215.
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
LittératureContemporaine.
French Caribbean Literature.
GEOSCIENCES
(See Earth and Environment)
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 65
GERMAN AND GERMAN
STUDIES
Professor Jonathan Stone, Chair, Dept. of German, Russian & East
Asian Languages
Jennifer Redmann Professor of German
(on leave Spring 2021)
Curtis C. Bentzel Associate Professor of German
Meagan Tripp Assistant Professor of German
Julie Saragosa French and German Language Teaching
Assistant
The study of German provides the broadening of linguistic and
cultural awareness that accompanies the learning of any foreign
language. In addition, knowledge of the German language and
culture offers advantagesin a wide range of elds. Germany
plays a central role in the European Union, and a quarter of
the population of the EU speaks German as a native language.
Germanyistheworld’sfourthlargestexporter,oneofthetop
three nations in research and development of high-tech and
green products, and a leader in industrial, architectural, and
automotive design. German is one of the top three languages
used on the internet, and Germany is a leader in global book
andlmproduction.Ourmajorshaveenteredeldsasdiverse
as teaching, law, business and medicine and have used their
masteryofthelanguagetoworkinGerman-speakingcountries.
StudentsfromotherdisciplineshavetakencoursesinGerman
forpersonalenrichment,forgraduateschoolqualication,orfor
preparationinresearchorstudyinaGerman-speakingcountry.
Fromtherstsemesteron,theGermancurriculumatFranklin
& Marshall integrates German language learning with a broad
knowledgeandin-depthunderstandingofculturalproduction
within German-speaking Europe. Students practice their
oral communication skills in a variety of settings, including
classroom discussions, informal conversations, and formal
presentations. Over the course of the curriculum, students
acquire advanced writing skills in German in multiple
genres, including short argumentative and interpretive essays,
journalistic texts, and personal writing in the form of journals
and letters.
Germancoursesatalllevelsareorganizedaroundthemesthat
provide students with an overview of German literature and
culture. By engaging with texts (written, visual, and audio-
visual), students sharpen their interpretive skills, become
literatemembersofaGerman-speakingcommunityoncampus
andbeyond,andacquireacriticalunderstandingofissuesthat
have shaped German society of the past and present
Students majoring or minoring in German may pursue one
of three tracks: German Language and Culture, German
LiteratureandCulture,orGermanStudies.GER301,GER302,
andGER450arerequiredcoursesforallmajors.
StudentsintheGermanLiteratureandCulturetrackgenerally
enter Franklin & Marshall with prior study of German. The
focus of this track is development of advanced language
prociencyandathoroughgroundinginthemajorworksand
authors of the German literary tradition. A major in German
Literature and Culture consists of nine courses beginning
withGER202,includingatleast ve400-levelcoursesand
GER 450. A minor in German Literature and Culture
consistsofsixcoursecreditsinGermanbeginningwithGER
202,includingatleasttwo400-levelcoursesandGER450.
StudentsintheGermanLanguageandCulturetrackgenerally
begin their study of German at Franklin & Marshall. The
focusofthistrackisthedevelopmentofupper-intermediateto
advancedGermanlanguageprociency,alongwithknowledge
ofGermancultureandacriticalunderstandingoftheGerman-
speaking world. A major in German Language and Culture
consists of nine courses from the point of placement, including
at least two 400-level courses and GER 450. A minor in
German Language and Culture consists of six course credits
in German from the point of placement.
The German Studies track combines German department
courses with courses in English on topics related to German
culture. These may be approved Franklin & Marshall courses
orcourses takeninanoff-campusprogram.Studentsinthis
track develop intermediate German language prociency
and a critical understanding of the German-speaking world
from multiple disciplinary perspectives. A major in German
Studies consists of nine courses from the point of placement
and must include GER 301, 302, and 450. A minor in
German Studies consists of six course credits from the point
ofplacement,includinguptotwoapprovedGermanStudies
courses in English. Approved Franklin & Marshall German
Studiescoursesinclude(butarenotlimitedto)ART335,HIS
255,MUS231,PHI317,andPHI319.
German majors are strongly encouraged to spend a semester
or year studying in a German-speaking country. In recent
years, majors have studied abroad in the following programs:
Heidelberg College program in Heidelberg, Germany; IES
Berlin, Freiburg, and Vienna. See International and Off-
CampusStudysectionoftheCatalogforfurtherinformation.
StudentsmajoringinGerman(allthreetracks)maytransferno
morethanthreecoursesforcredittowardthemajor;students
minoringin German (allthreetracks)maytransfernomore
than two courses for credit toward the minor.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
COURSES IN GERMAN
101. Elementary German I. What is German?
Anintroductiontothequestion“WhatisGerman?”throughtopicssuch
asfamilylife,interpersonalinteractions,andholidaytraditions.Students
willexploreGerman-speakingculturethroughcross-culturalcomparisons
with the United States and by viewingand discussing classic German
lmsofthesilentera.Throughcommunicativeactivitiescoveringthefour
languageskills(listening,speaking,reading,andwriting),studentslearn
toaskandanswerquestions,shareinformation,andnegotiateavarietyof
cultural settings. Offered every Fall. Bentzel, Tripp
102. Elementary German II. What is German?
Studentsexpandtheirunderstandingofthequestion“WhatisGerman?”
through topics such as daily routines, food and restaurants, fairy tales,
and immigration. By reading and discussing lms, short texts, and a
full-lengthyouthnovel,studentsgainknowledgeofGermancultureand
society, improve their communicative competence, and develop skills
neededtonegotiateavarietyofculturalsettings.Prerequisite:GER101
orplacement.OfferedeverySpring. Bentzel, Tripp
66 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
201. Intermediate German I. What is German? (LS)
Students further develop their understanding of the question “What is
German?”byengagingwithincreasinglysophisticatedtextsandlmson
the themes of family, friendship, home, immigration, and multiculturalism.
As in GER 101 and 102, all four language skills are practiced, and
comparisons between American and German society provide a basis for
class discussions. Prerequisite: GER 102 or placement. Offered every
Fall. Redmann
202. Intermediate German II.
Stories of Twentieth Century Germany. (H)
Studentsexploretwentieth-centuryGermanhistoryandculturethrough
youthnovelsandlmssetbeforeandaftertheSecondWorldWar.The
course places special emphasis on developing students’ reading skills,
oral and written communication skills, and cultural literacy. Continued
practice of linguistic structures and systematic vocabulary building are
alsocentraltothecourse.Prerequisite:GER201orplacement.Offered
everySpring. Staff
301. Reading German Texts and Contexts I. (H)
Thiscourse,togetherwithGER302,servesasanintroductiontoadvanced
coursesinGermanliteratureandculture.Studentsundertakeanin-depth
studyofaperiodoftwentieth-centuryGermanculturethroughavarietyof
texts,lms,andculturalartifacts.Thecourseemphasizesthecontinuing
development of student reading skills, interpersonal and presentational
communicationskills,andwritingskillsinmultiplegenres.Prerequisite:
GER202orplacement.OfferedeveryFall. Tripp
302. Reading German Texts and Contexts II. (H)
Thiscourse,togetherwithGER301,servesasanintroductiontoadvanced
courses in German literature and culture. The course is focused on a single
theme across a number of time periods, and it stresses the central role
that literature plays in fostering an understanding of German society.
Byreadingandinterpretingtexts,whichvaryfromproseandpoetryto
dramaandlm,studentsdevelopadvancedreadingskillsandacquirethe
linguistictoolsfortextualanalysis.Prerequisite:GER301.Offeredevery
Spring. Staff
451. Germans in Love. (H)
“Romantic”isprobablynottherstwordthatcomestomindwhenmost
people think about what Germans are like, but German literature is full
of men and women in love. This course features novels, plays, novellas,
lmsandlyricpoetrythatofferinsightintowhetherloveis,indeed,akind
of“temporaryinsanity,”asAmericanthinkerAmbroseBiercesuggested.
The course begins with an exploration of love relationships in Germany in
theformerGDRandtheFederalRepublicbeforeandafterreunication,
followed by works from the nineteenth and eighteenth centuries, where
social class and gender roles play a different role in constructing love
relationshipsfromthewaytheydointhetwenty-rstcentury.Prerequisite:
GER302. Bentzel
461. German Cinema. (H)
This course explores the history of German cinema since its origins in the
1920s.Whydoblack-and-whitesilentlmslikeCaligari,Nosferatu,and
Metropoliscontinuetoresonatewithlmenthusiastsinthetwenty-rst
century?WhatissovisuallycompellingaboutaNazipropagandalm?
What happened to German movie production after twelve years of misuse
by Hitler’s cultural ministry? What marks did the forty-year division
of Germany leave on lm in the united nation? How has immigration
ofnewpopulationsaffectedGermanlm?Andwhere,afterall,arethe
boundaries between “global” lm and “German” lm today, when so
manydirectors,actors,andstudioartistsworkinmorethanonecountry?
Prerequisite:GER302. Bentzel
462. The Meaning of Work in German Culture (H)
AreGermansashard-workingaseveryonethinks?Howcansuchasmall
country be a top exporter of manufactured products with workers getting
atleast ve weeks annual vacation?This course explores how today’s
attitudes and practices of work in united Germany emerged from older
traditionsassetdowninwrittentexts,folksongs,lms,andgraphicarts.
We examine traditional and contemporary interrelationships of work and
gender, work and ethnic identity, work and social class, as well as the
specicvocabularyofGermanwork.Prerequisite:GER302. Redmann
463. Contemporary German Culture (H)
This course examines a selection of topics that are part of the contemporary
German cultural and political landscape, including Germany in the
European Union, relations between east and west Germans, sports and
Germannational identity,social challenges posed by Germany’saging
populace, and minorities in German society. Through discussion of these
issues, students explore what it means to be German today and how
differentgroupswithinGermanydenethemselves.Studentsworkwitha
widevarietyoftextsthatrangefromnewsarticlestolms,lmreviews,
surveys,interviews,websites,andtelevisionnewsprograms.Prerequisite:
GER302. Staff
464. Depictions of Women in German Literature
Freudfamouslyasked“Whatdowomenwant?”Thisisaquestionthat
authors of texts featuring female characters have sought time and again to
answer, and their responses naturally vary widely. In this course, we focus
ondepictionsoffemalecharactersinGerman-languageplays,lms,and
prose works from across two centuries. The unifying theme of the course
is the relationship of gender to sex, violence, and power, a theme that we
willanalyzethroughclosereadings,examinationofthesocio-historical
context in which the work arose, and through the lens of feminist literary
criticism.Prerequisite:GER302. Redmann
465. German Legends and Tales. (H)
This course takes as its focus the rich tradition of fairy tales and legends
that Germany has famously contributed to world literature, with a nod
to the ballads that were part of its folk tradition. The course begins with
a consideration of some (deceptively simple)folktales of theBrothers
Grimm,organizedbytype.Thisisfollowedbytwowell-known“literary
fairytales,”i.e.stories“invented”byknownauthorsatknowntimes.The
latter part of the course is devoted to ballads and legends, principally the
legendoftheNibelungenandthatofFaust.Prerequisite:GER302. Staff
470 – 479. Topics Seminar in German Literature and Culture.
A special course offering whose topic spans the centuries, genres or
cultures.
490. Independent Study.
Independent study directed by the German staff. Permission of the
chairperson.
INT 350. Language Precepting Seminar.
Studentswilldevelopanunderstandingofforeignlanguagepedagogyand
methods by collaborating with an instructor in a beginning or intermediate
foreignlanguagecourseatF&M.Studentswilldiscusslessonplansand
approacheswiththeirinstructor/mentorsandassistlearnersduringclass
time. In addition, students will meet weekly or biweekly with other
preceptors in the Language Precepting course to explore theories of
secondlanguageacquisitionandhowtheyinformclassroompracticesin
foreignlanguagecourses,aswellastoreectontheirownexperiencesas
preceptors.Onehalfcredit.Permissionrequired. Bentzel
COURSES IN ENGLISH TRANSLATION
255. Dictatorship, Division, and Democracy
in Modern German History. (S)
Focuses on continuities and ruptures in German society during the
SecondEmpire,theWeimarRepublic,NationalSocialism,thecompeting
Republics, and the (unied) Federal Republic of Germany. Major
questionsincludeGermanindustrialandstateformation;gender,class,
andreligiousidentities;theimpactoftotalwar;economicandpolitical
crisis; the roots of dictatorship and democracy; the organization of
genocide;andEuropeanunity.Same as HIS 255. Mitchell
335. Destroying Images: Art and Reformation. (A)
This course examines the doctrinal and political conicts between the
RomanCatholicChurchandthe“reformed”religionsofnorthernEurope
in the 16th and 17th centuries, focusing on the impact on the visual
cultureoftheperiod.Thecourseexamines“high”artandarchitecture,
but pays particular attention to the attitudes towards images more broadly,
the ideologies that drive them, and their operations across all sectors of
society. Same as ART 335 and RST 335. Aleci
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 67
450. German Capstone Seminar. (H)
This course is intended to prepare German majors to conduct research
and write formal literary analyses on literary topics. Since the course
focuses on writing in English, students read important longer works from
the German literary tradition in English translation, along with secondary
literature in English. The course also gives students a summary overview
ofthemajorperiodsofGermanliteraryandintellectualhistory.Equally
importantly, students have the opportunity to develop their writing skills
inliteraryanalysis.Eachstudentpreparesasignicantresearchprojecton
a longer work of German literature of their choosing and presents a formal
presentation6onthisworkattheendofthesemester.Prerequisite:Senior
standing, or LIT 201. Bentzel
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED IN
2020–2021
471. Scientic Discourses in German Literature and Culture (H) This
coursecountstowardstheGermanmajorinlieuofGER450. Tripp.
GOVERNMENT
Professor Stephanie L. McNulty, Chair
Dean C. Hammer John W. Wetzel Professor of Classics
and Professor of Government
Stephen K. Medvic The Hon. and Mrs. John C. Kunkel
(on leave Spring 2021) Professor of Government
Kerry H. Whiteside Clair R. McCollough Professor
(Spring 2021 only) of Government
Susan Dicklitch-Nelson Professor of Government
Matthew M. Schousen Professor of Government
Jennifer D. Kibbe Associate Professor of Government
Stephanie L. McNulty Associate Professor of Government
David Ciuk Assistant Professor of Government
Biko Koenig Assistant Professor of Government
Jennifer Meyer Assistant Professor of Government and
(on leave 2020-21) Public Health
Elspeth Wilson Assistant Professor of Government
(on leave Fall 2020)
Wei-Ting Yen Assistant Professor of Government
Prithviraj Datta Visiting Assistant Professor of
Government
George Fourlas Visiting Assistant Professor of
Philosophy and Government
Stefanie Kasparek Visiting Assistant Professor of
Government
Hollie Tripp Visiting Assistant Professor of
(Spring 2021 only) Government and Public Health
James G. Shultz Senior Adjunct Instructor of
Government
Berwood A. Yost Senior Adjunct Research Instructor of
Government
Hon. Leonard G. Brown, III Adjunct Assistant Professor of
Government
Andrew Jenks Adjunct Instructor of Government
Craig Lang Adjunct Assistant Professor of
Government
The Government major is designed to prepare and enrich
students for their professional lives and their roles as active
citizensand leaders.The department hasa longtradition of
encouraging its majors to think conceptually about politics and
to immerse themselves in their political environment through
internships, civic activism, study abroad and community-
based learning.
StudentsinGovernmentstudytheprocessesbywhichsocieties
make collective decisions, explore the theoretical and ethical
foundationsof political action,raise critical questionsabout
the nature and use of power, and examine how societies and
international systems attempt to address basic problems of
liberty, equality and order.As a complement to coursework
in the major, students develop skills in language, economics,
mathematics or philosophy.
A major in Government consists of ten courses in Government
andathreecourseCognate.Atleastnine(9)oftheGovernment
courses,includingthe400-levelseminar,mustbecompletedat
Franklin&MarshallCollege.Requirementsare:
GOV100;
GOV120;
GOV130;
GOV241or242;
GOV250;
four electives, of which at least two must be at the
300-levelorabove;
one400-levelGovernmentseminar.
Also required is the completion of one of the following
Cognates:
PHI(threecourses,atleasttwoofwhichmustbeatthe
200-levelorhigher);
MAT(anythreecoursesnotcounting105or116);
Foreign Language (three courses in a new language or
threecoursesbeginningwherethestudentisplaced);
ECO(100,103,plusany200-levelcourse);or
OnefullsemesterofstudyabroadataCollege-approved
program.
Prospectivemajorsareencouragedtobeginplanningforthe
majorbytherstsemesteroftheirsophomoreyear.Todeclare
a major, students must have taken at least one Government
course and have taken or are planning to take one Cognate
coursebytherstsemesterofjunioryear.GOV250should
becompletednolaterthantherstsemesterofthejunioryear.
StudentsconsideringstudyabroadshouldcontacttheOfceof
InternationalPrograms.
For students completing the Government major, BIO 210,
ECO210,BOS250,PSY230orSOC302maybesubstituted
forGOV250.
Students intending to major in both Public Health and
Government may not apply more than three Government
courses toward the second major.
To be considered for honors in Government, students must have
amajorGPAofatleast3.50attheendoftheirseventhsemester,
complete a two-semester Independent Study project and
defend it in an oral exam. The project must include an original
argument that is placed in the context of other scholarship. An
award of honors will be made by the committee for projects
that demonstrate originality, intellectual engagement and depth
of understanding of the topic.
68 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
Pleasenoteaswell,thatthenumberingsystemforGovernment
courses corresponds to the following subeld divisions:
x00–x19 (American Politics); x20–x29 (Comparative
Government); x30–x39 (International Relations); x40–x49
(PoliticalTheory);x50–x59(PoliticalResearch).
MajorsinGovernmenthaveparticipatedinthefollowingoff-
campus study programs in recent years: Washington semester,
American University, Washington, D.C.; Butler University
andotherprogramsinLondonandOxford,UK;Parliamentary
InternshipprogramattheUniversityofEdinburgh,Scotland;
InternationalEducationofStudents(IES)inBarcelona,Spain
andBuenosAires,Argentina;SchoolforInternationalTraining
(SIT) inAmsterdam, Jordan, Kenya, andAustralia. See the
International Programs section of the Catalog for further
information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
100. American Government. (S)
PoliticalpowerwithintheframeworkofAmericannationalgovernment.
Current governmental and political problems are explored.
Ciuk, Koenig, Medvic, Schousen, Staff, Wilson
120. Comparative Politics. (S)
Introduction to the theory and method of comparative politics. The course
analyzesthegovernmentandpoliticsofbothdevelopedanddeveloping
countries, encouraging students to apply the comparative method to draw
conclusions about political processes and phenomena across nations and
continents. Dicklitch-Nelson, McNulty, Yen
130. International Politics. (S)
Thetheory and practiceof international politics;the major actors in the
international system and their various objectives; the interplay of power
andprincipleindiplomacy;thecausesofwarandtheprospectsforpeace.
Theoretical principles are illustrated with case studies from various
historicalperiodswithemphasisonthemajorconictssinceWorldWarI.
Kasparek, Kibbe
200. Understanding Public Policy. (S)
Focus on government activity in a variety of public policy areas, the
structural and political contexts of debates over alternative policy
strategies and approaches to understanding public policy. Policy areas
examined include the national budget and entitlements, science and
technologyandeducation.Prerequisite:GOV100orGOV120orPBH
251.Same as PUB 200. Koenig, Meyer, Tripp
208. The American Presidency. (S)
EvolutionofthePresidencytoanofcethatisthefocalpointofpolitics
and leadership in the American political system. Emphasis on the
constitutional and political roles played by the chief executive in shaping
publicpolicy.Prerequisite:GOV100. Schousen
219. City and State Government. (S)
This course will focus on the interrelationships between the political,
historical, legal, economic, social and demographic aspects of governing
cities. In addition, the relationship of state governments to city
governments will be explored in some depth. Particular attention will
be paid to the problems facing cities, and possible solutions to those
problems will be discussed. Among the many issues we will examine
will be the ways in which state governments can be of assistance to city
governments.Prerequisite:GOV100. Shultz
241. Classical Political Theory. (H)
ExaminesimportanttextsinclassicalGreekandRomanpoliticalthought,
including the writings of Plato, Aristotle and other relevant authors.
Explores how ancient political theory sheds light on contemporary
politics, including issues of democracy, citizenship, globalization and
international relations. Hammer
242. Modern Political Theory. (H)
ExaminesthepoliticaltheoriesofHobbes,Locke,Rousseau,Marxand
one contemporary thinker, with emphasis on alternative views of the
social contract, liberalism and radicalism. Datta, Whiteside
250. Political Research. (S)
Empiricalinvestigationinpoliticalscience;scienticinquiryinpolitical
science; problems of logical induction; selecting and formulating a
researchproblem;functionsandtypesofresearchdesign;analysisofdata,
bothqualitativeandquantitative.Primarilyforgovernmentmajors;should
becompletednolaterthantherstsemesterofjunioryear.Prerequisite:
GOV100,120,or130. Ciuk, Kasparek, Medvic, Schousen, Yost
305. Public Policy Implementation. (S)
Focus on national government bureaucracy in the implementation of
public policy, including exploration of the role of bureaucracies in
contemporarypoliticaldebate,organizationaltheoryintheproblemsof
governing and administrative politics and administrative due process.
Prerequisite:GOV100.Same as PUB 305. Koenig
309. The Congress. (S)
TheinformalandformalinstitutionsandprocessesoftheUnitedStates
Congress, with specic attention to selected public policy issues.
Prerequisite:GOV100. Schousen
310. Campaigns and Elections. (S)
Explores the structure of American campaigns and elections, including the
nomination process and general elections. Gives special attention to the
elementsofthemoderncampaign,includingcampaignnance,research,
polling,advertisingandmediause.Prerequisite:GOV100. Medvic
314. The American Constitution. (S)
ExaminestheSupremeCourtasapoliticalinstitutionandcustodianofthe
governmentalsystem.Prerequisite:GOV100. Wilson
315. Civil Rights and Civil Liberties. (S)
Explores civil rights and liberties in the American system, with emphasis
oncurrentproblemsandrecentCourtdecisions.Prerequisite:GOV100.
Wilson
317. Trial Courts and the Justice System. (S)
Examinescourtsatthetriallevel,includingorganizationofthejudiciary,
the selection of judges, the relationship between the public and the courts
and the role of trial courts in administering justice in different contexts.
Prerequisite:GOV100. Staff
318. Media and Politics. (S)
Examinestheroleofthemassmedia(includingprint,broadcast,andnew
media) inAmerican politics, giving particular attention to the ways in
whichthemediabothinuenceandareinuencedbypoliticalactorsand
thepoliticalprocess.Prerequisite:GOV100. Same as TDF 318. Medvic
320. International Environmental Law.
This course examines principles and instruments of International
Environmental Law (IEL), beginning with the nature and sources
of IEL and an introduction to the key actors and agencies involved in
global environmental governance. Focusing on the development of
regimes addressing a range of environmental issues, the course also
addresses implementation and state responsibility for environmental
harm and dispute resolution. Topics explored include climate change and
atmosphericpollution; the law of the sea andprotection ofthe marine
environment;internationalregulationoftoxicsubstances;conservationof
nature,ecosystemsandbiodiversity;andtheintersectionofinternational
trade and environmental protection. Students will examine treaties
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 69
and case law rst-hand, and represent vested interests in a simulated
negotiationofamultilateralenvironmentalagreement.Prerequisite:ENE
216orGOV200.Same as ENE 320. De Santo
324. Asian Politics. (NW) (S)
This course introduces students to the domestic and international politics
of China, Japan, and the two Koreas. Yen
326. African Politics. (NW) (S)
Anexplorationofthesocio-economicandpoliticalchallengesfacingSub-
SaharanAfricasinceindependence.Thiscoursewillfocusspecicallyon
the prospects for socio-economic development and democracy in Sub-
SaharanAfrica. StudentswillengageinaReactingtothePast(RTTP)
simulation.Prerequisite:GOV120.Same as AFS 326. Dicklitch-Nelson
327. Latin American Politics. (NW) (S)
This course introduces students to Latin American government and
politics. The course provides a brief overview of the region’s history
andadiscussionofsomeofthekeyissuesshapingtheregion’spolitics,
including:authoritarianismanddemocracy;developmentanddependency;
andrevolutionandinequality.Therestofthecoursewillbededicatedto
a survey of the politics of several countries from different areas of Latin
America. Same as IST 327. McNulty
330. Foreign Policy Analysis. (S)
ExploreshowU.S.foreignpolicyismade.Examinestherolesplayedby
the foreign affairs bureaucracy, Congress, public opinion, the media and
individual policy makers in shaping foreign policy and then applies that
informationinanalyzingpastandpresentforeignpolicydecisions.Kibbe
352. Global Justice. (H)
This course focuses on key ethical issues in international politics, with
special emphasis on the question of what demands justice imposes on
institutions and agents acting in a global context. In addition to theoretical
approaches to global justice, we will also read and discuss what justice
requiresinrelationtoveissuesofinternationalconcern–poverty,climate
change, immigration, warfare, and democracy. Datta
374. Global Environmental Politics. (S)
Analysisofenvironmentalproblemdenitionandpolicysolutionsindifferent
countries, with particular focus on the developing world. Effects of political
drivers of air and water pollution, land cover change, and biodiversity
conservation.Inuenceofpoliticalstructures,powerrelations,culturalvalues,
ecologicaldynamics,andsocialinteractionsonenvironmentalpolitics.Roles
ofnational and multilateral institutions, NGOs,and civil society in policy
debates. Outcomes of multi-stakeholder negotiations over environmental
governanceofglobalcommons,includingNorth-Southdisputes.Countsas
Human Environment core course for Environmental Studies.Prerequisite:
ENE/ENV216orpermissionofinstructor.Same as ENE 314.
Bratman, Cann, De Santo
390. Independent Study.
IndependentstudydirectedbytheGovernmentstaff.Permissionofchair.
391. Directed Reading. (S)
Exploration of a chosen topic in government, with reading directed by
Government department staff. Assignments are typically short analytical
papers.Permissionofchair.
410. Health Policy. (S)
This course investigates domestic and global health policy issues. We will
survey health care and health systems, focusing on health care spending,
insurance, and health outcomes. Students will also examine ethical
dilemmas and debates within health policy. We will ask what role health
policycanplayinaddressinghealthdisparities.Twoquestionsinfuseour
deliberations: what can government do to shape the health of individuals
andwhatshoulditdo?Same as PBH 410. Meyer, Everett, Tripp
411. Presidential Character. (S)
This course examines the role that individual politicians, particularly
American presidents, play in American politics. We examine concepts
such as presidential leadership and presidential character. A primary
goal of the course is to understand what types of individuals are likely
to become president and which individual traits successful presidents are
likely to possess. Schousen
412. Political Parties. (S)
This seminar is designed to explore issues related to party politics,
particularly in the United States but with some comparison to party
systemsinotherdemocracies.Studentswillexploretheroleofpartiesin
democratic systems of government, various models of parties and party
systems,andthehistoryofpartiesintheUnitedStates.Themajorityof
the semester will be spent examining three aspects of parties that scholars
have generally used to describe what political parties are and what they
do—theparty-as-organization,theparty-in-the-electorate,andtheparty-
in-government.Aftercompletingthecourse,studentsshouldhaveabetter
understanding, from both a normative and empirical perspective, of the
role played by parties in the American political system. Medvic
420. Secrets, Spies, Satellites. (S)
This seminar highlights some of the major debates about the role,
practices and problems of national intelligence and explores the issues
facingtheU.S.intelligencecommunityinthe21stcentury.Topicsinclude
the role intelligence plays in support of policymaking, the sources of past
intelligence“failures,”andthequestionsofcongressionaloversightand
intelligence reform. Kibbe
425. Human Rights-Human Wrongs. (NW) (S)
Thiscourseisaseniorseminarcourseonhumanrights.Studentswill
be introduced to the theory and practice of human rights through the
examination of human rights documents, key theoretical readings in
the eld and special guest lectures by human rights activists.A major
componentofthiscoursewillinvolvecommunity-basedlearning(CBL).
Students,workingwithattorneys,willberequiredtoworkonaasylum,
Withholding of Removal, or Convention Against Torture (CAT) case.
Studentswillworkinteamsofthree. Dicklitch-Nelson
428. The Politics of Development.
This course explores the theory and practice of international development,
with an emphasis on political dynamics. The course begins with an
overviewofthemostwell-knownanddebatedtheoriesofdevelopment,
such as modernization and dependency theories. We then discuss the
politics of foreign aid and humanitarian assistance. Finally, the course
explores several topics that are important to this area of study, such as
gender, ethno-development, and participatory development. While not
excluding other regions of the world, the course has a strong emphasis on
the politics of development in Latin America. McNulty
445. Hannah Arendt.
This seminar explores the life and work of Hannah Arendt, who remains
one of the most controversial and important political thinkers of the
20thcentury.ExamineshowherpersonalexperienceasaJewishémigré
extended to an exploration of identity, to a critique of contemporary
culture and politics and to a revived sense ofpolitics that emphasizes
human distinctiveness rather than anonymous group processes. Hammer
450. Political Psychology.
Politicalpsychology,asaninterdisciplinarypursuit,appliespsychological
concepts and methods to test theories about elite and mass political
behavior.Inessence,politicalpsychologistsgo“insidethemind”ofelites
and members of the mass public to explain various aspects of political
behavior.Classtopicsincludeattitudeformation,organization,andrecall;
cognition and information processing; values and ideology; emotion;
personality;ethnocentrism;authoritarianism;andpolarization. Ciuk
490. Independent Study.
IndependentstudydirectedbytheGovernmentstaff.Permissionofchair.
300 LEVEL TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE
OFFERED IN 2020–2021
Race,GenderandtheLaw.
East/WestandDecolonialTheory.
Tyrants, Hypocrites and Champions.
PublicOpinionandPoliticalBehavior.
ComparativePoliticalEconomyofAsia.
DissentinAmerica.
70 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
SENIOR SEMINARS EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
Fall 2020
Hannah Arendt.
PoliticalBiography.
Spring 2021
Secrets,Spies,Satellites.
PoliticalIdentityandthe2020Election.
PoliticalTheoryandRacialInjustice
HISTORY
Professor Richard Reitan, Chair
Professor Laura Shelton, Associate Chair
Douglas A. Anthony Professor of History
Van Gosse Professor of History
Benjamin McRee Professor of History
Maria D. Mitchell Professor of History
Abby M. Schrader Professor of History
Louise L. Stevenson Professor of History and American
(Fall 2020 only) Studies
Ted Pearson Associate Professor of History
Richard Reitan Associate Professor of History
Laura Shelton Associate Professor of History
Seçil Yilmaz Assistant Professor of History
A major in History provides students with a broad
understanding of long-term historical trends in 100-level
surveycourses;morein-depthknowledgeofregions,countries,
and issues in 200-level topics courses; an appreciation for
historiography and the practices of history in the methodology
course(HIS260);intensivestudyanddiscussionin300-level
readingscourses;and,nally,guidanceinintegratingallthese
components of the major with research, presentation, and
writingskillsin400-levelseminars.TheHistoryDepartmentis
committed to ensuring that its students emerge from Franklin
& Marshall with a well-rounded history education that
incorporates strong emphasis on regional distribution. It is also
committedtothegoalsofinternationalizingthecurriculumand
to this end encourages its majors and minors to study foreign
languages and pursue academic work abroad.
A major in History consists of 10 courses. These courses must
include HIS 260 (History Workshop: Methods and Practice),
which should be taken during the sophomore or junior year un-
less permission is given by the Chair to take it at some other
time;twoseminarsoroneseminarandoneIndependentStudy
Course(HIS490);andatleastthreeadditionalcourses atthe
300-or400-levels,onlyoneofwhichmaybeaDirectedRead-
ingsCourse(HIS390).Astudentmaycounttowardthemajor
one course taken at F&M but outside of the department with
priorapprovalbyhis/heradviser.Thiscoursemustbeatthe300-
or400-levelinitshomedepartmentandcomplementthestu-
dent’scourseofstudy.Thecoursewillbecountedasa300-level
course;itcannotfullladistributionrequirement.Historyma-
jorsmustfullladistributionrequirementbytakingtwocours-
esineachofthefollowingareas:UnitedStates(designatedU),
European(designatedE),andWorld(LatinAmerican,African,
Islamic,andAsian)history(designatedWH),twoofwhichmust
be pre-modern (designated PM). In most cases, majors must
takeatleastvehistorycoursesatFranklin&Marshall.
A minor in History consists of at least six courses. These
courses must include HIS 260 (History Workshop: Methods
andPractice),whichshouldbetakenduringthesophomoreor
junior year unless permission is given by the Chair to take it at
someothertime;oneseminar;andtwoadditionalcoursesatthe
300-level.Historyminorsmustfullladistributionrequirement
by taking one course in two of the following areas—United
States(U),European(E),andWorld(LatinAmerican,African,
Islamic, and Asian) history (WH)—one of which must be
designatedpre-modern(PM).Inmostcases,minorsmusttakeat
least four history courses at Franklin & Marshall.
A Joint Major in History consists of at least eight courses.
These courses must include HIS 260 (History Workshop:
Methods and Practice), which should be taken during the
sophomore or junior year unless permission is given by the
Chairtotakeitatsomeothertime;twoseminarsoroneseminar
andoneIndependentStudyCourse(HIS490);andatleasttwo
additionalcoursesatthe300-or400-levels,onlyoneofwhich
maybeaDirectedReadingsCourse(HIS390).JointMajors
must fulll a distribution requirement by taking one course
ineachofthefollowingareas:UnitedStates(designatedU),
European(designatedE),andWorld(LatinAmerican,African,
Islamic, andAsian) history (designated WH), one of which
mustbepre-modern(designatedPM).
Students should consult with their academic adviser or
the History Department Chair for questions concerning
requirementsforthemajor/minor.
The writing requirement in the History major is met by
completionofthenormalcoursesrequiredforthemajor.
History majors are advised that command of at least one foreign
language is important for those who plan to do graduate work
in history.
MajorsintheDepartmentofHistoryarestronglyencouragedto
study abroad because personal familiarity with foreign cultures
is increasingly useful in an ever more interconnected world.
Studentsinterestedinoff-campusstudyshouldmeetwiththeir
academic adviser or the History Department chairperson as
early as possible. Typically, students will receive History credit
atthe200-or300-levelforcoursesthattheytakeabroad;these
courses will often fulll other distributional requirements.
Those students considering study abroad during their entire
junioryearmusttaketheHistoryWorkshop(HIS260)bythe
second semester of their sophomore year at the College.
Majors and minors in the History Department have studied
abroad in the following programs in recent years: F&M in
Tuscany;IFSA-ButlerNationalUniversityofIreland,Galway;
IFSA-Butler Summer Language and Culture Program at
Universidad de Buenos Aires; SIT Study Abroad Peru; SU
AbroadFlorence,Italy;IESAbroadVienna;AdvancedStudies
inEngland;andF&MinParis.SeetheInternationalandOff-
CampusStudysectionoftheCatalogforfurtherinformation.
To be eligible for consideration for honors in History, students
musthaveagradepointaverageofnolessthan3.3inthemajor
andmustcompleteasignicantresearchprojectthatisdeemed
outstanding by the review board constituted by the student and
hisorheradviser.Studentsinterestedinstandingforhonors
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 71
in History are encouraged to consult with the department
chairperson as early as possible.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS) Language Studies requirement; (NSP) Natural Science
in Perspective; (NW) Non-Western Cultures requirement;
(PM) departmental Pre-Modern History requirement; (U)
departmentalUnitedStatesHistoryrequirement;(W)Writing
requirement;(WH)departmentalWorldHistoryrequirement.
SURVEY COURSES
Courses in this group are open to all students.
113. The History of Ancient Greece. (S) (E) (PM)
Ancient Greece from the Bronze Age to the death of Alexander the
GreatintheMediterraneanandNearEasterncontext.Studentsarealso
introducedtothe problemsand methods ofhistorical inquiry. Same as
CLS 113. Castor, Thorn
114. The History of Ancient Rome. (S) (E) (PM)
ThetransformationfromtheRepublictoPrincipateandthecollapseof
theempireareexplored.Studentsarealsointroducedtotheproblemsand
methodsofhistoricalinquiry.Same as CLS 114. Castor
115. The Middle Ages. (S) (E) (PM)
ThehistoryofwesternEuropefromthedeclineoftheRomanEmpireto
thebeginning of the 16th century.Emphasizes traditional themessuch
as monasticism, the development of feudal relations, and the conict
between church and state as well as other topics, including popular
religion, the impact of disease, and the life of the peasantry. McRee
117. Early Modern Europe. (S) (E) (PM)
FirsttracesthedevelopmentofRenaissanceideasandpoliticalinstitutions,
followed by a consideration of the religious and social changes in western
Europedownto1648.TopicsexploredincludeRenaissancehumanism,
thegrowthofmonarchicalpower,andtheProtestantReformation.McRee
121. Race, Revolution, and Reform: Europe in a Globalized 19th
Century. (S) (E)
FramestheEnlightenment,industrialrevolutions,theFrenchRevolution,
1848 revolutions, the Crimean War, wars of national unication, the
Dreyfus Affair, and colonial conquest within a global context with
emphasis on themes of nationalism, Liberalism, Marxism, gendered
spheres, modern racism, sexuality, and empire. Mitchell
122. Revolution, Dictatorship, and Death: Europe in the 20th-Century
World (S) (E)
Frames the First World War, Russian Revolution, National Socialism,
SecondWorldWar,Holocaust,ColdWar,decolonization,immigration,
Europeanunity,1968movements,1989revolutions,andYugoslavwars
withinaglobalcontextwithemphasisonthemesofdemocracy,socialism/
communism, fascism, nationalism, racism, gender and sexual identity,
and postwar reconciliation. Mitchell
125. Imperial Russian History. (S) (E) (PM)
Examines Russian history from Muscovite period through early 20th
century, emphasizing interaction of state and society and how social,
political, economic, and cultural events inuenced tsarist policies,
imperialexpansion,andeffortstoreformandrevolutionizeRussianlife.
Schrader
126. Russia in Revolution from Lenin to Putin. (S) (E)
Covers major historical developments in Russia and the Soviet Union
fromrevolutionaryeraof1905tothepresent.Tracesevolutionofnew
political,social,andculturalidentitiesandre-formulationanddismantling
ofoldonesduringtheSovieteraandbeyond. Schrader
127. History of the Islamic World
to the 18th Century. (NW) (S) (WH) (PM)
Examines the history of the Islamic world from the rise of Islam through
theearlymodernperiod(circa1800CE),withafocusontheemergence
and evolution of Muslim institutions, the material culture of Muslim
societies, and the major political and social changes that have shaped the
Islamic world. Yilmaz
128. The Making of the Modern Middle East. (NW) (S) (WH)
IntroductiontothehistoryoftheMiddleEast(includingIranandTurkey)
fromthelate18thcenturytothepresent.Focusesoncolonialism,therise
ofnationalism,andthemajorideologiesthathavemobilizedcommunities
across the region. Yilmaz
131. History of Colonial Latin America:
From Contact to Revolution (NW) (S) (WH) (PM)
SurveyofLatinAmericafrompre-Conquesttimestothepresent.Begins
with historical backgrounds of indigenous societies as well as Spain,
Portugal, andAfrica before 1492, followed by an examination of the
conquestandcolonialperiodthroughindependence.Thecoursefocuses
on the contributions of these major cultural groups in the formation of
colonial Latin American society and culture. Shelton
132. Latin America and Its People:
Revolution and Modernity (NW) (S) (WH)
Focuses on comparative history and political economy, U.S.-Latin
American relations, and cultural forces. The course introduces students to
themajortrends,problems,andforcesthathaveshapedcurrent-dayLatin
American societies since the late colonial period. A focus on case studies
is complemented by an examination of broad patterns of change in Latin
America as a whole. Shelton
136. U.S. Empire. (S) (U)
From the Mexican War through World War II (1845–1945) the U.S.
developed the intellectual and diplomatic arguments of empire while
acquiringtheterritorynecessaryforachievingglobalpredominance.This
course examines this rise to world power, including territorial expansion,
Europeandiplomacy,worldwarsandtheexertionofinuenceintoMexico
from a historical perspective that includes both critics and supporters of
U.S.worldinvolvement. Same as AMS 136. Stevenson
137. American History, 1491–1865. (S) (U)
Traces development of North America from the European encounter
with the continent in 1490s to end ofAmerican Civil War. Examines
colonization and its impact on the region’s indigenous peoples; the
evolution of free and unfree labor systems; the causes, events, and
consequencesoftheAmericanRevolution;andthecontinentalexpansion
of the New Republic. Concludes by examining political and cultural
tensions between north and south, the rise of the Abolition movement,
the Civil War, the revolution of Emancipation, and the rst years of
Reconstruction. Pearson
138. The United States and the Modern World. (S) (U)
Traces the evolution of the United States since the Civil War, as an
urban, industrial society marked by deep racial and ethnic cleavages.
Besidesstudyingmovementsandlegalstrugglesforequality,itexamines
America’sroleintheworld,frominterventioninLatinAmericathrough
twoworldwars,theColdWar,andVietnam.Studentscanexpecttouse
primary documents and engage in debates. Gosse
141. History of North and West Africa. (NW) (S) (WH)
IntroductiontomajorthemesinthehistoryofNorthandWestAfricafrom
ancientEgyptthroughthepresentcrisisinSudan.EmphasisfallsonWest
Africanpoliticalandsocialformations,domesticandtrans-Atlanticslave
systems, notions of identity, the role of Islam, and the rise and fall of
colonialism.Studentsuseprimarysourcestoexplorehistoricalproblems.
Same as AFS 141. Anthony
142. History of East and Southern Africa. (NW) (S) (WH)
IntroductiontomajorthemesinthehistoryofEast,Central,andSouthern
AfricafromtheBantumigrationthroughtheRwandangenocide.Emphasis
fallson social, political,and religious changein pre-colonialAfrica and
resistance to slavery and colonialism. Students use primary sources to
explore historical problems. Final unit explores the legacy of colonialism in
the1994Rwandangenocide.Same as AFS 142. Anthony
72 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
149. Africa and the Black World: Concepts and Context. (NW) (S)
Explorestheemergenceofcontinental(“African”)andracial(“Black”)
identitieswithparticularemphasisontherolesofthetrans-Atlanticslave
trade, the rise of racial thought in Europe and the Americas, and the
impact of European imperialism. Same as AFS 149. Anthony
151. Premodern East Asian History. (NW) (S) (WH) (PM)
Historical introduction to various cultures of East Asia, from ancient
archeologicalrecordstoearly17thcenturywithgeographicalfocuson
theregionencompassingpresent-dayChina,Korea,andJapan.Provides
students with basic literacy in key developments in East Asian history and
encourages students to critically assess this history through the themes of
cultureandprogress.NopriorbackgroundonEastAsiaisrequired.
Reitan
152. Modern East Asian History. (NW) (S) (WH)
ProvidesanintroductiontotheculturesofEastAsia(China,Japan,and
toalesserextent,Korea)fromthe17thcenturytothepresentthrough
themesofidentity,change,andconict.Throughout,wewillfocusour
attention not only on diplomatic events and on the thought and actions of
eliteordominantgroups,butalsoonthosemarginalizedonthebasisof
race, class, religion, gender, and so forth. Reitan
153. Premodern Jewish History:
Jews of East and West through the Middle Ages. (NW) (S) (PM) (WH)
Introduction to Jewish history, beginning with rst centuries of the
CommonEra and continuingto end of17th century. Examinescentral
themes and patterns in Jewish history with focus on the development of
major Jewish communities in Christian Europe and the Arab/Muslim
world. Course looks at relationships between Jewish and non-Jewish
cultures and communities during this time.Same as JST/RST 153.
Staff
154. Jews in the Modern World. (S) (E)
Introductiontothemodernerafromlate18thcenturyEmancipationand
Enlightenmentthroughthemid-20thcentury,tracingthetransformations
ofJewishlife.Broadhistoricalsketchesarecombinedwithclosereadings
ofparticulartexts,movements,andthinkerstoeshoutthecontoursand
dynamics of the Jewish experience in the modern world. Major events of
Jewishhistoryof20thcentury(theHolocaust,foundationoftheStateof
Israel,andmassmigrationofEuropeanJewstotheAmericas)areexam-
ined through secondary and primary sources. Same as JST/RST 154.
Staff
TOPICS COURSES (200-LEVEL)
233. African American History. (S) (U)
An advanced course tracing the progress of African Americans from
slavery to freedom, beginning in the largerAtlantic worldof the 17th
and18thcenturies,andcontinuingthroughtheAmericanRevolution,the
battle against slavery culminating in the Civil War, and the struggle for
blackcitizenshipbetweentheReconstructionof1865–1877andthe“long
civil rights movement” of the 20th century. Same as AFS 233. Gosse
235. U.S.-Mexico Borderlands. (NW) (S) (WH)
Thiscourse introduces students to thehistory of the present-day U.S.-
Mexico border region. Although much of the course focuses on the past
150years,wewillalsoexplorehowearlyindigenouspeopleslivedinthe
region and interacted with the environment, and examine the legacy of
colonialismintheregionpriortotheU.S.-MexicoWar.
Same as AMS 235. Shelton
250. Imperialism and Revolution in Modern China. (S) (NW) (WH)
ProvidesanintroductiontothemodernhistoryofChinafromthenal
yearsofQianlong’sreignatthecloseofthe18thcenturytothePeople’s
Republictoday.Throughthemesofcontrolanddissent,weaddressChina’s
struggleagainstimperialistaggressionduringthe19thcentury;revolution
anddomesticchangewithinChina;theemergenceofnationalistcontrol
undertheGuomindang;thevictoryofcommunistforcesin1949;andthe
manydomesticandinternationalpressuresfacingthePeople’sRepublic
today. Reitan
255. Dictatorship, Division, and Democracy
in Modern German History. (S) (E)
Focuses on continuities and ruptures in German society during the
SecondEmpire,theWeimarRepublic,NationalSocialism,thecompeting
Republics, and the (unied) Federal Republic of Germany. Major
questionsincludeGermanindustrialandstateformation;gender,class,
andreligiousidentities;theimpactoftotalwar;economicandpolitical
crisis; the roots of dictatorship and democracy; the organization of
genocide;andEuropeanunity.Same as GST 255. Mitchell
260. History Workshop: Methods and Practice.
Trains students in the methodology and practice of history, in preparation
for seminar research and reading and the scholarly practice of history. The
twoprincipalobjectivesoftheHistoryWorkshopare“historiographical
literacy” (a reasonably comprehensive grasp of historical approaches,
methodologies,andschoolsofanalysis)andlearningthe“mechanicsof
doinghistory”(howtoresearchandwritehistory,includingethicaland
practical issues of archival work, library and web use, the mechanics of
citation,andmore).Classescenteroncriticalanalysisofreadings,textual
interpretation of primary documents, and library activities. Open to all
students,butpriorityisgrantedtomajorsandminors.Shouldbetaken
during the sophomore or junior year. Pearson, Reitan, Schrader
282. Vietnam and the Cold War. (S) (U)
This course examines the longest armed conict in our history, the
Vietnamese-AmericanWarthatbeganin 1946, when the UnitedStates
began aiding the French effort to take back control of their colony in
Indochina,andendedwithU.S.defeatin1975.Itplacesthatconictin
thelargercontextofnationalliberationintheThirdWorld(theformerly
colonialregionsofAfrica,Asia,andLatinAmerica). Same as AMS282.
Gosse
READINGS COURSES (300-LEVEL)
310. American Masculinities. (S) (U)
Explores the importance of masculinity and its various constructions in
American history and the contemporary period. We begin by examining
the theoretical and historical foundations of American masculinities. We
willfocusonkeywaysinwhichmen(andwomen)sustainandrecreate
masculinities. Topics include manhood and the workplace, politics,
sports, courtship, fatherhood, military, immigration and ethnicity, crime
and prisons, and religion. Same as AMS/WGS 310. Deslippe
311. History of Medicine. (S) (U) (NSP)
The history of medicine with particular attention to American medicine.
The relationship between medicine and society is studied in its historical
context. We look in detail at some trends in modern medicine and the
current debate over national health care policy in light of the history of
medicine. Same as STS 311. Strick
312. Environmental History. (S)
Examination of various approaches to environmental and ecological
history. Focuses on ways in which the physical and biological world have
affected human history and on ways in which human social and political
organization,economicactivities,culturalvaluesandscientictheories
have shaped our alteration and conservation of nature. Selected case
studies from environmental and ecological history, with emphasis on the
17ththroughthe20thcenturies.Same as ENE/STS 312. Strick
315. The End of the Middle Ages. (S) (E) (PM)
Duringthe14thand15thcenturieswesternEuropeansexperiencedaseries
of calamities: overpopulation and food shortages, protracted military
struggles,and,mostnotably,theBlackDeath.Europeansalsowitnessed
new challenges to papal authority, religious orthodoxy, and established
patterns of intellectual discourse. In this course we will examine those
developments, the ways in which people of the time responded to them,
and the impact they had on European society, economy, politics, and
culture. McRee
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 73
316. Tudor-Stuart England. (S) (E) (PM)
EnglishhistoryfromthecomingoftheTudorsin1485tothe“Glorious
Revolution”1688–89.Particularattentionwillbedevotedtothereligious
reformationsofthe16thcentury,thecivilwarandpoliticalupheavalsof
the17thcentury,andtheeffectsthatbothdevelopmentshadonthelives
of English men and women. McRee
318. Environmental History of Latin America. (NW) (S) (WH)
This course will examine the intersections of human history and culture
with environmental change in Latin America from the early colonial
periodto the present.Themajor themes includethe consequencesand
signicanceoftheColombianExchange,therolesofreligionandculture
inshapinghumanrelationshipswithnature,thedevelopmentofexport-
ledagriculture,urbanization,andtheemergenceofdiverseenvironmental
movements within Latin America. We will explore the origins of major
environmental problems and the ways people have responded to these
challenges. The course will also address how historians have approached
the study of the environment. Same as ENE 318. Shelton
319. Making Sense of Putin’s Russia: From Perestroika to Presidential
Election Tampering. (S) (E)
This course will explore these issues by examining the factors leading
up to the collapse of the Soviet Union: Gorbachev’s attempts to
reinvigorate the system economically and politically through his policies
of perestroika and glasnost’ that ended with the collapse of the Berlin
Walland breakup of the Soviet Union; the creation ofthe present-day
RussianregimeunderYeltsin,whoseclose ties totheoligarchs helped
usher in an era of unprecedented corruption and the emergence of the
Russianmaya;andthechangeinleadershipfromYeltsintoVladimir
Putin, whose crackdown on democratic institutions like the free press
and civil liberties and whose Cold-War-era style posturing alarms the
Westandhasstokedthebeginningsofgrass-rootsoppositionmovements
(and ruthless crackdown against them)at home. In addition tolecture
and discussion of common readings, students will do presentations of
focusedtopicsthat they willthenturn into nalpapersfor the course.
Same as IST/RUS 319. Schrader
320. American Women and Social Movements Since 1900. (S) (U)
An interdisciplinary study of the various ways women have participated
in American society and politics. Topics include the suffrage movement,
modernmodesofpoliticalparticipation,andtheNewDealandWorldWar
II. Critical analysis of the meaning of feminism and special attention to
thepost-1945period.Same as AMS/WGS 320. Deslippe
321. Museum Mysteries. (S)
In this hands-on class, students will learn how to identify American
artifacts by their materials, construction, design, and age. Investigations
will include cataloguing and interpretive strategies that locate objects
in historical and cultural contexts. In other words, students will learn to
makeamuteobjecttellits“story.”Studentswilldeveloptheseskillsin
thePhillipsMuseumofArt oncampusandincollaborationwithother
collecting institutions in Lancaster and will present their discoveries
as an exhibition plan or research paper. Same as AMS 321.Permission
required. Zimmerman
323. Cuba and the United States: The Closest of Strangers. (S)
This course examines the long history of relations between North
Americans and Cubans, two peoples separated by only 90 miles. Our
topics will range from baseball to guerrilla warfare, from the Mambo to the
Missile Crisis. This history includes a shared commitment to anticolonial
liberation;annexationistschemesamongSouthernslaveholders;repeated
militaryinterventionsbytheUnitedStates;solidarityfromtheU.S.with
variousCubanRevolutions,includingbutnotlimitedtoFidelCastro’s;
and two hundred years of cultural contact between African Americans
andAfro-CubansthathasprofoundlyinuencedU.S.culture,music,and
sports. Same as AFS/AMS 323. Gosse
330. Ethnic America. (S)
Explores the meaning and signicance of ethnicity in America by
examining the historical and contemporary experiences of immigrants
and their children. The heart of the course is class discussion of readings,
lms,andprimarydocuments.Wewillaugmentthesewithgroupwork,
lectures, and short documentary and feature lm clips. In addition to
completingweeklyshortreadingresponsepapersandsubmittingatake-
homenalexamination,studentswillsubmita“lmfest”essayonthree
feature lms that address ethnicity and a“lecture proposal” project in
which they will propose a new topic to be included in a future offering of
“EthnicAmerica.”Same as AMS 330. Deslippe
334. The American South:
Slavery, Secession and War, 1800–1865. (S) (U)
Traces the antebellum south and the emergence of a distinct southern
identity and consciousness by examining the following topics: slavery
(fromtheperspectiveofbothmastersandslaves),thedispossessionof
theNativeAmericans, westwardexpansion andterritorial ambitionsin
Central America and the Caribbean, politics at the national and state level,
andthegrowthoftheregion’sintellectuallife.Same as AFS 334.
Pearson
339. Civil War and Reconstruction. (S) (U)
Interdisciplinary course asks students to investigate the causes, events,
and results of the American Civil War and its enduring impact on
American life. The class usually takes one all-day trip to battleelds.
No prerequisite, although some background in 19th-century history is
helpful. Same as AMS 339. Stevenson
349. Modern South Africa. (NW) (S) (WH)
With an emphasis on the 20th century, this course explores the emergence
of South Africa’s multi-racial society. Major themes include African
statesystems,Europeanimmigrationandconquest,Africans’individual
and collective responses to white supremacy, and changing gender
roles.Studentsusehistoricaldocuments,lm,andctioninadditionto
secondaryreadings. Participation is an important component of course
grade. Same as AFS 349. Anthony
351. China and the Global Environmental Crisis. (NW) (S) (WH)
This course links the local to the global, moving from ecological issues
within China to related social issues, to global ecological-economic
conditions.The course examines specic cases of environmental harm
within China; provides a basic environmental-scientic knowledge
ofthese problems; studiesthe relationshipbetween these casesstudies
andpoverty,governmentcorruption,migration,ethnicconict,etc.;and
analyzeshowtheaboveconditionsinChinaareintertwinedwithglobal
capitalism, global poverty, and other conditions on the global level. Same
as ENE/STS 351. Reitan
352. From the Margins of Japanese History. (S) (WH)
Thepurposeofthiscourseis to re-thinkJapanesehistorybyengaging
with the writings, images, and actions of those on the intellectual fringes
of society: eccentrics, rebels, prostitutes, heretics, fools, outcasts, fanatics,
women,andothers.Wewillask:Wherearethe“margins”ofasociety?
How do members of “mainstream” society represent those on the
margins?Howdothoseonthemarginsresist,redirect,orinternalizethese
representations?Finally,whatsignicancedothesequestionshaveforus
inthepresent? Reitan
353. China in the Western Imagination. (S) (WH) (NW)
Thiscoursedealswithhow“Western”travelers,philosophers,andothers
fromthe13th century tothepresent have imaginedChina.Whystudy
an“imagined”China?Whynotstudythe“realthing”?Isitpossibleto
presentanobjectiveaccountofthe“real”Chinaorareallnarrativesof
Chinacoloredbytheauthor’sownculturalcontext?Wewilladdressthese
questions through the works of Marco Polo, Voltaire, Hegel, Calvino,
Kafka, and others. Familiarity with Chinese history is recommended but
notrequired. Reitan
356. European Sexualities. (S) (E)
Exploresthe transnationalhistory of European sexualities from the 18th
century through the present with special focus on the intersection of
sexualitywithpoliticsandFoucauldian,performance,queer,anddisability
theories. Important themes, including gendered citizenship, dictatorship,
democracy, dechristianization, and racialized sexualities, provide a
frameworkwithinwhichspecictopicssuchasfemale political activity,
prostitution, homosexuality, bisexuality, pornography, the new woman,
pronatalism, sexual revolution, and fertility are examined.
Same as WGS 356. Mitchell
74 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
383. Sex, Lies and Book Burning:
Life and Work of Wilhelm Reich. (S)
Upper level seminar: A survey of the life and work of famous
psychoanalyst, controversial laboratory scientist Wilhelm Reich. The
course reviews a wide range of Reich’s writings from psychology,
politicalscience,tobiologyandphysics(95%primarysourcereadings).
WealsosurveythehistoricalcontextofAustriaandGermany1918-1939
andtheU.S.1939-1957.FinallywelookindepthatReich’sclashwiththe
U.S.governmentoverwhetherscienticworkcanbejudgedinacourtof
lawandthegovernment-orderedburningofhisbooksin1956and1960.
Same as STS/WGS 383. Strick
385. The Darwinian Revolution. (S) (E) (NSP)
Thisseminarcoursedrawsonhistoricalandscienticworkto analyze
therootsofDarwinianthinkingineconomics,socialpolicytowardthe
poor,religiousthought,politics,andthesciencesinwhichDarwinwas
trained. In individual research projects, students assess the ways in which
“Darwinism”wasappliedforsocial,political,economic,andtheological
purposes,aswellasscienticones.Thiscourseprovidesthehistorical
background necessary for understanding Darwinian biology and the
present-day Creation/evolution conict. Prerequisite: Permission of
instructorrequiredforrst-yearstudentstoenroll.Same as STS 385.
Strick
391. Directed Readings.
Tutorial. Topics adapted to the knowledge and interests of the individual
student. Admission by consent of the instructor.
HISTORY SEMINARS
HIS260isaprerequisiteorcorequisiteforseminarenrollment
by History majors and minors. Some seminars have other
prerequisites (see relevant department listings). History
seminars are open to all students, although majors, minors,
seniors, and juniors have priority when enrolling.
400. Selected Studies in Medieval History. (S) (E) (PM)
Readingsandresearchonselectedtopicsinmedievalsocialandpolitical
history. Seminar topics include “Plague,Famine, War,and the End of
the Middle Ages,” “Medieval Urban Life,” and “Heretics, Saints, and
Sinners.” McRee
403. Selected Studies in Modern European History. (S) (E)
Readings and research in selected aspects of the political, social, and
culturalhistoryofModernEurope.Seminartopicsinclude“RaceinModern
Europe,” “Social Discipline and Social Deviance: The Construction of
ModernEuropeanSubjectivity,”“TheFrenchRevolution,”“ThePolitics
ofMemory,”“HumanRightsandCivilRights,”and“UrbanHistoryin
Europe.” Schrader, Mitchell
405. Selected Studies in Jewish History. (S) (E)
Readingsandresearchonvarioustopics,periods,andproblemsofJewish
history. Same as JST 405. Staff
407. Selected Studies in Latin American History. (NW) (S) (WH)
Readings and research in problems in the political, economic, social,
andculturalhistoryofLatinAmerica.Seminartopicsinclude“Sexand
SexualityinLatinAmerica.”Same as WGS 407. Shelton
408, 420. Selected Topics in the Cultural
and Intellectual History of the United States. (S) (U)
Seminartopicsinclude“Lincoln”and“DuringWartime.”
Same as AMS 420. Stevenson
409, 410, 411. Selected Studies in the Social
and Political History of North America. (S) (U)
ReadingsandresearchinthesocialandpoliticalhistoryofNorthAmerica.
Seminartopicsinclude“TheAmericanSouth,”“ColonialAmerica,”“The
AmericanRevolution,”“TheAtlanticWorld,”“Colonies,Conquestsand
Empires in the New World,” “Irregular Wars:Insurgency and Counter-
InsurgencyintheModernWorld,”“Vietnam,theColdWar,andAfter,”
“RightsForAll:TheDemocraticRevolutioninAmerica.” Gosse, Pearson
421. Selected Studies in Greek History. (S) (E)
A close examination of a particular period, place, or individual in ancient
Greekhistory.Seminartopicsinclude“AlexandertheGreat”and“Archaic
Greece.”Prerequisite:CLS/HIS113.Same as CLS 421. Castor
422. Selected Studies in Roman History. (S)
A close examination of a particular period, place, or individual in ancient
Romanhistory.Seminartopicsinclude“ImperialWomen:PowerBehind
theThrone,”“TheRiseofRome,”and“TheRomanEmpire.”Prerequisite:
CLS/HIS114. Same as CLS 422. Castor
430. Selected Studies in African History. (NW) (S) (WH)
Readings and research in selected topics of the political, social, and
cultural history of Africa. See relevant departmental offerings for
prerequisites.Seminartopicsinclude“SlaveryinAfrica.”
Same as AFS 430. Anthony
450. Selected Studies in East Asian History. (NW) (S) (WH)
Readings and research in selected topics of the social, political, and
cultural history of East Asia. Seminar topics include “Ecology and
JapaneseHistory”and“MemoriesofEmpire.” Reitan
460. Selected Studies in the History
of the Middle East. (NW) (S) (WH)
Readingsandresearchinselectedtopicsofthepolitical,socialandcultural
historyoftheIslamicworld.Seminartopicsinclude“WomenandGender
intheMiddleEast”and“HumanitarianismintheMiddleEast.” Yilmaz
490. Independent Study.
IndependentstudydirectedbymembersoftheHistorystaff.Permission
ofchairpersonrequired.
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
TheAmericanRadicalTradition.
TheBodyinMiddleEastHistory.
Hamilton and Jefferson.
Lincoln.
MedicineandHealingintheMediterranean,1300-2000.
PandemicsinHistory.
World War I.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 75
INTERNATIONAL STUDIES
Professor Doug Anthony, Chair
MEMBERS OF THE INTERNATIONAL STUDIES
PROGRAM COMMITTEE
Doug Anthony Professor of History
Dan Ardia Professor of Biology
Lisa Gasbarrone Professor of French
Jerome Hodos Associate Professor of Sociology
Eve Bratman Assistant Professor of Environmental
Studies
Shuai Shao Teaching Professor of Chinese
Additional faculty not on the program committee
also contribute to this program.
ThemissionoftheInternationalStudiesProgramistounitea
cohort of students who, both individually and in collaboration,
will broaden the experience of their various major programs
as they develop international perspectives and immerse
themselves in the languages and cultures of non-English-
speaking countries. The program prepares students for future
study, careers and life in our increasingly unbordered world.
TheInternationalStudiesProgramofferstwominors:onein
InternationalStudiesandone inAreaStudies.Studentsmay
alsochooseajointmajorwithInternationalStudies,orearna
concentration.
A minor in International Studies requires that a student
take(1)takeIST200,typicallyintherequiresthatastudent
take(1)takeIST200,typicallyintherstorsophomoreyear;
(2) propose a coherent program offour speciccourses (of
whichnomorethantwocanoverlapwithcoursesinthemajor)
focusing on a particular geographical or topical theme; (3)
studyforatleastonesemesteroutsidetheUnitedStatesina
non-English-speakingenvironment,including(wherefeasible)
doing coursework or research in the local language; (4)
achieveanadvancedlevelofprociencyinaforeignlanguage
(normallymarkedbysuccessfulcompletionofacourseatthe
300level);and(5)completeIST489,typicallyduringfallof
thesenioryear.Inaddition,whilenotrequired,aninternational
internship is highly recommended.
A joint major in International Studies (1) take IST 200,
typically during spring of the rst or sophomore year; (2)
propose a coherent program of six elective courses focusing on
a particular geographical or topical theme, one of which must
benumbered300 or above,and which mayinclude courses
takenabroadwiththeapprovaloftheprogramchair;(3)study
foratleastonesemesteroutsidetheUnitedStatesinanon-
English-speaking environment, including (where feasible)
doing coursework or research in the local language; (4)
achieveanadvancedlevelofprociencyinaforeignlanguage
(normallymarkedbysuccessfulcompletionofacourseatthe
300level);and(5)completeIST489.Jointmajorsarestrongly
encouragedtoincludeGOV130,ANT100andECO100or
103amongtheirelectives.
A minor in Area Studies requires that a student take six
courses on a given geograprequires that a student take six
courses on a given geographical area, of which at least two
mustbeatthe300levelorabove,selectedinconsultationwith
afacultymemberspecializinginthatarea.TheChairofthe
InternationalStudiesProgramwillreferinterestedstudentsto
an appropriate adviser, with whom the student will develop a
list of appropriate courses. The minor declaration form must
include signatures of chairpersons of departments offering the
coursesincludedinastudent’sprogramandthesignatureofthe
ChairoftheInternationalStudiesProgram.Topicsforwhich
there is no existing minor housed in a regular department or
program are appropriate for this minor, which would take its
name from the geographical area of its emphasis, for example,
African, Chinese, European Union, Francophone, Iberian,
Japanese, Middle Eastern or Latin American Studies. An
AreaStudiesminormayincludecoursesinalanguageother
than English, although ordinarily no more than four will be
foreignlanguagecourses.IST200and489couldbeapartof
thisminor,but are notrequired.Studyabroad and language
prociencyarestronglyrecommendedbutnotrequired.
In addition to the minor, the International Studies Program
offersaconcentration.Requirementsfortheconcentrationare
thesameasfortheInternationalStudiesminorexceptthatthe
concentrationrequiresonlytwocoursesinadditiontoIST200
andIST489.Thesetwocoursescanbeeitherinsideoroutside
thestudent’smajorandareexpectedtocoherewithandbring
a signicant internationaldimension to thestudent’schosen
major.
Recent students in the program have studied abroad in
Argentina, Bolivia, China, Denmark, Dominican Republic,
France,Germany,Italy,Jordan,Mongolia,Spain,Switzerland,
and Uganda through programs run by the School for
InternationalTraining(SIT),theInstitutefortheInternational
Education of Students (IES) and various U.S. colleges and
universities. See the International Programs section of the
Catalog for further information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows. Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
200. Introduction to International Studies. (S) (NW)
Interdisciplinary course required for students with an International
Studiesminororconcentration.Throughcoordinatedlecturesbyateam
of F&M faculty and guest speakers, students will consider topics such
as globalization, security, migration, human rights, sustainability, and
consumerisminthelightofvariousdisciplines.OfferedeverySpring.
Anthony
228. Middle Eastern Music and Culture. (A) (NW)
This interdisciplinary course will explore the musical identities of the
Middle East and North Africa in terms of the complex sociological,
historical, and political processes that have shaped the region. We will
proceed from the idea that music is a powerful agent in the negotiation
of power and identity, and examine the ways in which it has been
utilizedthroughouttransformativeperiodsofhistory.Particularattention
will be given to the transnational and diasporic nature of musics under
consideration. Classical, folk, and popular musical traditions will be
considered, as will the roles of art, popular culture, and mass media.
Same as MUS 228. Alajaji
314. Global Environmental Politics. (S)
Analysis of environmental problem denition and policy solutions
in different countries, with particular focus on the developing world.
Effects of political drivers of air and water pollution, land cover change,
and biodiversity conservation. Inuence of political structures, power
relations, cultural values, ecological dynamics, and social interactions
onenvironmentalpolitics.Rolesofnationalandmultilateralinstitutions,
NGOs,andcivilsocietyinpolicydebates.Outcomesofmulti-stakeholder
76 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
negotiations over environmental governance of global commons,
includingNorth-Southdisputes.Prerequisite:ENV/ENE216/GOV100.
CountsasHumanEnvironmentcorecourseforEnvironmentalStudies.
Same as GOV374 and ENE314. Bratman
319. Making Sense of Putin’s Russia: From Perestroika to Presidential
Election Tampering (S)
This course will explore these issues by examining the factors leading
up to the collapse of the Soviet Union: Gorbachev’s attempts to
reinvigorate the system economically and politically through his policies
ofperestroikaandglasnost’thatendedwiththecollapseoftheBerlinWall
andbreakupoftheSovietUnion;thecreationofthepresent-dayRussian
regime under Yeltsin, whose close ties to the oligarchs helped usher in
an era of unprecedented corruption and the emergenceof the Russian
maa; and the change in leadership from Yeltsin to Vladimir Putin,
whose crackdown on democratic institutions like the free press and civil
libertiesandwhoseCold-War-erastyleposturingalarmstheWestandhas
stokedthebeginningsofgrass-rootsoppositionmovements(andruthless
crackdownagainstthem)athome.Inadditiontolectureanddiscussion
of common readings, students will do presentations of focused topics that
theywillthenturnintonalpapersforthecourse.
Same as HIS/RUS 319. Schrader
327. Latin American Politics. (NW) (S)
This course introduces students to Latin American government and
politics. The course provides a brief overview of the region’s history
andadiscussionofsomeofthekeyissuesshapingtheregion’spolitics,
including:authoritarianismanddemocracy;developmentanddependency;
and revolution. The rest of the course will be dedicated to a survey of the
politics of several countries from different areas of Latin America.
Same as GOV327. McNulty
350. International Business. (S)
Students in this course will learn about the history of international
business, investigate the political and economic institutions that structure
the global economy, and explore the impact of international environments
onrm-leveldecisions.SameasBOS350. Kim
489. International Studies Seminar. (S) (NW)
This capstone seminar for International Studies seniors is also open
to other seniors with permission of the instructor. The course will be
organizedaroundacoresetofreadingsononebroadinternationaltopic:
inFall 2017Power,Identity, and Resistance in the Post-ColonialAge.
Students will dene an individualized research program, building on
their previous coursework in International Studies, share readings and
ndingswithfellowseminarstudentsandproduceanalpaperandoral
presentation.Prerequisite:IST200.OfferedeveryFall. Alajaji, Anthony
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
HIS/IST372.WorldWarI.
SOC/IST471.GlobalUrbanism.
ITALIAN STUDIES AND
HEBREW
Professor Marco Di Giulio, Chair
L. Scott Lerner Arthur and Katherine Shadek
(on leave 2020-21) Professor of the Humanities and
French and Italian
Giovanna Faleschini Lerner Professor of Italian
Marco Di Giulio Associate Professor of Hebrew
Language and Literature
Stefania Benini Visiting Assistant Professor of
Italian
Anna Maria Bertini Jones Senior Adjunct Instructor of Italian
Maya Greenshpan Hebrew and Italian Language
Teaching Fellow
ITALIAN STUDIES
StudentswhochoosetostudyItalianatFranklinandMarshall
immerse themselves in the rich humanistic tradition of Italian
cultureandreectcriticallyonItaly’suniquepositioninglobal
society. Those who earn a major or minor in Italian attain
prociency in the language and gain a solid knowledge of
Italy’scontributionstoliterature,cinema,thearts,andpolitics.
Engaging in humanistic inquiry for its own sake, students
of Italian learn to excel in critical analysis, creative thinking
and effective written and oral communication, with the added
cognitive and practical benets of immersion in a foreign
language. They thus become creative interpreters of Italian
culturewhileacquiringcoreskillsthatareeasilytransferable
toanynumberofotherareas.Studentswhocompleteamajor
orminorinItalianwill havebuiltafoundation forlife-long
learningandsuccessinany21st-centurycareer.
Italy is conceived broadly and dynamically in this program, as
a space shaped by global forces and the circulation of objects,
people, and ideas across borders. Italian at F&M is typically
pursuedasafour-yearcourseofstudyinwhichstudentstake
one course in the program during each semester they are on
campusandalsostudyabroadwithF&M’ssix-weeksummer
program in Tuscany and/or for a semester or a full year at
anapproved program inPadua, Milan, Florence,Perugiaor
elsewhere.
On campus, small classes allow students to work closely with
faculty in an informal atmosphere that encourages the pursuit
of individual intellectual interests and learning. Courses are
conducted in Italian from the introductory levels, and students
are encouraged to practice the language outside of class
throughavarietyofco-andextra-curricularopportunities.
The Italian Minor and Major prepare students for any number
of future careers. In some cases, these include research and
teaching in the humanities and social sciences: in History,
Classics, History of Art, Comparative Literature, Urban
Studies,FilmStudies,Architecture,orotherareas.Italian,on
its own or as part of a double or joint major, may also serve
asanexcellentfoundationforawiderangeofpost-graduate
professional programs, including, for example, those in public
or business administration, law, or the healing arts. Recent
graduatesoftheDepartmenthavepursuedcareersineducation
and research, government and diplomatic service, travel and
tourism, music and art.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 77
Italian Major
TheItalianDepartmentoffersamajorwithtwodistincttracks,
one in Italian and one in Italian Studies.
The Italian track involves all coursework in the Italian
Department,andthereforeintheItalianlanguage.Thistrack
offersthegreatestopportunityfor rening, using,andbeing
exposed to the language as a cultural form shaped by its
political, historical, literary, artistic, and social contexts.
TheItalianStudiestrackallowsstudentstotaketwocourses
forthemajoroutsideoftheDepartment.Inthesetwocourses,
taught in English, students approach Italian history and culture
throughthelensesofspecichumanisticelds:ArtHistory,
Classics, Comparative Literature, History, or Music.
The Italian track consists of the following ten courses:
ITA201,ITA202,ITA310,
onecourseamongITA354,ITA355,orITA356
twodepartmentalelectivesatthe200-levelorabove*
twocoursesamongITA365,ITA366,ITA367,orITA368
oneadditionalelectiveatthe300levelorabove*
ITA481oranother400-levelcourse.
The Italian Studies track consists of the following ten courses:
ITA201,ITA202,ITA310,
onecourseamongITA354,ITA355,orITA356
onedepartmentalelectiveatthe200-levelorabove*
twocoursesamongITA365,ITA366,ITA367,orITA368
ITA481oranother400-levelcourse,
and two courses taught in English, chosen among:
ComparativeLiteraryStudies:
Anycross-listedcourseinITA/LIT
LIT101 Literatures of the World: Introduction to
ComparativeLiteraryStudies
Classics:
CLS/HIS114 History of Ancient Rome, CLS/ART117
Roman Art and Archeology, CLS322 Selected Studies
in Roman History, CLS37X Topics in Roman Art and
Archaeology(thisisapermanentcourseeventhoughithas
the-7Xending.)
History:
HIS/CLS114HistoryofAncientRome,HIS115TheMiddle
Ages,HIS117Early Modern Europe,HIS121 Revolution
and Reform: Europe in the 19th Century, and HIS122
Revolution, Dictatorship, and Death: Europe in the 20th
Century,HIS315EndofMiddleAges
Music:
MUS230 Music History 1: Antiquity to 1750, MUS231
MusicHistory 2: 1750 toPresent, MUS285,385, or485
Voice
Art History:
ART231Art andArchitecture of the Italian Renaissance,
ART/CLS117RomanArtandArcheology
*Anelectivecouldbeanyother300-levelcoursefromthelist
above, a course taken with F&M in Tuscany, a topics course
offered by a visiting or permanent faculty member, or a class
taken abroad.
Students who have placed at the 300 level may design a
differentsequenceinconsultationwiththeDepartmentchair.
Studentsmayincludeuptotwoelectivesfromstudyabroad
inthemajorwiththeapprovaloftheDepartmentchair.The
writingrequirementintheItalianmajorismetbycompletion
oftheregularcoursesequencerequiredtoachievethemajor.
Italian Minor
A minor in Italian consists of six courses beyond ITA101.
Students must take ITA310 and at least one course among
ITA354, ITA355, ITA356, ITA365, ITA366, ITA367, or
ITA368.Theymaytakeoneadditionalelectiveatthe200level
or above, which should be chosen in consultation with the
Departmentchair.Studentsmustcompleteallcourseworkin
Italian.Studentsmayincludeintheminoruptotwocourses
taken abroad with another institution with the approval of the
chair.Studentswhohaveplacedatthe300levelmaydesigna
differentsequenceinconsultationwiththeDepartmentchair.
Joint and Special Studies Majors
StudentsareabletointegrateItalianStudiesandotherelds
ofacademicinterestbydesigningaJointoraSpecialStudies
MajorthatincludesItalian.ASpecialStudiesMajorincluding
Italian will consists of ve courses in Italian, ve courses
divided between two other programs or departments, and one
research course, SPC490. A Joint Major consists of eight
courses in Italian and eight courses in another department.
Typically, the Italian component of a joint major will consists
of ITA201, ITA202, ITA310, two courses among ITA354,
ITA355,ITA356,ITA365,ITA366,ITA367,orITA368,asenior
seminar or another 400-level course, and two departmental
coursesthatreecttheintersectinginterestsoftheindividual
student, selected in consultation with the Department chair.
JointMajorshavecombined--forexample--Theater,Spanish,
English, History, Business Organization and Society with
Italian,andSpecialStudiesMajorshavedesignedtheirown
programsinComparativeLiteratureorRomanceLanguages.
Study Abroad
A study abroad experience in Italy is integral to the learning
goals of the Italian Major and Minor and is strongly
encouraged.StudyinginItalyofferstheopportunitytopractice
andstrengthenlinguisticcompetence,contextualizeslanguage
learning in the evolving social realities of Italy, develops
students’ cross-cultural competencies, and constitutes an
occasion for self-reection and self-awareness in the face
of cultural difference. Franklin & Marshall has its own
immersion summer study abroad program in Tuscany, offering
courses in Italian language and culture, advanced courses in
literature, and independent studies, which are fully integrated
withtheon-campuscurriculum(seeSummerTravelCourses
for information about coursework). The Department offers
this program most summers and nancial aid is available.
In recent years, students of Italian have also studied abroad
78 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
forasemesterinthefollowingprograms:BostonUniversity
in Padova, Arcadia University in Perugia, Sarah Lawrence
and Syracuse in Florence, IES in Rome or Milan. See the
International Programs section of the Catalog for further
information.
HEBREW
Hebrew is sometimes called the holy language (leshon
hakodesh),sinceitistheoriginallanguageoftheHebrewBible.
Today, it is also a modern spoken language and the ofcial
language of the state of Israel. The study of Hebrew confers
manybenets,includingtheabilitytofunctioninandunderstand
modern Israeli society, and a more nuanced comprehension of
ancient texts. Franklin & Marshall offers three years of Hebrew
language instruction as part of the Judaic Studies minor (see
JudaicStudies),anAreaStudiesminor,ortofullltheCollege’s
generallanguagerequirement.Hebrewclassesaredesignednot
only to develop listening, reading, speaking, and writing skills,
butalsotoemphasizeappreciationforthecultureandhistory
connected with the language. The Judaic Studies program
stronglyencouragesfurtherstudyofHebrew abroad;students
have pursued advanced studies at the Hebrew University of
JerusalemandtheUniversityoftheNegevinBeerSheva.
A minor in Hebrew Language and Literature includes: at
least three Hebrew language courses, one of which must be at
the300-level;anythreeJSTcourses.Appropriatesubstitutions
may be approved by the program chair. See also: Judaic
Studies.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS) Language Studies requirement; (NW) Non-Western
Culturesrequirement.
COURSES IN ITALIAN STUDIES
All courses are taught in Italian unless indicated otherwise.
ITA 101. Elementary Italian I.
The aim of this course is to develop basic language skills in Italian,
including speaking, listening comprehension, reading and writing, with
particular emphasis on communication. The course also provides an
introduction to contemporary Italy and its artistic, literary, cinematic and
culinary traditions. Offered every Fall. Benini, Bertini Jones
ITA 102. Elementary Italian II.
Continuation of ITA 101. Prerequisite: ITA 101 or placement. Offered
everySpring. Benini, Staff
ITA 201. Intermediate Italian Language and Culture I. (LS)
AcontinuationofthestudyoftheItalianlanguage,emphasizingspeaking,
listening, reading and writing. Combines comprehensive grammar review
withmorein-depthstudyofItalianculture,basedonlms,shortstories,
poemsandsongs.Prerequisite:ITA102orplacement.OfferedeveryFall.
Faleschini Lerner
ITA 202. Intermediate Italian Language and Culture II. (LS)
The continuation of ITA 201, this course further develops language skills
with an increased emphasis on analytic thinking and writing, as well as oral
communication. It completes the presentation of the principal grammatical
structures begun in the previous semester while continuing the examination
ofItalianculturethroughliterarytexts,songs,andlms.Prerequisite:ITA
201orplacement.OfferedeverySpring. Faleschini Lerner
ITA 310. Introduction to Italian Literary Studies. (H)
AnintroductiontoliterarystudiesinItalian.Particularauthorsandthemes
will vary. (Recently: the Italian detective novel, readings by Leonardo
SciasciaandCarloLucarelli.)ComplementarystudyofadvancedItalian
grammar.Prerequisite:ITA202orplacement. Faleschini Lerner
ITA 354. Age of Dante. (H) (LS)
Inhisepictaleofman’sjourneytoredemption,DanteAlighiericreateda
masterpiece that continues to challenge our assumptions about good and
evil,loveandlife.FromGeoffreyChaucertoDanBrown,abolitionists
to Romantics, Dante’s work has inspired generations of authors and
artists, and stands today as one of the great pillars of Western literature.
Throughclose readings of Inferno, Purgatory,and Paradise,as wellas
classdiscussionsandpresentations,wewillsituateDante’sworkwithin
the social and religious context of the late Middle Ages. Throughout
thecourse,wewillconsiderthestudyofDante’sComedynotonlyasa
literary exercise, but also as a mysterious poem that enriches our vision
oftheworld.TaughtinItalian.Prerequisite:ITA310orpermissionofthe
instructor. Staff
ITA 355. Modern Italy. (H)
An introduction to the historical and political evolution of Italy as a modern
nation through the lens of its cultural production. Traces the emergence
of the nation from its ideological and political beginnings in the French
Revolution,theItalianrepublicsandkingdomunderNapoleon,andthe
Risorgimentomovementofnationalunication.Followsthesubsequent
pathoftheyoungnationthroughtheworldwarsandFascism,thepost-
war“boom,”andthereformsofthe1990stothepresent.Theculturallens
is provided by literary and cinematic works by Tomasi di Lampedusa,
Visconti,Ungaretti,Marinetti,Tabucchi,PrimoLevi,Benigni,Giordana
and Moretti. Includes advanced study of spoken and written Italian and
topicsinadvancedgrammar.Prerequisite:ITA310orpermissionofthe
instructor. S. Lerner
ITA 356. Italian Film History. (A)
IntroductiontoItalianlmhistory,withanemphasisontherelationship
between cinema and society and culture. May include inuential
auteurs(Visconti,DeSica,Antonioni,Pasolini,Fellini)andmovements
(Neorealism, cinema politico), as well as popular forms (commedia
all’italiana), genre lms, experimental lmmaking, and documentary.
TaughtinItalian.Prerequisite:ITA310orpermissionoftheinstructor..
Same as FLM 356. Benini
ITA 365. Verismo and Modernism in Italian Literature. (H)
An exploration of the Italian literary, operatic and theatrical traditions
oftwogoldenages:latenineteenth-centuryverismoandearlytwentieth
centurymodernism.PrincipalauthorsmayincludeGiovanniVergaand
LuigiPirandello.TaughtinItalian.Prerequisite:ITA310orpermissionof
the instructor. S. Lerner
ITA 366. Italian Cinema and the Arts. (H)
Cinema has presented itself, since its very origins, as a synthetic form
of art that could incorporate painting, architecture, sculpture, as well as
music, literature, and dance. This course aims to explore the different
waysinwhichinter-artisticdialoguehasinuencedthedevelopmentof
Italian cinema, determining the style of its major auteurs and contributing
tothecomplexityoftheirlms.Aseriesofcriticalandtheoreticalreadings
willhelpusdevelopasolidinterpretiveapproachtothelms,whichwill
includeworks byFellini,Antonioni,Pasolini,Visconti, Rossellini, and
other lmmakers. Normally taught in Italian. Prerequisite: ITA310 or
permission of the instructor. Same as FLM 366. Faleschini Lerner
ITA 367. Women and Gender in Italian Literature. (H)
This course focuses on Italian women writers from the nineteenth century
tothepresent.AuthorsmayincludeAleramo,Banti,Morante,Ginzburg,
Maraini, and Ferrante, among others. Literary analyses of the texts
will be placed in the context of Italian cultural history, the history of
Italianfeminismandpost-feminism,andthetraditionofItalianfeminist
philosophy, allowing for a deeper understanding of the ever-changing
role of gender roles and dynamics in modern Italy. Taught in Italian.
Prerequisite:ITA310orpermissionoftheinstructor.Same as WGS 367.
Faleschini Lerner
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 79
ITA 368. Post-War and Contemporary Italian Fiction. (H)
Italian literature from the end of the second world war to the present with
an emphasis on the genres of the novella, the short story and the novel.
Therstpartofthecoursewillbedevotedtotwoclassicwriters:Italo
CalvinoandDinoBuzzati,knownfortheirinnovativeblendofrealism
and the fantastic; the second part will examine their successors, with
worksbyAlessandroBaricco,MichelaMurgia,AnnaLuisaPignatelli,or
others.TaughtinItalian.Prerequisite:ITA310orplacement.. S. Lerner
ITA 391. Directed Reading.
410. Italian Literary and Cultural Studies II. (H)
StudiesinclassicalItalianpoetryandprose(authorshaveincludedDante,
Boccaccio, Manzoni, Collodi, Pirandello and D’Annunzio). Advanced
spokenandwrittenItalian,selectedtopicsingrammar.Prerequisite:ITA
360.Prerequisite:ITA354,ITA355,orITA356. S. Lerner
ITA 490. Independent Study.
SUMMER TRAVEL COURSES
ITA 240-340. Landscapes of Tuscany.
ThisinterdisciplinarycourseispartoftheItalianSummerProgram’sfull-
immersion linguistic and cultural experience in Italy. Through readings in
Italian literature, history, and art history, integrated with site visits, nature
hikes, and research projects, students explore the cultural and natural
landscapes of Tuscany, especially in the Mugello Valley, where the summer
program is held. Prerequisites: ITA 102, ITA 202, or permission of the
instructor.Corequisite:ITA241/341orITA242/342.TaughtinItalian.
Faleschini Lerner, S. Lerner
ITA 241-341. Florence, Capital of the Renaissance.
This course is part of the Italian Summer Program’s full-immersion
linguistic and cultural experience in Italy. It explores the historical
and social underpinnings of Renaissance Florence through readings
inmedievaland Renaissance literature,as well as“hands-on” learning
componentsinvolvingculturalvisits,map-making,andthecollaborative
creationofaliteraryguidetothecity.Prerequisites:ITA102,ITA202,or
permissionoftheinstructor.Corequisite:ITA240/340.
Benini, Mackenzie
ITA 242-342. Italian Urban Cultures.
This course is part of the Italian Summer Program’s full-immersion
linguistic and cultural experience in Italy. Students learn about Italian
urban cultures through an integrated approach that includes literary
texts, analyses of works of art and urban landmarks, and historical and
architectural research, as well as day and weekend trips to thespecic
citiesbeingexamined(Rome,Palermo,Ferrara,Urbino).Asappropriateto
their linguistic level, students are responsible for planning itineraries and
preparingguidedtoursofthecities.Prerequisites:ITA102,ITA202,or
permissionoftheinstructor.Corequisite:ITA240/340.TaughtinItalian.
Faleschini Lerner
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
TheMaaonScreen Faleschini Lerner
COURSES IN MODERN HEBREW LANGUAGE
JST 101, 102. Elementary Modern Hebrew I and II.
Introduction to the basic structures and vocabulary of Modern Hebrew,
oralandwritten.101isofferedeveryFall,102isofferedeverySpring.
Greenshpan
JST 201, 202. Intermediate Modern Hebrew I and II. (LS) (NW) (H
for 202)
Further development of oral, reading and writing skills in Modern Hebrew.
201isofferedeveryFall,202isofferedeverySpring. Di Giulio
JST 301. Reading Hebrew Texts and Contexts. (H)
In addition to expanding their knowledge of Hebrew grammar through
the study of more complex structures, students in this course will read
contemporary ction in its historical and socio-cultural context. In
particular, the course will examine the interplay between Hebrew literature
andlifeinIsraelintheworkofsuchauthorsasSavyonLiebercht,Etgar
Keret,MeirShalev,andAvigdorDagan.Coursetopicswillincludeliterary
representations of the Israeli landscape, the tension between Israel and the
diaspora,andthedevelopmentofPost-Zionistliterarysensibilities.
Di Giulio
Directedreadingsatmoreadvancedlevelsmay be arranged
with Hebrew Language faculty.
JAPANESE LANGUAGE
Ken-ichi Miura, Director of the Japanese Language Program
Professor Jonathan Stone, Chair, Department of German, Russian &
East Asian Languages
Ken-ichi Miura Director and Senior Teaching Professor
of the Japanese Language Program
Kaori Shimizu Visiting Assistant Professor of the
Japanese Language Program
Takako Tsumura Japanese Language Teaching Fellow
Shoko Amioka Japanese Language Teaching Assistant
(Spring 2021 only)
Franklin & Marshall offers four years of Japanese language
instruction, with more advanced study available on a tutorial basis.
Many students of Japanese also participate in summer or semester
abroad programs at such institutes as Hokkaido International
Foundation(HIF),CETOsakaandKyotoConsortiumforJapanese
Studies(KCJS).
At Franklin & Marshall, the Japanese program offers students
the opportunity to develop communicative skills in Japanese.
We emphasizethe authentic useof thelanguage rather than
mere knowledge of vocabulary and grammar. We also host
weekly tea hours in which various cultural aspects are
introduced,aswellasJapan-relatedlecturesandevents.
We introduce contemporary Japanese language within
the appropriate cultural context, so students also gain the
requisiteawarenessandskillsthatwillenablethemtofunction
appropriately and successfully in modern Japanese society.
An Area Studies minor in Japanese may be arranged in
consultation with Professor Douglas Anthony, Director of
InternationalStudiesandKen-ichiMiura,Director,Japanese
LanguageProgram.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
101. Elementary Japanese I.
Introduction to contemporary Japanese language through cultural context.
Developing listening, speaking, reading and writing skills, including
mastery of the Hiragana and Katakana Japanese writing systems and
introduction to Kanji characters. For students with no previous training in
the language. Offered every Fall. Miura
80 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
102. Elementary Japanese II.
Continued practice in listening, speaking, reading and writing skills of
contemporary Japanese in cultural context. Further development of
readingandwritingKanjicharacters.Prerequisite:JPN101orpermission
of instructor. Miura
201. Intermediate Japanese I. (NW) (LS)
Development of contemporary Japanese listening, speaking, reading
andwritingskillsattheintermediate-lowlevelthroughculturalcontext,
including continued practice in reading and writing Kanji characters.
Prerequisite:JPN102orpermissionofinstructor.OfferedeveryFall
Shimizu, Tsumura
202. Intermediate Japanese II. (NW) (H) (LS)
Continued development of contemporary Japanese listening, speaking,
reading and writing skills at the intermediate level in cultural context,
including handling a variety of informal and formal situations. Further
practiceinreadingandwritingKanjicharacters.Prerequisite:JPN201or
permissionofinstructor.OfferedeverySpring. Shimizu, Tsumura
221. Introduction to Japanese Popular Culture. (NW) (H)
Japan’spopculturehasgainedgreatpopularityallovertheworld.Such
genres include anime, manga, and J-pop, to name a few. This course
examines several major genres focusing on historical and cultural
background, and their impact on Japanese society. Through reading the
writings of notable cultural critics, students will learn to analyze each
genre in depth as well as examine the interrelationship among them. Each
studentwillchoosehis/herownresearchtopicforanalpresentation.
Miura
301. Upper Intermediate Japanese I. (NW) (H)
Development of listening, speaking, reading and writing skills at the
upper intermediate level of contemporary Japanese in cultural context,
including handling a variety of informal and formal situations and
continuedpracticeinreadingandwritingKanjicharacters.Prerequisite:
JPN202orpermissionofinstructor. Tsumura
302. Upper Intermediate Japanese II. (NW) (H)
Continued development of listening, speaking, reading and writing skills at
the upper intermediate level of contemporary Japanese in cultural context,
including handling a variety of informal and formal situations, as well as
furtherpracticeinreadingandwritingKanjicharacters.Prerequisite:JPN
301orpermissionofinstructor. Tsumura
401. Upper Intermediate Japanese III. (NW) (H)
Developmentoflistening,speaking,readingandwritingskillsattheupper
intermediatetoadvancedlevelofprociencyincontemporaryJapanese
in cultural context, including handling a variety of informal and formal
situations and continued practice in reading and writing Kanji characters.
Introduction of some authentic audio-visual and reading materials.
Prerequisite:JPN302orpermissionoftheinstructor. Shimizu
402. Upper Intermediate Japanese IV. (NW) (H)
Development of listening, speaking, reading and writing skills at the
upper intermediate to advanced level of prociency in contemporary
Japanese in cultural context, including handling a variety of informal and
formal situations, as well as further practice in reading and writing Kanji
characters.Furtherpracticeinhandlingsomeauthenticaudio-visualand
readingmaterials.Prerequisite:JPN401orpermissionoftheinstructor.
Shimizu
Tutorials at more advanced levels may be arranged with the
DirectoroftheJapaneselanguageprogram.
JUDAIC STUDIES
Professor Marco Di Giulio, Chair
MEMBERS OF THE JUDAIC STUDIES
PROGRAM COMMITTEE
L. Scott Lerner Arthur and Katherine Shadek Professor
(on leave 2020-21) of the Humanities and French and
Italian
Stephen Cooper Professor of Religious Studies
(on leave 2020-21)
Jeffrey Podoshen Professor of Marketing
Marco Di Giulio Associate Professor of Hebrew
Language and Literature
Rachel Feldman Assistant Professor of Religious Studies
Maya Greenshpan Hebrew and Italian Language Teaching
Fellow
Additional faculty not on the program committee
also contribute to this program.
TheJudaicStudiesprogramisdesignedtointroducestudents
to the religion, history and literature of the Jewish people
and to their interactions with the other peoples among whom
they have lived. In the Western world, Jewish thought has
been foundational to our common culture, yet the experience
of the Jewish people, like that of other excluded minorities,
has often diverged profoundly from that of the majority. The
study of Judaism and of the varieties of Jewish experience can
thus be both a complement and a corrective, to any course
of study examining the history and culture of Europe, the
MiddleEast,NorthAfricaandtheAmericas.Theprogramfor
minors provides a comprehensive introduction to the religious,
cultural and political traditions of Jewish life from its origins
to present day.
A major in Judaic Studies may be arranged through the
Special Studies Program described in this Catalog. A Joint
MajorconsistsofeightJudaicStudiescoursesinadditionto
designated courses from any department/program offering
amajor.Atleast two ofthe Judaic Studiescourses mustbe
Hebrew language.
Students minoring in Judaic Studies may pursue one of two
tracks: Jewish History and Culture, or Hebrew Language and
Literature.Bothconsistofsixcourses.
The Jewish History and Culture trackincludes:JST112;one
ofthefollowingcourses:JST154,252;oneofthefollowing
courses:JST153,212; threeelectives,twoofwhich canbe
Hebrewlanguageandatleastoneofwhichmustbeanupper-
division course or independent study. At least one course must
betaughtbyHISfaculty;atleastonecoursemustbetaughtby
RSTfaculty.
The Hebrew Language and Literature track includes: at
least three Hebrew language courses, one of which must be at
the300-level;anythreeJSTcourses.Appropriatesubstitutions
may be approved by the program chair.
Minors must take at least four courses at Franklin & Marshall. To
beconsideredforhonorsinJudaicStudies,graduatingseniors,
inadditiontomeetingtheCollege’sgeneralrequirementsfor
honors,mustcompleteanddefendathesisofhighquality.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 81
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
COURSES IN MODERN HEBREW LANGUAGE
101, 102. Elementary Modern Hebrew I and II.
101. Every Fall; 102. Every Spring
Introduction to the basic structures and vocabulary of Modern Hebrew,
oral and written. Di Giulio, Greenshpan
201, 202. Intermediate Modern Hebrew I and II.
(LS) (NW) (H for 202)
201. Every Fall; 202. Every Spring Di Giulio, Greenshpan
301. Reading Hebrew Texts and Contexts. (H)
In addition to expanding their knowledge of Hebrew grammar through
the study of more complex structures, students in this course will read
contemporary ction in its historical and socio-cultural context. In
particular, the course will examine the interplay between Hebrew literature
andlifeinIsraelintheworkofsuchauthorsasSavyon Liebercht, Etgar
Keret,MeirShalev,andAvigdorDagan.Coursetopicswillincludeliterary
representations of the Israeli landscape, the tension between Israel and the
diaspora,andthedevelopmentofPost-Zionistliterarysensibilities.
Di Giulio
JUDAIC STUDIES COURSES
112. Judaism. (H) (NW)
This course will focus on a number of classical texts ranging from the
biblical period to the present early modern times. With the exception
of a few selections, all have had their impact on Jewish culture in the
Hebrew language. The chief aim of the course is to immerse students in
thequestionsthetextsraise,thusexposingthemtocontinuityandchange
inJewishself-understandingovertime.Thedesiredoutcomeisthatthe
studentsbecomeawareofcertainkeyconcepts(e.g.covenant, chosen-
ness,prophecy,exile,redemption,Jewishlaw)andthecontinuingdebates
around them. Same as RST 112. Feldman
153. Premodern Jewish History: Jews of East and West Through the
Middle Ages. (NW) (S)
Introduction to Jewish history, beginning with rst centuries of the
CommonEra and continuingto end of17th century. Examinescentral
themes and patterns in Jewish history with focus on the development of
major Jewish communities in Christian Europe and the Arab/Muslim
world. Course looks at relationships between Jewish and non-Jewish
cultures and communities during this time. Same as HIS/RST 153. Staff
154. Jews in the Modern World. (S)
Introductiontothemodernerafromlate18thcenturyEmancipationand
Enlightenmentthroughthemid-20thcentury,tracingthetransformations
of Jewish life. Broad historical sketches are combined with close
readings of particular texts, movements, and thinkers to esh out
the contours and dynamics of the Jewish experience in the Modern
world. Major events of Jewish history of 20th century (the Holocaust,
foundationoftheStateofIsrael,andmassmigrationofEuropeanJews
totheAmericas)areexaminedthroughsecondaryandprimarysources.
Same as HIS/RST 154. Staff
212. Hebrew Bible. (H) (NW)
StudyofthewritingsoftheHebrewBible.Seekstounderstandthehistorical
development of Israel in the biblical period and the religious forms of
thought and practice that arose during this time. Same as RST 212. Cooper
252. Modern Jewish Thought. (H)
StudiesJewishthinkersfromtheEnlightenmenttothepresent,through
their philosophical writings, political essays, religious reections and
ction.ThechiefquestionwashowtomaketheJewishtraditionadaptor
respondtothemodernWesternStateandtomodernWesternculture.This
isacourseabouttheJewsandtheWest.Towhatdegreeisthereharmony?
Towhatdegreeisthereconict?Same as RST 252. Feldman
340. Jews in the Greco-Roman World. (H)
Focuses on Jews and Judaism during the period of profound changes
aftertheconquestofAlexandertheGreatthatwerekeytodevelopment
ofmodernJudaismandChristianity.SurveysvarietyofJewishwriting
from the period: historical; philosophical; apocalyptic; and exegetical.
Thesetexts,includingDeadSeascrolls,willbereadincombinationwith
modern scholarly works treating Jewish life and history of the period.
Same as RST 340. Cooper
405. Approaches to Jewish History. (S)
Readingsandresearchonvarioustopics,periods,andproblemsofJewish
history.SameasHIS405.
Staff
490. Independent Study.
Thestudentpursuesanin-depthinvestigationofatopicofspecialinterest,
underthedirectionofanadviser.PleaseseetheChairwithanyquestions.
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
IsraelandPalestine:BeyondtheBinary Feldman
LATIN AMERICAN AND
LATINX STUDIES
Professor Laura Shelton, Chair
MEMBERS OF THE LATIN AMERICAN
STUDIES COMMITTEE
Stephanie L. McNulty Associate Professor of Government
Scott C. Smith Associate Professor of Anthropology
Laura Shelton Associate Professor of History
Kathrin L. Theumer Associate Professor of Spanish
(on leave Spring2021)
Eric Hirsch Assistant Professor of Environmental
(on leave 2020-21) Studies
Mark Villegas Assistant Professor of American Studies
(on leave Fall 2020)
Firuzeh Shokooh Valle Assistant Professor of Sociology
Additional faculty not on the program committee
also contribute to this program.
Latin American and Latinx Studies is an interdisciplinary
program that examines the cultures, histories, societies, politics,
and art of Latin American countries and Latinx communities.
Students completing the minor will graduate with a broad
introductory background in key themes relating to the study
of Latin America. Among the disciplines contributing to the
Latin American Studies minor at F&M are Anthropology,
EnvironmentalStudies,Government,History,andSpanish.
A minor in Latin American and Latinx Studies consists of
six courses:
ThreecoursesfromthevefollowingcorecoursesinHistory,
Anthropology, and Government:
HIS131:HistoryofColonialLatinAmerica:FromContact
toRevolution.
HIS132:LatinAmericanandItsPeople:Revolutionand
Modernity.
ANT257:PeopleandCulturesoftheAndes.
82 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
ANT253:AndeanArchaeology.
GOV327:LatinAmericanPolitics.
Three electives from the following list:
HIS235:U.S.-MexicoBorderlands.
HIS318:EnvironmentalHistoryofLatinAmerica.Sameas
ENE318.
HIS407:SexandSexualityinLatinAmerica.
SPA343:CuentosdelRiodelaPlata(requiresSPA321).
SPA410:ElBoomLatinoamericano(requiresSPA321).
SPA412:ElExilioHispanoamericano(requiresSPA321).
SPA414:ElDetectiveHispano(requiresSPA321).
SPA445:LatinAmericaOnStage(requiresSPA321).
SPA485:LainvencióndeCuba(requiresSPA321).
Topics Courses. Including, but not limited to:
HIS375:ModernMexico.
SPA470:CubanCulture(requiresSPA321).
SPA475:SlaveryandLiteratureintheHispanicCaribbean
(requiresSPA321).
IndependentStudyorDirectedReading
With the approval of the program coordinator, electives
may also be taken through a study abroad program in Latin
America.LatinAmericanStudiescoursesthatrequireSPA321
asaprerequisitemaybeopentostudentswhoarenottaking
Spanishcourses,butwhoareprocientatthelevelofSPA321
as determined by the instructor.
A list of regularly offered courses follows. Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS) Language Studies requirement; (NW) Non-Western
Culturesrequirement.
CORE COURSES
ANT 253. Andean Archaeology. (NW) (S)
This course explores the cultural diversity of the central Andes of
SouthAmericafromtheoriginalarrival of migrants over12,000years
ago to contact with Spanish conquistadors in the early 16th century.
Geographically, the course will focus on prehistoric cultures that occupied
the modern countries of Peru, Bolivia, and Ecuador. Themes include:
debates about the initial migration to the region, early food production,
the origins of social complexity, ceremonialism, state formation and
disintegration,andconquestbySpain.Prerequisites:ANT100,orANT102
or permission of instructor. Smith
ANT 257. People and Cultures of the Andes. (NW) (S)
ThiscoursefocusesonthemountainousAndeanregionofSouthAmerica
andprovidesanoverviewofAndeansocietyfromAD1500topresent.
We will examine the colonial matrix in which Iberian and Andean social,
political, and cultural forms came together. This course uses ethnographies,
contact period chronicles, indigenous narratives, novels, testimonials, and
lmaboutcontemporaryAndeansocietytoaddressissuesofcolonialism,
race, class, ethnicity, gender, and human-environment relationships.
Geographically, this course focuses on the region encompassed by the
modernnations of Ecuador,Peru,and Bolivia. Prerequisite:ANT100,
ANT102,orpermissionoftheinstructor. Smith
GOV 327. Latin American Politics. (NW) (S)
This course introduces students to Latin American government and
politics. The course provides a brief overview of the region’s history
andadiscussionofsomeofthekeyissuesshapingtheregion’spolitics,
including:authoritarianismanddemocracy;developmentanddependency;
and revolution. The rest of the course will be dedicated to a survey of the
politics of several countries from different areas of Latin America.
McNulty
HIS 131. History of Colonial Latin America:
From Contact to Revolution (NW) (S) (WH) (PM)
SurveyofLatinAmericafrompre-Conquesttimestothepresent.Begins
with historical backgrounds of indigenous societies as well as Spain,
Portugal, andAfrica before 1492, followed by an examination of the
conquestandcolonialperiodthroughindependence.Thecoursefocuses
on the contributions of these major cultural groups in the formation of
colonial Latin American society and culture. Shelton
HIS 132. Latin America and Its People:
Revolution and Modernity (NW) (S) (WH)
Focuses on comparative history and political economy, U.S.-Latin
American relations, and cultural forces. The course introduces students to
themajortrends,problems,andforcesthathaveshapedcurrent-dayLatin
American societies since the late colonial period. A focus on case studies
is complemented by an examination of broad patterns of change in Latin
America as a whole. Shelton
ELECTIVE COURSES
ENE 244. Indigenous Environmental Justice. (NW) (S)
Examination of the way indigenous identity, human rights, and
development intersect with the struggle for environmental justice around
the world.Analysis of how each term in this course’stitle is open to
legal xing, activist redenition, and diverse projects that render the
environment something political. Considers distinct case studies drawn
from several continents to show that some see being indigenous today
as politically potent, while others take this category to be excessively
vagueor,even,invented;byfocusingonordinarylivesandextraordinary
struggles, we explore the wide variety of relationships to territory that
“indigenous”encapsulates.Same as STS244. Hirsch
HIS 318. Environmental History of Latin America. (NW) (S) (WH)
This course will examine the intersections of human history and culture
with environmental change in Latin America from the early colonial
periodto the present.Themajor themes includethe consequencesand
signicanceoftheColombianExchange,therolesofreligionandculture
inshapinghumanrelationshipswithnature,thedevelopmentofexport-
ledagriculture,urbanization,andtheemergenceofdiverseenvironmental
movements within Latin America. We will explore the origins of major
environmental problems and the ways people have responded to these
challenges. The course will also address how historian have approached
the study of the environment. Same as ENE 318. Shelton
HIS 323. Cuba and the United States: The Closest of Strangers. (S)
This course examines the long history of relations between North
Americans and Cubans, two peoples separated by only 90 miles. Our
topics will range from baseball to guerrilla warfare, from the Mambo to the
Missile Crisis. This history includes a shared commitment to anticolonial
liberation;annexationistschemesamongSouthernslaveholders;repeated
militaryinterventionsbytheUnitedStates;solidarityfromtheU.S.with
variousCubanRevolutions,includingbutnotlimitedtoFidelCastro’s;
and two hundred years of cultural contact between African Americans
andAfro-CubansthathasprofoundlyinuencedU.S.culture,music,and
sports. Same as AFS/AMS 323. Gosse
HIS 407. Selected Studies in Latin American History. (NW) (S)
Readings and research in problems in the political, economic, social,
andculturalhistoryofLatinAmerica.Seminartopicsinclude“Sexand
SexualityinLatinAmerica.”Same as WGS 407. Shelton
SPA 343. Cuentos del Río de La Plata. (H)
Argentina and Uruguay are the two countries that have produced the most
renownedshortstorywritersinSpanish.ItcouldbesaidthatJorgeLuis
BorgesandJulioCortázarconstitutetheparadigmoftheHispanicshort
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 83
storyofthesecondhalfofthe20thcenturyandlateryears.Bothwriters
have set the grounds for the development of the short story as a genre
inLatinAmerica.InthiscoursewewillexploretheinuenceofBorges
andCortázarinlaterArgentineandUruguayanwriters.Prerequisite:SPA
321. Tisnado
SPA 410. Research Seminar: El Boom Latinoamericano. (H)
The LatinAmerican Boom is a phenomenon in the history of literary
movements in the 20th Century. In this course we will read some of the
canonicalpiecesbyauthorsthatconstitutethe“boom.”Insodoing,we
will examine the characteristics of the Latin American literary boom. We
willreadAlejoCarpentier,CarlosFuentes,GabrielGarciaMárquezand
Mario Varas Llosa, as the four biggest representatives of this movement.
Prerequisite:SPA321. Tisnado
SPA 412. Research Seminar: El Exilio Hispanoamericano. (H)
There is a vast number of Latin Americans living mainly in several
Europeancountries,Canada,theUnitedStates,AustraliaandsomeAsian
andAfricancountries.PoliticalturmoiloftheSouthernconeinthe1970s
and80sandinCentralAmericainthe1980sand90s,however,created
generations of exiles that were political prisoners or even desaparecidos,
orwhosecloserelativesdisappearedorwerekilled.Someoftheseexiles
are writers who conveyed their experience in their works. In this course we
will read poems, short stories, and novels written by these exiles as well
as works by authors who have chosen to live abroad for other reasons. We
willexaminehowtheexperienceofexileshapesandisreectedintheir
works.Prerequisite:SPA321. Tisnado
SPA 414. Research Seminar: El Detective Hispano. (H)
Whyisdetectivectionsopopular?WhatmakessomanyreadersorTV/
lm viewers want to read or watch murder or detective stories?What
doesthedetectivegenrerepresent?Howdoweunderstandthesurprise
endingsofdetectivestories?Whatvariationshaveappeared(especially
inLatinAmerica)sincetheclassicdetective novel emerged?Howcan
weunderstandthesevariations?Inthisseminarwewillattempttoanswer
these questions through the analysis of detective ction from Latin
America.WewillstudydetectivenovelsintheirspecicLatinAmerican
context.Prerequisite:SPA321. Tisnado
SPA 445. Research Seminar: Latin America on Stage. (H)
Latin America on Stage is an exploration of Latin American drama of
the twentieth century, and an introduction to the experimental and newer
trends in the genre. This survey course focuses on the most relevant
schools, sociopolitical themes, and aesthetic practices of Latin American
theater. The overall goals for the students in this course are the appreciation
of the diversity of contemporary drama in the continent, as well as the
development of critical skills and of oral and written modes of performance
intheSpanishlanguage.Prerequisite:SPA321. Ruiz-Alfaro
SPA 485. Research Seminar: La invención de Cuba. (H)
Exploringtheisland’scomplexencounterswithSpain,Africa,theSoviet
Union and the United States, this course takes an interdisciplinary
approach to the study of Cuban culture, incorporating materials as
diverseasColumbus’sdiaries,Afro-Cubanfables,Castro’sspeechesand
contemporary Cuban cinema. As we examine the historical, ethnographic,
politicalandliterarytextsthatnarratethe“invention”ofCuba,wewill
focusonthetensionbetweentheinternalfabricof“Cubanness”andthe
externalforcesshapingCuba’snationalprocess.Prerequisite:SPA321.
Theumer
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020-2021
AMS173.IntroductiontoLatinxStudies.
SPA378.NarrativesofInsurrection.
LINGUISTICS
Professor Kimberly M. Armstrong, Chair
Kimberly M. Armstrong Professor of Spanish and Linguistics
(on leave 2020-21)
Jessica Cox Associate Professor of Spanish and
Linguistics
Alistofregularlyofferedcoursesfollows.Pleasenotethekey
forthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;(S)
SocialSciences;(N)NaturalScienceswithLaboratory;(LS)
Language Studies requirement; (NSP) Natural Science in
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
101. Introduction to Linguistics. (H)
Whatislanguage?Isitaninstinct,abehavior,anart,oraculturalartifact?
Whydowetalk?Whycanwetalk?Thiscourseexaminesthesystematic
nature of language through readings, class discussions, problem solving
and group work in order to explore the core components of human
language: sounds, words, sentences and meaning. Offered every Fall.
Armstrong, Cox
120. Sociolinguistics. (H)
Anexplorationoftherelationshipbetweenlanguageandsociety.Special
attentionwillbepaidtolanguagevariation(dialects,creolesandpidgins)
and language in society (multilingualism, slang, language prejudice
andgender).Readings, lms, discussionsand group workwill prepare
studentsforeldwork. Armstrong, Cox
340. Psycholinguistics.
This course explores language in the mind and brain, including: How
do children learn their rst language(s) and why is it sucha different
experienceforanadulttolearnalanguage?Whatarelanguagedisorders?
Isspokenlanguage processed differentlyfromwrittenlanguage?What
aboutsignlanguages?Classwillincludediscussions,presentations,and
hands-onanalysisoflanguagedata.Prerequisite:LIN101orPSY100.
Same as PSY 340. Cox
84 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
MATHEMATICS
Professor Christina Weaver, Chair
Annalisa Crannell Professor of Mathematics
Robert Gethner Professor of Mathematics
Iwan Praton Professor of Mathematics
Wendell Ressler Professor of Mathematics
(on leave 2020-21)
Danel Draguljić Associate Professor of Mathematics
Alan Levine Associate Professor of Mathematics
Michael P. McCooey Associate Professor of Mathematics
Barbara E. Nimershiem Associate Professor of Mathematics
(on leave 2020-21)
Christina Weaver Associate Professor of Mathematics
Nicholas Baeth Assistant Professor of Mathematics
Abiti Adili Visiting Assistant Professor of
Mathematics
Satbir Malhi Visiting Assistant Professor of
Mathematics
Heather Pasewicz Adjunct Assistant Professor of
Mathematics
The study of mathematics is a hallmark of enlightened society,
as it has been for millennia. Mathematics helps us understand
our world and ourselves, and it is fun.
Mathematics is one of the oldest of the liberal arts. The study
of mathematics has been used for centuries to train students
to think clearly and creatively. Mathematical applications
enlighten other disciplines and inform society.
Mathematicalthoughtrequirescuriosity,creativity,discipline
and logic. As students progress through the mathematics
curriculum, they are expected to become increasingly adept
at developing conjectures, constructing correct proofs and
refuting weak ones, creating and using mathematical models to
describe physical phenomena, working with abstract structures
and clearly communicating results.
A major in MathematicsrrequirescompletionofMAT109,
110,111,211and229;MAT330and331;onecoursefrom
MAT 323, 329, 337, 339 or other courses in mathematical
modeling as offered by the department; one mathematics
coursenumbered 400 orhigher,other than 490or 491;and
sufcient electives so that the total number of mathematics
courses taken beyond MAT 111 is nine. One of the electives
maybechosenfromPHY226,ECO310,PHI244,CHM321,
PSY460,BIO/PBH351,or,withapprovalofthedepartment,
othermathematicallyintensivecourses;100-levelcoursesmay
not be used as electives for the Mathematics major.The writing
requirementinMathematicsismetbythecompletionofMAT
211.
A student planning to major in Mathematics should take MAT
211assoonaspossible,nolaterthantherstsemesterofthe
junior year. A student planning to major in Mathematics and
study abroad should complete 211 before going abroad.
We suggest the following guidelines for course selection:
Students intending to pursuegraduate study in mathematics
should take MAT 442, 446, 490 and CPS 111. We also
recommend studying at least one course of French, German
orRussian.
Prospectiveteachersofsecondaryschoolmathematicsshould
takeMAT216,316,445andCPS111.
Studentsinterestedinactuarialscienceorstatisticsshouldtake
MAT216,316,323and338andCPS111.Wealsorecommend
takingcoursesinEconomicsandinBusiness,Organizations,
andSociety.
Studentsplanningtoenterothereldsofappliedmathematics
shouldtakeMAT323,329,337,338,339and442.Knowledge
of probability, statistics and computer science is essential in
many areas of applied mathematics.
A minor in Mathematics may be completed in one of two
tracks. The “theoretical math track” consists of MAT 110,
111and211;andthreecourseschosenfromMAT325,330,
331,442,445,446orothertheoreticalcoursesasdesignated
by the department. At least one of the three courses must be
atthe300-levelorbeyond.The“appliedmathtrack”consists
ofMAT110and111;andfourcoursesfromMAT215,216,
229,316,323,329,337,338,339,orotherappliedmodelling
courses as designated by the department. At least one of the
fourcoursesmustbeatthe300-levelorbeyond.
Majors in the Department of Mathematics have studied
abroad in the following programs in recent years: NUI
Galway,Ireland;UniversityofOtago,NewZealand;London
School of Economics; University College London; Queen
Mary University London; Oxford University; IES Madrid,
Spain;Flinders University,Australia;among others. Seethe
International Programs section of the Catalog for further
information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
105. Preparation for College Mathematics.
Introductory logic and algebra, elementary functions: polynomial,
rational,trigonometric,exponential,logarithmic.Prerequisite:Permission
ofthedepartment.Notforcredittowardthemathematicsmajororminor..
Offered every Fall. Staff
109. Calculus I.
Introduction to the basic concepts of calculus and their applications.
Functions, derivatives and limits; exponential, logarithmic and
trigonometricfunctions;thedeniteintegralandtheFundamentalTheorem
ofCalculus.Prerequisite:Twelfth-grademathematicsorMAT105.
Gethner, Levine, Malhi, Praton, Staff
110. Calculus II.
Techniques of integration, applications of integration, separable rst-
orderdifferentialequations,convergencetestsforinniteseries,Taylor
polynomialsandTaylorseries.Prerequisite:MAT109orpermissionof
the department. Adili, Baeth, Crannell, Gethner, Levine, Weaver
111. Calculus III.
Vectorsandparametricequations;functionsoftwovariables;partialand
directional derivatives; multiple integrals; line integrals. Prerequisite:
MAT 110 or permission of the department. Adili, McCooey
211. Introduction to Higher Mathematics.
A course designed as a transition from calculus to advanced mathematics
courses. Emphasis on developing conjectures, experimentation,
writing proofs and generalization.Topicswill be chosen from number
theory, combinatorics and graph theory, polynomials, sequences and
series and dynamical systems, among others. Prerequisite: MAT 111.
Baeth, Gethner, McCooey
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 85
215. Introduction to Statistical Modeling.
This course is about the construction, analysis, and application of
statisticalmodelstorealdata.Weemphasizetheuseofmodelstountangle
andquantifyvariationinobserveddata.Basic statistical concepts such
asrandomness,condence intervals,hypothesistests, causal inference,
etc., are explored in the context of statistical models which include
multivariate regression, analysis of variance, and logistic regression.
Weuseamodernstatisticssoftwarepackage(R)throughoutthecourse.
Prerequisite:MAT109 Praton
216. Probability and Statistics I.
Introductiontosinglevariableprobabilityandstatistics.Randomvariables.
Binomial, geometric, Poisson, exponential and gamma distributions,
amongothers.Countingtechniques.Estimationandhypothesistestsona
singleparameter.Prerequisite:MAT110. Draguljić, Weaver
229. Linear Algebra and Differential Equations.
Systems of linear equations and matrices, vector spaces, linear
transformations, determinants, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, nth order
lineardifferentialequations,systemsofrstorderdifferentialequations.
Prerequisite:MAT111. Adili, Malhi, Praton
237. Discrete Mathematics.
Basic set theory, basic proof techniques, combinatorics (the theory of
counting),andgraphtheorywithrelatedalgorithms.Prerequisite:MAT109.
Same as CPS 237.
245. Projective Geometry Applied to Perspective Art.
This course deals with projective geometry as applied to perspective
art. In particular, we will use problems from perspective art to motivate
geometric concepts. Solutions to these problems will include both
simple drawings and also rigorous mathematical proofs. Mathematical
topicsincludeprojectivemapsfromthree-spacetotheplane,Desargues’
theorem, and the Fundamental Theorems of Projective Geometry.
Prerequisite:MAT111. Crannell
270 – 279. Selected Topics.
Intermediate level courses.
291. Directed Reading.
ReadingdirectedbytheMathematicsstaff.Permissionofchairperson.
316. Probability and Statistics II.
Continuation of MAT 216. Multivariate distributions. Estimation and
hypothesis tests for multiple parameters. Regression and correlation.
Analysisofvariance.Prerequisites:MAT111,MAT216.Offeredevery
Spring. Draguljić
323. Stochastic Processes.
Properties of stochastic processes, Markov chains, Poisson processes,
Markovprocesses,queueingtheory.Applicationsofstochasticmodeling
tootherdisciplines.Prerequisites:MAT111,MAT216. Levine
325. Number Theory.
Properties of the natural numbers and integers: divisibility, primes,
number theoretic functions, Diophantine equations, congruences,
quadraticreciprocity,additivenumbertheory,unsolvedproblems.
Prerequisite:MAT211. Ressler
329. Fourier Series.
Fourier series, orthogonal series, boundary value problems, applications.
Prerequisite:MAT229. Staff
330. Abstract Algebra.
Algebraic systems and their morphisms including sets, functions, groups,
homomorphisms,factorgroups,ringsandelds.Prerequisite:MAT211.
Offered every Fall. Baeth
331. Introduction to Analysis.
Anintroductiontotheideasandprooftechniquesspecictomathematical
analysis.Realnumbers,sequences,limits,derivatives,integrals,innite
series,cardinality;othertopicsaschosenbyinstructor.Prerequisite:MAT
211.OfferedeverySpring. Malhi
337. Mathematics for Optimization.
Discrete,deterministicmodelsofinteresttothesocialsciences.Linear
programming, duality, simplex method, sensitivity analysis, convex sets.
Selections from: assignment, transportation, network ow, nonlinear
programmingproblems.Prerequisite:MAT229. Staff
338. Computational Mathematics.
Numericalanalysisasimplementedoncomputers.Polynomialandrational
approximations, numerical differentiation and integration, systems of linear
equations,matrixinversion,eigenvalues,rstandsecondorderdifferential
equations.Prerequisites:CPS111,MAT229.Same as CPS 338. Weaver
339. Mathematical Models.
An introduction to the art of creating and analyzing deterministic
mathematical models. Models of physical, biological and social
phenomena. Topics vary with instructor; examples are predator-prey
interactions, spread of epidemics, arms races and changes in global
temperature. Mathematical techniques include phase-plane analysis of
systems of differential equations and function iteration. Prerequisite:
MAT229.OfferedeveryFall. Weaver
370 – 379. Selected Topics.
Advanced Algebra, Advanced Multivariable Calculus, Measure Theory,
AlgebraicTopology,HistoryandDevelopmentofCalculus,Mathematical
Finance,StatisticalLearning.
375. Topics in Algebra.
Coursesof an algebraic nature such as RingTheory,AdvancedLinear
AlgebraandAlgebraicNumberTheory,thatcanbetakeninplaceof,orin
additionto,MAT330tosatisfythemajorrequirements.Mayberepeated
withpermissionofdepartment.Prerequisite:MAT211. Staff
390. Independent Study.
Independent study directed by the Mathematics staff. Permission of
chairperson.
391. Directed Reading.
ReadingdirectedbytheMathematicsstaff.Permissionofchairperson.
416. Design and Analysis of Experiments.
The course deals with statistical principles behind the design and analysis
of experiments. Analysis of variance techniques are examined for
hypothesis testing and simultaneous condence intervals. Other topics
include block designs, factorial experiments, random effects, mixed
models,etc.Prerequisite:MAT316. Draguljić
439. Nonlinear Dynamics.
Analysisofnonlinearsystemsofdifferentialequationswithafocuson
trajectories of solutions in the phase plane. Topics include bifurcations,
limit cycles, and transition to chaos. Applications to physics, biology,
economics,andothereldswillbeexplored.Prerequisite:MAT339.
Weaver
442. Complex Analysis.
Functions of one complex variable: analytic functions; mappings;
integrals;powerseries;residues;conformalmappings.
Prerequisite:MAT331. Adili
445. Geometry.
Selectionsfrom:advancedsyntheticgeometry;groupsoftransformations;
afne geometry; metric geometry; projective geometry; inversive
geometry.Prerequisite:MAT330. Nimershiem
446. Topology.
An introduction to topological spaces and continuous functions.
Prerequisite:MAT330.Corequisite:MAT331. McCooey
470 – 479. Selected Topics.
Studyofadvancedspecializedareasofmathematics.
490. Independent Study.
Independent study directed by the Mathematics faculty. Permission of
chairperson.
86 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
491. Directed Reading.
ReadingdirectedbytheMathematicsfaculty.Permissionofchairperson.
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
Advanced Linear Algebra.
DiplomathResearchSeminar.
StatisticalLearning.
MUSIC
Professor Karen Leistra-Jones, Chair
Matthew Buttereld Professor of Music
Sylvia Alajaji Associate Professor of Music
(on leave 2020-21)
Karen Leistra-Jones Associate Professor of Music
Julia Adams Visiting Assistant Professor of Music
Joshua Katz-Rosene Visiting Assistant Professor of Music
Gwynne Geyer Artist in Residence, Voice and Teaching
Professor of Music
Doris Hall-Gulati Artist in Residence, Clarinet
Brian Norcross Senior Director of Instrumental Music
and Senior Conducting Studies and
Senior Teaching Professor of Music
William Wright Choral Conductor and Teaching
Professor of Music
Rusty Banks Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Guitar
Jessica Beebe Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor of
Music, Voice
Kimberly Buchar Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Bassoon
Jarrett Cherner Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Jazz Piano/Improv
Devin Howell Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Double Bass
Michael Jamanis Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Violin
Jerry Laboranti Jr. Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Saxophone,
Jazz Ensemble Conductor
Kenneth Laudermilch Senior Adjunct Professor of Music,
Trumpet
Sara Male Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Violoncello
Elizabeth Pfafe Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Horn
Kimberly Trolier Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Flute
Mark Yingling Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Percussion
Tammi Hessen Senior Adjunct Instructor of Music,
African Drums, African Drum
Ensemble Conductor
Elizabeth Keller Senior Adjunct Instructor of Music,
Piano
Todd Sullivan Senior Adjunct Instructor of Music,
Viola
Kathleen Horein Adjunct Assistant Professor of Music,
Oboe
Stephen Shiffer Adjunct Assistant Professor of Music,
Low Brass
The study of music can be divided into four interrelated
approaches: the creation of music (composition), the re-
creation of music (performance), understanding music’s
systems (music theory), and understanding music’s stylistic
and societal contexts (music history and culture). Each of
these areas draws on techniques andperspectives thatare a
focus in other approaches to music. Musical composition,
for example, is not an entirely intuitive process, but makes
use of knowledge gained through the study of music theory.
Similarly,performanceismostprofoundwhenitisinformed
byanunderstandingofthecontextforawork’sstyle,andthe
history of musical style is myopic without taking into account
the culture in which a style developed.
The Music Department offers courses in all of these areas
that are open to students with no formal background in music.
All of its ensembles are open to the entire student body, and
someprivatelessonsareofferedatthebeginninglevel;there
are also courses in music theory and in music history and
culturethatarespecicallyorientedtostudentswithlittleor
no previous background in music. At the same time, there are
many offerings for students who have already made music an
important element of their lives.
Many students choose to complete a major or minor in music
whether or not they intend to undertake a musical career.
Students going to medical school, for example, have often
chosen to major in music, knowing that they want a lifelong
involvement in music as an avocation. On the other hand,
students who have chosen to go to graduate school in music
or enter the music industry have found that their preparation
through the music major program had prepared them well. Two
musicminorprogramsalsoofferanorganizationtothestudy
of music that goes beyond a single course or participation in a
single ensemble.
A major in Music consists of 11 course credits:
Fourcreditsinmusictheory(MUS222,223,224[half-
credit],225[half-credit],323);
Fourcreditsinmusichistoryandculture(MUS229,230,
231,and430);
TwoelectivesselectedfromMUS105,106,240,orany
courseabovethe100-levelchosenfromthetheoryand/or
musichistoryandcultureareas;
Senior Project (MUS 490 Independent Study or MUS
38X-48XSeniorRecital).
Studentsintendingtomajorinmusicshouldbeginthetheory
sequencebythebeginningofthesophomoreyear.Allstudents
areadvisedtotakeMUS224with222andMUS225with223.
Studentsmajoringinmusicareexpectedtoparticipateinone
oftheCollege’schoralorinstrumentalensemblesforatleast
four semesters.
The writing requirement in the Music major is met by
completionofMUS430.
A general minor in Music consists of six course credits:
Threeinmusictheory(MUS222,223,224[half-credit]
and225[half-credit];studentsareadvisedtotakeMusic
224with222andMusic225with223);
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 87
Twoinmusichistoryandculture(chosenfromMUS229,
230or231);
One elective selected with the approval of the department
chair.Thiselectiveshouldbeaone-creditcourseselected
from MUS 105, 106, 240, or any course above the
100-level,andmaynotincludestudioorensemblecourses.
A performance minor in Music consists of six course credits:
Oneandone-halfinmusictheory(MUS222,224[half-
credit];studentsareadvisedtotakeMUS224with222);
Twoinmusichistoryandculture(chosenfromMUS229,
230or231);
Two and one-half performance credits selected in
consultation with the department chair. Ideally, the
performance credits should include courses selected from
both ensembles and studio lessons given at the College.
If such diversication is not possible, the chair may
recommendanotherperformance-orientedcourse(suchas
conducting).
A maximum of four transferred credits from another institution
may be counted toward the major, and of these, no more
thanonemay be at orabove the 300-level.Two transferred
credits may be counted toward the minor. Further details
about transferred credits can be obtained from the chair of the
department.
MajorsintheDepartmentofMusichavestudiedabroadinthe
followingprogramsinrecentyears:IESprogramsinMilan,
Italy and Vienna, Austria. See the International Programs
section of the Catalog for further information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS) Language Studies requirement; (NSP) Natural Science
inPerspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement;(W)
Writingrequirement.
COURSES IN MUSIC HISTORY/CULTURE
AND THEORY
100. Fundamentals. (A)
Arstcourseinmusicforstudentswithlittleornoformaltrainingor
background. Emphasis on basic musicianship, including keyboard
orientation and the ability to read and sing simple melodies in treble and
bass clefs, in both major and minor modes and in a variety of meters.
Additional topics include the notation of pitch and rhythm, scales, key
signatures, time signatures, intervals, triads, and basic score navigation.
Nomusicalbackgroundisrequired. Leistra-Jones, Katz-Rosene, Wright
101. Introduction to Music. (A)
SurveyofWesternartmusicdesignedtodevelopperceptivelistening,with
emphasisonthestudyofrhythmic,melodic,andharmonicorganization,
color,texture,andform.Nomusicalbackgroundisrequired.Leistra-Jones
102. Introduction to World Music. (A) (NW)
Surveyofmusicfromaglobalperspectivewithemphasisonthestudyof
music’srelationtoculture.Includescross-culturalcomparisonofmusic’s
rhythmic,melodicandharmonicorganization,inadditiontocolor,texture
and form. Features case studies from Africa, the Americas, Europe, and
Asia.Nomusicalbackgroundrequired.Studentswhoalreadyreadmusic
shouldenrollinMUS229.) Alajaji, Katz-Rosene
105. Jazz. (A)
Thehistoryofjazz,fromitsrootstothepresentday,withemphasison
stylistic distinctions. Considers African and European contributions,
bluestypes,NewOrleansjazz,HarlemStride,Swing,bebop,cooljazz,
hardbop,freejazz,fusion,neo-classical,andacidjazz,touchingonmost
majorguresandtheircontributions.Eachstylisticperiodisstudiedfrom
an economic and sociological viewpoint with emphasis on form, texture,
improvisation, harmony, rhythm, and timbre.
Same as AFS 105 and AMS 105. Buttereld
106. History of the Blues. (A)
BlueshistoryfromitsoriginstotheBluesRevivalofthe1960s.Emphasis
on the Delta blues tradition of Charley Patton, Robert Johnson, and
Muddy Waters.Additional topics include: oral formulaic composition;
politicsofraceandsexintheblues;thebluesasa“secularreligion”;the
musicbusiness;appropriationsofbluesstyleinjazzandrock;theongoing
function of the blues as a core signier of “blackness” in American
culture. Same as AFS 106 and AMS 106. Buttereld
107. Composing. (A)
Introduction to musical composition through the study of development
and proportion and the creation of three short compositions for small
instrumental and/or vocal ensembles culminating in a nal project.
Faculty performers will read and discuss student works and concert
attendance will provide topics for two short research papers centered on
aspectsofthecompositionalprocess.Abilitytoreadmusicrequired.
Staff
108. Jazz Theory and Improvisation. (A)
An introduction to jazz theory and its application in improvisational
practice.Emphasisonjazzharmony,includingchord-scaletheoryandits
useinselectedjazz“standards”andcommonformssuchas12-barblues
and“rhythmchanges”.Exercisesintranscriptionandanalysisofclassic
solosbyLesterYoung,CharlieParker,MilesDavis,andothersintroduce
studentstoawidevarietyofapproachestojazzimprovisation.Students
will apply theoretical concepts learned in class to performance on their own
instrumentsinordertodevelopimprovisationalskillandapersonalized
jazz melodic vocabulary. Ability to read music and competence on a
musicalinstrument(includingvoice)required.Prerequisite:MUS100or
222, or permission of the instructor. Cherner
215. Composition. (A)
Fundamentals of musical composition based on appropriate models.
Projects for solo instrument, voice, or small ensembles will emphasize
individualelementsofmusic:form;rhythm;melody;harmony;andtexture.
Prerequisite:MUS100,MUS222,orpermissionoftheinstructor. Staff
222. Theory 1: Basic Harmony and Form. (A)
Beginningwithareviewoffundamentals,thecoursecoversharmonization
in four parts, voice-leading, modulation, and the composition of short
binary pieces or variations. The ability to read music in both treble and
bass clefs is required, as is a rudimentary knowledge of scales, key
signatures,andintervals.StudentsareadvisedtotakeMUS222andMUS
224concurrently. Adams, Buttereld
223. Theory 2: Advanced Harmony and Form. (A)
Chromatic harmonic practices, including enharmonic modulations and
alteredchords.Compositionandanalysisofrondoorsonataforms.Pre-
requisite:MUS222;studentsareadvisedtotakeMUS223andMUS225
concurrently. Adams, Buttereld
224. Musicianship 1. (A)
The course develops ear-training by way of melodic, harmonic, and
rhythmicdictation,andsight-singing.Theabilitytoreadmusicinboth
trebleandbassclefsisrequired,asisarudimentaryknowledgeofscales,
keysignatures,andintervals.StudentsareadvisedtotakeMUS222and
MUS224concurrently.(onehalfcredit) Buttereld, Wright
225. Musicianship 2. (A)
AcontinuationofMusic224.Additionaltopicsincludemodulationand
scorereading.Prerequisite:MUS224;studentsareadvisedtotakeMUS
223andMUS225concurrently.(onehalfcredit) Buttereld, Wright
88 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
226. Popular Musics and Societies. (A)
This course will survey selected popular musics from around the world.
Our goal is to understand these musics as phenomena of time and place
and to engage them in their cultural contexts, examining the way they
encounter the political, historical, and social realities of the societies that
produce them. Genres to be studied include hip-hop, reggae,Afropop,
bhangra,nuevacanción.Abilitytoreadmusicrequired. Alajaji
228. Middle Eastern Music and Culture. (A) (NW)
This interdisciplinary course will explore the musical identities of the
Middle East and North Africa in terms of the complex sociological,
historical, and political processes that have shaped the region. We will
proceed from the idea that music is a powerful agent in the negotiation
ofpowerandidentity,andexaminethewaysinwhichithasbeenutilized
throughout transformative periods of history. Particular attention will
be given to the transnational and diasporic nature of the musics under
consideration. Classical, folk, and popular musical traditions will be
considered, as will the roles of art, popular culture, and mass media.
Same as IST 228. Alajaji
229. Music in Cultural Perspective. (A) (NW)
A study of the notion and role of music in selected music cultures. After
exploringkeyconceptsassociatedwithmusic’suniversalfunctions,the
course will study rhythm, melody, timbre, texture, harmony, form, and
transmission from a cross-cultural perspective. Ability to read music
required. Alajaji, Katz-Rosene
230. Music History 1: Antiquity to 1750. (A)
WesternartmusicfromearlyGregorianchantthroughtheoridartof
theBaroqueperiod.Includesthemajorstylisticdevelopmentsasfound
intheworksofJosquin,Monteverdi,Bach,Handel,andothercomposers.
Abilitytoreadmusicrequired. Leistra-Jones, Adams
231. Music History 2: 1750 to Present. (A)
ThestylisticdevelopmentofWesternartmusicintheClassical,Romantic,
andModerneras.Selectedworksfromeacheraarethefocalpointofthe
study.Abilitytoreadmusicrequired. Leistra-Jones, Adams
238. Song Cycles. (A)
Song cycles—collections of songs unied by a common theme,
narrative,orviewpoint—oftentellstories.Specically, theytellstories
ofindividuals’journeys(bothinwardandoutward),transformations,and
changing impressions, and they do so not only through poetry, but also
through music. This course examines representative song cycles from
threeimportantmomentsinculturalhistory:GermanRomanticism(the
earlynineteenthcentury),then-de-siècle(theyearssurrounding1900),
andthe1960sand70s.Withintheseperiodswewillexaminecyclesbya
widerangeofcomposers,includingBeethoven,Schumann,Mahler,Elgar,
George Crumb, and Joni Mitchell. Throughout, our emphasis will be on
different conceptions of human subjectivity and the relationship between
musicandpoetry.Prerequisite:MUS100orequivalentorpermission.
Leistra-Jones
239. Hip Hop: The Global Politics of Culture. (H) (NW)
Thiscoursewillengageinhiphop’s“politicsofauthenticity”whilealso
offering a primer on the participation and contributions of a variety of
transnational, sexual, gender, and racial/ethnic constituents. Rightfully
centering and honoring the genre’s Afro-diasporic inuences, we will
examine debates involving transnationalism, gender, sexual, and racial
boundariesinhiphop.Wewillalsoexplorehiphop’sglobalrelevance,
such as its sonic and cultural presence in reggaetón and its spread as a
global dance form. Overall, this class will prompt students to untangle
hip hop’s seemingly contradictory ethos of “keeping it real” while
simultaneously promoting broader ideals of cosmopolitanism and global
commodication.Same as AMS 239. Villegas
301. Pops & Jelly Roll:
New Orleans and Its Music in the Early Twentieth Century. (A)
AnexaminationofLouisArmstrongandJellyRollMorton’sNewOrleans.
ThecourseevaluatestheirmusicandthemoregeneralstyleofearlyNew
Orleansjazzinrelationtothegeographical,social,political,andeconomic
dynamicsofthatgreatAmericancityintheearly20thcentury.Particular
attentionwillbegiventothesocialandmusicalinteractionsamongNew
Orleans’disparateethnicgroupsthatledtotheformationofauniquestyle
ofjazz derived from ragtime, blues and the ubiquitous marching band
music from that era. Same as AFS 301 and AMS 301. Buttereld
302. Bebop. (A)
Ahistoryofthebebopmovementinjazzofthe1940sand‘50s.Special
attention given to the social, economic, and political conditions that led
asmallhandfulofmusicianstoabandonSwingErabigbandsinfavor
of the small combos that formed out of Harlem jam sessions between
1941-1943.Coversdistinguishingfeaturesofthebebopstylethroughan
examinationofthemusicofCharlieParker,DizzyGillespie,Thelonious
Monk, and others. Concludes with an evaluation of the social and political
meanings of bebop and its historical legacy.
Same as AFS 302 and AMS 302. Buttereld
315. Orchestration. (A)
Covers the ranges, capabilities, and characteristic uses of orchestral
instruments through exercises, score study, and listening, and implements
this knowledge in transcriptions and arrangements for a variety of ensembles
inavarietyofhistoricalstyles.Prerequisites:MUS223orpermission.
Staff
322. Counterpoint. (A)
Theartof18th-centurycounterpointwillbestudiedthroughtheanalysis
of masterworks by J. S. Bachand others. Beginningwith species and
invertible counterpoint, followed by canonic writing, compositions will
then include short binary pieces, inventions and fugues. Prerequisite:
MUS223orpermissionoftheinstructor. Staff
323. Theory 3: Chromatic and Post-Tonal Vocabularies. (A)
Analytical study of the rhythmic, harmonic, and formal practices of
Debussy,Stravinsky,Bartók,Schoenberg,Messiaen,andothercomposers
of the last century. Includes atonal and serial music, with an introduction
to set theory. Composition of short pieces using course materials.
Prerequisite:MUS223orpermissionoftheinstructor. Buttereld, Staff
430. Music Criticism. (A)
A seminar studying various genres of writing about music including
musical diaries, analyses, musicological essays, program notes, and
reviewsofperformances.MajorworksbeingperformedinNewYorkCity
oroncampusprovidethecentralrepertoryfortheseminar.Satisesthe
writingrequirementinthemusicmajor.Prerequisites:MUS230,MUS
231,MUS222,orpermissionoftheinstructor. Staff
490. Independent Study.
Independent study directed by the music staff. Permission of the
chairperson.
COURSES IN MUSIC PERFORMANCE
240. Conducting. (A)
Anintroductiontoconducting.Studentsdevelopskillsinscorestudy,aural
discrimination, and gestural expression, and learn strategies for ensemble
rehearsal. Final project is to rehearse and conduct a performance of a large
College ensemble. Course includes an individual weekly lesson and two
weeklymasterclasses.StudentsenrollinginConductingareexpectedto
be able to read music in both treble and bass clefs, and to have a basic
knowledgeof music theory with respectto keysignatures (bothmajor
andminor),timesignatures(bothsimpleandcompound),andbasicchord
progressions. Norcross
340. Advanced Conducting. (A)
The course is an advanced study of conducting including technical
conductingdevelopmentaswellasrehearsalandperformancetechniques.
Membersoftheclasswilluseaconductingbatonandtechniquesassociated
with that tool. Each member of the class participates in two, 1 hour 20
minutemasterclasseseachweekandeachmemberreceivesa50-minute
individual lesson each week. At the end of the semester the student will
rehearsethenalprojectpiecewiththeFranklin&MarshallSymphonic
Wind Ensemble or Orchestra in preparation for a performance, which will
takeplaceonthelastWednesdayofclassesat8:00PMintheBarshinger
CenterforMusicalArts.Prerequisite:MUS 240 and permissionofthe
instructor. Norcross
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 89
One half credit for participation in the following performing
ensemblesisaccumulatedoveranyconsecutivetwo-semester
sequenceandisawardedattheendofthesecondsemesterof
participation;studentswhowishtoreceivecreditshouldenroll
inthe100-levelcourseintherstsemesterofparticipationand
the200-levelcourseinthesecond.Onefullcreditisneededto
satisfytheArtsexplorationrequirementforgraduation.
150, 250. The Franklin & Marshall College Chorus. (A)
Alargechoralgroupofapproximately80singersthatconcentratesonthe
masterpieces of the choral repertory, both a capella and with orchestra.
Tworehearsalsperweek.Prerequisite:Permissionofthedirector.Wright
151, 251. The Franklin & Marshall Chamber Singers. (A)
Aselect vocal ensemble of 24 singers selectedby audition. Repertory
includes music from a wide range of musical styles and time periods. In
additiontoon-campusperformances,thegroupembarksonannualtours.
Tworehearsalsperweek.Prerequisite:Permissionofthedirector.Wright
152, 252, 352, 452. The Franklin & Marshall Orchestra. (A)
Afullorchestrawithapproximately70performersfocusingonmasterpieces
of the orchestral repertoire. Two rehearsals per week. Members at the
300and400levelalsoparticipateintheF&MPhilharmonia,aexible
instrumentation small orchestra, wind ensembles and percussion
ensemble. This ensemble rehearses Monday and Wednesday evenings
from7-10p.m.Prerequisite:Permissionofthedirector. Norcross
153, 253. 353, 453. The Symphonic Wind Ensemble. (A)
A large ensemble for woodwinds, brass and percussionists with
approximately50performers. Repertory rangesfrom masterworks of
the concert band tradition to new works written for wind ensemble. Two
rehearsalsperweek.Membersatthe300and400levelalsoparticipatein
theF&MPhilharmonia,aexibleinstrumentationsmallorchestra,wind
ensembles and percussion ensemble. This ensemble rehearses Monday
andWednesdayeveningsfrom7-10p.m.Prerequisite:Permissionofthe
director. Norcross
155, 255. The Jazz Ensemble. (A)
Performs music from big band to progressive jazz. Prerequisite:
Permissionofthedirector. Laboranti
156, 256. Chamber Music. (A)
Chamber Music is designed for advanced instrumental music students
to experience music written for generally 3 to 8 players. These small
ensemblesrequirehighartisticdemandsofalloftheensemblemembers,
as each player is essentially a soloist. Ensembles in this program rehearse
a minimum of twice a week for a total of not less than three hours a week.
One of the two rehearsals each week is coached by a professional chamber
music coach. The ensemble is expected to perform in an appropriate
concertatleastonceasemester.Prerequisite:Permissionofthedirector.
Hall-Gulati
157, 257. African Drum Ensemble. (A)
An ensemble of up to 20 performers focusing on West African drumming
techniques and the philosophy behind them. Two rehearsals per week
Prerequisite:Permissionofthedirector.Same as AFS 157, 257. Hessen
In addition to the credit-bearing courses above, faculty-
directed,non-creditperformanceopportunitiessuchasopera
workshop and the pep band are also a part of musical life at
the College.
Studiolessonsreceiveonehalfcreditpersemesterand,atthe
200 level, may be repeated. One full credit is needed to satisfy
theArtsexplorationrequirementforgraduation.
The semester before a Senior Recital (only), students may
enroll for lessons at the 300 level as “Recital Preparation”
(e.g., MUS 385 Recital Preparation: Voice). Prerequisite: a
minimum of two semesters of credit-bearing lessons in the
same instrument at the 200 level.
ThesemesterofaSeniorRecital(only),studentsmayenroll
forlessonsatthe400levelas“SeniorRecital”(e.g.,MUS485
SeniorRecital:Voice).Prerequisite: one semesterof Recital
Preparationatthe300level.
280 A. Flute. (A)
PrivatelessonsandmasterclassinFlute.Admissionbyauditionwiththe
instructor. Trolier
280 B. Oboe. (A)
PrivatelessonsandmasterclassinOboe.Admissionbyauditionwiththe
instructor. Horein
280 C. Bassoon. (A)
PrivatelessonsandmasterclassinBassoon.Admissionbyauditionwith
the instructor. Buchar Nolet
280 D. Clarinet. (A)
PrivatelessonsandmasterclassinClarinet.Admissionbyauditionwith
the instructor. Hall-Gulati
280 E. Saxophone. (A)
Private lessons and masterclass in Saxophone.Admission by audition
with the instructor. Laboranti
281 A. Trumpet. (A)
PrivatelessonsandmasterclassinTrumpet.Admissionbyauditionwith
the instructor. Laudermilch
281 B. Horn. (A)
PrivatelessonsandmasterclassinHorn.Admissionbyauditionwiththe
instructor. Pfafe, Nye
281 C. Low Brass. (A)
PrivatelessonsandmasterclassinLowBrass.Admissionbyauditionwith
the instructor. Shiffer
282 A. Violin. (A)
PrivatelessonsandmasterclassinViolin.Admissionbyauditionwiththe
instructor. Jamanis
282 B. Viola. (A)
PrivatelessonsandmasterclassinViola.Admissionbyauditionwiththe
instructor. Sullivan
282 C. Cello. (A)
Privatelessonsandmasterclassin’Cello.Admissionbyauditionwiththe
instructor. Male
282 D. Double Bass. (A)
PrivatelessonsandmasterclassinDoubleBass.Admissionbyaudition
with the instructor. Howell
283 A. Percussion. (A)
PrivatelessonsandmasterclassinPercussion.Admissionbyauditionwith
the instructor. Yingling
283 B. African Drumming. (A)
Private lessons and masterclass in African Drumming. Admission by
audition with the instructor. Same as AFS 283 B. Hessen
284 A. Piano. (A)
PrivatelessonsandmasterclassinPiano.Admissionbyauditionwiththe
instructor. Keller
284 B. Jazz Piano and Improvisation. (A)
PrivatelessonsandmasterclassinJazzPianoand/orjazzimprovisation
(anyinstrument).Admissionbyauditionwiththeinstructor. Cherner
285. Voice. (A)
PrivatelessonsandmasterclassinVoice.Admissionbyauditionwiththe
instructor. Geyer, Beebe
286. Guitar. (A)
PrivatelessonsandmasterclassinGuitar.Admissionbyauditionwiththe
instructor. Banks
90 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
TheMusicDepartmentalsooffersprivatenon-creditlessonsfor
afeeintheaboveareasthroughits“Artist/TeacherProgram.”
StudentswithanancialaidpackagemayrequesttheStudent
AidOfcetotakethisfeeintoaccountintheiraidaward.
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
Latin American Music & Culture.
PHILOSOPHY
Professor Nick Kroll, Chair
Glenn Ross Dr. Elijah E. Kresge Professor
(Fall 2020 only) of Philosophy
Bennett W. Helm Dr Elijah E. Kresge Professor
of Philosophy
Stephan A. Käufer John Williamson Nevin Memorial
Professor of Philosophy
Lee Franklin Associate Professor of Philosophy
Nick Kroll Associate Professor of Philosophy
David Merli Associate Professor of Philosophy
George Fourlas Visiting Assistant Professor of
Philosophy and Government
Shaeeda Mensah Visiting Assistant Professor of
Philosophy
Mostphilosophy ts intooneoffourlooseandoverlapping
groups.Therststudiesaction:Whatshouldwedoandhow
can we get ourselves to do it? This group includes ethics
and social and political philosophy. A second group studies
the nature and reliability of our knowledge. Here you’ll
nd epistemologyand philosophy of science.A third group
investigates the nature of the world and the self: What does it
meanforsomethingtoexist?Whatdistinguishesthingsfrom
theirproperties?What(besidesabodyandasocialsecurity
number)isaperson?Thisgroupincludesmetaphysicsandthe
philosophyofmind.Afourthgroupanalyzessymbolicsystems
through which humans represent meaning to themselves and
to each other. These are studied in logic and the philosophy of
language.
Youcouldeasilynarrowthesefoureldstotwo,orexpand
themto17.Philosophyhasnosingletopic,but at the same
time every part of philosophy is connected with every other
in countless ways. It is hard to talk about what there is in
the world without also analyzing how we can know about
it, so metaphysics and epistemology often overlap. Some
claim that without language humans can’t know anything,
so epistemology and philosophy of language come together.
Ifyouwanttostudywhypeopleactthewaytheydo,you’ll
drawonethicsaswellasphilosophyofmind;thetwomerge
inmoralpsychology.Andsoforth.Philosophyalsoanalyzes
the social and historical conditions that make it possible to ask
suchquestionsintherstplace.Philosophy,therefore,always
includes a study of its own history.
The Philosophy program at Franklin & Marshall aims to
acquaint students with all of these areas of philosophy by
examining the great historical traditions in philosophy as
well as a broad range of contemporary issues and topics in
philosophy. In addition, students are encouraged to cultivate
skills in critical thinking and philosophical argument with the
goal of helping them to become participants in the philosophical
enterprise. Lower-division coursesin thedepartment aimto
provide students with a broad background in the history of
philosophy and contemporary problems in philosophy, while
upper-divisioncoursesseektoengagestudentsindiscussion
concerningcuttingedgescholarshipintheeld.Theworkof
philosophy majors culminates in the senior year when students
composeaseniorthesisinthecontextoftheSeniorResearch
Seminar.Majorshavethefurtheroptionofexpandingsenior
theses with the goal of presenting the project for departmental
honors.
A major in Philosophy consistsof10courses.Requirementsare:
PHI244.
OnecorehistorycoursefromPHI210,213,271,317,381
or382.
Onevaluetheorycoursedesignated(V).
One course in metaphysics, epistemology, philosophy of
language,orphilosophyofminddesignated(ME).
PHI498.
Five electives.
AtleastfourcoursesbesidesPHI498mustbenumbered
300 or higher.At most, two courses may be numbered
below 200.
The department’s program heavily emphasizes critical
thinking, logically correct reasoning and clear, concise writing.
The writingrequirement in thePhilosophy major is met by
completion of the normal courses required to complete the
major.
A minor in PhilosophyrequiressixPhilosophycourses,which
mustinclude:PHI244;eitherPHI210,213,or317;andfour
otherPhilosophyelectivesthatareapprovedbythechairperson
ordesignee.Atleasttwocoursestotalmustbenumbered300or
above. At most, one course may be numbered below 200.
MajorsintheDepartmentofPhilosophyhavestudiedabroad
in the following programs in recent years: Sarah Lawrence
College Program, Oxford University; F&M in Italy; F&M
Travel Course in Tohoku Gakuin, Japan; SEA Semester;
AmericanJr.YearinHeidelbergProgram.SeetheInternational
ProgramssectionoftheCatalogforfurtherinformation.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
100. Introduction to Philosophy. (H)
Examination of traditional philosophical problems of method, knowledge,
the nature of reality, religious belief and ethics. Staff
122. Introduction to Moral Philosophy. (H)
Survey of attempts to understand the nature and signicance of moral
thought. Theories will be assessed in part in light of current controversies,
which may include capital punishment, freedom of expression, and the
limits of state authority. Merli
170 – 179. Special Topics. (H)
Anintroductory-levelcourseonatopicchosenbytheinstructor.Topic
changes from year to year. May be taken more than once.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 91
210. Ancient Greek Philosophy. (H)
How should one live? What is happiness for a human being? These
questionsarethefocusofthephilosophyofSocrates,Plato,andAristotle.In
theworkofthesethinkers,suchquestionsleadtowiderangingphilosophical
inquiry in ethics, moral psychology, epistemology, metaphysics, political
theory, aesthetics, and beyond. This course surveys their main arguments
and theories, which became the cornerstone of the western European
philosophical tradition. Same as CLS 210
. Franklin
213. 17th- and 18th-Century Philosophy. (H)
Inthe17thand18thcenturies,scientistsandphilosophersemergedfrom
thescholastictraditionsofthemiddleagestodevelopthemodernscientic
world view and a new understanding of our own constitution and abilities.
Rangingfromastronomy,optics,andgeometrytometaphysics,religion,
and ethics, this course will study texts by the experimenters, princesses,
andlens-grinderswhoshapedthisperiod. Käufer
217. Existentialism. (H)
Existentialism is a label for a loose grouping of writers who investigate
the personal and individual nature of our relation to the world and to
others. They focus especially on questions about truth, commitment,
responsibility, freedom, and death. This class surveys some key texts
in the existentialist tradition and traces the emergence of existentialist
concerns in the history of philosophical thought. Käufer
218. Nietzsche. (H)
In-depthstudy of Nietzsche’sthought through closereading of his
major writings. Käufer
220. Moral Theory. (H) (V)
A careful study of classic texts in moral philosophy, with an emphasis
onquestionsaboutthefoundationsofethicsandtheobjectivityofmoral
judgment. Merli
223. Biomedical Ethics. (H)
A survey of ethical issues related to developments in biology and medicine,
including controversies at the beginning and end of life, autonomy and
informed consent, and limits on medical research. Same as STS 223.
Merli, Mensah
225. History of Political Philosophy. (H)
This course introduces classic texts of Western political philosophy.
Topics include the role of the state and the extent of its legitimate power
overcitizens,thenatureofpropertyrights,andthenatureandoriginof
our norms of justice. We also read contemporary texts that speak to the
themes of the classic texts and that address modern concerns such as
poverty, global justice, and personal liberty. Staff
227. Contemporary Political Philosophy. (H) (V)
This course surveys contemporary debates in political philosophy. Topics
may include the foundations of liberalism and democracy, feminist and
antiracistcritiquesofliberalism,thecaseforvariouskindsofequality,the
challenge of global justice, and multiculturalism and minority group rights.
Staff
235. Philosophy of Religion. (H) (ME)
In this course we will survey both perennial and contemporary topics in
the philosophy of religion, such as, arguments for the existence of God,
the problem of evil, the coherence of divine attributes, and the consistency
offreedomandforeknowledge.Wewillapproachthesequestionsusing
both classical and contemporary texts. Ross
236. Knowledge and Reality. (H)
This class is an advanced, but accessible, introduction to two central
branches of philosophy: epistemology and metaphysics. Epistemology,
looselycharacterized,isthestudyofknowledge.Metaphysics,evenmore
looselycharacterized,isthestudyofthegeneralfeaturesofreality.We’ll
work through some of the central topics that fall under these two studies.
Kroll
244. Symbolic Logic. (H)
Deductivereasoning,emphasizingprimarilysymbolic;somediscussion
of issues in the philosophy of logic. Kroll, Ross
250. Philosophy of Mind. (H) (ME)
A general introduction to the philosophy of mind, addressing four key
philosophicalissues:thenatureofpsychologicalexplanation;themind-
bodyproblem;thepossibilityofarticialintelligence;andthenatureof
persons.Prerequisite:onecourseinPHIorPSYorSPM. Helm
270 – 279. Special Topics. (H)
Anintermediate-levelcourseonatopicchosenbytheinstructor.Topic
changes from year to year. May be taken more than once.
317. Kant and German Idealism. (H)
Close examination of the two most important andinuential views of
the German idealist tradition: Kant’s critical philosophy and Hegel’s
historicistreactiontoit.Prerequisite:onepriorcourseinphilosophy,or
permission of the instructor. Käufer
319. 20th-Century Continental Philosophy. (H)
Close examination of emergence of modern phenomenology and
hermeneutics.withparticularattentiontoHeidegger’s Being and Time.
Prerequisite: one prior course in philosophy, or permission of the
instructor. Käufer
320. Normative Ethics. (H) (V)
Survey of theories of right and wrong action, including examination
of related questions concerning the good, well-being, obligation, etc.
Literature will include defenses and criticisms of consequentialism,
deontologyandvirtueethics.Prerequisite:onepriorcourseinphilosophy,
or permission of the instructor. Merli
321. Meta-ethics. (H) (V)
Examination of the metaphysics, epistemology and semantics of moral
discourse. Topics include objectivity of moral judgment, varieties of
realismandanti-realism,cognitivismandcompetingaccountsofpractical
rationality.Prerequisite:onepriorcourseinphilosophy,orpermissionof
the instructor. Merli
331. Free Will. (H) (ME)
An examination of contemporary theories concerning the nature of free
choice.Specialattentionisgiventothenatureofmoralresponsibilityand
therelationshipbetweenfreechoiceanddeterminism.Prerequisites:one
prior course in philosophy, or permission of the instructor. Kroll
335. Belief and Knowledge. (H) (ME)
Investigation of some issues in contemporary epistemology, including the
competinganalysesoftheconceptofjustication,thecaseforskepticism,
and the analysis of the concept of knowledge. Prerequisite: one prior
course in philosophy, or permission of the instructor. Ross
336. Metaphysics. (H) (ME)
Metaphysics asks what the most general features of the world are, why
thereisaworldthathasthosefeaturesandhowwehumanbeingstinto
that world. Examples of topics to be considered include: Is there a real,
physicalworld outside the mind?What is the natureof time?What is
requiredforthingstopersistthroughtime?Whatisthenatureofcausation?
Whydoesanythingatallexist?Havewefreewill?Prerequisite:oneprior
course in philosophy, or permission of the instructor. Kroll
337. Philosophy of Natural Science. (H) (NSP) (ME)
The goals, methods, assumptions and limitations of natural science.
Specialattentionwillbepaidtothephilosophyofpsychology,cognitive
science and evolutionary biology. Prerequisite: one prior course in
philosophy, or permission of the instructor. Same as STS/SPM 337. Ross
339. Philosophy of Language. (H) (ME)
Investigation, based on contemporary writings, of the diverse functions
served by language, of its conceptual presuppositions, and of its
relationships to other symbolic media. Kroll
342. Rational Choice. (H) (ME)
Anintroductiontodecisiontheory;topicsincludetherationalityofthe
policy of nuclear deterrence, the rationality of pursuing self-interest
in every situation, the impossibility of devising a democratic voting
procedure, the irrationality of accepting all that is probable, and others.
Lessfrequentlyoffered. Ross
92 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
351. Mind-Body Problem. (H) (ME)
A philosophical examination of the apparently problematic relationship
between the mind and the natural world. Prerequisite: One prior
Philosophycourseorpermission. Same as SPM 351. Helm
352. Philosophy of Emotions. (H) (ME)
Detailed philosophical investigation of the emotions, focusing on the
implicationsthestudyofemotionshasforthemind-bodyproblem,the
nature of consciousness and intentionality, and the nature of rationality.
How are emotions related to other mental states like beliefs, desires, and
bodilysensations?Whatdistinctivecontribution,ifany,dotheemotions
make to our mental lives? Prerequisite: one prior Philosophy course.
Same as SPM 352. Helm
353. Phenomenology and Cognitive Science. (H)
In-depth study of phenomenology, covering both its history and
contemporarydebates,andphenomenology-inspiredresearchincognitive
scienceandpsychology.Prerequisite:OnepriorPhilosophycourseand
onepriorPsychologycourse.Same as PSY/SPM 353. Käufer
360. Concept of a Person. (H) (V)
A careful examination of what it is to be a person, as an autonomous moral
agent whose life can be meaningful, and of what distinguishes persons
from the “lower” animals. Prerequisite: one prior Philosophy course.
Same as SPM 360. Helm
361. Moral Psychology. (H) (V)
Moral psychology is the study of human moral agency. As such, it is
constrainedby,andmustcoherewith,thefactsabouthumanpsychology;
but its primary focus is on human good, an evaluative notion. Central
questionsinclude:Whatarereasonsandwhatroledotheyplayinaction?
Whatischaracterandhowisitrelatedtovirtue?Whatisfreewill,canwe
haveit,andhowdowebestexplainweaknessofthewill?Prerequisite:
OnepriorPhilosophycourseorpermission.Same as SPM 361. Helm
362. Love and Friendship. (H) (V)
Investigation of philosophical aspects of love and friendship, examining a
varietyofaccountsofwhattheyareaswellasquestionsconcerningtheir
justication,theirbearingontheautonomyandidentityoftheindividual,
and the place their value has within a broader system of the values,
includingmoralvalues.Prerequisite:onepriorPhilosophycourse.
Same as SPM 362. Helm
63. Respect, Responsibility, and Ethics. (H) (V)
Recently many philosophers have argued that certain interpersonal
emotions, such as resentment, indignation, guilt, gratitude, and approbation,
are fundamental to a host of interconnected issues in ethics, including the
nature of respect, dignity, freedom and responsibility, and the origins of
moral values. This class will closely examine these claims and arguments
with the aim of understanding more clearly how moral psychology and
metaethicsintersect.Prerequisite:onepriorPhilosophycourse. Helm
370 – 379. Special Topics. (H)
An intermediate- or advanced-level course on a topic chosen by the
instructor. Topic changes from year to year. May be taken more than once.
381. Plato. (H)
An intensive treatment of some of the major philosophical themes in
selecteddialoguesofPlato.Prerequisite:PHI210.Same as CLS 381.
Franklin
490. Independent Study.
Independent study directed by the Philosophy staff. Permission of the
chairpersonrequired.
498. Philosophical Research.
Intensiveresearchandwritingonatopicofthestudent’schoicecarriedon
in a seminar setting. Includes several oral presentations by each student.
Permissionofinstructorisrequired.OfferedeveryFall. Staff
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020– 2021
171.IntrotoPhilosophyofLiberation.
172.IntrotoPhilosophyofLoveandSex.
271.FeministPhilosophy.
27x.LiberalismanditsCritics.
37x.FeministEpistemology.
PHYSICS AND ASTRONOMY
Professor Froneeld Crawford III, Chair
Gregory S. Adkins William G. and Elizabeth R. Simeral
(Fall 2020 only) Professor of Physics
Froneeld Crawford III Professor of Astronomy
Calvin Stubbins Professor of Physics
(on leave Fall 2020)
Etienne Gagnon Associate Professor of Physics
J. Kenneth Krebs Associate Professor of Physics
Amy L. Lytle Associate Professor of Physics
Deborah Schmidt Assistant Professor of Physics and
Astronomy
Ryan Trainor Assistant Professor of Physics
(on leave Spring 2021)
Christof Keebaugh Visiting Assistant Professor of Physics
and Astronomy
Elizabeth Praton Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor of
Physics and Astronomy
TheDepartmentofPhysicsandAstronomyofferstwomajors:
PhysicsandAstrophysics.
Physicsisthestudyofhowobjectsinteract,moveandchange.It
coversobjectsassmallassub-atomicparticles,suchasquarks,
to as large as the universe. It is inherently an experimental
endeavour. The starting and ending points are the data and
observations. From experiments and observations we develop
fundamental theories that allow us to explain phenomena as
commonplace as the ight of a baseball to as exotic as an
electron travelling at a speed close to the speed of light.
Courses within the department seek to help students develop a
deepunderstandingoffundamentalconcepts,problem-solving
skills, oral and written communication skills, experimental
skills and the ability to work independently as well as with
others. The skills learned in studying physics translate well to
manyeldsandcareers.
Recent physics majors have gone on to graduate school in
physics, astrophysics and engineering, to medical and law
school and to careers ranging from teaching to working on
WallStreet.
The department participates in dual-degree programs, in
whichstudentsreceiveaB.A.fromtheCollegeandaB.S.in
engineering from the partner institution, with Case Western
Reserve,ColumbiaUniversity,PennsylvaniaStateUniversity,
RensselaerPolytechnicInstitute,andWashingtonUniversity.
Students interested in any of these programs are urged to
discuss them with the department chair and the Engineering
ProfessionsAdviserintheOfceofStudent&Post-Graduate
Developmentearlyintheplanningoftheiracademicprograms.
Studentsconsideringamajorinphysicsorastrophysicswould
normallytakePhysics111andMathematics109or110intheir
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 93
rstsemester,andPhysics112andMathematics110or111
in their second semester. However, students have successfully
completed these majors following other paths.
To be considered for departmental honors, in addition to meeting
the College’s general requirements, a graduating senior must
haveanexcellentrecordinrequiredcoursesandcompleteatwo-
semester independent study project.
A major in Physicsconsistsof14courses:
PHY 111, 112, 223, 226, 331, 333,344, 421, 432; and
eitherPHY222or224
MAT109,110,111,and229.
A minor in Physics consists of six courses in the department:
PHY111,112,223oranapprovedsubstitute;226;333;
andoneadditionalPhysicscourseabovethe100-level.
The astrophysics major focuses on physical principles as they
are applied to the study of the cosmos. The goal is to promote an
understanding of a diverse array of extraterrestrial phenomena
in terms of the fundamental physics principles on which this
understanding is based. These phenomena range from the
verysmall,suchasthereactionsbetweensub-atomicparticles
that power stars, to the very large, including the expansion
and evolution of the universe itself. The astrophysics major
emphasizes the same understanding of fundamental physical
concepts and skills as the physics major and both majors provide
the necessary grounding and background for advanced study in
the sciences.
Studentsinterestedinacareerinastronomyshouldcomplete
anastrophysicsmajor,oraphysicsmajorwitha100-leveland
atleastone300-levelastronomycourseaselectives.
A major in Astrophysicsconsistsof15courses:
PHY111,112,223,226,333,331;andeitherPHY222
or224;
AST121,421;andtwoofAST312,322,332;
MAT109,110,111and229.
MajorsandminorsintheDepartmentofPhysicsandAstronomy
have studied abroad in the following programs in recent
years:InstituteforStudyAbroad, ButlerUniversityprograms
in Scotland, Australia, England, Ireland and New Zealand;
TASSEP(Trans-AtlanticScienceStudentExchangeProgram).
SeetheInternationalProgramssectionoftheCatalogforfurther
information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
PHYSICS
111. Fundamental Physics I. (N)
Firstsemesterofatwo-semestersequencethatinvestigatesthephysical
lawsgoverningthebehaviorofparticlesandsystems.PHY111always
coversNewtonianmechanics.Additionaltopics,suchasspecialrelativity,
thermodynamics and wave phenomena are covered at appropriate times
duringthesequence.Corequisite:MAT109.Offeredeverysemester.
Adkins, Keebaugh, Schmidt, Trainor, Praton
112. Fundamental Physics II. (N)
Secondsemesterofatwo-semestersequencethatinvestigatesthephysical
lawsgoverningthebehaviorofparticlesandsystems.PHY112always
covers electromagnetism, optics, atomic and nuclear physics. Additional
topics such as special relativity, thermodynamics and wave phenomena
arecoveredatappropriatetimesduringthesequence.Prerequisites:PHY
111.Corequisite:MAT110.Offeredeverysemester. Lytle
222. Electronics. (N)
Basicelectronicconcepts,devicesandcircuits,d.c.anda.c.circuittheory
withemphasisonequivalentcircuitmodels.Designandanalysisofpower
supplies, ampliers and oscillators. Laboratory work with instruments
andcircuits.Prerequisites:PHY112. Gagnon
223. Modern Physics. (N)
Topics include special relativity, vibrations and waves, kinetic theory,
basicquantummechanics,quantumstatisticsandselectionsfromatomic,
molecular,solidstate,nuclearandhigh-energyphysics,orastrophysics.
The course includes emphasis on development of laboratory, data
analysisandmathematicalskills.Prerequisite:PHY112orpermissionof
instructor. Offered every Fall. Krebs
224. Optics. (N)
Introduction to geometrical and physical optics: waves, optical components,
interference,diffraction,polarization,andlasers.Laboratoryworksupports
classroomcontent,introducesmodernopticalequipmentandmeasurement
techniques,andexplorescurrentapplicationsofoptics.Prerequisite:PHY
112andMAT111orpermissionoftheinstructor.OfferedSpring2022.
Lytle
226. Analytical Mechanics.
Newton’slawsappliedtoparticles:rectilinear motion; simple,damped
and driven oscillations; gravitation and central forces; Lagrange’s
equations and the Hamiltonian; non-inertial frames of reference; and
dynamicsofsystems ofparticles.Prerequisites: PHY111. Corequisite:
MAT229.OfferedeverySpring. Stubbins
331. Mathematical Methods of Physics.
Mathematicaltechniquesimportantinanalyzingphysicalsystems;topics
include Fourier series; series solutions of differential equations with
applications such as Schrödinger’s equation and electrostatic potential
theory;partialdifferentialequations,withmulti-dimensionalapplications
toelectrostatic potentials, the heat owand wave equations, Poisson’s
equation and electromagnetic radiation. Prerequisite: PHY 226 or
permission of the instructor. Offered every Fall. Adkins
333. Electric and Magnetic Fields.
TopicsincludeCoulombforce,electrostaticeldandpotential,Gauss’s
Law,dielectrics,Ampere’sLaw,Faraday’sLaw,magneticpropertiesof
matter,Maxwell’sequationsandelectromagneticradiation.Corequisite:
PHY331orpermissionoftheinstructor.OfferedeveryFall. Schmidt
344. Quantum Mechanics.
Basicpostulatesofquantummechanics;waveequationinoneandthree
dimensions;non-degenerate,degenerateandtime-dependentperturbation
theory;thehydrogenatom.Prerequisite:PHY331or333orpermissionof
theinstructor.OfferedeverySpring. Keebaugh
421. Experimental Methods of Physics. (N)
Designed to familiarize students with equipment and procedures used
in a research laboratory. Experiments will illustrate principles involved
in atomic, molecular and solid-state physics. Computer interfacing
of apparatus using LabView or similar software will be introduced.
Prerequisites:PHY222or224,PHY333,andPHY344orpermissionof
the instructor. Offered every Fall. Gagnon
432. Statistical and Thermal Physics.
Physical concepts and methods used in describing the behavior of
systems consisting of largenumbers of particles. Statistical mechanics
andthermodynamicsdiscussedfromauniedpointofview.Connection
between the microscopic content of the theory and the laws of
thermodynamics developed. Prerequisites: MAT 111 and PHY 226 or
permission of the instructor. Lytle
94 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
442. Condensed Matter Physics.
Developmentofconceptsandmethodsforunderstandingthebehaviorof
solids.Semiconductorphysics.Laboratoryprojectsrelatedtothephysics
ofsolidsandapplications.Prerequisites:PHY333orpermissionofthe
instructor. Staff
490. Independent Study.
Independent study directed by the Physics staff. Permission of the
departmentchairisrequired.
ASTRONOMY
100. Survey of Astronomy. (N)
A survey of important areas and concepts of astronomy. Topics may
include development of astronomy from ancient to modern times,
includingstudiesofthenightsky;lightandtheelectromagneticspectrum;
oursolarsystem,includingthelawsgoverningthemotionoftheplanets;
evolutionandpropertiesofstars;blackholesandneutronstars;structure,
originandevolutionofgalaxies;andthehistoryandpresentproperties
of the universe. Weekly laboratory meetings at the Observing Deck,
PlanetariumorComputerClassroom.OfferedeveryFall. Trainor
121. Introduction to Astrophysics. (N)
Aquantitativeintroductionandexplorationofsomeofthemainideasin
modern astrophysics with an emphasis on the relationship of contemporary
physics to astronomy. Topics may include astronomical instrumentation,
radiation laws and spectra, physical characteristics of the sun and other
stars, stellar formation and evolution, the solar system, compact objects,
extragalactic astronomy and galaxies, and cosmology. Weekly laboratory
meetingsattheObservatoryDeck,PlanetariumorComputerClassroom.
Corequisite:MAT109.OfferedeverySpring. Crawford
312. Solar System Astrophysics.
A study of the characteristics of the solar system from a physical
perspective. Topics include the physics of planetary atmospheres and
interiors,dynamicsofsolarsystembodies,magneticelds,andthesolar
wind.Prerequisite:AST121or100.Corequisite:PHY226. Staff
322. Stellar Astrophysics.
Astudy of the physics of stars (including the Sun), star formation, the
interstellar medium, structure and evolution of stars, properties of normal
stars, stellar interiors, and stellar kinematics; exotic end-states of stars.
Prerequisite:AST121or100.Corequisite:PHY226. Schmidt
332. Galaxies and Cosmology.
Astudyofthephysicalpropertiesofgalaxiesandtheirnuclei,large-scale
structureintheuniverse;andcosmology.Topicsincludegalacticstructure
and properties of normal galaxies; galaxy formation; the Hubble ow
andcosmicdistancescales,activegalaxiesandquasars;galaxyclusters
andlarge-scalestructureoftheuniverse;cosmicbackgroundradiation,
and inationary “big bang” cosmology.Prerequisite:AST121 or 100.
Corequisite:PHY226. Staff
386. Changing Concepts of the Universe. (NSP)
Historical examination of primitive and early cosmologies to present-
day theories of the organization, extent and nature of the universe.
EarlyGreekastronomytopresent-day“bigbang”theory.Useofsimple
astronomical instruments to reproduce observations of early astronomers.
Notalaboratorycourse.Same as STS 386. K.A. Miller
387. Archaeoastronomy. (NSP)
Fundamentalastronomyofancientcultures:Stonehengeandotherstone
ringsinEnglandandEurope;circlesandtemplesintheAmericas,Asiaand
Africa;time-keepingandcalendars;predictionofseasonsandeclipses.
Methods of analysis: motions of celestial bodies; use of planetarium,
celestial globes and grids; surveying of sites. Not a laboratory course.
Same as STS 387. E. Praton
421. Experimental Methods of Astrophysics. (N)
Investigations into the experimental and observational techniques used
in modern astrophysics. Overviews of instrumentation and detection
methods;numericalandobservationalprinciplesused;datareductionand
analysis; error analysis and statistical condence. Coursework includes
classroom and experimental lab work, observing projects, and independent
projectsandpresentations.Prerequisites:AST312,AST322orAST332;
Corequisite:PHY333.OfferedeveryFall. Crawford
390, 490. Independent Study.
Independent study directed by theAstronomy staff. Permission of the
departmentchairisrequired.
PSYCHOLOGY
Professor Michael Penn, Chair
Professors Megan Knowles and Christina Abbott, Associate Chairs
Elizabeth V. Lonsdorf Dana Professor in the Liberal Arts and
Associate Professor of Psychology
Meredith J. Bashaw Professor of Psychology
Michael L. Penn Professor of Psychology
(on leave Spring 2021)
Megan L. Knowles Associate Professor of Psychology
Timothy C. Roth II Associate Professor of Psychology
Allison S. Troy Associate Professor of Psychology
(on leave 2020–2021)
Carlota Batres Assistant Professor of Psychology
Elena Cuffari Assistant Professor of Psychology
Lauren H. Howard Assistant Professor of Psychology
Ryan T. Lacy Assistant Professor of Psychology
Joshua D. Rottman Assistant Professor of Psychology
Christina L. Abbott Visiting Assistant Professor of
Psychology
Kristen L. Leimgruber Visiting Assistant Professor of
Psychology
Joseph Lynch Visiting Assistant Professor of
Psychology
Caitlyn Hantis Visiting Assistant Professor of
Psychology
Ken Gish Adjunct Assistant Professor of
Psychology
Christopher Grant Adjunct Assistant Professor of
Psychology
Psychologists study mind and behavior in both human and
non-humananimals.Theytesthypothesesandtheoriesusing
systematic observations of behavior in experimental, eld,
computermodelingandself-reportsettings.
We believe that the best way to communicate this empirical
approach is by participating in it, so students learn and apply
psychological methods in our courses. Our curriculum addresses
current psychological theories that apply to a wide range of
phenomena, but it also shapes students to employ various
approachestotheempiricalanalysisofsuchtheories.During
thisprocess,studentsdevelopanalytical,research,quantitative
and communication skills. Our empirical orientation also leads
students to participate in collaborative and independent research
experiences under the mentorship of our faculty.
Questions about behavior can be addressed at multiple
levels of complexity (e.g.,neural, cognitive and contextual)
and from multiple perspectives (e.g., learning, perceptual,
developmental and social). Our curriculum embodies these
multiple conceptual approaches, as reected in diverse
courseofferingsaswellasourparticipationintheBiological
Foundations of Behavior and Scientic and Philosophical
StudiesofMindinterdisciplinaryprograms.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 95
A major in Psychology consists of 10 courses:
PSY100and230;
FourAreaStudiescourses;atleastonecoursefromeachof
theareasbelow.(Itmaybepossibletosubstitutearelated,
non-introductorycoursewithpermission.)Asinglecourse
may not be counted for more than one Area.
Perception and Physiological Psychology
PSY240.Neuroscience.
PSY301.SensationandPerception.
PSY302.Biopsychology.
PSY303.HormonesandBehavior.
Development and Cognition
PSY304.DevelopmentalPsychology.
PSY305.CognitivePsychology.
PSY311.OriginsofMoralThought.
PSY317.HealthPsychology.
PSY340.Psycholinguistics.
Personality, Social and Psychopathology
PSY307.PersonalityPsychology.
PSY308.Psychopathology.
PSY309.SocialPsychology.
PSY315.Cross-CulturalPsychology.
PSY317.HealthPsychology.
PSY319.Emotion.
Evolution and Adaptation
PSY250.AnimalBehavior.
PSY306.EvolutionofMindandIntelligence.
PSY310.ConditioningandLearning.
PSY311.OriginsofMoralThought.
PSY312.EmbodiedCognition.
PSY319.Emotion.
OneelectivecourseinPsychology;theelectivecoursemust
beabovethe100level.(Itmaybepossibletosubstitutea
related,non-introductorycoursewithpermission.)
Three400-levelcourses.Atleasttwoofthethreecourses
must be Empirical Research (ER) courses. A student
approvedtoenrollinPSY490maycountonesemesterof
IndependentResearchtowardsthisrequirement.
Thewriting requirement inthe Psychologymajor ismet by
completion of the normal courses required to complete the
major.
A joint major in Psychology consists of eight courses:
PSY100 andPSY 230; anyfour psychologycourses at the
300-level;andanytwopsychologycoursesatthe400-level.
The requirement for a minor is any six courses in Psychology.
MajorsintheDepartmentofPsychologyhavestudiedabroad
inthefollowingprogramsinrecentyears:DanishInstitutefor
StudyAbroad(DIS)inCopenhagenandStockholm;Institute
For StudyAbroad (IFSA) at Butler University programs in
Argentina,Australia,NewZealand,andtheUnitedKingdom;
Boston University London Internship Program; IESAbroad
programs in Austria, Italy, and Spain; Syracuse University
Abroad programs in Spain; Psychology and Research in
Madrid program through the University of Minnesota Learning
AbroadCenter;BudapestSemesterinCognitiveScience.See
theInternationalProgramssectionoftheCatalogforfurther
information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows. Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(NSP)NaturalScienceinPerspective;(LS)LanguageStudies
requirement;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement;(ER)
EmpiricalResearchrequirement.
100. Introductory Psychology. (N)
An experimental and conceptual analysis of the processes of learning,
thinking and perception and the biological bases of behavior. The
relationships of these to behavioral development, social behavior and
more complex phenomena of personality formation and abnormal
behaviorareundertaken.Requiredlaboratoryworkinvolvesinvestigation
of the various processes in animals and humans. Offered every semester.
Students cannot earn credit for both PSY 100 and PSY 101 unless
permission is obtained from the department. Staff
101. Introduction to Psychological Science. (NSP)
A topics-based, non-lab, non-survey, question-and procedure-oriented
discussion of important perspectives in contemporary psychological
science. The course will examine origins, support for, and applications
of a series of theoretical positions. In the process, students will learn
to appreciate the empirical procedures through which psychologists
formulate and evaluate hypotheses about behavior, using texts as well as
primary literature that illustrates how these procedures occur in actual
practice. Students cannot earn credit for both PSY 100 and PSY 101
unless permission is obtained from the department. Staff
230. Experimental Design and Statistics.
Descriptive and inferential statistics. Research design as reected in
statistical methods. Analysis of variance designs for independent groups and
forrepeatedmeasurements.Statisticalpowerandcomparisontechniques.
Requiredlaboratorywillfocusondesignandmethodology.Offeredevery
semester.Prerequisite:PSY100orBIO110. Bashaw, Batres
AREA STUDIES COURSES
220. Neuroethics. (NSP)
This course will examine our changing social, ethical, and political
perceptions of human behavior in relation to changes in our understanding
of the brain and its function, particularly in terms of advances in science
thathaveoccurredoverthepast50years.Wewilldiscusstheimplications
of our ability to monitor and manipulate the brain for our understanding
of what is moral, normal, and healthy. Topics covered will include
disorders of consciousness, cognitive liberty, psychiatric diseases and
their treatment, drugs and addiction, and the role of the brain in producing
socially unacceptable or undesirable behaviors. Open to sophomores,
juniors, and seniors. Roth
240. Neuroscience. (N)
Principles of nervous system function from the molecular through the
organ system level as illustrated by the vertebrates and invertebrates.
Approximately one half of the course will cover basic cellular principles
of nervous system organization, development and physiology. The
remaininglectureswillconsidertheroleoffunctionallyidentiedneural
networksin behaviorcontrol. Prerequisite:BIO 220or BFB/PSY302.
OfferedeverySpring.Same as BFB/BIO/SPM 240. Jinks
250. Animal Behavior. (N)
An integrative approach to animal behavior from the perspectives
of ethology, behavioral ecology and comparative psychology. The
structure, function, development and evolution of behavioral adaptations
including foraging and predation, communication, social organization
and reproductive strategies. Observational and experimental research
required.Prerequisites:BIO110andpermissionofinstructor.Corequisite:
eitherBIO210orPSY230,orpermissionoftheinstructor.Offeredevery
Fall. Same as BFB/BIO 250. Lonsdorf
96 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
301. Sensation and Perception. (N)
Reviewofphenomenaandresearchonsensoryprocessesandtheirrole
in perception. Readings and discussion will examine evidence from
behavioral, psychophysical and physiological research and consider
implications for explanations arising from the mechanistic, cognitive,
computationalandnaturalistictheoreticalperspectives.Prerequisite:PSY
100orSPM100orpermission.Corequisite:PSY230orBIO210.Offered
every Fall. Same as BFB/SPM 301. Staff
302. Biopsychology. (N)
Behavioralandmentalprocessesasviewedfromabiologicalperspective
with particular emphasis upon the role of neurochemical and endocrine
factors in central nervous system function. Topics covered will include
reproduction and gender, chemical senses and ingestion, emotion,
learning, sleep and psychopathology. A neuropharmacological approach
tothestudyofthenervoussystemwillbeemphasized.Prerequisite:PSY
100orSPM100orBIO110orpermission.Corequisite:PSY230orBIO
210. Offered every semester. Same as BFB/SPM 302. Lacy, Lynch, Roth
303. Hormones and Behavior. (N)
Like many other animals, humans must successfully navigate stressful
situations, sex, and other social interactions to survive and reproduce.
Howdohormonesenable,regulate,ormodifybehaviorinthesesituations?
Howdobehaviorandtheenvironmentinturnaffecthormonefunction?
Dotheseeffectsdifferacrossspecies?We’lldevelopanunderstandingof
theendocrinesystem’sorganizationandactivationeffectsbyexamining,
evaluating, and conducting research on humans and other animals.
Prerequisites:PSY100orBIO110;andPSY230orBIO210orSOC
302. Bashaw
304. Developmental Psychology.
An examination of the relative contributions of nature and nurture on
children’s behavioral, cognitive and perceptual development from the
prenatal period through adolescence. Topics include the development
of language, concepts, intelligence, socialization, motor abilities and
emotional understanding, with discussion informed by current and
classic primary reading. Research activities and analyses integrated
into coursework. Prerequisite: PSY 100 or SPM 100 or permission.
Corequisite:PSY230orBIO210.OfferedeveryFall.
Howard, Leimgruber
305. Cognitive Psychology.
In this course we will ask how some familiar human behaviors—seeing,
classifying, remembering, speaking, reasoning—are possible. We will
learn how cognitive scientists go about answering these questions and
what some of the classic answers are. The idea is both to introduce
somekeyndingsincognitivepsychologyandtodeveloptheskillsto
understand and critically evaluate cognitive psychology research. In
addition to lectures, the course will include hands-on experiments and
demonstrations;studentpresentationsofindividualjournalarticles;and
debates about the broader implications of some cognitive psychology
research.Prerequisite:PSY100orSPM100orpermission.Corequisite:
PSY230orBIO210.OfferedeveryFall. Howard
306. Evolution of Mind and Intelligence.
Whatis intelligentbehavior,whatisit forand howdid it evolve?We
will attempt to answer these questions and understand the nature and
development of Mind from a comparative perspective. We will do so
by investigating learning, perception, memory, thinking and language
inanimalsandhumans.Researchactivitiesandanalysesintegratedinto
coursework.Prerequisites:BIO210orPSY230ANDoneof:BIO240,
PSY250,PSY301,PSY302,PSY303,PSY304,PSY305,PSY307,
PSY308,PSY309,PSY310,PSY312,PSY315,PSY337,PSY370-379,
PSY390,orpermission. Same as BFB 306. Roth
307. Personality Psychology.
This course provides an evaluative and comparative overview of major
models of personality selected to illustrate psychodynamic, trait, cognitive,
humanistic, physiological and learning approaches. The course will
emphasizethetestabilityofthemodelsandtheirconnectionwithcurrent
research. Research activities and analyses integrated into coursework.
Prerequisite:PSY100orSPM100orpermission.Corequisite:PSY230
orBIO210.OfferedeveryFall. Troy
308. Psychopathology.
This course will serve as an introduction to descriptive and theoretical
approaches to the study of psychopathology. In addition to the study
of disease-related processes, special emphasis will be placed upon
developing an understanding of those biological, psychological and social
conditions that are essential for healthy psychosocial functioning across
thelifespan.Prerequisite:PSY100orSPM100orpermission.Offered
everySpring. Grant, Penn
309. Social Psychology.
This course involves the student in exploration of some of the basic topics
in experimental approaches to social psychology, such as cognitive and
motivational perspectives on social phenomena, the role of affect and
emotion in social action and current uses of the concept of self. Issues
exploredinthiscontextincludeself-afrmationprocesses,regulationof
social action and the relationship between affect, cognition and action.
Researchactivitiesandanalysesintegratedintocoursework.Prerequisite:
PSY100orSPM100andPSY230orBIO210,orpermission.Offered
everySpring. Knowles
310. Conditioning and Learning.
An introduction to the process by which human and animal behavior
changes as a function of experience. Examines basic mechanisms for
learning (including habituation, sensitization and classical and operant
conditioning) and explores the scientic and practical application of
thesemechanismstoexplainandpredictbehavior.Discussestheextent
to which learning mechanisms are consistent across species and how the
physiology, natural environment and social systems of individual species
interact with basic learning processes to produce different behavioral
outcomes.Prerequisite:PSY100orBIO110.OfferedeveryFall.
Same as BFB 310. Lacy, Lynch
311. Origins of Moral Thought.
Moral values dene us, unite us, and give meaning to our lives. How
havewecometoholdourparticularmoralconvictions?Wewillexamine
thisquestiononthreedifferenttimescales:millennia(humanevolution),
centuries (cultural dynamics), and years (child development). Students
will evaluate and synthesize insights from psychology, philosophy,
biology, anthropology, economics, and history in order to understand
the manifold origins of moral beliefs and behaviors, thus challenging
existing values and cultivating improved abilities to create a better future.
Prerequisite:PSY100orSPM100orplacement.Corequisite:PSY230.
Leimgruber, Rottman
312. Embodied Cognition. (NSP)
In this course we will study intelligence by focusing on perception and
action in the environment. To this end, we will focus on ecological
psychology,robotics,articialneuralnetworksandsimulatedevolution.
Although students will be expected to build simple robots and work
with computer models, no background knowledge of engineering or
computingwillbeassumed.(Knowledgeofprogrammingisnotrequired.)
Prerequisite:PSY100orSPM100,orapriorphilosophycourse. Cuffari
315. Cross-Cultural Psychology.
Cross-CulturalPsychologyservesasanintroductiontotherelationships
among cultural processes, human consciousness, human health and human
development.Prerequisite:PSY100orSPM100.Same as AFS 315.Penn
317. Health Psychology.
This course explores the complex factors that affect human health,
specically examining how health and health-related behavior is
inuenced by the interrelationship of multiple environmental and
individual factors ranging from individual personality to health policy.
This course also examines the fundamental principles and theories of
HealthPsychologyandhowtheoreticalandempiricalndingsareapplied
toimprovethehealthofindividualsandgroups.Prerequisite:PSY100or
BIO110. Same as PBH 317. Abbott
319. Emotion.
This course will serve as an introduction to theoretical and empirical
approachestothestudyofhumanemotion.Somequestionsthiscourse
will address include: What are emotions? What are the functions of
emotions?Howdoouremotionsaffectourthoughtsandbehaviors?How
doweregulateouremotions?Wewillalsoconsiderhowtheanswersto
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 97
thesebasicquestionscanbeusedtounderstandpsychopathology,well-
being,andhappinessinbothchildrenandadults.Prerequisite:PSY100
orBIO110.Corequisite:PSY230orBIO210. Troy
340. Psycholinguistics.
This course explores language in the mind and brain, including: How
do children learn their rst language(s) and why is it sucha different
experienceforanadulttolearnalanguage?Whatarelanguagedisorders?
Isspokenlanguage processed differentlyfromwrittenlanguage?What
aboutsignlanguages?Classwillincludediscussions,presentations,and
hands-onanalysisoflanguagedata.Prerequisite:LIN101orPSY100.
Same as LIN 340. Cox
400-LEVEL COURSES
450. Cognitive Development.
Inamatterofmonths,azygotegoesfromacollectionofcellstoathinking,
feeling,learning baby…whoquickly goeson tobe a walking, talking,
problem-solvingtoddler…whosoonafterisareading,writing,socially-
awarechild.It’sbreathtaking!Thisadvanced,discussion-focusedseminar
explores the foundations of cognitive processes and developmental
mechanisms that underpin our fantastic human cognitive growth. As we
survey major topics in cognitive development, our focus will be primarily
onbirth through early childhood, asking the question: How do infants
and children make sense of the myriad people, ideas, and objects around
them?Prerequisite:PSY304orPSY305orPSY314. Staff
451. CBL: Applied Psychological Science.
Inthiscourse,youwilllearnhowtoapplyndingsfrombasicpsychological
researchtosolvereal-worldproblems.Studentswillworkinpartnership
withlocalcommunitygroupstoselectareal-worldproblemofinterestto
address and complete a project. Final projects will be presented to a panel
of researchers and community members. The course is collaborative in
nature;youwillworkingroupstodesignandconductyourresearchand
muchofyourgradeinthiscoursewillbegroup-based.Thiscourseisfor
seniorPsychologymajors. Abbott, Penn
452. History and Philosophy of Psychology.
The historical origins of contemporary psychology in European
philosophy, physiology, and biology, and subsequent development of
the schools of structuralism, functionalism, Gestalt, behaviorism, and
psychoanalysis. Emphasis on identifying the goals, implicit assumptions,
andpotentialcontributionsofscienticpsychology.Prerequisites:Senior
psychologymajorstatusorpermissionofinstructor.SameasSTS452.
Cuffari
453. Nature/Nurture. (NSP)
Oneofthemostenduringdisputesintheeldofpsychologyconcernsthe
degree to which psychological traits are learned or innate. Are genes or
socializationresponsibleforheightenedratesofaggressioninmen?How
dobiologicalandenvironmentalfactorsinteracttoproducelanguage?Is
cultureanevolvedadaptation?Doesitmakeanysenseatalltopartition
thecausesofthinkingandbehaviorinto“nature”and“nurture”–oris
this a wholly false dichotomy? Throughout this course, we will draw
uponcutting-edgeresearchtoevaluatearangeoftheoreticalperspectives
on the interplay of nature and nurture. We will also discuss the myriad
sociopolitical ramications of this fundamental debate. Prerequisites:
PSY230and(PSY301orPSY302orPSY303orPSY304orPSY305
orPSY306orPSY307orPSY308orPSY309orPSY310orPSY311or
PSY312orPSY313orPSY314orPSY315orPSY317orPSY319).
Rottman
460. Advanced Quantitative Methods. (N, ER)
Anexaminationofcomplexunivariateandmultivariatestatisticaltechniques
as applied in the context of psychological research. The course will focus on
techniquesincludingcomplexanalysisofvariance,multivariateregression
andcorrelation,factoranalysis,andpowerandeffectsize.Wewillexamine
published research and conduct research projects to explore the relationship
betweenhypotheses,experimentaldesignsandthesestatisticaltechniques.
Offered every other year. Prerequisites: PSY 230 or BIO 210 and one
300-levelPSYcourse. Bashaw
480. Collaborative Research in
Comparative Cognition and Behavior. (N, ER)
Comparative perspectives and approaches to the study of selected topics
drawn from cognitive and developmental psychology, cognitive ethology,
cognitive and behavioral neuroscience, cognitive science and behavioral
primatology.Researchrequired.Prerequisites:PSY230orBIO210,one
ofPSY250,301,302,303,304,305,306,310;ORoneofBIO250,330,
379;ORoneofBFB250,301,302,306,330,379;ORpermissionofthe
instructor.OfferedeveryotherSpring.Same as BFB/SPM 480. Lonsdorf
481. Collaborative Research in Developmental Psychology. (N, ER)
An overview of methods for conducting research with children, with an
emphasis on ethics of working with child participants. Current empirical
and theoretical issues in developmental psychology are addressed through
literature review and group research projects.Topicsreecting student
interestsareconsidered.Laboratoryresearchrequired.Prerequisites:PSY
230orBIO210;andPSY304orPSY305orPSY311orPSY314;or
permission.OfferedeverySpring. Staff
482. Collaborative Research in Social Psychology. (N, ER)
Selected topics in experimental social psychology. Emphasis on
experimental methods. Traditional areas of social psychology and topics
thatreectstudentresearchinterestareconsidered.Laboratoryresearch
required.Prerequisites:PSY230orBIO210;PSY309,orpermission.
Offered every Fall. Knowles
483. Collaborative Research in Human Cognition. (N, ER)
An in-depth consideration of selected empirical and theoretical issues
in cognitive psychology. Emphasis is on recent literature covering
basic research in cognitive psychology, cognitive neuroscience and
computational neuroscience modeling, including such topics as attention
and resource allocation, representation, concept formation, memory and
topicsreectingresearchinterestsof participating students.Laboratory
research required. Prerequisites: PSY 230 or BIO 210; PSY 305, or
permission.OfferedeverySpring. Howard
484. Collaborative Research in Personality. (N, ER)
Selectedempiricalandtheoreticaltopicsfromthecontemporaryliterature
in personality psychology with emphasis on measurement issues and
comparativeanalysesofmajormodelsandtaxonomies.Topicsthatreect
studentresearchinterestswillbediscussed.Laboratoryresearchrequired.
Prerequisites:PSY230orBIO210;andPSY307orPSY309orPSY319
orPSY371EvolutionaryPsychology;orpermission.Studentsplanningto
usePSY371EvolutionaryPsychologyasaprerequisiteshouldcontactthe
instructorpriortoregistrationtorequestaprerequisiteoverride.Offered
everySpring. Troy, Yantis
485. Collaborative Research in Human Perception and Action. (N, ER)
Contemporary research and theories of the interrelations of perceptual
and motor processes. Content will be drawn from the literatures of
experimental psychology, neurophysiology and human factors. Animal
models and computational algorithms will be considered when applicable,
with primary emphasis on implications for human performance.
Laboratoryresearchrequired.Prerequisites:PSY230orBIO210;PSY
301,orpermission Staff
486. Collaborative Research in Health Psychology. (N, ER)
This is an upper-level, research-based seminar that explores the
relationship between biological, psychological, and social attributes
and physical health. Topics that reect student research interests will
be discussed and explored through group research projects. Laboratory
researchisrequired.Prerequisite:PSY230andoneofPSY305,PSY308,
PSY309orPSY317,orpermissionoftheinstructor. Abbott, Knowles
487. Collaborative Research in Biological Psychology. (N, ER)
The neurophysiological and structural basis of behavior with emphasis
on motivation and learning, including the use of psychopharmacological
methods. The role of endocrine and metabolic processes in the regulation
of behavior is integrated with considerations of structure. Laboratory
researchrequired.Prerequisites:PSY230orBIO210;PSY302orBIO/
BFB240orpermission.Offeredeveryotheryear. Same as BFB 487.
Lacy, Roth
98 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
488. Collaborative Research in Psychopathology. (N, ER)
Anupper-level,research-basedseminarthatexploresnormative,healthy
andabnormalpsychosocialdevelopmentacrossthelifespan.Studentsare
assisted to undertake individual or group research projects using a variety
of methods—including both quantitative and qualitative approaches.
Prerequisites: PSY230 or BIO 210; PSY 308, or permission. Offered
every Fall. Penn
489. Collaborative Research in Moral Psychology. (N, ER)
Studentswillconductexperimentalresearchonrelevanttheoreticalissues
withintheeldofmoralpsychology.Topicsmayincludeinvestigations
of the scope of moral concern, manifestations of moral virtues, childhood
acquisitionofmoralbeliefs,dispositionstowardprosocialityandfairness,
contributions of emotions to moral judgment, and other related areas that
reectstudentinterest.Techniquesfordesigning,conducting,analyzing,
and presenting empirical research will be discussed, practiced, and
implemented.Laboratoryresearchisrequired;thiscourseisanEmpirical
Research(ER)course.Prerequisites:PSY230;andPSY304,PSY305,
PSY309,PSY311,PSY314,PSY315,PSY319,PSY453,orPSY471
Nature/Nurture;orpermission.StudentsplanningtousePSY471Nature/
Nurtureasaprerequisiteshouldcontacttheinstructorpriortoregistration
torequestaprerequisiteoverride. Rottman
INDEPENDENT RESEARCH
PSY 490. Independent Research in Psychology (ER).
Design,propose,conduct,andpresentapsychologicalresearchproject
guided by a faculty mentor familiar with your area of investigation.
Students are responsible for all aspects of the project from protocol
development to written and oral interpretation of the results. Typically
reserved for seniors with cumulative GPA above 3.0 and major GPA
above3.2whohavesuccessfullycompletedarelevantareastudiescourse,
thoughstudentsmaypetitionthedepartmenttoenrolliftheydon’tmeet
theseconditions.Studentsmayelecttohavea490projectconsideredfor
departmental honors. Interested students should contact possible faculty
mentorsthesemesterbeforetheyplantoenroll.Prerequisite:Permission
of faculty mentor and chairperson.
ELECTIVES
270-279, 370–379, 470-479. Special Topics in Psychology.
An examination of a single problem area of psychology receiving attention
inthecurrentliterature.Permitsin-depthanalysisofasingle,important
psychological phenomenon. Admission by consent of instructor.
INT 261. Experiential Elementary Science Teaching.
This course will provide academic context and support as students
teach science in a local elementary school classroom. Students will
workinpartnershipwiththeclassroomteachertodesignengaging,age-
appropriate,inquiry-basedlessonplansthatwillbecompatiblewiththe
SchoolDistrictofLancaster’sdesignatedsciencecontent.Thecoursewill
focusonteachingtechnique,pedagogy,effectivelessonplanning,aswell
as larger issues associated with inclusive classrooms, urban education
and inquiry-based approaches to science. Permission of the instructor
required. Bechtel
290, 390. Directed Research in Psychology.
Gain hands-on experience designing, conducting, and/or presenting a
scholarly research project under the direction of a Psychology faculty
member. Students normally produce a written nal report. Typically
reserved for sophomores, juniors, and seniors. Interested students should
contact possible faculty supervisors the semester before they plan to
enroll.Prerequisite:Permissionoffacultysupervisorandchairperson.
353. Phenomenology and Cognitive Science. (H)
In-depth study of phenomenology, covering both its history and
contemporarydebates,andphenomenology-inspiredresearchincognitive
scienceandpsychology.Prerequisite:OnepriorPhilosophycourseand
onepriorPsychologycourse.Same as PHI/SPM 353. Käufer
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
2020–2021
37X.PsychologyofPowerandPrivilege.
37X.FacePerception.
PUBLIC HEALTH
Professor Janine Everett, Chair
MEMBERS OF THE PUBLIC HEALTH PROGRAM
COMMITTEE
Kirk Miller B.F. Fackenthal, Jr. Professor of
Biology
James E. Strick Professor of Science, Technology and
Society
Jerome I. Hodos Associate Professor of Sociology
Stephanie McNulty Associate Professor of Government
Emily Marshall Assistant Professor of Sociology and
Public Health
Harriett Okatch Assistant Professor of Biology and
Public Health
Christina L. Abbott Visiting Assistant Professor of
Psychology
Janine Everett Director and Teaching Professor of the
Public Health Program
Additional faculty not on the program committee
also contribute to this program.
PublicHealthisaninterdisciplinarymajorthatoffersacore
program of study, and a selection of concentration tracks in
Biology,Government,orSociology.Studentsinourcourses
study the health of communities and how it can be affected
bycommunity-basedaction.Westudytheburdenofdisease,
the principles and history of public health and how to measure
health, health in the context of human rights, how to measure
andimprovehealthsystems,theinuenceofcultureonhealth,
and the organizational actors in local, national, and global
public health. We draw on the science underlying health in
human communities and examine the use of such knowledge
in a political arena that is central to getting things done.
The mission ofthe Public Healthmajor is toeducate F&M
students in public health from the perspective of the liberal
arts, with particular attention to the analysis of public health
problems from multiple perspectives and with tools from
multiple disciplines and with emphasis on theory and history.
Publichealthislinkedtotheformulationandimplementation
of public policy, thus connecting natural and social sciences
and government at its core. Public health incorporates an
international perspective. We encourage and guide students
toaskbroadquestionsofmeaning,tochallengeassumptions
and structures, to ponder ethical questions, to evaluate the
effectiveness of solutions to problems, and to develop a deep
moral intelligence surrounding public health.
The program offers a common set of core courses for all
students, and three concentration tracks:
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 99
Public Health Core: PBH251, PBH354, BIO110, BIO210,
GOV200,PBH410,PBH415orPBH420
Biology Track: BIO220; CHM111; CHM112; BIO230;
twoapprovedBIOelectives,withatleastonebeingalab
course
Government Track:GOV100orGOV120orGOV130,
GOV305,PBH303orGOV373,STS311orPHI223,one
GOVcourseatthe300or400-level
Sociology Track:SOC100;twofromSOC210,SOC330,
SOC345, SOC350, SOC360, SOC366, SOC377; two
approvedSOCelectives
Off-Campus Study
Theoff-campusstudyprogramsmostfrequentlyattendedby
studentsmajoringinPublicHealthare:
SchoolforInternationalTraining(SIT)
Danish Institute for Study Abroad/Institute for Study
Abroad(DIS)
InstituteforStudyAbroad(IFSA)
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
PBH 251. Introduction to Public Health.
Anintroductiontopublic health, aeldthatendeavors to improvethe
healthofthecommunitythroughcommunity-basedaction.Thehistoryof
public health, how to measure community health, communicable diseases,
chronic and lifestyle diseases, family health, nutrition and food safety,
environmentalhealth,theU.S.nationalhealthcaresystem,underserved
groups, public health law and ethics, and the future of public health.
Prerequisite:BIO110orGOV100orpermission.
Everett, K. Miller, Okatch, Tripp
PBH 303. Problem-Solving Courts/Drug Court. (S)
Thisinterdisciplinarycommunity-basedlearningcourse,taughtbyalocal
LancasterCountyDrugCourtJudge,willintroducestudentstothereal
world of Problem Solving Courts, including Drug Courts and Mental
HealthCourts.Thiswillincludeahands-on/experientialexaminationof
traditionalcourts,DrugCourtmodels,andaddictionissues.Studentswill
berequiredtointeractdirectlywithDrugCourtparticipantsandmembers
oftheLancasterCountyCourtofCommonPleasAdultDrugCourtTeam.
Permissionrequired. Ashworth
PBH 317. Health Psychology.
This course explores the complex factors that affect human health,
specically examining how health and health-related behavior is
inuenced by the interrelationship of multiple environmental and
individual factors ranging from individual personality to health policy.
This course also examines the fundamental principles and theories of
HealthPsychologyandhowtheoreticalandempiricalndingsareapplied
toimprovethehealthofindividualsandgroups.Prerequisite:PSY100or
BIO110.Same as PSY 317. Abbott
PBH 354. Epidemiology.
Epidemiology is the study of health and disease of populations. In this
course, students will learn methods epidemiologists use to elucidate
relationships between various types of exposures and positive or negative
healthoutcomes;theywillalsoexploremethodstotraceandpredictdisease
patterns, including epidemics and pandemics. In this course, students will
learnhowtodevelopresearchquestions,designethicalstudies,conduct
sampling for research, perform basic analyses, and minimize bias and
othertypesoferror.Prerequisites:PBH251orpermissionofinstructor.
Same as BIO 354. K. Miller, Okatch
PBH 366. Race, Ethnicity, and Health. (S)
Thecoursewillutilizeasociologicallenstoexaminetheroleofraceand
ethnicity in health outcomes, healthcare experiences, medical research,
and clinical practice. Topics will include: socio-historical perspectives
on notions of race in relation to biological difference; socio-historical
understandings of the health consequences of racialized public health
policiesandpoliticallysanctionedmedicalpractices;contemporaryracial
andethnicdisparitiesindiseasemorbidityandmortalityindicators;the
operationalizationofracialcategoriesinepidemiological,publichealth,
and biomedical research and practice; contemporary debates regarding
race and genomics; and understandings of racial and ethnic dynamics
in relation to health and medicine at the intersections of socioeconomic
class, immigration status, gender, sexuality, and other markers of social
identity.SameasSOC/AFS366. Rondini
PBH 410. Health Policy. (S)
This course investigates domestic and global health policy issues. We will
survey health care and health systems, focusing on health care spending,
insurance, and health outcomes. Students will also examine ethical
dilemmas and debates within health policy. We will ask what role health
policycanplayinaddressinghealthdisparities.Twoquestionsinfuseour
deliberations: what can government do to shape the health of individuals
andwhatshoulditdo?Same as GOV 410. Everett, Meyer, Tripp
PBH 415. Public Health Research: You Are What You Eat?
In this interdisciplinary seminar, students explore the complex
relationshipsbetweenfood,nutrition,andhealth.Studentswillnavigate
scienticliteratureas well asinformation available viapopularmedia,
evaluate both for veracity and practicality, then share their own
conclusions(andnewquestionsarisingfromthisevaluation!)duringclass
discussions and course assignments. Students will also discuss issues
relatedtoconductingresearch,thenexploreknownand/orhypothesized
relationships between economic, behavioral, biological, sociopolitical,
cultural,andenvironmentalvariablesandfood-relatedbehaviors.Students
will design and conduct research centered on food, nutrition, and health.
Prerequisites:PBH354orPBH351andonecoursefromBIO210,MAT
216,BOS250,orPSY230andpermission.Same as PUB/STS 415.
Everett
PBH 420. Public Health Research:
Pregnancy Outcomes in American Women. (S)
In this interdisciplinary seminar, students explore women’shealth and
reproductive outcomes while learning how to conduct meaningful
research on public health topics. Students will consider complex
issues related to conducting research, then explore known and/or
hypothesizedrelationshipsbetweenbehavioral,biological,sociopolitical,
psychological, and environmental variables and pregnancy outcomes.
Studentswillultimatelydesignresearchcenteredonpregnancyoutcomes
inAmericanwomen.Prerequisites:PBH354orPBH351andonecourse
fromBIO210,MAT216,BOS250,orPSY230andpermission.Same as
PUB/STS/WGS 420. Everett
BIO 110. Principles of Evolution, Ecology and Heredity. (N)
AnintroductiontoMendelian genetics, micro- andmacro-evolutionary
processes,theoriginanddiversication of lifeonearthand ecological
patterns and processes at organismal, population, community and
ecosystemlevels.OfferedeverySpring.
Ardia, Fischer, Howard, Mena-Ali, Olson, Sipe
BIO 210. Biostatistics.
An introduction to descriptive and inferential statistics from the
perspective of the life sciences. The emphasis will be on research design
and on the use of graphical and computational methods in interpreting and
communicatingresults.Thiscoursesatisesthestatisticsrequirementin
theBiologymajorcurriculum.Prerequisite:BIO110.
A. Miller, K. Miller, Okatch
100 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
BIO 220. Principles of Physiology and Development. (N)
An integrated study of cells, whole organisms and the interactions between
organisms and their environments. The physiological and anatomical
solutions to the physical and chemical challenges faced by plants and
animals. Mechanisms by which a single cell develops into a complex,
multicellularorganisminwhichgroupsofcellsperformspecializedtasks.
Lecturetopicsintegratedwithalaboratorythatemphasizesindependent
researchprojects.Prerequisite:BIO110.OfferedeveryFall.
Gotsch, Howard, Thompson
BIO 230. Cell Biology. (N)
A study of life at the cellular level through investigation of the functions
and properties of the molecular components of cells. Topics will include:
the physical and chemical principles governing biomolecules and their
assembly, the structure and function of sub-cellular systems, energy
generation,cellmotilityandinformationowfromDNAtoprotein.The
ethicalimplicationsofcurrentresearchtechniqueswillalsobediscussed.
Prerequisites:BIO220andCHM112.OfferedeverySpring.
Davis, Roberts
BIO 305. Molecular Genetics. (N)
Molecular genetics, gene expression, regulation of eukaryotic
development, tumor viruses, oncogenes and cancer. Prerequisite: BIO
230.OfferedeveryFall. Jenik, Mena-Ali
BIO 322. Microbiology. (N)
Cytology, metabolism, taxonomy, phylogeny, development and ecological
relationships of microbial life. Emphasis on insights into life processes in
general.Laboratoryincludestraininginbasicmicrobiologicaltechniques.
Prerequisites:BIO230andpermissionoftheinstructor. Stoehr
GOV 100. American Government. (S)
PoliticalpowerwithintheframeworkofAmericannationalgovernment.
Current governmental and political problems are explored.
Ciuk, Koenig, Medvic, Schousen, Wilson
GOV 120. Comparative Politics. (S)
Introduction to the theory and method of comparative politics. The course
analyzesthegovernmentandpoliticsofbothdevelopedanddeveloping
countries, encouraging students to apply the comparative method to draw
conclusions about political processes and phenomena across nations and
continents. Dicklitch-Nelson, McNulty, Yen
GOV 200. Understanding Public Policy. (S)
Focus on government activity in a variety of public policy areas, the
structural and political contexts of debates over alternative policy
strategies and approaches to understanding public policy. Policy areas
examined include the national budget and entitlements, science and
technologyandeducation.Prerequisite:GOV100orGOV120orPBH
251.Same as PUB 200. Koenig, Meyer, Tripp
GOV 208. The American Presidency. (S)
EvolutionofthePresidencytoanofcethatisthefocalpointofpolitics
and leadership in the American political system. Emphasis on the
constitutional and political roles played by the chief executive in shaping
publicpolicy.Prerequisite:GOV100. Schousen
GOV 250. Political Research. (S)
Empiricalinvestigationinpoliticalscience;scienticinquiryinpolitical
science; problems of logical induction; selecting and formulating a
researchproblem;functionsandtypesofresearchdesign;analysisofdata,
bothqualitativeandquantitative.Primarilyforgovernmentmajors;should
becompletednolaterthanrstsemesterofjunioryear.Prerequisite:GOV
100or130or224. Ciuk, Kasparek, Medvic, Schousen, Yost
GOV 305. Public Policy Implementation. (S)
Focus on national government bureaucracy in the implementation of
public policy, including exploration of the role of bureaucracies in
contemporarypoliticaldebate,organizationaltheoryintheproblemsof
governing and administrative politics and administrative due process.
Prerequisite:GOV100. Koenig
GOV 309. The Congress. (S)
TheinformalandformalinstitutionsandprocessesoftheUnitedStates
Congress, with specic attention to selected public policy issues.
Prerequisite:GOV100. Schousen
STS 311. History of Medicine. (S) (NSP)
The history of medicine with particular attention to American medicine.
The relationship between medicine and society is studied in its historical
context. We look in detail at some trends in modern medicine and the
current debate over national health care policy in light of the history of
medicine. Same as HIS 311. Strick
SOC 330. Sociology of Medicine. (S)
An examination of the social and cultural factors which inuence the
occurrence, distribution and experience of illness, the organization of
medical care in American society and its rapidly escalating costs, the
technical and ethical performance of physicians and the ethical dilemmas
associatedwithmodernmedicine.Prerequisite:SOC100. Marshall
PUBLIC POLICY
Professor Antonio Callari, Chair
MEMBERS OF THE PUBLIC POLICY
PROGRAM COMMITTEE
Stephen K. Medvic The Honorable Mr. & Mrs. John C.
(on leave Spring 2021) Kunkel Professor of Government
Elizabeth De Santo Associate Professor of Environmental
(on leave 2020-21) Studies
Jerome Hodos Associate Professor of Sociology
Patrick M. Fleming Assistant Professor of Economics and
Public Policy
Biko Koenig Assistant Professor of Government
Jennifer Meyer Assistant Professor of Government and
(on leave 2020-21) Public Health
Janine Everett Director and Teaching Professor of the
Public Health Program
Additional faculty not on the program committee
also contribute to this program.
The Public Policy program is designed to provide analytic
skills and substantive knowledge to help students ask
questions,determinethedimensionsofsocietalproblemsand
evaluate alternative solutions to resolve multifaceted policy
issues. The study of Public Policy is available to students
as a Joint Major, where the Public Policy Core forms one
component and at least eight additional courses, determined
by an existing academic department that offers its own major,
form thebalance of the program. Pre-approved Joint Major
programsarecurrentlyavailablewithBusiness,Organizations,
and Society; Economics; Sociology; Government; Public
Health;andEnvironmentalStudies.JointmajorswithPublic
Policy have also been approved with American Studies,
Anthropology, History and Philosophy. Students wishing to
combinePublicPolicyinaJointMajorwithanotherexisting
major should rst contact the Public Policy chairperson to
determine the feasibility of the proposed Joint Major program
andtheappropriatecourserequirements.Theusualrulesfor
JointMajorsapplyinthecaseofallPublicPolicymajors.
Students with a Joint Major in Public Policy have studied
abroad or off-campus in the following programs in recent
years: Institute for the International Education of Students
(EuropeanUnion),Freiburg,GermanyandBarcelona,Spain;
School for International Training (SIT) Study Abroad in
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 101
Argentina,Brazil,India,Jordan,Spain,SouthAfricaandViet
Nam; Syracuse University, Strasbourg, France and Madrid,
Spain; the National University of Ireland Galway; Danish
Institute for Study Abroad, Copenhagen, Denmark; School
for Field Studies, Bhutan; Washington Semester Program,
American University, Washington, D.C. The participating
departments will work with Joint Major candidates to identify
internships in the public and private sectors that will enhance
their educational experiences through on-site learning
opportunities.Duringthelastfewyears,PublicPolicystudents
have successfully interned in local government, at departments
of health in Philadelphia and Connecticut and at the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency in Washington, D.C. and
Philadelphia,Pa.
PUBLIC POLICY CORE (PPC): EIGHT COURSES
ECO100.IntroductiontoEconomicPrinciples.(S)
ECO103.IntroductiontoEconomicPerspectives.(S)
GOV100.AmericanGovernment.(S)
PHI122.IntroductiontoMoralPhilosophy(H);PHI223.
BiomedicalEthics(H);PHI227.ContemporaryPolitical
Philosophy(H)(V);orotherapprovedPHIcourse.
GOV200.UnderstandingPublicPolicy.(S)
Statistics/MethodsCourseindepartmentofJointMajoror
other department
Two additional electives to be chosen in consultation with
theDirectorofthePublicPolicyProgram.
The following courses are offered in support of the Public
Policycurriculum:
200. Understanding Public Policy. (S)
Focus on government activity in a variety of public policy areas, the
structural and political contexts of debates over alternative policy
strategies and approaches to understanding public policy. Policy areas
examined include the national budget and entitlements, science and
technologyandeducation.Prerequisite:GOV100orGOV120orPBH
251. Same as GOV 200. Meyer
227. Contemporary Political Philosophy. (H) (V)
This course surveys contemporary debates in political philosophy. Topics
may include the foundations of liberalism and democracy, feminist and
antiracistcritiquesofliberalism,thecaseforvariouskindsofequality,
the challenge of global justice, and multiculturalism and minority group
rights. Same as PHI 227. Staff
240. Environmental and Natural Resource Economics. (S)
A survey of environmental and natural resource issues in economic theory
and policy. History of the environmental movement and environmental
debates; theory of natural resource allocation, natural resource issues;
theory of environmental management—for example, externalities, public
goods and common property. Topics covered will include pollution,
resourcedepletionandglobalclimatechange.Prerequisite:ECO100and
103,orpermissionoftheinstructor. Same as ECO/ENE 240. Fleming
255. Political Economy of Health Care. (S)
A seminar format approach to issues in health and health care reform from
an economics-based perspective but also including multi-disciplinary
considerations.Topicsincludethefollowing:theuniquequalitiesofthe
marketfor health care; controlling costs/improving outcomes inhealth
caredelivery;theeconomicstatusofhealthcareproviders;economicand
ethicalissuesofpharmaceuticaldevelopmentanddistribution;health—
andhealthcare—disparitiesbyincome,race,ethnicity,andgender;the
loomingscal crisis of Medicare andMedicaid; the political economy
of systemic health care reform; comparative health care systems.
Prerequisites:ECO100orECO103Same as ECO 255. Flaherty
303. Problem-Solving Courts/Drug Court.
This interdisciplinary course, taught by a local Drug Court Judge will
introduce students to the world of Problem Solving Courts, including
Drug Courts and Mental Health Courts. This will include a hands-on/
experiential examination of traditional courts, Drug Court models,
and addiction issues. A major component of this course will involve
community-basedlearning(CBL).Studentswillberequiredtointeract
directly with Drug Court participants and members of the Lancaster
County Court of Common Pleas Adult Drug Court Team. Permission
required. Same as PBH 303. Ashworth
305. Public Policy Implementation. (S)
Focus on national government bureaucracy in the implementation of
public policy, including exploration of the role of bureaucracies in
contemporarypoliticaldebate,organizationaltheoryintheproblemsof
governing and administrative politics and administrative due process.
Prerequisite:GOV100.Same as GOV 305. Staff
313. Nuclear Power, Weapons and Waste Disposal. (NSP) (S)
Development of nuclear technology, beginning with the atomic bomb
effortsofWWII.Thecoursedealsrstwiththetechnologyitself,aswell
as with the ways in which it was embedded in and drove American and
international politics, including the arms race and the Cold War. Includes
postwar development of civilian nuclear power reactors, creation of the
Atomic Energy Commission and the national debate over nuclear power
and waste disposal methods. Same as ENE/STS 313. Strick
314. Global Environmental Politics.
The course provides an overview of current U.S. environmental laws,
beginningwiththeNationalEnvironmentalPolicyAct(1969).Students
will be introduced to the origin and implementation of major environmental
laws that safeguard public health and protect the environment, including
theCleanAirandWaterActs,SafeDrinkingWaterAct,andthe1980s
legislativeagendadevelopedtoaddresshazardouswaste,includingthe
Superfund,ResourceConservationand RecoveryAct,Toxic Substance
Control Act, and the Community Right-to-Know Act. Students study
original legislation and explore landmark court cases by way of which
politicalandeconomicpressureshaveinuencedsubsequentamendments
to the original intent of these laws. Same as ENE 314 and GOV 374.
Cann, De Santo
335. Business and the Natural Environment. (S)
Widespread concern for a cleaner environment and sustainable practices
has put new demands on business. Exploration of philosophical,
theoretical,strategicandpolicyissuesfacingorganizationsinrelationto
the natural environment. Same as BOS/ENE 335. Kurland
384. Urban Education. (S)
Acommunity-basedlearningcourseanalyzingissuesfacingurbanschools
from a sociological perspective, with particular attention to the role of race,
class and gender at both the macro and micro levels. Other topics include
teachers,schoolsasorganizations,thesocialpsychologicalperspectiveon
learning, the politics of curricula and instruction, accountability and other
contemporaryreformmovements.Studentsareexpectedtointegrateand
applytheirknowledgethroughworkinalocalschool.Prerequisite:SOC
100. Same as SOC 384. McClelland
410. Health Policy.
This seminar is an introduction to health policy in the United States.
Healthhasemergedasacrucialandenduringissueonthenation’spolicy
agenda. How political culture, political structures, and policy processes
in the American political system shape health policy is the object of our
attention.Twoquestionsinfuseourdeliberations:whatcangovernmentdo
toshapethehealthofindividualsandwhatshoulditdo?Ponderinghealth
as a public policy issue and the political system’s responses to public
expectations for health care should tell us much about government and
aboutourselvesinthetwenty-rstcentury. Same as PBH 410. Everett
102 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
415. Public Health Research: You Are What You Eat?
In this interdisciplinary seminar, students explore the complex relationships
between food, nutrition, and health. Students will navigate scientic
literature as well as information available via popular media, evaluate
bothforveracityandpracticality,thensharetheirownconclusions(and
newquestionsarisingfromthisevaluation!)duringclassdiscussionsand
courseassignments.Studentswillalsodiscussissuesrelatedtoconducting
research, then explore known and/or hypothesized relationships
between economic, behavioral, biological, sociopolitical, cultural, and
environmentalvariablesandfood-relatedbehaviors.Studentswilldesign
andconductresearchcenteredonfood,nutrition,andhealth.Prerequisites:
PBH354orPBH351andonecoursefromBIO210,MAT216,BOS250,
orPSY230andpermission.Same as PBH/STS 415. Everett
420. Public Health Research:
Pregnancy Outcomes in American Women. (S)
In this interdisciplinary seminar, students explore women’s health and
reproductive outcomes while learning how to conduct meaningful
research on public health topics. Students will consider complex issues
relatedtoconductingresearch,thenexploreknownand/orhypothesized
relationships between behavioral, biological, sociopolitical, psychological,
and environmental variables and pregnancy outcomes. Students will
ultimately design research centered on pregnancy outcomes in American
women.Prerequisites:PBH354or PBH 351 andonecoursefromBIO
210,MAT216,BOS250,orPSY230andpermission.Same as PBH/STS/
WGS 420. Everett
RELIGIOUS STUDIES
Professor David McMahan, Chair
David L. McMahan The Charles A. Dana Professor of
Religious Studies
Stephen A. Cooper Professor of Religious Studies
(on leave 2020-2021)
John Modern Professor of Religious Studies
SherAli Tareen Associate Professor of Religious Studies
Rachel Feldman Assistant Professor of Religious Studies
Lee Barrett Adjunct Assistant Professor of Religious
Studies
TheDepartmentofReligiousStudiesiscommittedtoexploring
and analyzing religion in a non-sectarian way. Our courses
cover a variety of religious traditions embedded in myth, ritual,
art, ethics, doctrine, philosophy, literature, asceticism and
other social practices. First and foremost, the study of religion
engages the human—the limits of human beings as they have
multifariously expressed them: in their audacious explanations
oftheinvisible,theimmaterialandthetranscendental;inthe
extremityoftheirpracticesandbeliefs;intheordinarywaysin
which they confront the overwhelming presence of violence,
sufferinganddeath;intheemotivetermstheyprovidetoexplain
thesignicanceofthepastandthefuture;andintheconstant
struggle to come to terms with themselves and others. These
activities, whether explicitly identied as religious or not,
represent the persistent grappling of human beings with what
different cultures throughout world history have articulated as
beyond and more than the human. This human engagement
with the variously formulated more-than-human Other, this
engagement manifesting itself variously in many arenas of
cultures, is the object of the academic study of religion. As
such,theelddemandsaninterdisciplinaryapproachdrawing
on the methodologies native to the humanities and social
sciences as well as on the theoretical approaches developed
specicallyinthestudyofreligion.
A major in Religious Studies consists of 11 courses. Two of
thesearemandatory:IntroductiontoReligiousStudies(RST
111); and Interpreting Religion (RST 420), a senior-year
capstoneseminar.Ineachofveareas(AmericanReligions,
AsianReligions,Christianity,Judaism,Islam),studentsmust
takea100-or200-levelcourse.Oftheremainingfourcourses,
atleastthreemustbeatthe300-or400-level.
A joint major in Religious Studies consists of eight courses:
RST111,RST420;onecourse(100or200level)inJudaism;
onecourse(100or200level)inChristianity;onecourse(100or
200level)inIslam;onecourse(100or200level)inAmerican
religions;onecourse(100or200level)inAsianreligions;and
onecourseatthe300level.
A minor in Religious Studies consists of six courses.
Requirements:RST111;anyotherthreecoursesatthe100-or
200-level;onecourseatthe300-level;andtheseniorcapstone
seminar,RST420.
ThewritingrequirementintheReligiousStudiesmajorismet
bycompletionofthenormalcoursesrequiredtocompletethe
major.
StudentsinterestedintakingcoursesatLancasterTheological
Seminary can sometimes do so with the permission of the
Religious Studies chair (consult the rules on “Exchange
Opportunities” in the latter part of this Catalog for further
details).
Majorsin theDepartmentofReligiousStudies havestudied
abroad in the following programs in recent years: Tohoku
Gakuin University (Japan); Israel University Consortium;
School for International Training (India, Nepal, South
Africa,Tibet);History ofChristianity atAberdeenUniversity
(Scotland);SouthIndiaTermAbroad(Madhurai,India);IFAS
Butler Cambridge, Pembroke College, Cambridge University
(United Kingdom). See theInternational Programssection of
the Catalog for further information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
INTRODUCTORY COURSES
111. Introduction to Religious Studies. (H)
Asksthequestion:“Whatisreligion?”andprovidesavarietyofanswers
by looking both at representative religious documents from a wide array
of traditions and at theories about religion in the West. Feldman
112. Judaism. (H) (NW)
This course introduces students to central aspects of Judaism from the
ancient period to the early modern period and beyond. Judaism will be
explored from three different yet complementary aspects: history, religious
practice, and textual culture. Judaism has manifested itself in a variety of
forms around the world and throughout history. It has developed through
negotiations with the traditions of the past as well as with the changing
conditionsof the present,almost invariably inuencedand affectedby
local non-Jewish cultures. Students shall acquire familiarity with the
Jewishunderstandingsofcertainkeynotions(creation,law,chosenness,
prophecy, exile, redemption) and the continuing debates around them.
Same as JST 112. Feldman
113. Christianity. (H)
SurveysavarietyoftopicsinthehistoryofChristianity.Topicsincludethe
originofthereligion,itspersecutionbyRomeandtheeventualconversion
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 103
oftheRomanEmpire,thedevelopmentofTrinitariantheology,theascetic
and monastic movement, scholasticism, the Crusades, mysticism and
reformmovementsintheLatinchurchoftheMiddleAges,theProtestant
Reformationandthedevelopmentofliberalandevangelicaltheologiesin
the 20th century. Cooper
114. Islam. (H) (NW)
This course is an introduction to the intellectual and political history of
Islaminbothpre-modernandcontemporarytimes.Severalmajoraspects
of Islamic religious thought will be covered including the Qur’an and
its interpretations, the persona and prophetic authority of Muhammed,
law and theology, law and gender, Islamic mysticism, and contemporary
Muslim reform movements. We will use a range of sources including
primaryreligioustexts(allintranslation),anthropologicalworks,novels,
lmsetc.toexaminethediversityandcomplexityofMuslimthoughtand
practice, both past and present. While focusing on Islam, this course will
alsofamiliarizestudentswithlargerconceptualquestionsandproblemsin
the academic study of religion. Merriman
122. Asian Religions. (H) (NW)
Historical and thematic survey of the major religious traditions of Asia,
concentratingonthemoreinuentialtraditionsofIndia,China,Japanand
Tibet. Covers select traditions of ancient and modern forms of Hinduism,
Buddhism, Confucianism and Daoism. Focuses on doctrine, myth and
ritual in particular cultural and historical contexts. McMahan
167. American Spiritualities. (H)
Surveys the dominant tradition of American religious practice:
spirituality. The goals of this course encompass the study of different
formsofspiritualityintheUnitedStatespastandpresent.Thecoursewill
familiarizeyouwithmainstreamaswellasalternativespiritualpractices,
from Puritan Devotions and the Lakota Sundance to evangelicalism,
political radicalism and various modes of artistic production. The course
seeks to trace major outlines of development from past to present and
to illuminate the meaning of spirituality for our time and in relation to
American history. Same as AMS 167. Modern
203. Cultural History of American Religion. (H)
Examines the relationship between religion and culture in the United
Statesfromapproximately1492tothepresent.Inadditiontolookingat
liturgical forms of religion and surveying various religious movements
andgroups,wewillexplore1)howculturalformsserveasvehiclesof
religiousmeaning;2)howreligiousvaluesareexpressedand/orcriticized
in everyday social life; and 3) the interaction between religion and
developments within the political, social, economic and philosophical
spheres. Same as AMS 203. Modern
212. Hebrew Bible. (H) (NW)
StudyofthewritingsoftheHebrewBible.Seekstounderstandthehistorical
development of Israel in the biblical period and the religious forms of
thought and practice that arose during this time. Same as JST 212.
Cooper
213. The New Testament: Jesus and the Gospels. (H)
AstudyoftheNewTestament centeredonJesus and thewritingsthat
present his life, teachings and the new religion based around him.
Analyzes the origin of the Jewish religious movement arising around
Jesus, which became Christianity after his execution and the proclamation
of his resurrection by his followers. Course seeks to understand the
practices and beliefs of the earliest Christians by examining the earliest
Christianwritings.FocusesonNewTestamentgospels,butalsoexamines
a selection of apocryphal and gnostic gospels. Cooper
215. The New Testament: Paul, the Epistles and Revelation. (H)
AstudyoftheNewTestamentcenteredonthelettersoftheapostlePaul
and his role in the transformation of the Jewish religious movement that
becameChristianity.AnalyzestheNewTestamentwritingsbyPauland
thosewritingsinuencedbyhim(letterswritteninhisname;thebook
ofActs;andRevelation),aswellastheinterpretationofhiswritingsby
ancient Christians and modern scholars. Course seeks to understand how
theconversionof Paul andhismissions contributedtothe growth and
formation of early Christianity. Cooper
248. Buddhism. (H) (NW)
Buddhismisconstitutedbymanytraditionsthathavespreadthroughout
Asia and, more recently, throughout the world. This course surveys some
ofthemostinuentialformsinbothancientandmodernmanifestations.
WebeginwithBuddhisminancientIndia,thenmovetoTibet,Chinaand
Japan.Finally,wewilllookatsomeofthetransformationsofBuddhism
thathaveoccurredasBuddhismhasencounteredmodernityandtheWest.
This course considers multiple dimensions of these traditions including
philosophy, meditation, social relations, ethics, art and ritual. McMahan
RELIGION AND CULTURE
250. Witchcraft and Sorcery in a Global Context. (S)
Inthiscoursewewillconsiderhowthecategoriesof“witchcraft”and
“sorcery”havebeenusedinAnthropology,bothtodescribemystical
acts (particularly mystical attacks) and as an ethnographic metaphor
to discuss the pressures of communal life for individuals. Course
content will consist of, but not be limited to, witchcraft and sorcery
as a “social strain gauge,” witchcraft and sorcery as expressions of
symbolic power, the gendered name of witchcraft and sorcery, as well
aswitchcraftandsorceryunderconditionsofWestern-stylemodernity
.
Same as AFS/ANT/WGS 250.
Bastian
330. Anthropological Studies of Religion. (S)
This course takes account of various aspects of religious and ritual practice,
using material from both contemporary and classic ethnographies. Topics
of special interest for the course will include, but are not be limited to:
cosmologicalconstructions;initiation;possession;commensality;magic;
witchcraftandsorcery;ritualaesthetics;andperformance.Prerequisite:
ANT200.Same as ANT 330. Bastian
332. Religion and Politics. (H)
BeginswithChristianclassics,St.AugustineandCalvin,andtheirvision
oftherelationofChristianitytotheStateortothepursuitofpowerand
wealth. Moves to the last few centuries, in which a Christian vision has
been challenged by thinkers such as Rousseau and Nietzsche. Course
ends with readings from contemporary period, in which the place of
Christianity in the public sphere is again shifting. Cooper
AREA STUDIES
JUDAISM
153. Premodern Jewish History:
Jews of East and West Through the Middle Ages. (NW) (S)
Introduction to Jewish history, beginning with rst centuries of
the Common Era and continuing to the end of the 17th century.
Examines central themes and patterns in Jewish history. Readings
consist of narrative as well as documentary histories with discussion
of different theoretical approaches to the writing of Jewish history.
Same as HIS/JST 153. Staff
154. Jews in the Modern World. (S)
Introduction to Jewish life in the modern era from late 18th century
Emancipation and Enlightenment through the present, tracing the
transformations of Jewish life. Broad historical sketches are combined
withclosereadingsofparticulartexts,movementsandthinkerstoesh
out the contours and dynamics of the Jewish experience in the Modern
world. Major events of Jewish history of 20th century (the Holocaust,
foundationoftheStateofIsraelandmassmigrationofEuropeanJews
totheAmericas)areexaminedthroughsecondaryandprimarysources.
Hoffman Same as HIS/JST 154. Staff
252. Modern Jewish Thought. (H)
StudiesJewishthinkersfromtheEnlightenmenttothepresent,through
their philosophical writings, political essays, religious reections and
ction.ThechiefquestionwashowtomaketheJewishtraditionadaptor
respondtothemodernWesternStateandtomodernWesternculture.This
isacourseabouttheJewsandtheWest.Towhatdegreeisthereharmony?
Towhatdegreeisthereconict? Same as JST 252. Feldman
104 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
405. Selected Studies in Jewish History. (S) (E)
Readingsandresearchonvarioustopics,periods,andproblemsofJewish
history. Same as HIS 405. Staff
CHRISTIANITY
335. Destroying Images: Art and Reformation. (A)
This course examines the doctrinal and political conicts between the
RomanCatholicChurchandthe“reformed”religionsofnorthernEurope
in the 16th and 17th centuries, focusing on the impact on the visual
cultureoftheperiod.Thecourseexamines“high”artandarchitecture,
but pays particular attention to the attitudes towards images more broadly,
the ideologies that drive them, and their operations across all sectors of
society. Same as ART 335 and GST 335. Aleci
RST 384. Soul in Search of Selfhood: The Writings of St. Augustine. (H)
This course will be an intensive study of some of the major writings of
Augustine with a view toward obtaining a basic understanding of the main
lines of his thought on human existence, free will, justice, the state, and
the nature of God. We will focus on his intellectual and spiritual struggles,
his mature conceptions of the Christian religion, and his integration of
the cultural achievements of Mediterranean antiquity into Christianity.
TheemphasiswillbeonunderstandingAugustine’sindividuallifeand
thought against the background of his own culture and times. Cooper
ISLAM
370. Islamic Law and Ethics. (H) (NW)
AnexplorationoftheIslamiclegaltradition(theShari‘a)inbothhistorical
andcontemporarycontexts.Thisclasswillfamiliarizestudentswiththe
key concepts, categories, and questions connected to the content and
application of Islamic law. After a thorough overview of the historical
narrative and the conceptual categories of Islamic law, the class shifts to
in-depthdiscussionsoncriticalquestionsofethicssuchasjihadandthe
limitsofjust-war,minorityrights,history,braindeath,andgender.
Tareen
ASIAN RELIGIONS
322. Buddhism in North America. (H)
FocusesonsomeofthedistinctiveformsthatBuddhismhastakeninNorth
America. Discusses a number of traditions, including Theravada, Zen
andTibetanBuddhism,comparingtheirAmericanversionswiththosein
AsiaandaddressingthetransformationsofvariousBuddhisttraditionsto
accommodate American lifestyles and views. Also addresses a number of
issuespertinenttoBuddhisminAmericaandtheWest,suchasBuddhist
identity, ethnicity, gender issues, authority and social activism. Same as
AMS 322. McMahan
337. Hindu Literature and Practice. (H) (NW)
AnexplorationofselectedthematicelementsofHinduism.Beginswith
a focus on texts, doctrines, myths and rituals of Hinduism from the early
period. This will give us some basic Hindu ideas on selfhood, the nature
of the cosmos and divinity, and concepts of gods and goddesses and how
one should relate to them. After this, we will look at the modern period
beginning with Hindu reformers such as Gandhi and Vivekananda. Then
we explore the varied and colorful world of contemporary Hinduism..
McMahan
367. Self, Society and Nature in Chinese
and Japanese Religions. (H) (NW)
A thematic exploration of self, society, nature and their interrelationships
as conceived in Chinese and Japanese religions, especially Daoism,
BuddhismandConfucianism.Addressestheseissuesthroughtranslations
of classical Chinese and Japanese texts and examines how these themes
play out in a number of historical periods. We will end with some examples
of recent East Asian concepts and practices that embody certain themes in
ancienttraditionswhileadaptingtotheuniquechallengesofmodernity.
McMahan
AMERICAN RELIGION
313. African American Religion. (H)
Surveys a variety of religious traditions and expressions of African
Americans throughout the history of the United States. Of particular
interest to our study will be the problems of slavery, colonization and
racialism as they have been embodied in the history of African American
religion. Same as AFS 313. Modern
ADVANCED SEMINARS IN RELIGIOUS STUDIES
420. Interpreting Religion. (H)
WhatarethemajortheoriesintheWestaboutthenatureofreligion?How
dotheyhelporhinderusinourinterpretationofthedocumentsofspecic
religioustraditions?Wewillreadsomeofthemajortheoristsofreligion
in depth and see how they shed light on religious texts and movements.
Modern
490. Independent Study.
Independent study directed by Religious Studies staff. Permission of
chairperson and departmental faculty.
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
Israel and Palestine: Beyond the Binary. Feldman
Buddhist Meditative Traditions. McMahan
Crowds and Power. Modern
RUSSIAN
Professor Jonathan Stone, Chair, Dept. of German, Russian & East
Asian Languages
Jonathan Stone Associate Professor of Russian
and Russian Studies
Nina Bond Assistant Director of Post Graduate
Scholarships and Adjunct Assistant
Professor of Russian and Russian
Studies
Daniel Brooks Visiting Assistant Professor of Russian
and Russian Studies
Tatiana Kolesova Russian Language Teaching Assistant
The Russian program is designed to provide students with
linguistic and intellectual tools for a deep understanding of the
country’sliterature,languageandculture.Itoffersminorsin
RussianlanguageandliteratureandinRussianstudies.
The mission of the Russian program is to expose a broad
spectrum of the F&M student body to the language, literature,
and culture of Russia; to facilitate the further exploration
of these subjects as complements to many other aspects of
the F&M curriculum; and to work actively to foster groups
of students with a sustained interest in Russia; all in direct
contribution to the liberal education of all F&M students and
the intellectual development of our college community.
MinorsintheDepartmentofRussianarestronglyencouraged
to study abroad, particularly with F&M’s biannual summer
travelcoursetoSt.PetersburgandMoscow.Inrecentyears,
students have also participated in the following programs:
UniversityofArizonaprogramsinMoscowandSt.Petersburg;
Middlebury College programs in Moscow and Yaroslavl;
SchoolofRussianandAsianStudies;Smolny-Bardprogram
inSt.Petersburg.
The department offers two minor programs.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 105
A minor in Russian Language and Literature consists of six
courses:ThreeRussianlanguagecoursesfromthefollowing:
RUS102,RUS201,RUS202,RUS301,RUS302;andthree
Russianliteraturecoursesfromthefollowing:RUS214,RUS
217,RUS219,RUS401,ortopicscoursesapprovedbythe
department chair.
A minor in Russian Studies consists of six courses: three
Russianlanguagecoursesfromthefollowing:threeRussian
language courses from the following: RUS 102, RUS 201,
RUS202,RUS301,RUS302;oneRussianliteraturecourse
from the following: RUS 214, RUS 217, RUS 219, RUS
401,ortopicscoursesapprovedbythedepartmentchair;one
Russianhistorycoursefromthefollowing:HIS125,HIS126,
HIS319,ortopicscoursesapprovedbythedepartmentchair;
andoneRussianculturecoursefromthefollowing:RUS179
(summertravelcourse),RUS216,ortopicscoursesapproved
by the department chair.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
COURSES TAUGHT IN ENGLISH
All readings, lectures and discussions in these courses are in
English(exceptforthosewhowishtoreadinRussian).There
arenoprerequisites.
140. Violence, Mayhem and Dissent: Post-Soviet Pop Culture. (H)
ThiscoursewillexploretherelationshipbetweenviolenceandRussian
culture’sdeeplyrootedbeliefinbrotherhood.Anumberoftoday’sRussian
worksdepictviolenceastheonlywaytohelpone’sownwhencorruption
abounds and institutions fail. We will discuss how far people are willing
to go (and not go) for their communities by examining depictions of
violence as both a vice and a virtue in a wide range of materials, including
novels,lms,YouTubevideos,shortstories,anddocumentaries. Bond
214. The Russian Novel from Pushkin to Tolstoy. (H)
Study of the emergence of a national literary tradition in 19th-century
Russiaasitwasfashionedbywritersandtheirreadingpublics.Emphasis
ontheRussianreactiontotraditionalWesternEuropeanformsofnarrative
andthespecialstatusoftheRussianwriterasasocial“moralbarometer.”
ReadingswillincludeworksbyKaramzin,Pushkin,Lermontov,Gogol,
Turgenev, Dostoevsky and Tolstoy.All readings willbe intranslation,
withspecialassignmentsforthoseabletoreadinRussian. Staff
216. Business in Today’s Russia: Culture, Society, and Capitalism. (H)
This course will focus on the chaotic rise of capitalist business practices
inthe1990sandtheconsequencesofRussia’sensuingprosperityinthe
Putinera.WewillcometounderstandtheplaceofbusinessinRussian
political and social life as well as its popular perception in the media and
art.Topicstobecoveredincludeprivatization;Sovietlegacies;Russia’s
naturalresources;oligarchs andorganizedcrime;proand anti-Western
sentiment;everydaylifeinRussiaunderYeltsinandPutin.
Same as BOS 216. Stone
217. Russia: 20th Century in Print and Film. (H)
The 20th century was a time of unprecedented upheavals and profound
changesinRussiansociety,politicsandculture.Russiaanditssuccessor
state, the Soviet Union, suffered revolutions, wars, bloody civil strife,
collectivizationandpurges.Duringthoseunstableanddangeroustimes
anddespiteofcialsuppression,Russianwriters,artistsandlmmakers
producedoutstandingworks.Inthiscoursewewillstudythe20th-century
Russianexperiencethroughitsliteratureandotherartforms.Allreadings
will be in English, with special assignments for those able to read in
Russian. Staff
219. Russia’s Literary Titans: Major Works of Tolstoy and
Dostoevsky. (H)
Literatureof the nineteenthcentury isdominated bythe titanic gures
ofthegreatRussiannovelistsLevTolstoyandFedorDostoevsky.This
course will offer a sustained examination of their careers through reading
numerous major works including their masterpiece novels. We will better
understand the development of novelistic styleand the signicanceof
these authors’ philosophical, psychological, and narrative innovations
which would become central to all future novelists. Same as LIT219.
Stone
COURSES TAUGHT IN RUSSIAN
101. Elementary Russian I.
For students with no knowledge of Russian. Introduction to the
contemporaryRussianlanguage.Thecoursepresentsthefundamentalsof
Russiangrammarandsyntaxwithequalemphasisonspeaking,writing,
reading, aural comprehension, and cultural awareness. Audio and video
exercises, simple readings, short compositions, conversational drills.
Offered every Fall. Staff
102. Elementary Russian II.
Continuation of Russian 101. Three 80-minute meetings per week.
Prerequisite:Russian101orplacement.OfferedeverySpring. Staff
201. Intermediate Russian I. (LS)
Vocabulary building, continued development of speaking and listening skills
andactivecommandofRussiangrammar.Readingsfromauthenticction
andpoetry.Shortcompositionassignments.Three65-minutemeetingsper
week.Prerequisite:Russian102orplacement.OfferedeveryFall. Staff
202. Intermediate Russian II. (H)
ContinuationofRussian201.IncreasedmasteryofRussiangrammatical
structures through reading and discussion of authentic literary and
cultural texts. Continued emphasis on speaking, reading and writing
Russian.Three65-minutemeetingsperweek.Prerequisite:Russian201
orplacement.OfferedeverySpring. Staff
301. Advanced Russian I. (H)
Building upon the foundation developed in Intermediate Russian, this
courseprovidesamoredetailedandnuancedengagementwithRussian
language and grammar with particular emphasis on developing advanced
reading and writing skills and adding breadth and depth to speaking
skills.Wewillutilizemanymoreexamplesof“real”Russiantextsand
materialstobecomecomfortablewithRussianasitisusedbyRussians.
Prerequisite:RUS202orplacement. Staff
302. Advanced Russian II. (H)
Continuingthetrajectory of RUS301, this coursereinforces advanced
reading and writing skills and continues to develop sophisticated speaking
skills.This course develops cultural uency by incorporating complex
discussionsofRussianlife,history,literature,politics,andpopularculture
into our exposure to the Russian language. Prerequisite: RUS 301 or
placement. Staff
401. Readings in Russian Literature and Culture. (H)
The primary purpose of this course is to provide students with an
opportunity to read literary, cultural, political, and historical texts in the
originalRussianwhileimprovingtheiractivecommandofthewrittenand
spokenlanguage.Prerequisite:RUS302orplacement. Staff
390. Independent Study.
490. Independent Study.
SUMMER TRAVEL COURSE
RUS 179. From Tsars to Commissars:
An Introduction to Russian Culture. (H)
Through an exploration of the literary, artistic, social, and political
context, this course will introduce the major aspects of Russian life
andculture.Bybecomingacquaintedwiththestoriesofsuchtypically
Russiancharactersandtheirworlds,wewillbetter understandRussian
culture and identity. This course begins with an intensive overview of
themesandworksseminalinthedevelopmentofRussianliterature,art,
106 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
history,andpolitics.Thenalthreeweeksofthecoursewillbespentin
Russia(primarilySt.PetersburgandMoscow)wherethesethemeswillbe
investigated more extensively through a variety of classes, activities, and
excursions. Stone
SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY
AND SOCIETY
Professor James E. Strick, Chair
MEMBERS OF THE SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY
AND SOCIETY PROGRAM COMMITTEE
James E. Strick Professor of Science, Technology, and
Society and of Environmental Studies
Elizabeth De Santo Associate Professor of Environmental
(on leave 2020-21) Studies
Eric Hirsch Assistant Professor of Environmental
(on leave 2020-21) Studies
Keith Miller Senior Adjunct Instructor of Science,
Technology and Society
Nicole Welk-Joerger Adjunct Instructor of Science,
Technology and Society
Janine Everett Director and Teaching Professor of the
Public Health Program
Additional faculty not on the program committee
also contribute to this program.
This interdisciplinary program deals with the nature of science
and technology, the history and philosophy of science and the
interaction of science, technology and human society. The
program is designed to make it possible for students to link
related work in several disciplines, including a methodology
course in at least one of those disciplines. The program has
its own courses and it draws on courses given in several
departments.
The program offers three distinct minors: History and
Philosophy of Science; Science and Society; and Medicine
in Society (including study of public health). Each minor
is designed to enable students to conceive and pursue
individualized programs of interdisciplinary study in these
threebroadareas,withintheeldofScience,Technologyand
Society.
Each minor will consist of six courses, including: a core course
thatisintroductorytotheproposedminor;anappropriatemid-
level methodology course; three electives; and a capstone
course involving substantial work on an individual project,
either as independent study or in an advanced seminar. Each
student’s proposedminor programmust beapproved bythe
chairpersonoftheSTSProgram,actinginconsultationwith
theSTSCommittee.
The following lists include courses that are appropriate
for each minor. These course lists and designations are not
exhaustive;othercoursesmaybeappropriate.Somecourses
listed have prerequisites. Students who do not plan to take
thoseprerequisitesinfullmentofotherdegreerequirements,
apartfromtheSTSprogram,mayhavetotakemorethansix
coursestocompleteoneoftheSTSminors.
History and Philosophy of Science. Core: STS 136; PHI
213;oranintroductorycourseinanyofthenaturalsciences.
Methods:PHI337;HIS360;orasecondcourseinanatural
sciencesequence.Electives:STS311;STS312;STS376;STS
383;STS385;STS386;STS387;STS/PSY489.
Science and Society. Core: STS 136; STS 117; GOV 215.
Methods: ECO 210; GOV 250; SOC 302;ANT/WGS 355;
ANT410.Electives:STS220;STS223;STS234;STS312;
STS313;STS352;STS376;STS383;STS385.
Medicine in Society.Core:BIO110,PBH251.Methods:BIO
210;PSY230;STS234;BIO305.Electives:STS223;ANT
225;ANT/WGS355;SOC330;STS311;BIO322;BIO338;
STS352;STS383;STS388;HIS400;PBH410;GOV410;
STS/PSY489.
AmajorinScience,TechnologyandSocietymaybearranged
through the Special Studies Program. Students interested in
this program are urged to discuss their special interests with
thechairpersonofSTS.
To be considered for honors in STS, graduating seniors, in
addition to meeting the College’s general requirements for
honors,mustcompleteaseniorthesis(490).
Minors in the Science, Technology and Society program
have studied abroad in the following programs in recent
years:SchoolforInternationalTraining,Chile;Northwestern
University:PublicHealthinEurope,Paris;DanishInstitutefor
StudyAbroad, Copenhagen. See the International Programs
section of the Catalog for further information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
117. The Environment and Human Values. (S)
Study of historical and modern attitudes toward nature; human use of
nature’sresources; effects of the growth ofscience and technology on
humanusesofandattitudestowardtheenvironment;andtheabilityof
modernhumanstosubstantiallyaltertheenvironment(e.g.,byaltering
globaltemperature).Keyconcepts:humanpopulationgrowth;thenotion
of“limitstogrowth”;andthedifcultyofmanagingtheuseofcommon
pool resources. Same as ENE 117. Bratman, Cann, Hirsch, Strick
136. Science Revolutions. (NSP)
This course surveys the question of what constitutes a scientic
revolution. Beginning with Thomas Kuhn’s famous theory in The
StructureofScienticRevolutions(1970),wesurveynumerousepisodes
in the development of the sciences, from the seventeenth century to the
present. Using case studies from chemistry, physics, life sciences, and the
interdisciplinaryeldoforiginoflifestudies,wetrytodeterminewhatit
wouldmeanforascienticrevolutiontooccur,wouldhappen,andhow
to assess whether such a thing might be underway currently. The course
in many ways serves as a broad introduction to history and sociology of
science. Strick
216. Environmental Policy. (S)
Surveyshowfederal,stateandlocalregulationsseektoprotecthuman
health and the environment. Introduces frameworks for managing wastes
andprotectingairquality,waterqualityandhabitats.Reviewspolicytools,
includingeconomicincentives,penaltiesandlegalobligations.Reviews
policy evaluation, focusing on federal statutes, the legislative process that
creates them, the role of the judiciary and the success of environmental
law in changing practices. Offered every semester. Same as ENE 216.
De Santo, Cann
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 107
223. Biomedical Ethics. (H)
A survey of ethical issues related to developments in biology and medicine,
including controversies at the beginning and end of life, autonomy and
informed consent, and limits on medical research. Same as PHI 223.
Merli, Mensah
241. Ancient Medicine. (H) (NSP)
This course is an introduction to the origins and development of Western
medicineinAncientGreeceandRome.Studentswillreadfromthesources
of the ancient theories and practices of medicine, including epic literature,
pre-Hippocratic texts, the Hippocratic corpus, and a number of works
by Galen, widely considered the most accomplished medical researcher
inantiquity.These texts will becomplemented byselections of textsby
the PreSocratics, Plato, andAristotle that reect a reciprocal borrowing
of vocabulary, argumentation, and diagnostic methodologies between the
developing“artofhealing”andvarious classical philosophical texts.All
readings will be in English. Same as CLS 241. Fowler
244. Indigenous Environmental Justice. (S) (NW)
Examination of the way indigenous identity, human rights, and development
intersect with the struggle for environmental justice around the world.
Analysisofhoweachterminthiscourse’stitleisopentolegalxing,activist
redenition, and diverse projects that render the environment something
political. Considers distinct case studies drawn from several continents
to show that some see being indigenous today as politically potent, while
others take this category to be excessively vague or,even, invented; by
focusing on ordinary lives and extraordinary struggles, we explore the wide
varietyofrelationshipstoterritorythat“indigenous”encapsulates.Same as
ENE 244. Hirsch
258. Contemporary Science Writing. (H)
In this course, we will examine texts ranging from popular science to
sciencection,byscientistsandnonscientistsalike.Asreaders,wewill
be interested in the ways people write about science, and, as writers,
we will try to put some of these principles into practice. We will be
equallyinterestedintheethical,social,andphilosophicalquestionsthat
contemporary science raises, and in how to probe these questions in
writing. Same as ENG/ENE 258. E. Anderson
260. Nature and Literature. (H)
Readings from a variety of traditions, periods, disciplines and genres
to discover diverse assumptions about nature and humanity’s relation
to it. Readings from both Western and non-Western cultures, though
withemphasisontheBritishandEuro-Americantraditions.Suchbroad
exploration across vast divides of time and culture should not only
teachusaboutvariedunderstandingsofnaturebutalsoencourageself-
consciousness as we form our own conceptions of what nature is and how
we ought best to interact with and in it. Same as ENG 260. Mueller
311. History of Medicine. (S) (NSP)
The history of medicine with particular attention to American medicine.
The relationship between medicine and society is studied in its historical
context. We look in detail at some trends in modern medicine and the
current debate over national health care policy in light of the history of
medicine. Same as HIS 311. Strick
312. Environmental History. (S)
Examination of various approaches to environmental and ecological
history. Focuses on ways in which the physical and biological world have
affected human history and on ways in which human social and political
organization,economicactivities,culturalvaluesandscientictheories
have shaped our alteration and conservation of nature. Selected case
studies from environmental and ecological history, with emphasis on the
17ththroughthe20thcenturies.Same as ENE/HIS 312. Strick
313. Nuclear Weapons, Power and Waste Disposal. (S) (NSP)
Development of nuclear technology, beginning with the atomic bomb
effortsofWWII.Thecoursedealsrstwiththetechnologyitself,aswell
as with the ways in which it was embedded in and drove American and
international politics, including the arms race and the Cold War. Includes
postwar development of civilian nuclear power reactors, creation of the
Atomic Energy Commission and the national debate over nuclear power
and waste disposal methods. Same as ENE 313. Strick
315. Health Risks in the Environment.
Known and emerging environmental hazards represent signicant
public health risks to vulnerable populations. Case studies include lead,
tobacco,asthma,nutrition,andendocrine-disruptingcompoundsaswell
as common airborne and waterborne chemical and biological pollutants.
The course develops an understanding of acute, chronic and cumulative
health risks that result from short-term and long-term environmental
exposures. Important epidemiological, demographic and environmental
justiceparametersareincorporatedintostudents’projectsthatfocuson
at-riskgroups, such aschildren, the elderlyand immuno-compromised
individuals. Same as ENE 315. Everett
318. Environmental History of Latin America. (NW) (S)
This course will examine the intersections of human history and culture
with environmental change in Latin America from the early colonial
periodto the present.Themajor themes includethe consequencesand
signicanceoftheColombianExchange,therolesofreligionandculture
inshapinghumanrelationshipswithnature,thedevelopmentofexport-
ledagriculture,urbanization,andtheemergenceofdiverseenvironmental
movements within Latin America. We will explore the origins of major
environmental problems and the ways people have responded to these
challenges. The course will also address how historians have approached
the study of the environment. Same as HIS 318. Shelton
337. Philosophy of Natural Science. (H) (NSP)
The goals, methods, assumptions and limitations of natural science.
Specialattentionwillbepaidtothephilosophyofpsychology,cognitive
science and evolutionary biology. Prerequisite: one prior course in
philosophy, or permission of the instructor. Same as PHI/SPM 337. Ross
351. China and the Global Environmental Crisis. (NW) (S) (WH)
This course links the local to the global, moving from ecological issues
within China to related social issues, to global ecological-economic
conditions.The course examines specic cases of environmental harm
within China; provides a basic environmental-scientic knowledge
ofthese problems; studiesthe relationshipbetween these casesstudies
andpoverty,governmentcorruption,migration,ethnicconict,etc.;and
analyzeshowtheaboveconditionsinChinaareintertwinedwithglobal
capitalism, global poverty, and other conditions on the global level. Same
as HIS/ENE 351. Reitan
352. Lead Poisoning and Asthma in Urban Lancaster. (S)
Students learn about the epidemiology of asthma and lead poisoning,
the pathways of exposure, and methods for community outreach and
education.AsitisaCommunity-BasedLearning(CBL)course,students
will work in service to the local community by collaborating with local
school teachers and students in lessons that apply environmental research
relating to lead poisoning and asthma in their homes and neighborhoods.
They also take soil samples from locations in Lancaster and test their lead
levels. Same as ENE/PBH 352. Staff
362. End of Nature?: Contemporary Anthropocene Literature (H)
Massextinction,vastgyresofoatinggarbage,meltingpolaricecaps,
ocean dead zones, rising atmospheric carbon levels, super storms:
have we entered the anthropocene -- the geologic “age of man”?The
experienceofanEarthnowhereuntouchedbyhumansndsexpressionin
all genres of literature and generates unfamiliar and compelling new ways
ofconceivingourspeciesandourworld.Readingsincludesciencection,
realist ction, poetry, non-ction and theory. It is recommended that
studentscompleteatleastonecollege-level literature orenvironmental
studies course before enrolling. Same as ENG/ENE 362. Mueller
365. History of Occult Knowledge and Pseudoscience. (NSP)
The class will gain a basic familiarity with the history of the occult sciences
andpseudoscience.Studentswilllearnabouttheboundariesbetweenwhat
they dene as “bunk” and what they dub “legitimate” science, what is
authenticknowledgeaboutnature,andwhogetstodenewhatcountsas
proper science. Likewise, the class will gain skills to understand the nature
of science itself and how it operates. Same as NSP 365.
K.A. MIller
108 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
383. Sex, Lies and Book Burning:
Life and Work of Wilhelm Reich. (S)
Upper level seminar: A survey of the life and work of famous
psychoanalyst, controversial laboratory scientist Wilhelm Reich. The
course reviews a wide range of Reich’s writings from psychology,
politicalscience,tobiologyandphysics(95%primarysourcereadings).
WealsosurveythehistoricalcontextofAustriaandGermany1918-1939
andtheU.S.1939-1957.FinallywelookindepthatReich’sclashwiththe
U.S.governmentoverwhetherscienticworkcanbejudgedinacourtof
lawandthegovernment-orderedburningofhisbooksin1956and1960.
Same as HIS/WGS 383. Strick
385. The Darwinian Revolution. (S) (NSP)
Thisseminarcoursedrawsonhistoricalandscienticworkto analyze
therootsofDarwinianthinkingineconomics,socialpolicytowardthe
poor,religiousthought,politicsand the sciencesinwhichDarwin was
trained. In individual research projects, students assess the ways in which
“Darwinism”wasappliedforsocial,political,economicandtheological
purposes,aswellasscienticones.Thiscourseprovidesthehistorical
background necessary for understanding Darwinian biology and the
present-day Creation/evolution conict. Prerequisite: Permission of
instructorrequiredforrst-yearstudentstoenroll.Same as HIS 385.
Strick
386. Changing Concepts of the Universe. (NSP)
Historical examination of primitive and early cosmologies to present-
day theories of the organization, extent and nature of the universe.
EarlyGreekastronomytopresent-day“bigbang”theory.Useofsimple
astronomical instruments to reproduce observations of early astronomers.
(Notalaboratorycourse.)Same as AST 386. K.A. Miller
387. Archaeoastronomy. (NSP)
Fundamentalastronomyofancientcultures;Stonehengeandotherstone
ringsinEnglandandEurope;circlesandtemplesintheAmericas,Asiaand
Africa;time-keepingandcalendars;predictionsofseasonsandeclipses.
Methods of analysis; motions of celestial bodies; use of planetarium,
celestialglobesandgrids;surveyingofsites.(Notalaboratorycourse.)
Same as AST 387. E. Praton
370-379. Topics in Science, Technology and Society.
Studyofatopicortopicsintherelationshipbetweenscience,technology
and society. Topics vary by semester and are offered by the faculty of
several academic departments. May be taken more than once if the topic
changes.ArecenttopichasbeenSocialHistoryofTuberculosis. Staff
415. Public Health Research: You Are What You Eat?
In this interdisciplinary seminar, students explore the complex relationships
between food, nutrition, and health. Students will navigate scientic
literature as well as information available via popular media, evaluate
bothforveracityandpracticality,thensharetheirownconclusions(and
newquestionsarisingfromthisevaluation!)duringclassdiscussionsand
courseassignments.Studentswillalsodiscussissuesrelatedtoconducting
research, then explore known and/or hypothesized relationships
between economic, behavioral, biological, sociopolitical, cultural, and
environmentalvariablesandfood-relatedbehaviors.Studentswilldesign
andconductresearchcenteredonfood,nutrition,andhealth.Prerequisites:
PBH354orPBH351andonecoursefromBIO210,MAT216,BOS250,
orPSY230andpermission. Same as PBH/PUB 415. Everett
420. Public Health Research:
Pregnancy Outcomes in American Women. (S)
In this interdisciplinary seminar, students explore women’shealth and
reproductive outcomes while learning how to conduct meaningful
research on public health topics. Students will consider complex
issues related to conducting research, then explore known and/or
hypothesizedrelationshipsbetweenbehavioral,biological,sociopolitical,
psychological, and environmental variables and pregnancy outcomes.
Studentswillultimatelydesignresearchcenteredonpregnancyoutcomes
inAmericanwomen.Prerequisites:PBH354orPBH351andonecourse
fromBIO210,MAT216,BOS250,orPSY230andpermission.
Same as PBH/PUB/WGS 420. Everett
489. History and Philosophy of Psychology. (N)
The historical origins of contemporary psychology in European
philosophy, physiology and biology and subsequent development of
the schools of structuralism, functionalism, Gestalt behaviorism and
psychoanalysis. Emphasis on identifying the goals, implicit assumptions
andpotentialcontributionsofscienticpsychology.Prerequisite:Senior
psychology major status or permission of instructor. Same as PSY 489.
Staff
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
278.PoliticalEcologyofFoodandAgriculture.(H) Also ENE 278
Bratman
374.ScienceandReligion.(H)Also RST 374. Welk-Joerger
SCIENTIFIC AND
PHILOSOPHICAL
STUDIES OF MIND
Professor Bennett Helm, Chair
MEMBERS OF SCIENTIFIC AND PHILOSOPHICAL
STUDIES OF MIND PROGRAM COMMITTEE
Bennett Helm Dr. Elijah E. Kresge Professor of
Philosophy
Stephan A. Käufer John Williamson Nevin Memorial
Professor of Philosophy
Jessica Cox Associate Professor of Spanish and
Linguistics
Timothy Roth Associate Professor of Psychology
(Fall 2020 only)
Lauren Howard Assistant Professor of Psychology
Joshua Rottman Assistant Professor of Psychology
(Spring 2021 only)
Additional faculty not on the program committee
also contribute to this program.
Scientic and Philosophical Studies of Mind (SPM) seeks
to bridge the sciences and the humanities in the study of a
common topic: the nature of mind. In order to provide a breadth
of perspective as well as depth in an area of special interest, the
SPMcurriculumdividesintotwomajors:CognitiveScience
andMoralPsychology.
Cognitive science is concerned with how minds t into the
natural world. Nature is mechanistic; could the mind be a
machine?Canotheranimals—orevencomputersorrobots—
think?Whatisthe(neural?)basisforconsciousness?Howdo
mindsandmentalabilitiesdevelopaswemature?
Moral psychology is concerned with what it is for an individual
to be a worthwhile and responsible moral agent, and with the
psychological processes that lead people to engage in altruistic
actionsandtoevaluateandpunishothers’behaviors.Canwe
squareourmoralassessmentofpersonswithapsychological
understandingoftheself?Whatdoesit takeforalife tobe
signicant or meaningful? Are humans primarily motivated
towardgoodorevil?Isamoralsenseinnateorlearned?To
what extent do emotion and reason underlie moral judgments
andactions?
Successfully bridging the sciences and humanities so as to
answer these questions requires that students gain a broad
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 109
background in both the content and methodology of philosophy
andpsychology;thecoursesinthe“Core”oftheprogramaim
to provide this background. The needed depth is provided in
the majors themselves, in which students further hone their
skills of critical thinking and philosophical analysis in the
context of the interpretation, assessment and even construction
of empirical research. The SPM majors culminate in the
SeniorResearchSeminar,inwhichstudentsconductresearch
on a topic that combines both philosophical and scientic
approachestothestudyofatopicoftheirchoosing.Students
may also expand their senior thesis with the goal of presenting
the project for departmental honors.
Each major offered as part of the SPM program consists
of12courses.Ofthese,vecoursesarerequiredasapartof
a commoncore, and sixcourses are specicto each ofthe
majors, designated below. Of these six courses, three must be
inthe sciences(at leastone at orabove the 300-level),and
threemustbeinthehumanities(atleastoneatorabovethe
300-level).Theremainingcoursecanbefromeithermajoror
fromthefollowing list:ANT330; BIO 330; BIO343; CPS
222;CPS337;ECO350;PHI213;PHI217;PHI381.
StudentsintendingtomajorinSPMareencouragedtotakeone
ormoreofthefollowingcoursesintheirrstyear:SPM100,
PSY230.
COGNITIVE SCIENCE
Core:SPM100:Minds,Machines,andMorals;PSY230:
ExperimentalDesignandStatistics;PHI250:Philosophy
ofMind;PHI337:PhilosophyofNaturalScience;SPM
499:SeniorResearchSeminar.
Sciences: CPS 112: Computer Science II; BIO 220:
Principles of Physiology and Development; BIO 240:
Neuroscience; PSY 250: Animal Behavior; PSY 302:
Biopsychology; PSY 304: Developmental Psychology;
PSY305:CognitivePsychology;PSY306:Evolutionof
MindandIntelligence;PSY309:SocialPsychology;PSY
310: Conditioning and Learning; PSY 312: Embodied
Cognition; PSY 450, Cognitive Development; PSY
460: PSY 453, Nature/Nurture; Advanced Quantitative
Methods; CPS 367: Articial Intelligence; PSY452:
History and Philosophy of Psychology; PSY 48x:
CollaborativeResearch
Humanities: LIN 101: General Linguistics; LIN 120:
Sociolinguistics; LIN 272: Psycholinguistics; PHI 244:
Symbolic Logic; PHI 272: Knowledge and Reality;
PHI 331: Free Will; PHI 335: Epistemology; PHI 339:
PhilosophyofLanguage;PHI342:RationalChoice;PHI
353: Phenomenology and Cognitive Science; PHI 351:
Mind-BodyProblem;PHI352:PhilosophyofEmotions.
MORAL PSYCHOLOGY
Core:SPM100:Minds,Machines,andMorals;PSY230:
ExperimentalDesignandStatistics;PHI250:Philosophy
ofMind;PHI337:PhilosophyofNaturalScience;SPM
499:SeniorResearchSeminar.
Sciences:SOC220:SocialPsychology;SOC301:History
ofSociology;PSY304:DevelopmentalPsychology;PSY
307:PersonalityPsychology;SPM308:Psychopathology;
SPM309:SocialPsychology;PSY311:OriginsofMoral
Thought; PSY 315: Cross-Cultural Psychology; PSY
317: Health Psychology; SOC 320: Criminology; SOC
380:SociologyofLaw;PSY460:AdvancedQuantitative
Methods;PSY452:HistoryandPhilosophyofPsychology;
PSY489:CollaborativeResearch.
Humanities: PHI 220: Moral Theory; GOV 241:
Classical Political Theory; GOV 242: Modern Political
Theory; PHI 271: Philosophy of Law; PHI 319: 20th-
CenturyContinentalPhilosophy;PHI331:FreeWill;PHI
360:ConceptofaPerson;PHI361:MoralPsychology;
PHI 362: Love and Friendship; PHI 363: Respect,
Responsibility, andEthics; RST 384: Soul in Searchof
Selfhood.
Off-Campus Study Programs Most Frequently Attended
by Cognitive Science and Moral Psychology Majors:
BudapestSemesterinCognitiveScience(fallsemester)
F&MinDenmark:ChildDevelopmentinCulturalContext
(SummerTravelCourse)
IFSAdirect-enrollsemesteruniversityprograms(Australia
–Macquarie University and University of Melbourne;
NewZealand–UniversityofAuckland;Ireland–University
CollegeDublin)
DISCopenhagen(semester)
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
Note that courses below marked with an asterisk (*) have
prerequisitesthatdonotcounttowardtheSPMmajor.
I. CORE
SPM 100. Minds, Machines, and Morals.
This course provides an introduction to the central problems, concepts,
and methods of cognitive science and moral psychology. We will
analyzequestionsaddressingthenatureofintelligence,therelationship
between minds and bodies, and the basis of moral beliefs and behaviors.
These explorations will bridge the sciences and humanities by taking a
fundamentally interdisciplinary perspective. Helm, Cuffari
PSY 230. Experimental Design and Statistics.
Descriptive and inferential statistics. Research design as reected in
statistical methods. Analysis of variance designs for independent groups
and for repeated measurements. Statistical power and comparison
techniques.Prerequisites:PSY100orBIO110orSPM100.Permission
required. Bashaw, Batres
PHI 250. Philosophy of Mind. (H)
A general introduction to the philosophy of mind, addressing four key
philosophicalissues:thenatureofpsychologicalexplanation;themind-
bodyproblem;thepossibilityofarticialintelligence;andthenatureof
persons.Prerequisite:onecourseinPHIorPSYorSPM. Helm
PHI 337. Philosophy of Natural Science. (H) (NSP)
The goals, methods, assumptions and limitations of natural science.
Specialattentionwillbepaidtothephilosophyofpsychology,cognitive
science and evolutionary biology. Same as STS 337. Ross
SPM 499. Senior Research Seminar.
Intensive research and writing on a topic of the student’s choice.
Permissionoftheinstructorisrequired.OfferedeveryFall.Prerequisites:
PHI250andPSY230. Rottman
110 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
II. AREAS OF CONCENTRATION
A. COGNITIVE SCIENCE
1.Sciences
BIO 220. Principles of Physiology and Development.*(N)
An integrated study of cells, whole organisms and the interactions between
organisms and their environments. The physiologi.cal and anatomical
solutions to the physical and chemical challenges faced by plants and
animals. Mechanisms by which a single cell develops into a complex,
multicellularorganisminwhichgroupsofcellsperformspecializedtasks.
Lecturetopicsintegratedwithalaboratorythatemphasizesindependent
researchprojects.Prerequisite:BIO110.OfferedeveryFall.
Gotsch, Howard, Thompson
BIO 240. Neuroscience. (N)
Principles of nervous system function from the molecular through the
organ system level as illustrated by the vertebrates and invertebrates.
Approximately one half of the course will cover basic cellular principles
of nervous system organization, development and physiology. The
remaininglectureswillconsidertheroleoffunctionallyidentiedneural
networksin behaviorcontrol. Prerequisite:BIO 220or BFB/PSY302.
OfferedeverySpring. Same as BFB/PSY 240. Jinks
CPS 112. Computer Science II.*
A second course in computer science and computational thinking,
focusing on data structures and advanced programming. Topics include
implementationandapplicationsofdatastructuressuchasstacks,queues,
linked lists, trees and graphs. Also introduces performance analysis of
algorithms.Hasarequiredlab,butdoesnotsatisfytheNaturalScience
withLaboratoryrequirement.Prerequisite:CPS111. McDanel, Wilson
CPS 367. Articial Intelligence.*
Anintroductiontosomeofthecoreproblemsandkeyideasintheeldof
articialintelligencefromacomputationalperspective.Thecoursewill
focus on exploring various representational and algorithmic approaches to
theproblemofcreatingarticialagentsthatknowthings,canreasonabout
the world, and that make good decisions. Key topics: heuristic search,
adversarial search, reinforcement learning, constraint satisfaction, logical
inference,probabilisticinference.Prerequisites:CPS222andCPS/MAT
237.Corequisite:MAT216. Wilson
PSY/BIO 250. Animal Behavior. (N)
An integrative approach to animal behavior from the perspectives of
ethology, behavioral ecology, and comparative psychology. The structure,
function, development, and evolution of behavioral adaptations including
orientation,foragingandpredation,communication,socialorganization,
and reproductive strategies. Observational and experimental research
required. Prerequisites: BIO110, and permission of instructor. Outside
classtimetoworkonindependentresearchproject.Corequisites:BIO210
orPSY230,andpermissionoftheinstructor. Lonsdorf
PSY 302. Biopsychology. (N)
Behavioralandmentalprocessesasviewedfromabiologicalperspective
with particular emphasis upon the role of neurochemical and endocrine
factors in central nervous system function. Topics covered will include
reproduction and gender, chemical senses and ingestion, emotion,
learning, sleep and psychopathology. A neuropharmacological approach
tothestudyofthenervoussystemwillbeemphasized.Prerequisite:PSY
100orSPM100orBIO110orpermission.Corequisite:PSY230orBIO
210. Offered every Fall. Same as BFB 302. Lacy, Lynch, Roth
PSY 304. Developmental Psychology.
An examination of the relative contributions of nature and nurture on
children’s behavioral, cognitive and perceptual development from the
prenatal period through adolescence. Topics include the development
of language, concepts, intelligence, socialization, motor abilities and
emotional understanding, with discussion informed by current and
classicprimaryreading.Researchactivitiesandanalysesintegratedinto
coursework.Prerequisite:PSY100orSPM100orpermission.Corequisite:
PSY230orBIO210.OfferedeveryFall. Howard, Leimgruber
PSY 305. Cognitive Psychology.
This course provides an overview of human cognitive processes. Topics
covered include knowledge acquisition, memory, concept formation,
text processing, thinking, problem solving and decision making. We
will compare several approaches to the study of cognition, and we will
examine and evaluate both classic and contemporary theory and research.
Researchactivitiesandanalysesintegratedintocoursework.Prerequisite:
PSY100orSPM100orpermission.Corequisite:PSY230orBIO210.
Offered every Fall. Howard
PSY 306. Evolution of Mind and Intelligence.
Whatis intelligentbehavior,whatisit forand howdid it evolve?We
will attempt to answer these questions and understand the nature and
development of Mind from a comparative perspective. We will do so
by investigating learning, perception, memory, thinking and language
inanimalsandhumans.Researchactivitiesandanalysesintegratedinto
coursework.Prerequisites:BIO210orPSY230ANDoneof:BIO240,
PSY250,PSY301,PSY302,PSY303,PSY304,PSY305,PSY307,
PSY308,PSY309,PSY310,PSY312,PSY315,PSY337,PSY370-379,
PSY390,orpermission.Same as BFB 306. Roth
PSY 309. Social Psychology.
This course involves the student in exploration of some of the basic topics
in experimental approaches to social psychology, such as cognitive and
motivational perspectives on social phenomena, the role of affect and
emotion in social action and current uses of the concept of self. Issues
exploredinthiscontextincludeself-afrmationprocesses,regulationof
social action and the relationship between affect, cognition and action.
Researchactivitiesandanalysesintegratedintocoursework.Prerequisite:
eitherPSY100orSPM100,andeitherPSY230orBIO210,orpermission.
OfferedeverySpring. Knowles
PSY 310. Conditioning and Learning.
An introduction to the process by which human and animal behavior
changes as a function of experience. Examines basic mechanisms for
learning(includinghabituation, sensitization, andclassical and operant
conditioning) and explores the scientic and practical application of
thesemechanismstoexplainandpredictbehavior.Discussestheextent
to which learning mechanisms are consistent across species, and how the
physiology, natural environment, and social systems of individual species
interact with basic learning processes to produce different behavioral
outcomes.PSY100orBIO110orSPM100. Same as BFB 310.
Lacy, Lynch
PSY 312. Embodied Cognition. (NSP)
In this course we will study intelligence by focusing on perception and
action in the environment. To this end, we will focus on ecological
psychology,robotics,articialneuralnetworksandsimulatedevolution.
Although students will be expected to build simple robots and work
with computer models, no background knowledge of engineering or
computingwillbeassumed.(Knowledgeofprogrammingisnotrequired.)
Prerequisite:Prerequisite:PSY100orSPM100,ora prior philosophy
course. Cuffari
PSY 450. Cognitive Development.
Inamatterofmonths,azygotegoesfromacollectionofcellstoathinking,
feeling,learning baby…whoquickly goeson tobe a walking, talking,
problem-solvingtoddler…whosoonafterisareading,writing,socially-
awarechild.It’sbreathtaking!Thisadvanced,discussion-focusedseminar
explores the foundations of cognitive processes and developmental
mechanisms that underpin our fantastic human cognitive growth. As we
survey major topics in cognitive development, our focus will be primarily
onbirth through early childhood, asking the question: How do infants
and children make sense of the myriad people, ideas, and objects around
them?Prerequisite:PSY304orPSY305orPSY314. Casler
PSY 452. History and Philosophy of Psychology. (N)
The historical origins of contemporary psychology in European
philosophy, physiologyand biology and subsequent development of
the schools of structuralism, functionalism, Gestalt, behaviorism and
psychoanalysis. Emphasis on identifying the goals, implicit assumptions
andpotentialcontributionsofscienticpsychology.Prerequisite:Senior
psychology major status or permission of instructor. Offered every Fall.
Same as STS 452. Cuffari
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 111
PSY 453. Nature/Nurture. (NSP)
Oneofthemostenduringdisputesintheeldofpsychologyconcernsthe
degree to which psychological traits are learned or innate. Are genes or
socializationresponsibleforheightenedratesofaggressioninmen?How
dobiologicalandenvironmentalfactorsinteracttoproducelanguage?Is
cultureanevolvedadaptation?Doesitmakeanysenseatalltopartition
thecausesofthinkingandbehaviorinto“nature”and“nurture”–oris
this a wholly false dichotomy? Throughout this course, we will draw
uponcutting-edgeresearchtoevaluatearangeoftheoreticalperspectives
on the interplay of nature and nurture. We will also discuss the myriad
sociopolitical ramications of this fundamental debate. Prerequisites:
PSY230and(PSY301orPSY302orPSY303orPSY304orPSY305
orPSY306orPSY307orPSY308orPSY309orPSY310orPSY311or
PSY312orPSY313orPSY314orPSY315orPSY317orPSY319).
Rottman
PSY 460. Advanced Quantitative Methods.
An examination of complex univariate and multivariate statistical
techniquesasappliedinthecontextofpsychologicalresearch.Thecourse
will focus on four primary types of analyses: complex analysis of variance,
multivariate regression and correlation, principal components analysis
andfactoranalysis,andpowerandeffectsize.Wewillexaminepublished
research and conduct research projects to explore the relationship between
hypotheses, experimental designs, and these statistical techniques.
Prerequisite:PSY230. Bashaw
PSY 480. Collaborative Research in
Comparative Cognition and Behavior. (N)
Comparative perspectives and approaches to the study of selected topics
drawn from cognitive and developmental psychology, cognitive ethology,
cognitive and behavioral neuroscience, cognitive science and behavioral
primatology.Researchrequired.Prerequisites:PSY230orBIO210,one
ofPSY250,301,302,303,304,305,306;oroneofBIO250,330,379;or
oneofBFB250,301,302,306,330,379;orpermissionoftheinstructor.
OfferedeverySpring.SameasBFB480. Lonsdorf
PSY 481. Collaborative Research in Developmental Psychology. (N)
An overview of methods for conducting research with children, with an
emphasis on ethics of working with child participants. Current empirical
and theoretical issues in developmental psychology are addressed through
literature review and group research projects.Topicsreecting student
interestsareconsidered.Laboratoryresearchrequired.Prerequisite:PSY
230orBIO210;andPSY304orPSY305orPSY311orPSY314;or
permission.OfferedeverySpring. Staff
PSY 483. Collaborative Research in Human Cognition. (N)
An in-depth consideration of selected empirical and theoretical issues
in cognitive psychology. Emphasis is on recent literature covering
basic research in cognitive psychology, cognitive neuroscience and
computational neuroscience modeling, including such topics as attention
and resource allocation, representation, concept formation, memory and
topicsreectingresearchinterestsof participating students.Laboratory
research required. Prerequisites: PSY 230 or BIO 210; PSY 305, or
permission.OfferedeverySpring. Howard, Moore
PSY 487. Collaborative Research in Biological Psychology. (N)
The neurophysiological and structural basis of behavior with emphasis
on motivation and learning, including the use of psychopharmacological
methods. The role of endocrine and metabolic processes in the regulation
of behavior is integrated with considerations of structure. Laboratory
researchrequired.Prerequisites:PSY230orBIO210;PSY302orBIO/
BFB240orpermission. Lacy, Roth
PSY 489. History and Philosophy of Psychology. (N)
The historical origins of contemporary psychology in European
philosophy, physiology and biology and subsequent development of
the schools of structuralism, functionalism, Gestalt, behaviorism and
psychoanalysis. Emphasis on identifying the goals, implicit assumptions
andpotentialcontributionsofscienticpsychology.Prerequisite:Senior
psychology major status or permission of instructor. Offered every Fall.
Same as STS 489. Staff
2. Humanities
LIN 101. Introduction to Linguistics.
Through course readings, class discussions, problem solving and group
work, students will explore the core components of human language;
speechsounds,wordformation,sentencestructure,andmeaning.Provides
numerous opportunities for students to use theoretical knowledge and
applyittoanalyzingthestructureofotherlanguages. Armstrong, Cox
LIN 120. Sociolinguistics.
An exploration of the relationship between language, culture and society.
Specialattentionwillbepaidtolanguagevariation(stylingandcodes,
dialects,creolesandpidgins)andlanguageinsociety(multilingualism,
language prejudice, identities). Readings, lms, discussions and group
workwillpreparestudentsforeldwork. Armstrong, Cox
PHI 236. Knowledge and Reality.
This class is an advanced, but accessible, introduction to two central
branches of philosophy: epistemology and metaphysics. Epistemology,
looselycharacterized,isthestudyofknowledge.Metaphysics,evenmore
looselycharacterized,isthestudyofthegeneralfeaturesofreality.We’ll
work through some of the central topics that fall under these two studies.
Kroll
PHI 244. Symbolic Logic. (H)
Deductivereasoning,emphasizingprimarilysymbolictechniques;some
discussion of issues in the philosophy of logic. Kroll, Ross
PHI 335. Belief and Knowledge. (H)
Investigation of some issues in contemporary epistemology, including the
competinganalysesoftheconceptofjustication,thecaseforskepticism,
and the analysis of the concept of knowledge. Prerequisite: One prior
philosophy course or permission. Ross
PHI 339. Philosophy of Language. (H)
Investigation, based on contemporary writings, of the diverse functions
served by language, of its conceptual presuppositions, and of its
relationshipstoothersymbolicmedia.Prerequisite:OnepriorPhilosophy
course or permission. Kroll
PHI 342. Rational Choice. (H)
Anintroductiontodecisiontheory;topicsincludetherationalityofthe
policy of nuclear deterrence, the rationality of pursuing self-interest
in every situation, the impossibility of devising a democratic voting
procedure, the irrationality of accepting all that is probable, and others.
Lessfrequentlyoffered.FulllstheMErequirementforthePhilosophy
major. Ross
PHI 351. Mind-Body Problem. (H)
A philosophical examination of the apparently problematic relationship
between the mind and the natural world. Prerequisite: One prior
Philosophycourseorpermission. Helm
PHI 352. Philosophy of Emotions. (H)
Detailed philosophical investigation of the emotions, focusing on the
implicationsthestudyofemotionshasforthemind-bodyproblem,the
nature of consciousness and intentionality, and the nature of rationality.
How are emotions related to other mental states like beliefs, desires, and
bodilysensations?Whatdistinctivecontribution,ifany,dotheemotions
maketoourmentallives?Prerequisite:onepriorPhilosophycourse.
Helm
PHI 353. Phenomenology and Cognitive Science. (H)
In-depth study of phenomenology, covering both its history and
contemporarydebates,andphenomenology-inspiredresearchincognitive
scienceandpsychology.Prerequisite:OnepriorPhilosophycourseand
onepriorPsychologycourse.Same as PSY 353. Käufer
TOPICS COURSES IN COGNITIVE SCIENCE
EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED IN 2020-2021
See program chairperson for information on what major requirements
particular special topics offerings satisfy.
PHI37x.FeministEpistemology.(H)
112 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
B. MORAL PSYCHOLOGY
1.Sciences
PSY 304. Developmental Psychology.
An examination of the relative contributions of nature and nurture on
children’s behavioral, cognitive and perceptual development from the
prenatal period through adolescence. Topics include the development
of language, concepts, intelligence, socialization, motor abilities and
emotional understanding, with discussion informed by current and
classicprimaryreading.Researchactivitiesandanalysesintegratedinto
coursework.Prerequisite:PSY100orSPM100orpermission.Corequisite:
PSY230orBIO210.OfferedeveryFall. Howard, Leimgruber
PSY 307. Personality Psychology.
This course provides an evaluative and comparative overview of major
models of personality selected to illustrate psychodynamic, trait, cognitive,
humanistic, physiological and learning approaches. The course will
emphasizethetestabilityofthemodelsandtheirconnectionwithcurrent
research. Research activities and analyses integrated into coursework.
Prerequisite:PSY100orSPM100orpermission.Corequisite:PSY230
orBIO210.OfferedeverySpring. Troy
PSY 308. Psychopathology.
This course will serve as an introduction to descriptive and theoretical
approaches to the study of psychopathology. In addition to the study
of disease-related processes, special emphasis will be placed upon
developing an understanding of those biological, psychological and social
conditions that are essential for healthy psychosocial functioning across
thelifespan.Prerequisite:PSY100orSPM100orpermission.Offered
everySpring. Grant, Penn
PSY 309. Social Psychology.
This course involves the student in exploration of some of the basic topics
in experimental approaches to social psychology, such as cognitive and
motivational perspectives on social phenomena, the role of affect and
emotion in social action and current uses of the concept of self. Issues
exploredinthiscontextincludeself-afrmationprocesses,regulationof
social action and the relationship between affect, cognition and action.
Researchactivitiesandanalysesintegratedintocoursework.Prerequisite:
PSY100orSPM100,andPSY230orBIO110,orpermission.Offered
everySpring. Knowles
PSY 311. Origins of Moral Thought.
Moral values dene us, unite us, and give meaning to our lives. How
havewecometoholdourparticularmoralconvictions?Wewillexamine
thisquestiononthreedifferenttimescales:millennia(humanevolution),
centuries (cultural dynamics), and years (child development). Students
will evaluate and synthesize insights from psychology, philosophy,
biology, anthropology, economics, and history in order to understand
the manifold origins of moral beliefs and behaviors, thus challenging
existing values and cultivating improved abilities to create a better future.
Prerequisite:PSY100orSPM100orplacement.Corequisite:PSY230.
Leimgruber, Rottman
PSY 315. Cross-Cultural Psychology.
Cross-CulturalPsychologyservesasanintroductiontotherelationships
among cultural processes, human consciousness, human health and
human development. Same as AFS 315. Penn
PSY 317. Health Psychology.
This course explores the complex factors that affect human health,
specically examining how health and health-related behavior is
inuenced by the interrelationship of multiple environmental and
individual factors ranging from individual personality to health policy.
This course also examines the fundamental principles and theories of
HealthPsychologyandhowtheoreticalandempiricalndingsareapplied
to improve the health of individuals and groups Same as PBH 317.
Abbott
PSY 452. History and Philosophy of Psychology. (N)
The historical origins of contemporary psychology in European
philosophy, physiologyand biology and subsequent development of
the schools of structuralism, functionalism, Gestalt, behaviorism and
psychoanalysis. Emphasis on identifying the goals, implicit assumptions
andpotentialcontributionsofscienticpsychology.Prerequisite:Senior
psychology major status or permission of instructor. Offered every Fall.
Same as STS 452. Cuffari
PSY 460. Advanced Quantitative Methods. (N)
An examination of complex univariate and multivariate statistical
techniquesasappliedinthecontextofpsychologicalresearch.Thecourse
will focus on four primary types of analyses: complex analysis of variance,
multivariate regression and correlation, principal components analysis
andfactoranalysis,andpowerandeffectsize.Wewillexaminepublished
research and conduct research projects to explore the relationship between
hypotheses, experimental designs, and these statistical techniques.
Prerequisite:PSY230. Bashaw
PSY 481. Collaborative Research in Developmental Psychology. (N)
An overview of methods for conducting research with children, with an
emphasis on ethics of working with child participants. Current empirical
and theoretical issues in developmental psychology are addressed through
literature review and group research projects.Topicsreecting student
interestsareconsidered.Laboratoryresearchrequired.Prerequisites:PSY
230orBIO210;PSY304,orpermission.OfferedeverySpring. Staff
PSY 482. Collaborative Research in Social Psychology. (N)
Selected topics in experimental social psychology. Emphasis on
experimental methods. Traditional areas of social psychology and topics
whichreectstudentresearchinterestareconsidered.Laboratoryresearch
required.Prerequisites:PSY230orBIO210,andPSY309;orpermission.
Knowles
PSY 484. Collaborative Research in Personality. (N)
Selectedempiricalandtheoreticaltopicsfromthecontemporaryliterature
in personality psychology with emphasis on measurement issues and
comparativeanalysesofmajormodelsandtaxonomies.Topicsthatreect
studentresearchinterestswillbediscussed.Laboratoryresearchrequired.
Prerequisites:PSY230orBIO210;andPSY307orPSY309orPSY319
orPSY371EvolutionaryPsychology;orpermission.Studentsplanning
tousePSY371EvolutionaryPsychologyasaprerequisiteshouldcontact
theinstructorpriortoregistrationtorequestaprerequisiteoverride..Troy
PSY 488. Collaborative Research in Psychopathology. (N)
Anupper-level,research-basedseminarthatexaminesnormative,healthy,
andabnormaldevelopmentacrossthe life san.Studentsareassistedto
undertakeindividualorgroupresearchprojectsusingavarietyofmethods-
including both quantitative and qualitative approaches. Prerequisites:
PSY230orBIO210,andPSY308;orpermission. Penn
489. Collaborative Research in Moral Psychology. (N, ER)
Studentswillconductexperimentalresearchonrelevanttheoreticalissues
withintheeldofmoralpsychology.Topicsmayincludeinvestigations
of the scope of moral concern, manifestations of moral virtues, childhood
acquisitionofmoralbeliefs,dispositionstowardprosocialityandfairness,
contributions of emotions to moral judgment, and other related areas that
reectstudentinterest.Techniquesfordesigning,conducting,analyzing,
and presenting empirical research will be discussed, practiced, and
implemented.Laboratoryresearchisrequired;thiscourseisanEmpirical
Research(ER)course.Prerequisites:PSY230;andPSY304,PSY305,
PSY309,PSY311,PSY315,PSY319,PSY453,orPSY471Nature/
Nurture;orpermission.StudentsplanningtousePSY471Nature/Nurture
as a prerequisite should contact the instructor prior to registration to
requestaprerequisiteoverride. Rottman
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 113
SOC 220. Social Psychology.*
Study of the relationship between self and society, as seen through
sociological social psychology. Examination of the genesis of the
social psychological framework in both psychology and sociology,
and consideration of its applications within sociology today. Emphasis
on symbolic interaction and related theories. Topics include the study
of language and talk; the relationships between role, identity and self;
sociologyof emotions; socialization and the role of allof these inthe
creation, maintenance, and change of social structures.
Prerequisite:SOC100. Cannon
SOC 301. History of Sociological Theory.*
A critical examination of the development of social thought from
the Enlightenment to the early Twentieth Century. The main focus is
on past attempts to explain the nature of capitalism and its attendant
transformation of family, work, and community. In addition, the course
probesthequestionofhowsharedidealsanddivisiveinterestsaffectboth
the internal coherence of human society and the study of human society
aswell.Prerequisite:SOC100. Hodos, Shokooh Valle, Singer
SOC 320. Criminology.*
Surveystheoreticalandempiricaleffortstostudycrime,crimecausation,
and punishment. Special attention paid to the historical origins and
development of notions of criminal responsibility, trial defenses, and the
courtroomdivisionoflabor.Sociological,psychological,andbiological
explanations of criminal behavior are examined along with research
attempts to study the development of delinquent and criminal careers.
Prerequisite:SOC100. Staff
SOC 480. Sociology of Law.*
Application of sociological theory and methodology to the study of law
and its relationship to the social order. Examination of conditions under
which nonlegal norms and values become reinforced within the legal
institutions of a society. Topics covered include the role of law in social
change, the interface of law and psychiatry, and the study of law as a
profession.Prerequisite:SOC100orpermissionoftheinstructor. Staff
2. Humanities
GOV 241. Classical Political Theory. (H)
Examination of important texts in classical Greek and Roman
political thought, including the writings of Plato, Aristotle, and other
relevant authors. Explores how ancient political theory sheds lights
on contemporary politics, including issues of democracy, citizenship,
globalization,andinternationalrelations. Hammer
GOV 242. Modern Political Theory. (H)
ExaminationofthepoliticaltheoriesofHobbes,Locke,Rousseau,Marx,
and one contemporary thinker, with emphasis on alternative views of the
social contract, liberalism, and radicalism. Datta, Whiteside
PHI 220. Moral Theory. (H)
A careful study of classic texts in moral philosophy, with an emphasis
onquestionsaboutthefoundationsofethicsandtheobjectivityofmoral
judgement. Merli
PHI 319. 20th-Century Continental Philosophy. (H)
Close examination of emergence of modern phenomenology and
hermeneutics. with particular attention to Heidegger’s Being and
Time.Prerequisite:onepriorcourseinphilosophyorpermissionofthe
instructor. Käufer
PHI 331. Free Will. (H)
An examination of contemporary theories concerning the nature of free
choice.Specialattentionisgiventothenatureofmoralresponsibilityand
the relationship between free choice and determinism. Kroll
PHI 360. Concept of a Person. (H)
A careful examination of what it is to be a person, as an autonomous moral
agent whose life can be meaningful and of what distinguishes persons
fromthe“lower”animals.Prerequisite:onepriorcourseinphilosophy,or
permission of the instructor. Helm
PHI 361. Moral Psychology. (H)
Moral psychology is the study of human moral agency. As such, it is
constrainedby,andmustcoherewith,thefactsabouthumanpsychology;
but its primary focus is on human good, an evaluative notion. Central
questionsinclude:Whatarereasonsandwhatroledotheyplayinaction?
Whatischaracterandhowisitrelatedtovirtue?Whatisfreewill,can
wehaveitandhowdowebestexplainweaknessofthewill?Prerequisite:
one prior course in philosophy, or permission of the instructor. Helm
PHI 362. Love and Friendship. (H)
Investigation of philosophical aspects of love and friendship, examining a
varietyofaccountsofwhattheyareaswellasquestionsconcerningtheir
justication,theirbearingontheautonomyandidentityoftheindividual,
and the place their value has within a broader system of the values,
includingmoralvalues.Prerequisite:onepriorPhilosophycourse. Helm
PHI 363. Respect, Responsibility, and Ethics. (H)
Recently many philosophers have argued that certain interpersonal
emotions, such as resentment, indignation, guilt, gratitude, and
approbation, are fundamental to a host of interconnected issues in ethics,
including the nature of respect, dignity, freedom and responsibility, and
the origins of moral values. This class will closely examine these claims
and arguments with the aim of understanding more clearly how moral
psychology and metaethics intersect. Helm
RST 384. Soul in Search of Selfhood: The Writings of St. Augustine. (H)
This course will be an intensive study of some of the major writings of
Augustine with a view toward obtaining a basic understanding of the main
lines of his thought on human existence, free will, justice, the state, and
the nature of God. We will focus on his intellectual and spiritual struggles,
his mature conceptions of the Christian religion, and his integration of
the cultural achievements of Mediterranean antiquity into Christianity.
TheemphasiswillbeonunderstandingAugustine’sindividuallifeand
thought against the background of his own culture and times. Cooper
TOPICS COURSES IN MORAL PSYCHOLOGY
EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED IN 2020-2021
See program chairperson for information on what major requirements
particular special topics offerings satisfy.
PHI27x.FeministPhilosophy.(H)
114 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
SOCIOLOGY
Professor Jerome Hodos, Chair
Katherine E. McClelland Professor of Sociology
Caroline Faulkner Associate Professor of Sociology
Jerome I. Hodos Associate Professor of Sociology
Amy Singer Associate Professor of Sociology
(on leave 2020-21)
Emily Marshall Assistant Professor of Sociology and
Public Health
Ashley C. Rondini Assistant Professor of Sociology
(on leave Fall 2020)
Firuzeh Shokooh Valle Assistant Professor of Sociology
Bryan Cannon Visiting Assistant Professor of Sociology
Sociology is both a specialized academic discipline and an
important part of a liberal education. As a social and cultural
science, sociology studies human interaction within and
between groups, the forces of interest and meaning that help to
shapeandreshapethatinteractionanditsconsequencesforthe
lives of individuals and social groups. As one of the liberal arts,
sociology enriches the study of history, philosophy, science and
the arts and assists students in examining their personal lives,
professional activities and public issues in a more thoughtful
and critical way. In both capacities, and as our graduates
attest, the study of sociology can be excellent preparation for
a wide range of careers including law, education, business,
government service, medicine and social work.
A major in Sociology consists of a total of twelve courses,
eight of which are Sociology classes, and four of which
are in related social sciences. The eight Sociology courses
must include SOC 100, 301, 302 and a 400-level seminar
or Independent Study, along with any other four Sociology
courses(thoughseebelowforrecommendedclasses).Ofthe
additional four courses in related social sciences, two must
be in a single department, and one of these must be above
the100level.Relatedsocialsciencesincludethefollowing:
1) All courses in Anthropology (ANT), Economics (ECO),
Government (GOV) and History (HIS); 2) All courses in
otherdepartmentscross-listedwithAnthropology,Economics,
GovernmentandHistory;3)CoursesinAfricanaStudies(AFS),
AmericanStudies(AMS),JudaicStudies(JST),Women’sand
GenderStudies(WGS)andScience,TechnologyandSociety
(STS) that are cross-listed with Anthropology, Economics,
Government or History or that have a social science (S)
designation;4)LIN120(Sociolinguistics);5)Selectedcourses
inBusiness,Organization,andSociety(BOS)andPsychology
(PSY).StudentsshouldconsulttheiradviserinSociologywith
questionsabouttherelatedsocialsciencecourses.
SOC 100 is a prerequisite to all other courses in the
department. Prerequisites may be waived only by the
instructor.
The writing requirement in the Sociology major is met by
completion of the normal courses required to complete the
major.
Although SOC 210 and SOC 220 are not required courses,
studentscontemplatingamajorinSociologyareencouragedto
takethesecoursesearlyinthemajorsequenceasthesesubjects
areimportantforupper-levelcourses.Additionally,wesuggest
thatmajorsandminorscompleteSOC301(Theory)andSOC
302 (Methods) prior to the start of their senior year where
possible, as these classes provide background and skills that
arehelpfulforindependentstudiesand400-levelseminars.
A minor in Sociology consists of a total of six courses,
includingSOC100,301and302,andthreeothercourses.
MajorsintheDepartmentofSociologyhavestudiedabroadin
thefollowingprogramsinrecentyears:SchoolforInternational
Training in Santiago, Chile; Cape Town, SouthAfrica; and
Buenos Aires, Argentina; Institute for the International
EducationofStudentsinBarcelona,SpainandBuenosAires;
DanishInstituteforStudyAbroadinCopenhagen,Denmark;
InstituteforStudyAbroadinAustraliaandScotland;Syracuse
UniversityAbroadinFlorenceandMadrid.SeetheInternational
ProgramssectionoftheCatalogforfurtherinformation.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
100. Introductory Sociology. (S)
Introduction to the basic concepts, theories and methods used to study
humansocialinteractionandsocialstructures.Readingsandtopicsvary
sectiontosection,buttypicallyaddresssocialstratication(primarilyby
race,classandgender)anditsimpactonindividualandsociallife,the
sources of social order and social change, deviance and social control and
theinterrelationsbetweenindividualsandsociety.Prerequisitetoallother
departmental offerings. Staff
210. Class, Status and Power. (S)
Acomparativesurveyoftheoriesandresearchoninequality.Geographic
patternsofinequalitywillbeamaintheme,inadditiontoracial,economic
and political varieties. Covers both developed and developing countries.
Past case studies have included Britain, South Africa and Brazil.
Prerequisite:SOC100. Hodos
220. Social Psychology. (S)
Studyoftherelationshipbetweenselfandsociety,asseenthroughsociological
social psychology. Examination of the genesis of the social psychological
framework in both psychology and sociology and consideration of its
applications within sociology today. Emphasis on symbolic interaction and
relatedtheories.Topicsincludethestudyoflanguageandtalk;therelationships
betweenrole,identityandself;sociologyofemotions;socialization;andthe
role of all of these in the creation, maintenance and change of social structures.
Prerequisite:SOC100. Cannon
301. History of Sociological Theory. (S)
An examination of the development of social thought from the
Enlightenment to the early 20th century. Main focus on past attempts to
explain the nature of capitalism and its attendant transformation of family,
workandcommunity.Courseprobesthequestionofhowsharedidealsand
divisive interests affect both the internal coherence of human society and
thestudyofhumansocietyaswell.Prerequisite:SOC100.
Shokooh-Valle, Singer
302. Sociological Research Methods. (S)
Strategiesanddesignofsociologicalresearch,including:thedevelopment
ofhypotheses;operationalizationofconcepts;ethics;anddatacollection,
analysisandpresentation.Specialattentiongiventothemethodsofsurvey
research,useofastatisticalpackageandtabularanalysis.Prerequisite:
SOC100. Faulkner, Marshall, McClelland
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 115
310. Urban Sociology. (S)
Anintroductiontothesociologicalstudyofcities.Coursehasathree-part
focus on classic materials and theories, typical research methods and data,
and development of US cities. Topics include migration, gentrication,
poverty,race/ethnicity,urbanpolitics,housing,suburbanization,andmore;
students will also practice ethnography as a research method and work
withcensusdata.CitiesdiscussedincludePhiladelphia,Lancaster,Boston,
Chicago,LosAngeles,andmore.Prerequisites:SOC100. Hodos
320. Criminology. (S)
Surveystheoreticalandempiricaleffortstostudycrime,crimecausation
and punishment. Special attention paid to the historical origins and
development of notions of criminal responsibility, trial defenses and the
courtroomdivisionoflabor.Sociological,psychologicalandbiological
explanations of criminal behavior are examined along with research
attempts to study the development of delinquent and criminal careers.
Prerequisite:SOC100. Staff
330. Sociology of Medicine. (S)
An examination of the social and cultural factors which inuence the
occurrence, distribution and experience of illness, the organization of
medical care in American society and its rapidly escalating costs, the
technical and ethical performance of physicians and the ethical dilemmas
associatedwithmodernmedicine.Prerequisite:SOC100. Marshall
342. Political Sociology. (S)
Ruleandresistancehavebeenextremelyproductivefociiincontemporary
analyses of the nature and forms of power. In this seminar we will draw on
thisrichveinofinquirytoanalyzethesocialformationsthatconstitutethe
substance of political sociology—state, economy, and society. In the course
of engaging with the sociology of politics we will also be examining how
the ways in which we interpret social reality are caught up in the practice of
power,i.e.thepoliticsofsociology.Prerequisite:SOC100. Hodos
345. Sociology of Sexuality. (S)
Thiscourseexaminestheideathatsexisnotanaturalact;instead,sexand
human sexuality are socially constructed. We will examine how power—in
a variety of forms—is at play in our social and cultural understandings and
experiences of sex and sexuality. We will examine a variety of approaches
to the study of sexuality as we consider sex, gender and sexual orientation,
sexualrelationships,thebody,race/ethnicity,thecommodicationofsex,
reproductionandcontraception,andsexualviolence.Prerequisite:SOC
100orWGS210. Same as WGS 345. Faulkner
350. Sociology of Gender. (S)
Thiscourseintroducesstudentstomajortheoriesandndingsinsociology
of gender, including the incorporation of global/transnational concerns.
The course focuses on the constraints that the social construction of gender
imposesonmen,women,andLGBTQI/non-binary/gendernon-conforming
individuals, and helps students develop a critical analysis of gender as a
social institution. It examines the intersections of gender with race, class,
and sexuality, among other social locations, incorporating postcolonial/
decolonial, queer, feminist, and science and technology theories.
Prerequisite:SOC100orWGS210.Same as WGS 350. Shokooh-Valle
355. The Sociology of Culture. (S)
This course considers the place of culture in social life and examines
its socially constituted character. Treating culture as sets of distinctive
practices, symbolic representations, and domains of creative expression,
the course will investigate how these vary across specic social,
historical, and institutional locations. Topics will include such matters as
therelationshipbetweencultureandsocialinequality,cultureandsocial
change,thecommoditizationofculturalgoods,andhowculturalforms
areused, appropriated,and transformed by social groups. Prerequisite:
SOC100. Singer
360. Race and Ethnic Relations. (S)
Studyofintergrouprelations,withanemphasisonprocessesofracial/
ethnic stratication, assimilation and cultural pluralism. Focus is on
American society, past and present. Topics include the development and
change of race/ethnic identities, intergroup attitudes, racial ideologies,
immigration, education and the intersection of race with social class and
gender.Prerequisite:SOC100.Same as AFS 360. Rondini
364. Sociology of the Family. (S)
Sociologistsarguethatthefamilyoccupiesacontradictorylocation—as
both a very private and public institution. In this course, we examine the
family and its changing nature through a sociological lens. We focus on
the diversity of family forms and family experiences, particularly across
race-ethnicity,class,andgenderlines.Weconsiderfamilytheoriesand
historicalvariationsinAmericanfamilyforms.Wealsoanalyzevarieties
inchildbearingandchildrearingexperiencesbothintheU.S.andabroad.
Prerequisite:SOC100.Same as WGS 364. Faulkner
366. Race, Ethnicity, and Health. (S)
Thecoursewillutilizeasociologicallenstoexaminetheroleofraceand
ethnicity in health outcomes, healthcare experiences, medical research,
and clinical practice. Topics will include: socio-historical perspectives
on notions of race in relation to biological difference; socio-historical
understandings of the health consequences of racialized public health
policiesandpoliticallysanctionedmedicalpractices;contemporaryracial
andethnicdisparitiesindiseasemorbidityandmortalityindicators;the
operationalizationofracialcategoriesinepidemiological,publichealth,
and biomedical research and practice; contemporary debates regarding
race and genomics; and understandings of racial and ethnic dynamics
in relation to health and medicine at the intersections of socioeconomic
class, immigration status, gender, sexuality, and other markers of social
identity. Same as AFS/PBH 366. Rondini
370 – 379, 470 – 479. Topics in Sociology. (S)
A single problem area of major importance in sociology. The content may
changefromsemestertosemester.Differenttopicsmaybetakenforcredit
more than once.
384. Urban Education. (S)
Acommunity-basedlearningcourseanalyzingissuesfacingurbanschools
from a sociological perspective, with particular attention to the role of race,
class and gender at both the macro and micro levels. Other topics include
teachers,schoolsasorganizations,thesocialpsychologicalperspectiveon
learning, the politics of curricula and instruction, accountability and other
contemporaryreformmovements.Studentsareexpectedtointegrateand
applytheirknowledgethroughworkinalocalschool.Prerequisite:SOC
100. Same as PUB 384. McClelland
SEMINARS
410. Globalization. (S)
An in-depth investigation of economic, political and cultural aspects
of globalization. Topics include migration, economic inequality,
transnational social movements, development and trade, the future of the
nation-state,urbanizationandculture/media.Studentswillbeexpectedto
writeasubstantialresearchpaper.Prerequisites:SOC100andeitherSOC
210orIST200. Hodos
425. iSoc: The Impact of Technology on Individuals,
Relationships, and Society. (S)
Technology is a part of our daily lives, yet we do not often pause to consider
the extent to which we rely on it and the ways in which it has an impact
on our identities and our lives as social beings. The goal of this course is
to explore how technology, particularly information and communication
technology,inthe21stcenturyinuencesimportantaspectsofoursocial
world, including relationships, work, education, health, music, and social
movements. We will explore key concepts, issues, dilemmas, and debates
regarding the constantly evolving, complex relationship between human
beingsandtechnology.Prerequisite:SOC100. Auster
430. Sociology of Work. (S)
Work as an activity and occupation as a socially dened role. Topics
includeoccupationalchoiceandsocialization,workandfamily,worker
alienation,deviantoccupationalbehaviorandmobility.Prerequisite:SOC
100. Auster
116 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
440. Sociology of Food. (S)
This seminar will investigate a broad and familiar topic—food—through
the analysis of its various social and institutional contexts. We will explore
how what we eat, and how we eat it, expresses our social identities and
groupmemberships;howfoodconsumptionisconnectedtoinequalities
and status anxieties; how the economic and agricultural systems that
produceandmarketfoodaffectourlives;andnallyhowfoodisbothan
object and a subject of politics. Singer
450. Comparative Racial-Ethnic Relations. (S)
In this course, we will be examining the constructedness of race and
ethnicity and racial-ethnic categories over time and space, examining
the United States (including a discussion of West Indian immigrants),
Brazil,SouthAfrica,andothercultural contexts.We will begin witha
consideration of theories of race and ethnicity focusing on the theory of
racial formation. For each of our cultures of focus, we will examine both
the historical contexts under which understandings of race and ethnicity
developed as well as more contemporary issues of race and ethnicity. We
willconsider the effectsof globalization on racial-ethnicconstructions
in the United States and elsewhere to understand the complexities
and malleability of lived racial-ethnic experiences across cultures.
Prerequisite:SOC100. Faulkner
460. Race, Gender, and Class on Campus. (S)
On college and university campuses across the country, intersecting social
identity politics have come to the fore over the course of recent decades.
This course will examine the socio-historical forces and contemporary
dynamics that inform, challenge, support, and disrupt the establishment and
cultivationofinclusivecampuscommunities.Drawingfromsociological
literature on higher education, social mobility, race, gender, socioeconomic
class,andsocialpolicy,studentswillcriticallyanalyzethecomplexissues
germanetohowAmericaninstitutionsofhighereducationoperationalize
ideasof“diversity”and“inclusion”inthe21stcentury.Same as AFS/WGS
460. Rondini
480. The Sociology of Law. (S)
Examines historical and contemporary schools of jurisprudence: the
judicial selection of precedents for legal decision-making. Particular
attention paid to conicting claims regarding the purpose and
consequencesoflaw,competingschoolsoflegalinterpretationemerging
from the writings of Marx, Durkheim and Weber and contemporary
political and social debates touching on legal rights. Individual student
papers are distributed to seminar participants for presentation and debate.
Prerequisite:Sociology320orpermissionofinstructor. Staff
490. Independent Study. (S)
Independent study directed by the Sociology staff. Permission of
chairperson.
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
371.(Un)CivilDisobedience.
372.Covid-19,Population,andSocialInequality.
471.GlobalUrbanism.
472.GenderandTransnationalActivism.
SPANISH
Professor Kimberly M. Armstrong, Chair
Kimberly M. Armstrong Professor of Spanish and Linguistics
(on leave 2020-21)
Veronika Ryjik Professor of Spanish
Carmen C. Tisnado Professor of Spanish
(on leave 2020-21)
Beatriz Caamaño Alegre Associate Professor of Spanish
Sofía Ruiz-Alfaro Associate Professor of Spanish
(on leave 2020-21)
Kathrin L. Theumer Associate Professor of Spanish
(on leave Spring 2021)
Jessica G. Cox Associate Professor of Spanish and
Linguistics
M. Elena Aldea Agudo Associate Teaching Professor of Spanish
Jialing Liu Associate Teaching Professor of Spanish
Ana Anderson Director, Spanish Language Writing
Center and Assistant Teaching
Professor of Spanish
Anne Stachura Coordinator, Spanish Community Based
Learning and Community Outreach
José Chávarry Visiting Assistant Professor of Spanish
Yohana Gil-Berrio Visiting Assistant Professor of Spanish
Mery Soto-Harner Senior Adjunct Instructor of Spanish
Spanishisthesecondmostcommonspokenlanguageinthe
world, and its increasing presence in the socioeconomic,
politicalandculturallifeoftheUnitedStatesmakesthestudy
ofSpanishavaluableprofessionaltoolandenrichingpersonal
experience for those students interested in pursuing a major or
minorinthelanguage.Spanishmajorsandminorsdevelopan
advancedleveloforalandwrittenprociencyinthelanguage
by engaging meaningfully with cultural products and practices
from the Spanish-speaking world. Furthermore, our courses
foster multicultural competence as students engage with
culturalandliterarytraditionsofSpain,LatinAmerica,andthe
UnitedStates.
A major in SpanishconsistsofninecoursesaboveSPA202.
Therequiredcoursesare:SPA221,222and321.Inaddition,
eachstudentmusttakeone300–400-levelcourseinPeninsular
LiteratureorCultureandone300–400-levelcourseinLatin
American Literature or Culture, and three other elective courses
amongthe300-400levelofferingsinthedepartment.During
theirsenioryear,studentsmusttakeoneadditional400-level
Research Seminar. In this nal course, students prepare a
substantial research project, satisfying upon its completion the
writingrequirementforthemajor.Allcoursesfor themajor
shouldbeinSpanish.
A major in Spanish includes knowledge and analysis of
language, literature, and cultures in the Spanish-speaking
world,includingSpain,LatinAmerica,andtheUnitedStates.
Westrivetohelpstudentsachieveahighdegreeofprociency
in the language by developing their ability to comprehend,
readcritically, speak andwrite in Spanishwhile developing
an appreciation and understanding of Hispanic literature and
cultures. Beginning in SPA 101, course work is conducted
entirely in the target language, and the student is encouraged
touseSpanishbeyondtheclassroom.Thedepartmentoffers
Community Based Learning opportunities in the Lancaster
Hispanic/Latinx community that further enhance students’
intercultural awareness and competence. In addition, The
Spanish Writing Center prepares students to write with
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 117
precision and detail on a variety of topics and provides those in
theupper-divisioncourseswithusefulresourcestohonetheir
writingabilitiesinSpanish.
Majors interested in pursuing independent studies should
prepare a preliminary proposal addressing the subject to be
explored and speak with the faculty member whose line of
research best aligns with the proposed topic.
A minor in SpanishconsistsofsixcoursesbeyondSPA201.
The required courses are SPA 202, 221, 222 and 321; one
300-400-level course; and one 400-level Research Seminar
course.AllcoursesfortheminormustbeinSpanish.
Majorsandminorscanalsofulllsomerequirementsduring
their study abroad experience. The department strongly
encouragesstudentstospendasemesteroryearinaSpanish-
speakingcountry,andapproximately80%ofourstudentsdo
so.StudentsareadvisedtohavecompletedSPA321beforethey
study abroad. A maximum of three courses will be available
for transfer upon approval from the department. Spanish
majors and minors regularly study in the following programs:
IFSA-Butler BuenosAires/Mendoza; IESAbroad Language
&Areas Studies in Madrid; CIEE LiberalArts program in
Sevilla;SITprograminChile(CulturalIdentity,SocialJustice
and Community Development program). We also offer our
ownprogramsduringalternatesummers.SeetheInternational
ProgramssectionoftheCatalogforfurtherinformation.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
101. Beginning Spanish I.
SPA101followsaprociency-oriented,task-basedapproachtodevelop
skills in reading, listening, speaking and writing preparing students to
expressthemselvesmeaningfullyinSpanishinsimplesituationsranging
from describing themselves and others to talking about familiar topics in
the present. The course introduces students to basic grammatical concepts
andvocabulary, aswell as theculturesof theSpanish-speakingworld.
Spanishistheprimarylanguageofinstructionandclasstimeisusedfor
interactive practice. Offered every Fall. Gil-Berrio, Liu
102. Beginning Spanish II.
Following a communicative approach, SPA 102 builds on the reading,
listening,speakingandwritingskillsdevelopedinSPA101.Thecourse
prepares students to express themselves meaningfully in Spanish and
engage in situations ranging from giving instructions to talking about the
past. The course expands on the grammatical concepts and vocabulary
studiedinSPA101whiledeepeningstudents’understandingofSpanish-
speakingcultures.Spanishistheprimarylanguageofinstructionandclass
timeisusedforinteractivepracticeinmeaningfulcontexts.Prerequisite:
SPA101orequivalent. Aldea-Agudo, Gil-Berrio, Liu, Soto-Harner
201. Intermediate Spanish I. (LS)
Following a communicative approach, SPA 201 builds on the reading,
listening, writing and speaking skills developed in SPA 101 and 102.
This course prepares students to express themselves meaningfully in
increasingly complex situations, ranging from giving detailed opinions to
hypothesizingaboutthefuture.Thecourseexpandsonthegrammatical
conceptsandvocabularystudiedinSPA101and102andfosterscritical
thinkinginavarietyofculturalcontexts.Spanishistheprimarylanguage
of instruction and class time is used for interactive practice in meaningful
contexts.Prerequisite:SPA102orplacement. Chávarry, Cox, Ryjik,
Soto-Harner, Theumer
202. Intermediate Spanish II. (H)
Following a communicative approach, SPA 202 builds on the skills
developedintheSPA101-201sequencewithanemphasisonoraland
written expression. Class discussions go beyond familiar themes to place
greater emphasis on cultural topics and current events. The course reviews
and practices key grammatical concepts preparing students to support a
personal opinion, debate ideas with others and develop hypotheses.
Spanish is the primary language of instruction and class time is used
forinteractivepracticeinmeaningfulcontexts.Prerequisite:SPA201or
placement. Aldea-Agudo, Cox, Caamaño Alegre
221. Grammar, Conversation and Composition. (H)
Oral practice directed toward greater uency in the spoken language.
Discussionandreportsofcurrenteventsandliteraryselections.Emphasis
is placed on achieving uency in the spoken language, with secondary
emphasisonreadingandwriting.Prerequisite:SPA202orplacement.
Anderson, Stachura
222. Advanced Conversation and Composition. (H)
AcontinuationofSPA221.Practicedirectedtowardgreateruencyinthe
written language. Oral discussion and written reports on current events
and contemporary cultural and literary topics. Emphasis is placed on
developingstudents’abilitytoreadandwriteinSpanish,withasecondary
emphasisonauralandoralskills.Prerequisite:SPA221orplacement.
Anderson, Stachura
291. Directed Reading.
Tutorialfor students having completed SPA221. Students who have a
special interest may arrange a tutorial with a faculty member. Enrollment
isconditionaloninstructor’spermission.
301. Spanish Grammar. (H)
An in-depth study of the more subtle nuances of Spanish grammar
including narration in the past and the subjunctive with a strong emphasis
on oral and written practice. The course includes readings about the
grammaticalsystem.Prerequisite:SPA221orSPA222
321. Introduction to Hispanic Literature and Literary Analysis. (H)
First course dedicated to reading and interpreting literature. Introduction
to the fundamentals of literature and aesthetic appreciation through careful
reading,analysisandclassdiscussionofSpanish-languagetextsfromboth
sidesoftheAtlantic.Prerequisite:SPA222orpermission.
Caamaño-Alegre, Ryjik
335. Cuentos y Cuentistas de América Latina. (H)
Cuentos y cuentistas deAmérica Latina is an exploration of the Latin
American short story in the twentieth century. This survey course focuses
on the most relevant authors, literary-cultural themes, and theoretical
approaches of the short story. The overall goals for the students in this
coursearetheunderstandingoftheshortstoryasauniqueliterarygenre
and an appreciation of the diversity of themes and authors who are
consideredrenown“cuentistas”ofthecontinent.Thiscoursefulllsthe
LatinAmericancourserequirementforSpanishmajors.Prerequisite:SPA
321. Chávarry, Ruiz-Alfaro
343. Cuentos del Río de La Plata. (H)
Argentina and Uruguay are the two countries that have produced the most
renowned short story writersin Spanish.It couldbe saidthat Jorge Luis
BorgesandJulioCortázarconstitutetheparadigmoftheHispanicshortstory
ofthesecondhalfofthe20thcenturyandlateryears.Bothwritershavesetthe
grounds for the development of the short story as a genre in Latin America.
InthiscoursewewillexploretheinuenceofBorgesandCortázarinlater
Argentineand Uruguayan writers.This course fullls the LatinAmerican
courserequirementforSpanishmajors.Prerequisite:SPA321.
Tisnado
350. Español en los Estados Unidos. (H)
IsSpanishthesameasordifferentfromotherimmigrantlanguagesinthe
United States today? What is Spanglish and why is everyone so worked
upaboutit?Howdoeslanguagerelatetoidentity?Wewillconsiderthese
questions and others through sociocultural and linguistic analysis of the
SpanishlanguageintheUnitedStates.Thiscourseincludesacommunity-
based learning (CBL) component. All students will complete weekly
activitiestoexplorehowconceptsfromclassmanifestinSpanish-speaking
communities.Prerequisite:SPA222andinstructorpermission.
Cox
118 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
370 – 379, 470 – 479. Topics in Spanish Literature,
Language or Culture.
Seminarforin-depthstudyofanauthor,themeorperiod.Topicchosento
be announced each semester.
390. Independent Study.
IndependentstudydirectedbytheSpanishstaff.Prerequisite:Permission
of department chairperson.
391. Directed Reading.
Tutorialfor students having completed SPA261. Students who have a
special interest may arrange a tutorial with a faculty member. Enrollment
isconditionaloninstructor’spermission.
401. Spanish Tutorial. (H)
Extensive reading in areas of special interest and importance to the
student. Regular conferences with tutor; critical papers. Prerequisite:
Permissionofdepartmentchairperson.
410. Research Seminar: El Boom Latinoamericano (The Latin
American Boom). (H)
The LatinAmerican Boom is a phenomenon in the history of literary
movements in the 20th Century. In this course we will read some of the
canonicalpiecesbyauthorsthatconstitutethe“boom.”Insodoing,we
will examine the characteristics of the Latin American literary boom. We
willreadAlejoCarpentier,CarlosFuentes,GabrielGarciaMárquezand
Mario Varas Llosa, as the four biggest representatives of this movement.
ThiscoursefulllstheLatinAmericancourserequirementforSpanish
majors.Prerequisite:SPA321. Tisnado
412. Research Seminar: El Exilio Hispanoamericano
(Spanish American Exile). (H)
There is a vast number of Latin Americans living mainly in several
Europeancountries,Canada,theUnitedStates,AustraliaandsomeAsian
andAfricancountries.PoliticalturmoiloftheSouthernconeinthe1970s
and80sandinCentralAmericainthe1980sand90s,however,created
generations of exiles that were political prisoners or even desaparecidos,
orwhosecloserelativesdisappearedorwerekilled.Someoftheseexiles
are writers who conveyed their experience in their works. In this course we
will read poems, short stories, and novels written by these exiles as well
as works by authors who have chosen to live abroad for other reasons. We
willexaminehowtheexperienceofexileshapesandisreectedintheir
works.FulllstheLatinAmericancourserequirementforSpanishmajors.
Prerequisite:SPA321. Tisnado
413. Research Seminar: Mujer, Nación y Amor
(Woman, Nation, and Love). (H)
Through the analysis of novels and short stories written by Latin American
female authors from different countries we will examine the construction
oftheconceptof“Nation”inLatinAmericaandthealternativethatthe
female perspective offers to this construction. We will explore how gender
roleshavedeterminedtheideaofNation.Aspartoftheanalysis,wewill
study historical and social aspects of the different countries to which the
novelsrefer.FulllstheLatinAmericancourserequirementforSpanish
majors.Prerequisite:SPA321.Same as WGS 413. Tisnado
414. Research Seminar: El Detective Hispano
(The Hispanic Detective). (H)
Whyisdetectivectionsopopular?WhatmakessomanyreadersorTV/
lm viewers want to read or watch murder or detective stories? What
does the detective genre represent? How do we understandthe surprise
endings of detective stories? What variations have appeared (especially
inLatinAmerica)sincetheclassicdetectivenovelemerged?Howcanwe
understandthesevariations?Inthisseminarwewillattempttoanswerthese
questionsthroughtheanalysisofdetectivectionfromLatinAmerica.We
willstudydetectivenovelsintheirspecicLatinAmericancontext.Fullls
theLatinAmericancourserequirement.Prerequisite:SPA321. Tisnado
415. Research Seminar: La Novela del Dictador Hispanoamericano.
(Novel of the Hispanic Dictator). (H)
“La novela del dictador” is a LatinAmerican subgenre that examines
the concept of caudillismo within the Latin American countries. In this
course we will explore how power and patriarchy have shaped the male
dictatorasacommongoverninggureinLatinAmerica.Wewillstart
reading Guatemalan Miguel AngelAsturias’ El Señor Presidente—the
rstrecognizednoveladeldictador—andexploreotherversionsofthe
genre.FulllstheLatinAmericancourserequirementforSpanishmajors.
Prerequisite:SPA321. Tisnado
422. Research Seminar: Escritoras Españolas.
(Spanish Women Writers). (H)
Through the analysis of literary works by some of the most representative
female writers, this course aims at a deep understanding of the role of
women in Spanish society, and, particularly, of the struggle of those
amongthemwhodecidedtoexpressthemselvesthroughwriting.Fullls
thePeninsularcourserequirementforSpanishmajors.Prerequisite:SPA
321.Same as WGS 422. Caamaño Alegre
425. Research Seminar: Mujeres nuevas, viejas ideas: la construcción
de la feminidad en la II República española y la dictadura franquista
(New Women, Old Ideas: The Construction of Femininity in the
Spanish II Republic and the Francoist Dictatorship). (H)
This course analyzes the existing contradictions in the construction
of femininity during the Spanish Second Republic and the Francoist
dictatorship through a variety of texts, genres, and women authors. It pays
special attention to education, children’sliterature, and the gure of the
femaleteacher,duetotheirrelevanceingenderconstruction.Fulllsthe
PeninsularcourserequirementforSpanishmajors.Prerequisite:SPA321.
Same as WGS 425. Caamaño Alegre
431. Research Seminar: Teatro del Siglo de Oro
(Golden Age Theatre). (H)
ThiscourselooksatthesignicanceofGoldenAgeTheaterinSpainthrough
an analysis of its different genres and some of its central themes. The works
ofmajorSpanishplaywrights,suchasLopedeVega,TirsodeMolina,and
CalderóndelaBarca,willbestudiedfromahistorical,ideological,social,
and literary perspective. We will also explore the main characteristics of
theEarlyModernperiodinSpain,takingintoconsiderationsocio-political,
economic, religious, philosophical and aesthetic aspects of the culture as a
contextforandasreectedinthetheater.ThiscoursefulllsthePeninsular
courserequirementforSpanishmajors.Prerequisite:SPA321. Ryjik
435. Research Seminar: Don Quijote (Don Quixote). (H)
The main objective of this course is to explore the complex artistic
universethatMigueldeCervantescreatedwhenhewroteDonQuixote
and to learn about the author, the social commentary, and historical
context, which serve as backdrops and inspirational sources for this novel.
Thecourseaimstoincreasestudents’appreciationofliteraryhistoryand
acquireobjectiveknowledgeaboutGoldenAgeSpain.Thiscoursefullls
thePeninsularcourserequirementforSpanishmajors.Prerequisite:SPA
321. Ryjik
442. Research Seminar: Prosa del siglo XIX (19th Century Prose). (H)
In this course students will read representative masterpieces of the
costumbrista, psychological, realist, regionalist, and naturalist romantic
schools, mainly the novel and the short story. This course fullls the
Peninsular course requirement for Spanish majors. Prerequisite: SPA
321. Caamaño Alegre
445. Research Seminar: Latinoamérica en escena
(Latin America on Stage). (H)
Latin America on Stage is an exploration of Latin American drama of
the twentieth century, and an introduction to the experimental and newer
trends in the genre. This survey course focuses on the most relevant
schools, sociopolitical themes, and aesthetic practices of Latin American
theater. The overall goals for the students in this course are the appreciation
of the diversity of contemporary drama in the continent, as well as the
development of critical skills and of oral and written modes of performance
in the Spanish language. This course fullls the LatinAmerican course
requirementforSpanishmajors.Prerequisite:SPA321. Ruiz-Alfaro
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 119
450. Research Seminar: Musulmanes, judíos y cristianos en la
España medieval. (H)
Athousandyearsago,Spainwasthesightofanextraordinarymulticultural
civilization.Muslims, Christians and Jews livedside by side and each
contributed to the owering of literature, art, science, and intellectual
life. The convivencia or coexistence period lasted for several centuries
andcame to form the basisof modernSpanish identity. However,this
realityhasbeenobscuredbythemythofaneternal,CatholicSpainthat
cametoserveasthecountry’s“ofcial”history.ThisResearchSeminar
exploresthenatureandcontradictionsofthisperiod.Thiscoursefullls
thePeninsularcourserequirementforSpanishmajors.Prerequisite:SPA
321. Ryjik
485. Research Seminar: La invención de Cuba
(The Invention of Cuba). (H)
Exploringthe island’scomplex encounterswith Spain,Africa,theSoviet
UnionandtheUnitedStates,thiscoursetakesaninterdisciplinaryapproach
to the study of Cuban culture, incorporating materials as diverse as
Columbus’sdiaries,Afro-Cubanfables,Castro’sspeechesandcontemporary
Cuban cinema. As we examine the historical, ethnographic, political and
literary texts that narrate the “invention” of Cuba, we will focus on the
tensionbetweentheinternalfabricof“Cubanness”andtheexternalforces
shapingCuba’snationalprocess.
ThiscoursefulllsthePeninsularcourse
requirementforSpanishmajors.Prerequisite:SPA321. Theumer
486. Research Seminar: Erotismo y modernidad
(Eroticism and Modernity).
This course explores cultural modernity in Latin America at the turn of
the 20th century, focusing on the representation of masculinity, femininity
and sexuality in literature in order to better understand the transforming
social,culturalandaestheticvaluesoftheperiod.Thiscoursefulllsthe
PeninsularcourserequirementforSpanishmajors.Prerequisite:SPA321.
Same as WGS 486. Theumer
490. Independent Study.
A major research project to be carried out under the supervision of a
member of the department.
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
MODULES 1 and 2:
SPA375.Laliteraturabarroca.
(FulllsthePeninsularcourserequirement)
SPA378.NarrativesofInsurrection.
(FulllstheLatinAmericancourse
requirement)
SPA476.ResearchSeminar.OfMurderersandOutcasts
(FulllsthePeninsularcourserequirement)
MODULES 3 and 4:
SPA37X.BusinessSpanish.
SPA37X.Españaenpantalla.
(FulllsthePeninsularcourserequirement)
SPA47X.ResearchSeminar:Literaturaytrabajo.
(FulllstheLatinAmericancourserequirement)
SPA47X.ResearchSeminar:Verdequetequieroverde
(FulllsthePeninsularcourserequirement)
2021 F&M MADRID SUMMER PROGRAM:
SPA37X.BeyondFlamencoandMatadores:Spaininthe21stCentury.
(FulllsthePeninsularcourserequirement)
SPA37X.“MadridoftheHabsburgs”andtheSpanishBaroque.
(FulllsthePeninsularcourserequirement)
THEATRE AND DANCE
Professor Pamela Vail, Chair
Rachel Anderson-Rabern Associate Professor of Theatre
Jennifer L. Conley Associate Professor of Dance
Carol C. Davis Associate Professor of Theatre
(on leave 2020-21)
Brian T. Silberman Associate Professor of Theatre
Pamela Vail Associate Professor of Dance
Jess Barbagallo Visiting Assistant Professor of Theatre
Elba Hevia y Vaca Senior Adjunct Instructor of Dance
(Spring 2021 only)
Julia Kamanda Adjunct Instructor of Theatre
Samuel Reyes Adjunct Instructor of Dance
Virginia West ’78, P’12 Resident Costume Designer and Senior
Teaching Professor of Theatre and
Dance
Robert Marenick Resident Technical Director
ThestudiesofferedbytheDepartmentofTheatreandDance
(TND) include dramatic literature, history and criticism;
design,actingandplaywriting;danceperformanceandstudies.
Courses in dramatic literature, theatre art and dance meet
distributionrequirementseitherforArts,Humanities,orNon-
Western.
THEATRE
The study of theatre at Franklin & Marshall College embraces
all aspects of dramatic art as part of a liberal arts education.
Interdisciplinary by nature, theatre studies allow all students
to develop aesthetic responses and abilities in understanding
and making dramatic works of art. The collective aesthetic and
intellectual activities that make up the work of theatre, including
reading, writing, discussing, creating and performing, help
students develop skills necessary for useful, collaborative, and
productive participation in society.
The theatre program at F&M integrates theory and practice
as students develop historical knowledge and critical thinking
skills and combine them with current practices in performance,
playwriting, directing, design, and studies in drama.
Introductory courses, as well as departmental productions, are
open to all College students, including those without previous
theatre experience.
A major in Theatre consistsofaminimumof13credits(12.5
ifProductionStudioistakenintherstsemesteroftherst
year,seebelow)andthesuccessfulcompletionofatleasttwo
crew assignments.
TND/TDF110.FoundationsofWorldTheatre.
TND/TDF121.Stagecraft.
TND/TDF186.ActingI.
TND/TDF225.CostumeDesignorTND/TDF228.Scene
DesignorTND/TDF229.LightingDesign.
TND/TDF283.PlaywritingI.
TwoTheatreStudiesCourses:(AsianTheatreandDance,
Political Theatre and Social Change, Shakespeare in
Performance, Studies in Women Playwrights/Women’s
Roles, Studies in Modern & Contemporary American
120 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
Drama, Studies in Modern & Contemporary European
Drama, African-American Theatre, Acting Rebellions,
BlackArtsMovement,SpecialTopics)
TND/TDF386.Directing.
TND/TDF385.ProductionStudio(twoat1crediteach,or
oneat1creditandoneat.5credit.Thisoptionisavailable
onlyifoneoftheProductionStudiosistakenintherst
semesteroftherstyear).
TND/TDF495.SeniorSeminar.
Two crew assignments
Two electives (Acting II (a, b, c, d), Playwriting II,
additionalTheatrestudiescoursesabovetherequirement,
oradditionalDesigncoursesabovetherequirement).
To be considered for honors in theatre, graduating seniors must
meet the College’s general requirements for honors, with a
project approved by at least two members of the theatre faculty.
Theatre majors have studied abroad in the following programs
in recent years: BritishAmerican DramaAcademy; London
DramaticAcademy;University ofLondon, RoyalHolloway
College, London; SIT, Prague, Czech Republic; IES, Milan
and London; Laban, London, Bilkent Exchange in Ankara,
Turkey; Interstudy University of Cape Town, SouthAfrica;
UniversityofGlasgow,Scotland;ASEBath,England;Queen
MaryCollegeatUniver-sityofLondon,andNationalTheatre
Instituteat theO’NeillTheatreCenter,Connecticut. See the
InternationalPrograms sectionoftheCatalogfor furtherin-
formation.
A minor in Theatre consists of six courses and one crew as-
signment:FoundationsofWorldTheatre,ActingI,Playwrit-
ingI,adesigncourse(scene,lightingorcostume),onetheatre
studies course, and one elective.
DANCE
Thedancemajor prepares dancers tomove, create,analyze,
write about and evaluate dance as an expression of the
individual, of culture and of history. It features a balanced
curriculum of performance-based and theory-based courses,
while all courses address both studio and analytical components
of topics covered.
A major in Dance consists of 11 credits as stipulated: eight
dance courses demonstrating a balance between performance
and theory work, such that four courses focus on performance
(techniqueandcomposition,listedunder“PerformanceFocus”
below)andfouronhistory,theoryandanalysis,listedunder
“AnalyticalFocus”;TND/TDF320(KinesiologyforDance)
and 331 (Dance History) must be among the analytical
courses); the TND/TDF capstone course, TND/TDF 495
(Senior Seminar); an additional two TND/TDF classes to
beselectedfrom other dance electivesor entry-level acting,
design, theatre studies, or other dance electives as approved
bytheDanceProgramdirector;and40hoursoftechnicalcrew
work. At least three courses must be taken at or above the
300-level.Studentswishingtostudyoffcampusshouldconsult
with dance faculty members and the Ofce of International
Studies. Students seeking admission to graduate school in
dance should consult with faculty advisers about additional
courses to further prepare them for that direction.
StudentsmaydevelopaJointMajorindanceandanothereld
inconsultationwiththeDancefacultyadviser.Templatesfor
such a major are currently available for dance and biology,
history, or psychology. Those students wishing to propose a
JointMajorbetweendanceandeldsotherthanthethreelisted
shouldmeetwiththeheadsoftheseprograms(danceandthe
proposedeld)todetermineanappropriateprogramofstudy.
Forjointmajors,30hoursoftechnicalcrewworkisrequired.
A minor in Dance consists of six course credits in dance: three
fromthe“PerformanceFocus”courselistandthreefromthe
“AnalyticFocus”courselist,asapprovedbythedepartment
chairperson.Danceminorsmustcomplete20hoursoftechnical
crew work.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
THEATRE MAJOR—REQUIRED COURSES
110. Foundations of World Theatre. (A) (NW)
This course is designed to foster a global understanding of the composite
art of theatre and the diverse history and cultures that have gone into its
development.Byexaminingsomeofthemajorachievementsoftheatrical
arts, from their origins to the 18th century, including performance
conventions, theories of acting, dramatic literature and criticism, and
architecture,studentswilllearntorecognizehowmeaningisconstructed
in the theatre. Anderson-Rabern
121. Stagecraft. (A)
This course is designed and intended to impart to the student a basic
understanding of the many different technical theatre processes.
Combined, these processes are “STAGECRAFT.” Course content will
include reading assignments, lectures, demonstrations and hands-on
trainingintheformoflabworkutilizingtheTheatre,DanceandFilmfall
productions as teaching and learning tools. Marenick
186. Acting I. (A)
Introduction to basic theory and practice of acting with emphasis placed on
thecriticalandcreativetheoriesandtechniquestocultivateimagination,
focus, embodied creativity, self-awareness, and script analysis. Acting
projectsincludeexercises,scenes,andmonologues.Readingandwriting
assignmentsrequired. Anderson-Rabern, Davis, Kasimow
225. Costume Design. (A)
Theprocess of designing a costumefrom analyzing thescript through
thenishedproduct.ExaminesthehistoryofWesterncostumeandother
designers’work.Projectswillallowstudentstoapplytheory,technique
and research in achieving their own designs. West
228. Scene Design. (A)
Emphasizesthedesignprocessandthevisualideaandanalyzesdesigns
and designers. Students prepare models and renderings of assigned
productions.Projectswillallowstudentstoapplytheory,techniqueand
research in achieving their own designs. Same as ART 228. West, Zura
229. Lighting Design. (A)
Explores theoretical fundamentals of light and visual perception and the
processoflightingdesignfromconceptthroughexecution.Projectswill
allowstudentstoapplytheory,techniqueandresearchinachievingtheir
own designs. Staff
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 121
283. Playwriting I. (A)
Combining workshop, lecture, readings, class discussion, and writing
exercises, this course explores the fundamentals of the art and craft
of writing for the stage. Over the course of the semester students will
continually investigate, analyze, and probe the nature and meaning of
“drama”and “theatricality,”working out denitions of words/concepts
suchascharacter,spectacle,dialogue/diction,thought,sound,andplot/
structure/actioninboththeoryandpractice.Studentswillcompletethe
rstdraftofaone-actplay. Silberman
385. Production Studio. (A)
Combines performance work in theatre with research and analysis
relevant to the given production, including the work of actors, assistant
directors,assistantdesignersandstagemanagers(1creditpersemester;
mayberepeatedforcredit).Prerequisite:permissionoftheinstructor.
Davis, Anderson-Rabern
386. Directing. (A)
A theoretical and practical investigation of the responsibilities and
techniques of the director in the theatre. Classroom exercises are
supplemented by selected readings in the history and theory of directing.
Prerequisite:FoundationsofWorldTheatre,ActingI,PlaywritingI,either
Scene/Lighting/CostumeDesign,andoneProductionStudio. Davis
495. Senior Seminar. (A)
Designedasaculminatinganalyticalandcreativeexperienceforsenior
majors, the course engages individual critical and aesthetic elements as
ameanstowardsintegratingeachstudent’sknowledgeandexperienceof
the various theatrical disciplines. Anderson-Rabern
COURSES IN ACTING AND DIRECTING
186. Acting I. (A)
Seeunder“RequiredCourses.”
287. Acting IIa: Shakespeare. (A)
Theoryandpracticeofactingtechniquesfocusedonskillsnecessaryto
understandandperformShakespeare’sclassicalverseandaction-based
acting.Studentswillcultivateanunderstandingoftheiruniquevocaland
physicalinstrument.Auditiontechniqueswillbeintroduced.
Prerequisite:TND/TDF186:ActingI. Staff
288. Acting IIb: Realism. (A)
Theory and practice of Stanislavski-based realism as explored through
script analysis and performance of selected scenes and monologues.
Studentswillcultivateanunderstandingoftheiruniquevocalandphysical
instrument.Auditiontechniqueswillbeintroduced.
Prerequisite:TND/TDF186:ActingI. Staff
289. Acting IIc: Presentational. (A)
Theoryandpracticeofactingtechniquesneededtoperformnon-realistic
scripts or to present realistic scripts in a non-realistic style. Students
will cultivate an understanding of their unique vocal and physical
instrument.SpecialemphasismaybeplacedonCommediadell’Arte,Le
Coq,bourgeoisfarce, absurdistclowning, Brechtianstyles, and others.
Prerequisite:TND/TDF186:ActingI. Staff
285. Acting IId: Special Topics. (A)
Rotatingsubjects,forexample:MusicalTheatre,ActingfortheCamera,
MimeandMaskWork,StageCombat,DevisedPerformanceorCharacter-
basedImprovisation.Prerequisite:TND/TDF186:ActingI. Staff
COURSES IN THEATRE STUDIES
250. Issues in Modern and Contemporary European Drama. (A)
AliteraryandtheatricalexaminationofrepresentativeEuropeanDrama
from the late nineteenth and early twentieth century to the present. The
focusofthiscoursecentersontheera’sspecicaestheticmovementsand
new theatrical forms. Silberman
251. Issues in Modern and Contemporary American Drama. (A)
AliteraryandtheatricalexaminationofrepresentativeAmericanDrama
fromtheearlytwentiethcenturytothepresent,emphasizingdevelopments
since1950.ThefocusofthisstudyisonhowandwhyAmericansand
American life have been depicted onstage as they have and the powerful
effect this range of depictions has had on American identity and the
American imagination. Same as AMS/ENG 251. Silberman
ELECTIVES
383. Playwriting II. (A)
An upper level writing workshop, exploring advanced concepts and
theoriesofwritingforthestage.Studentswillcompletetherstdraftofa
full-lengthplay.Prerequisite:PlaywritingIorinstructorpermission.
Same as ENG 383. Silberman
490. Independent Study. (A)
IndependentstudydirectedbytheTheatreandDancestaff.Permissionof
chairperson. Staff
COURSES IN DANCE: PERFORMANCE FOCUS
116. Introduction to Modern Dance. (A)
Thepracticeofmoderndancetechnique,integratingmovementexperience
with study of the philosophies and theories that have shaped the art and its
practice. Conley
117. Introduction to Ballet. (A)
Basic technique and theory of ballet, including the anatomical laws
governing ballet movement and investigation of the style and aesthetic of
ballettechnique.Thecourseemphasizesthepracticeofdancingaswellas
that of writing, thinking and speaking clearly about ballet. Vail
200 – 201 and 300 – 301. Dance Production Ensemble I and II. (A)
Credit for work undertaken toward performance in at least two College
productions in the course of one academic year. Students are cast in
choreographiesbyaudition.Theystudy,readandwriteabouttechniques,
theoryandhistoryappropriatetomasteryoftheworkinprogress.Class/
rehearsal and performance participation are mandatory. For TND/TDF
200and300,studentsreceivenocredit,butafullcreditisawardedforthe
completionofTND/TDF201andTND/TDF301.Prerequisites:audition
and permission of the instructor. Conley, Vail
218. Intermediate Modern Dance Technique and Composition. (A)
A continuation of modern dance technique study, with further
development of exibility, strength and efciency in movement.
Fundamentals of dance composition are also studied. Ways that dance
can communicate meaning are explored through reading, writing and
movementassignments.Prerequisite:TND/TDF116orpermissionofthe
instructor. Vail
219 and 319. Flamenco Dance I and II. (A)
Technique,rhythmsand history of Flamencodanceinastudioformat.
TND/TDF319hasaprerequisiteofTND/TDF219orpermissionofthe
instructor.
Hevia y Vaca
223. Introduction to West African Dance. (A) (NW)
African dance is an emanation of the lives of the people in this culture.
Studentslearn,practice,perform,discuss,andwriteaboutthehistorical
and cultural tradition of West African dance, with a focus on the dances of
Guinea. Peck
227. Intermediate Ballet. (A)
Continued study of ballet technique and theory. Class includes
kinesiological applications as well as historical and compositional
investigations.Thecourseemphasizesnotonlythepracticeofdancingbut
also of writing, thinking and speaking critically and clearly about ballet.
Prerequisite:TND/TDF117orpermissionoftheinstructor. Vail
244. Sound and Movement. (A)
Study of the relationship between sound and movement as it pertains
to making dance, as well as the collaborative partnership of composers
and choreographers. Through lecture, discussion, movement exploration
and composition, students examine a variety of roles that music plays
122 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
in the dance world, develop perceptive listening skills and undertake
basic rhythmic and harmonic training. Prerequisite: TND/TDF 116 or
permission of the instructor. Conley
260. Compositional Improvisation. (A)
The practice of improvisation not only as a tool for choreography, but also
as an art and performance form in itself, offering insightful experiences
and discoveries. Students learn how to be fully present, both in body
and in mind, making conscious choices and composing in the moment.
Reading, writing and movement assignments support in-class practice.
Prerequisite:TND/TDF116orpermissionoftheinstructor. Vail
317. Advanced Modern Dance, Technique and Performance. (A)
Acontinuationofmoderndancetechniquestudy,withfurtherdevelopment
ofexibility,strengthandefciencyinmovement.Investigatingindividual
dynamism and nuance in movement—aspects of performance—is an
essentialaspectofcoursework.Strategiesthatenhance,deepenanddevelop
this practice are explored through reading and writing assignments and
studiowork.Prerequisite:TND/TDF218orpermissionoftheinstructor.
Vail
330. Choreography and the Creative Process. (A)
Investigation of choreographic approaches and complex questions
of artistry, based on reading, writing, research, discussion, feedback,
movement exploration, and performance. Consideration of creativity from
various perspectives, and exploration of how we foster it for ourselves.
Prerequisite:TND/TDF116orpermissionoftheinstructor. Vail
490. Independent Study. (A)
IndependentstudydirectedbytheTheatreandDancestaff.Permissionof
program director. Staff
495. Senior Seminar. (A)
SeedescriptionunderTheatreRequiredCourses.
COURSES IN DANCE: ANALYTICAL FOCUS
220. Introduction to Movement Analysis. (A)
Introduction to concepts of movement analysis, including theoretical and
practical investigations of effort, shape, space and the body in motion.
Motif-writing, movement fundamentals, observational techniques and
history of movement analysis are introduced through lecture, discussion
and movement exploration. Staff
240. Dance and World Cultures. (A) (NW)
Astudyofnon-Westerndanceformsandtheculturalinuencesthathave
shaped them. Topics will include but are not limited to dance as a form of
oraltradition;danceasapartofreligiousritual;andculturalperceptions
of the body, beauty and gender as revealed through dance performance.
Class formats include lecture, discussion and studio sessions. Conley
244. Sound and Movement. (A)
Seetextabove,underPerformancecourses. Conley
320. Kinesiology for Dance.
Studyofthescienceofmovementasitrelatestodance,includingbasic
anatomyandphysiology,thephysicsinvolvedindancingandthemind-
body connection responsible for producing and controlling movement.
Lectures, discussions and movement focus on understanding how the body
movesandonincreasingmovementefciencytoenhanceperformance
and prevent injury. Vail
322. Re/constructing Dance. (A)
Canyoueverstepinthesamerivertwice?Thiscoursefocuseson the
replication of dance through dance revival, restaging, reconstruction,
and reimagining. Students will study various approaches and methods
for reconstructing dances, while addressing ideas about preservation,
authenticity, legacy, and ownership of this ephemeral art form. There will
be hands-on opportunities to reconstruct a historic work. Prerequisite:
TND/TDF116. Conley
330. Choreography and the Creative Process. (A)
Seetextabove,underPerformancecourses. Vail
331. History of Western Theatre Dance. (A)
Surveyof the forces that have shaped and inuenced stage dancing in
muchofWesternEuropeandtheAmericasbeginningwiththefteenth
century and moving into the contemporary periods. Class formats include
lecture, discussions and studio sessions. Conley
345. Movement and Media. (A)
This course will investigate how the moving body interacts with media
(lm,video,technology),andexplorethepotentialofthosepartnerships.
In addition to reading and writing assignments, coursework will entail
analysisofexistingworksandcreationoforiginalworks.Studentswill
collaborate in all aspects of the creative process, which includes directing,
choreography,lming,andediting.Itisrecommendedthatstudentshave
takenFLM/TDF262(MotionPictureProductionI)and/orTND/TDF116
(Intro.toModernDance),orthatstudentshavesomekindofdanceand/
orlmexperience.SameasFLM345.FormerlyTDF345. Vail
490. Independent Study. (A)
IndependentstudydirectedbytheTheatreandDancestaff.Permissionof
program director.
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020–2021
Hip Hop: Movement and Culture.
WOMEN’S, GENDER AND
SEXUALITY STUDIES
Professor Giovanna Faleschini Lerner, Chair
MEMBERS OF THE WOMEN‘S, GENDER AND
SEXUALITY STUDIES PROGRAM COMMITTEE
Meredith Bashaw Professor of Psychology
M. Alison Kibler Professor of American Studies and
Women’s, Gender and Sexuality
Studies
Giovanna Faleschini Lerner
Professor of Italian
Maria Mitchell Professor of History
Caroline Faulkner Associate Professor of Sociology
Rachel Feldman Assistant Professor of Religious Studies
Sandra Eula Lee Assistant Professor of Art
Firuzeh Shokooh-Valle Assistant Professor of Sociology
Meagan Tripp Assistant Professor of German
Seçil Yilmaz Assistant Professor of History
Shaeeda Mensah Visiting Assistant Professor of
Philosophy
Sonia Misra Visiting Instructor of Film and Media
Tanya Rawal Adjunct Assistant Professor of Women’s,
Gender and Sexuality Studies
Additional faculty not on the program committee
also contribute to this program.
Women’s,GenderandSexualityStudiesisaninterdisciplinary
program offering a major and a minor in which students study
how social constructions of gender and sexuality shape both
academic discourses and lived experiences. In their coursework
and independent research, students learn to apply feminist
theories,queertheoryandothercriticaltheoriestoreecton
women’sandmen’sexperienceswithinavarietyofcontexts:
historical, economic and cross-cultural. The courses in the
programhelpstudentstoanalyzecriticallythewaysgendered
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 123
perspectives inform fundamental concepts like race, class
or ethnicity. The major and minor augment more traditional
approaches to studying women and gender by having students
engage current scholarly inquiry into sexuality and into the
diversity of global perspectives on gender and sexuality.
A major in Women’s, Gender and Sexuality Studies consists
of 10 courses.
Thefollowingcoursesarerequired:
WGS210(Gender,SexualityandPower)
WGS415(SeniorSeminar)
Onecoursethatfocusesonfeministtheory.Pleaseconsult
with the program chair about the updated list of courses
fulllingthisrequirement.
Onecourse thatfocuses onsexuality within awomen’s
and gender studies framework, chosen from the following
group:
WGS 242 (Gender, Sexuality in Antiquity), WGS,
356 (European Sexualities), WGS 345 (Sociology of
Sexuality)orWGS355(TheBody)
Onenon-westerncourseinWGS,whichemphasizesnon-
Western cultures and societies, including indigenous,
colonial and post-colonial contexts or that offers a
substantialcross-culturalortransnationalframework.
Five courses in the majormust be ator above the300
level.
A joint major in Women’s, Gender and Sexuality Studies
consists ofeight courses:WGS 210;WGS 415; onecourse
focusing on feminist theory; four electives, including one
coursethatfocusesonsexualitywithinawomen’sandgender
studies framework; and one non-western course in WGS,
whichemphasizesnon-westernculturesandsocieties.Threeof
theelectivesforthejointmajormustbeatthe300or400level
A minor in Women’s, Gender and Sexuality Studies consists
of six courses.
Three of these are mandatory:
WGS210(Gender,SexualityandPower)
WGS415(SeniorSeminar)
Onecoursethatfulllsthe feministtheoryrequirement.
Please consult the chair’s updates to access the most
recent list of courses.
The other three are electives.
Majors and minors in the Women’s, Gender and Sexuality
StudiesProgramhavestudiedabroadinthefollowingprograms
inrecentyears:AdvancedStudiesinEnglandPrograminBath,
England;DIS,inCopenhagenorStockholm,“Prostitutionand
theSexTradeProgram”and“Gender,EqualityandSexuality
in Scandinavia”; IFSA–Butler in Buenos Aires, Argentina,
“HumanRights:Diversity,MinorityandGenderStudies”;and
SIT–Netherlands,“InternationalPerspectivesonSexualityand
Gender.”SeetheInternationalProgramssectionoftheCatalog
for further information.
The program also encourages students to consider IFSA
Argentina: Advanced Argentine Universities Program
(Concentration in Diversity, Minority and Gender Studies),
BCA Study Abroad in St.Augustine, Trinidad and Tobago,
and DIS: Prostitution and the Sex Trade Program. See the
International Programs section of the Catalog for further
information.
A list of regularly offered courses follows.Pleasenotethe
keyforthefollowingabbreviations:(A)Arts;(H)Humanities;
(S) Social Sciences; (N) Natural Sciences with Laboratory;
(LS)LanguageStudiesrequirement;(NSP)NaturalSciencein
Perspective;(NW)Non-WesternCulturesrequirement.
117. Women/Science. (NSP)
This course will introduce students to the role of women in science
bothas participantsin thecreation of scientic knowledge, and as the
subjects of biological study of the female body. Topics will include sexual
development, pregnancy, childbirth, and menopause, as well as education
andprofessionalachievementinthesciences.Studentswillexaminethe
contributions of women scientists through the lens of feminism, with an
emphasis on the barriers women have faced historically and those that
remain today. Same as NSP 117. Blair
119. Biology and Social Constructs. (NSP)
This course will introduce students to the fundamental biological
processes of inheritance and sex determination in living organisms and
examinetheinterplayoftheseconceptsinour(mis)understandingoftwo
social constructs commonly attributed to a biological basis: gender and
race. Topics will include diversity of sexual mating systems, mechanisms
of sex determination, concepts of genetic transmission and ancestry,
pedigreeanalysisandhumanpopulationgenetics.Studentswillcritically
evaluate studies that apply and extend these concepts and their intersection
with social constructs. Same as NSP 119. Mena-Ali
185. Impact of Reproductive Technology. (NSP)
This course will examine how reproductive technology has altered
the way humans create and view family. Advances in medicine and
manufacturing in the past century have produced unprecedented levels
of control in preventing or producing offspring. What are the modern
ways to make a baby? How have these options altered our views of
familyplanningandparenting?Whatistheeffectonthelegal,social,and
spiritualstandingofthechild(orpotentialchild)?Howdoestheimpactof
modernreproductivepracticesvarywithdifferentreligionsandcultures?
Same as NSP 185. Moore
210. Gender, Sexuality and Power. (S)
Focusingonissuesrelatedtowomen’sexperiencesinthecontemporary
United States and in other societies around the globe, this broad core
courseinwomen’s,genderandsexualitystudiesexploresbasicconcepts,
methodsofinquiry,empiricalstudiesandsymbolicinterpretationsfroma
feministperspective.WGS210isrequiredfortheWGSSmajororminor
andJointMajors.StudentswhoareconsideringaWGSSmajororminor
orJointMajorareurgedtotakeWGS210earlyintheircollegecareer. 
Kibler
212. Sex, Lies, and Shakespeare. (H)
Disguise & lies & sex, swearing & pairing, sins & twins, fear & a
bear.ShakespearebroughtallthistotheLondonstage,andthiscourse
brings it to U. The basic course goals: to understand and appreciate
the achievements of Shakespeare’s written poetry and drama and to
comprehend the interpretive role you play, and the interpretive role
mixed-media play, in the thematics of sex and lying. Meets pre-1800
124 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
Englishmajorrequirement.Same as ENG 212 Goeglein
213. Black American Film. (A)
AnintroductiontolmstudiesusingblacklmasagenreofHollywood
and independent lm. Covers the work of Oscar Michaux through the
“blaxploitation”lmsofthe1970sandbeyond.Exploreslmsassocial
commentaryintheirparticularhistoricalcontexts.Particularattentionis
given to screen analysis of segregation, sexuality, class differences and
more. Same as AFS/AMS/FLM 213. Willard
231. Women Writers I. (H)
AstudyoftheexperiencesofwomenaspresentedinselectedBritishand
AmericanliteraturefromtheMiddleAgesthroughthe19thcentury,as
presented from a variety of cultural perspectives. We will consider various
readings of the texts, including those that emphasize feminist theory
and historical context. Among others, we will be reading Jane Austen,
Aphra Behn, Anne Bradstreet, the Brontës, George Eliot and Mary
Wollstonecraft. Same as ENG 231. Hartman
233. Women Writers II. (H)
Astudyof the changing world ofAmerican andBritish womenin the
20th century as portrayed by women writers. The critical emphasis will
be on feminist theory and the political, social and cultural background of
the times. Among others, we will read works by Margaret Atwood, Toni
Morrison,SylviaPlath,AdrienneRich,AnneSexton,EdithWhartonand
Virginia Woolf. Same as ENG 233. Hartman
242. Gender and Sexuality in Antiquity. (H)
The aim of this course is to explore the cultural constructions of gender and
sexualityintheancientsocietiesofGreeceandRome.Wewillapproach
questionssuchasthestatusofwomenandthecontextofmisogyny,the
societalroleofsame-sexrelations,thepresentationandvisualizationof
sexuality, desire and the body. We will examine archaeological, visual
and literary evidence through assigned reading and class discussion.
This interdisciplinary approach will allow us to gain an understanding of
genderandsexualityinantiquityandwillofferinsightsintotheshaping
of our own cultural and personal attitudes. Same as CLS 242. Meyers
244. Gender in the Economy. (S)
An analysis of the role gender has historically played and continues to
play in the economy, both within and outside of the labor market. Topics
include the historical conditions under which dominant gender ideals
emerged, the value of unpaid work and national accounting, occupational
segregation, labor market discrimination and feminist economic theory.
Gender is considered as it interacts with other identities such as race
and sexual orientation. Economic and interdisciplinary approaches are
used. Prerequisite: ECO 100 and 103, or permission of the instructor.
Same as ECO 244. Nersisyan
247. History of Fashionable Dress. (A)
A survey of the history of fashionable dress in Europe and America from
theRenaissancetothepresent,examiningmen’sandwomen’sclothing
in the context of artistic, historical, and cultural change in the modern
period.Thiscoursewillbedividedintothreeunits:Chronology;Object/
Theory;andInterpretation.Studentswillselectaninterpretativecontext
inwhichtosituatetheirnalproject:culturalhistory,arthistory,orgender
studies.Prerequisite:ART103,ART241,WGS210,orpermissionofthe
instructor. Same as ART 247. Rauser
250. Witchcraft and Sorcery in a Global Context. (S)
Inthiscoursewewillconsider how thecategoriesof“witchcraft”and
“sorcery” have been used in Anthropology, both to describe mystical
acts(particularlymysticalattacks)andasanethnographicmetaphorto
discuss the pressures of communal life for individuals. Course content
willconsistof,butnotbelimitedto,witchcraftandsorceryasa“social
strain gauge,” witchcraft and sorcery as expressions of symbolic power,
the gendered name of witchcraft and sorcery, as well as witchcraft and
sorceryunderconditionsofWestern-stylemodernity.
Same as AFS/ANT/RST 250. Bastian
256. African American Literature I:
Declarations of Independence and the Narratives of Slavery (H)
This course covers African American narratives of slavery from the
colonial period through the early 19th Century. The Declaration of
Independence, the founding narrative of American selfhood and agency,
providesthe discursivebackground of the course.The Declarationdid
notmentionSlavery,therebyerasingSlaves’experiencesintheAmerican
narrative about peoplehood. We will engage the logic, rhetoric and
contradictionsofthedocumentbypluralizing “declaration” to broaden
andthen examinehow Slaves’ oral narratives (the Spirituals, etc.) and
texts(byPhyllisWheatley, Oladuah Equaino,etc.)weregurative and
literal declarations of independence that simultaneously question the
Declaration’sprinciplesandideologyandafrmitstranscendentmeanings
inthewriters’discoursesonSlavery,Blackhumanityandselfhood,race,
theAmericanDream,etc.Same as AFS/AMS/ENG 256. Bernard
257. African American Literature II:
Meaning of the Veil and African American Identity. (H)
In The Souls of Black Folk (1903), the African American writer W.
E. B. Du Bois introduces two concepts—the “veil” and “double-
consciousness”—to explain the black experience in America. This
course, which coversAfricanAmerican literature from Reconstruction
totheHarlemRenaissance,theBlackAesthetic/BlackPowermovement
andbeyond, willexamine the recurrence of the veil metaphor(and its
synonyms)generallyandengageDuBois’sformulationoftheconcept
specicallyintheculturalandhistoricalcontextsthatframethisperiod’s
literature.Wewillexplorehowwriters(PaulLaurenceDunbar,Langston
Hughes,ZoraNealeHurston,RalphEllison,ToniMorrison,etc.)engage
topics(race,gender,music,identity,etc.)thatreinforce,expandand/or
complicateDuBois’smetaphor.Same as AFS/AMS/ENG 257. Bernard
282. Women, Culture and Development. (NW) (S)
Roleofgenderindifferentculturesacrossthenon-industrializedworld
and impact of economic development on the position of women and
genderrelationsinthesesocieties.Women’scontributiontoeconomicand
social change and the extent to which conventional methods of analysis
in development economics can be applied to their situations. Examination
of the development of the “Third World woman” in the development
literature.Prerequisite:ECO100and103,orpermissionoftheinstructor.
Same as ECO 282. Zein-Elabdin
303. Hormones and Behavior. (N)
Like many other animals, humans must successfully navigate stressful
situations, sex, and other social interactions to survive and reproduce.
Howdohormonesenable,regulate,ormodifybehaviorinthesesituations?
Howdobehaviorandtheenvironmentinturnaffecthormonefunction?
Dotheseeffectsdifferacrossspecies?We’lldevelopanunderstandingof
theendocrinesystem’sorganizationandactivationeffectsbyexamining,
evaluating, and conducting research on humans and other animals.
Prerequisites:PSY100orBIO110;andPSY230orBIO210orSOC302.
Same as PSY 303. Bashaw
310. American Masculinities. (S)
This course explores the importance of masculinity and its various
constructions in American history and the contemporary period. We begin
by examining the theoretical and historical foundations of American
masculinities.We will focus on key ways in which men (and women)
sustain and recreate masculinities. Topics include manhood and the
workplace, politics, sports, courtship, fatherhood, military, immigration
and ethnicity, crime and prisons and religion.
Same as AMS/HIS 310. Deslippe
320. American Women and Social Movements Since 1900. (S)
An interdisciplinary study of the various ways women have participated
in American society and politics. Topics include the suffrage movement,
modernmodesofpoliticalparticipationandtheNewDealandWorldWar
II. Critical analysis of the meaning of feminism and special attention to
thepost-1945period.Same as AMS/HIS 320. Deslippe, Stevenson
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 125
345. Sociology of Sexuality. (S)
Thiscourseexaminestheideathatsexisnotanaturalact;instead,sexand
human sexuality are socially constructed. We will examine how power—in
a variety of forms—is at play in our social and cultural understandings and
experiences of sex and sexuality. We will examine a variety of approaches
to the study of sexuality as we consider sex, gender and sexual orientation,
sexualrelationships,thebody,race/ethnicity,thecommodicationofsex,
reproductionandcontraception,andsexualviolence.Prerequisite:SOC
100. Same as SOC 345. Faulkner
350. Sociology of Gender. (S)
Thiscourseintroducesstudentstomajortheoriesandndingsinsociology
of gender, including the incorporation of global/transnational concerns.
The course focuses on the constraints that the social construction of
gender imposes on men, women,and LGBTQI/non-binary/gender non-
conforming individuals, and helps students develop a critical analysis
of gender as a social institution. It examines the intersections of gender
with race, class, and sexuality, among other social locations, incorporating
postcolonial/decolonial, queer, feminist, and science and technology
theories.Prerequisite:SOC100orWGS210.Same as SOC 350.
Shokooh Valle
352. Madonnas, Mothers, & Virgins: Medieval Religious Women. (H)
This course will examine a range of texts written about, for, and—
especially—by women, and will attempt to unravel how gender and
religion reect and shape one another from the twelfth through the
fteenthcenturies.Wewilllookatearlysaints’livesandspiritualguides
written for female audiences, letters written by women theologians,
hagiographic romances, miracle plays, and narratives of female spiritual
revelation.Meetspre-1800requirementintheEnglishmajor.(Pre-1800).
Same as ENG/LIT 352. Huber
354. Gender and Race in Ethnic Studies Film.
“GenderandRaceinEthnicStudiesFilm”examinestheconceptofEthnic
Studiesasan educationalcurriculumemergingfrom social movements.
In an effort to understand Ethnic Studies, we will explore the media
productionsbyandaboutpeopleofcolorinrelationtoU.S.socialunrests
ofthelate-1960s,1970s,andtheaftermathofthesedecades.Wewillfocus
onthreegroups:U.S.Latinos,AfricanAmericans,andAsianAmericans.
Same as AFS/AMS/FLM 354. Villegas
355. The Body. (S)
Examines contemporary theoretical and ethnographic discussions relating
to the human body. Topics covered will include social constructions of
gender, reproduction and reproductive technologies, cultural ideologies of
sexuality,socialinscriptionsonthebody,“thebodyinextremis,”cultural
depositions of the corpse and what some might call hybrid, cyborg or
evenvirtualbodies.Prerequisite:ANT200orpermissionoftheinstructor.
Same as ANT 355. Bastian
356. European Sexualities. (S) (E)
Explores the transnational history of European sexualities from the 18th
century through the present with special focus on the intersection of sexuality
withpoliticsandFoucauldian,performance,queer,anddisabilitytheories.
Importantthemes,includinggenderedcitizenship,dictatorship,democracy,
dechristianization,and racialized sexualities, provide a framework within
which specic topics such as female political activity, prostitution,
homosexuality, bisexuality, pornography, the new woman, pronatalism,
sexual revolution and fertility are examined
Same as HIS 356. Mitchell
364. Sociology of the Family. (S)
Sociologistsarguethatthefamilyoccupiesacontradictorylocation—as
both a very private and public institution. In this course, we examine the
family and its changing nature through a sociological lens. We focus on
the diversity of family forms and family experiences, particularly across
race-ethnicity,class,andgenderlines.Weconsiderfamilytheoriesand
historicalvariationsinAmericanfamilyforms.Wealsoanalyzevarieties
inchildbearingandchildrearingexperiencesbothintheU.S.andabroad.
Prerequisite:SOC100.Same as SOC 364. Faulkner
365. Queens, Goddesses and Archaeology. (S)
This course will consider how archaeologists examine gender and
interpret the roles of women in ancient subsistence economies, politics
and religions. To achieve this goal we will discuss the roles of women in
egalitarianandstratiedsocietiesandexploretheactionsandstatusofboth
high-ranking and everyday women in the ancient world. Prerequisites:
ANT100,ANT102,ANT200orpermissionoftheinstructor.
Same as ANT 365. M. A. Levine
366. Contemporary Queer Poetry & Poetics. (H)
What does Whitman mean by “manly love”? Does it matter if Nikky
Finneyidentiesasqueerifhersyntaxdoessoonherbehalf?Isqueer
theoryapoeticsofsexuality?Orispoeticsaqueertheoryofliterature?
Thiscoursewillexaminethecurrentstateofqueerpoetryandavariety
of critical theories as they pertain to the contemporary literary landscape.
We will read, discuss, research, interview, experiment alongside, and
write about poems & poets published within the last century in an attempt
tobetterunderstandhowbothqueerandtrans poetics haveirreparably
affectedthedirectionofAmericanpoetry.SameasENG366. Day
367. Women and Gender in Italian Literature. (H)
This course focuses on Italian women writers from the nineteenth
century to the present.Authors may includeAleramo, Banti, Morante,
Ginzburg, Maraini, and Ferrante, among others. Literary analyses of
the texts will be placed in the context of Italian cultural history, the
history of Italian feminism and post-feminism, and the tradition of
Italian feminist philosophy, allowing for a deeper understanding of
the ever-changing role of gender roles and dynamics in modern Italy.
TaughtinItalian.Prerequisite:ITA310orpermissionoftheinstructor.
Same as ITA 367. Faleschini Lerner
383. Sex, Lies and Book Burning:
Life and Work of Wilhelm Reich. (S)
Upper level seminar: A survey of the life and work of famous
psychoanalyst, controversial laboratory scientist Wilhelm Reich. The
coursereviewsawiderangeofReich’swritingsfrompsychology,political
science,tobiologyandphysics(95%primarysourcereadings).Wealso
surveythehistoricalcontextofAustriaandGermany1918–1939andthe
U.S.1939–1957.FinallywelookindepthatReich’sclashwiththeU.S.
governmentoverwhetherscienticworkcanbejudgedinacourtoflaw
andthegovernment-orderedburningofhisbooksin1956and1960.
Same as HIS/STS 383. Strick
385. Gender at Work. (S)
What is women’s work? How has it changed over the course of
Americanhistory?Howisitvalued?Thiscourseexplorestheworldof
women’sworkbycomparingitto“men’s”work.Wewillfocusonwage
earning, caregiving, sex work, housework, “double days” and “glass
ceilings.” We will especially consider women’s strategies of survival
and resistance from various demographic, racial, and ethnic groups.
Same as AMS/BOS 385. Deslippe
407. Selected Studies in Latin American History. (NW) (S)
Readings and research in problems in the political, economic, social,
andculturalhistoryofLatinAmerica.Seminartopicsinclude“Sexand
SexualityinLatinAmerica.”Same as HIS 407. Shelton
413. Research Seminar: Mujer, Nación y Amor (Woman, Nation, and
Love). (H)
Through the analysis of novels and short stories written by Latin American
female authors from different countries we will examine the construction
oftheconceptof“Nation”inLatinAmericaandthealternativethatthe
female perspective offers to this construction. We will explore how gender
roleshavedeterminedtheideaofNation.Aspartoftheanalysis,wewill
study historical and social aspects of the different countries to which the
novelsrefer.ThiscoursefulllstheLatinAmericanliteraturerequirement
for the Spanish major. Prerequisite: SPA 321. Taught in Spanish.
Same as SPA 413. Tisnado
415. Women’s, Gender and Sexuality Studies Senior Seminar.
This capstone seminar is a culmination of students’ work in WGSS.
StudentsinthecoursewilldelveintocontemporarydebatesinWGSS,
connectfeministtheorytorecentcontroversies,andcompleteasignicant
independent research project related to particular course themes.
Kibler, Deslippe
126 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
420. Public Health Research:
Pregnancy Outcomes in American Women. (S)
IIn this interdisciplinary seminar, students explore women’s health
and reproductive outcomes while learning how to conduct meaningful
research on public health topics. Students will consider complex
issues related to conducting research, then explore known and/or
hypothesizedrelationshipsbetweenbehavioral,biological,sociopolitical,
psychological, and environmental variables and pregnancy outcomes.
Studentswillultimatelydesignresearchcenteredonpregnancyoutcomes
inAmericanwomen.Prerequisites:PBH354orPBH351andonecourse
fromBIO210,MAT216,BOS250,orPSY230andpermission.
Same as PBH/PUB/STS 420. Everett
425. Mujeres nuevas, viejas ideas: la construcción de la feminidad en
la II República española y la dictadura franquista. (H)
This course analyzes the existing contradictions in the construction
of femininity during the Spanish Second Republic and the Francoist
dictatorship through a variety of texts, genres, and women authors. It
paysspecialattentiontoeducation,children’sliterature,andthegureof
thefemaleteacher,duetotheirrelevanceingenderconstruction.Fullls
the Peninsular literature requirement. Prerequisite: SPA321.Taughtin
Spanish.Same as SPA 425. Caamaño Alegre
460. Race, Gender, and Class on Campus. (S)
On college and university campuses across the country, intersecting social
identity politics have come to the fore over the course of recent decades.
This course will examine the socio-historical forces and contemporary
dynamics that inform, challenge, support, and disrupt the establishment
and cultivation of inclusive campus communities. Drawing from
sociological literature on higher education, social mobility, race, gender,
socioeconomicclass,andsocialpolicy,studentswillcriticallyanalyzethe
complex issues germane to how American institutions of higher education
operationalizeideas of “diversity” and “inclusion” in the 21st century.
Same as AFS/SOC 460. Rondini
462. Toni Morrison. (H)
This seminar will focus on Toni Morrison as a major African American
andAmericanwriter.WewillexamineMorrison’soeuvreinbothction
and criticism, and explore how her aesthetics and vision, and her analyses
of them, are informed by historical contexts and their racial, sexual,
gendered, class, etc. impulses. Permission of the instructor required.
Same as AFS/ENG 462. Bernard
467. Virginia Woolf. (H)
Inheressay“ModernFiction,”VirginiaWoolfwrote,“letusrecordthe
atoms as they fall upon the mind in the order in which they fall, let us trace
the pattern, however disconnected and incoherent in appearance, which
each sight or incident scores upon the consciousness.” This proposition
reects Woolf’s turn from realism to a modernist style devoted to
interiority,impressionism,wordplay,andwhatshecalled“breakingthe
sentenceandthesequence.”Atthesametime,Woolf,anardentfeminist,
wrote compellingly about the politics and culture of the early twentieth
century. This course will consider Woolf’s major works alongside
excerpts from the letters and diaries, charting her formal innovations as
wellashersocialcritiques.Throughanexaminationofliterarycriticism,
wewillexplorethemaintendenciesinWoolfstudiesfromthe1970sto
the present day. Same as ENG 467. Abravanel
480. Issues Facing Organizations in the 21st Century. (S)
This course is a senior seminar for majors. Various course sections use
adifferentmulti-disciplinary“theme.”Allsectionsrequirethatstudents
undertake a semester long project as the culmination of their academic
program. Projects may be individual or group based. Contemporary
issuesareusedtocreatediscussionand debate.Permissiontoenrollis
determinedbythestudent’sadviserandtheinstructor.Same as BOS 480.
Young
486. Research Seminar: Erotismo y modernidad
(Eroticism and Modernity).
This course explores cultural modernity in Latin America at the turn of
the 20th century, focusing on the representation of masculinity, femininity
and sexuality in literature in order to better understand the transforming
social,culturalandaestheticvaluesoftheperiod.Thiscoursefulllsthe
LatinAmericanliteraturerequirementforSpanishmajors.Prerequisite:
SPA321.Same as SPA 486. Theumer
490. Independent Study.
Permissionofchairperson. Staff
TOPICS COURSES EXPECTED TO BE OFFERED
IN 2020-2021
TheBodyinMiddleEastHistory.
FeministPhilosophy.
Gender in American Music.
IntroductiontoPhilosophyofLoveandSex.
LGBTQandHumanRights.
RaceandGenderinAmericanSports.
Race,GenderandtheLaw.
Violence Against Women.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 127
Educational Support Services
ACADEMIC ADVISING
Franklin & Marshall College emphasizes an approach to
advisingthattakesseriouslytheCollege’smissiontofosterin
its students a love of learning, to educate them about the natural,
social and cultural worlds in which we live, and to encourage
themtobecomecitizenswhocontributeproductivelytotheir
professions, communities and world. Academic advisers guide
students as they learn to make decisions about intellectual
interests, course selection, a Major and ultimately, the meaning
of a liberal arts education.
Faculty members from across the curriculum advise
incoming students. Faculty in the academic departments
advise their majors as well as offer advice to all students about
pursuing graduate study in their disciplines. The College
viewsacademicadvisingasanaturalextensionofthefaculty’s
teachingrole,anditissupplementedandsupportedbyDons
andCollegeHouseDeans,whoworkwithintheCollegeHouse
System. Health professions advising and legal professions
advising are also available. More information about these
special advising options can be found at
www.fandm.edu/academics/student-resources/academic-advising.
ADDITIONAL EDUCATIONAL
OPPORTUNITIES AND
RESOURCES
The College has found many ways to recognize, encourage
and reward special talents and to help students extend their
academic interests into the realms of research, the arts,
internships, educational travel, public service and employment.
Someofthemostprominentopportunitiesaredescribedbelow.
STUDENT-FACULTY COLLABORATION
Summer Research Scholars Program
Thissummerresearchprogram,administeredbytheOfceof
theProvostandDeanoftheFaculty,wasestablishedin1984
by William M. and Lucille M. Hackman. Since that time,
other funds have been made available for additional students
to benet from the Summer Research Scholar experience.
This program brings students and faculty together to work
on challenging, high-level research projects that rangefrom
astrophysics and chemistry to sociology and art. Awarded
students receive stipends for 5, 8, or 10-week periods of
full-time research to experience rst-hand the excitement
and challenge of collaborating with professors in advanced
scholarly work. The program is open to all current Franklin
&Marshall students. Participants must benominatedbythe
faculty members with whom they wish to work. Typically,
about 85 students and 50 faculty members participate each
summer. Applications must be made by faculty sponsors to the
Committee on Grants in early February.
Leser and Nissley Student/Faculty Partnership
TheLeserandNissleyawards,establishedin1993byWalter
and Martha Leser and J. Richard and Anna Ruth Nissley,
support research conducted by students in true partnership
withfacultymembers.Leserawards(inthenaturalsciences)
andNissleyawards(inotherdisciplines)ofupto$1,000are
awardedseveraltimesannually;bothareadministeredbythe
Ofceofthe Provost andDean ofthe Faculty.Applications
must be made to the Committee on Grants during specied
grant periods.
Preceptorships
A number of upperclass students are invited by faculty to serve
asstudentpreceptorsincoursesforrst-yearstudents.More
details about these opportunities may be obtained from the
OfceoftheProvost.
Production in the Arts
Each year, there are numerous productions in venues such as
the Green RoomTheatre, Barshinger Centerfor Performing
Arts and theRoschel PerformingArts Center, sponsoredby
theDepartmentofTheatre,DanceandFilm,theDepartment
ofMusicandtheDepartmentofArtandArtHistory.Students,
includingnon-majorsintheseareas,havetheopportunityto
perform or to become involved in working behind the scenes
to help produce these performances and exhibits.
Other Partnerships
Manyotheracademic-yearandsummerresearchpositionsare
available through departmental and faculty grants.
THE OFFICE OF STUDENT
AND POST-GRADUATE DEVELOPMENT
As part of its mission to provide a world-class liberal arts
education that prepares students for success beyond college,
Franklin & Marshall has transformed the traditional concept
of“careerservices”bycreatingtheOfceofStudentandPost-
Graduate Development (OSPGD), which engages students
beginning in their rst year and continues to support them
well after graduation with ongoing career advisement and
professional development opportunities along with training
on critical life skills such as networking, nancial literacy,
leadership and mindfulness. In so doing, OSPGD helps
students and alumni:
•Recognize and articulate their unique strengths,
challengesandexperiences;
• Identify and secure opportunities congruent with their
identities,valuesandgoals;and
•Navigateandnegotiatetheexpectationsofthechanging
world of work and life.
THE WARE INSTITUTE
FOR CIVIC ENGAGEMENT
The Ware Institute for Civic Engagement provides students
with a variety of opportunities to explore what it means to be
a thoughtful and active member of a community by meeting
128 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
them where they are in their development of sense of self and
challenging them to make a difference. The Ware Institute for
CivicEngagementwasfoundedinNovember2000through
a generous giftfromTrusteePaulW. Ware ’72. Today,the
Ware Institute challenges the civic imagination of Franklin &
Marshall College students so as to instill in them a deeper
desire to seek out opportunities to tackle community issues,
contribute meaningfully to their communities and embrace
their own potential to help shape the common good while
both a student and post-graduation. Offering everything
from traditional community service, community-engaged
opportunities through classroom collaborations and more
structured program offerings, the Ware Institute for Civic
Engagementconnectstoday’sstudentswithavarietyofways
to get involved in the broader Lancaster community.
CENTER FOR LIBERAL ARTS
AND SOCIETY (CLAS)
The Center for LiberalArts & Society (CLAS)’s programs
endeavor to provide opportunities for faculty, students and
professional staff, as well as the general public, to explore the
connections between our academic studies in the liberal arts
andsciencesandtheculturalandsocialquestionsthatconfront
us all.
CLASprovidesanintellectualspaceforourcollectiveand
open-endedconsiderationofpressingcivicchallenges,suchas
increasing democratic participation, the ethics and politics of
war and peace, the complex intersection of science and public
policy, and the relevance of the liberal arts to society.
Throughoursignatureprograms,lectures,andcolloquia,
CLASaimstoenrichthecurriculum,fosterinterdisciplinary
collaboration, and to demonstrate the critical relevance of
liberallearningtoourlivesascitizensinademocracy.
THE FLOYD INSTITUTE
FOR PUBLIC POLICY
Themissionofthe Floyd Institute is toimprove the quality
of public policy through research, training, and constructive
interactions between the academic and policy-making
communities. The Floyd Institute is a gathering place for
faculty, policy makers, students and the public to discuss policy
issues via colloquia, conferences, lectures, workshops, and
research.TheFloydInstitute’smissioniscarriedoutthrough
theworkoftheCenterforOpinionResearchandtheCenterfor
PoliticsandPublicAffairs.
The Center for Opinion Research seeks to provide
empirically sound research solutions and opportunities
for academic and public policy researchers and the local
community. The Center designs innovative and thoughtful
researchsolutionstohelpitsclientsanswerimportantquestions
and make strategic decisions. It also aims to produce and
disseminate information that supports learning by students,
researchers and the general public. The Center designs and
conducts the Franklin & Marshall College Poll, the oldest
Pennsylvaniastatewidepollexclusivelydirectedandproduced
in the state.
The Center for Politics and Public Affairs fosters the
study of politics and public policy. It seeks to stimulate
discourse on political and policy issues. Its activities include
fellowships and internships, public policy and political
research, publishing research on policy and political topics and
overseeingtheFranklin&MarshallCollegePoll.Thecenter
also hosts political debates and policy fora by having political
leaders and policy experts on campus to address and interact
with members of the F&M community.
THE WRITING CENTER
The Writing Center provides assistance for students working
on college writing assignments and oral presentations through
one-on-one tutorials and, at the request of faculty, in-class
writing workshops. The Center’s trained staff of student
writing assistants, mostly juniors and seniors, represents a wide
rangeofmajorsandcareerinterests.Studentsshouldprepare
for a conference by bringing all available materials: any data
beingused,arough plan or formaloutline, a few sketched-
out paragraphs, a complete paper, or even just the assignment
itself. Writing assistants can help you at any stage of the writing
process!Althoughassistantswillnoteditapaper,theycanhelp
writersrecognizeerrorsandmakethenecessarychanges.
COOPERATIVE PROGRAMS
OF STUDY
ENGINEERING
A liberal arts education from Franklin & Marshall College
(F&M) provides students with exceptional problem-solving,
critical thinking and communication skills while they pursue
coursework across the humanities, social, and natural sciences.
ThisbroadacumenuniquelyequipsF&Mstudentstoexcelin
the engineering professions, which require multidisciplinary
approaches to complex technological and humanistic problems.
Recognizingthestrongfoundationthataliberalartseducation
provides for the engineering eld, Columbia University’s
Fu FoundationSchool of EngineeringandApplied Science,
Washington Universityat St. Louis’s School of Engineering
&AppliedScience,RensselaerPolytechnicInstituteandCase
WesternReserveUniversity’sCaseSchoolofEngineeringhave
partnered with F&M on dual degree programs, which allow
F&MstudentstoreceivebothaBachelorofArtsintheirmajor
ofchoicefromF&M,aswellasaBachelorofSciencefrom
theengineeringinstitutioninaspecicengineeringdiscipline
(e.g. Biomedical Engineering, Chemical Engineering, Civil
Engineering, Computer Engineering, Electrical Engineering,
IndustrialEngineering&OperationsResearchandMechanical
Engineering) via a 3/2 (three years at F&M and two at the
partnerinstitution)or4/2(fouryearsatF&Mandtwoatthe
partnerinstitution)arrangement.
FormoreinformationaboutF&M’sdualdegreeprograms
in engineering and opportunities in engineering which F&M
students canpursue, please visithttp://www.fandm.edu/ospgd/
engineering-professions-advisingorcontactF&M’sEngineering
ProfessionsAdviserattheOfceofStudentandPost-Graduate
Developmentat717-358-4084or[email protected].
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 129
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
MANAGEMENT AND POLICY
TheCollegeoffersacooperativeprogramwithDukeUniversity
in the areas of environmental science, management and policy.
Thestudentearnsthebachelor’sandmaster’sdegreesinve
years, spending three years at Franklin & Marshall and two
years in the Nicholas School ofthe Environmentand Earth
SciencesatDuke.
The Bachelor ofArtsdegree isawarded by Franklin &
Marshall upon successful completion of one year of study at
Duke,providedthat32 credits are earned. Dukeawards the
professionaldegreeofMasterofForestry(M.F.)orMasterof
EnvironmentalManagement(M.E.M.)toqualiedcandidates
at the end of the second year. The student must complete a total
of60unitsatDuke.
The M.F. degree is in Forest Resource Management.
Eight options are available for the M.E.M. degree: Coastal
Environmental Management; Conservation Science and
Policy;EcosystemScienceandManagement;Energyandthe
Environment; Environmental Health and Security; Global
EnvironmentalChange;EnvironmentalEconomicsandPolicy;
orWaterandAirResources.
Concurrent degrees may be earned alongside the M.F.
or M.E.M. in Business (M.B.A.), Law (J.D.), Public Policy
(M.P.P.), or Teaching (M.A.T.) through formal agreements
between the NicholasSchool of theEnvironment andEarth
SciencesandotherprofessionalschoolsatDuke.
Alternatively, some students prefer to complete the
requirementsforthebachelor’sdegreeatFranklin&Marshall
beforeenteringDuke.Therequirementsforthese4-2students
areessentially the sameasthoseforstudentsenteringDuke
after the junior year.
Interested students should consult the coordinator, Dr.
TimothySipe,AssociateProfessor of Biology,earlyintheir
careers at Franklin & Marshall, about appropriate course
scheduling,sothatthenecessaryprerequisitesforadmission
toDukecanbecompleted.Additionalinformationaboutthe
Dukeprogramisavailableatwww.nicholas.duke.edu.
Academic Policies
and Procedures
ACADEMIC HONESTY
Membership in the Franklin & Marshall community involves
obligations of personal and academic integrity, and members
of our community are bound by ideals of scholarly conduct and
intellectual honesty. We expect our students to be honest and
forthright in representing their work and its origins. Adherence
to these norms is at the core of our academic mission and
isnecessary for the educationalbenets weseek toconvey.
Conversely, violations undermine our shared purpose.
It is the responsibility of faculty members to explain the
importance of academic integrity in their courses. This can
include, but is not limited to, providing written expectations
of these guidelines in the syllabus and explicit instructions for
assignments, e.g., what level of collaboration is acceptable. It
is the responsibility of the student to be aware of and abide
by the standards set by the faculty member in each course.
Ignorance of the standards is not an excuse and intent is not a
factor in determining responsibility for misconduct.
The failure to meet these obligations of personal and
academic integrity results in academic misconduct, which
includes, but is not limited to, the following.
1. Unauthorizedaid—makinguseofprohibitedmaterials,
study guides, or other assistance in an academic
exercise, for example:
a. accessing prohibited material during an examination,
b. obtainingtestquestionsbeforeanexamisgiven,
c. looking up solutions to homework problems online,
d. obtaining the solution to a problem from a classmate,
or
e. collaborating on work that is assigned individually.
2. Plagiarism—reproducing the work orideas of others
and claiming them as your own, for example:
a. claiming authorship of a piece of writing or artwork
created by someone else,
b. making use of ideas obtained from other
sources (including classmates) without clearly
acknowledging the source, or
c. incorporating verbatim passages or elements from
an existing work into one’s own work without
quotation marks or otherwise clear indication of
authorship.
3. Falsifying information—making false statements or
fabricating information in an academic exercise, for
example:
a. inventing data or sources for an assignment,
b. lying to obtain an extension or other favorable
consideration, or
c. submitting work completed in another class for credit
without the express permission of the instructor.
4. Unethicalinterference—interferingwithorundermining
the work of others to gain unfair advantage, for example:
a. inappropriately limiting other students’ access to
relevant materials,
b. tampering with others students’ submissions or
130 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
grades,
c. purposely undermining the success of collaborative
work, or
d. interfering with other students’ scholarship by
creating inhospitable work conditions.
5. Facilitating misconduct—helping others commit acts
of academic misconduct, for example:
a. completinganotherstudent’swork,
b. providing a solution or other prohibited material to
another student, or
c. lying to help another student gain advantage or
conceal wrongdoing.
When a faculty member suspects that a student is
responsible for academic misconduct, the faculty member will
referthecasetotheOfceofStudentAffairsforreferraltothe
CommitteeonStudentConductoradministrativeaction.The
student and the faculty member are entitled to a Committee
hearinguponrequestbyeitherparty.
If the student is found to be responsible for academic
misconduct, a disciplinary status ranging from a warning to
expulsion will be assigned. The faculty member will decide
upon a grading penalty up to a failing grade in the course.
Afterreceivingasanction,thestudentmaynotelectthePass/
NoPassoptioninthat course. In thecase of a student who
hasalreadychosenthePass/NoPassoption,theRegistrarwill
rescind that option. If assigned an F in the course, the student
cannot withdraw from the course.
THE USE OF COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS
The College obeys, and expects its students to obey, Federal
copyright laws. These laws generally prohibit the copying
without permission of a copyrighted work. That work may
beliterary,musical,ordramatic;apicture,asoundorvideo
recording, or a computer program or material; or any other
originalexpressionxedinsometangibleform.Forguidelines
governing copyrighted materials, consult the College’s
Copyright & Fair Use Policy web site at www.fandm.edu/
college-policies/academic/copyright-fair-use-policy. Further
questionsmaybeaddressedtotheappropriateCollegeofces,
particularlytheLibraryandInformationTechnologyServices.
PATENT POLICY OF FRANKLIN &
MARSHALL COLLEGE
The objective of the College patent policy is to facilitate the
invention, transfer and application of new technology that
promisestobeofbenettothegeneralpublicand,atthesame
time, to protect the interests of the inventor and the College. It
applies to all employees and students of Franklin & Marshall
College.
A copy of this policy may be obtained by contacting the
Ofce of the Provost or by viewing it at www.fandm.edu/
college-policies/academic/intellectual-property-policy.
DISRUPTIONS
OF THE ACADEMIC PROCESS
All students should be familiar with this policy statement on
campusdisruptions,adoptedbytheFacultyinMay,1969:
1. Franklin & Marshall College is fully committed to the
principle that freedom of thought and expression must
be assured for all members of the College community,
including the freedom to express or demonstrate
disagreement and dissent by reasonable and peaceful
means.
2. This freedom is a sine qua non of a college. The
commitmentisherebyreafrmed.
3. Thespiritofthiscommitmentisclearanditshould,by
common consent, be held inviolate.
4. Butthedeterminationofwhatisorderlyandpeaceful
cannot be left only to those engaged in that action. The
College retains the responsibility to state and enforce
those determinations.
5. The process of free exploration, examination and
evaluation of ideas can survive only in an atmosphere
in which every member of the College is guaranteed
the right to think, talk and move about freely. When
any members of the College, unwittingly or by design,
deprive others of these rights, the institution and its
academic endeavors are placed in grave jeopardy.
6. Those who deny this freedom to others shall be
subject to sanctions by the College and may, after due
process, be considered unwelcome as members of the
community.
7. The academic process cannot be conducted in an
atmosphere tainted by disruption or by the threat of
intimidation, coercion, or duress.
8. Whilethemaintenanceoftheintegrityoftheacademic
process is an obligation of all members of the College,
there is a clear responsibility imposed upon the faculty
to safeguard that integrity and to certify standards of
performance of all engaged in the academic life of the
College.
9. The College’s determinations on such matters are
reached through reasoned thought and rational
discourse. The College will not condone or tolerate
unreasoned or injudicious violations of the spirit of the
College or disruptions of the orderly academic process.
10. The College cannot recognize as valid conclusions
reached under the imposition or threat of intimidation.
11. It is asserted, therefore, that activities which disrupt
the normal academic processes of the College are not
only inappropriate but intolerable. Individuals who
initiate or engage in such activity shall be subject to
appropriate disciplinary procedures or sanctions by
theCollege.Suchactionshall,ofcourse,providefor
appropriate access to fair hearing and due process.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 131
COMMUNICATION
WITH STUDENTS
The College typically communicates with students by the
following methods: mail to their home or local address,
mail to their campus box, or e-mail to their Franklin &
Marshallaccount.Studentsareexpectedtoregularlymonitor
communications to these destinations.
THE COURSE CREDIT SYSTEM
Franklin & Marshall College uses a course credit system.
Thirty-two course credits are required for graduation. A
typicalcourseisassignedonecoursecredit,equivalenttofour
semester hours, though some courses may be assigned more or
lessthanonecoursecredit.Departmentsmayofferhalf(0.5)
credit coursesand double (2.0) credit courses. Thesmallest
unitofcreditofferedatFranklin&Marshallisone-half(0.50).
Thetypicalone-creditcoursemeetsthreetimesperweek
for50minutes,ortwiceaweekfor80minutes,oronceper
weekfor170minutes.Courseswithlaboratoriesaddathree-
orfour-hourlabtotheselecturehours,buttheydonotcarry
additional credit.*
Semesters are 13 and 3/5 weeks of classes (vacation
periods such as fall break, Thanksgiving break, and spring
breakexcluded), followed by atleasttworeadingdays,and
thenvedaysinwhichnalexaminationsarescheduled.*
We recommend that a student should typically spend three
hoursofout-of-classtimeforeveryhourspentinclass.
*For 2020-2021 only, the academic calendar has been
reconguredtoincludetwomodulespereachsemester,withan
additional January term between the fall and spring semesters.
Thetypicalone-creditcoursemeetsduringonemodule,four
timesperweekfor90minutes.Courseswithlaboratoriesadd
a three-hour lab two days per week, but they do not carry
additionalcredit.Semestermodulesaresixweeksofclasses
(vacation periods such as Thanksgiving break excluded),
followed by at least one reading day, and then one to four days
inwhichnalexaminationsarescheduled.TheJanuaryterm
consists of four weeks of classes, including one day in which
nalexaminationsarescheduled.Werecommendthatstudents
plantospend18hoursperweekoneachcourseinamodule
(6hoursofscheduledclasstimeplus12hoursofout-of-class
time).
GRADUATION
REQUIREMENTS
TobeeligiblefortheBachelorofArtsdegree,astudentmust
satisfytheserequirements:
1. Complete the online Application to Graduate by the
publisheddeadline(intheFallsemesterofthestudent’s
senioryear);
2. Earn32coursecredits(atleast21ofthemwithstandard
grades)
a. within a time period of
(1) twelve(12)semestersofenrollmentand
(2) eight (8) calendar years from initial
matriculation,
b. with a cumulative grade point average of at least
2.00, and
c. with standard grades in all Connections, Exploration,
Language Study, Non-Western Cultures, major or
minor courses, or any other course used to satisfy a
specicrequirement;
3. Meet all Introduction and Exploration Phase
requirementsby:
a. satisfying the Introduction phase of the curriculum
throughcompletionofthetwo-courseConnections
requirementduringtherstthreesemestersofstudy;
b. satisfying the Exploration phase of the curriculum
through completion of:
(1) sixcoursecreditsdistributedasfollows
(i) onecoursecreditintheArts(A);
(ii) onecoursecreditintheHumanities(H);
(iii)one course credit in the Social Sciences
(S);
(iv)twocoursecreditsintheNaturalSciences,
either through passing two natural science
with lab courses (N) or passing one
natural science with lab course (N) and
an additional course carryingthe Natural
ScienceinPerspective(NSP)designation;
(v) onecoursecreditinNon-WesternCultures
(NW);and
(2) theLanguageStudiesrequirementbypassingor
placing out of the third semester of any foreign
or classical language sequence (generally the
201level);
4. Complete the Concentration Phase by passing an
approvedmajor eldof study, with aminimum ofa
2.00 grade point average in those courses considered by
themajordepartmenttofulllthemajorrequirements;
5. Earnatleastsixteen(16)coursecreditsontheFranklin
&Marshallcampus;and
6. Enroll in at leastthree course creditsduring eachof
thelasttwosemesters(usuallytheseventhandeighth
semesters) in which the student completes degree
requirements,withthenalsemesterbeinginresidence
at Franklin & Marshall College.
• Petitionsforexceptionstoeitheroftheseruleson
educational grounds must be made to the Committee
onAcademicStatus.
• Students who have attended Franklin & Marshall
Collegeforeightfull-timesemestersandwhoexpect
tocompletethegraduationrequirementselsewhere
maypetitiontheCommitteeonAcademicStatusto
do so.
DEGREE AUDITS
Adegreeauditisanelectronicreviewofeachstudent’scourse
transcript matched against the College’s requirements for a
degree.StudentsmayreviewtheirdegreeauditsthroughInside
F&M and become informed about their progress toward the
degree at any given time. Faculty advisers also have access to
the degree audits of their advisees. While the electronic degree
audit is usually accurate, at times the complicated nature of a
majororotherrequirementmayleadtoinaccuracies.Students
132 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
are responsible for reporting audit discrepancies to the
Registrar.Inaddition,adiscrepancyinthedegreeauditdoes
notchangetheactualrequirementsforgraduation;inparticular,
unfullled requirements are not waived because of degree
audit discrepancies. The responsibility for understanding and
meetingdegreerequirementsrestsentirelywiththestudent.
GRADUATION RATE
Franklin & Marshall College, in compliance with the 1990
Federal Student Right-to-Know and Campus Security Act,
publishes the percentage of students who enter the College
asnewrst-yearstudentsinthefallandthengraduateinsix
yearsorless.Thesix-yeargraduationratefortheclasseswho
enteredasrst-yearstudentsintheFallof2013was85%.
COLLEGE GRADUATION HONORS
College honors are awarded to graduating students on the basis
oftheirnalcumulativegradepointaverageaccordingtothe
following standards:
SummaCumLaude 3.90 — 4.00
MagnaCumLaude 3.70 — 3.89
CumLaude 3.50 — 3.69
GRANTING OF HONORS
Departmentalorprogramhonorsareawardedtostudentswho
successfullymeetthefollowingrequirements:
1. CompleteanapprovedoutstandingIndependentStudy
project, which entails extensive independent research
or creative effort and which culminates in a thesis, a
work of art, a recital, or some other performance.
2. Submit the Independent Study project to a specially
constituted review board and successfully defend the
project in an oral examination of the project and of
related work.
3. Complete a signicant body of course work of high
caliber in the department or program or in related
departments or programs.
The rule of thumb for a “signicant body of course
work”intheeldorrelatedeldsisaminimumoffour
courses,inadditiontotheIndependentStudyproject.
If departments or programs wish to impose stricter
guidelines or to waive this minimum, they should
submitrequeststotheProvostandDeanoftheFaculty,
whomayconsulttheEducationalPolicyCommitteefor
advice in particular cases.
Departmentsmaydeterminewhethera“signicantbody
of course work” is worthy of honors in either of two ways:
rst,theymaydetermineaminimumgradepointaverage
for work in the department beneath which students may not
begrantedhonors;orsecond,theymaymeetsubsequently
tothestudent’soraldefenseandvotetodeterminewhether
the“signicantbodyofcoursework”isworthyofhonors.
Studentsusuallywillmajororminorinaparticulardepartment
or program in order to receive honors in it, but need not, provided
thatthey:meettheaboverequirements;arerecommendedby
the review board to the department or program for honors
onthebasisofthequalityoftheprojectanditsdefense;and
receive the recommendation of the department or program
thatthesupportingcourseworkintheeldisofsufciently
high caliber to support the recommendation for honors. The
“signicant body of course work” of students with a Joint
Major will be evaluated by the home department of the adviser
oftheIndependent Study. Forstudents withSpecial Studies
majors, this evaluation will be conducted by the student’s
primarydepartment(typicallytheoneinwhichvecoursesor
morearetaken).
The following guidelines are to be observed in Independent
Studyprojectsconsideredfordepartmentalorprogramhonors:
1. As early as possible, the project adviser, in consultation
with the advisee and department or program
chairperson, should constitute a review board of at
leastthreebutnomorethanvepersons,oneofwhom
might well be from another department, program, or
institution. Copies of the completed thesis or project
should be sent to all members of the review board
before the oral examination.
2. The adviser should establish procedures for the oral
defense with the examiners, specifying, for example,
whether the student will make a brief opening statement,
how much time will be allotted to each examiner and in
whatmanner,etc.Theadviserisresponsibleforbrieng
the student on these procedures well in advance of the
defense.
3. Thedefenseshouldlastatleastone,butnomorethan
two hours. Artistic performances will, of course, vary
in length. The defense should be open to any interested
observers, with the knowledge of the student, and its
time and location should be published in advance of the
meeting.
4. To allow the student and examiners maximum
freedom, the adviser should not enter into the defense
unlessspecicallyaskedtodoso,andshouldnotfeel
obligated to be present for all the deliberations of the
review board.
5. Aftertheoralexamination,thereviewboardmembers
alone should, after discussion, vote by secret ballot
on the thesis and its defense. They are asked to
determine whether the thesis and its defense warrant
a recommendation of “Honors” or “No Honors,” as
onepartofthedepartment’s or program’sevaluation
of candidates for honors. The chairperson of the
review board should notify the department or program
chairpersoninwritingoftheboard’srecommendation.
6. The recommendation to the Provost and Dean of
the Faculty for departmental or program honors will
consist of:
a. The written recommendation to the department
or program chairperson by the chairperson of the
reviewboardconcerning“Honors”or“NoHonors”
onthebasisoftheprojectanditsdefense,and;
b. The evaluation by the department or program
chairpersonconcerningthecaliberof asignicant
bodyofcourseworkintheeld.
Both recommendations must be made at the
“Honors”levelforstudentstoreceivedepartmental
or program honors.
7. Theprojectadviseraloneisresponsibleforassigning
thenalgradefortheIndependentStudyprojectand
forreportingthatgradetotheRegistrar.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 133
INTERDISCIPLINARY HONORS
Astudentwhoearns“Honors”onaninterdisciplinaryproject
maybegranted“InterdisciplinaryHonors”ifeachdepartment
meets separately and each grants “Honors” based on a
signicantbodyofworkinitsowndiscretedepartment.Inthat
instance, the transcript will read “Interdisciplinary Honors:
Dept1/Dept2.”
WITHHOLDING AND
REVOCATION OF DEGREES
1. A student who is subject to a pending disciplinary
case is not eligible to receive a degree or participate in
graduation until that case is resolved.
2. The College reserves the right to withhold a degree
and/or graduation participation if warranted by
circumstances such as the discovery of serious violation
oftheCollege’spolicyonAcademicHonesty.
3. TheCollegealsoreservestherighttorevokeanalready
granted degree if circumstances such as the above
warrant.
4.AneligiblestudentwithanyunpaidCollegebillsmay
participate in the graduation ceremony but will not
receive a diploma. The College reserves the right not to
releaseofcialtranscriptsuntilallbillsarepaid.
COMMENCEMENT
The annual Commencement ceremony is held at the end of each
springsemesterandrecognizesstudentswhoreceiveddegrees
the preceding summer and winter as well as those students
receiving degrees on the day of the ceremony. Degrees are
conferred three times each year: at the annual Commencement
ceremony following the spring semester, at the end of August,
andattheendofJanuary.*Studentswhoreceivedegreesin
August or January* will receive their diplomas by mail and will
be listed in the Commencement program the following spring.
Studentswhoreceivedegreesattheendofthespringtermmay
receive their diplomas at the Commencement ceremony. Those
whoelectnottoattendshouldnotifytheRegistrarandindicate
their preferred mailing address in writing in order to receive
theirdiploma.Attendanceattheceremonyisnotrequired.
Seniors who are close to completion of graduation
requirements by the end of the spring semester may apply
withthe Registrar’s Ofceto participatein Commencement
ceremony without receiving a diploma if they:
1. Have a 2.00 or higher major grade point average, a
2.00 or higher cumulative grade point average and the
approvaloftheirmajordepartment;
2. Are in overall good standing at the College (this
includesdisciplinarymatters);
3. Are able to complete all graduation requirements
by satisfactorily completing not more than two (2)
additionalcoursecredits;
4. Submit a workable plan to complete all graduation
requirementsassoonaspossibleandnolaterthanthe
August31followingCommencement.Inextraordinary
circumstances, students may request an exception.
If such a request is approved, students will not be
permitted to participate in extra-curricular activities,
including intercollegiate sports, subsequent to the
Commencement in which they participate.
This policy is administered by the Associate Registrar.
Exceptionstotheserequirementsarerarelymade.Ifastudent
feels that an extraordinary situation is present, he or she may
present the case, in a written petition, to the Committee on
Academic Status for special permission to participate. No
further appeals are possible.
Qualiedstudentsmayparticipatefullyasseniorsinall
Commencement exercises. Their names will be listed in the
Commencementprogramwithanotation“degreerequirements
to be completed.”
These students will receive their diplomas on the degree
conferral date following completion of all requirements but
will not be listed in future Commencement programs. For
alumni programs purposes, such students will be considered
members of the class of their choice. Additional information
maybeobtainedfromtheRegistrar’sOfce.
*Winter degrees will be awarded in February of 2021 due to
the modied 2020-2021 academic calendar. Please see the
2020-2021academiccalendarformoreinformation.
HONORS LIST
AND DEAN’S LIST
A student whose grade point average for the preceding
semester is 3.70 or better is placed on the Honors List. A
studentwhoattainsanaverageof3.25orbetterisplacedonthe
Dean’sList.Inbothcases,tobeeligible,thestudentmusthave
satisfactorily completed three course credits in courses for
whichthestandardgradingoptionwasutilized.(Inaddition,
there may be nograde below “C-,” where “NP” grades are
consideredtobebelow“C-.”)
HONOR SOCIETIES
AND SIMILAR RECOGNITION
AlphaKappaDelta—sociology
BenjaminRush—healthprofessions
BlackPyramid—seniorhonorarysociety
DeltaPhiAlpha—German
EtaSigmaPhi—classics
Gamma Kappa Alpha—Italian
JohnMarshall—pre-law
MuUpsilonSigma—instrumentalmusic
OmicronDeltaEpsilon—economics
PhiAlphaTheta—history
PhiBetaKappa—scholarship
PiDeltaPhi—French
PiGammaMu—socialscience
PiMuEpsilon—mathematics
PiSigmaAlpha—politicalscience
PsiChi—psychology
SigmaDeltaPi—Spanish
SigmaPiSigma—physics
Phi Beta Kapparecognizessuperiorintellectualachievement
in the pursuit of liberal education. Founded in 1776 at the
CollegeofWilliamandMary,PhiBetaKappaisthepremiere
academic undergraduate honorary society. The Theta Chapter
134 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
of Pennsylvania was established at Franklin & Marshall
Collegein1908.
Each year, resident members of the Chapter meet to review
students’credentialsand elect new members,predominantly
seniors, plus a few highly exceptional juniors.
TheSocietyseeksstudentswithoutstandingrecordsand
goodcharacterwhohavedevelopedthequalitiesofmindthat
are the aim of a liberal, humane education and approach their
studies with intellectual curiosity in pursuit of a comprehensive
understanding of the natural and social worlds.
Evaluation of candidates is based on various indicators of
the intellectual spirit, including but not limited to high grades,
the opinions of professors and professional staff familiar with
candidates’achievements,participationinupper-levelclasses,
independentresearch,competencyinareassuchasquantitative
analytical skills and foreign languages and sparing use of
the Withdrawal and Pass/No Pass options. Students should
normally have completed either coursework in three different
disciplinesinatleasttwodivisions(aminimumoftwocourses,
one of which must be beyond the introductory level) or a
doublemajorormajor/minorintwodifferentdivisions.These
guidelineswillpertaintoSpecialStudiesandinterdisciplinary
majors as well.
Dana Scholars
The Dana Scholars program, made possible by the Charles
A.DanaFoundation,recognizesabout70continuingstudents
of high academic achievement, outstanding character and
leadership potential. Dana Scholars are nominated by the
faculty.
Andrew M. Rouse Scholars
TheAndrewM.RouseScholarship,endowedbyandnamedin
honorofAndrewM.Rouse’49,formerTrusteeoftheCollege,
seeks to recognize two outstanding sophomore students, in
good standing with the College, who have demonstrated
highacademicachievement,strongcharacterand signicant
leadership skills, whether through their communities, schools,
or religious organizations. Rouse Scholars should have the
potential to make a positive and signicant impact on the
student body, and to contribute to the legacy of the College.
The scholarship covers all academic costs, including full
tuition, books and laboratory fees and is renewable for three
years (subject to demonstrating academic eligibility and
showingleadershipattheCollege).Eachscholariseligibleto
applyfor a$3,000 research/travelgrant that willenablethe
student to develop further his or her leadership skills.
ACADEMIC STANDARDS
Students who are making satisfactory progress toward the
degree are allowed to continue their studies at Franklin &
MarshallCollege.Satisfactoryprogresstowardthedegreeis
denedasmeetingthefollowingminimumclassstandingand
academic performance standards:
A. ACADEMIC PROGRESS.Studentsarenormallyexpected
to complete four course credits each semester and to complete
courseworkrequiredfortheBachelorofArtsdegreewithin
eight semesters. A review is made at the end of each regular
semester to determine the class standing of every student. For
enrollment in the sophomore class, a student must have earned
seven course credits; in the junior class, 15 course credits;
intheseniorclass,23coursecredits;andforgraduation,32
course credits.
While unusual circumstances may prevent some students
from proceeding on this schedule, the College is unwilling to
extendthetimeindenitely.Therefore,sophomorestatusmust
beattainedinamaximumofthreesemesters;juniorstatusina
maximumofsixsemesters;seniorstatusinamaximumofnine
semesters;andgraduationwithinamaximumof12semesters.
Allrequirementsforgraduationmustbecompletedwithina
maximum of eight calendar years from initial matriculation.
Students who fail to meet the minimum requirements of
academic progress will be placed on academic suspension for
aperiodofonesemester.Studentswithunusualcircumstances
that prevent them from meeting these requirements may
petitiontheCommitteeonAcademicStatusforanextension.
Students may view end of semester grades on their
transcripts through Inside F&M.
B. ACADEMIC PERFORMANCE.Studentsmustachieve
the following minimum cumulative grade point averages as a
function of the number of course credits earned:
Course Credits Earned Minimum CGPA
0to4 1.50
morethan4to8 1.60
morethan8to12 1.70
morethan12to16 1.80
morethan16to20 1.90
more than 20 2.00
Studentswhodonotachieveasemestergradepointaverage
ofatleast2.00willbeplacedon“semesteradvisory”status.
Studentswhodonotachieveacumulativegradepointaverage
ofatleast2.00willbeplacedon“cumulativeadvisory”status.
Studentswhodonotachieveeitherasemesterorcumulative
gradepointaverageof2.00willbeplacedon“semesterand
cumulative advisory” status. Students on “advisory” status
willbeinformedofthisinwriting,andaCollegeHouseDean
will meet with these students to discuss academic concerns.
Studentsshouldconsiderthesemeetingstobemandatory.
Students will be placed on Academic Suspension if:
They fail to meet the minimum cumulative grade point
averagefortheappropriatecreditsearned(unlessinthe
just completed semester they earned a semester grade
pointaverageof2.40orhigherforatleastthreecourse
credits);
They fail to meet the minimum requirements for class
standing;OR
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 135
They fail all courses attempted in any one regular semester.
Students in their rst semester at Franklin & Marshall
College will generally not be suspended if they pass at least
one course.
Suspendedstudentsmaysubmitanappealforarescission
ofthesuspensiontotheCommitteeonAcademicStatus.
First suspensions are for a period of one academic
semester, and they include the summer period between the end
of the semester at which they receive the suspension and their
eligibledateofreturn.Studentsreceivingasuspensionatthe
end of a fall semester are eligible to resume their studies at
thebeginningofthenextfallsemester.Studentsreceivinga
suspension at the end of a spring semester are eligible to resume
their studies at the beginning of the next spring semester.
Thisperiodofsuspensionallowsstudentstimetoreect
uponthe sources oftheiracademicdifcultiesandreturnto
the College better prepared to meet the academic expectations
ofthefaculty.Studentsplacedonsuspensionshouldchoose
carefully the activities they pursue during the period of
suspension because they will be expected to explain and justify
those choices as part of the procedure for returning from a
suspension. Although students may enroll in courses at another
institution during the period of suspension, they may not earn
credittowardgraduationrequirementsatFranklin&Marshall
Collegeduringthisperiod.ReturntotheCollegeafterarst
suspension is highly likely but not automatic.
Subsequentsuspensionsareforaperiodoftwoacademic
semesters,andinclude summer period(s) fromthe beginning
of the suspension to the eligible date of return. Subsequent
suspensionsplaceindoubtastudent’swillingnessandabilityto
meet the academic standards of the College. This longer period
of time should be used to examine seriously whether the student
should continue at the College. Although students may enroll in
courses at another institution during the period of suspension,
they may not earn credit toward graduation requirements at
Franklin & Marshall College during this period.
Studentswhowishtoreturnfromanacademicsuspension
must write a letter to the Committee on Academic Status
requestingpermissiontoreturn.Thislettermustbesubmitted
by May 1 for students wishing to return in the Fall, and by
December1forstudentswishingtoreturnintheSpring.Prior
to submission of this letter, students are expected to consult
withtheirCollegeHouseDean.
COURSE REGISTRATION
AND CREDIT
CLASS SCHEDULING
The master schedule of classes is made available online prior
toregistrationeachsemester.Classesbeginat8:00a.m.and
end at 4:20 p.m. on Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays;*
theybeginat8:30a.m.andendat6:05p.m.onTuesdaysand
Thursdays.* Additionally, there is an evening class period
Monday through Thursday that begins at 7:30 p.m.* The
classscheduleallowsforatwice-weeklyCommonHour.The
CommonHouris scheduled from 11:30a.m.–12:35p.m.on
Thursdays* and is reserved for College community events.
Tuesdaysfrom11:30a.m.–12:35p.m.isdesignatedasafree
hour and may be scheduled for meetings, multiple-section
common examinations, etc.*
In order to permit student participation in extracurricular
activities, attendance at regularly scheduled classes or labs is
notusuallyrequiredafter4:20p.m.onMondays,Wednesdays
and Fridays or after 6:05 p.m. onTuesdays andThursdays,
except for regularly scheduled evening classes.*
Somecoursesinvolveeldtrips,lectures,orotheractivities
scheduled outside of regular class hours. These experiences
are listed in a course syllabus and course description whenever
reasonablypossible.Ifascheduleconictoccursforastudent,
s/heshould contact theinstructorandattempttoresolvethe
matter as soon as possible, and certainly substantially in
advance of the event.
* Course meeting times and the Common Hour will follow a
differentscheduleforthe2020-2021academicyear.For2020-
2021only,classperiodsbeginat8:00a.m.andendat10:00
p.m.onMondays,Tuesdays,andThursdays;theybeginat8:00
a.m.andendat9:00p.m.onFridays.Wednesdaysarereserved
for drills, practicums, evening labs, and the Common Hour.
Wednesdayeveninglabsbeginat7:00p.m.andendat10:00
p.m.TheCommonHourwillbeheldfrom1:30p.m.–2:30p.m.
on Wednesdays.
REGISTRATION PROCEDURE
ClassschedulingisdonethroughtheRegistrar’sOfce,which
maintainsallofcialacademicrecords,sendsouttranscripts,
supervises course registration and changes, and tracks
students’ progress in meetingdegree requirements. Students
register online through Inside F&M for courses that have been
approved by their academic advisers. The class schedules of
rst-yearstudentsarepreparedduringthesummerpreceding
entrance into the College. Subject to the payment of the
appropriate fees, students may register for courses during the
designated registration period. Exceptions to this are:
1. Studentsareresponsibleforsatisfyingprerequisitesfor
acourse;theymaynotregisterforcourseswithlisted
prerequisitesthattheyhavenotcompletedunlessthey
have permission of the instructor of the course or the
chairperson of the department in which the course is
offered. Credit for a course may be denied or later
withdrawn if a student enrolls without the necessary
prerequisites or prior approval of the instructor or
department chairperson.
2. Certain courses require permission of the instructor
prior to registration. Permission of the instructor
may be withheld if a student has not completed the
necessaryprerequisitesfor a course, orhas not done
sufcientsupplementaryreadingandworktoprepare
thestudenttoprotfromthecourse.
3. Registrationinallcoursesissubjecttoavailabilityof
spacesinclasses,anditisthestudent’sresponsibility
to ensure that he or she is properly registered in all
courses. Departments and instructors may, with the
approval of the Provost and Dean of the Faculty,
establish enrollment limits in courses. Enrollment may
not exceed 50in a coursewithout permissionof the
ProvostandDeanoftheFaculty.
4. Astudentmaybepreventedfromregisteringforcourses
if he or she has outstanding obligations to the College,
136 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
such as an unpaid tuition balance or outstanding
health forms, or an undeclared major in or after the
fall of the junior year. In such cases, the student will
benotiedoftheregistrationholdpriortothestartof
the registration period. The student will be eligible to
register for courses once the outstanding obligation is
met, providing that this occurs before the end of the
add/dropperiodfortheregistrationterm.
FULL-TIME STATUS
A student must be enrolled for at least three course credits a
semester(equaltotwelvesemesterhours)toberegardedasa
full-timestudent.Thenormalstudentworkloadisfourcourse
creditseachsemester.Studentsmayregisterforamaximum
of two course credits in any one Franklin & Marshall summer
session. Two credits in a Franklin & Marshall summer session
isregardedasfull-time.
PART-TIME STATUS
Part-timestatusisdenedasregistrationforfewerthanthree
course credits. This option is not available during each of the
last two regular semesters in which students are completing
degreerequirementsinasemester..
A student approvedfor part-timestatus willbe charged
tuition on a per-credit basis. Independent studies, tutorials,
directedreadings,andinternships-for-creditareallbilledatthe
standardper-creditrate.
Part-time status may have some effect on the student’s
participationinCollegeactivities(e.g.,intercollegiateathletics,
Collegegovernance,etc.).Also,thepart-timestudentmaynot
beeligibleforanyformofinstitutionalnancialaid.
ADDING COURSES
Afterpre-registrationhasbeencompleted,studentsmayadd
open courses to their schedules through Inside F&M. Entering
acourselaterthanthesecondmeetingoftheclassrequiresthe
approval of the course instructor. The deadline to add a course
is typically 7 calendardays* after the start of the semester.
Students may “withdraw without record” until typically 13
calendardays*afterthestartofthesemester.Itisthestudent’s
responsibility to ensure that he or she is properly registered in
the courses being pursued.
*Forthe2020-2021academicyear,eachfallandspringmodule
hasitsowndeadlinetoaddcourses,4calendardaysafterthe
startofthemodule.Seethe2020-2021academiccalendarfor
ofcialdeadlinedatesformodulesandtheJanuaryterm.
COURSE CREDIT OVERLOADS
Course credit overloads are subject to the following rules:*
1.Acourseloadoffour-and-one-halfcoursecredits(4.5)
is not considered an overload.
2. Astudentmaynottakevecoursecreditsduringhisor
herrstsemesterofenrollmentatFranklin&Marshall
College.
3. Aftertherstsemester,studentswhointheprevious
semester were enrolled as full-time students and
earnedasemestergradepointaverageof2.50orhigher
automaticallyqualifytoenrollforvecoursecredits.
4.Studentswhodonotautomaticallyqualifymustpetition
theCommitteeonAcademicStatusforpermissionto
enrollforvecoursecredits.
5.Aftertherstsemester,studentswhointheprevious
semester were enrolled as full-time students and
earnedasemestergradepointaverageof3.50orhigher
automatically qualify to enroll for up to six course
credits.Studentswhomeetthisrequirementandwish
to enroll for more than six course credits must petition
theCommitteeonAcademicStatus.
6. Studentsmayregisterformorethanfourcoursecredits
beginningthedaybeforetherstdayofclasses.
7. A0.5-creditcoursethatmeetsonlyforhalfthesemester
(withafrequencyforthathalfsemesterequaltothatfor
afull-creditcourse)shallbeconsideredtocontributea
creditloadof0.5fortheentiresemester.
*Forthe2020-2021academicyear,studentsmayenrollina
maximumof2.5coursecreditspersemestermodule.Students
mustpetitiontheCommitteeonAcademicStatusforpermission
toenrollinupto3creditsinasinglemodule.Petitionsfrom
students with a cumulative grade point average of 3.50 or
higher will be strongly considered. Students approved to
registerfor3creditsinamodulemaydosobeginningtheday
beforetherstdayofclasses.
WITHDRAWING FROM COURSES
WITHOUT RECORD
A student may withdraw from a course or courses through
Inside F&M during the “withdraw-without-record” period
(typically13calendardaysafterthestartofthesemester),and
nonotationofthewithdrawalwillbemadeonthestudent’s
academicrecord.Forthe2020-2021academicyear,eachfall
and spring module has its own “withdraw-without-record”
deadline,4daysafterthestartofthemodule.Seethe2020-
2021academiccalendarforofcialdeadlinedatesformodules
and the January term..
WITHDRAWING FROM COURSES
WITH RECORD
Withdrawals with record may occur after the “withdraw-
without-record” period and before the withdrawal deadline.
(The deadline is typically 10–14 calendar days before the
last day of regularly scheduled classes. For the 2020-2021
academic year, the deadline is 4 days from the last day of
regularly scheduled classes. For the January term, the deadline
is2daysfromthelastdayofclasses.)Withdrawalswithrecord
are subject to the following rules:
l.AnystudentinhisorherrstsemesterattheCollege
may withdraw with record from one course provided
that full-time status is preserved; the student must
submit a completed Course Withdrawal Form to
the Registrar’s Ofce and a “W” will appear on the
student’sacademicrecord.
2.AftertherstsemesteratFranklin&MarshallCollege,
a student may withdraw with record from two additional
courses. This rule means that a student may withdraw
from one of four courses in two different semesters or
fromtwoofveormorecoursesinonesemester.In
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 137
each case, the student must submit a completed Course
WithdrawalFormtotheRegistrar’sOfceanda“W”
willappearonthestudent’sacademicrecord.
3. Any student who does not follow the required
procedures for withdrawing from a course will receive
agradeof“F.”
Seethe2020-2021academiccalendarforofcialwithdrawal
deadline dates.
WITHDRAWING FROM COURSES
AND PART-TIME STATUS
Whenwithdrawingfromacourse(orcourses)willresultina
student being enrolled in fewer than three course credits, the
student’sstatuschangesfromfull-timetopart-time.
1. A student wishing to drop courses and assume part-
time status must petition the Committee on Academic
Status.StudentsshouldnotassumethattheCommittee’s
approval is automatic.
2. Dropping to part-time status is an unusual step, and
Committee approval depends upon the existence of
extenuating circumstances such as health problems or
unusualpersonaldifculties.
3. The deadline for submitting a petition for part-time
status is the last day of classes in that semester.
PASS/NO PASS OPTION
The College encourages students to broaden their educational
experience by taking some of their electives in areas that are
of interest to them, regardless of the level at which they might
perform. To this end, the College allows students the option of
takingsomeelectivesonaPass/NoPassbasis.Thepurposeof
thisoptionisnottolightencourseloadsortoincreasestudents’
grade point averages.
The following rules apply:
1. A student may elect to take up to eight course credits on
aPass/NoPassbasis.
2. The Pass/No Pass option is not available during a
student’srstsemesteratFranklin&MarshallCollege.
3. Ifastudentisenrolledinfewerthanvecoursecredits,
onlyonecoursecreditmaybetakenonaPass/NoPass
basis (including courses with required Pass/No Pass
registration).
4. Ifastudentenrollsforvecoursecredits,twocourse
creditsmaybetakenonaPass/NoPassbasis.
5. The Pass/No Pass option may not be used when
completingacoursethatsatisesanyofthecurriculum
requirements.
6. The Pass/No Pass option may not be used when
completingacoursethatsatisesanyrequirementsfor
a major, minor, or special studies area of concentration
(includingspeciedrelatedcourses).
7. ThePass/NoPassoptionmustbeelectednolaterthan
28 calendar days after the opening of a semester.*
Election of the option requires the submission of a
formtotheRegistrar’sOfcewiththesignatureofthe
adviser. The adviser should not be asked to sign the
form if the adviser is also the instructor in the course.
In this case, the student should obtain the signature of
thedepartmentchairortheVicePresidentandDeanof
StudentAffairs.Thesignatureoftheinstructorinthe
courseisintentionallynotrequired,andtheinstructor
should not be consulted in this process. The instructor
shouldnotknowwhoisregisteredonaPass/NoPass
basisuntilafternalgradesaresubmitted.
8. Agradeof“C-”(asofFall2005)orbetterearnsa“P”
grade.
9. CoursestakenPass/NoPassthatreceiveagradeof“P”
earn credit toward graduation, but they are not included
in the calculation of grade point averages.
10. One summer session course credit may be taken each
ve-weektermon a Pass/NoPass basis.Thisoption
applies only to courses taken at Franklin & Marshall
CollegeoraCentralPennsylvaniaConsortiumschool.
11. TheelectionofaPass/NoPassoptionisnal.Torequest
the change of a grading option after the deadline,
including changing from Pass/No Pass to a standard
letter grade, a student must petition the Committee
on Academic Status. The Committee rarely grants
these petitions unless there were truly extenuating
circumstances why the regular deadline was not met.
*ThedeadlinesforelectionofthePass/NoPassoptionwill
followa modiedscheduleinthe2020-2021 academicyear
in order to accommodate the temporary change to a module
calendar. Please see the 2020-2021 academic calendar for
information on deadlines for each module.
REPEAT OF A COURSE
College policy permits a student to repeat a Franklin &
Marshall course for a grade only if the previous grade was
“D+,”“D,”“D-,”“F,”or“NP.”Pleasenotethatasubsequent
offering of a particular course cannot be guaranteed.
The following rules apply to repeating a course:
1. When a course is repeated, it counts only once for
credit toward the degree.
2. When a course is repeated, only the most recent grade
is included in the calculation of the cumulative grade
point average and the average in the major or minor.
Bothgrades,however,appearonthepermanentrecord,
with a notation next to the original grade indicating that
the course was later repeated.
3. Repeated courses must be taken for a regular grade
unlesstherstgradewasan“NP.”Whentheoriginal
gradewasan“NP,”astudentmayelecteitherthePass/
NoPassorregulargradingoptions.
4. Nocoursemaybetakenmorethantwicewithoutthe
approvaloftheCommitteeonAcademicStatus.
5. Nocoursethatisaprerequisitetoanothercoursemay
be repeated if the higher level course has been passed
successfully(“P,”or“D-”orhigher).
6. No course may be repeated by taking a prociency
exam.
7. Astudentmaynotusetherepeatoptionmorethanthree
times.
8. Anallowablerepeatofacoursemustbetakenatthe
same institution where the course was originally taken.
In particular, courses originally taken at Franklin &
Marshallwithagradeof“D+,”“D,”“D-,”“F,”or“NP”
mayonlyberepeatedatFranklin&Marshall.Students
may petition the Committee onAcademic Status for
exceptions to this policy.
138 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
9.Asclarication,ifacourseforwhichtheoriginalgrade
was “D-” or higher is repeated, and if a withdrawal
(“W”)occursintherepeat,thentheoriginalgradeand
credit are retained. If, however, the course is failed
when repeated, the original credit is lost. If a course for
whichtheoriginalgradewas“F”isrepeated,andifa
withdrawal(“W”)occursintherepeat,thentheoriginal
grade remains for grade point average calculations.
10. Electionoftherepeatoptionrequiresthesubmission
ofaformtotheOfceoftheRegistrar.
11.Itisthestudent’sresponsibilitytoverifythatrepeated
courses are properly noted on the transcript.
AUDITING COURSES
ThereisnoofcialauditingofcoursesatFranklin&Marshall
College.Anyfull-timestudentmay,withthepriorpermission
of the instructor, attend a course for which the student is not
registered.Thereisnorecordofthisshownonthestudent’s
transcript.
ATTENDANCE AT CLASS
At the opening meeting of each course, instructors state their
policyonclassattendance.Subjecttothediscretionofindividual
instructors, students are expected to attend all scheduled
meetings, lectures, discussions and laboratory periods that
make up the course. Students who violate instructors’ rules
ofattendancemayreceiveagradeof“F.”Inaddition,when
the rules of attendance are clearly communicated in the course
syllabus or in a similarly explicit manner, a student who violates
the attendance policy may be dismissed from the course upon
the joint agreement of the instructor and the College House
Dean.Studentswhoaredismissedfromacourseforexcessive
absences may be reinstated only by the joint consent of the
instructorandtheCollegeHouseDean.
Studentswhobelievethattheyareobligedtomissclass
for healthor counseling reasonsshould see thoseofces in
advance, unless emergency conditions prevent. The Student
Wellness Center does not issue class absence notes and
encourages students to communicate with their professors
before missing class, although there are certain health
situations for which professors will receive communication
from theStudentWellness Centeror College House Deans,
detailedontheStudentWellnessCenter’swebsite.Students
with other reasons that they believe are valid for missing class
should contact their College House Deans, also in advance
unless emergency conditions prevent.
The academic calendar of the College is a secular one. A
studentwhohasascheduleconictduetoareligiousobligation
should discuss the situation with his or her professors prior
to the dateof the conict;any accommodation wouldbe at
the discretion of the faculty member. A calendar of religious
holidaysisavailableontheCollege’sacademiccalendarweb
page.
PETITIONS FOR EXCEPTIONS
TO ACADEMIC POLICIES
Students may petition the Committee on Academic Status
for exceptions to academic policies of the College. Petition
formsmaybefoundintheOfceofStudentSuccess(College
Square),intheOfceoftheRegistrar(DiagnothianHall),and
ontheRegistrar’sOfce’swebsite,www.fandm.edu/registrar/
forms.
MAJORS AND MINORS
MAJORS
The regulations for admission to, and the maintenance of, an
academic major at Franklin & Marshall College are as follows:
1. A student must submit to the Registrar a major
declaration form, approved by the chairperson of the
department in which the student chooses to major, by
the end of the second semester of the sophomore year.
Students who have not yet declared a major by the
fall semester of their junior year will not be eligible
to register for future classes until they have declared a
major.
2. Adepartmentmayrefuseastudentadmissionto“regular”
majorstatusordismissastudentfrom“regular”major
status only in the following circumstances:
a. If, after the end of the sophomore year, the student
has not taken courses in the department, or has
failed to attain a grade point average of at least 2.00
in those courses within the major.
b. Ifthestudenthasfailedtomeetotherclearlydened
academic criteria, approved by the Educational
PolicyCommittee,foradmissiontoorcontinuance
in the major in the department.
c.A maximum of eighty-ve(85) students fromany
classmaydeclareamajorinBusiness,Organizations,
andSociety.
3. Departments will establish a “provisional major”
category to which students are assigned when their
circumstances t the situations outlined in Item 2.
The department chairperson noties the Registrar
when a student is made a “provisional” major or is
granted regular major status. If a student fails to satisfy
departmental criteria for major status after one semester
asa“provisional”major,thestudentmaybedroppedas
a major by departmental action.
4. AstudentispermittedtocontinueinCollegeforone
semester without a major after having been dismissed
from a major.
5. Appeals from students concerning their major status
maybemadetotheCommitteeonAcademicStatus.
SPECIAL STUDIES MAJOR PROGRAM
TherulesgoverningtheSpecialStudiesmajorprograminclude
the following:
1. A student must prepare a proposal that includes
a succinct but accurate title for the major, a brief
description and a list of courses, including course
numbers and names and grades in any courses already
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 139
taken. The proposal must also include a rationale for
proposingaSpecialStudiesmajorinsteadofadouble
orJointMajororamajor/minorcombination.
2. Courses must include at least ve courses from one
department/program, ve divided between two other
departments/programsandaone-semesterindependent
study, SPC 490. Courses may include additional
research (490) courses, Directed Readings and pre-
approved courses taken at other institutions, including
study abroad courses. The total number of courses may
notexceed16.
3. The proposal must also include the signatures of a
primary adviser,a secondary adviser andthe ofcial
academic adviser to Special Studies majors. The
primaryadviserisusuallyamemberofthedepartment/
programinwhichveormorecoursesaretaken.
4. Whentheproposedmajorintersectswithprogramssuch
asAfricanaStudies,InternationalStudies,Comparative
LiteraryStudies,Science,TechnologyandSociety,or
Women’s, Gender and Sexuality Studies, the major
should be designed in consultation with that program
and approved by the program chairperson.
5. Astudentmustsubmitacopyoftheapprovedproposal
andacourseprojectionsheettotheRegistrar’sOfce.
6. Changes to the original major proposal, including
course substitutions, must be approved by all of the
student’smajoradvisers.
7. Students in the Special Studies programcan, if they
have an outstanding academic record, pursue Academic
Honors by writing a formal thesis and submitting to
an oral examination by a committee of at least three
votingfacultymembers.Suchstudentsaresubjectto
the rules governing departmental or program honors.
8. A student who has declared a Special Studies major
may not apply more than three courses from that major
toward a second major or minor.
Interested students should consult Dr. Amelia Rauser,
AssociateDeanoftheFaculty,whoistheofcialacademic
advisertoSpecialStudiesmajors
JOINT MAJOR
A Joint Major is a group of courses from two departments/
programs and requires a rationale and the approval of both
departments/programsandtheAssociateDeanoftheFaculty.
Each of the component majors must be represented by eight
distinct course credits, so that the Joint Major consists of
sixteen distinct courses.
The following rules govern Joint Majors:
1. A Joint Major must be approved by both programs or
departmentsandbytheAssociateDeanoftheFaculty,
A Joint Major must be approved by both programs or
departmentsandbytheAssociateDeanoftheFaculty,
Dr.AmeliaRauser.
2. Students must submit a projection form to the
Registrar’sOfce fromeach department orprogram.
The student must provide a rationale* for the Joint
Major.
3. Changes to the original major proposal, including
course substitutions, must be approved by both of the
student’smajoradvisers.
4.Students who have declared a Joint Major may not
apply more than three courses from that major toward
a second major or minor.
5.Atleastoneofthedepartments/programscombinedin
the Joint Major must offer its own major.
*Additional details about the content of the rationale are provided on
the application form.
OPTIONAL MINOR
The regulations for admission to an academic minor at Franklin
& Marshall College are:
1. Studentsmayelecttopursueaminorinanydepartment
or program offering an approved minor program.
2. Approved minor programs consist of six course credits
arranged by a department or program to constitute an
integrated, cumulative academic experience.
3. Minorsshouldbedeclaredbeforethebeginningofthe
senior year.
4. All courses in the minor must be taken for standard
grades, and the student must pass all six course credits
with at least a 2.00 grade point average overall.
5. At least four of the minor courses must be taken at
Franklin & Marshall College.
6. Astudentmayofciallydeclareonlyoneminor.
7. Todeclareaminor,astudentconsultswiththedesignated
department or program chairperson and submits a minor
declarationformtotheRegistrar’sOfce.
8. A student who has declared a Special Studies major
may not apply more than three courses from that major
toward a minor.
9. AstudentwhohasdeclaredaJointMajormaynotapply
more than three courses from that major toward a minor.
ADDITIONAL SPECIAL
EDUCATIONAL
OPPORTUNITIES
StudentsatFranklin&MarshallCollegemayearnacademic
credit by completing a number of additional special educational
opportunities including Tutorials, Directed Readings,
IndependentStudiesandInternships-for-Credit.Thesmallest
unitofcreditofferedatFranklin&Marshallisonehalf(0.50).
TUTORIALS
ATutorialisaregularcourse(eitheronethatisapermanent
part of the curriculum or one taught as a “topics” course)
taught on an individual basis. A student may register for a
Tutorial with the consent of the instructor and the approval
of the department chair. The student should complete an
“Application for Tutorial” form available in the Registrar’s
Ofceandonitswebsite.
DIRECTED READINGS
A Directed Reading is an investigation of a topic through
readings chosen by a student with the agreement of the
instructor. Assignments normally include multiple short papers
140 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
asopposedtoathesis.AstudentmayregisterforaDirected
Readingwith the consentof theinstructor andtheapproval
of the department chairperson. The student should complete
an“ApplicationforDirectedReading”formavailableinthe
Registrar’sOfceandonitswebsite.
INDEPENDENT STUDIES
AnIndependentStudyconsistsofanextensiveresearchproject
completed under the supervision of a faculty member.
ThefollowingrulesgovernIndependentStudies:
1. AnIndependentStudymustbeapprovedbyafaculty
adviser and the department chairperson.
2. An Independent Studymust culminatein athesis or
performance.
3. ThestudentandtheadviserfortheIndependentStudy
should agree in advance whether the project will
extendoveroneortwomodulesand/orsemesters,for
one-half,oneortwocoursecredits.
4. The deadlineto registerfor an IndependentStudy is
theendoftherstweekofthesemesterinwhichthe
IndependentStudyisundertaken.
5.To register for an Independent Study, a student
completes the “Application for Independent Study”
formandreturnsittotheRegistrar’sOfce.
6. If an Independent Study is to be considered for
Departmental Honors, the additional guidelines
described in the section on Departmental Honors
should also be observed.
The regulations governing grading options for an
IndependentStudyareasfollows:
1. If the student elects the standard letter grade option, the
student registers under normal procedures and presents
the required Independent Study application with the
department or program chairperson’s approval. It
should be noted that this is the only one of the grading
optionsthatisautomatic.Eachoftheothersrequires
additionalinputtotheRegistrarfromthestudent,the
department chairperson, or both.
2. ThestudentmayelectthePass/NoPassoptioninthe
rst semester of a two-semester Independent Study.
In this case, the student completes the Independent
StudyapplicationandaPass/NoPassform,including
thesignatureofthechairperson,andlesitwiththe
Registrar before the add deadline. This procedure
differs from the normal Pass/No Pass regulations in
thattheinstructor(i.e.,theIndependentStudyadviser)
knows about the use of the option and reports the grade
directlyasPassorNoPass.
3. In some cases the department requires the Pass/No
Pass option in the rst semester of a two-semester
Independent Study. In this instance, the chairperson
noties the Registrar in writing prior to the add
deadline. This note must include the name of each
student involved. The chairperson should also indicate
this requirement on the approval form given to the
student when the student requests permission for
IndependentStudy.
4. If the student elects the “no grade/double grade”
option, then no grade and no course credit are awarded
attheendoftherstsemesterandtwogradesandtwo
course credits are awarded at the end of the second
semester. The use of this option must be approved by
the chairperson of the department or program. This
option must be indicated on the Independent Study
application and cannot be selected after the deadline to
add courses. In other words, this option is viable only
foranIndependentStudyoriginallydesignedtocover
two semesters and for which it is not realistic to assign
agradehalfwaythroughtheIndependentStudy.
5. For Independent Studies under the “no grade/double
grade” option, the deadline to withdraw without record
isthe“withdraw-without-record”deadlineforregular
coursesduringtherstsemester.Awithdrawalbeyond
that date, but during therst semester, will result in
a “W” (withdrawal with record) on the student’s
transcriptforonlytherstsemester.Withdrawal(after
the “withdraw-without-record” deadline) during the
secondsemesterwillresultina“W”onthestudent’s
transcript for both semesters.
INTERNSHIPS-FOR-CREDIT
Studentsmayearnacademiccreditforaninternshipduringthe
summeroracademicyear.AnInternship-for-Credit(“IFC”)has
two primary components, both of which are expected to take
placeoverthesametimeperiod.Therstcomponentinvolves
on-site duties and responsibilities—the structured practical
experience articulated through a Job Description provided
by the employer or sponsoring organization. The second
componentisencompassedinanEducationalPlandeveloped
bythestudentinconjunctionwithhis/her/theirfacultysponsor,
and includes a bibliography of related readings, a schedule of
agreed-upon consultations between the student and faculty
sponsor, and a description of the nal gradedwork product
(i.e.project,paper,orperformance)thestudentwillcomplete
for the faculty sponsor. The faculty member will receive a
briefappraisalofthestudent’sperformancefromtheon-site
supervisor.
ThefollowingregulationsgovernInternships-for-Credit:
1. To apply for an IFC, students must:
a.Havesophomore,junior,orseniorstatus;
 b.Haveacumulativegradepointaverage(“GPA”)of
atleasta2.0.StudentswhoseGPAislessthan2.0
maypetitiontheCommitteeonAcademicStatusfor
anexemption;
c.Have secured an internship with an off-campus
organizationforwhichtheyareseekingcredit.
d.Have identied and secured the agreement of an
F&M faculty member to serve as the faculty sponsor
and adviser for the IFC experience.
2. AllIFCs aregraded ona Pass/No Passbasis.Credit
earned for passing an IFC will, accordingly, not count
towardastudent’smajororminor.
3. Once the student has completedthe IFC,the faculty
sponsor may receive a brief statement of appraisal of
thestudent’sperformancefromtheon-siteInternship
supervisor. However, the most important element in
determiningthegradewillbethoseitemsspeciedon
theEducationalPlanfortheIFC.
4. Thecostofa summer IFC is not covered by regular
tuitionandmustbehandleddirectlywiththeBusiness
Ofce.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 141
5. Students may receive one-half, one, or two course
credits for an IFC, depending upon the time commitment
per week or the length of the project. The most credit
studentscanearnper7-weekmodulewillbe.5credit
(for48-95hoursperworkduringeachmodule),with
1.0 credit after two modules.
6. Only two coursecredits from Internships may count
towardthecompletionofgraduationrequirements.
7. Students may simultaneously receive compensation
and credit for an internship.
TheOfceofStudent&Post-GraduateDevelopment(OSPGD)
facilitates the IFC program. IFC application materials along
with detailed instructions, guidelines and Educational Plan
samples may be found online at OSPGD’s IFC website.
Students must complete all aspects of the IFC application,
includingtheEducationalPlanandInternshipDescription,and
secure the signatures of his/her/their Internship Supervisor,
AcademicAdvisor, Faculty Sponsor, and Faculty Sponsor’s
Department Chair before submitting the IFC application
packettoOSPGD.
COMMUNITY-BASED
LEARNING SEMINARS
Community-Based Learning (CBL) seminars integrate
experiential learning in the community with academic learning
in the classroom. Coursework takes a critical perspective on
theseminar’s topic andrequiressignicantreectiononthe
experiential learning. The experiential learning component
varies from course to course: instructors may cultivate
internshipsforthestudentsordesignaseriesofcommunity-
based experiences.
ThefollowingregulationsgovernCBLseminars:
1. Theexpectationforclassroomtimeis2–3hoursper
week, and the expectation for experiential learning is
5–6hoursperweek,foratotalrangeof7–9hours.
2. CBL seminars are either designated a course in the
curriculum (and carry a departmental/programmatic
prex with the additional notation of “CBL”) or
be designated a CBL-IFC. Either way, the seminar
requires the approval of the instructor’s department/
program chair.
3. Thecoursesareofferedatthe200-,300-,or400-level.
4. There is no limit to the number of CBL seminars a
student may take.
EXCHANGE OPPORTUNITIES
The following policies govern course registration in the
exchange programs at Millersville University, the Lancaster
Theological Seminary and the Central Pennsylvania
Consortium colleges of Gettysburg College and Dickinson
College:
1. Only courses that are not available at Franklin &
Marshall College may be taken at another institution
for credit.
2. A student may register for one course per semester at
Millersville University or the Lancaster Theological
Seminary.Astudentmayspendasemesterorayearin
residenceatGettysburgCollegeorDickinsonCollege,
in addition to the option of taking one course per
semester while in residence at Franklin & Marshall.
3. PermissionformsmustbeobtainedfromtheRegistrar,
and the course must be included on the student’s
Franklin & Marshall schedule.
4. Thisfreeexchangeprovisionpertainsonlytoregular
semesters(Fall and Spring)andisopenonlytofull-
time,matriculated(degreecandidate)students.
5. Under the exchange procedure, three-credit-hour
offerings are awarded a full course credit at Franklin &
Marshall College. This provision applies to all courses at
theexchangeinstitutions,includingthose(e.g.summer
courses)notcoveredbytheexchangeagreement.
6. Suchcoursesarenotedonthestudent’sacademicrecord
with the assigned grades indicated and included in the
student’s grade point average calculations. Exchange
courses may be taken Pass/No Pass if appropriate.
This provision applies to all courses at the exchange
institutions,includingthose(e.g.summercourses)not
covered by the exchange agreement.
7. Enrollmentinexchangeprogramsmaydelaygraduation
clearance for second-semester seniors. Franklin &
Marshallcreditisgivenonlyuponreceiptofanofcial
transcript sent directly from the exchange institution to
theFranklin&MarshallRegistrar’sOfce.
8. Ifacourseisrepeatedafterhavingreceivedanoriginal
gradeof“D+,”“D,”“D-,”“F,”or“NP,”therepeatmust
take place at the same institution at which the course
was originally taken. In particular, courses originally
taken at Franklin & Marshall that are eligible to be
repeated may not be repeated at an exchange institution.
EARLY COMPLETION OF THE DEGREE
In some cases, students may be able to complete their degree
requirements in fewer than eight semesters at Franklin &
Marshall. Credits earned prior to matriculation through the
AdvancedPlacement,International Baccalaureate, orrelated
systems, taking additional courses during summers, or
taking course overloads during semesters may lead to early
completion of the degree for some students.
Students contemplating the completion of their degree
in fewer than eight semesters should discuss this matter with
their academic adviser as early as possible. For students who
pursue this possibility, special advising resources are available
to assist the student in creating a plan that is feasible and
educationally sound.
EVALUATION AND GRADES
It is College policy that members of the faculty judge the
academic qualityof students’ workand assign a grade as a
measure of their evaluation. This responsibility may not be
delegated.
RETURN OF STUDENT WORK
All work submitted by students for evaluation in a course must
be returned to them as expeditiously as possible, usually within
two weeks of submission. With the exception of term papers,
work submitted prior to the nal week of classes should
normallybereturnednolaterthanthenalclassperiod.
142 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
PRIVACY POLICY
It is the policy of Franklin & Marshall College to ensure that
student grades are a private matter between student and faculty
member, to be shared only with authorized ofcials of the
College, unless the student signs a statement giving permission
for his or her grades to be released to a third party, or as
otherwise permitted by law. This policy entails the following:
1. All graded student assignments must be returned
individually to students in such a way as to protect
thecondentialityofthegradeandtheprivacyofthe
student.
2. In many cases, it is helpful for students to know the
distributionofgradesforanassignmentwithoutspecic
identicationofgradesforindividualstudents.Incases
where the instructor believes this to be appropriate to
the goals and methods of a particular course, he or
sheshouldregularlyinformstudentsoftheclass-wide
grade distribution on graded assignments.
3. Student grades may not be publicly posted; instead,
grades must be communicated individually to students.
GRADES
Thelettergradingsystemuses12passinggrades(“A”through
“D-,”and“P”)andtwofailinggrades(“F”and“NP”).Their
numerical values, used to calculate a student’s grade point
average, are as follows:
A — 4.00 C — 2.00
A- — 3.70 C- — 1.70
B+ — 3.30 D+ — 1.30
B — 3.00 D — 1.00
B- — 2.70 D- — 0.70
C+ — 2.30 F — 0.00
“P” (Pass) and “NP” (No Pass) grades are not used in
calculatingastudent’sgradepointaverage.
Thefollowingdenitionsofferverbaldescriptionsofthevalue
of grades:
A,A-=EXCELLENT.Workofconsistentlyhighstandard,
showing distinction.
B+, B, B- = GOOD. Work showing superiority in
such qualities as organization, accuracy, originality,
understanding and insight.
C+,C,C-=SATISFACTORY.Workthatfulllsessential
requirements in quality and quantity and meets the
acceptable standard for graduation from Franklin &
Marshall College.
D+, D, D- = PASSING. Work that falls below the
acceptable grade point average standard for graduation,
yet is deserving of credit in the course.
F, NP = FAILING. Work undeserving of credit in the
course.An“NP”gradedoesnotaffectastudent’sgrade
point average.
I=INCOMPLETE:seethefollowingsection.
NC=NOCREDIT(foractivitiesofferedonanon-credit
basis).
NG=NOGRADE.Atemporarymarkindicatingthenal
grade has not yet been submitted.
Course rosters do not distinguish between students taking
acourseonaPass/NoPassbasisandstudentstakingacourse
onaletter-gradedbasis.Facultymembersreportlettergrades
forallstudents,includingthosetakingthecourseonaPass/
No Pass basis.Grades of“A” to “C-” are convertedby the
Registrarto“P.”Grades of“D+”through“F”areconverted
to“NP.”Anyquestions concerningthe Pass/No Passoption
shouldbedirectedtotheRegistrar’sOfce.
INCOMPLETE GRADE
AtemporarygradeofIncomplete(“I”)isgivenbyafaculty
member, only with the prior approval of a College House
Dean, when a student is not able to complete the required
work in a course within the normal time period. Incompletes
areauthorizedonlywhenthereareextenuatingcircumstances
beyondthestudent’scontrol.AnIncompleteisneverjustied
when the student simply has neglected to complete course
work on time.
There may be courses in which the content or format
make Incomplete grades inappropriate. Moreover, if a student
has been absent from a number of classes or has a substantial
number of assignments outstanding, an Incomplete grade may
also not be appropriate.
Incomplete grades are to be replaced by permanent grades
nolaterthanthirtydaysaftertheendofthenalexamination
period in any semester.* This deadline is subject to appeal
to the Vice President andDean ofStudentAffairs.In cases
in which the course work is not completed by the assigned
deadline,andanextensionhasnotbeenrequestedandgranted,
thegradeof“I”maybeautomaticallyconvertedtoan“F”in
theRegistrar’sofce.
*For2020-2021,Incompletegradesforeithermodulemustbe
replaced by permanent grades no later than thirty days after the
end of the semester.
GRADE REPORTS
Grades are reported to students through their transcripts through
Inside F&M. In compliance with the Family Educational
RightsandPrivacyActof1974,Franklin&MarshallCollege
doesnotautomaticallysendgradestoparents.Studentsmay
authorize the regular release of grades to their parents by
signing a formal release form available in the Registrar’s
Ofce.Transcriptsmay be withheld from the student if the
student has an outstanding balance with the College.
RANK IN CLASS
All full-time students areranked bycumulative gradepoint
average at the end of each semester according to their
anticipatedgraduation yearasdeterminedbythe Registrar’s
Ofce.Whenstudentsgraduate,theyarerankedwithallother
studentswhowereawardeddegreesatthesametime.Rankin
classisprintedonstudents’ofcialtranscriptsonlyafterthey
have graduated.
TRANSCRIPTS
Ofcial transcripts are released by the Registrar’s Ofce to
designatedpartiesuponwrittenrequestbythestudent.Current
students may make these requests through Inside F&M, or
inpersonintheRegistrar’sOfce.Transcriptsaregenerally
mailedwithinthreeworkingdaysofthereceiptoftherequest.
Students requiring same day service may be charged a fee.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 143
Formerstudentsmayrequestatranscriptbymailingorfaxing
therequestformfoundatwww.fandm.edu/registrar.
Ofcialtranscriptsreleaseddirectlytothestudentwillbe
marked as such. There is no fee for this service if fewer than ten
transcriptsperacademicyeararerequested.Thisservicemay
be denied if the student or former student has an outstanding
balance with the College or if there is a pending disciplinary
matter.
CHANGES IN A RECORDED GRADE
Afterastudent’scoursegradeisofciallyrecorded,achange
may be made only with the approval of the Committee on
AcademicStatusthroughapetitionfromthefacultymember
stating good and sufcient reason for the change. Grade
changes may notbe requested onthe basis ofstudent work
submittedaftertheofcialgradingdeadline.
AsignicantpartoftheCommitteeonAcademicStatus’
rationaleisthatachangeinastudent’sgradeshouldbemade
only after grades for all students enrolled in that course have
been reviewed, and the instructor is reasonably sure that
no other student is affected unjustly by not having had an
equivalentreviewofhisorherreportedgrade.
The petition submitted by an instructor should include
bothanexplanationofthereasonswhythechangeisrequired
and a description of how discrimination against other students
has been prevented. A grade change petition form is available
intheRegistrar’sOfce.
APPEAL OF A GRADE BY STUDENTS
Studentsareentitledto objective, professional evaluation of
theiracademicworkandtofair,equitabletreatmentinthecourse
of their academic relationships with members of the faculty.
These criteria are observed by members of the Franklin &
Marshall faculty as a part of their professional responsibilities.
Misunderstandings have traditionally been resolved by
direct discussion between students and professors, and this
manner of resolving problems is normally both appropriate
andsufcient.Shouldastudent believethatheorshehasa
legitimate grievance regarding his or her grade for a course,
therststepisthustoconsultdirectlywiththeinstructorfor
the course. Instructors may have explicit guidelines for how
these appeals are to be registered, and students should follow
those guidelines if they exist.
If the student then believes that the grievance has not
been reconciled by this direct communication, he or she
may pursue the matter by consultation with the department
or program chair. In these instances, the student shall in a
written statement provide a full, fair account of the incident
or circumstances giving rise to the grievance. The chair shall
review the statement, talk or meet with the student, and talk
withtheprofessor.(Note:ifthedepartmentorprogramchair
is also the instructor for the course, the student should consult
directlywiththeOfceoftheProvost.)If,afterthisreview,the
chairndsthatthematterdoesnotmeritfurtherconsideration,
the chair shall inform the student and the professor of this
conclusion.
If, however, the chair nds that the matter is not
comprehended in established College regulations or for other
reason merits further consideration, the chair will bring the
mattertotheProvost(orProvost’sdesignee).Ifaninstructor
is no longer employed by the College, and does not respond
to inquiries from the student and the department chair in a
reasonable amount of time, the chair shall automatically bring
the matter to the attention of the Provost (or designee). In
addition,astudentmayappealthedepartmentchair’sdecision
nottopursueacomplainttotheOfceoftheProvost.
In all cases where such a complaint about a grade reaches
theOfceoftheProvost,thefollowingprocedureshallapply.
The Provost (or his/her designee) shall consult with the
departmentchair,andtogethertheywillreviewthestudent’s
statement, the conversations, and any other materials they
deem necessary. The Provost (or designee) will also hold a
direct conversation with the student, if the student so wishes,
and with the professor if deemed necessary. The chair and the
Provost(ordesignee)shallthenjointlydeterminearesolution
of the matter (which shall be submitted to the Provost in
cases where the Provost him- or herself was not a party to
the discussions). Inall such cases,only the Provosthas the
ultimateauthoritytoapprovegradechanges,andtheProvost’s
decisionshallbeconsiderednal.TheOfceoftheProvost
shall in all cases be mindful of the principles contained in the
College’sStatementofAcademicFreedomandTenure.If,in
thejudgmentoftheProvost,thegrievanceisofsuchgravitythat
its resolution would have an impact on the welfare of students
generally or on the conduct of professional responsibilities
inthe College, sheor he mayconsultwith theProfessional
StandardsCommitteeand/ortheCollege’sGeneralCounsel.
EXAMINATION PROCEDURES
FINAL EXAMINATIONS
SchedulesofnalexaminationsarepreparedbytheRegistrar
and published several weeks before the examination period
begins. All nal examinations are offered during three
examination periods each day that are up to three hours in
duration, scheduled as follows: 9 a.m.to noon;2 p.m. to 5
p.m.;7p.m.to10p.m.*Priortotheexamperiod,therearefour
reading days, during which no assignment, paper, or project
duedatesorsessionsthatrequireattendancemayoccur.
Athletic competitions, including those for both
intercollegiate and club teams, are not to be scheduled during
the nal exam period or the preceding “reading days.” The
exception to this policy is postseason competition associated
with Franklin & Marshall’s membership in the Centennial
Conference.
Examinations that cover a substantial portion of the
semester’s work, and that count a signicant percentage of
the semester grade, may not be given at a time other than the
designatednalexaminationperiod.
A student scheduled for three examination periods in a row
(whetheroveroneortwocalendardays)mayrequestamake-
up time for the second of the three examinations scheduled.
Such requests require a two-week advance approval by the
Registrar’sOfce,whichveriesthesituationandnotiesthe
professorinvolved.Facultymusthonorapprovedrequests.
Unless students are scheduled for three consecutive
examinations,theyareexpectedtotakeallnalsasscheduled.
Instructors are not permitted to make individual arrangements
or exceptions.
When individual students are faced with extenuating
144 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
circumstances beyond their control, a nal examination
mayberescheduledwiththeapprovaloftheRegistrar.This
examination must be taken no later than two days before the
ofcialdateforend-of-semestergrades.
Instructorsmaynotrescheduleanalexamforanentire
classwithouttheapprovaloftheRegistrar.IftheRegistrarhas
approvedthenaltoberescheduled,theRegistrarwillnotify
thestudentsandfacultymember.Ifanalisrescheduledand
no notication of ofcial approval has been received, the
studentsshouldcontacttheRegistrar.
No re-examinations are permitted for the purpose of
raising a grade.
* Final examschedules will bemodied for the2020-2021
academic year in order to accommodate the temporary
changetoamodulecalendar.Pleasevisitthewebpageofthe
Registrar’s Ofce, www.fandm.edu/registrar, for up-to-date
information.
PROFICIENCY EXAMINATIONS
Prociency examinations are available only to full-time
students and may not be taken for any course in which the
student registered during the previous calendar year or which
heorshehascompletedwithagrade(including“F”or“NP”)
atanytime.Aprociencyexaminationmaynotbetakenfor
any course that is a prerequisite for a course in which the
studenthaseverbeenenrolled.Studentswhoareapprovedto
take prociency examinations should not expect the faculty
to provide any special tutoring. Prociency examinations
are not intended to be taken so as to receive credit for work
substantially undertaken at Franklin & Marshall College but
for which credit has not been received.
Studentsinterestedinreceivingcreditthroughaprociency
examination must adhere to the following procedures:
a. The student must secure permission from the
department chairperson to take the examination; the
chairpersonhastherighttodenysuchrequests.Ifthe
chairperson grants the request, he or she completes
an Application (available in the Registrar’s Ofce)
indicatingtheagreed-upondateoftheexamination.
b. The student takes the Application to the Cash Handling
ofce in the Steinman College Center, pays a non-
refundable prociency examination fee of $100, and
receives a receipt. The Application and receipt are
returned to the chairperson.
c. The chairperson sends the Application and receipt,
with his or her signature certifying approval, to the
Registrar and indicates the date the Registrar can
expectthedepartment’sdecisionastocreditawarded.
The chairperson also consults with the instructor of
the course to determine the best time and place for the
examinationandnotiestheRegistrarofthatdecision.
d. The student takes the examination on the assigned date.
The student may expect the results of the examination
shortly after the deadline established by the chairperson
fortheresultstobesubmittedtotheRegistrar.
e. The chairperson noties the Registrar’s Ofce of
both positive and negative results of all prociency
examinations.
f. TheRegistrar’sOfceinformsthestudentandhisorher
academic adviser of the results. Only results awarded
coursecreditarerecordedonthestudent’spermanent
record.Nogradeisassigned;thecoursedoesnotcount
aseitherPass/NoPassoraregularlygradedcourse.
Each credit earned through a prociency examination
reducesthestudent’s32-course-creditgraduationrequirement
byanequivalentamountofcoursecredit.Suchcoursecredits
cannotcounttowardthe16coursecreditsthatmustbeearnedat
Franklin & Marshall College nor toward the 21 course credits
thatmustbeearnedwithstandardgrades.Studentsmaynot
earn credit for courses in basic language in modern languages
(normallytherstfourcoursesinthesequence)byprociency
examination.
For any approved prociency examination in a course
not in the Franklin & Marshall curriculum, the student is
responsible for any fees of outside examiners, in addition to
theregularFranklin&Marshallprociencyexaminationfee
of $100 per course.
TRANSFER OF CREDIT
POLICIES
All transfer students will be expected to adhere to all graduation
requirements listed in this Catalog unless noted otherwise
below.
Transfer credit is only considered for college courses that
are documented on an ofcial transcript sent directlyto the
Registrar’sOfcefromtheoriginalinstitution.
Speciccoursesareapprovedfortransfercreditbasedon
the following considerations:
a. Existence of comparable courses in the Franklin &
Marshallcurriculum;*
b. Accreditation of the institution offering the course
(coursestakenatinstitutionsaccreditedbyoneofthe
regional accrediting commissions are generally eligible
fortransferconsideration);
c. Intended eld of concentration (including related
courses);
d. GeneralEducationrequirements;and
e. Gradesearned(“C-”orbetterisrequiredforcourses
takenpriortomatriculation;“D-”orbetterisrequired
for courses taken after matriculation; courses taken
onaPass/NoPassbasisaregenerallynoteligiblefor
transfercredit).
*Subjectsgenerallynotapprovedfortransfercreditinclude:
i. Technicalcourses;
ii. Communications courses
(includingoralcommunications);
iii. Mosteducationcourses;
iv. Engineeringcourses;
v. Physicaleducationcourses;
vi. Criminaljusticecourses;
vii. Secretarialcourses;
viii.Draftingcourses;
ix. Coursesinmilitaryscience;
x. Realestatecourses;
xi. Vocal or instrumental music lesson credits.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 145
TRANSFER CREDIT
PRIOR TO MATRICULATION
(TRANSFER STUDENT)
College credit earned prior to matriculation at Franklin &
Marshall College is transferred on the basis of courses in
whichthestudenthasearnedgradesof“C-”orbetter.Thetotal
amount of Franklin & Marshall transfer credit is determined
by dividing the total semester hours of approved credit by four
(thenumberofcredithourspercourseatFranklin&Marshall
College).(Transfersfrom aquarter-hour system dividetotal
quarterhoursbysix.)
Astudentmustcompleteaminimumof16coursecredits
at Franklin & Marshall College regardless of the amount of
credittransferredandevenifallotherdegreerequirementscan
bemetwithfewerthan16coursecredits.
Grades in transferred courses are not included in the
Franklin & Marshall grade point average. Thus, they are not
taken into account in the determination of College honors.
Grades in transferred courses taken prior to matriculation
arenotpostedonastudent’sFranklin&Marshalltranscript.
Transfer credit for graded college courses will count toward
therequirementthatastudentmustpass21regularlygraded
credits to graduate from Franklin & Marshall College.
Online courses may transfer upon approval of the
appropriate academic department chairperson. They are
awarded general elective credit only.
Franklin & Marshall College grants credit for some
nontraditional course work, such as the following:
a. Armed Services Language Institutes (transcripts
evaluated with approval of appropriate language
departmentchairperson)
b. Nursingdegree(uptoeightcoursecredits)
c.
AdvancedPlacementExaminations(seepages145–146)
d. InternationalBaccalaureateDiploma(seepage146)
e. CLEPSubjectTests(seepage146)
f. Prociency examinations (see page 143, under
ExaminationProcedures).
CredentialsfrominstitutionsoutsideoftheUnitedStates
are evaluated on a case-by-case basis and may require the
servicesofacoursecreditevaluationagencyatthestudent’s
expense.
Courses in question are referred to the department
chairperson,whosedecisionisthenalauthority.
Incoming transfer students are granted Franklin &
Marshall credit upon receipt of their nal ofcial transcript
from their previous institution. This transcript must be mailed
or sent via a secure electronic transcript service directly from
thepreviousinstitutiontotheFranklin&MarshallRegistrar’s
Ofce.
Transfercreditforcollegecourseworkispartofastudent’s
ofcialeducationrecord.Oncetransfercreditisawardedfora
course, the course cannot be removed from the student record.
TRANSFER OF CREDIT
AFTER MATRICULATION
Nocreditmaybetransferredforcoursestakenduringafallor
spring semester in which the student is enrolled at Franklin &
Marshall.
Transfer of credit requires approval of the appropriate
department chairperson at Franklin & Marshall College before
the course is taken. Credentials from institutions outside of the
UnitedStatesareevaluatedonacase-by-casebasisandmay
requiretheservicesofacoursecreditevaluationagencyatthe
student’sexpense.
TransfercoursesmaynotcounttowardtheNaturalScience
inPerspective(NSP)requirementunlesstheyaredetermined
by the appropriate department chairperson to be the direct
equivalentofanexistingFranklin&MarshallNSPcourse.
Online courses may transfer upon approval of the appropriate
academic department chairperson. They are awarded general
elective credit only.
The amount of transfer credit awarded for a successfully
completed, approved course is determined only on the basis of
thefollowingequation:
Franklin&Marshallcoursecredits=numberofsemester
hoursdividedbyfour,ORnumberofquarterhoursdividedby
six(tothenearest.25,minimum:.25)
Bythisformula,thefollowingFranklin&Marshallcredit
equivalenciescanbemadeforasinglecourse:
1semesterhour = .25F&Mcoursecredit
2semesterhours = .50F&Mcoursecredit
3semesterhours = .75F&Mcoursecredit
4semesterhours = 1.00F&Mcoursecredit
1quarterhour = noF&Mcredit
2quarterhours = .25F&Mcoursecredit
3quarterhours = .50F&Mcoursecredit
4quarterhours = .75F&Mcoursecredit
5quarterhours = .75F&Mcoursecredit
6quarterhours = 1.00F&Mcoursecredit
It is important to note that while the department chairperson
determines what course a student can take to transfer credit
andwhatspeciccourserequirementatFranklin&Marshall
Collegewillbemetthroughtakingthecourse(major,minoror
elective),thechairpersoncannotauthorizeastudenttotransfer
credit according to any formula other than that explained
above.
If Franklin & Marshall credit is received for a specic
course that was taken elsewhere, then the student may not
retake the course at Franklin & Marshall.
Transfercreditforcollegecourseworkispartofastudent’s
ofcialeducation record. Oncetransfer creditis awarded,it
cannot be removed from the student record.
GRADES FOR APPROVED TRANSFER
AND STUDY ABROAD CREDIT AFTER
MATRICULATION
1. In order to receive transfer credit, a passing grade must
beearned(“D-”orabove)andmustbereectedonan
ofcialtranscriptsentdirectlytotheRegistrar’sOfce
from the host institution.
2. Allcoursesmustbetakenforaregulargrade(notPass/
NoPass).
3. All transferred grades, including failing grades, will
be entered onto the Franklin & Marshall transcript but
will not be calculated into the Franklin & Marshall
cumulative grade point average. One set of exceptions
regards work completed at a Central Pennsylvania
Consortium institution, the Lancaster Theological
Seminary, or through the Millersville Exchange
146 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
program. An additional exception regards courses taken
in the fall, spring, or summer sessions of Advanced
Studies in England.All courses taken by Franklin &
MarshallstudentsatASEwillbetreated the sameas
courses taken at Franklin & Marshall; the grades for
ASEcourseswillbecountedintheFranklin&Marshall
cumulative GPA with four semester-hour courses
receiving one Franklin & Marshall credit.
4. Transfercreditmaynotbereceivedforacoursealready
taken at Franklin & Marshall College.
5. Courses taken at Franklin & Marshall for which a
gradeof“D+”,“D”,“D-”,“F”,or“NP”wasreceived
may not be repeated at another institution. Students
may petition the Committee onAcademic Status for
exceptions to this policy.
Specialpoliciesand procedures apply for coursestaken
aspartofasemester(oryear-long)studyabroadprogramor
adomesticoff-campusafliatedprogram.Interestedstudents
shouldconsulttheOfceofInternationalProgramsforpolicies
and procedures in this area.
ADVANCED PLACEMENT
Franklin & Marshall College participates in the Advanced
Placement Program of the College Entrance Examination
Board. A student who takes an Advanced Placement
examination is given college credit if the subject matter of the
AdvancedPlacementcourseandexaminationiscomparableto
that covered in an elementary course taught by a Franklin &
Marshalldepartmentuponreceiptofthestudent’sofcialgrade
reportsentfromtheCollegeBoardtoFranklin&Marshall.
The following Franklin & Marshall course credits are
currentlyawardedifastudentachievesatestscoreof4or5on
theAdvancedPlacementsubjectslisted:
AP Subject Franklin & Marshall Course
StudioArt:2Dor3D ARTElective
StudioArt:Drawing ARTElective
ArtHistory ARTElective
Biology BIO 179 (fullls Natural
SciencewithLab)
CapstoneResearch GeneralElective
CapstoneSeminar GeneralElective
Chemistry CHM179*
ChineseLanguage/Culture CHN302
ComputerScienceA CPS111
ComputerSci.Principles GeneralElective
Economics(Macro) GeneralElective
Economics(Micro) GeneralElective
(forAPEconomicsexams
taken prior to 2020, if credit
is awarded for both Macro
and Micro Economics, one
credit is general elective and
onecreditisECO100)
EnglishLiterature/Comp. GeneralElective
EnglishLanguage/Comp. GeneralElective
EnvironmentalScience GeneralElective
FrenchLanguage/Culture FRN202
(forAPFrenchexamstaken
in 2020, general elective
creditisawarded.)
Human Geography General Elective
GermanLanguage/Culture GER202
(forAPGermanexamstaken
in2020,GERelectivecredit
isawarded.)
Govt&Pol:U.S. GOV100
Govt&Pol:Comparative GOV120
U.S.History HIS138
(ForAPU.S.Historyexams
taken in 2020, only general
electivecreditisawarded.)
EuropeanHistory HIS121
WorldHistory HISElective
ItalianLanguage/Culture ITA202
JapaneseLanguage/CultureJPN301forascoreof5;
JPN201forascoreof4
Latin LAT179
CalculusAB MAT109
CalculusBC MAT109
Statistics GeneralElective
MusicTheory MUS222
Physics1 PHY101†
Physics2 PHY101†
Psychology GeneralElective
SpanishLanguage/Culture SPA221
(ForAPSpanishLanguage
examstakenin2020,SPA
202creditisawarded.)
SpanishLiterature/Culture SPA222
(ForAPSpanishLiterature
examstakenin2020,SPA
221creditisawarded.)
*MaynotbeusedtowardtheNaturalSciencedistribution
requirement(NaturalSciencewithlaborNaturalSciencesin
Perspective).
†StudentsmayearncreditforeitherPhysics1orPhysics
2, but not both. The maximum amount of credit awarded for
PHY101is1credit.
Advanced Placement examination subscores will be
considered.Furtherdetailscanbefoundatwww.fandm.edu/
registrar/managing-credits/advanced-placement.
When a student is awarded credit and advanced placement,
thefact,butnograde,isenteredonthestudent’spermanent
record,andthenumberofcoursesrequiredforgraduationis
reducedbythenumberofcoursesforwhichcreditisgiven.Such
creditwillsatisfyamajororminorrequirementifthecourseis
listedintheCatalogassatisfyingthatrequirement.Whethera
studentisawardedcreditformorethanonesemester’sworkin
a single subject is determined by the department concerned.
These procedures do not permit the granting of two college
creditsforthesamework(e.g.,introductorycalculustakenin
highschoolandrepeatedatFranklin&MarshallCollege).Ifa
studentisofciallyenrolledattheendofthesecondweekof
classes for a course at Franklin & Marshall College for which
Advanced Placement credit has been awarded, the student
forfeits the awarding of this credit.
ThereisnolimitonthenumberofAdvancedPlacement
course credits a student may receive, but these credits cannot
count toward the 16 course credits that must be earned at
Franklin & Marshall College nor toward the 21 course credits
that must be earned with standard grades.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 147
COLLEGE CREDITS TAKEN
IN HIGH SCHOOL
Franklin & Marshall College will normally accept, in transfer,
only those college credits taken while the student attended high
school that are earned under all of the following conditions:
1. The course was taught on the campus of a college
accredited by one of the regional accrediting
associations;
2. The course was taught by a regular member of the
collegefaculty;
3. The student was enrolled in a course with degree
candidatesofthatcollege;and
4. Thecoursewasaregularpartofthecurriculumofthe
college.
Students wishing to appeal these policies may do so to the
AssociateDeanoftheFaculty.Allotherpolicieslistedunder
“TransferCreditPriortoMatriculation”apply.
CREDIT BASED ON INTERNATIONAL
ACADEMIC CREDENTIALS
International Baccalaureate (IB) diploma recipients with a
totalscoreof30ormoreareawardedeightcoursecredits(one
full year) toward the Franklin & Marshall degree. Subjects
not eligible for transfer credit will be deducted from the total
IB transfer award. IB Certicate recipients receive one or
twocoursecredits(dependingondiscipline)foreachhigher
level examination in an eligible subject passed with a score
of 5 or higher. IB credits may be counted toward major or
minorrequirementsorelectivescontingentupondepartmental
approval.
FrenchBaccalauréat andGermanAbitur recipients may
begrantedcreditforuptoonefullyear(eightcoursecredits)
toward a degree at Franklin & Marshall College.
The College generally awards credit to students who have
passedBritish“A”Levelexaminationswithagradeof“C”or
higherineligiblesubjects.SeetheRegistrarfordetails.
Other course credits from countries outside of the United
States are evaluated on an individual basis. If an accurate
evaluation of these credentials is not possible, the student may
beaskedtosecure,athis/herexpense,aprofessionalevaluation
from an appropriate agency.
COLLEGE LEVEL EXAMINATION
PROGRAM (CLEP)
Franklin&MarshallCollegeparticipatesintheCLEPprogram
of The College Board, accepting scores of 50 or higher in
subject area tests as entrance credits. Matriculated students
must receive the prior approval of the appropriate department
chairperson.
WITHDRAWAL
FROM THE COLLEGE
StudentswhowithdrawvoluntarilyfromtheCollege(including
those who transfer to another institution) must notify their
CollegeHouseDeaninwriting.Studentswhowithdrawfrom
theCollegeareexpectedtocompleteanExitSurvey.
The deadline for withdrawal from the College to exclude
grades for the current semester is the last day of classes. All
other withdrawals become effective with the beginning of the
next semester.
WITHDRAWAL FEE SCHEDULE/
REFUND POLICY
TheHigherEducationAmendmentsof1992requirethateach
institution participating in a Title IV program have a fair and
equitablerefundpolicyineffect.
Whenastudentwithdraws,changesfromfull-timetopart-
timestatus,ortakesaleaveofabsence,andofciallynoties
the Ofce of Student Affairs, the College will then refund
tuition, housing and meal plan charges previously paid by
the student. Please consult therefund schedulepublished at
https://www.fandm.edu/student-accounts-and-billing/f-m-fall-
2020-tuition-refund-withdraw-fee-scheduleforthe2020-2021
academic year.
Forthosestudentswhoarereceivinginstitutionalnancialaid,
institutional grants will be reduced according to the published
schedule. Federal funds will be returned as prescribed by the
DepartmentofEducationusingReturntoTitleIVregulations.
LEAVE POLICY
There are four types of Leaves of Absence subject to the
various conditions described in the following sections. See
alsoInternationalandOff-CampusStudy.
LEAVES OF ABSENCE
The following conditions apply to all Leaves of Absence:
1. TheCollegeretainstheMatriculationDepositandthe
AdvanceRegistrationDeposit.
2. A student on Leave of Absence must meet the normal
deadlines for applying for aid in order to be considered
for funding for the semester in which he or she plans to
return.
3.Commencing with the last day of enrollment before
the leave takes effect, a student who has taken out an
educationalloanhasasix-monthgraceperiodbefore
repayment of the loan must begin.
4.AstudentonLeaveofAbsencemaynotbeoncampus
withoutthepermissionoftheOfceofStudentAffairs.
5.AstudentonLeaveofAbsencemaynottakecourses
at another institution for transfer credit, unless an
exception is approved as noted below.
A. Leave of Absence for Health Reasons
1. RecommendationsforaLeaveofAbsenceforHealth
Reasons take the form of a written statement from
the F&M Student Wellness Center to the College
House Dean. Under certain circumstances, upon the
recommendationoftheF&MStudentWellnessCenter,
astudentmaybeplacedonrequiredLeaveofAbsence
forHealthReasons.Adetailedcopyofthis policyis
availablefromtheOfceofStudentAffairs.
2. ArequestforaLeaveofAbsenceforHealthReasons
148 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
may be made at any time.
3. A Leave of Absence for Health Reasons is granted
either for a specied length of time (usually one or
two semesters) or for an unspecied length of time,
depending upon the nature of the reason for the leave.
4. WhenastudentisgrantedaLeaveofAbsenceforHealth
Reasonsduringthecourseofasemester,thegradeof
“W”willnormallyberecordedforcoursesinwhichthe
student is enrolled that semester. If appropriate, and if
theinstructorisagreeable,a“W”maybereplacedbya
regular grade upon completion of work. A student who
is interested in pursuing this option must contact the
OfceofStudentAffairs.
5. Students who areon aLeave ofAbsence for Health
Reasons may not take courses at another institution
for transfer credit without rst obtaining written
permissionfromtheF&MStudentWellnessCenter.If
such approval is granted, transfer coursework is subject
to the College’s policies onTransferof CreditAfter
Matriculation.
6. AstudentwhoisreadytoreturntoFranklin&Marshall
College must notify the Ofce of StudentAffairs in
writing. Such notication must be accompanied by
supporting medical documentation, which should
be submitted to the F&M Student Wellness Center.
Notication is normally required no later than May
1for the fallsemester orDecember1 for thespring
semester.
B. Leave of Absence for Personal Reasons
1. A request for a Leave of Absence for Personal
ReasonsmustbemadetotheCollegeHouseDean.A
leaveisnormallygrantedonlyiftherequestismade
no later than May 1 for the fall semester or January
1 for the spring semester, and only if a student is in
good academic standing for his or her most recently
completed semester.
2. Arequest may bemadefor a varietyof reasons;for
example, a student may wish to work or travel for a
time, or may need some time away from the College to
consider future academic plans and goals. This leave is
grantedforaspeciedperiodoftime.
3. AstudentwhoisonaLeaveofAbsenceforPersonal
Reasons may not take courses at another institution
for transfer credit without rst obtaining written
permissionfromtheCommitteeonAcademicStatus.If
such approval is granted, transfer coursework is subject
to the College’s policies onTransferof CreditAfter
Matriculation.
4.AstudentwhoisreadytoreturntoFranklin&Marshall
College must notify the Ofce of StudentAffairs in
writing.Noticationisnormallyrequirednolaterthan
May 1 for the fall semester or December 1 for the
spring semester.
C. Leave of Absence for Academic or Disciplinary Reasons
1. A student may be placed on a Leave of Absence for
AcademicReasons.
2. Studentsmaybesuspendedforoneortwosemesters
because of administrative or Committee on Student
Conduct disciplinary action.
3. StudentswhoareonaLeaveofAbsenceforAcademic
Reasons may not take courses at another institution
for transfer credit without rst obtaining written
permissionfromtheCommitteeonAcademicStatus.If
such approval is granted, transfer coursework is subject
to the College’s policies onTransferof CreditAfter
Matriculation.
4. Students who are on a Leave of Absence for
DisciplinaryReasonsmaynottakecoursesatanother
institution for transfer credit without rst obtaining
writtenpermissionfromtheVicePresidentandDean
ofStudentAffairs..Ifsuchapprovalisgranted,transfer
coursework is subject to the College’s policies on
Transfer of Credit After Matriculation.
D. Leave of Absence for Financial Reasons
1. A student may be placed on a Leave of Absence for
FinancialReasons.
2. StudentswhoareonaLeaveofAbsenceforFinancial
Reasonsmaynottakecoursesatanotherinstitutionfor
transfer credit.
READMISSION
TO THE COLLEGE
Any person who has resigned or withdrawn from Franklin &
Marshall College and wishes to be readmitted should contact the
OfceofAdmissioninordertoapplytoreturn.Readmissionis
notguaranteed.ReturnfromaLeaveofAbsenceorApproved
Off-Campus Study is not considered readmission. When a
studentisreadmitted,thegraduationrequirementsarethose
that were in place when the student originally matriculated.
ASSESSMENT OF
INSTRUCTION
BY STUDENTS
At the end of each semester, students have the opportunity to
provide the College with their assessments of the effectiveness
of teaching in courses they have taken. These assessments
of courses and instructors are submitted anonymously on a
questionnaire, which includes some standard questions and
somespecictothecourse.Thequestionnairesarecompleted
in class every semester in courses taught by untenured faculty
members and in alternate calendar years in the courses taught
bythosewithtenure.Theresponsestothesequestionnairesare
tabulatedandtheresultsaredistributedonlytotheProvostand
Dean of theFaculty, theProfessional StandardsCommittee,
the chairperson of each faculty member’s department, and
the faculty members themselves. This information is used,
togetherwithotherevidencebearingonthequalityofafaculty
member’steaching,inmakingdecisionsonrehiring,promotion
and tenure. Students are expected to take the responsibility
of providing this information seriously by completing the
questionnairesasthoughtfullyandobjectivelyaspossible,and
by following closely the details of the process by which they
are administered.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 149
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
AT FRANKLIN & MARSHALL
Franklin & Marshall College recognizes that technology
plays a critical role in teaching, learning and research. We
alsorecognizehowessentialaroletechnologydoesandwill
play in the lives of our students both while at F&M and once
they graduate. To this end, the College strives to provide the
very best technology resources in support of the teaching and
learning mission of the institution.
The campus is well equipped with technology. Nearly
100%ofF&M’sclassroomsaretechnology-enabledteaching
spaces. The campus is 100% wireless enabled, including
outdoor areas where students often gather and study. While not
arequirement,nearly90%ofcurrentstudentshavefollowed
theCollege’srecommendationtobringapersonalcomputerto
campus. As well, there are public access computing facilities
on campus where all students have access to F&M provided
computers, including both campus libraries and the Kreisel
InnovationZoneonthelowerlevelofthePatriciaE.Harris
Center for Business, Government & Public Policy. These
publiccomputingspacesmakeavailablespecializedsoftware
that students may not have on their personal computers such
as statistical, mathematical and analytical applications. In
addition to the public access computers, many of the academic
departmentshavespecial-purposecomputinglabs.Accessto
printing is available to students across campus for a small fee
per page.
Franklin & Marshall has adopted Canvas, a course/
instructional management system. Canvas is a web-based
solution for online delivery of course-based instructional
materials. Many F&M faculty elect to use Canvas to provide
accesstocoursematerials.TheCollegeprovidesaweb-based
campus-wideinformationportalcalledInsideF&M.Through
Inside F&M, students can register for classes, examine
progress toward their degree, and check their grades and other
personal information. Faculty can manage their class rosters,
guide advisees and submit grades. Franklin & Marshall uses
GoogleAppsforEducationforemail,calendaring,lestorage
and other services. Google Apps is the primary tool for student
collaboration,lesharinganddocumentmanagement.
Providinggeneralassistanceintheuseofallinformation
technology resources is the responsibility of Information
Technology Services (ITS). Students are encouraged to visit
ITSatourservicedeskaswellasourtechnologylendingcenter
(TLC) located in the Kreisel Innovation Zone on the lower
leveloftheHarrisCenterforBusiness,GovernmentandPublic
Policy.ITScanalsobereachedbyphoneat717-358-6789.
The use of technology resources on campus is governed
by a collection of documented policies, and most notably
theCollege’sAcceptableUsePolicy.Thispolicydenesthe
appropriate use of Franklin & Marshall (F&M) information
assets. Those that violate this policy are subject to the full range
ofsanctionssetforthintheStudentHandbook,theEmployee
PolicyGuideaswellaslocal,state,andfederallaws.Attheir
discretion, the College Information Technology Committee
reserves the right to modify these policies at any point in time.
You can nd all technology-related policies, including the
AcceptableUsePolicy,ontheCollegewebsite:
www.fandm.edu/college-policies/technology/.
150 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
Franklin & Marshall College welcomes applications from
students who seek to participate in an engaging liberal arts
community.Studentsmostcompetitiveforadmissionarethose
who,inthejudgmentoftheAdmissionCommittee,willbenet
from and contribute to both the academic and co-curricular
programs of the College.
SELECTION
Selectionisbaseduponseveralcriteria,withthequalityofthe
student’ssecondaryschoolrecordasthemostimportant.The
best preparation for study at Franklin & Marshall is a rigorous
academic program that provides fundamental training in the
arts, English language, foreign language, history, literature,
mathematics and science. It is highly recommended that a
student have some combination of four years of strong English
language and literature courses, three to four years of a modern
or classical foreign language, four years of mathematics
resulting in a readiness for beginning college calculus, at least
two years of historical study and three years of study in the
natural sciences. The College also recommends students take
atleastveacademiccoursesduringtheirsenioryear.
Other factors considered in a student’s evaluation are
participation in co-curricular activities, standardized test
scores, recommendations and information concerning the
student’s personality and character. Students who do not
believe their standardized test scores reect their academic
ability are welcome to apply to Franklin & Marshall using our
StandardTestOption.
In order to apply using the Standardized Test Option,
students should indicate their testing preference on the
Common Application or Coalition Application when applying.
If scores have already been sent, applicants may send a written
requesttotheOfceofAdmissionviaemailtohavethescores
removed from their record.
International students who have not attended English-
based instruction for more than three years must submit either
aTOEFL,IELTS,orDuolingoEnglishTest.
CAMPUS VISIT
AND INTERVIEW
A campus visit and interview is welcomed and recommended.
On-campusinterviewsareavailablebyappointmentMonday
throughFridayfrom9:15a.m.to3:15p.m.Campustoursdepart
fromtheAdmissionOfce,MondaythroughFridayat10a.m.,
11a.m.,1p.m.,2p.m.and3p.m.Forthosewhoareunableto
visit the campus on a weekday, information sessions and tours
areconductedonselectSaturdays.Additionally,virtualandoff-
campus interviews are offered at various times throughout the
year. Interested parties are advised to schedule appointments
for interviews and campus visits at least two weeks in advance
bycontactingtheOfce ofAdmissionat(877)678-9111or
onlineatwww.fandm.edu/visit/admission-visit.
TYPES OF APPLICATION
EARLY DECISION
Candidates who identify Franklin & Marshall as their rst
choice college and desireearly noticationof anadmission
decisionareinvitedtoapplythroughthebindingEarlyDecision
agreement. Candidates who submit a completed application
andanEarlyDecisionAgreementbyNovember15forEarly
DecisionRoundI,willreceivenoticationbyDecember15;
thosewhoapplybyJanuary15,forEarlyDecisionRoundII,
willbenotiedbyFebruary15.
AnEarlyDecisioncandidatemayinitiateapplicationsto
other institutions. However, if offered admission to Franklin
& Marshall, the candidate is obligated to withdraw the other
applications and enroll at Franklin & Marshall. Admitted
students must submit their enrollment fee within one month of
admission.
EARLY NOTIFICATIONS FOR
MUSICIANS
High school seniors with prior musical experience who would
liketoreceiveearlyadmissionnoticationareencouragedto
apply through Early Music Notication. Interested students
mustauditiononselectfallSaturdaysforanadmissiondecision
by January 1. Auditions are open to composers, singers, and
instrumentalists.
In order to be eligible for early admission notication
auditions, interested students must submit their applications
and nancialaid materials by December 1. Based uponthe
Admission Committee’s review and the audition with the
MusicDepartment,anon-bindingadmissiondecisionwillbe
releasedbyJanuary1.Duetolimitedavailability,auditionswill
bescheduledonarst-come,rst-servedbasis.Theauditions
maybe either on campusorbySkype.Priortoascheduled
Skypeaudition,averybriefSkypetestwillbescheduledto
ensure compatibility of systems.
REGULAR ADMISSION
TheRegularDecisiondeadlineforsubmittingapplicationsand
allrequiredcredentialsisJanuary15.Anadmissionapplication
must be accompanied by a $60, non-refundable application
fee or valid fee waiver. Applicants for rst-year status are
notiedoftheAdmissionCommittee’sdecisionsbyApril1.
Admittedstudents’$500non-refundableenrollmentfeemust
be postmarked by May 1.
Admission to the College
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 151
HOME SCHOOLED
OR NON-TRADITIONALLY
EDUCATED STUDENTS
Studentswhoarehomeschooledoreducatedinanon-traditional
setting are welcome to apply to Franklin & Marshall College.
Candidates for admission who are educated in the home must
submit all required application paperwork. Students should
present a transcript from either a parent or outside evaluating
agency. If a parent serves as the primary source of evaluation
forthestudent,heorshemaysubmittheSchoolReportand
the Counselor Recommendation. The Ofce of Admission
recommends home schooled students submit a reading list
and have an on-campus interview. It is required that home
schooledstudentssubmitstandardizedtestscores.Ifastudent
has any concerns for Fall 2020 admission they are encouraged
tocontacttheOfceofAdmission..
TRANSFER STUDENTS
Transfer applicants are welcome for fall and spring semesters.
Transfer applicants are expected to be in good academic
and social standing at their present and any past colleges or
universities.
TheOfceofAdmissionmaintains anApril15priority
deadline for fall transfer applications and November 15 for
spring transfer admission. Applications completed after the
prioritydeadlineare reviewed on aspace-available basis.To
apply, a transfer application form must be accompanied by a
$60,non-refundableapplicationfeeandallrequiredapplication
materials. Fall transfer applications completed by the priority
deadlinewillbenotiednolaterthanJune1.Completedspring
applicationswillbenotiedbyDecember15.
Domesticand internationaltransferstudentsare eligible
for nancial assistance. Financial aid applications and all
supportingnancialaiddocumentationmustbesubmittedas
soonaspossible,butnolaterthanApril15forthefallsemester
andbyNovember15forthespringsemester.
Transfer candidates interested in Summer School study
should communicate directly with the Registrar’s Ofce by
phoneat(717)358-4168.
Questions regarding the transfer process should be
directedtotheOfceofAdmissionbycalling(717)358-3951
or(877)678-9111.
FINANCIAL AID
Approximately 60% of the students at Franklin & Marshall
receivesomeformofnancialaidfromavarietyofinstitutional,
publicandprivatesources.TheCollege’snancialaidpolicy
reectsadesiretoattractandretainadiversestudentbodyof
thehighestpossiblepromise.Forthosestudentstowhomneed-
based aid is offered, the College strives to meet the majority
of demonstrated need with grant funding. In most cases,
theCollege packages severalforms of nancialaid,usually
combining a grant with a student employment opportunity and
loan.
Franklin&MarshallisamemberoftheCollegeBoardand
theCollegeScholarshipService(CSS)andsubscribestothat
organization’s principles of nancialaid. Need-based grants
are provided to students who have demonstrated nancial
needasdeterminedfrominformationsubmittedontheCSS/
PROFILE form, the Free Application for Federal Student
Assistance(FAFSA),federaltaxdocuments(return,schedules,
W-2s)andifapplicable,theNoncustodialCSS/Proleform.
Asthestudentistheprimarybeneciaryoftheeducation,
Franklin&Marshallassumesthateachfamilywillrstmake
areasonablesacriceinnancingitschild’seducationbefore
applying to the College for assistance. Students receiving
nancial aid from the College are expected to work during
the summer to earn funds for their education. In addition, all
applicants must apply for any state, federal, or other awards
for which they may be eligible. Expected federal and state
grants usually replace institutional grants. Failure to complete
all applications for federal and state grants or to submit all
materials by the appropriate deadlines could result in the loss
of institutional funding.
For the purposes of awarding federal, state and institutional
nancialaidatFranklin&MarshallCollege,theAcademicYear
isdenedbytheAcademicCalendarandcomprisedoftwo15-
week semesters. In addition to standard term awarding, students
may receive federal or state aid for the summer terms, provided
they enroll in at least two courses at Franklin & Marshall College.
They may also receive federal or state aid when attending other
collegesinthesummer,providedtheyenrollintheequivalent
of six semester hours and complete a Consortium Agreement
providedbytheOfceofFinancialAid.
Institutional nancial aid may only be received for a
maximumofeightsemesters.Federalnancialaidrequiresa
student to meet the Federal Satisfactory Academic Progress
standardsthatarelistedontheOfceofFinancialAid’swebsite.
JOHN MARSHALL FELLOWS
TheJohnMarshallFellowProgramsupportsalimitednumber
ofstudentswho,duringtheirrstyearatFranklin&Marshall,
have demonstrated unusual motivation, spirit of achievement
and independence of thought. The program was created on
the premise that bright, curious minds ourish best when
challenged in an environment that gives highest priority to
individual interests and abilities. The Marshall Fellow is
eligibletoapplyfora$4000research/travelgranttoenhance
theFellow’sabilitytoengageinuniqueandpersonalacademic
pursuits, for example, supporting an on-campus research
project, doing research in another country, presenting research
at a professional conference, or completing a public service
project.
NATIONAL MERIT SCHOLARS
National Merit Scholars who are designated National Merit
Finalists and who notify the National Merit Scholarship
Corporation that Franklin & Marshall College is their rst
choice (by the date specied by the National Scholarship
Corporation) will be named National Merit Scholars. These
studentsmayreceiveaNationalMeritScholarshipCorporation
scholarship in addition to any Franklin & Marshall awards that
may be granted during the application process.
152 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
TUITION AND FEES
Each student is charged, on a semester by semester basis,
fees that cover tuition, room, board and most College charges
for activities, labs, and some special events. The cost to the
College of educating the student, of course, is well in excess
of these fees. The balance is provided principally by gifts from
alumni and friends and by income from endowments.
The schedule shown below indicates actual charges for
academic year 2020 – 2021 and is subject to change without notice
:
Tuition, Services & Activities Fee $60,872 per year
HealthServicesFee $115peryear
StudentActivityFee $75peryear
GeneralDeposit $200peryear
NewStudentOrientationFee $200(one-timefee)
This fee is charged in a student’s rst semester at F&M.
This is a non-refundable fee.
Housing/Room Fee Options:
StandardRoomFee(Double/Triple) $8,550peryear
SpecialRoomFee(Single) $8,550peryear
SuiteRoomFee $8,550peryear
NewCollegeHouseApartmentFee $8,550peryear
Meal Plan Options:
AllAccessMealPlan
$180FlexDollars* $5,900peryear
Required of all First Year students & Sophomores living in College
Residence Halls (NCH apartments exempt), available to Juniors &
Seniors. Plan includes unlimited re-entry into the dining hall w/10
meal swipes a week in retail locations.
125BlockMealPlan/
$220FlexDollars $5,260peryear
Available to Juniors & Seniors living in College residence halls or
students living off-campus.
70BlockMealPlan/
$225FlexDollars $3,690peryear
Available only to students living off-campus.
50BlockMealPlan/
$340FlexDollars $3,160peryear
Available only to students living off-campus.
Other Meal Plan Notes:
1.First-year & Sophomore students are required to
purchase a meal plan, unless they are commuting
students.Seeaboveforthemealplansthatareavailable
to First Years and Sophomores. Please contact the
Ofce of StudentAffairs todetermine ifa studentis
considered a commuter.
2.AmealplanisrequiredforstudentslivinginCollege
residence halls. Juniors & Seniors must select a 125
BlockPlanorhigher.StudentsinNewCollegeHouse
apartments are exempt.
3.Intheeventastudentdepletesthemealsintheirmeal
plan prior to the end of the semester, additional meals
canbepurchasedinincrementsofve.Pleasecheckthe
tuition and fees website for the rechargeable meal rates.
RechargeablemealsarenotapplicabletotheAll-access
meal plan.
Student Health Insurance Options:
StudentHealth
InsurancePlan(SHIP) $2,127peryear
Complementary Care Option $220 per year
Healthinsurancecoverageisrequiredforallfull-timestudents
to cover them for every day of their higher education career. This
includessummersandbreaks.TheStudentHealthInsurance
Plan(SHIP)isofferedtoFranklin&Marshallstudentsthrough
QM Services, our insuranceadministrator.The SHIP policy
runs fromAugust 1 through July 31. Complementary Care
coveragerunsfromAugust1toMay31.
TheSHIPcoveragecanbewaivedifthestudentprovides
veriable proof of comparable insurance coverage to QM
Services.The waiverprocess must becompleted byAugust
24.StudentswillbechargedfortheSHIPcoverageontherst
FalleBilloftheyear.Aswaiverinformationisreceivedbythe
CollegefromQMServices,thechargewillbereversedonthe
student’saccount.
If a student has personal insurance that allows the student
towaiveenrollmentinF&M’sSHIPbutthestudent’spersonal
planhaslimitedin-networkoptionsfortheLancasterareaand/
or a high deductible, the student may choose to purchase the
Complementary Care option.
InternationalstudentsarerequiredtopurchasetheSHIP
coverage.
UPDATE for Fall 2020:Domesticstudentsnotstudyingon
campus may enroll if they need coverage. International students
studying abroad are exempt from having to have coverage.
Other Fees:
Part-timestudents $7,609percourse
Those taking fewer than three credits in a semester.
ApplicationforAdmissionFee $60
Must accompany each application for admission to the
College. This is a non-refundable fee.
EnrollmentFee $500
Required of each incoming rst-year student, transfer student
or re-admitted student to reserve and maintain the student’s
position in the College. This is a non-refundable fee.
ProciencyExaminationFee $100percourse
Assessed for each prociency exam taken by a student to earn
credit for a course. This is a non-refundable fee.
LatePaymentFee $500persemester
Assessed on accounts that are not paid by the specied due
date.
ReturnedCheck/PaymentFee $25
Assessed for each returned payment.
Any student whose College bill remains unpaid at the time of
graduation is not eligible to receive a diploma. The College
reservestherighttorefusetoreleaseofcialtranscriptsofa
student’srecordsifbillsareunpaid.
TUITION REFUND INSURANCE
F&M has partnered with GradGuard to provide families with
tuition insurance. This coverage expands the scope of the
College’srefundpolicybyensuringreimbursementfortuition,
room & board and other fees for covered withdrawals at any
time during the semester. Please visit www.gradguard.com/
tuition/fandmorcallCustomerServiceat1-877-794-6603for
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 153
more information. The deadline to sign up for this insurance is
PRIORtotherstdayofclasses.
TUITION PAYMENT OPTIONS
All charges and fees for each semester are billed in advance
andmustbepaidinfullbythespeciedtermduedate.Franklin
& Marshall accepts payment in the form of check, cash,
money order, online via credit card (MasterCard, Discover,
AmericanExpress, or Visa),online via debitof achecking/
savingsaccountorviawiretransfer.Pleasenote-aconvenience
feeof2.75%willbechargedonalldomesticcredit/debitcard
payments(4.25%forinternationalcards).Allonlinepayments
are made through the Cashnet payment portal.
Franklin&Marshallrecognizesthatfullpaymentdueat
the beginning of each semester may present a challenge, so
the College has payment plan options available through the
Cashnet payment portal. These plans provide a convenient
alternativetolumpsumsemesterpayments.Paymentplansare
nowavailablebysemester(notfull-year).
Studentaccountsthatremainunsettledattheendof
a semester will be reviewed by the Committee on Student
FinancialStatus.Intheeventthatanaccountremainsunpaid,
the student may be placed on a Leave of Absence for Financial
Reasons.Ifthisoccurs,paymentinfullisrequiredinorderfor
thestudenttoenrollinasubsequentsemester,thestudentmay
not be on campus during the leave period and the student is not
eligible to take courses at another institution for transfer credit.
Delinquentaccountsmaybereferredtoacollectionagencyfor
further collection action.
INSTITUTIONAL PROCEDURES
RELATING TO TITLE IX
OF THE EDUCATION
AMENDMENTS OF 1972
InaccordancewithTitleIXoftheEducationAmendmentsof
1972,whichprohibitsacollegefromdiscriminationbasedon
sex, Franklin & Marshall College does not discriminate on the
basis of sex or gender in its education programs and activities.
Inquiriesconcerningthe application ofTitleIXmay be
referredtotheTitleIXCoordinator:
Dr.KateSnider
Franklin & Marshall College
Lancaster,PA17604
telephonenumber:717-358-7178
emailaddress:[email protected]
Inquiriesorcomplaintsmayalsobedirectedto:
AssistantSecretaryforCivilRights
U.S.DepartmentofEducation
OfceforCivilRights
400MarylandAvenue,SW
Washington,D.C.20202-1100
Telephone:800-421-3481
Email:[email protected]
INSTITUTIONAL PROCEDURES
RELATING TO THE FAMILY
EDUCATIONAL RIGHTS
AND PRIVACY ACT OF 1974
(FERPA)
A. The Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act
The Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974
(“FERPA”or“theAct”)codiedpreviouslyadoptedpoliciesof
Franklin & Marshall College concerning the rights of students
to the condentiality of their education records and to the
rights of students to have access to such records. However, the
Actmakescertainrightsandproceduresexplicitandrequires
that the College establish certain procedures to ensure that the
purpose of the Act is achieved. The full Act and the regulations
thereunder are available at http://www2.ed.gov/policy/gen/
reg/ferpa/index.html.
The major features of the Act are the identication of
education records of students, the right of student access to such
records, the opportunity of students to correct or amend these
records when warranted and the privacy of the records. The
followingparagraphssummarizetheActandtheprocedures
used at Franklin & Marshall College for the implementation of
the Act.
1. Denition of Education Records
Education records are dened by the Act as those
records, les, documents, and other materials that
contain information directly related to a student and
are contain information directly related to a student
and are maintained by the College or an agent of the
College.StudentswillbenotiedoftheirFERPArights
annually by publication in the Catalog. These records
include:
a. AdmissionfoldersandmaterialsheldintheOfce
of Admission until transferred to the Registrar’s
Ofce.
b. Academic records, grade reports, transcripts of
grades, major and minor declaration forms, and
such other information as may appear on the College
transcriptheldintheRegistrar’sOfce.
c. Recordsanddocumentsrelatedtothedecisionsof
theCommitteeonAcademicStatusandtheStudent
Conduct Committee and general information
regardingthestudent’scurricularandextracurricular
performanceandactivities,heldintheofceofthe
OfceofStudentAffairs.
d. Records held by those advising and evaluating
students, such as academic advisers, the Health
Professions Advisory Committee, the Ofce of
Student and Post-Graduate Development, Faculty
Dons,andHouseDeans.
e. Records and documents held in the Ofce of
Financial Aid.
Further information about les, their location and their
custodian is in the Ofce of the Provost and Dean of the
Faculty.
154 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
2. Privacy of Student Education Records
a. Release of Student Education Records:Noeducation
record shall be released by the College or its agents,
nor shall access be granted thereto without the
consent of the student except as hereinafter provided
in paragraph 2.b. below, or as otherwise provided by
law.Studentrequestsforthereleaseofinformation
may be made by completing the forms provided for
thepurposewiththeofceroftheCollegeholding
sucheducationrecord(s).
b. Release of Records Without Student Consent: The
Act provides for exceptions to the necessity of
the College obtaining a student’s consent before
releasing or permitting access to that student’s
records. General exceptions include the following:
1) School ofcials who have a legitimate
educational interest in the records. School
ofcials include:l) any persons employed by
the College in an administrative, supervisory,
academic, research, or support staff position;
2) a person elected to the Board ofTrustees;
3)apersonemployedbyorundercontractto
theCollege to performaspecialtask;or4)a
student serving on an ofcial committee or
assistinganotherschoolofcialinperforming
his or her tasks. A school ofcial has a
legitimateeducationalinterestiftheofcialis
l)performingataskthatisspeciedinhisor
herjobdescriptionorbyacontractagreement;
2) performing a task related to a student’s
education;3)performingataskrelatedtothe
disciplineofastudent;or4)providingaservice
or benet relating to the student or student’s
counseling,jobplacement,ornancialaid.
2) Authorized representatives of government
who need the information to audit, to oversee,
or to administer the Act, federally supported
educationprograms,ornancialobligationsof
the College or the student.
3) Organizationsconductingstudiesconcerning
the validity of predictive tests, administering
student aid programs, or improving instruction,
if such studies are conducted in such a manner
that specic students cannot be identied in
the publication of the results and provided
such information will be destroyed when it is
no longer needed for the purpose for which the
study was made.
4) Accreditingorganizationsfortheperformance
of their accrediting function.
5) Parents or guardians of a student who have
establishedwiththeOfceofStudentAffairsor
theRegistrar(dependingontherecordsought)
thatstudent’sstatusasdependentaccordingto
the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, Section
152.
6) Informationrequiredbyjudicialorder,orany
lawfully issued subpoena, to be released on
condition that in most cases the student will be
notied in advanceof compliance sothat the
student may seek protective action.
7) In the event of a health or safety emergency,
information may be released to appropriate
persons without the consent of the student
if such information is necessary to protect
the health or safety of the student or of other
persons.
8) Ofcials of another school, upon request, at
which a student seeks or intends to enroll.
9) In connection with a student’s request for,
or receipt of, nancial aid, as necessary to
determine the eligibility, amount or conditions
ofthenancialaid,ortoenforcethetermsand
conditions of the aid.
10) Ifrequiredbyastatelawrequiringdisclosure
thatwasadoptedbeforeNovember19,1974.
Complaints regarding alleged failures by Franklin & Marshall
CollegetocomplywiththerequirementsofFERPAshouldbe
forwarded to:
FamilyPolicyComplianceOfce
U.S.DepartmentofEducation
400MarylandAvenue,SW
Washington,D.C.20202-5920
c. Directory Information: Neither the Act nor these
procedures preclude the publication by the College
of directory information providing that the student
has not withdrawn consent for the publication of or
electronic access to such information. This directory
information includes and is limited to the following:
1) Name, home address, home phone number,
local address, local phone number, e-mail
address, photograph, and names and addresses
of parents or guardians.
2) Name and address of secondary school
attended, periods of enrollment and degrees
awarded,academicmajor(s)andminor(when
applicable), date of graduation, conrmation
of signature, and membership in College
organizations.
3) Such information as is normally included on
rosters and programs prepared for athletic
contests.
4) Announcement of the granting of honors,
awards and other accomplishments.
Students may withhold directory information in
any or all of the above categories by indicating
their wishes on the appropriate screen on Inside
F&MorbycontactingtheOfceoftheRegistrar.
Studentsareresponsibleforanyimpactthatsuch
an action may have and should carefully consider
theconsequences.Questionsshouldbedirectedto
theOfceoftheRegistrar.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 155
3. Access to Education Records
Subject to the procedures and the exceptions contained below,
students have a right of access to the records described in
Section A1., above, a right to challenge the accuracy of these
records, and a right to have explanations or comments on
these records placed in their le. They also have a right to
have copies of their records with a payment to cover the costs
of duplication.
a. The Act contains exceptions to the general right of
studentstoaccesstolesanddocuments.
These exceptions are:
1) Condentialstatementsandlettersplacedinthe
lespriortoJanuary1,1975, andconnedin
their use to the purposes for which they were
intended.
2) Condential letters and statements to which
students have waived a right of access.
3) Notes,statements,records,documentsorother
papers that are kept in the sole possession of the
maker thereof and are not accessible to others
(such as private notes made by professors,
academic advisers, or administrators that are
purely personal reminders of an event or fact
thattheymayormaynotuseinasubsequent
decision such as determining a grade in a
course,advisingastocourses,etc.).
4) RecordsanddocumentsoftheDepartmentof
PublicSafety.
5) Recordsusedin connectionwiththemedical,
psychological, or psychiatric treatment of the
student.
6) Condential nancial records of students’
parents or guardians.
b. Waiver of Access. A student may waive a right
of access to condential statements and letters
submitted as part of his or her admissions dossier, but
this waiver does not apply if the letters or statements
are used for purposes other than to make a judgment
about the admission of the student to Franklin &
MarshallCollege.Studentsmayalsowaivearightof
accesstocondentialrecommendationsrespecting
admission to another college or university, a
graduate or professional school, or for other
opportunities such as internships. Authors of such
letters will give the student an opportunity to waive
a right of access to such letters of recommendation
astheymaywrite.Studentsmayalsowaivearightof
accesstocondentialrecommendationsconcerning
application for employment or receipt of an honor
or honorary recognition.
c. Access Procedure. Students who wish to review
their records may do so by submitting an application
totheappropriateofceroftheCollegeonaform
provided for the purpose that shall identify what
part of the education records the student wishes
toreview.Within45daysofthesubmissionofthe
application, a representative of the College ofce
responsible for maintaining those records will
provide the student with the records and documents
to which the student is entitled and will provide
such explanations or comments as the student
may require for clarication. Should the student
challengeanypartofthefolder,le,document,or
record,theProvost(ordesignee)shalltrytoresolve
the matter by such informal means as discussion
and/or deletion of erroneous material, addition to
the record of an explanatory statement, or such other
remedy as is deemed appropriate in the judgment of
theProvost(ordesignee)andthestudent.
If the challenge to the content of the record
cannot be resolved by such informal means, a
hearing shall be held within a reasonable time to
resolve the matter, and the decision of the hearing
panel will be nal. The hearing panel (all three
members of which are to be drawn from the College
community)willbemadeupofamemberchosenby
thestudent,amemberchosenbytheProvost,anda
memberchosenbytheProvost’srepresentativeand
thestudent’srepresentative.
The decision of the hearing panel will be
rendered within ten days of the hearing, will be in
writing, and will be delivered to the student and the
Provost.
d. Record of Access.Thoseofcersunderwhosecare
the records are kept shall maintain a log of the
namesofthosewhohaverequestedorbeengranted
access toa student’s record, thedates of all such
transactions, and the legitimate interest of each
person in obtaining this information.
e. Limited Scope and Purpose of Student Review of
Records. It is not the intention of the Act or these
procedures to provide a forum for challenging course
grades, the decisions of the Committee on Academic
Status, the Student Conduct Committee, or any
othercommittee or ofceof the Collegeassigned
the responsibility to make judgments. Rather, it
is the intention of the Act and these procedures to
make known to students the informational base
upon which decisions included in the education
records are made and to allow corrections of that
information or inclusion of explanatory statements.
4. Administration of Policy and Procedures
TheProvostshallhavegeneraloversightoftheadministration
of theAct and the above procedures. Questions concerning
the matters covered by these procedures and the Act should be
directedtotheProvost.
Recommendationsforchangesandamendmentstothese
regulationswillbewelcomedbytheProvost,andsuchchanges
as experience demonstrates should be made will be made in a
manner and at such times as conform to Franklin & Marshall
procedures.
5. FERPA for Families
Franklin&MarshallCollegerecognizesthecriticalrolethat
parentsandfamiliesplayinsupportingtheirstudent’sgrowth
and development through college. With that in mind, the
College has established the following policy with regard to the
release of informationfrom students’ educationrecords; the
policy is intended to balance the autonomy conveyed by the
Federal regulations to the student with the vital support system
provided by parents and guardians.
156 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
AsnotedwithintheFERPAregulationsabove,therightto
release information from their records transfers from parents to
studentsupontheirenrollmentinapost-secondaryinstitution,
evenwhenthestudentisunderage18.Thismeansthat,with
a few exceptions, disclosures from the education records are to
bemadeonlyuponthestudent’swrittenconsent.
One of the exceptions within the regulations is that the
College may release information to the student’s parents or
guardians without the student’s written permission when
the student is determined to be a dependent according to the
InternalRevenueCodeof1854,Section154.
Though disclosure is permitted, in most cases Franklin &
Marshall does not release student records under this provision.
The core of this policy surrounds our particular circumstances
asaresidentialinstitution.IthasbeentheCollege’sbeliefin
the importance of building a relationship of trust between the
student and the institution, which becomes especially critical
with the health and safety considerations that come into play in
a residential environment.
Instances in which Franklin & Marshall will release
information to parents of dependent students:
a.ChangeinaStudent’sStanding:
1) Franklin & Marshall believes students are
ultimately responsible for their academic
performance. However, when a student is placed
on advisory status at the end of a semester as a
resultoflowsemesterand/orcumulativeGPA,
parents of dependent students will receive
notication,sothattheymayprovidesupportas
the student develops a plan to improve for the
subsequentsemester.
2) Additionally, when a student is placed on
academic suspension as a result of either failing
all courses in a semester or failing to meet the
appropriatecumulativeGPAthreshold,parents
ofdependent students willbe notied, sothat
they may provide support as the student makes
plans for their time away from F&M.
3) Finally, parents will be notied when a
student’schangeinstatusoccursasaresultof
disciplinary action.
ACCOMMODATION
FOR DISABILITIES:
REHABILITATION ACT
OF 1973, SECTION 504
Inaccordancewithequaleducationopportunitylaws,Franklin
& Marshall College arranges to provide reasonable academic
accommodations for students whose disabilities limit their
participationinacademicprogramsforwhichtheyarequalied.
StudentsarerequiredtonotifytheCollegeiftheywillneed
special services or accommodations in the classroom or if
theywantfaculty,academicadvisers,oradministrativeofces
notiedofadisability.Reasonableacademicaccommodations
for students with disabilities are determined on an individual
basisutilizingtherequireddocumentationofthedisability.
The College does not have a special program for students
with disabilities. For example, there are no special classes or
tutorsforstudentswithlearningdisabilitiesorattentiondecit
hyperactivity disorder. The academic support system for a
student with a disability is the same as the academic support
system for all students.
TheCollegehasdesignatedAlisonHobbs,Psy.D.asthe
Director of Student Accessibility Services. In this role, Dr.
Hobbs coordinates services and accommodations to meet the
needs of students with disabilities that limit their participation
intheprogramsandactivitiesoftheCollege.Dr.Hobbsreviews
all required documentation of disability and determines the
reasonable academic accommodations for each individual
student. Every student at the College has the opportunity to
completeaDisabilityNoticationFormavailablethroughout
theyearattheOfceofStudentAccessibilityServicesandon
its web site, www.fandm.edu/ofce-of-student-accessibility-
services. The College considers information provided on
this form as condential and uses it to provide reasonable
accommodationsforqualifyingstudents.
Studentswhowishtoappealanaccommodationorlea
complaintarisingunderSection504oftheRehabilitationAct
of1973and/ortheAmericanswithDisabilitiesActshoulduse
the following procedures:
PROCEDURE FOR APPEAL OF
ACCOMMODATIONS OR FILING
OF COMPLAINT UNDER THE
REHABILITATION ACT OR AMERICANS
WITH DISABILITIES ACT
I. Jurisdiction
This procedure may be used by students to report discrimination
based on disability in any College program or activity.
Employees who wish to report disability discrimination should
contactHumanResources.
II. Covered Conduct
1.Discrimination (including harassment): Individuals
who experience negative or adverse treatment based
on disability that is sufciently serious to deny or
limit their ability to participate in a College program
oractivitymayleacomplaintunderthisprocedure.
Examples of disability discrimination include verbal or
physical harassment based on disability and disparate
treatment based on disability.
2.Disagreements regarding accommodations: In some
instances, concerns related to the provision of academic
adjustmentsandauxiliaryaidsandservices(commonly
called accommodations or modications) may
constitute disability discrimination. Disagreements
regarding the denial of requested accommodations
andthesufciencyofapprovedaccommodations,for
example, may be raised under this procedure.
3. Retaliation: The College does not tolerate retaliation
against individuals who complain about disability
discrimination or otherwise assert their rights under
Section 504 or the Americans with Disabilities Act.
Individuals who experience retaliation, intimidation, or
retaliatoryharassmentmayleacomplaintusingthe
process outlined below.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 157
III. Time Frame for Filing
Complaints of disability discrimination should be made
promptly. The passage of time between the date of the
alleged discrimination and the ling of a complaint may
impair the College’s ability to look into the complaint and
provide appropriate relief, as key witnesses and evidence
may no longer be available. A student who wishes to appeal
an accommodation because the accommodation is felt to be
inadequateorinappropriateisencouragedtocontactStudent
Accessibility Services within 90 days of receiving the
accommodation to discuss their concerns.
IV. Informal Resolution
Individuals who experience disability discrimination, who
disagree with an approved accommodation, or who have
difcultyobtainingapprovedaccommodationsareencouraged
tocontactDr.AlisonHobbstodiscusstheirconcerns.Ifthe
actions of Dr. Alison Hobbs are at issue, individuals may
choosetocontacttheDeanofStudents.Theinformalprocess
is voluntary. A complainant may conclude the informal process
atanytimeandleaformalcomplaint.
V. Formal Resolution
ComplaintsmustbemadeinwritingtotheOfceofStudent
Affairs within 90 days and should include a description of
the nature of the alleged discrimination and the parties. If the
participation of the Dean of Students in the process would
createaconictofinterest,writtencomplaintsmaybemadeto
theVicePresidentandDeanofStudentAffairs.
Within30businessdaysofreceiptofthecomplaint,the
Dean of Students or designee will look into the complaint
and may conduct a formal investigation, as appropriate.
This process provides for the prompt, reliable, and impartial
investigationofcomplaints,includinganequalopportunityfor
the parties to present witnesses and evidence. Investigations
generally will be completed within the aforementioned time
frame.
Within5workingdaysoftheconclusionoftheinquiryor
investigation,theDeanofStudentswillprovidewrittennotice
of the outcome to the parties.
VI. Appeal
Either party may appeal the outcome of the formal process by
lingawrittenappealwithin15daysofthedatethatwritten
notice of the outcome is sent to the parties. Appeals should be
madetoMargaretHazlett,VicePresidentandDeanofStudent
Affairs. In the event that the participation of Dean Hazlett
wouldpresentaconictofinterest,appealsmaybeledwith
theVice President for Finance andAdministration, Michael
Todd.
Appealswillbedecidedwithin30daysofthedatethey
areled.Theappealofanaccommodationthatinvolvesthe
waiverofanacademicrequirementmustbepresentedtothe
CommitteeonAcademicStatusinconsultationwithStudent
AccessibilityServices.Thepartieswillreceivewrittennotice
oftheoutcomeoftheappealprocesswithin5workingdaysof
the conclusion of the process.
VII. Role of the Section 504/ADA Coordinator
The Section 504 Coordinator will receive notice of any
complaintsthatareledunderthisprocedureandwillreceive
updatesregardingthestatusofcomplaints.TheSection504
Coordinator will maintain documentation related to complaints,
reports, and investigations of disability discrimination.
VIII. Anti-harassment Statement
In cases of disability harassment, the College will take prompt
and appropriate steps to end a hostile environment if one has
been created, prevent the recurrence of any harassment, and
correct discriminatory effects on the complainant and others, if
appropriate. Individuals who experience disability harassment
may receive interim remedies, as appropriate, such as academic
assistance and other appropriate relief. The College takes
seriously complaints of disability harassment and will take
prompt disciplinary action against individuals who engage in
disability harassment.
IX. Condentiality
TheCollegewillmaintainthecondentialityofthepartiesto
disability discrimination cases and related records, consistent
with applicable federal and state laws.
158 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
The College Directory
BOARD OF TRUSTEES
OFFICERS
Chair
ERICW.NOLL’83,P’09
Vice Chair
PATRICIAE.HARRIS’77
Vice Chair
SUSANKLINEKLEHR’73,P’12
Vice Chair
BENJAMINJ.WINTER’67
Treasurer
MICHAELTODD
Associate Treasurer
SEANGALLOWAY
Secretary
MAURACONDONUMBLE’83
Assistant Secretary
KELSEYLEIGHHEPLER’16
TRUSTEES
BARBARAK.ALTMANN,PH.D.
President
Franklin & Marshall College
Lancaster,Pa.
JONATHANE.BABKOW’88
SeniorManagingDirector
PretiumPartners,LLC
NewYork,N.Y.
LAWRENCEG.BRAITMAN’80
Founder
Advisly, LLC
SanFranciso,Calif.
ROBERTJ.BROOKSSR.’66,P’98
Retired Executive Vice President
of Strategic Development
WestinghouseAirBrakeTechnologies
Corporation(Wabtec)
Murrysville,Pa.
MODIAJ.BUTLER’95
Partner
MercuryPublicAffairs,LLC
Westeld,N.J.
MONAL.CAMACCI,M.D.’12
Ophthalmology Resident-Physician
PennStateHersheyMedicalCenter
Hershey,Pa.
MATTHEWN.DesCHAMPS’93
Chief Operating Ofcer
KeposCapitalLP
NewYork,N.Y.
DR.JOANM.FALLON’79
CEO
Curemark LLC
RyeBrook,N.Y.
KIMBERLYFARIS,Psy.D.W’66,
BostonBehavioralMedicine
Brookline,Mass.
EVELYNN.FARKAS,Ph.D.’89
Nonresident Senior Fellow,
The Atlantic Council
FarkasGlobalStrategies,LLC
Washington,D.C.
ANNEW.FASSP’17
Adolescent Psychodynamic
Psychotherapist
Mamaroneck,N.Y.
JOHNW.GREENE’99
Portfolio Manager
Managing Principal
BardinHillInvestmentPartnersLP
NewYork,N.Y.
PATRICIAE.HARRIS’77
CEO
BloombergPhilanthropies
NewYork,N.Y.
AKBARHOSSAIN’13,
Judicial Law Clerk
U.S.DistrictCourt
Philadelphia,Pa.
SHAWNM.JENKINS’10,
Director of Strategic Partnerships
CollegeBoard
JerseyCity,N.J.
SUSANKLINEKLEHR’73,P’12
Philadelphia,Pa.
HALEA.KRASNE
Lancaster,Pa.
DAVIDH.LEHMAN,Ph.D.,’68,P’01
President and CEO
DJResources
Denver,Colo.
LESJ.LIEBERMAN’78
Executive Managing Director
SterlingPartners,LLC
NewYork,N.Y.
DOUGLASJ.
McCORMACK,ESQ.’85
Vice President Tax–North America
TevaPharmaceuticals,Inc.
NewYork,N.Y.
KENNETHB.MEHLMAN’88
Partner
KohlbergKravisRoberts&Co.
NewYork,N.Y.
JUDITHC.FISHLOWMINTERP’19
Managing Director,
Head of U.S. Loan Capital Markets
RBCLoanCapitalMarkets
NewYork,N.Y.
ERICW.NOLL’83,P’09
CEO
ContextCapitalPartners
BalaCynwyd,Pa.
RAYMONDA.SANSEVERINO,
ESQ.’68
Partner and Chair
RealEstateDepartment
Loeb&LoebLLP
NewYork,N.Y.
MARYL.SCHAPIRO’77,
P’16,P’18,L.H.D.
Vice Chairman for Global Public
Policy and Senior Advisor to the
Founder and Chairman
BloombergL.P.
Washington,D.C.
LAURENCEA.
SHADEK’72,P’05,P’06
Managing Member, Financial Advisor
WellingtonShields&Co.LLC
NewYork,N.Y.
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 159
STUARTFARWELLSMITH’77
Partner
CenterviewPartnersLLC
NewYork,N.Y.
KATHYHAYSTINE’85
SeniorAdvisor
Everclear Asset Management, LLC
ShortHills,N.J.
H.ARTTAYLOR,ESQ.,’80,L.L.D.
President and CEO
BBBWiseGivingAlliance
Arlington, Va.
EDWARDD.VANDOLSEN’80
Retired Chief Executive Ofcer
Individual Financial Services
TIAA
Rye,N.Y.
COLLEENROSSWEIS’85
20th Century Decorative Arts Adviser
NewYork,N.Y.
BENJAMINJ.WINTER’67
Principal
TheWinterOrganization
NewYork,N.Y.
EX OFFICIO TRUSTEES
President, Alumni Association Board
LISABROOKS’85
Houston, Texas
President-Elect,
Alumni Association Board
JAYS.RIDDER’91
Partner, Chief Operating Ofcer,
Government and Public Sector
Ernst&YoungLLP
Philadelphia,Pa.
Chair, Leadership Council
KATHERINEQUICKROSA’92
Retired, Managing Director
Global Head of Alternative
Investments,PrivateBanking&Wealth
Management
JPMorganChase&Co.
Weehawken,N.J.
EMERITI TRUSTEES
R.REEVEASKEW,D.C.,’66,P’96
Chiropractor
Easton, Md.
LAWRENCEI.
BONCHEK,M.D.P’91
Editor-in-Chief, The Journal
of Lancaster General Hospital
Lancaster General Health
Lancaster,Pa.
DOREENE.BOYCE,Ph.D., L.h.D.
Retired President
BuhlFoundation
Verona,Pa.
DANIELB.BURTON
Retired Managing Director
RBCCapitalMarkets
Lititz,Pa.
ROBERTD.CARLIII’75
Chairman, President and CEO
CSCM,Inc.
Atlanta, Ga.
KENNETHM.
DUBERSTEIN’65,P’09,P’12,LL.D.
Chairman and CEO
TheDubersteinGroup,Inc.
Washington,D.C.
DAVIDH.HOPTON’54
Retired Group Vice President
UnitedStatesSteelCorp.
Lancaster,Pa.
DAVIDH.KLINGES’50,P’82,P’85
Retired President, Marine Construction
BethlehemSteelCorporation
Bethlehem,Pa.
AARONJ.MARTIN,Ph.D.,’50,Sc.D.
Private Investment Manager
WestGrove,Pa.
WILSOND.McELHINNY
Lancaster,Pa.
STEPHEND.MOSES’55
StephenMosesInterests
PalmSprings,Calif.
PAULA.MUELLER,JR.,ESQ.
Retired Judge
CourtofCommonPleas
of Lancaster County
WillowStreet,Pa.
JOHNL.NEIGH,M.D.,’55,P’92,G’15
Retired Chairman
DepartmentofAnesthesiology
Physician Adviser
CRMDepartment&Quality
PresbyterianMedicalCenter
ofPhiladelphia
DrexelHill,Pa.
JOSEPHP.NOLT’59
Retired Chairman
MurrayRiskManagement
and Insurance
WillowStreet,Pa.
KARLW.POORBAUGH’51,P’84
Retired President
PoorbaughTimberlands
Somerset,Pa.
ANDREWM.ROUSE’49
Ottsville,Pa.
ROBERTH.SMITH’60,P’89
Retired President
Time-LifeEducation,Inc
Alexandria, Va..
ANDREWP.STEFFAN,P’93
Retired Managing Director
Citigroup, Inc.
NewYork,N.Y.
ROBERTG.TANCREDI,M.D.,
F.A.C.C.,’58
Kirkland, Wash.
PAULW.WARE’72,P’99
Retired Chairman
PennFuelGas,Inc.
Lancaster,Pa.
SUSANL.WASHBURN’73
Founding Principal
Washburn & McGoldrick LLC
BrynMawr,Pa.
PATRICIAROSSWEISP’85
Sunbury,Pa.
HENRYW.
WIGGINSJR.,M.D.,’55,P’91
St.BernardHospital
Chicago, Ill.
ROBERTZEMSKY,Ph.D., L.h.D.
Chair and Professor
The Learning Alliance for Higher
Education
UniversityofPennsylvania
WestChester,Pa.
160 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
BARBARAK.ALTMANN,Ph.D.(2018)
President
Franklin & Marshall College
Lancaster,Pa.
B.A.,UniversityofAlberta;
M.A.,UniversityofToronto;
Ph.D.,UniversityofToronto
PIERCEE.BULLER(2014)
Vice President and General Counsel
B.A.,ColgateUniversity;
J.D.,VillanovaUniversitySchoolofLaw
ALANS.CANIGLIA,Ph.D. (1982)
Vice President for Planning
Professor of Economics
A.B.,BucknellUniversity;
Ph.D.,UniversityofVirginia
MATTHEWK.EYNON(2012)
Vice President for College
Advancement
B.A.,DickinsonCollege
JIMMIEA.FOSTER(2020)
Vice President for Enrollment
Management
B.A.,GeorgeMasonUniversity;
M.S.,DrexelUniversity
GRETCHELA.HATHAWAYP’07,
Ph.D.(2020)
Vice President for Diversity, Equity and
Inclusion
B.A.,ManhattanvilleCollege;
M.A.,YeshivaUniversity;
Ph.D.,UniversityofPittsburgh
MARGARETHAZLETT,Ed.M. (2013)
Vice President and Dean of Student
Affairs
B.A.,PrincetonUniversity;
Ed.M., Harvard University
CARRIEE.RAMPP(2014)
Vice President
and Chief Information Ofcer
B.A.,Randolph-MaconCollege;
M.A.,SouthernMethodistUniversity;
M.L.I.S.,SyracuseUniversity
BARBARAS.STAMBAUGH(2019)
Vice President for Communications
B.A.,PennsylvaniaStateUniversity
MICHAELJ.TODD(2020)
Vice President for Finance and
Administration
B.A.,UniversityofMissouri;
B.S.,UniversityofMissouri;
B.A.,UniversityofMissouri;
B.A.,UniversityofMissouri;
M.A.,UniversityofVirginia;
M.B.A.,UniversityofNorthCarolina
at Charlotte
MAURACONDONUMBLE’83(1988)
Director of the Ofce of the President
and Secretary of the Board of Trustees
B.A.,Franklin&MarshallCollege
CAMERONWESSON,Ph.D.(2019)
Provost and Dean of the Faculty
B.A.,AuburnUniversity;
B.S.,AuburnUniversity;
M.A.,UniversityofIllinois;
Ph.D.,UniversityofIllinois
SENIOR STAFF OF THE COLLEGE
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 161
CHRISTINAL.ABBOTT(2012)
Visiting Assistant Professor
of Psychology
Psychology Department Associate
Co-Chair
B.A.,LockHavenUniversityof
Pennsylvania;M.S.,Millersville
University;M.S.,PhiladelphiaCollege
ofOsteopathicMedicine;Ph.D.,
PhiladelphiaCollegeofOsteopathic
Medicine
GENEVIEVEABRAVANEL(2004)
Associate Professor of English
B.A.,HarvardUniversity;Ph.D.,
DukeUniversity
JULIAR.ADAMS(2018)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Music
B.F.A.,BostonUniversity;M.F.A.,
BrandeisUniversity;Ph.D.,Boston
University
ABITIADILI(2019)
Visiting Assistant Professor of
Mathematics
B.S.,XinjiangNormalUniversity;
M.S.,NewMexicoInstituteofMining
and Technology
GREGORYS.ADKINS(1983)
William G. and Elizabeth R. Simeral
Professor of Physics
B.A.,UniversityofCalifornia,
LosAngeles;M.S.,Universityof
California,LosAngeles;Ph.D.,
University of California, Los Angeles
RAFEDA.AL-HUQ(2019)
Visiting Assistant Professor of
Economics
B.S.,CaliforniaInstituteof
Technology;M.A.,Universityof
Missouri, Kansas City
SYLVIAALAJAJI(2008)
Senior Professor of Music
B.M.,UniversityofTulsa;M.A.,
UniversityofRochester;Ph.D.,
UniversityofRochester
M.ELENAALDEAAGUDO(2013)
Senior Teaching Professor of Spanish
Licenciatura,UniversidaddeZaragoza;
M.A.,UniversityofKentucky;Ph.D.,
University of Kentucky
LINDAS.ALECI(1986)
Associate Professor of Art History
B.A.,OccidentalCollege;M.F.A.,
PrincetonUniversity;Ph.D.,
PrincetonUniversity
ANAM.ANDERSON(2017)
Teaching Professor of Spanish
B.A.,WesleyanUniversity;Ph.D.,
University of Minnesota
ERIKS.ANDERSON(2012)
Assistant Professor of English
B.A.,UniversityofMichigan;M.F.A.,
NaropaUniversity;Ph.D.,University
ofDenver
RACHELE.ANDERSON-RABERN
(2014)
Associate Professor of Theatre
B.A.,ReedCollege;Ph.D.,Stanford
University
DOUGLASA.ANTHONY(1996)
Professor of History
International Studies Program Director
B.G.S.,UniversityofMissouri-
Columbia;M.A.,Northwestern
University;Ph.D.,Northwestern
University
DANIELR.ARDIA(2006)
Professor of Biology
B.S.,TuftsUniversity;M.S.,S.U.N.Y.;
Ph.D.,CornellUniversity
KIMBERLYM.ARMSTRONG(1989)
Professor of Spanish
Spanish Department Chair
Linguistics Program Chair
B.A.,SkidmoreCollege;M.A.,
GeorgetownUniversity;Ph.D.,
Georgetown University
DAVIDL.ASHWORTH(2009)
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Public Health
B.A.,GettysburgCollege;J.D.,
DelawareLawSchoolofWidener
University
NICHOLASR.BAETH(2018)
Assistant Professor of Mathematics
B.S.,PacicLutheranUniversity;
M.A.,UniversityofNebraska-Lincoln;
Ph.D.,UniversityofNebraska-Lincoln
RUSTYBANKS(2012)
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Guitar
B.M.,UniversityofMontevallo;M.M.,
FloridaStateUniversity
JESSBARBAGALLO(2020)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Theatre
B.F.A.,NewYorkUniversity;M.F.A.,
CUNYBrooklynCollege
LEEBARRETT(2020)
Adjunct Assistant Professor of
Religious Studies
B.A.,YaleUniversity;M.A.,Yale
University;M.Div.,YaleUniversity;
Ph.D.,YaleUniversity
MEREDITHJ.BASHAW(2005)
Professor of Psychology
Biological Foundations of Behavior
Program Chair
B.S.,DukeUniversity;M.S.,Georgia
InstituteofTechnology;Ph.D.,Georgia
InstituteofTechnology)
MISTYL.BASTIAN(1995)
Lewis Audenreid Professor of History
and Archaeology
Professor of Anthropology
B.A.,UniversityofChicago;M.A.,
UniversityofChicago;Ph.D.,
University of Chicago
CARLOTABATRES(2018)
Assistant Professor of Psychology
B.A.,WellesleyCollege;M.S.,
UniversityofStAndrews;Ph.D.,
UniversityofStAndrew
TIMOTHYBECHTEL(2009)
Director of F&M Science Outreach and
Teaching Professor of Geosciences
B.S.,HaverfordCollege;M.S.,Brown
University;Ph.D.,BrownUniversity
JESSICABEEBE(2015)
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Voice
B.A.,UniversityofDelaware;M.A.,
Indiana University
CURTISC.BENTZEL(1986)
Associate Professor of German
B.A.,GeorgeWashingtonUniversity;
M.A.,PrincetonUniversity;Ph.D.,
PrincetonUniversity
THE FACULTY
162 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
STEFANIABENINI(2019)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Italian
B.A.,UniversityLaSapienza;Ph.D.,
StanfordUniversity
PATRICKS.BERNARD(2001)
Associate Professor of English
B.A.,UniversityofSierraLeone;M.A.,
UniversityofNorthernIowa;Ph.D.,
PurdueUniversity
ZACHARYP.BILES(2005)
Professor of Classics
B.A.,UniversityofMaryland;M.A.,
UniversityofColorado,Boulder;
Ph.D.,UniversityofColorado,Boulder
MICHAELS.BILLIG(1986)
Professor of Anthropology
B.A.,ColumbiaUniversity;M.A.,
ColumbiaUniversity;Ph.D.,Harvard
University
CAITLYNL.BISHOP(2020)
Adjunct Assistant Professor of Art &
Art History
B.A.,YorkCollege;M.F.A.,Edinboro
University
JAIMEBLAIR(2008)
Associate Professor of Biology
B.A.,IthacaCollege;Ph.D.,The
PennsylvaniaStateUniversity
NINAL.BOND(2013)
Adjunct Assistant Professor of Russian
and Russian Studies
Assistant Director
of Post-Graduate Scholarships
B.A.,ColumbiaUniversity;M.A.,
ColumbiaUniversity;Ph.D.,Columbia
University
KEVINBRADY(2009)
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor of Art
B.A.,KalamazooCollege;M.F.A.,
UniversityofMichiganSchoolofArt
andDesign
GABRIELS.BRANDT(2013)
Associate Professor of Chemistry
B.A.,ReedCollege;Ph.D.,California
Institute of Technology
EVEBRATMAN(2016)
Assistant Professor
of Environmental Studies
B.A.,OberlinCollege;Ph.D.,American
University
DAVIDM.BRENNAN(1998)
Professor of Economics
Economics Department Chair
B.B.A.,UniversityofMiami;M.A.,
UniversityofNotreDame;Ph.D.,
UniversityofNotreDame
SCOTTH.BREWER(2007)
Professor of Chemistry
Chemistry Department Chair
B.A.,JamesMadisonUniversity;
Ph.D.,NorthCarolinaStateUniversity
JUSTIND.BRODY(2020)
Assistant Professor of Computer
Science
B.S.,UniversityofMaryland,
Baltimore;M.A.,Universityof
Maryland;Ph.D.,Universityof
Maryland
DANIELA.BROOKS(2018)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Russian
B.A.,HampshireCollege;M.A.,
UniversityofCalifornia-Berkeley;
Ph.D.,UniversityofCalifornia-
Berkeley
LEONARDG.BROWNIII(2018)
Adjunct Assistant Professor of
Government
B.S.,UnitedStatesMilitaryAcademy;
J.D.,CampbellUniversity
KIMBERLYD.BUCHARNOLET
(2006)
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Bassoon
B.M.,TheHaridConservatorySchool;
M.M.,UniversityofRochester;
D.M.A.,UniversityofIllinois,Urbana-
Champaign
SETHBURKERT(2020)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Chemistry
B.S.,SaintFrancisUniversity;Ph.D.,
UniversityofPittsburgh
MATTHEWW.BUTTERFIELD
(2003)
Professor of Music
New College House Don
B.A.,AmherstCollege;Ph.D.,
UniversityofPennsylvania
BEATRIZCAAMAÑOALEGRE
(2004)
Associate Professor of Spanish
B.A.,UniversidaddeSantiagode
Compostela;M.A.,RutgersUniversity;
Ph.D.,RutgersUniversity
MONICACABLE(2007)
Director of Post-Graduate Fellowships
& East Asia Recruitment
and Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Anthropology
B.A.,MiddleburyCollege;M.A.,
TulaneUniversity;Ph.D.,Tulane
University
ANTONINOG.CALLARI(1979)
The Sigmund M. and Mary B. Hyman
Professor of Economics
Public Policy Program Chair
B.A.,CityCollegeofNewYork;M.A.,
UniversityofMassachusetts;Ph.D.,
University of Massachusetts
ALANS.CANIGLIA(1982)
Professor of Economics
Vice President for Planning
A.B.,BucknellUniversity;Ph.D.,
University of Virginia
HEATHERA.CANN(2019)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Earth
and Environment
B.S.,UniversityofWaterloo;M.A.,
PurdueUniversity;Ph.D.,Purdue
University
BRYANC.CANNON(2018)
Visiting Assistant Professor of
Sociology
B.A.,WesternKentuckyUniversity;
M.A.,WesternKentuckyUniversity;
Ph.D.,UniversityofGeorgia
ALEXISQ.CASTOR(2000)
Professor of Classics
Classics Department Chair
B.A.,GeorgeMasonUniversity;M.A.,
BrynMawrCollege;Ph.D.,BrynMawr
College
JOSÉR.CHÁVARRY(2019)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Spanish
B.A.,ManhattanCollege;M.A.,City
CollegeofNewYork;Ph.D.,City
CollegeofNewYork
HANCHENG(2020)
Instructor of Economics
B.S.,RenminUniversityofChina;
M.S.,RenminUniversityofChina
JARRETTR.CHERNER(2012)
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Jazz Piano/Improvisation
B.Sc.,TuftsUniversity;M.M.,
ManhattanSchoolofMusic
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 163
DAVIDCIUK(2015)
Assistant Professor of Government
B.A.,UniversityofMassachusetts;
M.A.,UniversityofMassachusetts;
Ph.D.,MichiganStateUniversity
MICHAELR.CLAPPER(2005)
Associate Professor of Art History
B.A.,SwarthmoreCollege;M.F.A.,
WashingtonUniversity;M.A.,
NorthwesternUniversity;Ph.D.,
NorthwesternUniversity
JENNIFERL.CONLEY(2012)
Associate Professor of Dance
B.A.,PennsylvaniaStateUniversity;
M.F.A.,TischSchooloftheArtsof
NewYorkUniversity
STEPHENA.COOPER(1993)
Professor of Religious Studies
B.A.,HampshireCollege;M.A.,
ColumbiaUniversity;Ph.D.,Columbia
University
DUSTINJ.COVELL(2018)
Visiting Assistant Professor of
Chemistry
B.A.,MacalesterCollege;Ph.D.,
University of Illinois
JESSICAG.COX(2014)
Associate Professor of Spanish
Spanish Department Associate Chair
B.A.,GettysburgCollege;M.S.,
GeorgetownUniversity;Ph.D.,
Georgetown University
ANNALISACRANNELL(1992)
Professor of Mathematics
B.A.,BrynMawrCollege;M.A.,
BrownUniversity;Ph.D.,Brown
University
FRONEFIELDCRAWFORDIII
(2006)
Professor of Astronomy
Physics & Astronomy Department Chair
Director of Grundy Observatory
B.A.,WilliamsCollege;Ph.D.,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology
ELENAC.CUFFARI(2020)
Assistant Professor of Psychology and
Scientic &Philosophical Studies of
Mind
B.A.,SwarthmoreCollege;M.A.,
UniversityofOregon;Ph.D.,
University of Oregon
RYANDAVIDSON(2020)
Adjunct Assistant Professor of
Business, Organizations & Society
B.A.,CovenantCollege;J.D.,
UniversityofNotreDame
PRITHVIRAJDATTA(2017)
Visiting Assistant Professor of
Government
B.A.,NationalLawSchoolofIndia
University;B.C.L.,Universityof
Oxford;M.Phil.,UniversityofOxford;
Ph.D.,HarvardUniversity
BECKLEYK.DAVIS(2011)
Associate Professor of Biology
B.A.,TheColoradoCollege;Ph.D.,
BaylorCollegeofMedicine
CAROLC.DAVIS(2004)
Associate Professor of Theatre
B.A.,UniversityofCalifornia,San
Diego;M.A.,UniversityofCalifornia,
Berkeley;Ph.D.,Universityof
California,Berkeley
SARAHS.DAWSON(2009)
Director, The Center
for Sustainable Environment
B.S.,CollegeofCharleston;Ph.D.,
UtahStateUniversity
MEGDAY(2015)
Assistant Professor of English
B.A.,UniversityofCalifornia;M.F.A.,
MillsCollege;Ph.D.,UniversityofUtah
ELIZABETHM.DeSANTO(2013)
Associate Professor
of Environmental Studies
B.A.,ConnecticutCollege;M.E.M.,
DukeUniversity;M.S.,LondonSchool
ofEconomicsandPoliticalScience;
Ph.D.,UniversityCollegeLondon
GUILLAUMEDESYON(2020)
Adjunct Assistant Professor of History
ANDREWP.DeWET(1990)
Professor of Geosciences
Environmental Science Program Chair
B.Sc.,UniversityofNatal;Ph.D.,
University of Cambridge
CAROLB.DeWET(1990)
Dr. E. Paul & Frances H. Reiff
Professor of Geosciences
B.A.,SmithCollege;M.S.,University
ofMassachusetts;Ph.D.,University
of Cambridge
DENNISA.DESLIPPE(2006)
Professor of American Studies and
Women’s, Gender
and Sexuality Studies
B.A.,WayneStateUniversity;M.A.,
WayneStateUniversity;Ph.D.,
University of Iowa
MARCODiGIULIO(2010)
Associate Professor of Hebrew
Language and Literature
Hebrew and Italian Department Chair
Judaic Studies Program Chair
B.A.,UniversityofFlorence;M.A.,
UniversityofFlorence;Ph.D.,
University of Florence
SUSANDICKLITCH-NELSON
(1997)
Professor of Government
B.A.,McMasterUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofToronto;Ph.D.,
University of Toronto
DANELDRAGULJIC(2012)
Associate Professor of Mathematics
B.A.,MillersvilleUniversity;Ph.D.,
OhioStateUniversity
DIRKEITZEN(1993)
Professor of Film and Media
B.A.,GoshenCollege;M.F.A.,Temple
University;Ph.D.,UniversityofIowa
JANINEEVERETT(2012)
Teaching Professor of Public Health
Director of the Public Health Program
A.S.,BeaufortCountryCommunity
College;B.S.,NursingUniversity
ofPhoenix;M.S.,Universityof
Pennsylvania;Ph.D.,Universityof
PennsylvaniaSchoolofNursing
CAROLINEFAULKNER(2009)
Associate Professor of Sociology
B.A.,UniversityofVirginia;M.S.,
UniversityofWisconsin-Madison;
Ph.D.,UniversityofWisconsin-
Madison
RACHELZ.FELDMAN’09(2018)
Assistant Professor of Religious Studies
B.A.,Franklin&MarshallCollege;
M.A.,TheNewSchool;Ph.D.,
UniversityofCalifornia-Davis
164 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
EDWARDE.FENLON(2003)
Professor of Chemistry
B.S.,St.LawrenceUniversity;
Ph.D.,UniversityofIllinois,Urbana-
Champaign
PETERA.FIELDS(2001)
Dr. E. Paul & Frances H. Reiff
Professor of Biology
Biology Department Associate Chair
B.A.S.,StanfordUniversity;M.S.,
StanfordUniversity;Ph.D.,University
ofCalifornia,SanDiego
JANETM.FISCHER(2000)
Professor of Biology
B.A.,WellesleyCollege;M.S.,
UniversityofWisconsin;Ph.D.,
University of Wisconsin
PATRICKM.FLEMING(2015)
Assistant Professor of Economics
and Public Policy
B.A.,WashingtonandLeeUniversity;
M.S.,UniversityofMaryland
G.ALFREDFORSYTH(2005)
Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Business, Organizations and Society
B.A.,DickinsonCollege;M.S.,North
CarolinaStateUniversity;Ph.D.,
PurdueUniversity
GEORGEN.FOURLAS(2020)
Visiting Assistant Professor of
Philosophy and Government
B.A.,UniversityofSanFrancisco;
M.A.,UniversityofOregon;Ph.D.,
University of Oregon
RYANC.FOWLER(2015)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Classics
B.A.,UniversityofArizona;M.A.,
SanFranciscoStateUniversity;M.A.,
ColumbiaUniversity;Ph.D.,Rutgers
University
LEEA.FRANKLIN(2006)
Associate Professor of Philosophy
Philosophy Department Chair
B.A.,YaleUniversity;Ph.D.,TheOhio
StateUniversity
DANIELE.FRICK(1990–1991,
1992–1994,1995–1996,2000)
Director of the Writing Center
Senior Teaching Professor
of American Studies and Senior Adjunct
Assistant Professor of English
B.A.,ElmhurstCollege;M.A.,Indiana
University;Ph.D.,IndianaUniversity
ETIENNEGAGNON(2010)
Associate Professor of Physics
B.S.,McGillUniversity;Ph.D.,
UniversityofColorado,Boulder
LISAGASBARRONE(1986)
Professor of French
Brooks College House Don
B.A.,BowdoinCollege;M.A.,
PrincetonUniversity;Ph.D.,Princeton
University
ROBERTGETHNER(1987)
Professor of Mathematics
B.S.,UniversityofMichigan;M.S.,
UniversityofWisconsin;Ph.D.,
University of Wisconsin
GWYNNEGEYER(2002)
Teaching Professor of Music
Artist in Residence of Voice
B.M.,IndianaUniversity;M.M.,
Indiana University
YOHANAGILBERRIO(2020)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Spanish
and Linguistics
B.A.,TempleUniversity;M.A.,Temple
University;Ph.D.,TempleUniversity
KENNETHGISH(2020)
Adjunct Assistant Professor of
Psychology
B.S.,WashingtonStateUniversity;
M.S.,BrownUniversity;Ph.D.,
PennsylvaniaStateUniversity
ALANS.GLAZER’69(1975)
Henry P. and Mary B. Stager Professor
of Business
B.A,Franklin&MarshallCollege;
M.A.,UniversityofPennsylvania;
Ph.D.,UniversityofPennsylvania
TAMARAA.GOEGLEIN(1989)
Professor of English
B.A.,EarlhamCollege;M.A.,Indiana
University;Ph.D.,IndianaUniversity
SHARIP.GOLDBERG(2015)
Assistant Professor of English
B.A,VassarCollege;Ph.D.,S.U.N.Y.
Albany
VANE.GOSSE(2001)
Professor of History
Africana Studies Program Chair
B.A,ColumbiaUniversity;Ph.D.,
RutgersUniversity
SYBILG.GOTSCH(2012)
Associate Professor of Biology
B.A.,MountHolyokeCollege;Ph.D.,
S.U.N.Y.atStonyBrook
MAYAGREENSHPAN(2015)
Hebrew and Italian Language
Teaching Fellow
B.A.,ElizabethtownCollege
BRIDGETL.GUARASCI(2015)
Assistant Professor of Anthropology
DrewUniversity;M.A.,Universityof
Chicago;Ph.D.,UniversityofMichigan
SANDSHALL(2008)
Editor of Alumni Arts Review
B.A.,UniversityofCalifornia,Irvine;
M.F.A., University of Iowa
DORISJ.HALL-GULATI(1990)
Artist in Residence of Music, Clarinet
B.Mus.,JohnsHopkinsUniversity;
M.Mus., University of Michigan, Ann
Arbor
DUSTINHAMALAINEN(2019)
Visiting Instructor of Economics
B.S.,UniversityofSouthernMaine
DEANC.HAMMER(1994)
John W. Wetzel Professor of Classics
Professor of Government
B.A.,AugustanaCollege;M.A.,
UniversityofCalifornia,Berkeley;
Ph.D.,UniversityofCalifornia,
Berkeley
THOMASC.HART(2017)
Visiting Assistant Professor
of Anthropology
B.A.,St.Mary’sCollegeofMaryland;
M.A.,UniversityofMissouri;Ph.D.,
University of Connecticut
KATHERINEKABIHARTMAN
(2001)
Director of the Program in Support
of Academic Excellence and Teaching
Professor of English
B.A.,OberlinCollege;M.A.,Columbia
University;Ph.D.,TempleUniversity
NADRAHEBOUCHE(2011)
Associate Professor of Francophone
Studies and French
LicenceLangue,UniversityParis13,
France;M.A.,UniversityParis13,
France;Ph.D.,UniversityofBuffalo
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 165
BENNETTW.HELM(1995)
Dr. Elijah E. Kresge Professor of
Philosophy
Scientic and Philosophical Studies of
Mind Program Chair
A.B.,CarletonCollege;M.A.,
UniversityofPittsburgh;Ph.D.,
UniversityofPittsburgh
KENNETHR.HESS(1987)
Professor of Chemistry
B.A.,GettysburgCollege;Ph.D.,
University of Virginia
TAMMIL.HESSEN(2012)
Senior Adjunct Instructor of Music,
African Drums
African Drum Ensemble Conductor
B.A.,MountSt.Mary;M.A.,
University of Maryland
ELBAHEVIAYVACA(2003)
Senior Adjunct Instructor of Dance
B.A.,GeorgeWashingtonUniversity
CAROLL.HICKEY(1981)
Senior Adjunct Instructor of Art
B.A.,CatholicUniversityofAmerica
ERICHIRSCH(2017)
Assistant Professor
of Environmental Studies
B.A.,ColumbiaUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofChicago;Ph.D.,
University of Chicago
JEROMEHODOS(2003)
Associate Professor of Sociology
Sociology Department Chair
B.A.,HarvardUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofPennsylvania;Ph.D.,
UniversityofPennsylvania
JOHNHOLMGREN(2010)
Associate Professor of Art
Art, Art History & Film Department
Chair
B.A.,CentralWashingtonUniversity;
M.F.A., University of Minnesota
JUSTINB.HOPKINS’07
(2004,2008,2011)
Assistant Director of the Writing Center
B.A.,Franklin&MarshallCollege;
M.A., University of Warwick and
UniversityofHelsinki;Ph.D.,Indiana
UniversityofPennsylvania
KATHLEENHOREIN(2017)
Adjunct Assistant Professor of Music,
Oboe
B.S.,BallStateUniversity;M.A.,West
Chester University
AARONF.HOWARD(2015)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Biology
B.S.,GroveCityCollege;Ph.D.,
Georgetown University
LAURENH.HOWARD(2015)
Assistant Professor of Psychology
and Scientic and Philosophical
Studies of Mind
B.A.,UniversityofPittsburgh;M.A.,
UniversityofMaryland;Ph.D.,
University of Chicago
DEVINHOWELL(2006)
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Double Bass
B.Mus.,NewEnglandConservatory
ofMusic;M.Mus.,CarnegieMellon
University
JINGHU(2009)
Associate Professor
of Computer Science
Computer Science Department Chair
B.S.,XidianUniversity;Ph.D.,Utah
StateUniversity
EMILYR.HUBER(2009)
Associate Professor of English
English Department Chair
B.A.,CollegeofWilliamandMary;
M.A.,UniversityofRochester;Ph.D.,
UniversityofRochester
WILLIAMHUTSON
(1989–1996;1999)
Jennie Brown Cook
and Betsy Hess Cook Distinguished
Artist in Residence of Art
UniversityofNewMexico;San
Francisco Academy of Art
ZESHANISMAT(2002)
Associate Professor of Geosciences
B.S.,UniversityofRochester;M.S.,
UniversityofRochester;Ph.D.,
UniversityofRochester
MICHAELJAMANIS(1993)
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Violin
B.Mus.,JuilliardSchoolofMusic;
M.Mus.,YaleUniversity;D.M.A.,
RutgersUniversity
PETERJAROS(2010)
Associate Professor of English
B.A.,YaleUniversity;M.A.,
NorthwesternUniversity;Ph.D.,
NorthwesternUniversity
PABLOD.JENIK(2007)
Associate Professor of Biology
B.S.,UniversityofBuenosAires;M.S.,
UniversityofBuenosAires;Ph.D.,Yale
University
ANDREWJENKS(2020)
Adjunct Instructor of Government
B.A.,WestChesterUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofDelaware
ROBERTN.JINKS(1997)
Professor of Biology
B.A.,SyracuseUniversity;Ph.D.,
SyracuseUniversity
NICOLEC.JONESYOUNG(2016)
Assistant Professor
of Organizational Behavior
B.A.,TowsonUniversity;M.B.A.,
FairleighDickinsonUniversity;Ph.D.,
University of Connecticut
GREGORYJ.KALISS(2008,2013,
2017,2019)
Visiting Assistant Professor of
American Studies
B.A.,UniversityofNorthCarolina,
ChapelHill;M.A.,Universityof
NorthCarolina,ChapelHill;Ph.D.,
UniversityofNorthCarolina,Chapel
Hill
CHRISTINEN.KALLEENY(2014)
Associate Teaching Professor of Arabic
Director of the Arabic Language
Program
B.A.,RutgersUniversity;M.A.,
RutgersUniversity;Ph.D.,Emory
University
JULIAKAMANDA(2020)
Adjunct Instructor of Theatre
B.A.,NorthernArizonaUniversity
STEFANIEI.KASPAREK(2020)
Visiting Instructor of Government
M.A.,EberhardKarlsUniversity;
M.A., Temple University
JOSHUAD.KATZ-ROSENE(2018)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Music
B.F.A.,ConcordiaUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofCalifornia-SantaCruz;
Ph.D.,TheCityCollegeofNewYork
166 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
STEPHANA.KÄUFER(1999)
John Williamson Nevin Memorial
Professor of Philosophy
B.A.,YaleUniversity;Ph.D.,Stanford
University
CHRISTOFK.KEEBAUGH(2018)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Physics
and Astronomy
B.S.,ShippensburgUniversity;
M.S.,UniversityofLouisville;M.S.,
UniversityofNorthCarolina;Ph.D.,
UniversityofPittsburgh
JESSICAKEECH(2017)
Assistant Professor of Marketing
B.S.,BostonUniversity;M.B.A.,
VillanovaUniversity;Ph.D.,Temple
University
ELIZABETHKELLER(1990)
Senior Adjunct Instructor
of Music, Piano
B.Mus.,CurtisInstituteofMusic
RICHARDK.KENT(1991)
Professor of Art History
Ware College House Don
B.A.,OberlinCollege;M.A.,Princeton
University;Ph.D.,PrincetonUniversity
DANISHKHAN(2020)
Assistant Professor of Economics
B.S.,UniversityofUtah;M.A.,
UniversityofMassachusettsAmherst;
Ph.D.,UniversityofMassachusetts
Amherst
JENNIFERD.KIBBE(2004)
Associate Professor of Government
B.A.,DrakeUniversity;M.S.,
GeorgetownUniversity;Ph.D.,
University of California, Los Angeles
M.ALISONKIBLER(2002)
Professor of American Studies and
Women’s, Gender and Sexuality Studies
American Studies Program Chair
B.A.,BrandeisUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofIowa;Ph.D.,University
of Iowa
EUNBIKIM(2018)
Assistant Professor of International
Business
B.A.,KoreaUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofPennsylvania;Ph.D.,
UniversityofPennsylvania
ALEXANDERD.KING(2016,2018)
Visiting Assistant Professor of
Anthropology
B.A.,ReedCollege;M.A.,University
ofVirginia;Ph.D.,Universityof
Virginia
MEGANKNOWLES(2009)
Associate Professor of Psychology
Psychology Department Associate
Co-Chair
B.A.,UniversityofKentucky;M.S.,
NorthwesternUniversity;Ph.D.,
NorthwesternUniversity
BRANDONKOENIG(2016)
Assistant Professor of Government
B.A.,TempleUniversity;M.A.,The
NewSchool
SETHJ.KOPCHAK(2009)
Associate Professor of Finance
B.S.,CarnegieMellonUniversity;
M.A.,WestVirginiaUniversity;Ph.D.,
West Virginia University
KONSTANTINOSKOURELIS(2009)
Associate Professor of Art History
B.A.,UniversityofPennsylvania;
M.Arch.,UniversityofPennsylvania;
Ph.D.,UniversityofPennsylvania
JOHNKENNETHKREBS(2002)
Associate Professor of Physics
B.S.,GeorgiaInstituteofTechnology;
M.Ed.,UniversityofGeorgia;Ph.D.,
University of Georgia
NICKL.KROLL(2011)
Associate Professor of Philosophy
Philosophy Department Chair
B.A.,ArizonaStateUniversity;M.A.,
ArizonaStateUniversity;Ph.D.,Yale
University
CYNTHIAL.KROM’80(2011)
Associate Professor of Accounting and
Organizations
Business, Organizations and Society
Department Chair
B.A.,Franklin&MarshallCollege;
M.B.A.,FairleighDickinson
University;Ph.D.,Universityof
Albany,S.U.N.Y.
NANCYB.KURLAND(2010)
Associate Professor
of Organization Studies
B.A.,PennsylvaniaStateUniversity;
M.B.A.,KatholiekeUniversityte
Leuven;M.B.A.,CornellUniversity;
Ph.D.,UniversityofPittsburgh
JERRYLABORANTIJR.(2007)
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Saxophone
and Jazz Ensemble Conductor
B.A.,TheUniversityoftheArts;
M.Mus., The University of the Arts
RYANT.LACY(2015)
Assistant Professor of Psychology
B.A.,KenyonCollege;M.A.,
UniversityofSouthCarolina;Ph.D.,
UniversityofSouthCarolina
CARRIEC.LANDFRIED(2010)
Associate Professor of French
French, Francophone and Arabic
Studies Department Chair
Comparative Literary Studies Program
Chair
B.A.,GrinnellCollege;M.A.,New
YorkUniversity;Ph.D.,NewYork
University
CRAIGK.LANG(2017)
Visiting Assistant Professor
of Government
B.A.,CedarvilleUniversity;Ph.D.,
Florida International University
KENNETHLAUDERMILCH(2008)
Senior Adjunct Professor
of Music, Trumpet
B.S.,LebanonValleyCollege;M.Mus.,
TheNewEnglandConservatory
ofMusic;D.M.A.,TheCatholic
University of America
MAGNOLIAW.LAURIE(2015)
Assistant Professor of Art
B.A.,MountHolyokeCollege;M.F.A.,
Maryland Institute College of Art
PHYLLISA.LEBER(1982)
Dr. E. Paul and Francis H. Reiff
Professor of Chemistry
B.S.,AlbrightCollege;Ph.D.,
UniversityofNewMexico
SANDRAE.LEE(2019)
Assistant Professor of Art
B.A.,CornellUniversity;M.F.A.,
CUNYHunterCollege
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 167
TATEA.LEFEVRE(2013)
Assistant Professor of Anthropology
B.A.,DartmouthCollege;M.A.,New
YorkUniversity;Ph.D.,NewYork
University
KRISTINL.LEIMGRUBER(2017)
Visiting Assistant Professor
of Psychology
B.S.,UniversityofWisconsin;M.S.,
YaleUniversity;Ph.D.,YaleUniversity
KARENLEISTRA-JONES(2011)
Assistant Professor of Music
Music Department Chair
B.Mus.,McGillUniversity;M.A.,Yale
University;Ph.D.,YaleUniversity
GIOVANNAF.LERNER(2004)
Professor of Italian
Women’s, Gender & Sexuality Studies
Program Chair
Laurea,CatholicUniversityofMilan;
M.A.,UniversityofPennsylvania;
Ph.D.,UniversityofPennsylvania
L.SCOTTLERNER(1995)
Arthur and Katherine Shadek Professor
of Humanities and French and Italian
B.A.,YaleUniversity;A.M.,Harvard
University;Ph.D.,HarvardUniversity
ALANLEVINE(1983)
Associate Professor of Mathematics
B.S.,S.U.N.Y.atStonyBrook;M.A.,
HofstraUniversity;M.S.,S.U.N.Y.at
StonyBrook;Ph.D.,S.U.N.Y.atStony
Brook
MARYANNLEVINE(1998)
Professor of Anthropology
Bonchek College House Don
B.A.,McGillUniversity,Montreal;
M.A., University of Massachusetts,
Amherst;Ph.D.,Universityof
Massachusetts, Amherst
DAVIDELIONETTI(2019)
Assistant Professor of Chemistry
B.S.,UniversityofNotreDame;Ph.D.,
California Institute of Technology
JIALINGLIU(2014)
Senior Teaching Professor of Spanish
B.A.,UniversidaddeBogotáJorge
TadeoLozano;M.A.,TheUniversity
of Iowa
JUN-CHENGLIU(1997)
Professor of Art
B.F.A.,LuXunAcademyofFineArts,
P.R.China;M.F.A.,LuXunAcademy
ofFineArts,P.R.China;M.F.A.,East
TexasStateUniversity
YINGLIU(2019)
Chinese Language Teaching Assistant
B.A.,JiaxingUniversity;M.A.,
University of Virginia
ELIZABETHV.LONSDORF(2012)
Dana Professor in the Liberal Arts and
Associate Professor of Psychology
B.S.,DukeUniversity;Ph.D.,
University of Minnesota
JOSEPHF.LYNCH(2018)
Visiting Assistant Professor of
Biological Psychology
B.S.,S.U.N.Y.Plattsburgh;Ph.D.,Kent
StateUniversity
AMYL.LYTLE(2010)
Associate Professor of Physics
B.A.,TheCollegeofWooster;Ph.D.,
University of Colorado
G.TERRYMADONNA(2004)
Professor of Public Policy
B.S.,MillersvilleUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofDelaware;Ph.D.,
UniversityofDelaware
SARAMALE(2007)
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Violoncello
B.Mus.,RutgersUniversity;M.Mus.,
Mannes College of Music
SATBIRMALHI(2019)
Visiting Assistant Professor of
Mathematics
B.A.,GuruNanakDevUniversity;
M.S.,GuruNanakDevUniversity
ROBERTMARENICK(2007)
Resident Technical Director
B.A.,Baldwin-WallaceCollege;
M.F.A.,WayneStateUniversity
EMILYA.MARSHALL(2015)
Assistant Professor of Sociology
and Public Health
B.A.,PomonaCollege;Ph.D.,
PrincetonUniversity
RAYMONDA.MAYNARD
(2000–2002,2012)
Visiting Assistant Professor
of Economics
B.A.,UniversityofSussex;M.A.,
UniversityofTennessee,Knoxville;
Ph.D.,UniversityofTennessee,
Knoxville
GLORIAE.MAST(2020)
Adjunct Instructor of Art & Art History
B.F.A.,PrattInstitute
KATHERINEE.McCLELLAND
(1984)
Professor of Sociology
B.A.,BrownUniversity;M.A.,Brown
University;Ph.D.,HarvardUniversity
MICHAELP.McCOOEY(2002)
Associate Professor of Mathematics
B.A.,UniversityofChicago;Ph.D.,
Indiana University
BRADLEYMCDANEL(2020)
Assistant Professor of Computer
Science
B.S.,WakeForestUniversity;M.S.,
WakeForestUniversity;Ph.D.,
Harvard University
DAVIDL.McMAHAN(1999)
Charles A. Dana Professor of Religious
Studies
Religious Studies Department Chair
B.A.,KentStateUniversity;M.A.,
FloridaStateUniversity;Ph.D.,
UniversityofCalifornia,SantaBarbara
STEPHANIEMcNULTY(2008)
Associate Professor of Government
Government Department Chair
Director of Faculty Diversity Initiatives
B.A.,WashingtonandLeeUniversity;
M.A.,NewYorkUniversity;Ph.D.,The
George Washington University
BENJAMINR.McREE(1987)
Professor of History
B.A.,PomonaCollege;M.A.,Indiana
University;Ph.D.,IndianaUniversity
STEPHENK.MEDVIC(2002)
Honorable John C. and Mrs. Kunkel
Professor of Government
B.A.,TexasA&MUniversity;M.A.,
PurdueUniversity;Ph.D.,Purdue
University
168 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
JORGEMENA-ALI(2008)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Biology
B.A.,UniversidaddeCostaRica;M.S.,
UniversidaddeCostaRica;Ph.D.,The
PennsylvaniaStateUniversity
SHAEEDAA.MENSAH(2019)
Visiting Assistant Professor of
Philosophy
B.A.,SpellmanCollege;M.A.,The
PennsylvaniaStateUniversity;Ph.D.,
ThePennsylvaniaStateUniversity
DAVIDMERLI(2003)
Associate Professor of Philosophy
B.A.,S.U.N.Y.,Geneseo;M.A.,Ohio
StateUniversity;Ph.D.,OhioState
University
DOROTHYJ.MERRITTS(1987)
The Harry W. & Mary B. Huffnagle
Professor of Geosciences
Environmental Studies Program Chair
B.S.,IndianaUniversityof
Pennsylvania;M.S.,Stanford
University;Ph.D.,Universityof
Arizona
STANLEYA.MERTZMAN(1972)
Earl D. Stage and Mary E. Stage
Professor of Geosciences
B.S.,UniversityofDayton;M.S.,Case
WesternReserveUniversity;Ph.D.,
CaseWesternReserveUniversity
JENNIFERMEYER(2017)
Assistant Professor of Government and
Public Health
B.S.,GeorgeWashingtonUniversity;
M.P.P.,DukeUniversity;Ph.D.,Duke
University
GRETCHENE.MEYERS(2007)
Associate Professor of Classics
B.A.,DukeUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofTexas;Ph.D.,University
of Texas
KEITHALLENMILLER(2012)
Senior Adjunct Instructor of Science,
Technology and Society
B.S.,VillanovaUniversity;M.A.,West
VirginiaUniversity;M.A.,Indiana
University
KIRKMILLER(1978)
B.F. Fackenthal, Jr. Professor
of Biology
B.A.,AntiochCollege;M.S.,Colorado
StateUniversity;Ph.D.,Universityof
Oklahoma
SONIAS.MISRA(2019)
Visiting Instructor of Film and Media
B.A.,WellesleyCollege;M.A.,New
York University
MARIAD.MITCHELL(1994)
Professor of History
B.A.,TheJohnsHopkinsUniversity;
M.A.,BostonUniversity;Ph.D.,
BostonUniversity
KEN-ICHIMIURA(2006)
Senior Teaching Professor of Japanese
Director of the Japanese
Language Program
B.A.,NanzanUniversity;M.A.,
University of Wisconsin, Madison
JOHNLARDASMODERN(2006)
Professor of Religious Studies
B.A.,PrincetonUniversity;M.A.,
MiamiUniversity,Ohio;Ph.D.,
UniversityofCalifornia,SantaBarbara
PADMINIMONGIA(1989)
Professor of English
Weis College House Don
B.A.,UniversityofDelhi;M.A.,
UniversityofDelhi;Ph.D.,The
PennsylvaniaStateUniversity
NICHOLASMONTEMARANO
(2002)
Alumni Professor of Creative Writing
and Belles Lettres and Professor of
English
B.A.,FaireldUniversity;M.A.,
BinghamtonUniversity;M.F.A.,
University of Massachusetts
RICHARDS.MOOG(1986)
Professor of Chemistry
B.A.,WilliamsCollege;Ph.D.,
StanfordUniversity
CLARAS.MOORE(2002)
Professor of Biology
B.S.,LoyolaCollege;Ph.D.,Johns
Hopkins University
JENNIFERL.MORFORD(2002)
Professor of Chemistry
B.S.,BostonCollege;M.S.,University
ofWashington;Ph.D.,Universityof
Washington
JEREMYS.MOSS(2008)
Associate Professor of Film
and Media
Film and Media Program Director
B.A.,UniversityofUtah;M.F.A.,Ohio
University
JUDITHMUELLER(1993)
Professor of English
B.A.,IthacaCollege;M.A.,S.U.N.Y.,
Binghamton;Ph.D.,S.U.N.Y.,
Binghamton
AMYB.MULNIX(2014)
Director of the Faculty Center
B.S.S.,CornellCollege;Ph.D.,Purdue
University
YEVANERSISYAN(2012)
Associate Professor of Economics
B.A.,YerevanStateUniversity,Ph.D.,
UniversityofMissouri-KansasCity
JEFFREYNESTERUK(1993)
Professor of Legal Studies
B.A.,WesleyanUniversity;M.A.,
PennsylvaniaStateUniversity;J.D.,
UniversityofPennsylvaniaLawSchool
BARBARAE.NIMERSHIEM(1992)
Associate Professor of Mathematics
B.A.,NewCollege;M.A.,University
ofMichigan;Ph.D.,Universityof
Michigan
BRIANH.NORCROSS(1986)
Senior Teaching Professor of Music
Senior Director of Instrumental Music
and Conducting Studies
B.Mus.Ed.,Universityof
Massachusetts;M.Mus.Ed.,New
EnglandConservatoryofMusic;
D.M.A.,CatholicUniversityof
America
EDMUNDJ.NOVAK(2016)
Assistant Professor
of Computer Science
M.S.,TheCollegeofWilliam&Mary;
Ph.D.,TheCollegeofWilliam&Mary
SHAWNO’BRYHIM(2004)
Professor of Classics
B.A.,BallStateUniversity;M.A.,Ball
StateUniversity;M.A.,University
ofTexasatAustin;Ph.D.,Universityof
Texas at Austin
HARRIETE.OKATCH(2017)
Assistant Professor of Biology and
Public Health
B.Sc.,UniversityofBotswana;Ph.D.,
UniversityofBotswana
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 169
MARKH.OLSON(2000)
Professor of Biology
B.S.,UniversityofAlberta,Edmonton;
Ph.D.,MichiganStateUniversity
JORIDAPAPAKRONI(2013)
Associate Professor of Finance
B.Sc.,UniversityofLaVerne;Ph.D.,
West Virginia University
HEATHERPASEWICZ(2020)
Adjunct Assistant Professor of
Mathematics
B.S.,CarnegieMellonUniversity;
M.S.,CarnegieMellonUniversity;
Ph.D.,CarnegieMellonUniversity
EDWARDPEARSON(1992)
Associate Professor of History
B.A.,UniversityofBirmingham
(England);M.A.,BowlingGreen
StateUniversity;Ph.D.,Universityof
Wisconsin, Madison
MICHAELL.PENN(1991)
Professor of Psychology
Psychology Department Chair
B.A.,UniversityofPennsylvania;
M.A.,TempleUniversity;Ph.D.,
Temple University
CRISTINAPEREZ(2020)
Assistant Professor of American Studies
B.A.,WilametteUniversity;M.A.,
WesternNewMexicoUniversity;
Ph.D.,UniversityofMaryland
ELIZABETHL.PFAFFLE(2006)
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Horn
B.Mus.,TheOhioStateUniversity;
M.Mus.,UniversityofAkron;Ph.D.,
Indiana University
CHRISTINEM.PHILLIPS-PIRO
(2012)
Professor of Chemistry
A.B.,VassarCollege;Ph.D.,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology
KATHERINEPLASS(2008)
Professor of Chemistry
B.S.,WayneStateUniversity;Ph.D.,
University of Michigan
JEFFREYS.PODOSHEN(2005)
Professor of Marketing
B.S.B.A.,UniversityofDelaware;
M.B.A.,TempleUniversity;Ph.D.,
Temple University
ELIZABETHPRATON(1997)
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Physics and Astronomy
B.A.,OberlinCollege;Ph.D.,
University of Massachusetts, Amherst
IWANPRATON(1997)
Professor of Mathematics
B.A.,OberlinCollege;Ph.D.,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology
AMELIARAUSER(2003)
Associate Dean of the Faculty
Professor of Art History
B.A.,UniversityofCalifornia,
Berkeley;M.A.,Northwestern
University;Ph.D.,Northwestern
University
TANYARAWAL(2020)
Adjunct Assistant Professor of
Women’s, Gender & Sexuality Studies
B.A.,LouisianaStateUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofCalifornia,Riverside;
Ph.D.,UniversityofCalifornia,
Riverside
ALEKSANDRAREBEKA(2019)
Visiting Assistant Professor of
Management
B.A.,NovosibirskStateTechnical
University;M.A.,NovosibirskState
TechnicalUniversity;Ph.D,University
ofNorthCarolina,ChapelHill
JENNIFERREDMANN(2009)
Professor of German
B.A.,SaintOlafCollege;M.A.,
UniversityofWisconsin-Madison;
Ph.D.,UniversityofWisconsin-
Madison
RICHARDREITAN(2006)
Associate Professor of History
History Department Chair
B.A.,UniversityofWashington;M.A.,
JohnsHopkinsUniversity;Ph.D.,
University of Chicago
WENDELLE.RESSLER(1994)
Professor of Mathematics
B.A.,EasternMennoniteCollege;
M.A.,JamesMadisonUniversity;
Ph.D.,TempleUniversity
SAMUELREYES(2020)
Adjunct Instructor of Dance
B.F.A.,UniversityoftheArts
DAVIDM.ROBERTS(2010)
Associate Professor of Biology
B.S.,BowlingGreenStateUniversity;
Ph.D.,UniversityofNorthCarolinaat
Chapel Hill
LEANNEM.RONCOLATO(2014)
Assistant Professor of Economics
B.A.,HobartandWilliamSmith
Colleges;Ph.D.,AmericanUniversity
ASHLEYC.RONDINI(2014)
Assistant Professor
of Sociology
B.A.,ClarkUniversity;M.A.,The
UniversityofSussex;M.A.,Brandeis
University;Ph.D.,BrandeisUniversity
ALEXW.ROOMETS(2014)
Assistant Professor of Economics
B.S.,NortheasternUniversity;
M.A.,UniversityofArizona;Ph.D.,
UniversityofArizona
GLENNROSS(1980)
Dr. Elijah E. Kresge Professor
of Philosophy
B.A.,WestmontCollege;M.A.,
UniversityofArizona;Ph.D.,
UniversityofArizona
TIMOTHYC.ROTHII(2012)
Associate Professor of Psychology
B.A.,CornellCollege;M.S.,Missouri
StateUniversity;Ph.D.,IndianaState
University
JOSHUAD.ROTTMAN(2015)
Assistant Professor of Psychology
and Scientic and Philosophical
Studies of Mind
B.A.,VassarCollege;Ph.D.,Boston
University
SOFIARUIZ-ALFARO(2007)
Associate Professor of Spanish
B.A.,SaintLouisUniversity;M.A.,
SaintLouisUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofSouthernCalifornia;
Ph.D.,UniversityofSouthern
California
VERONIKARYJIK(2004)
Professor of Spanish
B.A.,McGillUniversity,Ph.D.,Brown
University
170 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
JULIEC.SARAGOSA(2015)
French and German Language
Teaching Fellow
B.A.,MillersvilleUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofMarylandCollegePark
DEBORAHR.SCHMIDT(2020)
Assistant Professor of Physics &
Astronomy
B.A.,Franklin&MarshallCollege;
Ph.D.,UniversityofArizona
WILLIAMD.SCHNEPER(2012)
Associate Professor of Organization
Studies and Management
Business, Organizations & Society
Department Associate Chair
B.A.,BostonCollege;M.S.,Leonard
N.SternSchoolofBusiness;Ph.D.,
TheWhartonSchool,Universityof
Pennsylvania
MATTHEWM.SCHOUSEN(1993)
Professor of Government
B.A.,CornellCollege;M.A.,Duquesne
University;Ph.D.,DukeUniversity
ABBYM.SCHRADER(1996)
Professor of History
A.B.,ColumbiaCollege;M.A.,
UniversityofPennsylvania;Ph.D.,
UniversityofPennsylvania
SHUAISHAO(2011)
Teaching Professor of Chinese
B.A.,BeijingLanguageandCulture
University;M.A.,OhioUniversity
LAURASHELTON(2012)
Associate Professor of History
History Department Associate Chair
Latin American Studies Program Chair
B.A.,McPhersonCollege;M.A.,
TempleUniversity;Ph.D.,University
ofArizona
STEPHENSHIFFER(2018)
Adjunct Assistant Professor of Music,
Low Brass
B.M.,YoungstownStateUniversity
KAORISHIMIZU(2019)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Japanese
B.A.,MeijiGakuinUniversity;M.A.,
Middlebury Institute of International
Studies;Ph.D.,LouisianaState
University
FIRUZEHSHOKOOHVALLE(2018)
Assistant Professor of Sociology
B.A.,UniversityofPuertoRico;
M.A.,NortheasternUniversity;Ph.D.,
NortheasternUniversity
JAMESG.SHULTZ’68(1984)
Senior Adjunct Instructor
of Government
B.A.,Franklin&MarshallCollege;
M.P.A.,KentStateUniversity
BRIANT.SILBERMAN(2007)
Associate Professor of Theatre
B.A.,MiddleburyCollege;M.A.,
UniversityofArizona;M.F.A.,
CarnegieMellonUniversity;Ph.D.,
NewYorkUniversity
MARKS.SILVERMAN(2017)
Assistant Professor
of Economics
B.A.,SwarthmoreCollege;J.D.,New
York University
AMYE.SINGER(2013)
Associate Professor of Sociology
B.A.,SmithCollege;M.A.,University
ofWashington;Ph.D.,Universityof
Washington
TIMOTHYW.SIPE(1997)
Associate Professor of Biology
B.A.,WabashCollege;M.S.,
UniversityofTennessee;Ph.D.,
Harvard University
SCOTTC.SMITH(2010)
Associate Professor of Anthropology
Anthropology Department Chair
B.A.,DrewUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofCalifornia,Riverside;
Ph.D.,UniversityofCalifornia,
Riverside
MERYSOTO-HARNER(2008)
Senior Adjunct Instructor of Spanish
B.A.,InstitutoCulturalPeruano-
Norteamericano,Peru;B.A.,
MillersvilleUniversity;M.B.A.,
Millersville University
ANNESTACHURA(2017)
Coordinator, Spanish Community
Based Learning and Community
Outreach
B.S.,UniversityofMichigan;M.A.,
University of Virginia
ANNSTEINER(1981)
Shirley Watkins Steinman Professor
of Classics
A.B.,BrynMawrCollege;M.A.,Bryn
MawrCollege;Ph.D.,BrynMawr
College
LAWRENCEF.STENGEL(1997)
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Government
B.A.,St.JosephUniversity;J.D.,
UniversityofPittsburghSchoolofLaw
LOUISEL.STEVENSON(1982)
Professor of History
and American Studies
B.A.,BarnardCollege;M.A.,New
YorkUniversity;Ph.D.,Boston
University
BRYANT.STINCHFIELD(2009)
Associate Professor
of Organization Studies
B.A.,UniversityofPittsburgh;
M.B.A.,UniversityofPittsburgh;
Ph.D.,SouthernIllinoisUniversity,
Carbondale
STEPHANIEA.STOEHR(2015)
Biosafety Ofcer and Adjunct Assistant
Professor of Biology
B.S,PennStateUniversity;Ph.D.,Penn
StateHersheyCollegeofMedicine
JONATHANSTONE(2010)
Associate Professor of Russian Chair,
Department of German, Russian and
East Asian Languages
B.A.,ColumbiaUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofCalifornia,Berkeley;
Ph.D.,UniversityofCalifornia,
Berkeley
JAMESE.STRICK(2002)
Professor of Science, Technology,
and Society
B.S.,S.U.N.YCollege,Cortland;M.S.,
S.U.N.YCollege;M.A.,Princeton
University;Ph.D.,PrincetonUniversity
CALVINSTUBBINS(1989)
Professor of Physics
B.S.,MassachusettsInstituteof
Technology;Ph.D.,StanfordUniversity
TODDF.SULLIVAN(2013)
Senior Adjunct Instructor of Music, Viola
B.F.A.,CarnegieMellonUniversity
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 171
SHERALITAREEN(2012)
Associate Professor of Religious Studies
A.B.,MacalesterCollege;Ph.D.,Duke
University
SARAHZ.TASKER(2018)
Assistant Professor of Chemistry
B.S.,CalvinCollege;Ph.D.,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology
KATHRINL.THEUMER(2012)
Associate Professor of Spanish
Spanish Department Associate Chair
B.A.,CaliforniaPolytechnicState
University;M.A.,Universityof
Nevada;Ph.D.,Universityof
California,SantaBarbara
JOSEPHT.THOMPSON(2006)
Professor of Biology
Biology Department Chair
A.B.,BowdoinCollege;Ph.D.,
UniversityofNorthCarolina,ChapelHill
MARCUSW.THOMSEN(1983)
Professor of Chemistry
Associate Dean of the Faculty
B.A.,LutherCollege;Ph.D.,University
of Minnesota
CARMENC.TISNADO(1996)
Professor of Spanish
B.A.,UniversidadCatolicadel
Peru;M.A.,TheCatholicUniversity
ofAmerica;Ph.D.,TheCatholic
University of America
RYANF.TRAINOR(2017)
Assistant Professor of Physics
B.S.,UniversityofCalifornia,
Irvine;M.S.,CaliforniaInstituteof
Technology;Ph.D.,CaliforniaInstitute
of Technology
MEAGANK.TRIPP(2016)
Assistant Professor of German
B.A.,AlmaCollege;M.A.,University
ofNewMexico
KIMBERLYTROLIER(2008)
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Flute
B.Mus.,PeabodyConservatoryof
Music;M.Mus.,PeabodyConservatory
ofMusic;D.M.A.,TempleUniversity
ALLISONS.TROY(2012)
Associate Professor of Psychology
B.A.,NorthCarolinaStateUniversity;
M.A.,UniversityofDenver;Ph.D.,
UniversityofDenver
TAKAKOTSUMURA(2018)
Japanese Language Teaching Fellow
B.A.,NanazanUniversity;M.A.,
PurdueUniversity
ERICM.USNER(2014)
Adjunct Assistant Professor of Music
and American Studies
B.A.,DickinsonCollege;M.A.,
UniversityofCalifornia-Riverside;
Ph.D.,NewYorkUniversity
PAMELAS.VAIL(2002)
Associate Professor of Dance
Theatre and Dance Department Chair
B.A.,MiddleburyCollege;M.F.A.,
SmithCollege
SCOTTA.VANARMAN(1992)
Professor of Chemistry
B.S.,MichiganStateUniversity;Ph.D.,
OhioStateUniversity
JOAQUINP.VILLARREAL(2018)
Director of Entrepreneurship
B.A.,UniversidadNacionaldeLa
Plata;M.B.A.,TuckSchoolofBusiness
MARKR.VILLEGAS(2017)
Assistant Professor of American Studies
B.A.,UniversityofFlorida;M.A.,
UniversityofCalifornia,LosAngeles;
Ph.D.,UniversityofCalifornia,Irvine
ROBERTWALTER’75(2001)
Professor of Geosciences
B.S.,Franklin&MarshallCollege;
Ph.D.,CaseWesternReserve
University
ANTHONYJ.WEAVER,JR.(2009)
Senior Adjunct Instructor of Computer
Science
B.S.,MountSaintMary’sCollege;
M.S.,StonyBrookUniversity;M.A.,
StonyBrookUniversity
CHRISTINAM.WEAVER(2009)
Associate Professor of Mathematics
Mathematics Department Chair
B.S.,MountSt.Mary’sUniversity;
M.S.,StonyBrookUniversity;Ph.D.,
StonyBrookUniversity
NICOLEE.WELK-JOERGER(2018)
Adjunct Instructor of Science,
Technology and Society
B.A.,TempleUniversity;M.A.,
BrandeisUniversity
VIRGINIAWEST’78(1984)
Teaching Professor of Theatre and
Dance
Resident Costume Designer
A.B.,Franklin&MarshallCollege;
M.F.A., University of Hawaii
KERRYH.WHITESIDE(1983)
Clair R. McCollough Professor
of Government
A.B.,StanfordUniversity;M.A.,
PrincetonUniversity;Ph.D.,Princeton
University
CARLAWILLARD(1995)
Associate Professor
of American Studies
B.A.,UniversityofStockholm;M.A.,
UppsalaUniversity;M.A.,Temple
University;Ph.D.,Universityof
Pennsylvania
CHRISTOPHERJ.WILLIAMS(2005)
Professor of Environmental Science
Earth and Environment Department
Chair
B.S.,CornellUniversity;M.S.,Cornell
University;Ph.D.,Universityof
Pennsylvania
ELSPETHM.WILSON(2016)
Assistant Professor of Government
B.A.,ColumbiaUniversity;M.A.,
University of Wisconsin
JASONWILSON(2020)
Assistant Professor of Computer
Science
B.S.,WorcesterPolytechnicInstitute;
M.S.,WorcesterPolytechnicInstitute;
Ph.D.,TuftsUniversity
KERRYSHERINWRIGHT(2003)
Director of the Writers House and
Teaching Professor of English
B.A.,UniversityofPennsylvania;
M.A.,HollinsCollege;M.A.,Temple
University;Ph.D.,TempleUniversity
172 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
WILLIAMB.WRIGHT(2001)
Senior Teaching Professor of Music
Choral Conductor
B.A.,AmherstCollege;M.Mus.,The
NewEnglandConservatory;Ph.D.,
UniversityofNorthCarolinaat
Greensboro
CAITLYNYANTIS(2020)
Visiting Assistant Professor of
Psychology
B.A.,UniversityofMaryWashington;
M.S.,DePaulUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofIllinois;Ph.D.,University
of Illinois
HONGCHANGYAO(2008)
Senior Teaching Professor of Chinese
Director of the Chinese Language
Program
B.A.,HebeiTeacher’sUniversity;
M.A.,UniversityofCalifornia,Santa
Barbara
WEI-TINGYEN(2019)
Assistant Professor of Government
B.A.,NationalTaiwanUniversity;
M.A.,NationalTaiwanUniversity;
M.A.,YaleUniversity;Ph.D.,Ohio
StateUniversity
CINDYYETTER-VASSOT(1989)
Associate Professor of French
B.S.,WestChesterUniversity;
M.A.,UniversityofVirginia;Ph.D.,
University of Virginia
SEÇILYILMAZ(2018)
Assistant Professor of History
B.A.,MiddleEastTechnical
University;M.A.,BoğaziçiUniversity;
Ph.D.,CityCollegeofNewYork
MARKYINGLING(2006)
Senior Adjunct Assistant Professor
of Music, Percussion
B.Mus.,JohnsHopkinsUniversity;
M.Mus.,PennsylvaniaStateUniversity
BERWOODYOST(2004)
Director, Floyd Institute’s Center for
Opinion Research and Senior Adjunct
Research Instructor of Government
B.S.,PennsylvaniaStateUniversity;
M.A., Temple University
EIMANZEIN-ELABDIN(1995)
Professor of Economics
B.A.,UniversityofKhartoum;M.A.,
UniversityofTexas;Ph.D.,University
of Tennessee
FACULTY EMERITI
RICHARDKNEEDLER’65
(1968–2002)
President Emeritus
B.A.,Franklin&MarshallCollege;
M.A.,UniversityofPennsylvania;
Ph.D.,UniversityofPennsylvania;
L.L.D.,TohokuGakuinUniversity,
1993;L.H.D.,Franklin&Marshall
College, 2002
JAYM.ANDERSON(1988–2009)
Richard S. and Anne B. Barshinger
Professor of Computer Science,
Emeritus
B.A.,SwarthmoreCollege,1960;
M.A.,HarvardUniversity,1961;Ph.D.,
HarvardUniversity,1964
ANNETTEARONOWICZ(1985-
2018)
The Robert F. and Patricia G. Ross
Weis Professor of Judaic Studies, Emerita
Emerita Professor of Religious Studies
B.A.,UniversityofCalifornia,
LosAngeles;Ph.D.,Universityof
California, Los Angeles
CAROLJ.AUSTER(1981–2020)
Emerita Professor of Sociology
B.A.,ColgateUniversity;M.A.,
PrincetonUniversity;Ph.D.,Princeton
University
ROBERTJ.BARNETT,JR.
(1963–2004)
Emeritus Professor of Classics
A.B.,RoanokeCollege,1958;Ph.D.,
UniversityofNorthCarolina,1964
PHILLIPE.BEDIENT(1959–1987)
Emeritus Professor of Mathematics
A.B.,ParkCollege,1943;M.A.,
UniversityofMichigan,1947;Ph.D.,
UniversityofMichigan,1959
LINABERNSTEIN(1991-2015)
Emerita Professor of Russian
DiplomainForeignPedagogy,Moscow
InstituteofForeignLanguages;Ph.D.,
University of Massachusetts
LYNNM.BROOKS(1984-2018)
Arthur and Katherine Shadek Professor
of Humanities and Dance, Emerita
B.S.,UniversityofWisconsin;M.Ed.,
TempleUniversity;Ed.D.,Temple
University;C.M.A.,Laban/Bartenieff
InstituteofMovementStudies
LESLIEJ.BURLINGAME
(1976–2002)
Emerita Associate Professor of Science,
Technology, and Society
A.B.,MountHolyokeCollege,1964;
M.A.,CornellUniversity,1968;Ph.D.,
CornellUniversity,1973
KARENJ.CAMPBELL(1990–2019)
Emerita Associate Professor of German
B.A.,LawrenceUniversity;M.A.,
PrincetonUniversity;Ph.D.,Princeton
University
JOHNB.CAMPBELL(1984–2014)
Emeritus Professor of Psychology
B.A.,CollegeofWooster;Ph.D.,
University of Michigan
JOHNCARBON(1984–2020)
Richard S. and Ann B. Barshinger
Professor of Music, Emeritus
B.A.,UniversityofCalifornia,Santa
Barbara;M.M.,RiceUniversity;Ph.D.,
UniversityofCalifornia,Santa
Barbara
LINDAL.CUNNINGHAM
(1975–2002)
Arthur and Katherine Shadek
Humanities Professor of Art, Emerita
B.F.A.,OhioWesleyan,1961;M.F.A.
SyracuseUniversity,1962
ALICEDRUM(1985–2002)
Vice President of the College Emerita
B.A.,WilsonCollege,1957;Ph.D.,The
AmericanUniversity,1976
JOELP.EIGEN(1976-2018)
Charles A. Dana Professor of
Sociology, Emeritus
B.A.,OhioUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofPennsylvania;Ph.D.,
UniversityofPennsylvania
J.JOELFARBER(1963–1995)
Shirley Watkins Steinman Professor
of Classics, Emeritus
A.B.,UniversityofChicago,1952;
M.A.,UniversityofChicago,1954;
Ph.D.,YaleUniversity,1959
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 173
JOHNJ.FARRELL(1965–2000)
Emeritus Professor of Chemistry
B.S.,Baldwin-WallaceCollege,1960;
Ph.D.,UniversityofPittsburgh,1964
IRAN.FEIT(1964–2008)
Professor Emeritus of Biology
B.S.,BrooklynCollege,1960;M.A.,
PrincetonUniversity,1964;Ph.D.,
PrincetonUniversity1969
ARNOLDD.FELDMAN(1979–2020)
Carmie L. and Beatrice J. Creitz
Professor of Mathematics, Emeritus
B.A.,HarvardUniversity;M.A.,
UniversityofMichigan;Ph.D.,
University of Michigan
SEANFLAHERTY’73(1980–2020)
Emeritus Professor of Economics
A.B.,Franklin&MarshallCollege;
Ph.D.,UniversityofCalifornia,
Berkeley
RICHARDA.FLUCK(1974–2011)
Dr. E. Paul and Frances H. Reiff
Professor of Biology, Emeritus
B.S.,IowaStateUniversity,1966;
Ph.D.,UniversityofCalifornia,
Berkeley,1971
ROBERTJ.FRIEDRICH(1976–2017)
Emeritus Associate Professor
of Government
B.A.,UniversityofColorado;M.A.,
UniversityofMichigan;Ph.D.,
University of Michigan
LEONGALIS(1965–1999)
Emeritus Professor of Philosophy
A.B.,UniversityofGeorgia,1961;
Ph.D.,UniversityofNorthCarolina,
1966
ROBERTC.GRAY(1972–2015)
The Hon. and Mrs. John C. Kunkel
Professor of Government, Emeritus
B.A.,UniversityofTexasatAustin;
Ph.D.,UniversityofTexasatAustin
BRUCEGUSTAFSON(1981–2012)
Charles A. Dana Professor of Music,
Emeritus
B.A.,KalamazooCollege,1967;M.
Mus., University of Oklahoma, A. M.
L.S.,UniversityofMichigan,1969;
Ph.D.,UniversityofMichigan,1977
JACKF.HELLER(1972–2013)
Emeritus Associate Professor
of Psychology
B.A.,UniversityofCalifornia,Los
Angeles;M.A.,UniversityofIowa;
Ph.D.,UniversityofIowa,1972
THOMASJ.HOPKINS(1961–1996)
Emeritus Professor of Religious Studies
B.S.,MassachusettsInstituteof
Technology,1953;B.S.,College
ofWilliamandMary,1953;M.A.,
YaleUniversity,1959;Ph.D.,Yale
University,1962
WILLIAMHUTSON(1989–1996;
1999–2006)
Cook Distinguished Artist in Residence,
Emeritus
UniversityofNewMexico,1957;San
FranciscoAcademyofArt,1961
BERNARDJACOBSON(1956–1994)
Emeritus Professor of Mathematics
B.S.,WesternReserveUniversity,
1951;M.A.,MichiganStateUniversity,
1952;Ph.D.,MichiganState
University,1956
ANGELAM.JEANNET(1963–1996)
Charles A. Dana Professor of Romance
Languages, Emerita
Maturita Classica, Liceo Classico
“DanteAlighieri,”Florence,Italy,
1948;Diplomedelangueetlittérature
Francaises, University of Lille, France,
1953;Ph.D.,UniversitadegliStudi,
Florence,Italy,1954
JOHNJOSEPH’50(1961–1988)
Lewis Audenreid Professor of History
and Archaeology, Emeritus
A.B.,Franklin&MarshallCollege,
1950;M.A.,PrincetonUniversity,
1953;Ph.D.,PrincetonUniversity,
1957
JOSEPHJ.KARLESKY(1970–2016)
The Hon. and Mrs. John C. Kunkel
Professor of Government, Emeritus
A.B.,LaSalleCollege;Ph.D.,
Columbia University
CONRADJ.KASPERSON
(1976–2010)
Emeritus Professor of Management
A.B.,PacicLutheranUniversity,
1962;M.B.A.,PacicLutheran
University,1974;Ph.D.,Rensselaer
PolytechnicInstitute,1976
HOWARDL.KAYE(1982–2016)
Emeritus Professor of Sociology
B.A.,UniversityofPennsylvania;
M.A.,UniversityofChicago;M.A.,
UniversityofPennsylvania;Ph.D.,
UniversityofPennsylvania
FOLKETYKOKIHLSTEDT
(1974–2005)
Emeritus Professor of Art and Art
History
B.A.,DartmouthCollege,1962;M.A.,
UniversityofPennsylvania,1967;
Ph.D.,NorthwesternUniversity,1973
DAVIDB.KING(1965–1996)
Dr. E. Paul and Frances H. Reiff
Professor of Biology, Emeritus
B.S.,UniversityofMassachusetts,
1959;M.A.,Universityof
Massachusetts,1961;Ph.D.,Indiana
University,1965
W.FREDKINSEYIII(1963–1990)
Emeritus Professor of Anthropology
Emeritus Director of the North Museum
A.B.,ColumbiaCollege,1951;M.A.,
ColumbiaUniversity,1953;Ph.D.,
CatholicUniversityofAmerica,1973
DOROTHYLOUISE(1988–2007)
Emeritus Professor of Theatre
B.A.,RosaryCollege,1962;M.A.,
StanfordUniversity,1966;Ph.D.,
StanfordUniversity,1969
VIRGINIAA.MAKSYMOWICZ
(1991–1994;1995–1996;1999-2018)
Emerita Professor of Art
B.A.,BrooklynCollege;M.F.A.,The
UniversityofCalifornia,SanDiego
LAURISA.McKEE(1985–1995)
Emerita Associate Professor and Senior
Research Associate in Anthropology
B.A.,GeorgeWashingtonUniversity,
1972;M.A.,CornellUniversity,1975;
Ph.D.,CornellUniversity,1980
STANLEYJ.MICHALAK,JR.
(1966–2004)
Honorable John C. and Mrs. Kunkel
Professor of Government, Emeritus
A.B.,AlbrightCollege,1960;Ph.D.,
PrincetonUniversity,1967
174 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
RONALDL.MUSSELMAN
(1985–2007)
Emeritus Professor of Chemistry
B.S.CaliforniaStateUniversity,
Fresno,1964;M.S.Universityof
California,Davis,1968;Ph.D.,New
MexicoStateUniversity,1972
MARTHAK.NELSON(1990–2010)
Emerita Associate Professor
of Business
B.A.,GettysburgCollege,1964;M.A.,
UniversityofIowa,1981;Ph.D.,
UniversityofPittsburgh,1989
PATRICIAA.O’HARA(1989–2020)
Emerita Professor of English
B.A.,UniversityofVermont;M.A.,
UniversityofDelaware;Ph.D.,Rutgers
University
D.ALFREDOWENS’72(1978-2018)
Charles A. Dana Professor
of Psychology, Emeritus
A.B.,Franklin&MarshallCollege;
M.S.,PennsylvaniaStateUniversity;
Ph.D.,PennsylvaniaStateUniversity
JAMESC.PETERSON(1970–2016)
Emeritus Associate Professor of Art
B.F.A.,CooperUnion;M.F.A.,
PennsylvaniaStateUniversity
CARLS.PIKE(1971–2012)
Harry W. and Mary B. Huffnagle
Professor of Biology, Emeritus
B.S.,YaleUniversity,1966;M.Phil.,
YaleUniversity,1967;Ph.D.,Harvard
University,1972
P.BRUCEPIPES(1996–2006)
Provost Emeritus
B.A.RiceUniversity,1963;M.S.
StanfordUniversity,1964;Ph.D.
StanfordUniversity,1970
AUSTINJ.RICH(1957–1994)
Emeritus Professor of Chemistry
B.S.BatesCollege,1952;M.S.Purdue
University,1955;Ph.D.Purdue
University,1960
GEORGEM.ROSENSTEIN,JR.
(1967–2002)
Emeritus Professor of Mathematics
B.A.,OberlinCollege,1959;M.A.,
DukeUniversity,1962;Ph.D.,Duke
University,1963
MICHAELA.SEEDS(1970–2003)
John W. Wetzel Professor of Astronomy,
Emeritus
B.S.,UniversityofIllinois,1965;
M.A.,IndianaUniversity,1970;Ph.D.,
IndianaUniversity,1970
JAMESN.SPENCER(1980–2007)
William G. and Elizabeth R. Simeral
Emeritus Professor of Chemistry
B.S.,MarshallUniversity,1963;Ph.D.,
IowaStateUniversity,1967
D.GRIERSTEPHENSON,JR.
(1970–2017)
Emeritus Charles A. Dana Professor
of Government
A.B.,DavidsonCollege;M.A.,
PrincetonUniversity;Ph.D.,Princeton
University
ROBERTS.STERNBERG(1983–
2016)
Emeritus Professor of Geosciences
B.S.,CornellUniversity;M.S.,
UniversityofArizona;Ph.D.,
UniversityofArizona
GLENNL.STEVENS(1995–2007)
Emeritus Associate Professor
of Finance
B.A.,LycomingCollege,1968;
M.B.A.,LoyolaCollege,1977;
M.Fin.,LoyolaCollege,1979;Ph.D.,
PennsylvaniaStateUniversity,1995
CHARLESN.STEWART
(1962–1999)
Charles A. Dana Professor
of Psychology, Emeritus
A.B.,SeattlePacicCollege,1953;
M.S.,UniversityofOregon,1956;
Ph.D.,UniversityofOregon,1962
JEFFREYC.STEINBRINK
(1975–2017)
Emeritus Alumni Professor of English
Literature and Belles Lettres
B.A.,AlleghenyCollege;M.A.,
UniversityofNorthCarolina;Ph.D.,
UniversityofNorthCarolina
PHILLIPH.SUTTER(1964–1997)
Emeritus Professor of Physics
B.S.,YaleUniversity,1952;M.S.,
YaleUniversity,1954;Ph.D.,Yale
University,1959
JAMESM.TAGGART(1971–2012)
Lewis Audenreid Professor of History
and Archaeology, Emeritus
B.A.,UniversityofSouthern
California,1964;M.A.,University
ofSouthernCalifornia,1966;Ph.D.,
UniversityofPittsburg,1971
CHARLESW.TAYLOR(1955–1991)
Assistant Professor of Physical
Educationand Trainer, Emeritus
B.S.,IowaStateCollege,1950;M.A.S.,
UniversityofMaryland,1962
ROGERD.K.THOMAS(1975–2016)
John W. Nevin Memorial Professor
of Geosciences, Emeritus
B.Sc.,ImperialCollege,Universityof
London;M.A.,HarvardUniversity;
Ph.D.,HarvardUniversity
ROGERK.R.THOMPSON
(1976–2014)
Dr. E. Paul and Frances H. Reiff
Professor of Biological Sciences,
Emeritus
B.A.,UniversityofAuckland;M.A.,
UniversityofAuckland;Ph.D.,
University of Hawaii
KATHLEENL.TRIMAN
(1990–2013)
Emerita Professor of Biology
B.A.,UniversityofCalifornia,Los
Angeles;Ph.D.,UniversityofOregon,
1990
DONALDJ.TYRRELL(1967–1996)
Emeritus Professor of Psychology
B.A.,UniversityofConnecticut,1960;
M.A.,UniversityofConnecticut,1962;
Ph.D.,UniversityofConnecticut,1966
ANTHONYJ.UGOLNIK
(1975–2011)
Dr. Elijah E. Kresge Professor
of English, Emeritus
B.A.,WayneStateUniversity,1968;
M.A.,BrownUniversity;Ph.D.,Brown
University,1975
SAMUELWAGNER(1982–2003)
Dr. Clair R. McCollough Professor
of Business Administration, Emeritus
B.A.,TrinityCollege,1961;M.A.,
TempleUniversity,1964;Ph.D.,
UniversityofPennsylvania,1971
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 175
SARAHM.WHITE(1976–1999)
Emerita Professor
of French and Italian
B.A.,RadcliffeCollege,1958;M.A.,
UniversityofMichigan,1968;Ph.D.,
UniversityofMichigan,1973
WILLIAME.WHITESELL
(1965–2003)
Henry P. and Mary B. Stager Professor
of Economics, Emeritus
B.A.,DavidsonCollege,1960;Ph.D.,
UniversityofTexas,1963
ROBERTA.WIEBE(1966–2007)
Emeritus Professor of Geosciences
B.S.,StanfordUniversity,1961;M.S.,
UniversityofWashington,1963;Ph.D.,
StanfordUniversity,1966
CLAUDEH.YODER’62
(1966–2016)
Charles A. Dana Professor
of Chemistry, Emeritus
A.B.,Franklin&MarshallCollege;
Ph.D.,CornellUniversity
CECILEC.ZORACH(1984–2015)
Emerita Professor of German
B.A.,OberlinCollege;M.A.,
UniversityofMassachusetts;Ph.D.,
PrincetonUniversity
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 177
Index
Abbreviations(Keyto) ................................ 15
AcademicAdvising(seeAdvising) ............ 127
Academic Calendar .................................. vi–ix
Academic Grades
appealofgrade......................................143
gradechange..........................................143
gradingsystem.......................................142
incompletegrade...................................142
pass/nopassoption................................137
privacyof...............................................142
rankinclass...........................................142
reportsof...............................................142
returnofwork........................................141
AcademicHonesty......................................129
AcademicPerformance...............................134
AcademicPolicies,
petitions for exceptions to .................... 138
AcademicProcess,disruptionsof .............. 130
AcademicProgress ..................................... 134
AcademicStandards ................................... 134
AcceptableUsePolicy,technology ............ 149
AccommodationforDisabilities ................ 156
Accreditation ................................................. .ii
Acting,coursesin(seeTheatreandDance
) ...119
Adding Courses .......................................... 136
Additional Educational Opportunities
andResources ............................... 127,139
Admission to the College ........................... 150
AdvancedPlacementcredit,transferof ..... 146
Advising
academic ............................................... 127
international study .................................... 4
off-campusstudy ...................................... 4
Writing Center. ........................................... 128
AfricanaStudies ........................................... 15
AmericanStudies ......................................... 18
AnimalBehavior(seeBiological
FoundationsofBehavior). ...................... 32
Anthropology ............................................... 21
AppealofaGradebyStudents
(seeAcademicGrades) ......................... 143
AppealsProcess
for exceptions to academic policies ..... 138
for change of grade ............................... 143
Application for Admission ......................... 150
Application to Graduate ............................. 131
Arabic Language .......................................... 24
Archaeology(Anthropological) ................... 21
Archaeology(Classical) ............................... 44
ArchitectureStudies,programsin
(seeArtandArtHistory) ........................ 25
Art and Art History ...................................... 25
ArtStudio(seeArtandArtHistory) ............ 25
AssessmentofInstructionbyStudents.......148
Astronomy
(seePhysicsandAstronomy) ....................... 92
Astrophysics(seePhysicsandAstronomy)...92
AttendanceatClass.....................................138
AuditingCourses........................................138
BachelorofArtsDegree..............................131
Biochemistry
(seeBiologyandChemistry)............35,41
Bioinformatics(seeBiology
andComputerScience).....................35,47
BiologicalFoundationsofBehavior.............32
Biology..........................................................35
BoardofTrustees........................................158
BoardofTrustees,ExOfcio.....................159
BoardofTrustees,Emeriti..........................159
Business,OrganizationsandSociety............39
Calendar(seeAcademicCalendar)...........vi-ix
CampusVisitandInterview........................149
Center for Liberal Arts and
Society(CLAS) .................................... 128
CenterforOpinionResearch......................128
CenterforPoliticsandPublicAffairs.........128
ChangesinaRecordedGrade....................143
Chemistry......................................................41
ChineseLanguage.........................................43
Class Attendace .......................................... 138
ClassScheduling ........................................ 135
Classics(incl.GreekandLatin) ................... 44
Collaborative Opportunities ....................... 127
College Graduation Honors ....................... 132
CollegeHouseSystem .................................. iv
CollegeLevelExaminationProgram
(CLEP) ................................................. 147
Commencement ......................................... 133
CommunicationwithStudents ................... 131
CommunityandPublicServiceOpportunities
(seeWareInstitute
forCivicEngagement)......................127
Community-BasedLearning
Seminars................................................141
ComparativeLiteraryStudies.......................46
ComputerScience.........................................47
Computing at Franklin & Marshall
(seeInformationTechnology) .............. 149
Concentration..................................................3
Connections 1..................................................1
Connections 2..................................................1
Connections1Seminars..................................7
Connections2Seminars..................................9
CooperativeProgramsofStudy..................128
CopyrightedMaterials,useof.....................130
CourseCreditOverloads.............................136
CourseCreditSystem.................................131
CourseLoad(seeFull-Time/
Part-TimeStatus)...................................136
CourseOfferings.............................................7
CourseRegistrationandCredit...................135
CourseRepeatPolicy..................................137
CreativeWriting(seeEnglish) ..................... 57
CreditbyExamination................................144
Credit,transferof........................................144
Curriculum......................................................1
DanaScholars.............................................134
DanceProgram
(seeTheatreandDance .........................119
Dean’sList(seealsoHonorsList)..............133
Degree
applicationfor.......................................131
requirementsfor....................................131
DegreeAudits..............................................131
DepartmentandProgramOfferings ............. 15
DepartmentalorProgramHonors .............. 132
DirectedReadings(seealsoDepartmental
andprogramlistings) ............................ 139
178 FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG
Disabilities,appealsfor .............................. 156
accommodations for ................................... 156
DisclaimerStatement ..................................... ii
DramaandDramaticLiterature
(seeTheatreandDance) ........................119
EarlyCompletionofDegree ...................... 141
EarlyDecision ............................................ 150
Earth and Environment ................................ 49
Economics .................................................... 54
EducationRecords(seeFamily
EducationalRights&PrivacyAct) ...... 153
EducationalSupportServices .................... 127
Electives ......................................................... 4
Engineering, preparation for careers in ...... 128
English ......................................................... 57
EnvironmentalScience
(seeEarthandEnvironment ................... 49
EnvironmentalScienceManagement
andPolicy,
preparation for careers in .................. 129
EnvironmentalStudies
(seeEarthandEnvironment) .................. 49
Evaluation and Grades ............................... 141
Examinations
nal ....................................................... 143
prociency ............................................ 144
ExchangePrograms ................................... 141
Exploration: Liberal Learning ........................ 2
Faculty ................................................ 161–172
Faculty, Emeriti .................................. 172–175
FamilyEducationalRights&PrivacyAct
(FERPA) ............................................... 153
Fees(seeTuitionandFees) ........................ 152
Film and Media
(seeArt,ArtHistoryandFilm) ............... 25
Final Examinations .................................... 143
Financial Aid .............................................. 151
FloydInstituteforPublicPolicy ................ 128
FrenchandFranchophoneStudies. .............. 62
Full-timeStatus .......................................... 136
GeneralEducationRequirements .................. 1
Geosciences
(seeEarthandEnvironment) .................. 49
GermanandGermanStudies ....................... 65
Government .................................................. 67
Grades ........................................................ 142
GradeReports ............................................ 142
GraduationRate. ........................................ 132
GraduationRequirements .......................... 131
Greek(seeClassics) ..................................... 44
Guidelines for International
andOff-CampusStudy ............................. 5
Hebrew(seeItalianStudiesandHebrew) .... 76
HighSchool,collegecreditstakenin ........ 146
History.......................................................... 70
History of the College ................................... iv
HomeSchooledStudents ........................... 151
HonorSocieties .......................................... 133
Honors
college graduation................................. 132
departmental or program ...................... 132
interdisciplinary .................................... 133
HonorsList(seealsoDean’sList) ............. 133
IncompleteGrades(seeAcademic
Grades)..................................................142
IndependentStudy(seealsoDepartmental
andprogramlistings) ............................ 140
InformationTechnologyServices .............. 149
InstitutionalProceduresRelatingto
FamilyEducationRights
PrivacyAct(FERPA) ...................... 153
TitleIXoftheEducation
Amendmentsof197 ......................... 153
ResidentialLearning ..................................... iv
InternationalandOff-CampusStudy ............. 4
guidelines ................................................. 5
statement of philosophy ........................... 4
InternationalBaccalaureate ........................ 147
InternationalRelations,coursesin
(seeGovernment) ................................... 67
InternationalStudies.....................................75
Internships
for academic credit ............................... 140
Interviews for Admission ........................... 150
ItalianStudies. .............................................. 76
Japanese Language ....................................... 79
Joint Major ............................................. 3,138
JudaicStudies ............................................... 80
LanguageStudy(Exploration)
Requirement ............................................. 2
Latin(seeClassics) ...................................... 44
LeavePolicy ............................................... 147
LeavesofAbsence......................................147
LeserandNissleyStudent/Faculty
Partnership ............................................ 127
Liberal Learning ............................................. 2
Linguistics .................................................... 83
Major, the ............................................... 3,138
Management,coursesin(seeBusiness
Organizations,andSociety) ................... 39
Marshall Fellows ........................................ 151
Mathematics ................................................. 84
Millersville University ............................... 141
Minor,the(seealsoDepartmentaland
programlistings)...............................3,139
Mission of the College .................................. iv
MolecularBiology(SeeBiology) ................ 35
Music............................................................ 86
courses .................................................... 86
scholars ................................................. 150
NationalMeritScholars ............................. 151
NaturalSciencesRequirement ....................... 2
Neuroscience(seeBiologicalFoundations
ofBehavior) ............................................ 32
Nondiscrimination,statementofpolicyon .... ii
Non-TraditionallyEducatedStudents ........ 151
Non-WesternCulturesRequirement .............. 3
Part-timeStatus .......................................... 136
Pass/NoPassOption .................................. 137
PatentPolicy .............................................. 130
Payment ...................................................... 153
Petitionsandappeals .................................. 138
PhiBetaKappa .......................................... 133
Philosophy.................................................... 90
Physics..........................................................92
Plagiarism...................................................129
Policies,exceptionto..................................138
Preceptorships ............................................ 127
Privacy
of academic grades ............................... 142
of education records ............................. 153
ProciencyExaminations .......................... 144
Psychology ................................................... 94
PublicHealth ................................................ 98
PublicPolicy .............................................. 100
FRANKLIN & MARSHALL COLLEGE 2020–2021 CATALOG 179
RankinClass(seeEvaluation
andGrades). ......................................... 142
ReadmissionPolicy .................................... 148
RefundPolicy ............................................. 147
RegistrationProcedure. .............................. 135
RehabilitationActof1973. ........................ 156
ReligiousStudies ....................................... 102
RepeatofaCourse ..................................... 137
RevocationofDegree ................................ 133
RouseScholars ........................................... 134
Russian ....................................................... 104
Scholarships ............................................... 151
Science,Technology,andSociety .............. 106
ScienticandPhilosophicalStudies
of Mind ................................................. 108
SeniorStaffoftheCollege ......................... 160
Sociology ....................................................114
Spanish ........................................................116
SpecialEducationalOpportunities ............ 139
SpecialStudies ....................................... 3,138
StatementofNondiscrimination .................... ii
Student-FacultyCollaboration ................... 127
StudyAbroad(seeInternationaland
Off-CampusStudy) .................................. 4
Summer/StudyTravelAwards ....................... 5
SummerSessions2021 .................................. x
Technology, acceptable use policy ............. 149
Theatre ........................................................119
TheatreandDance ......................................119
TitleIXInstitutionalProcedures ................ 153
Transcripts, academic ................................. 142
TransferofCreditPolicies..........................144
TransferStudents,admissionof..................151
TuitionandFees..........................................152
Tutorials ..................................................... 139
Ware Institute for Civic Engagement ......... 127
Withdrawal, Leave, and
ReadmissionPolicies ........................ 147
Withdrawal
f
romacourse(withorwithoutrecord)
.. 136
from the College ................................... 147
WithholdingandRevocationofDegree ..... 133
Women’s,GenderandSexualityStudies ... 122
Writing Center ............................................ 128